r ^-t inn 



'MC 



:,'^i-^ 







w4%' ,■■■:"■:••■:.•.,:■ 

•|iK'''V;>.v;,', ■■'■■•: 
I '•^■•■•■■!xr^>':Aw-:',; ■:■'•,•.• 




v,*,',; v-v.v 









w:^^ 








PRKSH:^i-:irt3^*''"^ 



NEW METHOD U •^- ^ f 

OP LEARNING 

THE FRENCH LANGUAGE; 

EMBRACING BOTH THE 

^nalstic arib gsntljetk illobes of Instruction; 

BEING 

A PLAIN AND PRACTICAL WAY OP ACQUIRING THE ARl? 

OF 

READmO. SPEAKIl^G, AKD COMPOSIi^G FRENCH. 

ON THE PLAN OF WOODBUET'S METHOD WITH GEEMAN. 

By LOUIS FASQUELLE, LL.D. 

PBOFE880R OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE JN THE UNIVEE8ITT OP 

MICHIGAN, CORRESPONDING MEMBER OF THE NATIONAL INSTITUTE, 

A0THOB OF " JUVENILE FRENCH COURSE," " THE COLLOQUIAL 

rjSENCH READER," "MANUAL OF FRENCH 

CONVERSATION," ETC. 

Autant da langues on parle, autant de fois on est homme. — Charlks V. 



BEVISED AND IMPROVED, 



NEW YOEK: 

lYISQN, PHINNEY, BLAKEMAN & CO., 

CHICAGO : S. C. GRIGGS & CO. 

1865. 



p 



"We have published for the use of Teachers, 

" A Key to the Exercises in Fasquelle's New French 

Method, with occasional Notes and References to the Rules, by 

Louis Fasquelle, LL.D., etc." Price The " Key" can be 

sent by mail, by sending the publishers the price in P. O. stamps. 

IvisQN, Phinney & Co., 48 & 50 Walker St. 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, by 
LOUIS FASQUELLE 
In the Clerk's OflSce of the District Court of the United States for the 
District of Michigan. 



Gift 
JoUge and Mrs. Isaac R.Httt 
Jufy 3. 1933 



BLECTROTY FED BY 
MITH <fc McDoUGAL, 
82 & 84 BBEKMAN-ST. 



TO 

AND LITEKATUKE, 

THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES, 

IS MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED. 



AMERICAN EDUCATIONAL SERIES. 



A COURSE OF PRACTICAL AND PROGRESSIVE 
SCHOOL AND COLLEGE TEXT BOOKS; 

IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OFFICIALLY ADOPTED BY THE 

STATE SUPERLNTENDENTS OF PUBLIC mSTEUCTION 
AND BOARDS OF EDUCATION, 

IN NBABLT KVEEY STATE WHERE ANY OrFIOIAL EXAMINATION AND ADOPTIOW 

HAS BEEN MADE. 

FIFTEEN MILLIONS 

have been sold, and the circulation is steadily increasing. They are also 
oflBcially commended and principally used in the PUBLIC SCHOOLS of 
New York, Philadelphia, and many other large cities, and in the principal 
NORMAL SCHOOLS throughout' the Union. 

They are recommended by TWENTY EDUCATIONAL JOURNALS, 
and by One Hundred and Fifty other most respectable Journals — Lite- 
rary, Religious, etc. 

Prom Superintendents of States, Counties, and Cities, from Presidenta 
and Professors of Colleges, and from Teachers and Practical Educators, 
and the Press throughout the Union, we have 

OVES 200 ROYAL OCTAVO PAGES OF TESTIMONIALS 
to the superior merit of these Books, selections from which will be sent 
free, on apphcation. 

THE SERIES EMBRACES 

SANDERS' NEW READERS, SPELLERS, ETC. 

EOBINSON'S COMPLETE SERIES OF MATHEMATICS. 
THOMSON^S PRACTICAL ARITHMETICS. 
WILLSON'S HISTORICAL SERIES. 

WELLS' (D. A.) SCIENTIFIC SERIES. 
WELLS' (W. H.) GRAMMARS. Revised. 
COLTON & FITCH'S GEOGRAPHIES. 

GRAY'S (ASA) BOTANIES. Graded. 2,500 cuts. 

BRADBURY'S SCHOOL MUSIC BOOKS. 10 book* 
FASQUELLE'S FRENCH SERIES. 
WOODBURY'S GERMAN SERIES. 

HITCHCOCK'S ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 
HITCHCOCK'S NEW GEOLOGY. 

SPENCERIAN PENMANSHIP. New edition. 9 books. 
O'DONNELL'S PENMANSHIP. 8 books. 

BRYANT & STR.iTTON'S BOOKKEEPING. 

SCHUSTER'S DRAWING BOOKS— beautifully engraved- 
IVI90N & PHINNEY'S SCHOOL RECORDS, DIA- 
RIES, REGISTERS, ETC., ETC., ETC. 

1^" DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE and CIRCULARS, with matter 
interesting to Teachers, descriptions of books, notices, testimonials, prices, 
etc., sent free, on request. 
5^" Liberal Terms for Specimen Copies and first supplies for Schools. 

IVISON, PHINNEY & CO., Publishers, 
48 & 50 Walker St., New York, 



PREFACE. 



The universality of tlie Frencli language furnishes sufficient 
proof of its utility. Througliout Europe, in many parts of Asia, 
Africa, and America, no education is complete without a knowl- 
edge of that tongue, which in more than one country of Europe 
is emphatically called " the language.^'' Its merits are becoming 
so well appreciated in this country, that it is almost unnecessary 
to particularize them, to speak of its unsurpassed precision and 
clearness, and of its capability of expressing every idea, in the 
most laconic and in the most ornamental style. The language 
of France, that happy compound of the Celtic, the Romanic and 
the Teutonic elements, is equally adapted to the lightest litera- 
ture and to the most profound diction of science. The rich 
mines of French literature, too long but imperfectly known here, 
offer in every department of knowledge treasures equal to those 
presented by the literature of any other nation. 

Many works have been published in this country and in Eng- 
land to facilitate the acquisition of the French language ; but 
during his more than twenty years' practice in teaching the 
modern languages, the author of this volume has in vain looked 
for the appearance of a book which, like several of the French 
grammars published in Germany, should unite in due propor- 
tions theory and practice. To the high merits of several of the 
theoretical grammars he bears his most cheerful testimony ; yet, 
the student might go through them, and know but little of the 
idiomatic or practical part of the language. Several of the 
practical works, though well executed according to the plans 
which their authors had laid, neglect grammatical rules, if not 
entirely, at least far too much ; and the student may, after hav- 
ing devoted a long time to the mere memorizing of sentences, 



Vl PEE PACE. 

find himself in possession of a number of set phrases, valuable, 
it is true, but from -wbich, destitute of landmarks, the slightest 
deviation must lead him into unknown regions. 

A work which, uniting practice with theory, should attempt 
to avoid the difficulties mentioned above, had been long contem*- 
plated by the author of these pages, when " Woodbury's Ne\<^ 
Method with the German" made its appearance. Finding it 
that work the two systems, the analytic and the synthetic, beau* 
tifuUy blended and well elaborated, he had no hesitation in 
adopting the general plan of Mr. Woodbury's Grammar, in pre- 
paring his long intended treatise on the French. 

The work commences with a comprehensive treatise on pro- 
nunciation. The power of the letters, as initials, medials and 
finals, is fully explained under the different letters. Peculiar 
care has been taken to render this part sufficiently full, in order 
to provide the student with a satisfactory guide and adviser, in 
the principal difficulties of the French pronunciation. The words 
presenting peculiarities of pronunciation are placed as excep- 
tions to the rules given in this part. 

In the commencement of the First Part of this grammar, the 
rules are given in the most simple form, and the idioms are 
gradually introduced and explained ; copious references to the 
Second, or more theoretical Part, render further information 
easily attainable. After the rules of every lesson, comes a 
BfisuM^ OF EXAMPLES in illustration of them, as also of preced- 
ing ones, containing often new idioms and conversational phrases. 
The examples on the rules, the resumes, and the French exer- 
cises to be rendered into English and consisting almost entirely 
of questions and answers, combine, it is thought, all the benefits 
presented by the practical grammars, while the rules in the 
lessons, and the ease with which reference may be had to the 
Second Part, present all the advantages of the theoretical treat- 
ises. It will be easily seen that the teacher and student will 
find here the practice^ with as little or as much of the theory as 
they may desire. 

The grammatical rules and idioms are introduced gradually, 
so as not to offer too many difficulties at once. Care has been 
taken not to present the rules as abstract and arbitrary laws \ 



PREFACE. Vii 

while tlie resemblance or diflference of construction between tbe 
two languages is carefully pointed out. 

Exercises to be rendered into French are placed at the end of 
every lesson. The materials for these are found in the exam- 
ples to the rules, in the resumes, in the French exercises and in 
the vocabularies preceding the same. Besides all this, the stu- 
dent is furnished with the means of carrying on, in connection 
with the regular course already indicated, a series of exercises 
in French composition, at once easy, interesting, and profitable 
in the highest degree. 

The grouping of the tenses of the verbs and the classification 
of the irregularities, will, it is hoped, simplify this part of gram- 
mar. In the former, the student will see that by learning a 
tense in one conjugation, he often learns it in the others ; in the 
latter, he will perceive that the deviations of the irregular verbs 
are often very trifling and confined to particular tenses. 

An attempt is made in the ^'■Practical JResumes,''^ Lessons 98 
and 99, to simplify as much as possible the somewhat complex 
subject of the past participle. 

The rules of the Second, or theoretical Part, are deduced 
from the most reliable sources ; they are nearly all illustrated by 
short extracts from the best French authors. This will, it is 
hoped, while giving classical authority to the rules, inspire the 
student with a desire of becoming more intimately acquainted 
with the authors from whose works the examples are taken. It 
will be perceived, also, that the sentiments contained in the ex- 
tracts have not been overlooked. 

In the Second Part, the verbs are given in their fullest form. 
The irregular, defective, peculiar (See § 49), and unipersonal 
verbs are placed alphabetically. 

The author would here respectfully suggest, not with a view 
of offering advice to experienced teachers, but as a mode which 
he has found beneficial in practice, that the student commence 
to learn the verbs from the paradigms in the Second Part, as soon 
as he has acquired some little knowledge of the pronunciation, 
and this simultaneously with his learning the lessons of the First 
Part. The verbs, in the French, and in the other so called 
Romanic languages, are more complicated and require more 



Vm PREFACE. 

study than tlie verbs in tlie German and otter Teutonic lan- 
guages. Having, in this manner, acquired some knowledge of 
the verbs, the student will, by the time he, in his progress 
through the first part, reaches the groupings of the tenses men- 
tioned above, be able to recognize the verbs as old friends, and 
better to appreciate the classification of the irregularities. This 
course is advised not as indispensable, but as beneficial. 

The reading lessons, in prose and in verse, extracted from the 
best sources, and containing grammatical references to both 
parts of the work, will not be unacceptable to the student. A 
vocabulary for these lessons is placed immediately after them. 

Among the numerous works which have been consulted dur- 
ing the preparation of this grammar, the author would mention 
with gratitude the labors of the French Academy, Laveaux, 
Lemare, Bescher, Girault-Duvivier, Boniface, Bescherelle, 
Landais, etc. 

With a sinceie hope that the present volume may assist the 
American student in obtaining a knowledge of the beautiful 
language of France, it is respectfully submitted. 



The numerous editions of this grammar which have been 
issued, having rendered a renewal of the stereotype plates neces- 
sary, the Author has taken this opportunity of giving to the 
work a thorough review, and, without changing the arrangement, 
of introducing such improvements as the kind suggestions of 
several experienced Instructors, and its use in his own classes, 
for nearly ten years, have pointed out to him as desirable. 

L. F. 

Univeesity of MicmoAN, ) 
Ann Arbor, May, 1860. ) 



GENERAL INDEX. 



A (a), PREP. § 142, (2). 

Abbreviations, p. 28 L. 

Accents, Lesson 2. 

Acheter, to buy, § 49, (5) ; its gov- 
ernment, L. 50, 1. 

Accorder, s,' to agree; said also of 
watches, L. 92, 3. 

Active verb, § 43, (2), (3.) 

Active Voice, used in French in 
cases where the passive is used in 
Enghsh, L. 35, 2 ; L. 46, 3 ; § 128, 
(5.); §113,(1.) 

Adjectives, g 14-1. Quahfying 
adjectives, § 14-2. Degrees of 
signification, § 14-2. Gender 
and number of, § 1 5. Formation 
of feminine of, § 16, L, 13. Irregu- 
lar adjectives, § 16, (8.) Adjectives 
having no feminine, § 16, (9.) 
Plural of, § 17, L. 14. Agree- 
ment of adjectives with nouns, 
§ 18 ; § 83 ; L. 13, L. 14. Relat- 
ing to several nouns, § 18, (3); 
L. 14, 1, 2. Determining adjec- 
tives, § 19. Demonstrative, L. 9 ; 
§ 20; § 93. Possessive, L. 9; 
§ 21; § 94; Remarks on, § 95. 
Agree with object possessed, § 21, 
(2) ; L. 9, 3. Numeral adjectives, 
§ 22, L. 19 ; place of, § 96. Car- 
dinal adjectives, § 22, (1), (2), (4) ; 
Variations of, § 23 ; Observation 
on, § 24. Ordinal numbers, § 23, 
(3), (5). Observation on, § 25. 
Indefinite adjectives, § 30 ; § 97. 
Verbal adjectives, syntax ofj § 65. 
Remarks on feu, nu. See., § 84. 
Adjectives used adverbially, § 67, 
(3) ; § 84, (5). Place of adjec- 
tives, L. 15 ; § 85 ; § 86. Adjec- 
tives preceding noun, § 85, (11). 
Adjectives differing in meaning 
before and after, § 86. Regi- 
men or government of, § 87 ; 
§ 88 ; § 89 ; § 92 ; L. 79. Ad- 
jectives requiring a different pre- 
position in French and English, 
§90. 

Adverbs, § 67. Formed from adjec- 
tives, § 68. Degrees of significa- 
tion, § 69. Adverbs forming a 



comparison of themselves, § 70. 
Syntax of, § 136. Place of; § 136; 
L. 34; L. 41. Observation on, 
§ 137. Adverbs of negation, 
§ 138. Adverbs of quantity fol- 
lowed by de, L. 18. 

A droite, to the right, L. 70, 6. 

A gauche, to the left, L. 70, 6. 

A fleur de, even with, L. 80, 2. 

A force de, by dint of, L. 80, 2. 

A regard de, with regard to, L. 80, 2. 

A raison de, at the rate of, L. 80, 2. 

Au dehors, outside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dedans, inside, L. 80, 2. 

Au deU, beyond, L. 80, 2. 

Age, avoir used for, L. 20, 6. 

A la campagne, in the country^ 
L. 34, 8. 

A la cbasse, hunting, L. 34, 8. 

A la peche, fishing, L. 34, 8. 

A I'anglaise, a la fran(;aise, after the 
English, Fr^ench fashions, L. 69,3. 

A I'ecole, at school ; a I'eghse, at 
church, L. 25, 6. 

A I'endroit, right side out ; a I'en- 
vers, wrong side out, L. 69, 1. 

A I'insu, unknown to, L. 82. 

Alphabet, L. 1. 

Aller, to go, used for proximate fu- 
ture, L. 26, 1. Aller trouver, to 
go to, L. 26, 3. S'en aller, to go 
away, L. 40 ; 1, 2; L. 47, 1. 
Aller, to fit, to sit, L. 47, 2. Aller 
a pied, a cheval, en voiture, to 
walk, ride, go in a carriage, L. 62, 
Examples. 

Amis (un de mes), a friend of mine^ 
L. 67, 3. 

Amuser, (s',)fo take pleasure in, etc., 
L. 38, 6. 

Analogy between many French and 
English words, § 147. 

Answers in French should be ex- 
plicit, L. 24, 12. 

Apporter, amener, to bring, carry, 
L. 44, 6. 

Approcher, (s',) to draw near, L. 
39, 6. 

Articles, § 13 ; L. 4, 1, 2. Elision 
of, L. 4, 2; § 13, (7); § 146. 
Contraction of, § 13, (8); L. 5, 1 ; 



GENERAL INDEX. 



L. 25, 6. English article a or 
aw, § 14, (9). Recapitulation of 
articles, § 13. Syntax of, § 77. 
Use of; § 77, (1), (2), (3), etc. Be- 
fore words used in partitive sense, 
§ 78, (2), (3), (4). (5), (6), (7); 
§ 13,(10); L. 6. 1; L. 7, 5 ; L. 8, 
4; L. 12, 3; L. 29, 8. Article 
used before words in general sense, 
and abstract nouns, § 77, (1), (2); 
L. 8, 2, 3 ; L. 23, 11 ; L. 29 and 
30. ArtlL'le omitted before num- 
ber of a sovereign, L. 30, 3. 
Article le used before parts of the 
body, L. 63, 5. Use of article in- 
stead of possessive adjective, 
§ 77, (9); L. 37, 1; L. 63, 5; 
L. 66, 3. Repetition of, § 80. 
Remarks on the use o^ § 81. 
Idioms in which the article is 
omitted, § 82. 

Aspirate H, L. 3, p. 25. H not 
aspirate in heroine, etc., L. 3, 
p. 25, note. 

Asseoir, (s',) to sit down, L. 36, 4. 

Assez, enough, its place, L. 34, 3. 

Aujourd'hui, to-day, its place, L. 
41, 5. 

Aq Jieu de, instead of, L. 35, 4. 

Au revoir, till I see you again, L. 
89, 4. 

Auxiliary verbs, § 43, (8); L. 43, 
§ 46. Use of, § 46. Paradigms 
of, § 47. 

Avancer, to gain, said of clocks, etc., 
L. 92, 1. 

Avant, before, prep. § 142, (1). 

Avoir, to have, used idiomatically 
with quelque chose, chaud, froid, 
etc., L. 8, 1. With couiume, hesoin, 
efc., L. 21,4. Used for the day 
of the month, L. 19, 6 ; for age, 
L. 20, 6. Avoir lieu, to take place, 
L. 35, 3. Avoir mal, to have a 
jpain, etc., L. 66, 1. Avoir des dou- 
leurs, L. 66, 2. Avoir, to hold, 
L. 66, 3. Avoir chaud aux mains, 
L. 66, 3. Avoir beau, to be in vain, 
L. 67, 1. Avoir, used for dimen- 
sion, size, L. 68, 1. Avoir, nega- 
tively, § 47, (2). Interrogatively, 
§ 47, (3). Interrogatively and 
negatively, § 47, (4). 

Beatj, bel, handsome, fine, L. 13, 6. 

Capitaj^s, us© off § 145. 



Cardinal numbers, § 22, (2); § 24. 
Variations of, § 23. Use of, after 
names of sovereigns, L. 30, 3 ; 
§ 26, (3). For the day of the 
month, § 26, (1). 

Cases, § 2. 

Ce, demons, prn. § 37, (6) ; § 108 ; 
§ 116; L. 81. Used for he, she, 
before etre, L. 82, 1. C'est moi, 
L. 81, 1. 

— , demons, adj., § 20, (1) ; L. 10, 1, 2. 

CediUa, L. 3, 6. 

Ce que, what, L. 31, 4. 

Celui qui, he who, L. 81, 4. 

Chacun, each one, § 41, (2). 

Chaque, each, § 30, (4). 

Changer d'habit, to change one's coat; 
changer de maison, to move, L. 58, 
1. Changer, to exchange, L. 58, 2. 

Chez, prep, at the house of § 142, 
(3);L. 24, 9. 

CoUective nouns, § 3, (5), (6). Num- 
ber of verbs after collective nouns, 
L. 85. 

Collocation of words, § 144. 

Combien de temps, how long ; com- 
bien de fois ? how often ? L. 44, 1. 
Combien y a-t-il ? hx)w far ? how 
long since? L. 57, 4. 

Comparison of adjectives and ad- 
verbs, L. 16; L. 17. 

Composing French, plan of exercises 
for, p. 103 ; list of words for, p. 271. 

Compound nouns, § 3, (7). § 9 ; L. 
59. Gender of, § 5, (15). 

Conditional mode, § 45, 2d, (3). 
Use of, § 125. Formation and 
termination ofj L. 62, 1, 2. Irre- 
gularities of, L. 62, 4. Not used 
after si, if L. 62, 6; §125. 

Conjugation of verbs. First conju- 
gation, paradigm, § 48. Peculiari- 
ties of some verbs, § 49. Second 
conjugation, paradigm, § 50. 
Third conjugation, paradigm, § 
51. PecuHarities of verbs of 
third conjugation, § 49; § 52. 
Fourth conjugation, paradigm, § 
.53. Passive verbs, paradigm, § 54. 
Rule, § 55. Reflective verbs, para- 
digm, § 56. Negative form of, 
§ 57. Interrogative form, § 58. 
Interrogative and negative form, 
§ 59. Unipersonal verbs, para- 
digm, § 61, 2. Terminations of 
regular verbs, § 60. Table of 
irregular verbs, § 62. 



GENERAL INDEX 



XI 



Connaitre, to he acquainted with, It. 

30, 6. Connaitre quelqu'un a la 
voix, to know some one by the voice, 
L. 87, 4. Connaitre de vue, to 
know by sight, etc., L. 87, 5. Se 
connaitre a. to be a judge of, L. 
87, 6. 

Conjunctions, § 13. Lists of, § 73, 
(2). Syntax of, § 143. Govern- 
ment of, § 127 ; § 143. Requir- 
ing subjunctive, § 143, (2); infin- 
itive, § 143, (1); conditional or 
indicative, § 143, (3); si, if, § 125, 
(3) ; L. 62, 6. Examples of con- 
junctions, L. 100. 

Consonants, L. 3. 

Convenir, to be becoming, L. 49, 2. 

Coucher (se), to retire, to go to bed, L. 
37, 5. 

Dans, prep, in, § 142, (2). 

Davantage, more, L. 16, note. 

Day of month, v^^eek, not preceded 

by preposition, L. 26, 10. 
Degrees of comparison of adjectives, 

L. 16; L. 17. 
Demain, to-morrow, its place, L. 41,5. 
Demander, to ask, its government, 

L. 50, 1. 
Demettre (se), le bras, etc., to dislo- 
cate one's arm, etc., L. 93, 1. To 

resign a place, L. S3, 2. 
Demonstrative adjective, § 20. See 

Adjective. 
Demonstrative pronoun, § 36. See 

Pronoun. 
Depecher (se), to make haste, L. 40, T. 
Devant, prep, before, § 142, (1). 
Devenir, to become, L. 85, 5. 
Devoir, to owe, expressing future, 

obligation, L. 35, 5. 
Dimension, etc., L. 68. 
Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2, p. 19. 
Dont, prn. of whom, of which, L. 

31, 8. 

Elision, § 146. Of article, L. 4, 2; 

§ 13, (7). Of pronounce, L. 4, 5. 

Of preposition de, L. 6, 3. Of ne, 

L. 7, 3. Of pronouns le, la, L. 

9, 2. 
Eloigner (s'), ".ogo from, to leave, L. 

89, 6. 
Emparer, [r]), to seize, to lay hold of, 

L. 93, 3. 
Empecher, (s'), to help, to prevent 

one's self L. 93, 4. 



Emporter, Emmener, io take away^ 
L. 44, 6. 

En, pronoun, § 39, (17); § 95, (5); 
§ 110; § 103, (1); § 104; L. 
15, 7 ; L. 22, 3. Before a past 
participle, § 135, (7); L. 42, 11, 
12. Used instead of possessive 
adjective, § 95, (5); L. 96, 1, 2. 

En, prep. § 142, (2) ; L. 34, 5, 6, T. 

Encore, more, etc., L. 17, 3. 

Endormir (s'), to fall asleep, L. 39, 5. 

Ennuyer, to weary, L. 38, 4. S'en- 
nuyer, to become weary, L. 38, 5. 

Entendre parler, to hear about, of, L. 
35, 7. 

Entendre, to understand, L. 96, 3. 
Se faire entendre, to make one^s 
self understood,L. 9Q, 4. Followed 
by another verb, L. 97, 4. 

Envoyer chercher, to send for, L. 
26, 6. 

Epouser, io marry, said only of par- 
ties, L. 67, 2. 

Essayer, to try on, L. 47, 4. 

Est-ce que, prefixed to the verb, § 
98; L. 25. 

l^tre, conjugation o^ § 4*1, (5). 
Number of etre after ce, § 116. 
Used for aller, to go, L. 43, 5. For 
to belong, L. 47, 5 ; L. 91, 2. £tre 
riche de, to be worth, L. 49, 5. 
£tre en retard, to be late, and 
other idioms with etre, L. 91, 1. 
Y etre, io be at home, in, L. 91, 3. 

Euphonic t, L. 4, 6. 

£veiller (s'), to awake. L. 39, 5. 

Every day, tows les jours, L. 26, 8. 

Exercises in composing French, 
p. 270. 

Facher (se), to be or become angry, 
L. 40, 4. 

Faire, before another verb, to cause, 
io have, L. 32, 3, 4 ; L. 97, 4. 
Faire faire, to have made, L. 32, 4; 
L. 63, 1. Faire raccommoder, io 
have mended. Faire la cuisine, 
faire cuire, to cook. Faire bouilUr, 
to boil, L. 63, 1. Faire peur, to 
frighten; faire attention, to pay 
attention; faire tort, to injure; 
faire du mal, io hurt, L. 63, 3. 

, used unipersonally, in speak- 
ing of the weather, L, 33, 5. 

Falloir, to be necessary, L. 48. 

Feminine terminations, § 6, (2), (3), 

Feu, adj., late, § 84, (1). 



xu 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Future absolute, § 45, (2). Use of, 
§ 124. Formation of, § 61 ; L. 60, 
1, 2, 3. Irregularities of, L. 61, 

1, 2, 3, 4. Future anterior, § 45, 
(2), 8. Use of, § 124. Forma- 
tion oi^ L. 60, 4. Future used in 
French where the present is used 
in English, L. 61, 5, 

Gender, § 4, By the meaning, § 5. 

By the termination, § 6. 
Gener, to incommode, trouble, etc., L. 

83, 5. Se gener, to constrain or 

trouble one!s self, L, 83, 5. 
QejiB, people, L. 95, 2, 3. 4. 
Government. See Regimen. 
Gre, will. Bon gre, mal gre, etc. 

L. 88, 5. 
Guere (ne), but little, L. 11, 5. 

Hater (se), to hasten, L. 40, Y. 
Hier, yesterday, its place, L, 41, 5. 
Hour of the day, L. 20 ; L. 92. 

Imperative mode, § 45, 3d, (4). Use 
of, § 126. Terminations o^ L. 
70, 1. Irregularities, L, 70, 3, 4. 
Two imperatives coming together, 
§ 100, (6). Imperative followed 
by a verb, L. 71, 1. 

Imperfect of indicative, § 45, (2), 2d. 
Use of, § 119; L. 53. Formation 
and terminations, L. 53. Irregu- 
larities, L. 54. 

Imperfect of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 

2. Use of, L. 75. Terminations 
of, L. 75, 1, 2, 3. Formation of, 
L. 75, 4. Irregularities, L. 75, 5. 

Importer, n'importe, no matter; 
qu'importe ? what matters it f L. 
94, 1, 2. 

In, dans, en, a, L. 34, 5, 6. 

Indicative mode, § 45, 1st, (2.) 

Indicative present, § 45, (2), ] . Use 
of, § 118. Terminations, L. 23, 5. 

Infinitive mode, § 45, 5th, (6). Use 
o^ § 128. Important rules, § 128, 
(4), (5). Verb preceded by an- 
other, put in infinitive, L. 21, 2. 

In order to, pour, L. 28, 8. 

Inquieter (s'), to be uneasy, L. 93, 5. 

Interjections, § 74. 

Interrogative form of verbs, L. 23, 
9; L. 25, 1; § 98,(5), (6). 

Interrogative sentences, form of, L. 
6,4; §76, (4), (5);L. 25,1; L. 
56, 1. 



Irregular verbs, L. 24, Table ofj § 62. 

It, coming before verb to be followed 
by I, etc. L. 81. It used abso- 
lutely before verb to be, L. 81, 1. 

JuSQu'oir, how far f L. 44, 3. 
'Jusqu'a, until, as far as, L. 44, 4. 

Laisser, to leave, to neglect, to forget 

to bring, L. 86, 4. Followed by 

another verb, L. 97, 4. 
La plupart, most. Number of verb 

after, L. 85, 3. 
Le, meaning so, it, etc., L. 46, 4, 5. 
Le mien, mine, etc., L. 9, 6 ; L. 12, 6. 
Lequel, etc., zohich, L. 18, 6; L. 31, 7. 
Lever, (se), to rise, L. 37, 6. 
L'un, I'autre, one another, § 41, (10). 
L'un et I'autre, both, § 41, (11): L. 

19, 3. 

Madame, Mademoiselle, used before 
names of kindred, L. 24, note. 
Before titles, L. 29, 6. Plural o^ 
L. 29, 7. 

Mal, sore, pain, etc., L. 66. Mal de 
dents, toothache, mal de tete, 
headache, L. 66. 

Marcher, to walk, L. 36, 6. 

Marier, to marry, to perform, the 
ceremony, L. 67, 2. Se marier, to 
get married, L. 67, 2. £tre marie, 
to be married,L. 67,2. See Epouser. 

Measure, weight, price by, L. 68, 3. 

Meme, same, even, etc., § 30, (5) ; 

§ 9^, (2). 

Mener, porter, to take, to carry, L. 
44, 6. 

Mettre, to put on, L, 32, 1. Mettre 
le convert, to lay the cloth, L. 32, 1. 
Mettre a meme, to enable; mettre 
pied a terre, to alight; mettre a 
la porte, to turn out of doors ; met- 
tre au fait, to acquaint, etc., L. 
69, 1. Se mettre, to dress one's 
self to sit down, L. 69, 2. 

Mettre a I'heure, to set a watch, L. 
92, 2. 

Midi, minuit, noon, midnight, L. 20, 2. 

Modes, i^ 45. Indicative, g 45, 1st, 
(2). Conditional, § 45, 2d, (3). 
Imperative, § 45. 3d, (4). Sub- 
junctive, § 45, 4th, (5). Infinitive, 
§ 45, 5tli, (6j. Participle, § 45, 
6th, (7). 

Moi, toi, etc., vised instead of nomi- 
native pronouns, L. 17, 6. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Xlll 



Mon, ma, poss. adj., agree with ob- 
ject possessed, L. 9, 3, 4. 

Monde, world, people, L. 95, 1. Tout 
le monde, every body, L. 95. 

Monsieur, used before names of kin- 
dred, L. 24, note. Before titles, 
L. 29, 6. Plural of, L. 29, 7. 

Month, day of, L. 19, 6 ; L. 26, 10. 

Must, falloir, etc., L. 48 ; § 62. 

Naitre, to be born, Je suisne, I was 
born, L. 43, note. 

Nasal sounds, p. 21. 

Ne, negative, § 138. Place of, L. 1, 
1. Ne — que, only, L. 19, 2. Ne, 
idiomatic, § 127, 3 ; § 138, (4), 
(5); L. 72, 9. Ne— plus, no- 
more, L. 17, 4. Ne — guere, L. 
17,5. 

Ni, neither, nor, L. 7, 4. Article 
used or not after ni, L. 8, 3, 4. 

Ni I'un, ni I'autre, neither, L. 84, 4, 5. 

N^importe, no matter, L. 94, 1. 

Negative sentence, L. 7. 

Negative, second, suppressed after 
certain verbs, § 138, (2). 

N'est-ce pas ? Is it not ? L. 94, 3. 

Neuter verbs, § 43, (5). Their aux- 
iliary, L. 43 ; § 46. 

Nominative. See Subject. 

Non, no, Je dis que non, / say no, 
L. 82, 3. 

Notre^ votre, our, your, etc., L. 9, 5. 
Le notre, ours, L. 9, 6. 

Noun, § 3. Proper, § 3,(3). Common, 
§ 3, (4). Collective, § 3, (5), (6), 
Compound, § 3, (7). Taken in a 
partitive sense, § 13, (10) j § 78, 
(1), (2); L. 6, 1; L. 29, 8. Taken 
in a general sense, § 77, (1), (2) ; 
L. 8, 2. Gender by the meaning, 
§ 5. By the termination, § 6. 
Plural of, § 8; L. 11. Plural of 
compound, § 9 ; L. 59. Syntax 
of, § 76. Place of subject in 
affirmative and negative sentences, 
§ 76, (1), (2). In interjected sen- 
tences, § 76, (3). In interrogative 
sentences, § 76, (4), (5); L. 6, 4; 
L. 56, 1. Place of regimen, § 76, 
(6), (7), (8), (9); L. 56, 2, 3. Re- 
spective places of possessor and 
object possessed, § 76, (10) ; L. 5, 
3. Of object and its substance, 
§ 76, (11); L. 5, 4; L. 59, 6. Of 
object and its use, § 76, (12), (13), 
CU).- L. 59, 7. 



Nouveau, nouvel, new, L. 13, 6. 

Nu, bare, adj. § 84, (2). 

Nul, no, § 30, (7). 

Nulle part, no where, L. 25, 8. 

Number, § 1, (5). See Different 

Parts of Speech. 
Number. See Numeral Adjectives. 

Ordinal adverbs of number, § 29. 
Numeral collective nouns, § 27. 
Numerals, fractions, § 28. 

On, one, people, they, § 41, (4), (5) 

§ 113; L. 35, 1, 2. 
Onze, eleven, etc., article not elided 

before, L. 19, 7. 
Ordinal numbers, § 22, (3), (5). Not 

used after names of sovereigns or 

for days of the month, L. 30, 3 ; 
. § 26, (1), (3). 
Oter, to take off, to take away, L. 

32, 2. 
Ou, or, agreement of verb with nouna 

connected by, L. 84, 2, 3. 
Oui, yes, Je dis que oui, / say yes, L. 

82, 3. 

Paradigms of auxiliary verbs, § 47. 
For others, see Conjugations. 

Par oil ? which way ? L. 44, 5. 

Participle, past, § 45, 6th, (7). 
"Without an auxiliary, § 66, (3); 
L. 42, 10; L. 98, 1. Accom- 
panied by eire, § 134, (2) ; L. 42, 
6 ; L. 98, 3. In reflective verbs, 
§ 135, (1), (2) ; L. 45, 2 ; L. 98^ 
6 ; L. 99, 4. In neuter verbs, 
L. 98, 3. Accompanied by avoir, 
§ 134, (3) ; L. 42, 5 ; L. 98, 4. 
Never agrees with indirect regi- 
men, L. 42, 9. Neuter verbs with 
avoir, § 135, (6) ; L. 99, 2. Of 
unipersonal verbs, L. 45, 6 ; L. 
99, 3. Never agrees with en, § 135, 
(7); L. 42, 11, 12; L. 99, 8. Fol- 
lowed by an infinitive, § 135, (3); 
L. 98, 7 ; L. 99, 5. Of passive 
verbs, L. 46 ; L. 98, 2. Fait always 
invariable before an infinitive, L. 
63, 2; L. 99, 7. After le pen, 
§ 135, (8). 

present § 64 ; L. 97. 

Partitive sense, nouns taken in, L. 6, 
1; § 13,(10); §78,(1), (2) ;L. 29,8. 

Pas, point, not, difference, § 138, (1). 
Place of, L. 7, 1, 2. Omitted when 
a second negative occurs, § 138, 
(3); L. 7, 4. Omitted after cer» 
tain verbs, § 138, (2). 



XIV 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Passer (se), to do without, L. 39, 1. 

Passive voice, § 113, (1). 

Passive verb, § 43, (4) ; L. 46. Con- 
jugation of, § 54. Rule, § 55. Its 
participle, L. 46, 2 ; L. 98, 2. 

Past anterior, § 45, (2), 5. Use of 
§ 122 ; L. 55. 

Past definite, § 45, (2), 3. Use of 
§ 120; L. 51. Its terminations 
and irregularities, L. 52. 

Past indefinite, § 45, (2), 4. Use of, 
§ 121; L. 41. 

Past of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 3. 

Payer, to pay, its government, L. 50. 

P^sonne, no body, § 41, (6) ; L. 7, 7. 

Persons, § 31, (3.) 

Place, of subject, L. 56, 1, respective 
place of noun, direct and indirect 
regimen, L, 56, 1, 2, 3; § 76,(7), 
(8), (9). In interjected sentences, 
§76,(3). Of noun in interrogative 
sentences. § 76, (4), (5) ; L. 56, 1 ; 
L. 6, 4. Of adjective, L. 8, 5 ; L. 
15; § 85; § 86. Of pronoun 
subject or nominative, § 98. Of 
regimen pronoun, L. 9, 1 ; L. 27 ; 
L. 28; § 101; § 102. Place of 
en and ?/, § 104 ; L. 57. Of adverb, 
§ 136 ; L. 34 ; L. 41, 4, 5. Of verb, 
§144. 

Plaire (se), to take pleasure in, L. 40. 
Used unipersonally, comme il vous 
plaira, as you please, L. 89, 3. 

Pleuvoir, to rain, L. 33, 3. 

Pluperfect of indicative, § 45, (2), 6. 
Use of, § 123; L. 55, 4. 

' of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 

4; L. 75, 6. 

Plural of nouns, § 8; L. 11. 



Ofcom- 
Nouns 
Nouns 
Plural 



pound nouns, § 9 ; L. 59 
having no plural, § 10. 
having no singular, § 11, 
of adjectives, § 17 ; L. 14, 3. Moral 
or physical properties of man, 
single in the individual, not put in 
the plural, L. 66, 5. 

Plus de, more than, before a number, 
L. 20, 7. 

Plusieurs, several, § 30, (9) ; L. 18, 7. 

Pour, in order to, L. 28, 8. 

Porter, to carry, to wear, L. 23, 10 ; 
L. 44, 6. Se porter, to be, to do, 
L. 36, 3. 

Preposition, § 71. Table of princi- 
pal, § 72. Regimen or govern- 
ment of, § 130. Governing with- 
out another preposition, § 139. 



By means of de, § 139, 2. By <J, 
§ 139, 3. Rules on govermento^ 
§ 140. Repetition of; § 141. 
Observations on, § 142. 

Present tense, used in French, where 
past used in English, L. 57, 2. 

Promener (se), to walk, ride, etc., for 
pleasure or health, L. 36, 5. 

Prendre, to take, its government, L. 
50, 1. 

Prendre garde, to take care ; prendre 
le deuil, to go into mourning; 
prendre la peine, to take the trou- 
ble ; prendre les devants, to go be- 
fore; prendre un parti, to take a 
resolution; prendre du the, du 
cafe, to take tea, coffee, L. 71, 3. 

Prendre le the, to take one's tea, 
L. 71, note. 

Pronouns, § 31. Personal, § 32. Re- 
marks on, § 33. Use of moi, toi, 
instead of subject or nominative 
pronouns, § 33, (8), etc. Use of re- 
flective, L. 37. Reflective pro- 
noun se, § 33, (12), (13). Soi, 
(14), Possessive pronouns, § 34; 
L. 9. Remarks on, § 35. Demon- 
strative pronouns, § 36 ; L. 9. Re- 
marks on, § 37. Ce, demonstra- 
tive pronoun, § 87, (6); § 108; 
§ 116 ; L. 81. Used for he, she, 
L, 82. Gelui, celle, celui-ci, celle-ci, 
§ 20 ; L. 10. Ceci, cela, L. 10, 6. 
Relative pronouns, § 38 ; L. 31. 
Remarks on, § 39. En, § 39, 
(17); § 95,(5); § 110; § 103, 
(1). Place of En, § 104. T, 
§ 39, (18); § 103 (2); Place of 
y, §104; § 111. Dont, L. 31, 8. 
Syntax of pronouns, § 98. Place 
of subject or nominative, § 98. 
Repetition of, § 99 ; L. 87. Place 
of regimen pronouns, § 100; 
L. 9, 1 ; L. 27. Respective place 
of regimen pronouns, § 101 ; L. 
28. Rule on this subject, § 102. 
Repetition of regimen pronoun, 
§105; L. 27, 7. Rules on pos- 
sessive pronouns, § 106. On 
demonstrative pronouns, § 107. 
On relative pronouns, § 109. 

Que, rel. prn., § 109. Never sup- 
pressed, L, 19', 1 ; L, 31, 3. Que, 
interrogative, L, 18, 5; L. 31, 5. 

Que, conj., never suppressed, L. 19, 
1. Que, idiomatic, L. 82, 3, 



GENERAL INDEX, 



XV 



Quel, wMch, what, § 30, (10) ; § 109 ; 

L. 18, 4. 
Quelque, § 30, (12); § 9t ; L. 18, 

7 ; L. 88. 

Quel — que, quelque — que, govern 
the subjunctive, L. 88, 3. 

Quelque chose, something^ anything^ 
L. 7, 6. Require de before an 
adjective, L. 18, 3. Not used in 
negative sentences, L. 7, 6. 

Quelque part, somtvjhere, anywhere, 
L. 25, 8. 

Quelqu'un, § 41, 7; L. 7, 6. 

Qu'est-ce que, used idiomatically for 
what f L. 82, 2. 

Quicouque, whoever, § 41, (9). 

Quitter, io leave, abandon, etc., L. 
86,3. 

Quoi, what, L. 31, 6. 

Qui, who, whom, used absolutely, 
§ 39, (5). 

Eappeler (se), io remember, recollect, 
L. 37, 2. 

Reading Lessons, p. 474. 

Recevoir des nouvelles, to hear from, 
L. 35, 6. 

deflective verb, § 43, (6). Conju- 
gation of, § 56; L. 36. Often 
used in French for the English 
passive, L. 36, 2. Its auxiliary is 
eire, L. 45 ; § 46. Its participle, 
§ 135 ; L. 45 ; L. 98, 5 ; L. 99, 4. 

Hegarder, to concern, L. 94, 5. 

Remercier, io thank, Je vous remer- 
cie, equivalent to a refusal, L. 89, 2. 

Eesume of rules on participle past, 
L. 98 ; L. 99. 

Hien, nothing, etc., L. 7, 7 ; L, 18, 3. 

Regime, regimen or object, § 2. 
Direct, § 2, (2) ; § 42, (4) ; L. 56, 
2, 3 ; § 76, Indirect, § 2, (3) ; 
§42, (5); L. 56, 2, 3; § 76. 

Begimen or government of adjec- 
tives, § 87; L. 79. After etre 
unipersonal, § 87, (4); L. 79, 3. 
Adjective followed by de, § 88. 
By d, § 89. By different preposi- 
tions in both languages, § 90. 
Regimen of verbs, § 129 ; L. 2 1, 4 ; 
L. 50 ; L. 76, 77, 78. Verbs fol- 
lowed by no preposition, § 130 ; L. 
^6, 1. By a, § 131. By (^e, §132; 
L. 21, 4; L. '7 7. By a preposi- 
tion in French and by none in 
in Knglish, L. 78, 1, 2. By a 
different prep, in both, L. 78, 3. 
Regimen of preposition^ § 139 ; 



L. 80. Important rules on regi- 
men, § 92 ; § 133 ; § 140 ; L. 80, 5. 

Regimen of prendre, to take; volar, 
to steal; aclieter, to buy; deman- 
der, to ask; payer, to pay, L. 50, 1. 

Rejouir (se), to rejoice, L. 40, 5. 

Remettre, to set a dislocated bone, 
etc., L. 93, examples. 

Repetition of demonstrative adjec- 
tives, § 93. Of possessive adjec- 
tives, § 21, (4). Of articles, § 80, 
L. 6, 5; L. 86. Of subject or 
nominative pronouns, § 99; L. 
87. Of regimen or objective pro- 
nouns, § 105; L. 87. Of adverbs, 
§ 137. Of prepositions, § 141. 

Rester, used unip., to remain, io have 
left, L. 85, 4. 

Reste de, left, L. 85, 4. 

Retarder, to lose, io put back, said of 
watches, etc., L. 92, 1. 

Savoir, to know, and connaitre, io 
be acquainted with, L. 30, 5. 

Seoir, to suit, become, L. 47, 3. Used 
unipersonally, L. 49, 1. 

Servir (se), io use, L. 39, 2. Servir, 
to help at table, L. 89, 1. 

S'il vous plait, if you please, L. 89, 3. 

Si, conj., § 125, (3). Should not pre- 
cede conditional mode, L. 62, 6. 

Souvenir (se), to remember, recollect, 
L. 37, 2. 

So, rendered by le, L. 46, 4. 

Speech, parts of, § 1, (1). 

Stem of a verb, L. 23. 

Subject or nominative, § 2,(1) ; § 42, 
(2). Yerb having several sub- 
jects in different persons, L. 83, 2. 
Agreement of verbs with subjects, 
L. 83, 1; L. 84; § 114; § 115. 

Subjunctive mode, § 45, 4th, (5). 
Use of, § 127 ; § 143 ; L. 72, 8, 9, 
10. Present of, § 45, (5), 1. Ter- 
minations of, L. 72. Subjunctive 
used after verbs expressing con- 
sent, command, etc., followed by 
que, L. 72, 8. After several uni- 
personal verbs followed by que, L. 
73, 1. After certain conjunctions, 
§ 143 ; L, 73, 4. After croire, espe- 
rer, etc., interrogative or negative, 
L. 74, 2. After another verb, un- 
certain, and preceded by relative 
pronoun or a superlative, L. 74, 3, 
4. Past of subjunctive, L. 12, 1. 

Substantive. See Noun. 



xvi 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Superlative absolute, § 14, (11) ; L. 
17, 1. Superlative relative, § 14, 
(9) ; L. 17, 2. 

Syntax, § 75. Of noun, § 76. Arti- 
cle, § 77. Adjective, § 83. Pro- 
noun, § 98. Verb, § 114. Parti- 
ciple, §134. Adverb, § 136. Prepo- 
sition, § 139. Conjunction, § 143. 

Taire, to conceal, L. 96, 5. Se taire, 
to he silent, L. 96, 5. 

Tarder, to tarry, to long, L. 58, 3. 

Tel, such, § 41, (12), (13). Monsieur 
un tel, Mr. such a one, § 41, 13. 

Tenir, to hold, used in the sense of to 
Tceep. Tenir sa parole, to keep 
one's word, tenir la porte ouverte, 
to keep the door open, etc., etc., L. 
90, 1. Tenir un langage, to make 
use of language, expressions, etc., 
L. 90, 2. Tenir, to be attached, 
etc., L. 90, 3. Faire tenir, to for- 
ward, L. 90, 5. Se tenir, to re- 
main, to abide by, etc., L. 90, 6. 

Tenses of verbs, § 45. Formation 
of; (§ 61). See Different Tenses. 

Terminations of regular verbs, § 60. 
Of indicative, L. 23, 5. Of imper- 
fect of indicative, L. 53, 5. Of 
past definite, L. 51. Of future, 
L. 60. Of conditional, L. 62. Of 
imperative, L. 70. Of subjunc- 
tive, L. 72. Of imperfect of sub- 
junctive, L. 75. Of infinitive, L. 
21, 1. Of present participle, L. 
23, 3. Of past participle, L. 23, 4. 

Time of day, L. 20. 

Times, number of, in a given space, 
L. 68, 4. 

Tout, all, etc., § 30, (15), (16) ; § 97, 
(4), (5), (6). Tout, every, L. 26, 
8. Tout, the whole, L. 26, 9. 
Tout, entirely, quite, variable by 
euphony, L. 88, 4. 

Tromper, to deceive, L. 38, 1. Se 
tromper, to be mistaken, etc., L. 
38, 2. 

Un, une, a, an, one, § 13, (4), (11); 
L. 6, 2. Not used before nouns 
placed in apposition, L. 30, 4. 

Unipersonal verbs, L. 33 ; §43, (7). 
Paradigm of, § 61-2. AuxU. and 
partic of unipers. verbs, L. 45, 3, 4. 

Valoir, to be worth, L. 49, 3 ; to be 

letter, L. 49, 6. 
YeQlr^ toeome, used to indicate past 



just elapsed, L. 26, 2. Venir 

trouver, to come to, L. 26, 3, 

Verbal adjectives, § 65 ; L. 97. 

Verbs, Four Conjugations of, L. 21 ; 
§ 42. Subject or nominative of, 
§ 42, (2). Eegimen or object 
of; § 42, (3). Different sorts of 
verbs, § 43. Active, § 43, (2). 
(3); L. 43. Passive, § 43, (4); L. 
46. Neuter, § 43, (5); L. 43. 
Eeflective, § 43, (6); § 56; L. 36. 
Unipersonal, L. 33; § 43, 7; 
§ 61-2. Auxiliary verbs, § 43, 
(8). Use of; § 46 ; L. 43, L. 45. 
Modes and tenses o^ § 45. See 
Different Modes and Tenses. Ir- 
regular verbs, L. 24. Table o^ 
§ 62. Syntax of the verb, § 114. 
Agreement of the verb with sub- 
ject, § 114; L. 83; L. 84; L. 85. 
Verb after a collective noun, 
§ 115 ; L. 85, 1, 2, 3. Number 
of verb after ce, § 116, Verb 
after several subjects in different 
pereons, § 117. Use of tenses, 
§118. /S'ee Different Tenses. Regi- 
men or government of verbs. See 
Regimen. 

Veuillez, be so kind, L. 70, 4. 

Vocabulary to the Reading Lessons, 
p. 493. 

Voici, here is, L. 34, 4. 

Voila, there is, L. 34, 4. 

Voler, to rob, steal, its government^ 
L. 50, 1. 

Vouloir dire, to m,ean, L. 32, 5, 6. 

(en), to bear a grudge, etc., 

L. 94, 6. 

Vowels, L. 2. 

"What, rel. pm., ceque, L. 31, 4; que^ 
L. 31, 5. 

, interrogative, rendered by, 

qu^est-ce que, L. 82, 2. 

Whole (the), le tout, L. 26, 9. 

Will, used in the sense of wish, ren- 
dered by vouloir, L. 60, 5. 

Words, variable, § 1, (3). Invariable, 
§ 1, (4). 

T AVOIR, to be there, % 61-2; L. 

33, 4. Used for ago, L. 41, 6. 

T avoir, foUowed by the present, 

when the action continues, L. 

57, 2. 
Y, prn. & adv. § 39, (18) ; § 103, 

(2). Place o^ § 104: § 111; 

L. 24, 11. 



FASQTJELLE'S 

NE¥ FRENCH COURSE. 



A 


a 


B 


b 


C 





D 


d 


E 


e 


F 


f 


G 
H 


i 


I 


i 


J 
K 


j 

k 


L 


1 


M 


m 


N 


n 








P 

Q 
R 


P 
r 


S 


s 


T 


t 


U 


u 


V 


V 


X 


X 


Y 
Z 


y 

z 



PAET 


FIKST. 




ION I. 


LESSON^ L 


THE LETTERS. 




alphabet contains twenty-five letters : 




Old names. 


New names. 1 


Examples. 


ah 


ah 


am as. 


bay 


be* 


barre. 


say 


ke« 


cas, cil. 


day 


de« . 


dard. 


a 


a 


effet. 


eflf 


fe 


frere. 


jay/ 
ash 


yhe 
le 


grele. 
haie. 


e 


e 


idee. 


jee' 


je 


jais. 


kah 


ke 


kali. 


ell 


le 


lit. 


emm 


me 


mat. 


enn 


ne 


natte. 








orge. 


pay 


pe 


pere. 


ku 


ke 


quadre. 


err' 


re 


rat. 


ess 


se 


soie. 


lay 


te 


tort. 


u* 


u 


urne. 


vay 


V 


vase. 


eeks 


xe' 


rixe. 


egrec 


e grec 


yeux. 


zed 


ze« 


zele. 



W, called in French double V, might be added, as many for* 
eign words which have that letter, have been adopted into the 
French language. 

* The new names of the French letters are seldom used. 

' Like 5 in pleasure. ^ Nearly like err in error, 

* No corresponding sound in English. •* Nearly like be in globe. 

° Nearly like ke and de in cake and grade. The e of the other letters has 
the same sound. ' kse. 



18 t>EUXlfeMELEgOir. 

LEgON n. LESSON II. 

THE VOWELS. 

YowELS are rendered long or short by certain marks placed over 
them. These marks, which are three in number, are called accents. 

The acute accent ( ' ) is placed over e, to give it a sharp or close 
sound. (See 4. e.) 

The grave accent ( ^ ) is placed over e, to give to that vowel a 
grave or open sound. (See 5. e.) It is also put on a, at, or to, Id, 
there, and on the m of ou, there, to distinguish those words from a, has 
\a, the, and ou, or. The grave accent, however, does not change the 
sound of a and u. 

The circumflex accent C') is placed over a, e, i, o, u, to give to those 
letters a long and broad sound. ^ 

1. a like a in mat, rat. Examples, face, face ; bateau, hoat ; tableau, 

picture ; patte, paw ; malade, sick. 

2. a like a in bar, far. Ex. dgQ, age ; chateau, castle ; ^die, paste ; 

blame. Name; crane, cranium. 

3. e nearly like u in cur, and frequently silent at the end of poly- 

syllables. Ex. le, the; me, me; te, thee; que, that; meuble, 
piece of furniture ; peuple, people ; rime, rime. 

4. e like a in fate. Ex. ete, summer; amitie, friendship; tleve, 

■raised; epee, sword. 

5. e Mke e in met. Ex. pere, father ; frere, brother ; mere, mother ; 

eleve, pupil. 

6. ^ nearly like a in dare, fare. Ex. reve. dream; extreme, ex- 

treme ; creme, cream ; crepe, crape ; foret, forest. 

7. i nearly like ee in reed, creed. Ex. midi, mid-dag ; id, here] 

iini, finished; credt't, credit. 

8. i like ee in eeZ, feel. Ex, tie, island ; gite, lodging ; epitre, epistle ; 

dime, tithe ; abime, abyss. 

9. o between the o in rob and that in robe, or that of nor and no. 

Ex. robe, robe ; globe, globe ; cachot, dungeon ; haricot, bean. 

10. 6 hke in bone, no. Ex. depot, deposit ; prevot, provost ; bientot, 

soon; suppot, supporter. 

11. u. The exact French sound of this letter is not found in Eng- 

lish. The position of the Hps in whistling, is very nearly the 
/ ^ 

^ This accent indicates the suppression of the letter s after the vowel on 
which it is placed ; fete, tete, bete, were formerly written, feste, teste, teste ; 
the 5 was not sounded, but gave to the preceding vowel that prolonged 
sound, now represented by the circumflex accent. 



THE DIPHTHONGS, &C» 19 

position which they should have in emitting the French u. Ex. 
'wrne, urn; lune, moon; hut, aim; tribw, ;^n6e/tribwt, tribute; 
elw, elected. 

12. "d is the u with a prolonged sound. Ex. mwre, mulberry ; dw, 

due; crw, growth; bruler, to hum. 

13. y. See 29, y, page 20. 

Exercise 1. 

1. (a) Table, table; fable, fable; chat, cat; eclat, splendor; arbre, 

tree; tard, late; balle, ball. 

2. (a) ame, soul ; blame, blame ; batir, to build : pate, paste ; dge, 

age; mat, was^. 

3. (e) me, me; de, o/; que, thai; elle, sAe; malle, mail; parle, 

spea^ / fourche, fork ; salle, ^a??. 

4. (e) pre, meadow ; alle, gone ; donne, given ; passe, passee, past ; 

eleve, raised ; armee, army. 

5. (e) tves, very; apres, after ; achete, buy; meve, mother ; espere, 

hope ; leve, raise ; chere, fare ; chevre, goat. 

6. (e) meme, same; careme, Xew^ / arret, arrest / tempete, ^ewpes^ / 

tete, head; bete, beast. 

7. (i) lit, bed; dit, said ; dire, io say ; lire, to read; linie,fle; cire, 

wax; rite, rite. 

8. (i) diner, to dine ; ile, isle ; dime, tithe ; abime, abyss ; epitre, 

epistle; gite, lodging. 

9. (o) mot, word ; cachot, dungeon; repos, rest; trot, trot; globe, 

globe; carrosse, coach. 

10. (6) tot, soow; plutot, rather ; roti, roasi meat; depot, deposit; 

prevot, provost. 

11. (u) bu, drank; cru, believed; du, o/ jfAe/ elu, elected; menu, 

minute ; prevu, foreseen ; ecu, crown. 

12. (u) chute, fall ; brulot, fireship ; mur, ripe ; dument, duly ; il 

fut, he might be ; nous fumes, we were. 

THE DIPHTHONGS AND COMBINED VOWELS. 

14. A vowel surmounted by a diaeresis (-) cannot form a diph* 
thong with another vowel ; it is pronounced separately. Ex., 
hair — Exception : e at the end of a few words, such as cigue, 
hemlock, is silent, the u being pronounced Hke n. 

15. E accented (e) and followed by a vowel, is pronounced separ- 
ately. Ex. obeir, to obey ; geant, giant. 

16. ai, ei, preceding a. liquid I (see Consonants, 13) do not form a 



20 DETJXlfeME LEgON. 

diphthong ; a is then pronounced as in Tnat, and e as ai in 
pair. The i seems merely to indicate the liquid sound of the 
I. Ex. paille, straw ; orezlle, ear. 

17. ai is like a in fate. Ex. j'at, I have; je ferai, IwiTl make; bme, 

Jay / mat, May ; halai, broom. 

When the diphthong ai is followed by a final s, c?, or ^, it. 
assumes a broader sound, resembling the Prench e, or e in the 
English word met. Ex. j'avats, / had ; je feraw, / should 
' maJce ; lait^ milk; laid, ugly' 

18. au nearly like oh/ in English. Ex. tawx, rate; chawd, warm. 

E preceding au is blended with that diphthong without chang- 
ing its sound. Ex. beaw, handsome ; chateaw, castle ; tableaw, 
picture; eau, water. 

19. ei nearly hke a in fate. Ex. be%e, serge ; neige, snow ; seigle, 

rye; reme, queen; peegne, comb. 

20. eu approaches the sound of w in muff. Ex. jew, ^Zay; lieM,^7ace; 

pew, ZMe; ^ewc^fear ; chalewr, Aeal Exceptions, ineu, had; 
j'ews, &c., I had; j'ewsse, etc., I might have ; eu is pronounced 
Hke w alone. 

21. ia nearly hke ia in medial. Ex. il Ita, he hound ; il cna, he cried ; 

dialogue, dialogue. 

22. ie like ee in hee. Ex. il he, Ae hinds ; il etud^e, Ae studies ; harptle^ 

harpy ; mie, the soft part of bread. 

23. oi nearly like wa in was. Ex. croix, cross; il bozt, he drinks ; 

loi, king. 

24. ou like oo in cool Ex. dowx, soft ; coup, blow ; nous, we ; vows, 

you ; COM, neck. 

25. ua \ ^ / ^ H salwa, he saluted ; il remwa, he moved ; il con* 

) fl ii 1 i tribwa, he contributed. 

26. ue / g* a \ ® . II salwe, he salutes ; il remwe, ^e mo^;es / il con- 

> S .S ( "S § tribwe, he contributes. 

27. ui (§«]-§ ^ prodmt, produce ; condmte, conduct ; \ui, him,' 

j ^ S j I brm't, noise ; il redm'i, Ae reduces. 

28. uo I ^ \^ duo, duet. 

29. y when initial, when coming between two consonants, or when 

forming a syllable of itself, has the sound of the French i. 
Ex. style, style; type, type; yeux, eyes; Tpres, Ypres ; y, there. 
Between two vowels y has the power of two ^'s, one of which 
forms a diphthong with the preceding, and the other with the 
following vowel ; the syllabic division taking place between 
the t's. Ex. moy en, means; essai/er, to try ; netto^/er, to clean; 
citoyeRj citizen ; abhaye, abbey; these words are pronounced 



THE NASAL SOUNHS. 21 

as if they were written moi-ien, essai-ier, nettoi-ier^ cito'ir-ienj 
dbhai-ie. The words, pays, country ; paysage, landsca;pe ; pay- 
san, ^easctnij are pronounced pe-is, pt-isage, jpt-4san. 

Exercise 2. 

17. (ai) je donnai, I gave ; je parlerai, I wiU speak; j'allai, I went ; 

je cherchai, 1 sougld ; je menai, lied ; j'lrai, I will go. 
(ais) je donnais, I was giving ; je parlerais, I would speak; j'allais, 
I was going I je cherchais, I was seeMng j je menais, / waa 
leading ; j'irais, I would go. 

18. (au, eau) maux, evils ; chameau, camel; chevaux, horses ; beau, 

handsome ; nouveau, new ; troupeau, yZoc^. 

19. (ei) neige, snow; veine, vein; reine, queen; Seine, Seine; '^q 

peigne, I comb ; sein, hosom. 

20. (eu) peu, little; peur,/ear; leur, taeir ; il meurt, he dies ; soeur, 

sister ; oeuf, egg ; lueur, ligld. 
(eu) like u. J'eus, / had; tu eus, thou hadsi ; il eut, he had; 
eu, had. 

21. (ia) liant, binding; il lia, he hound; TpaTtisil, partial ; il cria, he 

cried ; il nia, he denied; il pria, he prayed. 

22. (ie) garanti e, ^waraw^ee/ il prie, 7ie ^ra^/s / H lie, he hinds ; ilrie, 

he may laugh ; il nie, he denies. 

23. (oi) loi, law ; moi, me ; il voit^ ^e sees ; il boit, Ae drinks ; roi, 

Hw^r ; droit, right ; il croit, he believes. 

24. (ou) bout, end ; il coud, /^e sews ; il moud, Ae grinds ; coupe, cup ; 

loup, wolf; coup, 6Zow;; croute, crust. 

25. (ua) nuage, cloud; nuance, shade; il salua, he saluted; il remua, 

he moved ; il contribua, he contributed. 

26. (ue) nue, cloud; lue, f. read; re^ue, f. received; il salue, Ae 

salutes ; il remue, Ae moves. 

27. (ui) lui, Atm / luisant, shining ; cuire, to bake ; cuit, baked ; nuire, 

^0 injure ; produire, to produce. 
■29. (y) thyrse, thyrsus ; type, i^/pe ; style, style ; yeux, c^/^s / Yvetot, 
Yvetot ; payer, to pay ; envoyer, to send ; abbaye, abbey ; 
essay er, to try ; pays, country ; paysage, landscape; paysan, 
peasant. 

THE NASAL SOUNDS. 

30. The combination of the vowels with the consonant m ox n 
produces what the French call le son nasal, the nasal sound. 

31, When the consonant m ov ni^ doubled, or is immediately fol- 



22 



DEUXifiME LBgON". 



82. am 
an 

ean 
em 
en 

33. en 

34. en 

35. en 

36. im 
in 

37. om 



lowed by a vowel, ^ the nasal sound does not take place. 
Ex. mnocent, innocent; mmobile, immovable ; mutile, useless • 
inoui, unheard of. The syllables in and im in the words in- 
nocent and immobile, are pronounced nearly as in Enoljsh • 
the syllabic division^ of i-nu-ti-le and i-nou-i, will explaui 
the reason of the absence of the nasal sound in those words, 
ample, amjple; chambre, chamber; lampe, 
lamp. 
J an, year ; banc, bench; dans, in; man* 
'^ teau, cloak. 

c3 membre, limb ; emporter, io carry away ; 
pel trembler, to tremble. 

en, in; dent, tooth; pre?idre, to take; 
lendre, to render. 
final is sometimes pronounced hke en in then. Ex. Eden, Men. 
in the third person plural of verbs is silent. Ex. ils hsent, 
ils porteTit, ils donnent; pronounce ils liz, ils ^or^, ils donn. 
after i at the end of a word, is pronounced nearly hke an in 
sayik, crank. Ex. hien, well; hen, tie; nen, nothing. 

timbre, stamp; mpossible, impossible; imn 

portant, important. 
\in, flax; ^in, pine; crm, horse-hair; ^irij 
wine. 



pronounced 

nearly 
like an in 
pant, want. 



somewhat 
like an in 

crank, 

sank. 

pronounced 
nearly like 
on in song, 

wrong, 
nearly like 
un in hunt- 
ino^, wruno:. 



tombe, tomb ; cowble, height; sombre, dark; 

towber, to fall, 
moji, my ; ton, thy ; son, his; bond, bound; 

poTit, bridge. 

38. um ) nearlv like [ hwmble, humble ; parfwm, perfume. 

un, one; chacun, each one; importwn, im- 
portunate. 

ExEilCISE 3. 

31. Innocent, innocent ; inutile, useless ; diner, dinner ; immorte^ 
immortal; une, one; lune, moon; dunes, downs. 

32. am ambre, amber ; chambre, chamber ; Adam, Adam ; ramper, to 

creep ; ample, ample ; lampe, lamp. 
an tante, aunt; manteau, cloak; plan, plan; plancher, floor ; 
rang, rank ; sang, blood ; enfant, child. 

* The words ennui, ennuyer, emmener, enivrer, enorgueiUir, form excep- 
tions to this rule. The first syllable of ennui, ennuyer, emmener, is nasal j 
enivrer, enorgu^illir are pronounced en-nivrer, en-orgueillir. 

* Por the division of words into syllables, see Beading Lessons, page 4'?4, 



THE CONSONANTS. 23 

em remplir, to fiU ; temple, temple; temps, weather; assemblee, 
assembly ; trembler, to tremble ; membra, limb. 

en sentir, to feel ; tente, tent ; pente, declivity ; je rends, / ren- 
der ; je prends, / take ; je sens, I feel. 

33. en amen, amen; specimen, specimen. 

34. en il» donnent, they give ; ils parlent, they speah ; ils ecrirent, 

they write ; ils cherchent, they seek. 

35. ien le mien, mine ; le tien, thine ; le sien, his. 

36. im simple, simple ; timbre, stamp ; daim, deer ; faim, hunger ; 

imposteur, impostor ; important, important. 
in fin, fine ; pain, bread ; demain, to mo7'row ; crin, horse-hair ; 
vin, wine ; bain, bath ; teindre, to dye ; peindre, to paint. 

37. om sombre, darh; nom, name; ombre, shadow ; tombe, tomb ; 

nombre, number ; comble, height 
on pont, bridge ; honte, shame ; montre, watch ; raison, reason ; 
maison, house ; fondre, to melt ; non, no. 

38. um humble, humble ; parfum, perfume ; humblement, humbly. 
un lundi, Monday ; brun, brown ; alun, alum ; emprmiter, to 

borrow ; importun, importunate / un, one. 



LEgON m. LESSON m. 

THE CONSONANTS. 

1. At the beginning of words or syllables, most consonants are 
sounded as in English. 

2. A final consonant is generally silent. The letters c, f, 1, r, 
however, when final, are generally pronounced. 

3. The final consonant of a word is generally carried to the next 
word, when that word begins with a vowel or an h mute. 
(See 10, h.) 

4. Eor illustrations and exceptions, see the several letters. 

5. B initial is pronounced as in EngUsh. In the middle of words, 

and at the end of proper names, b is sounded. Ex. a&diquer, 
to abdicate, Jo&, Cale&, &c. B is also pronounced in radouS, 
refitting of a vessel, and rum&, (pronounced romb,) point of the 
compass. It is silent in plom&, lead ; aplom&, perpendicularity. 
When b is doubled, only one of these letters is pronounced. 
Ex. a&Z>e, abbot ; sa6&at. 

6. C has its proper sound (k) before a, o, u, 1, n, r. Ex. cabane, 

cottage] cou, neck; ecu, crown; encUn, inclined; Cneius, 
Cneius ; croire, to believe. 
c before e and i, and with the cedilla (q) before a, o, or u, has 



24 TROISIIJME LEgON. 

the sound of $; ceci, this ; cendres, ashes ; fkgside, front ; fa- 

gou, fashion ; re^u, received. 
oil is pronounced like sh in she. Ex. cAar, car ; cAarbon, coaZ / 

cZiangement, change. 
o in the words vermicelle and violoncelle, is pronounced Hke s/i. 
ch is pronounced like k, in a few words derived from the Greek. 

Ex. cAaos, anac/^ronisme, c^ronique, patriarcAat, orcAestre, &c. 

In patriarcAe, arc/zeveque, AcAeron, ch is pronounced like sh. 

In MicAel-Ange, Michael Angelo, it sounds like h. 
c final is sounded, except when preceded by n. Ex. avec, with; 

arc, how ; sac, bag ; sue, juice ; Turc, Turh. 

Exceptions : it is silent in accroc, rent ; broc, jug ; clerc, clerh ; 

estomac, stomach; lacs, snares; marc, mark ; -poTCjporJc; tabac, 

tobacco — ch is silent in almanacA. 
c is pronounced hke g in second, second, and fecond, fruitful^ 

and their derivatives. 
c final is seldom pronounced upon the next word. 

7. D has the same sound as in Enghsh. Ex. (iame, lady. D is pro-» 

nounced in the middle of words. Ex. adverbe, adverb ; &d- 

mirer, to admire. 
d is silent at the end of words, except in proper names : as in 

Davie?, David ; in the word sue?, south, and in a few foreign 

words, as le CieZ, the Cid ; le Talmuc?, the Talmud, &c. 
d final, coming before a word commencing with a vowel or an 

h mute, assumes the sound of ^.' granc? homme, is pronounced 

gran tomme ; coue?-il, does he sewf vene?-il, does he sell? are 

pronounced cou-til, ven-til. 

8. F is pronounced as in English. Ex. /ievre, fever ; /iacre, hack- 

ney-coach. 
f final is generally sounded. Ex. soi/, thirst ; chef, chief ; sui/, 
tallow. 

Exceptions; cle/ hey ; cerf stag; ehef-d^ceMYVQ, master-piece; 
ceu/-dur, hard-egg ; oeu/-frais, fresh egg ; boeu/-frais, fresh 
beef ; boeu/-sale, salt beef. In the plural of the words oeu/and 
boeu/, / is always silent. 

The f of neu/, nine, is silent before a consonant, and sounds 
like V before a vowel or h mute / neu/ hvres, pronounce neu 
livres ; neu/ hommes, neu/ enfants, pronounce neu-vommee^ 
neu-venfants. 

9. Gr is always hard (that is like g in game) before a, o, u. Ex. 

^rarde, guard ; 5'ond, hinge ; a\gu, acute. 
g before e and i has always the soft sound, (that of s m pleasure). 
Ex. grerbe, sheaf; ^endre, son-in-law ; ^ibier, game ; ^ilet, vest 



THE CONSONANTS, 



25 



gua, guo, gue, gui, are pronounced ^-Aa, gJio, ghe, ghi, i. e., the u ig 
silent. Ex. il legua, he bequeathed ; leguons, lei tLS bequeath / 
guerre, war j guitsire, guitar. 

Exceptions: In ai^'mlle, needle, Guise, &c., the two vowels 
are sounded. The ue of gue final is mute, unless a diaeresis 
is on the e, as in cigue, hemlock. 

is pronounced like ni in union. Ex. regne, reign ; pei^ne, 
comb ; dai^n-er, to deign ; s&igner, to bleed. 
Exceptions : Gnide, Vrogne, stagnant, ignee, &c. 
final takes the sound of h before a vowel or an h mute : — 
sang humain, human blood, is pronounced san Tcumain. 
is mute or aspirate. H mute (having of itself no sound) is, 
when preceded by a word subject to elision, (§ 146) treated 
as a vowel. H aspirate is always initial, the breathing or 
aspiration is very slight, but not entirely absent, as is advanced 
by some grammarians. 

As it is important, on account of ehsion and of the pro- 
nunciation of the last consonant of a word preceding h, to 
know when it is aspirate or not, we will give a list of the 
words which commence with h aspirate, omitting however 
the derivatives and a few words seldom used. 



g 
10. H 



Hableur 


Harangue 


Have 


Horde 


Hache 


Haras 


Havre 


Hors 


Hagard 


Harasser 


Havresao 


Hotte 


Haie 


Harceler 


Heler 


Hottentot 


Haillons 


Hardes 


Hennir 


Houblon 


Haine 


Hardi 


Henri 


Houille 


Hair 


Harem 


Heraut 


Houlette 


Haire 


Hareng 


Hensson 


Houppe 


Haler 


Hargneux 


Herisser 


Houri 


Halage 


Haricot 


Heron 


Houppeland© 


H4le 


Haridelle 


Heros^ 


Housse 


Halle 


Harnais 


Hetre 


Houx 


Hallebarde 


Harpe 


Herse 


Huche 


Halher 


Harpie 


Heurter 


Huee 


Haltfe 


Harpon 


Hibou 


Huguenot 


Hamac 


Hasard 


Hideux 


Huit 


Hameau 


Hater 


Hierarchie 


Humer 


Hanche 


Hausser 


Hoquet 


Huppe 


Hangar 


Haut 


Hollande' 


Hure 


Hanneton 


Hautbois 


Homard 


Hurler 


Hanter 


Hautesse 


Honte 


Hussard 



* The h of the other words having the same derivation, heroine, herO' 
'isme, heroique, &c., is not aspirated. 

' We say, however, du fromage d'Hollande, Dutch cheese ; do la toil* 
d'Hollande, Dutch linen, 

2 



26 TEOISIfiME LEgOK. 

11. J is pronounced like s in pleasure. Ex. Jour, day ; /amais, never. 
K sounds like k in English, Ex. ksm, khan; kilogramme, a 

French weight. 

12. L in the combinations il, ill, not initial, but in the middle or at 

the end of words, has the liquid sound found in the English 
■word hrilliant Many of the French, however, give to the 
liquid I the sound of ye, in the English word eye. This pro- 
nunciation is now so common, that it is no longer deemed 
•wrong. Ex. pai/?e, straiv; iiUe, daughter; hail, lease; 
tTa.va.il, lahor. 

Exceptions: fi7, thread; Bresil, Brazil ; 'Nil, Nile; mil, miUe, 
thousand ; cWiJ, civil ; proft'?, profile; xille, town, and its deriv- 
atives ; tranquiVfe, tranqu?7Zite, &c., guiet^ guietness, &c. 
11 in SuZ?y has the liquid sound. 

is silent in bari?, barrel; cheniZ, kennel ; coutiZ, ticking ; fusi?, 
gun; fife, son; fourni/, bakehouse; gril, gridiron; outiZ, tool; 
■persil, parsley ; -pouh, pulse ; sourciZ, eyebrow ; gentifehommes, 
noblemen. 
initial are pronounced as in English. For these letters in 
combination with the vowels, see Nasal Sounds, (page 21). 
Final consonants after m and n are generally silent. Ex. 
temps, weather ; je romps, je prencZs, / break, I take. 
is silent in condamner, to condemn ; auto/nne, autumn. 
final, and not belonging to a noun, is carried to the next word, 
w^hen this word begins with a vowel or an h mute, if the two 
words are closely connected. Ex. un hon enfant, a good child; 
mon ami, my friend ; pronounce bon nenfant, mon nami. 

15. P is generally sounded as in English. P is however silent in 

bapteme, baptism; baptiser, to baptize; cheptel, chattel; 

compte, ax^count ; dompter, to subdue; exempt, exempt; 

sept, seven ; septieme, seventh. 
p final IS silent. Ex coup, blow ; drap, cloth. 

Exceptions : cap, cape ; and proper names generally. 
p final is not carried to the next word. 

16. Q qu is pronounced like k. Ex. gzfestion, question ; qui, who ; 

quaMic, quality : ue final is silem; after q. Ex. pratijwe, prac- 
tice. 

Exceptions: qu is pronounced as in English in ag'watique, 
ejttateur, ogwestre, e^zfitation, e^-wation, in-g-warto, lijwefier, 
guadragenaire, 2?^adruple, g^adrupede, Quinte-Curce, Qum- 
til.en, gwintuple, ^wirinal. 
q final is sounded. It is however mute in cog'-d'Inde, turkey ; 



13. 


M 


14. 


]sr 




m 




n 



\ 



THE CONSONANTS. 27 

and in cing', jive^ when followed by a word commencing with 
a consonant. 

17. R. The French r is pronounced with greater force than the 

English. 
rr is pronounced like r. Ex. arriver, to arrive ; arranger, to 
arrange. 

Exceptions : in the future and conditional of acquerir, to ac- 
quire ; courir, to run, and mourir, to die, the two r's are dis- 
tinctly sounded. Ex. je courrai, je mourrai, je courrais, jo 
mourrais, j'acquerrais, &c. 

r final is pronounced when preceded by a, i, o, u. Ex. car, 
for ; finir, to finish ; cor, hunting horn ; pur, pure. 
Exception : monsieur, sir. 

r preceded by e is generally sounded in monosyllables, Ex. 
fer, iron ; cher, dear. 

r preceded by e is silent in words of more than one syllable. 
Ex. parler, to speak ; manger, to eat ; chercher, to seek. 
Exceptions : r is sounded in amer, belveder, cancer, cuiller, 
ether, enfer, hiver, Jupiter, Lucifer, magister. 
The final r of an infinitive is not often carried to the next 
word in conversation. In serious reading it is generally car- 
ried to the next word. 

18. S has generally the same sound as in English. 

s between two vowels is pronounced as in the English words 
rose, prose. Ex. base, hase ; vase, vase ; pause, pause ; chose, 
thing. 

Exceptions : s in words composed of a particle, or an adjec- 
tive, and a word commencing with s, preserves the hissing 
sound. Ex. parasol, parasol; vraisemblable, likely; desue- 
tude, desuetude ; preseance, precedence, &c. 

s is pronounced m Christ, but not in Jesus-Christ 
so is pronounced as in English. Ex. scandale, scandal ; science, 
science. 
sch is pronounced like sh, in the words sc/jisme, scZiismatique, 
sc/iiste, scAerif, scAeik, sc/ielling — It is pronounced sk in 
scheme. 

s final is generally silent. Ex. pa?, step ; mais, hut ; jus, juice. 
Exceptions : s is pronounced in aloes, aloes ; as, ace ; atla^, 
atlas ; blocus, blockade ; cens, census ; chorus, chorus ; en sus, 
"besides ; gratis, gratis ; lapis, lapis ; laps, lapse ; iris, iris ; 
mais, maize ; mars, March ; moeurs, manners ; ours, bear ; 
prospectus, prospectus ; Rheims, Rubens ; vis, screw / and in 



28 troisiIjme LEgON. 

Latin and Greek names ending in s — Delo5, Romulu;?, &c. 
In fils, son, s may be pronounced or not. 
s is carried to the next word when the word commences with 
a vowel or an h mute ; it has then the sound of z — bons 
amis, good friends, is pronounced hon zami. In conversa- 
tion the final s of verbs is not always carried to the next 
word. 

19. T is pronounced like t in table. Ex. f ard, late ; fort, wrong. 

t has the sound of the English c in cedar, in the combinations 
tial, tiel, Hon, final or in the middle of words. The French 
words in which the above combinations occur, are very much 
like the Enghsh words which have the same meaning, and in 
which ti has the sound of sh. Ex. partial, j^f^rtial ; esseniiel, 
essentiel ; observation, ohservation. Words m which those 
terminations are preceded by s or x, are excepted; the t 
therefore in bastion, question, mixtion, &c., retains its proper 
sound. 

t has the sound of c in cedar, in words ending in atie, derived 
from the Greek, and having in Enghsh the termmation cy, 
aristocra^ie, democraiie, &c. ; also in ini^ier to initiate ; pa- 
tience, patience ; inep^ie, absurdity ; minu^ie, minutia ; Dal- 
maiie, Dalmatia ; Dalma^ien, Dalmatian ; Domiiien, Gra^ien, 
Egypiien, &c. 

In other words ending in tie, and in those ending in iit and 
tier, the t has its proper sound. Ex. garan^ie, guarantee; 
TQoitie, half ; amitie, friendship ; chantier, dock-yard ; metier, 
trade. 

th sounds always like t alone. Ex. the, tea ; these, thesis. 

t final is generally silent. Ex. hut, aim ; met, word ; sor^, fate. 
Exceptions : t is sounded m bru^, chu^, correct, doi, direct, 
deficit, fa^, exac^, ne^, preterit, suspect, stricz!, Christ, but not 
in Jesus-Christ, &c. 

t in sept, huu,, \ingt, is sounded excepc when it comes before 
a consonant. 

t is seldom carried to the next word ; t in e< (and) is always 
silent. 

20. V is a little softer than the English v. Ex. riande, meat ; voile, 

\eil. 

21. W which is found only in foreign words, is pronounced like v. 

Ex. TFurtemberg, TFestphalie. In a few other words it has 
the pronunciation of the Enghsh w. Ex. whig, whist. 

22. X initial, which in French is only found in a few words, is pro- 



THE CONSONANTS. 29 

nounced like gz. Ex. aylon, cotton-plant; Xavier, X€no- 

phon, Xante, Xantippe. 

Xerxes is pronounced gzercess. 
X following an initial e, and preceding a vowel or an h, is also 

sounded like gz. Ex. ea;il, exile ; examiner, to examine ; ex- 

hiber, to exhibit. 
X not following an initial e, but coming between two vowels, 

sounds like ks. Ex. axe, axis ; lucre, luxury ; Alexandre, 

Alexander ; maxime, maxim. ; setce, sex. 
X sounds like ss in the following words: six, six; dix, ten; 

soixante, sixty ; Bruxelles, Brussels / Auxonne, Auxerre, Aix- 

en-Provence. 

In sixieme, dixieme, deuxieme, dix-sept, dix-huit, dix-neuf, 

it is pronounced like z in zone. 
X final is generally silent. Ex. prix, price ; croix, cross ; voix, 

voice. 

Exceptions : x is sounded like ks at the end of names of 

Greek and Latin origin. Ex. Ajax, Styx, etc. In Aix-la- 

Chapelle it has the same sound. 

The X of deux, six, dix, coming before a consonant is silent, 

except in the cases mentioned above ; i. e., in dix-sept, dix- 

huit, dix-neuf. 
X when carried to the next word, sounds like z. 
23. Z sounds as in the English words zinc, zone. Ex. zele, zeal; 

zenith, zenith. 
z final is generally silent. Ex. nez, nose; chez, with, (S;c., 

allez, go. 

Exceptions : gaz, gas. In Metz, Suez, &c., it sounds like ss. 
z final is generally carried to the next word when that word 

commences with a vowel, or an h mute. 

Exercise 4. 

5. (b) baume, halsam; hlessnre, wound ; hrun, hrown ; Shsohition, 

absolution ; abstrait, abstract ; abbaye, abbey ; Jacob, Jacob. 

6. (c) cacher, to conceal; coin, corner; decuple, decuple; cire, 

wax; cinq, Jive; chercher, to seek ; je cache, /conceal; pa- 
triarche, patriarch ; patriarchat, patriarchate ; chambre, 
chamber ; arche, arch ; changer, to change ; orchestre, 
orchestra ; charbon, coal ; sac, bag ; sue, juice ; clerc, clerk; 
banc, bench ; Qauc, Jiank ; second, second ; fecond, fruitful ; 
faQon, fashion ; regu, received. 

7. (d) daim, deer; don, gift; admirer, to admire; bord, border; 



So TEOISIilMELEgON. 

nord, north ; sud, south, ; Obed, Obed ; Talmud, Talmud ; 
grand age, advanced age ; rend-il, does he render P prend-il, 
does he take P 

8. (f) foin, hay ; faim, hunger; froid, cold ; bref, short; soif, thirst ; 

suif, tallow; clef, key ; chef, chief; chef-d'oeuvre, master- 
\ jpiece ; oeuf, egg ; oeufs, e^r^s ; ceuf frais, fresh egg ; boeuf, oa;, 

5ee/; boeufs, oxen ; neuf maisons, rdne houses ; neuf cheyaux, 
nine horses ; neuf amis, nine friends. 

9. (g) gager, io&e^; gosier, throat; gibier, game; guide, guide; 

ligue, league ; il ligua, he leagued ; nous liguons, we league ; 
aiguille, needle; aiguillon, goad; cigue, hemlock ; digne, 
worthy ; regne, reign ; Eopagne, Spain ; Pologne, Poland ; 
brugnon, nectarine; soignant, taking care; pi gnant^ joining / 
stagnant, stagnant; rang honorable, honorable rank. 

10. (li) hate, haste ; hohte, shame ; haut, high ; herbe, herbage ; 

almanach, almanac. 

11. ( j) jujube, jujube; jeune, young ; juger, to judge ; jurer, to 

swear ; jonc, rush; joindre, to join ; dejeuner, to breakfast; 
Juif. Jew ; jeu, play. 

12. lame, blade; loi, law; illegal, illegal; HSiCAte, unlawful ; 

paille, straw ; soleil, sun ; pareil, similar ; bail, lease ; raiUer, 
to rail; souiller, to soil; caille, quail ; canaille, rabble; ville, 
iown ; village, village ; mille, wi7e, thousand ; peril, peril ; 
pointiUeux, punctilious; baril, barrel; fusil, gun; gentil- 
homme, nobleman; gentilshommes, noblemen; bouteille, 
bottle. 
13.(mn)mon, my; marge, margin; nom, name; champ, field; 
moine, monk; prompt, quick; condamner, to condemn; 
faim, hunger ; son argent, his money ; bon appetit, good 
appetite ; lien etroit, close connection. 

15. (p) partir, to go away ; coup, blow ; temps, weather ; drap, 

0cloth ; sept, seven ; bapteme, baptism ; cap, cape ; Alep, 
Aleppo. 

16. (q) querir, to fetch ; quitter, to leave; musique, music ; logique, 

logic; qnaxsLUte, forty ; quoi, what; aquatique, aquatic; 

Quintilien,. Quintilian ; cinq, fve ; cinq livres, jive books. 
IV. (r) ranger, to arrange ; errer, to err ; arriver, to arrive ; verser, 

to pour ; je courrai, I will run ; je courais, I was running ; 

jouir, to enjoy ; car, for ; plaisir, plecLsure ; amer, bitter ; 

parler, to speak; changer, to change; fer, iron; hiver, 

winter. 
18. (s) silence, silence ; soin, care ; sans, without ; base, base ; rose, 



THE ARTICLE. 31 

rose; chose, thing; observer, to observe; rasoir, razor; 
parasol, parasol ; science, science ; schisme, schism ; scie, 
saw ; scheme, schema, ; gras, fat ; pas, step ; lambris, wain- 
scot ; Barras, Barras ; Romulus, Samos; vous avez, you 
have ; nous aimons, we love. 

19. (t) tiers, third ; tiare, tiara ; tort, wrong ; portion, portion ; 

sanction, sanction; essential, essential; partiaMte, partiality , 
section, section ; question, question ; bastion, bastion ; obser- 
vation, observation; minutie, minutia ; democratic, demo- 
cracy; amitie, friendship ; initiation, initiation ; mot, word/ 
lot, lot ; sept, seven ; sept livres, seven books ; et, and ; vingt 
livres, twenty books. 

20. (v) voir, to see ; ya,, go ; leve, raise; lever, to raise; visage, /ace/ 

vive, f. lively. 

21. (w) Westphalie, Weimar, Wurms, Wurtemberg. 

22. (x) xy Ion, cotton plant ; Xenophon ; exiler, to exile ; excuser, to 

excuse ; luxe, luxury ; Alexandre, Alexander ; maxime, 
maxim ; soixantieme, sixtieth ; six, six ; sixieme, sixth ; six 
Hvres, six boohs ; Bruxelles, Brussels ; Aix-la-Chapelle ; dix, 
ten; Phenix; Ajax; deux hommei, two men; dix amis, 
ten friends. 

23. (z) zele, zeal ; zone, zone ; zoologie, zoology ; vous lisez, you 

read; nez, nose; Metz; allez-y, go there ; venez ici, come 

here. 

^^^ For the division of words into syllables, see Reading 

Lessons, page 474. 



LEgON ly. LESSON IV. 

THE ARTICLE LE, LA. — GENDER. 

1. In French the article [§ 13, (2.)] has, in the singular, a distinct 
form for each gender. 

Le fils, the son; La fiUe, the daughter, the girl; 

Le frure, the brother ; La scEur, the sister. 

2. Before a word commencing with a vowel or an h mute, [L. 3, 10,] 
the article is the same for both genders. [§ 13, (7.)] Ex. 

Laieul, the grandfather f L'aieule, the grandmother \ 

L'hote, the landlord i L'hotesse, the landlady, .^ 



S2 



QUATEIfeME LEgON. 



3. There are in French only two genders, the masculine and the 
feminine. [§ 4.] Every noun, whether denoting an animate or an 
inanimate object, belongs to one of these two genders. 



Masc. L'homme, ihe man ; 
Le livre, the book; 
L'arbre, ihe tree ; 

Pem. La femme, ihe woman ; 
La table, ihe idble; 
La plume, ihe pen ; 



Le lion, the lion ; 
Le papier, the paper; 
Le bois, the wood. 

La lionne, ihe lioness ; 
La feuille, the leaf; 
La pone, the door. 



4. Avoir, to ha ve, in the Present of the Indicative. 

Interrogatively. 

Have If 



Affirmatively. 

J'ai, 

Tuas,[§33.(L)(2.)] 

II a, 

Ellea, 

Nous avons, 

Yous avez, 

Us ont, m. 

Elles ont, f. 



I have ; 
Thou hast; 
He has ; 
She has; 
We have ; 
You have ; 
TJiey have ; 
They have ; 



Ai-je? 
As-tu ? 
A-t-il ? 
A-t-eUe ? 
Avons-nous ? 
Avez-vous? 
Ont-ils ? m. 
Ont-eUes? f. 



Hast thouf 
Has he ? 
Has she f 
Have we ? 
Have you f 
Have they ? 
Have they ? 



5. The e of the pronoun je is eUded, when that pronoun comes 
before a vowel or an h mute. [§ 146.J 

6. In interrogative sentences, when the third person singular of a 
verb ends with a vowel, and is immediately followed by a pronoun, a 
tj called euphonic, must be placed between the verb and the pronoun. 

A-t-il? Has he f A-t-elle? Has she f 



Resume of Examples. 



Le pere a la viande, vous avez le 

cafe, et j'ai I'eau. 
L'homme a le paui, renfant a le sel, 

et nous avous le poivro. 



The father has the meat, you have the 
coffee, and I have the water. 

TJie man has the bread, the child has 
the salt, and we have the pepper. 



Avoine, f. oats; 
Ble, m. wheat; 
Boucher, m, butcher ; 
Boulanger, m. baker; 
Cheval, m. horse; 
Eau, f. water ; 
Et, and; 
Earine, f flour ; 
Fille, f girl, daughter ; 



Exercise 5. 

Ere re, m. brother; 
Livre, m. book; 
Madame, madam; 
Mademoiselle, mJss ; 
Meuuier, m. miller; 
Monsieur, J/r., sir. 
Non, no; 
Oui, yes ; 
Pain, m, bread; 



Plume, f.pen; 
Qui, who ; 
Sel, m. salt ; 
Seulement, only; 
Table, f table ; 
The, m. tea; 
Yiande, f. meat; 
Tm, m. wine ; 
Vinaigre, m. vinegar. 



1. Qui a le pain? 2. Le boulanger a le pain. 3. A-t-il la farine ? 4. 
Oui, monsieur; il a la farine. 5. Avons-nous la viande ? 6. Oui, monsieur; 



CONTRACTION OF THE ARTICLE. 33 

vous avez la viande et le pain. 7. Le meunier a la farine. 8. Le 
boulanger a la farine et le ble. 9. Avons-nous le livre et la plume ? 
10. Oui, mademoiselle; vous avez le livre et la plume. 11. Leboucher 
a la viande. 12. Le meunier a la viande, et j 'ai le cafe. 13. Avez- 
vous I'eau et le sel ? 14. Oui, monsieur ; nous avons I'eau, le sel, et 
I'avoine. 15. Avons-nous le the ? 16. ISTon, monsieur ; la fiUe a le 
the, le vinaigre et le sel. 17. Ai-je le vin ? 18. Non, madame ; 
vous avez seulement le vinaigre et la viande. 19. Avez-vous la table ? 
20. Oui, madame ; j'ai la table. 

Exercise 6. 
1. Have you the wheat ? 2. Yes, sir ; I have the wheat. 3. Who 
has the meat ? 4. The butcher has the meat and the salt. 5. Has 
he the oats ? 6. No, madam ; the horse has the oats. 7. Have we 
the wheat ? 8. You have the wheat and the flour. 9. Who has the 
salt? 10. I have the salt and the meat. 11. Have we the vinegar, 
the tea, and the coffee ? 12. No, sir ; the brother has the vinegar. 
13. Who has the horse ? 14. The baker has the horse. 15. Have 
we the book and the pen? 16. No, miss; the girl has the pen, and 
the miller has the book. 17. Have you the table, sir ? 18. No, sir; 
I have only the book. 19. Who has the table? 20. We have the 
table, the pen, and the book. 



LEgON Y. LESSON V. 

CONTRACTION OF THE ARTICLE, ifcc. 

1. The article ?e, with the preposition de preceding, must be con- 
tracted into du^ when it comes before a word in the masculine singu- 
lar, commencing with a consonant or an h aspirated. [L. 3, 10; 
§ 13, (8.) (9.)] 

Du frere, of the brother; Du chateau, of the castle; 

Du heros, of the hero ; Du chemin, of the waij. 

2. Before feminine words, and before masculine words commencing 
with a vowel, or an h mute, the article le is not blended with the pre- 
position. 

De la c'.ame, f. )fthe lady; De I'amie, f. of the female friend ; 

Do I'argeut, m. of the money; De I'honneur, m. of the honor. 

3. In French, the name of the possessor follows the name of the 
object possessed. [§ 76, (10.)] 

La raaison du raedecin, Tlie physician's house ; 

L'arbre du jardin, The tree of the garden; 

La lettre de la soeur, The sister's letter* 



34 CINQUIilME LEgON". 

4. The name of the material of wliich an object is composed foL 
lows always the name of the object; the two words being connected 
by the preposition de {d' before a vowel or an h mute). [§ 76, (ll.)J 

L'habit de drap, TJie cloth coat ; 

La robe de sole, The silk dress ; 

La moutre d'or, The gold watch. 

Resume of Examples. 

Le tailleur a Thabit de drap du The tailor has the physician's cloth 

medecin. coat. 

Yous avez la lettre de la soeur du Tou have the baker's sister's letter, {(ha 

boulanger. letter of the sister of the baker.) 

A-t-il le livre de la dame ? Mas he the ladi/s book i 

Exercise 7, 

Argent, m. 5z7wr, TOOwey ; Couteau, m. knife; Porte-crayon, m. pencil- 

Bas, m, stocking ; Cuir, ra. leather. ■ case ; 

Bois, m. wood ; Dame, f. lady ; Robe, f. dress. 

Chapeau, m. hat; Drap, m. cloth; Satin, m. satin: 

Charpentier, m. carpen- Foin, m. Jiay ; Soeur, f' sister; 

ier ; Habit, m. coat; Soie, £ silk; 

Cordounier, m. shoema- Laine, f. wool, woollen; Soulier, m. shoe; 

ker ; Mais, but ; Table, f table ; 

Coton, m. cotton; Or, m. gold; Tailleur, m. tailor. 

1. Avez-vous la montre d'or ? 2. Oui, madame ; j'ai la montre 
d'or et le chapeau de soie. 3. Monsieur, avez-vous le livre du tailleur ? 
4. Non, monsieur; j'ai le livre du medecin. 5. Ont-ils le pain du 
Doulanger ? 6. lis ont le pain du boulanger et la farme du meunier. 
i. Avez-vous le porte-crayon d'argent? 8. Oui, monsieur; nous 
avons le porte-crayon d'argent. 9. Avons-nous I'avoine du cheval ? 
10, Vous avez I'avoine et le foin du cheval. 11. Quia l'habit de drap 
du charpentier ? 12, Le cordonnier a le chapeau de soie du tailleur. 
13. Le tailleur a le souher de duir du cordonnier. 14. Avez-vous la 
table de bois ? 15. Oui, monsieur ; j'ai la table de bois du charpentier. 
16. Ont-ils le couteau d'argent? 17. Il§ ont le couteau d'argent 
18. Le frere du medecin a la montre d'argent. 19. La sceur du 
cordonnier a la robe de soie. 20. A-t-elle le Soulier de cuir? 
21. Non, madame; elle a le Soulier de satin. 22. Avons-nous le bas 
de laine ? 23. Non, monsieur ; vOus avez le bas de soie du tailleur. 
24. Qui a le bas de coton ? 25. Le medecin a le bas de coton. 26. La 
dame a le Soulier de satin de la soeur du boulanger. 

Exercise 8. 
1. Have you the tailor's book ? 2. No, sir ; I have the physician's 
watch. 3. Who has the gold watch? 4. The lady has the gold watch 



NOUNS USED IN THE PARTITIVE SENSE. 35 

and the silver pencil-case. 5. Have you the tailor's shoe ? 6. I have 
the tailor's cloth shoe. 7. Have we the wooden table ? 8. Yes, sir ; 
you have the wooden table. 9. Have they the silver knife ? 10. They 
have the silver knife. 11. The lady has the silver knife and tho 
gold peucd-case. 12. Has she the satin dress ? 13. The physician's 
sister has the satin dress. 14. Who has the wood? 15. The car- 
penter's brother has the wood. 16. Have you the woollen stocking? 
17. No, sir ; but I have the cotton stocking. 18. Who has the 
baker's bread? 19. We have the baker's bread and the miller's 
flour. 20. Have we the horse's hay ? 21. You have the horse's 
oats. 22. Have we the tailor's silk hat ? 23, Yes, sir ; you have the 
tailor's silk hat and the shoemaker's leather shoe. 24. Have you the 
cloth shoe of the physician's sister ? 25. No, madam ; I have the 
lady's silk dress. 



LECON YI. LESSON VI. 



NOUNS USED IN THE PARTITIVE SENSE. 

1. The article, contracted with or preceded by the preposition de, 
according to Rules 1 and 2 of Lesson 5, is placed in French before 
words used in a partitive sense. Such words may generally be known 
In English whea some or any is or may be prefixed to them, [§ 13, 
(10.) § 78, (l.)j 

Du pain, ^read, or some bread; 

De la viande, Meat, or some meat ; 

De I'argent, Money, or some money, 

% The French numeral adjective, un^ m. une, f. answers to the 
Enghsh indefinite article, a or an, [§ 13, (4.) (11,)] 

Un homme, A man ■ 

Une femrae, A wom^n, 

3. The e of the preposition de is ehded before un and une, [§ 14G.] 

I D'un livre, m. Of or from a booh ; 

D'uue maison, f. Of or from a hozise. 

4. WTien the nominative or subject of an interrogative sentence is 
a noun, it should be placed before the verb ; and immediately after 
the verb, in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in compound tenses, 
a pronoun must be placed, agreeing with the nominative in gender and 
number. [§ 76, (4.) (5.)] See also L. 56, R. 1. 



86 



SIXIijME LEgON, 



Le medecin a-t-il de I'argent ? 
Le boucher a-t-il de la viande ? 
Le libraire a-t-d du papier ? 
La dame a-t-elle de la.^oie ? 



Has the physician money f 
Has the butcher meat ? 
Has the bookseller paper f 
Has the lady silk ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez-vous du pain ? 

Vous avez du pain, du beurre, et du 
fromage. 

Totre frere a-t-il une livre de beurre ? 

Avez-vous le livre d'un libraire? 

Non, j'ai le livre d'uue dame. 

La soeur du medecin a-t-elle du pa- 
pier et de I'encre ? 



Have you bread? 

You have bread, butter, and cheese. 

Has your brother a pound of butter f 
Have you a bookseller's book ? 
No, 1 have a lady's book. 
Has the physiciaii's sister paper and 
ink? 



5. It ■will be seen by some of the above examples, that the ar- 
ticle must be repeated before every noun used in a partitive sense. 



Acajou, m. mahogany ; 
Acier, m. steel ; 
Aujourd'hui, to-day; 
Beurre, m. buittr; 
Biere, f. beer; 
Boeuf, m. beef; 
Cafe, m. coffee; 
Cuiller, f.- spoon; 
De, m. thimble; 



Exercise 9. 

Encre, f. ink; 
Epicier, m. grocer ; 
Fils, m. son; 
JFourchette, t fork ; 
Fromage, m. cheese; 
Gant, m. glove; 
Libraire, m. bookseller ; 
Livre, m. book; 
Livre, f. pound ; 



Ma, f. my; 
Morceau, va. piece; 
Papier, m. paper ; 
Plume, f. pen ; 
Sucre, m. sugar; 
Vm, m. wine; 
Votre, your ; 
The, m. tea. 



1. Avez-vous de la viande ? 2. Oui, monsieur; j'ai une livre de 
viande. 3. Votre fils a-t-il un morceau de pain ? 4. Oui, madame ; 
11 a un morceau de pain. 5. Le libraire a-t-il un livre ? 6. 11 a de 
I'encre et du papier. 7. Votre soeur a-t-elle une montre d'or ? 8. 
Elle a une montre d'or et un de d'argent. 9. Le boulanger a-t-il du 
vin ou de la biere? 10. Le boulanger a du the et du cafe. 11. Votre 
frere a-t-il du fromage ? 12. II a du fromage et du beurre. 13. La 
dame a-t-elle une cuiller d'argent ? 14. La dame a une cuiller et une 
fourchette d'argent. 15. Le boucher a-t-il de la viande aujourd'hui ? 
16. Oui, monsieur ; il a un morceau de boeuf. 17. Le charpentier 
/a-t-il une table? 18. Oui, monsieur; il a une table d'acajou. 
19. Avez-vous le livre du medecin? 20. Non, madame; mais j'ai 
le livre de votre soeur. 21. Qui a du cafe et du sucre ? 22. L'epicier 
a du cafe et du sucre. 23. La soeur du libraire a-t-elle un gant ? 
24. Non, monsieur ; mais elle a un livre. 25. A-taelle une plume 
d'acier? 26. Non, monsieur; elle a une plume d'or. 27. Vous 
avez le porte-crayon du medecin. 



the negative sentence, etc. 37 

Exercise 10. 

1. Have you any tea ? 2. Yes, madam ; I have a pound of tea. 
3. Who has bread ? 4. The baker, has bread, butter, and cheese. 
5. Has the tailor cloth ? 6. The tailor has a piece of cloth. 7. Has 
the physician gold ? 8. Yes, sir ; the physician has gold and silver. 
9. Has the lady a silver watch ? 10. Yes, miss (madam) ; the lady has 
a silver watch and a gold pen. 11. Has your sister silk? 12. Yes, 
sir; she has silk and cotton. 13. Have you a knife ? 14. Yes, sir; 
I have a steel knife and a silver fork. 15. Save you meat to-day, 
sir ? 16. Yes, sir ; I have a piece of beef. 17. Has your carpenter 
a mahogany table ? 18. Yes, sir ; he has a mahogany table. 19. Has 
your sister a glove ? 20. Yes, sir ; my sister has a silk glove. 
21. Has the bookseller's son a gold pencil case? 22. Yes, sir; he 
has a gold pencil case and a steel pen. 23. Who has your sister's 
watch? 24. Your brother has the' gold watch and the silk hat. 
25. We have gold, silver, and steel. (See Rule 5.) 



LEgOlSr YII. LESSOR YII. 

THE NEGATIVE SENTENCE, ETC. 

1. To render a sentence negative, ne is placed before the verb, and 
pas after it. 

Je n'ai pas le cheval. I have not the horse. 

Yous n'avez pas la maison. You have not the house. 

2. When the verb is in a compound tense, [§ 45, (8.)] the first 
negative ne is placed before the auxihary, and the" second between 
the auxiliary and the participle. 

Je n'ai pas eu le cheval. / have not had the horse. 

Yous n'avez pas eu la maison. You have not had the house. 

3. It will be seen in the above examples that the e of ne is elided, 
when the verb begins with a vowel. [§ 146.] 

4. When the words ni, neither ; rien, nothing ; jamais, never ; per- 
Bonne, no one, nobody, occur, the word ne only is used, and those 
words take the place of 'pas. 

Je n'ai ni lo livre ni le papier. I have neither the hook nor the paper. 

A vez-vous quel que chose ? Have you any thing? 

Nous n'avons rien. We have notJdng, or not any thing. 

Personne n'a le livre. [§ 41, (6,)] No one has the book. 

Vou3 n'avez jamais le couteau. You never have the knife. 



88 SEPTltlME LEgON. 

5. A noun used in a partitive sense (Lesson 6, Rule 1), and being 
the object of a verb conjugated negatively, should not be preceded 
by the article, but by the preposition de only.' [§ 78, (7.)]. 

Nous n'avons pas d'argent. We have no money. 

Yous n'avez pas de viaude. You have no meat. 

6. Quelqu'un, some one, any one ; [§ 41, (7.)] quelque chose, some- 
ihing, any thing ; should only be used in an affirmative or interroga- 
tive sentence, or in a sentence which is negative and interrogative at 
the same time. 

Avons-nous quelqu'un ? Have we any one ? 

Avez-vous quelque chose ? Have you any thing f 

N 'avons-nous pas quelque chose ? Have we not something ? 

7. In a negative sentence, ne — personne, signifies nohody, not any 
tody ; and ne--rrien, nothing, not any thing. 

Je n'ai personne. / have no one, not any one. 

Yous n'avez rien. You have nothing, or not any (king. 

8. Avoir, to have, in the Present of the Indicative. 

Negatively. Negatively and Interrogatively. 

Je n'ai pas, I have not; N'ai-je pas? Have I not? 

Tu n'as pas, Thou hast not; N'as-tu pas ? Hast thou not? 

II n'a pas, He has not; N'a-t-il pas ? Has he not ? 

Elle n'a pas, She has not; 2Si'a-t-elle pas? Has she not? 

Nous n'avons pas, We have not ; N'avons-nous pas ? Have we not ? 

Yous n'avez pas, You have not; N'avez-vous pas? Have you not? 

lis n'ont pas, ra. They have not ; N'ont-ils pas ? m. Have they not ? 

Elles n'ont pas, f. They have not. N'ont-elles pas ? f. Have they not f 

Resume of Examples. 

Le tailleur a-t-il le bouton ? Has the tailor the button ? 

Le tailleur n'a pas le bouton. The tailor has not the button. 

11 n'a pas eu le drap. He has not had the cloth. 

II n'a ni le bois ni le fer. He has neither the wood nor the irork. 

Ai-je de la viande ? Have Imeaif 

Yous n'avez pas de viande, (R. 5.) You have no meat. 

Avons-nous quelque chose? Have we any thing? 

Nous n'avons rien. We have nothing, or not any thing., 

Nous n'avons jamais de cafe, (R, 5,) We never have coffee. 

Yous n'avez pas de livre. You, have no {not any) booA 

^ "When, however, the sentence is interrogative as well as negative, the 
article is sometimes used. In those cases, however, ne and ^as are ren- 
dered by not instead of no. 

N'avons-nous pas de -rargent ? Have we not money ? 

N'avez-vous pas de la viande ? Have you not meat ? 

Without the article. 
N'avons-nous pas d'argent ? Have we no money? 

N'avez-vous pas de viande ? Have you no meat?^ _ ^ 



THE NEGATIVE SEKTENCE, 39 

Exercise 11. 

Ami, m. friend ; Drap, m. cloth ; Personne, in. nobody ; 

Anglelerre, f. England; Dutout, at all; Quelque chose, m. some- 

Aussi, also; France, f France; thing, any thing ; 

Autre, other ; Histoire, f. history ; Quelqu'un, m. some one, 

Chapelier, m. hatter ; Libraire, m. bookseller; any one ; 

Chien, m. dog ; Marchand, m. merchant ; Sole, f. silk ; 

Coton, m. cotton; Mon, m. my ; Yelours, va. velvet; 

Cousin, m. cousin ; Ni, neither^ nor ; Yoisin, m. neighbor. 
Deux, ^wo ; 

1. Le chapelier a-t-il: de la soie ? 2. Le chapelier n'a pas de sole, 
mais il a du velours. 3. A-t-il du velours de coton ? 4. Non, mon- 
sieur ; il n'a pas de velours de coton, il a du velours de soie. 5. Avez- 
vous de la viande ? 6. Oui, monsieur; j'ai de la viande. 7. Le me- 
decin n'a pas d'argent. 8. Qui a de I'argent ? 9. Le marchand n'a 
pas d'argent, mais il" a du drap, du velours et de la soie. 10. Avez- 
VOU9 quelque chose ? 11. Non, monsieur ; je n'ai rien du tout. 12. Le 
tailleur a-t-il deux boutons d'argent? 13. Non, monsieur; il a deux 
boutons de soie. 14. Qui a votre chien ? 15. Le voisin a le chien de 
mon cousin. 16. N'a-t-il pas votre cheval aussi ? 17. Non, monsieur; 
il a le cheval de votre ami. 18. Avez-vous I'histoire de France? 
19. Non, madame ; je n'ai ni I'histoire de France ni I'histoire d'An- 
gleterre. 20. N'avez-vous ni le livre ni le papier? 21. Non, made- 
moiselle ; je n'ai ni I'un ni I'autre. 22. Qui a du papier ? 23. Le 
libraire n'a pas de papier. 24. Quelqu'un a-t-il un livre ? 25. Per«» 
Sonne n'a de livre. 

Exercise 12. 

1. Has the baker velvet ? 2. No, sir ; the baker has no velvet. 
3. Who has silk velvet ? 4. The hatter has silk velvet and a silk hat. 
5. Have you two silver buttons ? 6. No, sir ; I have a cloth coat, a 
silk hat, and a velvet shoe. 7- Has your neighbor a wooden table ? 
8. Yes, sir ; he has a mahogany table. 9. Has your cousin a history 
of England ? 10. No, sir; he has a history of France. 11. I have 
neither the cloth nor the velvet. 12. We have neither the meat nor 
the coffee. 13. Has any one a book ? 14. Your cousin has a book, 
a velvet coat, and a silk hat- 15. Have you the physician's book ? 

16. Yes, madam ; I have the physician's book, and the lady's gold pen. 

17. Has the merchant cloth? 18. The merchant has no cloth, but he 
has money. 19. Who has your neighbor's dog ? 20. Nobody has 
my neighbor's dog. 21. Has anyone my book? 22. No one has 
your book. 23. Has your cousin's brother any thing? 24. No, sir; 
he has nothing. 25. Who has your friend's book ? 26. Your brother 
has my cousin's book. 27. Has he the tailor s coat ? 28. He has not 
the tailor's coat. 29. We have neither the cloth nor the silk. • 



40 HUITltlMELEgON. 

LEgo^ yin. lesso:n' viii. 

IDIOMS rOKMED WITH ATOIR, TO RA VE, &C. 

1. The rerb avoir is used idiomatically, in French, with the words 
qnelque chose, chaud^ froid^ faim, lionte, peur^ raison, tort^ soif, soni- 
meil. 

J'ai quelque chose. Something is the matter with me, 

II a chau(J. JHe is v:arm. 

Elle a faim. She is hungry. 

Nous avons honte. We are ashamed. 

Yous avez peur. You are afraid. 

lis out tort. TJiey are wrong. 

Avez-vous raison ? Are you right ? 

J'ai sommeiL J am sleepy. 

2. A noun, whether taken in a general or in a particular sense, is, 
in French, commonly preceded by the article le, in its different forms. 
[§ 77, (1.) (2.)] 

Le pain est necessaire. Bread is necessary. 

H a le pain. He has the bread. 

3. A noun, preceded by the article le, retains that article after ni, 
nor, neither ; but a noun taken in a partitive sense, [L. 6, 1,] takes 
after ni, neither article nor preposition. 

Je n'ai ni Tarbre ni le jardin. I have neither the tree nor the garden. 

Nous n' avons ni arbre ni jardin. We have neither tree nor garden. 

4. A noun, taken in a partitive sense, and preceded by an adjec- 
tive, takes merely the preposition de. [§ 78, (3.)] 

5. The following adjectives are generally placed before the noun. 

Beau, handsome, BrsLve, worthy ; Gvos, large, big ; Mauvais. Jac?; 

fine, beautiful ; Cher, dear ; Jeune, young ; Meilleur, better ; 

Bon, good ; Grand, great, large; Joli, pretty ; Petit, small ; 

Vieux, old; Vilain, ugly. 

RESiiMi] OF Examples. 

Avez-vous quelque chose ? Is anything the matter with youf 

Je n'ai rien, {literally, Ihave nothing.) Nothing is the raatter with me. 

Votre frere a-t-il chaud ? Is your brother warm 7 

II n'a ni froid ni chaud. He is neither warm nor cold. 

Votre soeur a-t-elle faim ou soif? Is your sister hungry or thirsty t 

Elle n'a pas faim, mais honte. She is not hungry, but ashamed. 

Yotre ami a-t-il sommeil ? Is your friend sleepy ? 

Mon ami n'a ni sommeil ni peur. My friend is neither sleepy nor afraict, 

Avez-vous raison ou tort ? Are you right or wrong ? 

Avez-vous du lait ou du vin ? Have you milk or wine f 

Je n'ai ni lait ni vin, [R. 3.] Ihave neither milk nor wine. 

Avez-vous le lait ou le \an ? Have you the milk or the wine? 

Je n'ai ni le lait ni le vin. [R 3.] Ihave neither the milk nor the wine. 
Avez-vous do beau drap et de bon Have you Jiandsome cloih and good 
cafe? a^eet 



idioms with avoir, etc. 41 

Exercise 13. 

Au contrairo, on the con- Fusil, ra. gun ; Petit, small, little ; 

irary ; . Froid, m. cold ; Peur, f. fear, afraid ; 

Boutoii, m. button; Gros, large ; Quel, what, ivhich; 

Capitaine, m. captain; lionte,(. shame,ashamed ; Raison, f. reason, right; 

CoMsm, m. cousin ; Mais, 6w^; 'Riqw, nothing ; 

Cliaud, m. heat, warm ; Marteau, m. hammer ; Tort, m. wrong ; 

Faim, f. hunger, hungry ; Meuuisier, m. joiner ; Sel, m. salt; 

Fer, m. iron. Poivre, m. pepjper ; gommeil, m. sleep, sleepy 
Ferblantier, m. tinman ; 

! 1. Qui a sommeil ? 2. Mon fr^re a faim, mais il n'a pas sommeil 
3. Avez-vous raison ou tort? 4. J'ai raison, je n'ai pas tort. 5. Avez- 
vous le bon fusil de mon frere ? 6. Je n'ai pas le fusil. 7. Avez-voug 
froid aujourd'hui? 8. Je n'ai pas froid; au contraire, j'ai cliaud. 
9. Avez-vous de bon pain? 10. Je n'ai pas de pain. 11. N'avez- 
vous pas faim ? 12. Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. 13. Avez-vous honte ? 
14. Je n'ai ni honte ni peur. 15. A vons-nous du poivre ou du sel ? 
16. Vous n'avez ni poivre ni sel. 17. Quel livre avez-vous? 18. J'ai 
le livre de mon cousin. 19. Avez-vous le marteau de fer ou le mar- 
teau d'argent ? 20. Je n'ai ni le marteau de fer ni le marteau d'argent, 
i'ai le marteau de bois du ferblantier. 21. Avez-vous quelque chose? 
22. Je n'ai rien. 23. Avez-vous le gros hvre du libraire ? 24. Je n'ai 
ni le gros livre du libraire, ni le petit hvre du menuisier ; j'ai le bon 
livre du capitaine. 

Exercise 14. 

1. Are you sleepy, sir ? 2. No, sir ; I am not sleepy, but I am 
hungry. 3. Have you pepper or salt ? 4. I have neither pepper nor 
salt ; I have cheese. 5. Is your brother thirsty or hungry ? 6. My 
brother is neither thirsty nor hungry. 7. Is your sister right or 
wrong ? 8. She is not wrong, she is right. 9. Is the good joiner 
afraid ? 10. He is not afraid, but ashamed. 11. Have you milk or 
cheese ? 12. I have neither milk nor cheese ; I have butter. 13. Have 
you the fine cloth or the good tea? 14. I have neither the fine cloth 
nor the good tea. 15. Is any thing the matter with you, my good 
friend? 16. Nothing is the matter with me, my good sir. 17. Have 
you no bread ? 18. Yes, madam ; I have good bread, good butter, and 
good cheese. 19. Is the carpenter sleepy ? 20. The carpenter is not 
sleepy, but the tinman is hungry. 21. Have you the tinman's wooden 
hammer ? 22. I have not the wooden hammer. 23. Which hammer 
have you ? 24. I have the steel hammer. 25. Have you a good cloth 
coat ? 26. No, sir ; but I have a silk dress. 27. Has the tailor the good 
gold button ? 28. Yes, sir ; he has the good gold button. 29. Who 
has my brother's gold watch ? 30. Some one has the gold watch. 



42 NEUViiMELEgoir. 

LEgON IX. LESSOIT IX. 

THE PRONOUN LE. THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 

1. The pronouns le, Ixivn^ it / la, her^ it, are, in French, placed before 
the verb.^ These pronouns assume the gender of the nouns which 
they represent. 

To jez-vous le couteau ? m. Do you see the knife f 

Je le vois. I see it. 

Voyons-nous la fourchette ? /. Do we see iheforht 

Kous la voyons. We see it. 

2. The vowel of the pronouns le and ?a, is ehded before a verb 
commencing with a vowel or an h mute. [§ 146.] 

Avez-vous le bdton ? m. Have you the stick ? 

Je I'ai. / have it. 

Avons-nous la canne ? / Ilave we the cane f 

Nous Favons. . We have it. 

3. The possessive adjectives mon, m,. ma,/, my ; ton, m. ta,/, tTiy ; 
son, m. sa, /, /m, her^ agree in gender with the object possessed, that ia 
with the noun following them. [§ 21, (1.) (2.)] 

Iklon pupitre, m. ' My desk. 
Avez-vous ma lettre? /. Have you my letter f 

II a son fusil, m. He has his gun. 

II a sa cravate, /. He has his cravat. 

4. Before a feminine noun in the singular, commencing with a 
vowel or an h mute, the mascuhne form, wow, ton^ son, is used. 
[§ 21, (3.)] 

J'ai mon epee, /. / have my sword. 

C'est son habitude, /. Jt is his or her habit. 

Le general a son armee, /. TJie general has his army. 

5. The adjectives notre, our; votre, your; leur, their, are used 
without variation, before a noun of either gender, in the singular. 
[§ 21, (1.)] 

Kotre argent, 772. Our silver. 

Yotre canne, /. Your cane. 

Leur terre, /. Their land. 

6. The possessive pronouns le mien, m. la mienne, /. mine; le 
•tien, 772. la tienne, /. thine / le sien, m. la sienne, /. his or hers ; le 
. notre, m, la notre, /. ours ; le votre, m. la votre, /. yours ; le leur, m. 

la leur, /. theirs, can never be prefixed to nouns. The article prece- 

' Except in 1^q second person singular, and m i\iQ first and second jpersons 
plural of the imperative used affirmatively. 



POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 



43 



ding tliose pronouns, and forming an indispensable part of them, 

takes the gender of the object possessed;^ mien, tien, sien, vary for 

tlie femimne — notre and votre, used as pronouns, have the circumflex 

accent. 

J'ai votre livre et le mien. 
Elle a sa robe et la mienne. 
Yous avez votre plume et la notre. 



/ have your hook and mine. 
She ?ias hur dreas and mine. 
You leave your pen and ours. 



Resumk of Examples. 



Yotre ami a-t-il le mouton ? 

II I'a, elle I'a. 

II ne I'a pas. 

N'avez-vous pas Tencrier d'argent? 

Nous ne I'avons pas. 

Avez-vous votre fusil ou le mien ? 

Je n'ai ni le votre ni le mien. 

Son epouse a-t-elle sa robe ou la 

votre ? 
Elle n'a ni la sienne ni la votre. 
Ne I'avez-vous pas ? 
Votre frere ne I'a-t-il pas ? 



JIas your friend the sheep or muiionf 

He has it, she has it. 

He has it not. 

Have you not the silver inkstand ? 

We have it not. 

Have you your gun or mine ? 

J have neither yours nor mine. 

JIas his wife her dress or yours ? 

She has neither hers nor yours. 

Have you it not ? 

Has not your hrother it f 



Exercise 15. 



Assiette, f plats ; 
Biscuit, m. biscuit ; 
Boeuf, m. beef; 
Boucher, m. butcher ; 
Commode, t chest of 

drawers, bureau ; 
Couteau, m. knife; 



Parent, m. relation ; 
Plat, m. dish; 
Poisson, m. fish ; 
Porcelaine, f. china; 
Sofa, m. sofa ; 
Tout, all; 
Kiroir, m. looking-glass ; Veau, m. veal, calf. 



Crayon, m. pencil ; 
Cuisinier, m. cook ; 
Pourchette, £ fork; 
Matelot, m. sailor ; 
Mouton, m. mutton, 



1. Avez-vous la fourchette d'argent? 2. Oui, monsieur; je I'ai. 
3. Le cuisinier a-t-il le boeuf? 4. Non, monsieur; i\ ne I'a pas. 
5. Quel mouton avez-vous ? 6. J'ai le bon mouton et le bon veau 
du boucher. 7. Yotre parent a-t-il la commode ? 8. Non, monsieur; 
il ne I'a pas. 9. A-t-il mon poisson? 10. Qui a tout le biscuit du 
boulanger? 11. Le matelot n'a ni son pain ni son biscuit. 12. A-t-U 
son couteau et sa fourchette ? 13. II n'a ni son couteau ni sa four- 
chette, il a son assiette [R. 4]. 14. Quel plat a-t-il ? -15. II a le jo'i 
plat de porcelaine. 16. Avez-vous le mien ou le sien ? 17. Je n'ai 
ni le votre ni le sien, j'ai le notre. 18. Avez-vous peur, monsieur? 
19. Non, madame; je n'ai pas peur, j'ai faim. 20. Quelqu'un a-t-il 



^ The article is also contracted with the preposition de into du, (see L. 5, 
R. 1); and with the proposition d into au, when the possessive pronouQ 
refers to a noun in the masculine singular. 

De votre pere et du mien. Of your father and mine* 

A son pere et au mien. To his father and mine. 



44 DIXI6ME LE^ON. 

ma montre d'or? 21. IN'on, monsieur; personne ne I'a. 22. Qu'avez- 
vous, monsieur ? 23. Je n'ai rien. 24. Avez-vous le sofa d'acajou 
de mon menuisier ? 25. Non, monsieur ; je ne I'ai pas. 2G. J'ai 
son joli miroir et son bon crayon. 

Exercise 16. 
1. Have you the silver pencil case ? 2. ISTo, sir ; I have it not 
3. Have you my brotlier's plate ? 4. Yes, madam ; I have it. 5. Has 
the butcher the good biscuit ? 6. He has it not, he has the good 
beef, the good mutton, and the good veal. 7. Have you my knife 
and (my) fork ?i 8. I have neither your knife nor your fork. 
9. Who has the good sailor's biscuit ? 10. The baker has it, and I 
have mine. 11. Have you mine also? 12. I have neither yours 
nor his. 13. Are you hungry ? 14. I am not hungry, I am thirsty 
and sleepy. 15. Are you not ashamed? 16. I^o, sir; I am not 
ashamed, but I am cold. 17. Is your relation right or wrong? 18. My 
relation is right, sir. 19. Has he my china dish or my silver knife? 
20. He has neither your china dish nor your silver knife, he has 
your china plate. 21. Has any one my silver pencil-case ? 22. No 
one has it, but your brother has your cloth coat. 23. Have you 
mine or his ? 24. I have yours. 25. Has the baker the mahogany 
chest of drawers ? 26. He has it not ; he has the mahogany sofa. 
27. Has the tinman my plate ? 28. He has not your plate ; he has 
mine. 29. Which sofa have you ? 30. I have my brother's sofa. 
31. I have neither his nor yours ; I have mine. 



LEgON X. LESSON X. 

THE DEMOXSTEATIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 

1. The demonstrative adjectives ce, m. cette, / this or that, are al- 
ways placed before nouns ; they agree in gender with these nouns. 
[§ 20, (1.)] 

Avez-vous ce parapluie ? m. Have you this or thai umhreUa f 

Vous n'avez pas cette bouteille,/ You have not this or thai bottle. 

2. Before a word masculine singular, commencing with a vowel or 
an h mute, cet takes the place of ce. [§ 20, (1).] 

' The possessive adjective must in Prench be repeated before every 
aoun. [§21,(4.)] 



DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES AND TEONOrNS. 45 

N'avez-vous pas cet argent ? Have you not iJiis or iJmi money ? 

Yous avez eu cet honneur. You have had this or thai honor 

d." "When it is deemed necessary to express, in French, tlie differ- 
ence existing in English between the words this and that, the adverbs 
d and la may be placed after the nouns. [§ 20, (2.)] 

Je n'ai pas ce parasol-ci ; j'ai ce pa- I have not this parasol; I have iJiat 
rasol-la, parasol. 

4. The demonstrative pronouns, celui, m. celle, / this or that^ are 
used to represent nouns, but are never joined with them hke adjec- 
tives. [§36, §37, (1.)] 

J'ai mon parapluie et celui de votre I have my umbrella and your hroiher^s, 

frere, i. e., thai of your brother. 

Yous aTe25 ma robe et celle de ma You have my dress and my sister'' s^ i. e., 

soeur, that of my sister. 

5. The pronouns celui, celle, with the addition of the words ci and 
Za, are used in the sense of this one, that one, the latter, the former. 
[§ 37, (4).] They agree in gender with the word which they repre- 
sent. 

Yous avez celui-ci, mais vous n'avez You have this one (the latter), but you 
pas celui-la. have not that one {the former). 

6. The pronouns ceci and cela, are used absolutely, that is, without 
a noun, in pointing out objects. 

l^Tous n'avons paa ceci, nous avons We have not this, we have that 

cela, 
Ceci ou cela, This or iJiai.. 

Resume of Examples. 

Avez- vous le livre de cet homme ? Have you thai man^s booh? 

Je n'ai pas son livre, j'ai le mien. I have not his book, I have mine. 

Le cuisinier a-t-il ce parapluie ? Has the cook that umbrella'? 

11 n'a pas ce parapluie-ci, il a ce He has not this umbrella, he has that 

parapluie-la, (R. 3.) umbrella. 

Avez-vous celui de votre frere? Have you your brother'' s 7 that of 

your brother. 

Je n'ai pas celui de mon frere ; j'ai / have not my brother's ; I have my 

celui de ma soeur, (R. 4.) sister's ; i. e., that of my brother^ 

that of my sister. 

Avez-vous celni-ci ou celni-la? Have you this one or thai one ? 

Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-ia. J have neither the latter nor the former. 

Quelle robe avez-vous? /. Which dress have youl 

J'ai celle-ci. I have this {one.) 

Avez-vou3 ceci ou cela ? (U. 6.) Have you this or that ? 



46 DIXIIlMELEQON. 

Exercise 17. 

Ardoise, f. slate ; Lettre, f. letter ; Saliere, f. salt stand ; 

Balai, m. broom; Malle, f! trunk; Encrier, m. inkstand; 

Bois, va. wood ; Parasol, m, parosoZ; Etranger, m. sirangerj 

Bouteille, f. bottle ; Poulet, m. chicken ; foreigner ; 

Dame, f. lady ; Plomb, m. lead ; Lait, m. milk ; 

Fromage, m. cheese ; Ne-plus, no longer, not Parapluie, m. umbrella; 

Jardinier, m. gardener ; any more ; Volaille, f. jpouUry. 

1. Yotre frere a-t-il son encrier d'argent ? 2. II ne I'a plus, il a un 
encrier de plomb. 3. Avons-nous la lettre de I'etranger ? 4-. Oui, 
monsieur ; nous avons celle de I'etranger [R. 4,] 5. Votre soeur n'a 
pas son ardoise, mais elle a son chapeau de satin. 6. Le menuisier 
a-t-il votre bois ou le sien ? 7. II n'a ni le mien ni le sien, il a celui 
du jardinier. 8. Avez-vous mon bon parapluie de sole ? 9. J'ai 
votre parapluie de soie et votre parasol de satin. 10. Avez-vous ma 
bouteille ? 11. Je n'ai pas votre bouteille, j'ai la malle de votre 
soeur. 12. Le domestique a-t-il cette saliere? 13. II n'a pas cette 
ealiere-ci ; il a celle-la. 14. Avez-vous le bon ou le mauvais poulet ? 
15. Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. 16. Quel poulet avez-vous ? 17. J'ai 
celui du cuisinier. 18. Le boulanger a-t-il de la volaille ? [L. 6, 
R. 1.] 19. Le boulanger n'a pas de volaille, il a du lait [L. 7, R. 5.] 
20, Avez-vous votre fromage ou le mien ? 21. Je n'aini le votre ni 
le mien, j'ai celui du matelot. 22. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim ? 23. Per- 
sonne n'a faim. 24. Avez-vous quelque chose ? 25. Non, monsieur ; 
je n'ai rien. 

Exercise 18. 
1. Has your brother that lady's umbrella? 2. My brother has that 
lady's umbrella. 3. Have you this parasol or that one ? 4. I have 
neither this (one) nor that (one). 5. Have you the stranger's gold 
watch? 6. No, sir; I have the baker's. 7. Who has my slate? 
8. I have your slate and your brother's. 9. Has the cook a silver 
salt stand ? 10. The cook has a silver salt stand and a silver dish. 
11. Has the cook this poultry or that ? 12. He has neither this nor 
that. 13. Has he this bread or that? 14. He has neither this nor 
that, he has the baker's good bread. 15. Have you my cotton para- 
sol ? 16. I have not your cotton parasol, I have your silk parasol. 
17. Has the gardener a leather trunk ? 18. The gardener has a leather 
trunk. 19. Who has my good cheese? 20. Nobody has your 
cheese, but some one has your brother's. 21. Have you mine or 
his? 22. I have neither yours nor his, I have the stranger's. 23. Has 
the cook this bottle or that broom ? 24. He has this bottle. 25. Havo 
you a lead inkstand? 26. No, sir; I have a china inkstand. 27. Has 



PLtTRAL OF NOtlNS. 47 

the stranger poultry ? 28. The stranger has no poultry, but he has 
money. 29. Your brother is hungry and thirsty, afraid and sleepy. 
30. Is any one ashamed? 31. No, sir; nobody is ashamed. 32. Is 
your brother right or wrong? 33. My brother is right, and yours is 
wrong. 34. Your sister has neither her satin hat nor her velvet 
hat. 



LEgON XI. LESSON XL 

PLURAL OF KOUNS (§ 8), 

1. The plural in French, is generally formed, as in English, by the 
addition of s to the singular. 

Un homme, une femme, ' A man, a woman ; 

Deux hommes, deux femmes, Two men, two women. 

The form h of the article becomes plural by the addition of 5, 
and may be placed before plural nouns of either gender. 

Les homines, les femmes, The men, the women. 

2. 1st Exception to Eule 1. Nouns ending in s, x, z remain unt 
changed for the plural. 

Le bas, les has, The siocJcing, the stockings j 

La voix, les voix, The voice, the voices ; 

Le nez, les nez, The nose, the noses. 

3. 2d Exception, Nouns ending with au, and eil, take x for the 
plural. 

Le bSteau, les bateaux, The loot, the hoats ; 

Le lieu, les lieux, The place, the places. 

4. 3d Exception. The following nouns ending in ou, take x for 
the plural : hijou, jewel ; caillou, ^e6&?e ; chou, cabbage; genou, knee; 
hibou, owl; joujou, plaything. 

Les bijoux, les cailloux, les choux, TJie Jewels, the pebbles, the cabbages ; 
Leshiboux, les genoux, les joujoux, The owls, the knees, the pla% 



5. 4th Exception. The following nouns ending in ail change that 
termination into aux for the plural : bail, lease ; corail, coral ; email, 
enamel ; soupirail, air-hole ; sous-bail, under-lease; travail, labor. 

Les baux, les coraux, les ettiaux, Tlie leases, the corals, the enamels; 
Les soupiraux, les travaux, les sous- The ^air-holes, the labors, the under- 
baux, leases. 



48 



ONZlllME LEg ON, 



6. 5th Exception. Nouns ending in al form their plural in avx. 

Le cheval, las chevaux, The horse, the horses; 

Le general, les generaux, The general, the generals. 

Bal, hall; carnaval, carnival; chacal, jackal; regal, treat, follow the 
general rule. 

7. 6th Exception. Ciel, heaven ; ceil, eye ; and aieul, ancestoVj 
form their plural irregularly. 

Les cieux, les yens, les aieux, Tlie heavens, the eyes, the ancestors. 

Eor further rules see § 8, § 9, and § 10 of the Second Part 
Resume of Exa:mples. 



Les Anglais ont-ils les chevaux du 

general ? 
Les generaux n'ont pas les bijoux. 
Les enfants ont-ils les cailloux ? 
Les jeux de 1' enfant. 
Les tableaux de cette eglise. 
Avez-vous les oiseaux de ce bois ? 
Avez-vons les encriers d' argent de 

ma soenr ? 
f'ai les bijoux d'argeut et d'or de 

I'etranger. 
Les rois n'ont-ils pas les palais de 

marbre ? 



Have the English the generaVs horses f 

The generals have not the jewels. 
Have the children the pebbles ? 
TJie chilcVs eyes. 
Tlie pictures of that church. 
Have you the birds of that wood ? 
Have you my sister^ s silver inkstands ? 

I have the gold and silver jewels of the 

foreigner. 
Have not the kings the marble pal' 

aces? 



Baril, m. barrel; - 
Bas, m. stocking; 
Chocolat, m. chocolate; 
Bijou, m. jewel; 
Chou, m. cabbage; 
Dans, in; 
Enfant, m. child; 
Per, m. iron; 
Fils, m. son ; 



EXEECISE 19. 

General, m. general; 
Gilet, m. waistcoat ; 
Grand, adj., large, great; 
Jardin, m. garden ; 
Joujou, m. plaything ; 
Legume, m. vegetable ; 
Marchand, m. merchant; 
Marechal, m. blacksmith; 
Marteau, m. hainmer ; 



Mauvais, bad; 
Meunier, m. miUer; 
Moreeau, m. piece; 
Oiseau, m. bird; 
Petit, small; 
Paire, f. pair; 
Poivre, m. pepper; 
Qu', que, lohat ; 
Rien, nothing. 



1. Avez-vous les marteaux du charpentier ? 2. Nous avons les marJ 
teaux du marechal. 3. Les marechaux ont-ils deux marteaux de 
bois ? 4. lis ont deux marteaux de fer. 5. Les generaux ont-ils lea 
chapeaux de sole de I'enfant? 6. lis oi?t les bijoux etlesjoujoux 
de I'enfant. 7. Les enfants ont-ils les oiseaux de votre bois ? 8. lis 
n'ont pas les oiseaux de mon bois, mais ils ont les chevaux de mon 
general. 9. Le marechal a-t-il une paire de bas de laine ? 10. Le 
marechal a deux paires de bas de laine. 11. Monsieur; n'avez-vou& 
pas froid? 12. Non, monsieur; j'ai chaud. 13. Avez-vous du cafe 
ou du chocolat ? 14. J"e n'ai ni cafe ni chocolat. lo. N'avez-vous 



PLUEAL OF PRONOUNS, ETC. 49 

pas les choux de mon grand jar din ? 16. J'ai les legumes de votre 
petit jardin. 17. Votre fils, qu'a-t-il? 18. Moa fils n'a rien. 
19. Avez-vous deux morceaux de pain ? 20. Le meunier a un mor- 
ceau de pain, et deux barils de farine. 21. L'epicier a-t-il du cafe, du 
the, du chocolat, et du poiyre ? 22. II a du the et du cafe, et le cho- 
colat et le poivre de votre marchand. 23. Qui a de I'argent ? 24. Je 
n'ai pas d'argent, mais j'ai du papier. 25. Avez-yous de bon papier ? 
26. J'ai de mauvais papier. 

EXEECISE 29. 

1. Haye you my brother's horses ? 2. I haye not your brother's 
horses, I have your cousin's hats. 3. Have the blacksmiths good 
iron ? 4. The blacksmith has two pieces of iron. 5. Have you two 
pairs of stockings ? 6. I have one pair of stockings, and two pairs 
of gloves. 7. Has your sister the gold jewels? 8. My sister has 
the gold jewels, and the paper playthings. 9. Have you the cabbages 
in your garden ? 10. We have two cabbages in our garden. 11. Have 
you the silk hats ? 12. The generals have the silk hats. 13. Have 
you coffee or sugar? 14. We have neither coffee nor sugar. 
15. Is your brother ashamed? 16. My brother is neither 
ashamed nor afraid. 17. Who has two barrels of flour ? 18. The 
mUler has two barrels of flour. 19. Have the birds bread ? 20. The 
birds have no bread. 21. Has the merchant tea, chocolate, sugar 
and pepper ? 22. He has sugar and pepper, but he has neither tea 
nor chocolate. 23. What has your sister? 24. She has nothing. 
25. What is the matter with your brother ? 26. Nothing is the mat- 
ter with him. 27. Is he not cold ? 28. He is not cold, he is warm. 
29. Is he wrong ? 30. He is not wrong, he is right. 31. Have you 
two cloth coats ? 32. I have only one cloth coat, but I have two 
satin waistcoats. 33. Who has my brother's letter ? 34» Your sis- 
ter has it. 35. Your sister has it not. 



LEgON XII. LESSON XII. 

THE PLURAL, CONTINUED. 

1. The plural form of the pronouns le, him or it ; la, Tier or it^ is 
los, tliem^ for both genders. Its place is also before the verb. 

Yous les avez. Les avez-vous? You have them. Save you ihemf 
Nous ne les avons pas. We have them not. 

S 



50 DOUZIIJME LEgOiy. 

2. The plural of the article, preceded by the preposition de, 0/ or 
from^ is des for both genders. 

Des livres, des plumes, Of or from the hooks, of the peris ; 

Des freres, des sceuts, Of or from the brothers, of the sisters. 

3. The same form of the article is placed before plural nouns used 
in a partitive sense. [L. 6, R. 1.] 

J'ai des habits. I have clothes. 

Yous avez des maisons. You ha', 



4. Rule 5, Lesson 7, and Rule 4, Lesson 8, apply also to plural 
nouns used partitively. JSee also note, page 38. 

Nous n'avoDs pas de liyres. We have no books. 

Vous avez de bons crayons. You have good pencils. 

5. The plural form of the possessive adjectives, man, ton, son^ 
noire, voire, leur, is mes, my ; tes, thy ; ses, his, her ; nos, our ; vos, 
your ; leurs, their, for both genders. 

Mes freres, mes soeurs, My brothers, my sisters; 

Nos livres, nos plumes, Our books, our pens. 

6. The possessive pronouns, Je mien, la mienne, etc., [L. 9, R. 6,] 

form their plural as follows :^ 

Mas. Fern. Mas. or Fem. 

Les miens, Les miennes, mine ; Les notres, ours , 

Des miens, Des miennes, of mine; Des notres, o/oMrs; 

Les tiens, Les tiennes, thine; Les votres, yours; 

Des tiens, Des tiennes, of thine ; Des votres, of yours ; 

Les siens, Les siennes, his or hers ; Les leurs, theirs; 

Des siens, Des siennes, of his or hers ; Des leurs, of theirs ; 

Yos maisons et les miennes, Your houses and mine ; 

Yos champs et les siens, Your fields and his; 

Les siens, les votres et les notres, His, yours and ours ; 

Des miens, des votres et des leurs, Of mine, of yours, and of theirs. 

7. The demonstrative adjectives, ce, cet, cette, have ces for their 
plural. 

Ces hommes, ces femmes. These men, these women. 

8. The demonstrative pronoun, celui, m. this or that, makes ceux in 
the plural. The feminine form, ceTle, merely takes the s in the 
plural. 

Mes chandeliers (m.) et ceux de vos My candlesticks and those of your 

freres. brothers. 

Yos chandelles (f.) et celles de nos Your candles and those of our neigh- 

voisins. bors. 

* Any miens, m., aux mieimes, /. to mine, &c. See L. 25, R. 6. 



PLUEAL OF PRONOUNS, ETC. 



51 



Resume of Examples. 



Yotre frere a-t-il raes chevaux ? 

II n'a ni les votres ni les siens. 

A-t-il ceux de nos voisins ? 

II ne les a pas. 

Ma soeur a-t-elle vos plumes, ou 

celles de ma cousine ? 
Elle n'a ni les miennes ni celles de 

ma cousine, elle a les siennes. 
Avons-nous des marteaux? 
Vous n'avez pas de marteaux. 
Vous avez de jolis craj^ons. 
Avez-vous les habits des enfants ? 
Je n'ai pas les habits des enfants. 
Yous avez les chapeaux des dames. 
Avez vous ceux-ci, ou ceux -la ? 



Has your brother my horses t 

He has neither yours nor his. 

Has he those of our neighbors ? 

He has thera not. 

Has my sister your pens, or my cous- 
in^ s, f. ? (or those of my cousin). 

She has neither mine, nor my cousin'Sf 
she has her own. 

Have we hammers f 

You have no hammers. 

You have pretty pencils. 

Have you the children's clothes f 

I have not the children's clothes. 

You have the ladies' hats. 

Have you these or those ? 



Exercise 21. 

Acajou, m. mahogany ; Chandelle, f. candle ; Fusil, m. n ; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeev- Cousine, f. cousin; Laine, f. wool; 

er; Crin, m. horse-hair; Marbre, m. marble; 

Blavc -he, white ; Ebeniste, m. cabinet- Matelas, m. mattress; 

Chaise, f. chair ; maker ; Meilleure, better ; 

Chandelier, m. candle- Ferblanc, m. tin; OxxwTiev, m. workman ; ■ 

stick ; Ferblantier, m. tinman ; Yoyageur, m, traveller. 

1. Avez-vous les marteaux des marechaux ? 2. Oui, monsieur ; je 
les ai. 3. Ne les avez-vous pas ? 4. Non, monsieur ; nous ne les 
avons pas. 5. L'ouvrief les a. 6. L'aubergiste a-t-il vos chevaux ? 
7. L'aubergiste n'a ni mes chevaux ni les votres, il a les siens. 8. Le 
medecin a-t-il des livres ? 9. Oui, monsieur ; il a de bons livres. 
10. N'avez-vous pas mes meilleures plumes? 11. Oui, monsieur; 
j'ai vos meilleures plumes, les miennes, et celles de votre cousine. 
12. Le voyageur a-t-il de bons fusils ? 13. II n'a pas de bons fusils, 
iJ a des fusils de fer. 14. Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mes matelas de 
crin? 15. line les a pas. 16. Qu' a-t-il? 17. II a les matelas de 
laine de I'ebeniste. 18. L'ebeniste a-t-il des tables d' acajou? 19. Oui, 
madame ; il a des tables d'acajou et des tables de marbre blanc; 
20. Avez-vous mes chaises ou les votres ? 21. Je n'ai ni les votres 
ni les miennes, j'ai celles de l'ebeniste. 22. N' avez-vous pas som- 
meil? 23. Non, monsieur; je n'ai ni sorameil ni faim. 24. Le fer- 
blantier a-t-il vos chandeliers de fer ? 25. ISTon, monsieur ; il a ceux 
du marechal. 

Exercise 22. 

^. Have you ray tables or yours ? 2. I have neither yours nor 
mine, I have the innkeeper's. 3. Have you them ? 4. No, sir; I have 
them not. 5. Has your sister my horses? 6. Yes, sir; she has 



62 TKEIZI^ME LEQON. 

your two horses, and your brother's. 7. Are you right or wrong ? 
8. I am right, I am not wrong. 9. Has the tinman my silver can- 
dlesticks or yours ? 10. He has neither your silver candlesticks nor 
mine. 11. What has he ? 12. He has the cabinet-maker's wooden 
tables. 13. Has he your mahogany chairs ? 14. No, sir ; he has my 
white marble tables. 15. Have you these tables or those ? 16. 1 
have neither these nor those, I have the cabinet-maker's. 17. Have 
you good pencil-cases ? 18. 'No, sir ; but I have good pencils. 
19. Has &ie traveller iron guns ? 20. Yes, sir ; he has mine, yours, 
and his. 21. Has he not your brother's ? 22. He has not my brother's. 
23. Has the workman my iron hammers ? 24. Yes, sir ; he has 
them. 25. Has my brother your pens or my cousin's ? 26. He has 
mine and yours. 27. Have you the children's clothes ? 28. Yes, 
madam ; I have them. 29. Have you your sister's hat ? 30. I have 
my cousin's./. 31. Is any thing the matter with your brother? 
32. He is cold and hungry. 33. Have you horses ? 34. Yes, sir ; I 
have two horses. 35. I have two horse-hair mattresses and one 
wool mattress. 



LEgON XIII. LESSON XIII. 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. The adjective in French, whatever may be its place,^ agrees in 
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies [§ 15, (l.)(2.)], 

2. Adjectives ending with e mute, i e,, not accented, retain that 
termination for the feminine. 

Un gargon aimable, An amiable hoy ; 

Une fiUe aimable, An amiable girl. 

3. Adjectives not ending in e mute, take e for the feminine. 

Un gargon diligent, A diligent boy ; 

Une fille diligente, A diligent girl, 

■4. Exceptions. Adjectives ending in eJ, eil, en, et, on and as^ 
double the last consonant and take e for the feminine. 
Mas. Fern. Mas. Fem. 
Essential, essentielle, essential; Sujet, sujette, subject; 

Yermeil, verraeille, vermillion; Bon, bonne, good; 

Ancien, ancienne, ancient; Bas, basse, low. 

5. Adjectives ending in / change the / into ve ; those ending in a} 
change that letter into se for the feminme. 

^ For the place of adjectives see L. 15, and Rule 5, L. 8. 



AGRBEM^BNT OF ADJECTIVES, ETC. 



63 



Un habit neu^ 
A new coat ; 
Un homme heureux, 
A happy man; 



Une robe neuve^ 
A neio 



Une femme lieureuso 
A hapjnj luoman. 



6. The adjectives beau, handsome ; f on, foolish ; mou, soft ; nouveau, 
new ; vieux, old, become hel, fol, mol, nouvel, and vieil,^ before a 
noun masculine commencing with a vowel or an h mute ; the last 
consonant of the latter form is doubled, and e added for the feminine, 
Ex., belle, folk, nouvelle, vieille. 

7. Additional rules and exceptions will be found, § 16 of tho 
Second Part of this Grammar. 

8. Conjugation of the Present of the Indicative of 

Etre, to be. 



Affirmatively. 


Interrogatively. 


Je suis, 


lam; 


Suis-je? 


Ami? 


Tu es, 


Thou art ; 


Es-tu ? 


Art thou ? 


11 est, 


He is; 


Est-il? 


Is he? 


EUe est, 


She is; 


Est-elle ? 


Is she 7 


Nous sommes. 


We are ; 


Sommes-nous ? 


Are we ? 


Yous etes, 


You are ; 


Etes-vous? 


Are you ? 


lis sent, m. 


They are ; 


Sont-ils? m. 


Are they ? 


EUes sent, f. 


They are; 


Sont-elles? f. 


Are they ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez-vous un garden diligent et une 

fiUe diligente ? 
Men gargon est diligent, mais ma 

fille est paresseuse [R. 5.] 
Cette coutume est-elie ancienne? 
Cette coutume n'est pas ancienne, 

elle est nouvelle [R. 6.] 
Yotre plume est-elle bonne ou mau- 

vaise ? 
Ma soeur est tres vive [R. 5.] 
Yotre maison est-elle meilleure que 

la mienne ? 
La maison de ma soeur est aussi 

bonne quo la votre. 



Have you a diligent hoy and a dili- 
gent girl ? 

My toy is diligent, but my daughter 
is idle. 

Is this custom ancient ? 

This custom is not ancient, it is new. 

Is your pen good or lad f 

My sister is very lively. 

Is your house letter than mine ? 



Beau, bel, belle, hand- 

some ; 
Bon, good ; 
Content, e, pleased ; 
Cravate, f. cravat; 
Dame, f. lady ; 
Encner, m. inkstand , 
Excellent, e, excellent : 



My sister^s 
yours. 

EXEKCISE 23. 

Eille, f. daughter, girl; 
Habit, m. coat ; 
Heureux,-se, happy; 
Ici, here; 
Meilleur, e, letter; 
Neuf,-ve, neio ; 
Paire, f. pair ; 
Parapluie, m, umbrella ; 



hou^e is as good as 



Parasol, m. parasol; 
Parent, m, relation; 
Petit, e. small; 
Paresseux,-so, idle; 
Porcelame, f. china; 
Que, than ; 
Yieux, vieille, old; 
Yif, Vive, quick, lively. 



^ Vieux is also used before a noun, commencing with a vowel or a 
fiileuli h» 



64 TEEIZl6MELEgO]Sr, 

1. Cette dame est-elle contente ? 2. Non, monsieur ; cette dame 
n'est pas contente. 3. Yotre fille est-elle vive ? 4. Mon fils est tres 
vif, et ma fille est paresseuse. 5. IST'a-t-elle pas tort? 6. EUe n'a 
pas raison. 7. Yotre cousine 'est-elle heureuse ? 8. Oui, madame ; elle 
est bonne, belle et lieureuse. 9. A-t-elle des amis ? 10, Oui, monsieur; 
elle a des parents et des amis. 11. A-t-elle une robe neuve et de vieux 
souliers ? 12. Elle a de vieux souliers et une vieille robe. 13. Yotre 
frere n'a-t-il pas un bel habit [R. 6.] ? 14. II a un bel habit et une 
bonne crayate. 15. Avez-vous de bonn^ viande, monsieur ? 16. J'ai 
de la viande excellente. 17. Cette viande-ci est-elle meilleure quo 
ceUe-la ? 18. Celle-ci est meilleure que celle-la. 19. Yotre ami a-t-il le 
bel encrier de porcelaine? 20. Son encrier est beau, mais il n'est 
pas de porcelaine. 21. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim? 22. Personne n'afaim. 
23. Les generaux sont-ils ici? 24. Les generaux et les marechaux 
sent ici. 25. J'ai vo3 parasols et vos parapluies, et ceux de vos 
enfants. 

Exercise 24. 

1. Is your httle sister pleased ? 2. Tes, madam ; she is pleased. 
3. Is that little girl handsome ? 4. That httle girl is not handsome, 
but she is good. 5. Have you good cloth and good silk ? 6. My 
cloth and^ silk are here. 7. Is your sister happy ? 8. My sister is 
good and happ}<l 9. Has that physician's sister friends ? 10. No, 
madam ; she has no friends. 11. Is your meat good? 12. My meat 
is good, but my cheese is better. 13. Has the bookseller a hand- 
some cliina inkstand ? 14. He has a fine silver inkstand and a pair 
of leather shoes. 15. Have you my silk parasols ? 16. I have your 
cotton umbrellas. 17. Is your brother's coat handsome ? 18. My 
brother has a handsome coat and an old silk cravat. 19. Have you 
relations and friends ? 20. I have no relations, but I have friends. 
21. Is that handsome lady wrong ? 22. That handsome lady is not 
wrong. 23. Have you handsome china ? 24. Our china is hand- 
some and good. 25. It is better than yours. 26. Is not that little 
girl hungry ? 27. That handsome httle girl is neither hungry nor 
thirsty. 28. Y^hat is the matter with her ? 29. She has neither re- 
lations nor friends. 30. Is this gold watch good ? 31. This one is 
good, but that one is better. 32. Have you it ? 33. I have it, but I 
have not your sister's. 34. I have neither yours nor mine, I have 
your mother's. 

^ The article, the possessive and the demonstrative adjective, and the 
prepositions a and de are repeated before every noun. 

Men frere et ma sceur, My brother and sister ; 

A votre frere et au mien, To your hrotlier and (to) mine ; 

De nos iivres et dea votres, 0/ our books and ( of) yours. 



PLUEAL OF ADJECTIVES. 56 

LEgON Xiy. ' LESSON XIV. 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. An adjective qualifying a plural noun, or two or more singular 
nouns of the same gender, assumes the gender of the noun or nouns 
and is put in the plural. [§ 18.] 

Les arbres et les fruits sent beaux. The trees and fruits are fine. 
Les fleurs et les plantes sent belles. The flowers and -plants are fine. 
Vos jardins sent tres beaux. Your gardens are very fine. 

2. An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of different genders, 
is put in the plural masculine. 

Hon frere et ma soeur sent contents. My hrother and sister are pleased. 
Le canif et la plume sent bons. Tlie penknife and pen are good. 

3. The plural of the feminine of adjectives is invariably formed by 
the addition of an s. 

Yous avez de jolies maisons. You have pretty houses. 

Ces demoiselles sent attentives. Those young ladies are attentive. 

4. The plural of the mascuKne of adjectives is generally formed by 
the addition of an 5. 

Ces ecoliers sent atteutifs. Those scholars are attentive. 

Yes bois sent magnifiques. Your woods are magnificent. 

5. The terminations s and x are not changed for the plural mascu- 
line. 

Nos fruits sent mauvaig. Our fruits are had. 

Yes oiseaux sent hideux. Your birds are hideous. 

6. To the termination eau, x is added for tlie plural masculine. 
Yds champs sent tres beaux. Your fields are very fine. 

7. The termination al is generally changed into aux for the plural 
masculine [§ 17 (3.), Third Exception]. 

Les hommes sent egaux. Men are equal. 

8. For more explicit rules and for exceptions, see § 17, Second Part. 

9. Present of the Indicative of JItre, to be. 
Negatively. Xegaiively and Interrogatively. 

Je ne suis pas, I am not; Ne suLs-je pas? Am I notf 

Tu n'es pas, Tiiouartnot; K'es-tu pas? Art thou nott 

II n'est pas, Hi is not; N'est-il pas? Is he not? 

Eile u'est pas, She is not; N'est-elle pas? Is she nott 

Nous ne soramcs pas, We are not ; Ne sommes-nous pas ? Are we not ? 

Yous n'etes pas. You are not; N'etes-vous pas? Are you notf 

lis ne sont pas, m. They are not; Ne sont-ils pas ? m. Are they not? 

EUes ne sont pas, £ They are not; Ne sont-elles pas? f. Are they not t 



\ 



56 QUATORZIfeME LEgON. 

Resume of Examples. 

Avez-vous des ecoliers attentifs ? Have you attentive scholars ? 

Mes ecoliers et mes ecolieres sont My scholars {male and female) ar% 

tres attentifs 6t tres studieux. verij attentive and very studious. 

Ces demoiselles sont-elles studieuses? Are those young ladies studious f 

Elles ne sont pas tres studieuses. They are not very studious. 

Ces regies sont-elles generales ? Are those rules general ? 

Ces principes sont generaux. Those princij^les are general. 

Leurs habillements sont superbes. Their clothes are superb. 

Avez-vous peur de ces chevaux Areyou afraid of those restive horses f 

retifs ? 

Vos montres d'or sont excellentes. Your gold watches are excellent. 

Les miennes sont-elles meilleures Are mine better than yours f 

que les votres ? 

Les votres sont meilleures. Yours are better 

EXEECISB 25. 

Agreahle, agreeable; Mauvais, e, &acf; Convent, often ; 

AIne, e, elder; Mule, f. mule; Travail, m. labor] 

AUemande, f. German; Oisif, ve, idle; ' Tres, very ; 

Jamais, never; Pantoufles, f. slippers; Utile, useful; 

Indulgent, e, indulgent; Personne, m. nobody ; Velours, m. velvet; 

Laine, f. wool, iooollen\ Retif, ve, restive; YiS, ve, quick, lively. 
Maroquin, m. morocco; 

1. Les chevaux de notre ami sont-ils retifs ? 2. Ses chevaux ne 
sont pas retifs, mais ses mules sont tres retives. 3. Les chevaux et 
les mules de votre frere sont excellents. 4. Yes sceurs sont-elles 
tres vives ? 5. Mes freres et mes sceurs sont tres vifs. 6. Sont-ils 
souvent oisifs ? 7. Non, monsieur ; mes soeurs ne sont jamais oisives. 
8. Avez-vous peur de votre frere ? 9. ISTon, monsieur ; je n'ai peur 
de personne. 10. Ne sommes-nous pas indulgeiits ? 11. Yous etes 
indulgents, et vous avez raison. 12. Ai-je vos livres ? 13. Yous ne 
les avez pas, vous avez ceux de mon frere aine. 14. Ne les avez- 
vous pas ? 15. Je ne les ai pas. 16. Avez-vous une bonne paire de 
bas de laine ? 17. J'ai une belle paire de bas de soie. 18. Avez-vous 
les bonnes maisons ou les mauvaises ? 19. Je n'ai ni les bonnes ni 
les mauvaises, j'ai celles de ma cousine. 20. Le travail est-il agre^ 
able ? 21. Le travail est utile et agreable. 22. Avez-vous mes 
beaux souliers de maroquin ? 23. Je n'ai pas vos beaux souliers de 
maroquin, j'ai vos belles pantoufles de velours. 24. Avez-vous les 
pantoufles de votre soeur, ou les miennes? 25. Je n'ai ni les votres 
ni celles de votre soeur, j'ai celles de 1' AUemande. 

EXEECISE 26. 
1. Are your brothers and sisters very (hien) quick ? (Note, p. 54.) 
2. My brothers are quick, but my sisters are not quick. 3. Have you 



PLACE OF ADJECTIVES, ETC. 57 

not two restive horses ?' 4. No, but I have a restive mule. 5. Have 
you not two good pairs of silk gloves ? 6. I have a good pair of 
cotton gloves, and two pairs of silk gloves. 7. Are you not afraid 
of your friends ? 8. No, sir ; I am never afraid of my friends. 9. I 
am afraid of nobody. 10. Are you right or wrong? 13. 1 am right. 
12. Have you my beautiful leather slippers, or my old satin slip- 
pers? 13. I have your old leather shoes and your velvet slippers. 
14. Are those ladies pleased? 15. Those ladies are pleased, and they 
are right. 16. Has the German lady your father's shoes or mine ? 
17. She has neither his nor yours, she has my sister's. 18. Hts 
your elder brother good houses ? 19. His houses are better than 
yours and than mine.'^ 20. Are his houses old ? 21. His houses 
are old, but they are good. 22. Have you them ? 33. No, sir ; I 
have them not, I have no houses. 24. Have you my brother's or 
my sister's ? 25. Your sister has hers and my mother's. 26. Are 
your scholars attentive ? 27. My scholars are very attentive and 
very studious. 28. Are those German ladies studious ? 29. They 
are very studious and very attentive. 30. Are you often wrong? 
31. Yes, sir ; I am often wrong. 32. Is labor agreeable ? 33. Yes, 
sir ; labor is agreeable and useful. 34. We have them, and you have 
them not. 



LEgON XV. LESSON XY. 

PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. RELATIVE PEONOUK EJST. 

1. The adjective, in French, follows the noun much more fre- 
quently than it precedes it. [§ 85, (1.)] 

Yous avez des amis fideles. Yoic have faithful friends. 

Ma soeur a des livres instructifs. My sister has instructive books. 

2. Those adjectives which generally precede the nouns have been 
mentioned in Lesson 8, Eule 5., and will be also found § 85, (11.) 

Nous avons de belles maisons. We have beautiful houses. 

Yotre joUe petite fiUe est studieuse. Your pretty Utile girl is studious. 

3. The adjectives which are placed after nouns are : — 1st, All par- 
ticiples, present and past, used adjectively. 

Nous avons une histoire interessante. We have an interesting history. 
Yous avez des enfants polls. You have polite children. 

* See Rule 5 of next Lesson. 

" Que meaning which and que conjunction are never understood in 
French, they must bo repeated before every noun, pronoun, and verb. 
See L. 19, R. 1. 

3* 



58 QUINZIfeME LEgON. 

4. 2d, All such as express form, color, taste ; such as relate to 
hearing and touching ; such as denote the matter of which an object is 
composed; as also such as refer to nationality,' or to any defects of 
the body. [§ 85, (4.) (5.) (6.) (7.)] 

Kos parents ont des chapeaux noirs. Our relations have black hats. 

Vous avez des pommes doucea. Tou have sweet apples. 

Voila de la cire molle. Tliere is soft wax. 

Cette dame espagnole a un enfant TJiat Spanish lady has a lame child. 
boiteux. 

5. 3d, Almost all adjectives ending in a?, able, ihle, ique and if 

Ces hommes liberaux sent aimes. Those liberal men are loved. 
Yoila un esprit raisonnable. That is a reasonable mind. 

Toila un eselave fugitifl That is a fugitive slave. 

6. Some adjectives have a different meaning according to their 
position before or after the noun. [See hst, § 86.] 

Un brave liomme, a worthy man; Un homme brave, a brave man. 

7. En is used for the English words some or any, expressed or 
understood, but not followed by a noun ; en has also the sense of 
of it, of them, thereof, generally understood in English sentences, par- 
ticularly in answers to questions. [§ 39, (17.) § 104, § 110, (2.)(3.)] 

Avez- vous des souliers de cuir ? Have you leather shoes ? 
J'eii ai. / have some, I have {of them). 

Yotre fils en a-t-il ? Has your son any ? 

8. An adjective used substantively, and having a partitive significa- 
tion (in a sentence containing the pronoun en), must be preceded by 
the preposition de, in the same manner as if the noun were expressed. 
[See E. 4, L. 8.] 

Avez- vous de bonnes plumes ? Have you good pens? 

Non, mais j'en ai de mauvaises. M), but I have bad ones. 

Resume of Examples. 

Avez-vous de beaux jardins ? Have you fine gardens f 

Oui, j'en ai de beaux. [R, 7.] Yes, I have fine ones. 

Votre frere n' a-t-il pas des souliers Has not your brother black shoes ? 

noirs ? 

11 n'en a pas, mais ma sceur en a. He has none, but my sister has some, 

N'a-t-elle pas aussi une robe Ha^ she not also a white dress ? 

blanche ? 

Oui, elle en a une. Tes, she has one. 

Nod, elle n'en a pas. No, she has none. 

Qui en a une ? Who has one ? 

Qui n'en a pas ? Who has none f 

* Such adjectives, in French, do not eonimence with a capital. See § 145. 



PLACE OF ADJECTIVES, ETC. 



69 



Le boticher n'a-t-i] pas de la viand© 

fraiche ? (See note, page 38.) 
II en a, il n'en a pas. 
II en a beaucoup. 
li n'en a guere. 
II en a deux livres. 



Eos not the huicher fresh meaif 

He has some, he has none. 
He has much {of it). 
He has but little (of it). 
He has two pounds {of tt). 



Amusant, e, amusing ; 
Araericain,e, American; 
Anglais, e, English; 
Arabe, Arabian; 
Aubergiste, m. innkeep- 
er ; 



Exercise 27. 
Bijou, m. jewel ; 
Blanc, blanche, white; 
Brave, brave, worthy ; 
Chale, m. shawl; 
Couteau, m. knife ; 
Francais, e, French: 



Beaucoup, much, many ; Guere, little, but little ; 
Beige, Belgian ; Guitare, f. guitar ; 



Laine, f. wool; 
Mademoiselle, f. Miss; 
Monsieur, m. sir, Mr., 

gentleman ; 
Noir, e, black ; 
Parent, m. relation; 
Soldat, m. soldier; 
Terre, f. land. 



1. Avez-vous une bonne guitare? 2. Oui, monsieur; j'ai une 
guitare excellente. 3. Avez-vous de bons habits ? 4. Oui, madame; 
j'ai de bons habits noirs et de belles robes blanches. 5. Votre mere 
n'a-t-elle pas un chale de sole ? 6. Oui, mademoiselle ; elle en a un 
de soie et un de laine. 7. L'aubergiste a-t-il de bons chevaux 
anglais? 8. L'aubergiste a des chevaux anglais, francais, et 
arabes. 9. II en a de superbes. 10. L'ami de votre frere a-t-il des 
bijoux d'or ? 11. Oui, monsieur; il en a. 12. A-t-il aussi des bijoux 
d'argent? 13. II en a aussi. 14. En a-t-il beaucoup? 15. Non, 
monsieur; il n'en a guere. 16. Votre ami a-t-il des parents? 
17. Oui, monsieur; il en a. 18. Ce monsieur a-t-il une bonne plume 
d'acier, ou une belle plume d'or ? 19. II en a une d'acier, et nous 
en avons une d'or. 20. Le general n'a-t-il pas de bons soldats? 
21. II en a de tres braves. 22. Les Americains n'ont-ils pas de bonne 
terre ? 23. lis en ont d'excellente. 24. Le marchand a-t-il des 
couteaux anglais ou francais ? 25. Les couteaux du marchand ne 
8ont ni anglais ni fran9ais, ils sont beiges. 

Exercise 28. 
1. Has your brother Arabian horses ? 2. Yes, sir ; he has some. 
3. Has he handsome ones ? 4. Yes, sir ; he has handsome ones. 
5. Are the good Americans wrong? 6. No, miss (madam); they 
are not wrong, they are right. 7. Have you a French shawl? 
8. Yes, sir ; I have one, I have a handsome French shawl. 9. Has 
your innkeeper your silver knife or mine ? 10. He has neither yours 
nor mine, he has his sister's handsome steel knife. 11. Has the Belgian 
a good guitar ? 12. He has an excellent French guitar. 13. He has 
an excellent one. 14. Has the gentleman amusing books ? 15. Yes, 
sir ; he has two. 16. Has the general French or Arabian horses ? 



6(1 ' SEIZIEMELEgON. 

17. He has French and Arabian horses, but he has no English horses. 

18. Who has Arabian horses? 19. The Arabian has some. 20. Has 
the Englishman any? 21. The Englishman has some. 22. Has 
your friend's sister a good steel pen ? 23. My friend's sister has one, 
but my relations have none. 24, Are you not wrong, sir ? 25. Yes, 
madam ; I am wrong. 26, Are those knives English ? 27. No, 
sir ; they are Belgian. 28. Have you relations ? 29. I have two, 
and they are here (id). 30. Has the English butcher meat? 31. Yes, 
sir ; he has much. 32, Has he much money ? 33, He has but 
little. 34. Has the Belgian general brave soldiers ? 35. Yes, sir j he 
has good ones. 



LEgON XVI. LESSON XVI. 

COMPARISON. 

1, Adjectives and adverbs are always compared in French, as they 
often are in EngHsh, by means of adverbs. 

Plus beau, plus souvent, 3Iore heautiful, qftener. 

2. The first part of the comparison for the degree in quality is 
made by : 



Aussi, as, or as much ; 

Plus, more; 

Pas aussi, pas si, not so, not as; 

Moins, less ; 



These adverbs come almost always 
before an adjective, a participle, or aa 
adverb. 



Aussi grand, as tall Plus grand, taller. 

Pas aussi grand, not as tall Moins grand, less tall, not as tail. 

3. For the degree in quantity we use : 

Autant de, as much, as many; ^ Coming almost always he- 

Plus de, more; { fore a noun, an adjective used 

Pas autant de, not as much or as many ; C substantively, or a possessive 

Moins de, less, fewer ; j or demonstrative pronoun. 

Autant de livres, as many looks. Autant de bons, as many good ones. 
Plus de ceux-ci, more of these. Moins des miens, less of mine. 

4. The second part of the comparison is expressed by : 

Que, as, than : when it does not precede a word expressing a quantity 
compared with the word following the first adverb of the comparison. 

Autant de livres que votre frere, As many hooks as your brother. 

Tout autant d'or que sa soeur. Quite as much gold as his sister. 

Plus diligent que sa soeur, More diligent than his sister. 



COMPARISON. 



61 



Que de, as, than : before a word expressing a quantity compared with 
that expressed by the word following the adverb, of the first part. 



Plus de livres que de maisons, 
Autant d or que d'argent, 
J'ai tout autant de sucre que de 
cafe. 



More looks than houses. 
As much gold as silver. 
I have quite (or jiLst) as much sugar 
as coffee. 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez-vous autant de livres anglais, 

que de livres italiens ? 
J'en ai tout autant. 
J'ai autant de ceux-ci que de ceux- 

la. 
II est aussi heureux que vous. 
Avez-vous plus d'assiettes que de 

plats ? 
J'ai plus de ceux-ci que de celles-la. 
Est-il plus complaisant que sea 

freres ? 
he Fran^ais a-t-il moina de legumes 

que de fruits ? 
H a moins de livres que de manus- 

crits. 
II n'a pas autant de ceux-ci que 

de ceux-la. 
En a-t-il moins que votre frere ? 



Have you as many English books as 

Italian books ? 
I have just as many. 
I have as many of these as of those. 

He is as happy as you. 

Have you more plates than dishes ? 



II en a tout autant. 



Bleu, e, blue; 
Courage, m. courage; 
Davantage,* more; 
Drap, m. cloth; 
Ennemi, m. enemy ; 



I have more of these than of 

Is he more obliging than his brothers f 

Has the Frenchman fewer vegetables 

than fruits ? 
He has fewer boohs than manuscripts. 

He has not as many of these as of 

those. 
Has he less {of them) than your 

brother ? 
He has quite as many. 



Exercise 29. 

Fer, m. iron ; 
Eromage, m. cheese; 
Hollandais, m. Dutch- 
man; 
Italien, ne, Italian; 



Espagnol, e, Spaniard; Jardin, m. garde 
Estampe, f. engraving ; Manteau, m. cloak; 



Manuscrit, m. manu' 

script; 
Marechal, m. blacksmiUi; 
Modestie, f modesty ; 
Sole, f Silk; 
Tres, very ; 
Verre, m. glass. 



1. £tes-vous aussi content que votre frere ? 2. Je suis aussi con- 
tent que votre frere. 3. Votre pere a-t-il autant de courage que de 
modestie ? 4. II a moins de modestie que de courage. 5. Le 
libraire a-t-il autant de manuscrits que d'estampes ? 6. II a plus de 
celles-ci que de ceux-la. 7. A-t-il autant d'amis que d'ennemis? 
8. II a plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 9. A-t-il autant de pain que 
de fromage? 10. II a tout autant de celui-ci que de celui-la, 
11. Le marechal a-t-il plus de chevaux que votre frere ? 12. II en a 
plus que mon pere, et plus que mon frere. 13. N'avez-vous pas 

. ^ Davantage means more. It can never be placed before a noun ; it may 
be used instead of ;plus^ at the end of a sentence. 



62 DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. 

froid ? 14. Non, monsieur ; je n'ai pas froid, j'ai tres chaud. 15. Avez- 
vous deux manteaux de drap? 16. J'en ai un de drap et un de ve- 
lours bleu. 17. N'avez-vous pas plus de verres que d'assiettes? 
18. Nous en avons davantage. 19. Le marechal a-t-il plus de fer 
que d'acier ? 20. II n'a pas autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
21. II a moins de celui-ci que de celui-la. 22. Les HoUandais ont-ils 
de beaux jardins? 23. Leurs jardins sont tres beaux. 24. Les 
jardins des Italiens sont plus beaux que ceux des Espagnols. 

Exercise 30. 
1. Are you more attentive than your sister ? 2. I am not as atten- 
tive as your brother. 3. Have you more courage than my brother ? 
4. I have quite as much. 5. Has the blacksmith as much money as 
iron? 6. He has more of the latter than of the former. \L. 10, E. 5.j 
7. Has he more modesty than the Spaniard? 8. He has more. 
9. He has more than your friend's sister. 10. Are you not cold, sir ? 
11. No, sir; but I am afraid and sleepy. 12. Has the Dutchman 
more cheese than the Italian ? 13. He has more cheese and more 
money. 14. Have you as much English silk as Italian silk ? 15. I 
have more of this than of that. 16. Who has more friends than 
the Spaniard? 17. Your friend has more. 18. Has the Spaniard as 
much of your money as of his ? 19. He has less of mine than of his. 
20. Have we more silk cloaks than cloth cloaks ? 21. We have more 
of these than of those. 22. Have you good cloaks ? 23. Yes, air ; I 
have good cloaks, good hats, and good leather shoes. 24. Have you 
more plates than dishes ? 25. I have not more plates than dishes, 
but I have more glasses than plates. 26. Are you not very cold ? 
27. No, sir ; I am neither cold nor warm. 28. Has your carpenter 
•wood ? 29. Yes, sir ; he has wood, money, cheese and meat. 
30. Who has more money than the carpenter ? 31. The Dutchman 
has more. 32. Who has more engravings than books ? 33. The 
bookseller has more of these than of those. 34. Are you as atten- 
tive as your friend ? 35. I am more attentive than my friend. 



LEgON XVn. . LESSON XVII. 

COMPAEISOK, ^EXCOKE, ETC. 

1. The superlative absolute is formed by placing tres, fort, or bien, 

very J before the adjective. [§ 14-2, (11.)] 

Ces chandeliers sont tres utiles. These candlesticks are very tcsefuL 

Notre tailleur est bien obligeant. Our tailor is very obliging. 



COMPARISON, ETC. 



2. The superlative relative is formed by adding the article 7e, 7a, 
leSj to a comparative. [§ 14-2, (9.)] 

Totre neveu est le plus savant de tous. Yow nephew is the most learned of all. 

3, Encore is used in French in the sense of more, some more, any 
more, still, — used aflfirmatively and interrogatively, hut not nega- 
tively. 



Avez-vous encore du cafe ? 
J'ai encore du cafe. 
J'en ai encore. 



Have you any more coffee ? 

J have more (or some more) coffee. 

I have some more, or some left. 



4. Ne — plus is used in the sense of not any more, and no more, or 

none left. 

Je n'ai plus de livres. I have no more looks. 

Je n'ai plus de chocolat. 1 have no chocolate left. 

5. Ne — guere means hut little, hut few. 



Je n'ai guere d'amis. 
Je n'en ai guere. 



I have tut few friends. 
I have hut few — hut little. 



6. The pronouns mot, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of the nom- 
inative pronouns je, tu, il, ils, after the que of a comparison, when 
the verb is understood. 



Vous etes plus heureux que moi. 
Yous avez plus de merite que lui. 



You are happier than I. 

You have more merit than he. 



Resume of Examples. 



Votre march and est bien obligeant. 
Yoila le meilleur de ces gar9ons. 
Nous avons encore des amis, 
Vous avez encore du credit. 
Avez-vous encore une piastre? 
Le magoD a-t-il encore des briques ? 
II n'en a plus. 
II n'a plus de briques. 
II n'en a guere. 
II n'en a plus guere. 
Je n'ai guere de livres. 
Avez-vous plus de courage que lui ? 
II a moins de courage que moi. 
(Dombien de piastres avez-vous en- 
core? 



Your merchant is very obliging. 
That is the best of those boys. 
We have some more (or still) friends. 
You have still (or yet) credit. 
Have you a dollar left ? 
Ha^ the mason more bricks ? 
He has no more — he has none left. 
He has no more bricks. 
He has but few. 
He haj hut few left. 
J have but few hooks. 
Have you more courage than he ? 
He has less courage than I. 
How many dollars have you still, or 
liave you left? 



Correct, e, correct; 
Courage, m. courage; 
Credit, ra. credit; 
Beaucoup, much ; 
Beyer, Boyer ; 
Jardin, m. garden; 



EXEECISE 31. 

Dictionnaire, m. diction- 
ary ; 
Neveu, m. nephew ; 
Niece, f. niece; 
Nouvelles, f. news; 



Savant, e, learned; 
Soeur, f, sister ; 
Saladc, f. salad; 
Tante, f. aunt; 
Tous, all; 
Quel, which, which one; Ville, C town, city. 



S4 DIX-SEPTIEME LE^OIT. 

1. Yotre dictionnaire est-il tres correct? 2. II est plus correct que 
celui de Boyer. 3. Yotre dictionnaire est le plus correct de tous. 
4. Quel est le meilleur de ces jardins ? 5. Celui-ci est le meilleur de 
tous les jardins de la ville. 6,. Avez-vous encore de 1' argent ? 7. Je 
n'ai plus d'argent, mais j'ai encore du credit. 8. Avons-nous encore 
de la salade ? 9. Nous n'en avons plus. 10. Nous n'avons plus de 
viande. 11. Qui en a encore ? 12. Mes freres et mes soeurs en ont 
encore. 13.. En avez-vous encore beaucoup? 14. Je n'en ai plus 
guere. 15. Yotre tante a-t-elle plus de robes que votre niece? 

16. Elle n'en a pas beaucoup. 17. Yotre neveu est-il plus savant 
que votre niece? 18. 11 n'est pas aussi savant qu'elle. 19. Elle est 
plus savante que lui. 20. Avez-vous encore froid ? 21. Je n'ai plus 
froid, j'ai bien chaud. 22. N'avez-vous plus de nouvelles? 23. Je 
n'en ai plus. 24. En avez-vous beaucoup ? 25. Je n'en ai guere. 

Exercise 32. 

1. Has your brother a very good dictionary ? 2. His dictionary is 
not very correct. 3, Has your father more courage than he? 4. He 
has much more courage than your nephew. 5. Have your brothers 
credit ? 6. They have but little credit, but they have money. 7. Is 
your aunt obliging ? 8. My aunt is very obliging. 9. Have you still 
books, pens and paper ? 10. I have no more books, but I have still 
good pens and excellent English paper. 11. Who has still paper? 
12. I have no more, but my brother has some more, 13. Have you 
.any news, sir ? 14. No, madam ; I have none to-day. 15. Have you 
as much wood as my brother's son ? 16. 1 have more than you or he. 

17. Are you still wrong? 18. No, sir, I am no longer (plus) VTrong, 
I am right. 19. Are your sisters still hungry ? 20. They are neither 
hungry nor thirsty, but they are still sleepy. 21. Is your niece as 
learned as he ? 22. She is more learned than he and (que) his aunt 
23. Have you no news, sir ? 24. No, madam ; T have no more news. 
25. Who has news? 26. I have no more. 27. Have you them all? 
28. Yes, sir; I have them all 29. Has your aunt much of it left? 
30. She has but httle more of it. 31. Has your brother any more 
English horses ? 32. He has no more. 33. He has two more. 34. Have 
you a handsome French shawl left ? 35. I have no more French 
shawls, but I have an English one. 



ADyEEBS OP QUANTITY, ETC. 65 

LEgON XVin. LESSON XVIII. 

ADVERBS OP QUANTITY. QUELQUE CHOSE, &C. 

1. The adverbs of quantity, combien, liow much, how 'many ; trop, 
too much, too many ; beaucoup, much, many ; assez, enough ; pen, 
little, few ; guere, hut little, few ; and the word pas, meaning no, when 
coming before a, noun or an adjective, are followed bj the preposi- 
tion de. 

Combien de fleurs avez-vous ? JIow many flowers have yoiu 

J'ai beaucoup de fleurs. J have many flowers. 

Vous avez trop de loisir. You have too much leisure. 

Notre soeur a assez de temps. Our sister has time enough. 

2. Tke adverb hien, used in the sense of heaucoup,(much, many,) is 
followed by the preposition de, joined to or blended with the article 
Ze, la, les. [L. 6.] 

Vous avez bien de la complaisance. You have much kindness. 
Elle a bien des amis. She has many friends. 

3. Quelque chose,' something, any thing [L. 7, 6.] and rien, nothing^ 
not any thing, take de before an acljective. 

Yotre ami a quelque chose d'agre- Your friend has something pleasant. 

able. 

Avez-vous quelque chose de bon ? Have you any thing good? 

Je n'ai rien de bon. / have nothing {not any thing) good. 

4. Quel, m,, quelle, f , quels, m. p., quelles, f. p., are used interro- 
gatively for which or what before a noun. 

Quelle serviette avez-vous ? What or which napJdn have you f 

Quelles bourses votre ami a-t-il ? What purses has your friend ? 

6. Que is used for what before a verb. 
Qu'avez-vous ? What is the matter with you ? 

6. Lequel, m., laquelle, f , lesquels, m. p., lesquelles, f. p., are used 
absolutely for the word which, not followed by a noun, and equiva- 
lent to which one, which ones. 

Lequel votre fils a-t-il? Which (one) has your son? 

Lesquelles avons-nous ? Which (ones) have we ? 

7. Quelques is used before a plural noun for a few, some; quelques 
uns, m., quelques unes, f., are used absolutely, with the same mean- 
ing — Plusieurs means several, and is invariable. 

Le Danois a-t-il quelques pommes? Has the Dane a few apples f 
II en a quelques unes. He has a few. 

II en a plusieurs. Ee has sevei'al* 



66 



DIX-HUITIEME LEgON. 



Resume of Examples. 



Combien de poires avez-vous ? 
Nous avons beaucoup de poires. 
Nous en avons beaucoup. 
Nous avons assez de cerises. 
Nous n'en avons pas assez. 
Vous n'avez guere de peches. 
Vctre jardinier a bien des peches. 
N'avez-vous pas de peches ? 
J'ai beaucoup de peches et d'abri- 

cots. 
Le boucher a-t-U quelque chose de 

bon? 
II a quelque chose de bon et de 

mauvais. 
II n'a rien de bon. 
Quelles poires avez-vous ? 
Nous avons celles de votre soeur. 
Quel habit m. avez-vous ? 
Nous avons celui du tailleur. 
Qu'avez-vous de bon ? 
Lequel avez-vous? 
Lesquels votre frere a-t-il ? 
J'ai du fruit mur. 



How many pears have youf 

We have many pears. 

We have many {of them). 

We have cherries enough. 

We have not enough {of them). 

You have hut few peaches. 

Your gardener has many peaches. 

Have you no peaches ? 

1 have many peaches and apricots. 

Has the butcher any thing good t 

He has something good and lad. 

He has not any thing {nothing) good. 

What or which pears have you ? 

We have your sister^s. 

Which or what coat have you f 

We have the tailor^s. 

WJiat have you good ? 

Which (one) have you ? 

Which {ones) has your brother f 

I have ripe fruit. 



Abricot, m. apricot; 
Anana, la. pineapple ; 
Beurre, m. butter; 
Cerise, f. cherry ; 
Epicier, m. grocer ; 
Etranger, e, foreign ; 
Jardin, m. garden; 



Exercise 33. 

Jardinier, m. gardener ; 
Fleur, f. flower ; 
Legume, m. vegetalle; 
Magasin, m. warehouse; 
Mur, e, ripe; 
Onele, m, uncle; 
Poire, f. pear ; 



Poi-^Te, m. pepper ^ 
Pomme, f. apple ; 
Pomme de terre, 

tato; 
Prune, f plum ; 
Sucre, m. sugar; 
The, m. tea. 



f. po- 



1. Combien de pommes de terre votre frere a-t-H ? 2. II n'en a 
pas beaucoup. 3. L'epicier a-t-il beaucoup de Sucre dans son ma- 
gasin ? 4. II n'en a guere, mais il a beaucoup de beurre et de poivre. 
5. Yotre jardinier a-t-il beaucoup de cerises ? 6. II a plus de cerises 
que de prunes. 7. Les prunes sont-elles meilleures que les cerises? 
8. Les cerises sont meilleures que les prunes. 9. Avez-vous quel- 
ques poires mures ? 10. Nous en avons quelques unes, nous avons 
aussi beaucoup d' ananas et d'abricots. 11. Votre oncle a-t-il quel- 
que chose de bon dans son jardin ? 12. II a quelque chose de bon 
et de beau. 13. II a de beaux legumes et de belles fieurs. 14. Avez- 
vous des fleurs etrangeres? 15. J' en ai quelques unes. IG. Les- 
quelles avez-vous? 17. J'ai celles de votre frere et celles de votre 
jardinier. 18. N'avez-vous pas aussi les miennes? 19. Non, mon- 
sieur; je ne les ai pas. 20. Qui en a beaucoup ? 21. Personne n'en 



NUMBERS. — DAY OF THE MONTH. 6l 

a beaucoup. 22. J'en ai quelques unes. 23. Avez-Yous assez de 

the? 2-1. J'en ai assez. 25. J'en ai plus que lui. 
Exercise 34. 

1. Has your gardener many vegetables ? 2. Yes, sir ; he has many. 
3. How many gardens has he ? 4. He has several gardens and seve- 
ral houses. 5. Have you many books ? 6. I have but few, but my 
friend has many. 7. What coat has your brother ? 8. He has a good 
cloth coat. 9. Has your uncle many peaches ? 10. He has but few 
peaches, but he has many cherries. 11. How many plums has the 
tailor ? 12. The tailor has no plums, he has cloth and silk. 13. What 
silk has your friend the merchant ? 14. He has a great deal (beau- 
coup) of silk, and a great deal of money. 15. Has the gardener any 
thing good in (dans) his garden ? 16. He has many pineapples. 
17. Has he more vegetables than fruit? 18. He has more of this than 
of those. 19. Has your uncle many pears and cherries ? 20. He has 
a few, and he has many apples and plums. 21. Have you a few ? 
22. I have still many, but my brother has no more. 23. Which 
peaches has he ? 24. He has large (grosses) peaches. 25. Which 
(ones) have you ? 26. I have the best peaches. 27. Has the mer- 
chant any thing good in his warehouse ? 28. He has nothing good in 
his warehouse, but he has something good in his garden. 29. How 
many potatoes has the foreigner ? 30. He has not many. 31. Has he 
good vegetables ? 32. He has good vegetables. 33. Is he right or 
wrong ? 34. He is right, but you are wrong. 35. He has neither 
this book nor that, he has the bookseller's. 



LEQON XIX. LESSON XIX. 

THE NUMBERS ^THE DAY OF THE MONTH. 

1. The relative pronoun, que, whom, which, that, and the conjunc- 
tion, que, that, are never omitted in French, and must be repeated 
before every verb depending on them. [§ 109.] 

Les crayons que j'ai, sont meilleurs The pencils {which) I have, are letter 
que ceux que vous avez. than those (which) you have. 

2. Ne, before the verb, and que after it, are used in the sense of 
only, hut. 

Je n'ai qu'un ami. / have hut one friend. 

3. L'un et I'autre, means hoth ; les uns et les autres, these and 
those, the latter and the former. [§ 41, (11.)] 

Yous avez l'un et I'autre. You have loth. 



68 



DIX-NEUYIEME LE^ON 



4. Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers as far as twenty. [§ 22, 23.] 



c 

Un, m. une, /. 


lardinal. 

One, a, an. 


Ordin 
Premier, m. e, /. 


al 

First, 


Deux, 


Two, 


Second,! 77i. e, /. 








Deuxieme, 


Second, 


Troig, 


Three, 


Troisieme, 


Tliird, 


Quatre, 


Four^ 


Quatrieme, 


Fourth, 


Cinq, 


Five, 


Cinquierae, 


Fifth, 


Six, 


Six, 


Sixieme, 


Sixth, 


Sept, 


Seven, 


Septieme, 


Seventhf 


Huit, 


Fight, 


Huitieme, 


Eighth, 


Neu^ 


Nine, 


Neuvieme, 


Ninth, 


Dix, 


Ten, 


Dixieme, 


Tenth, 


Onze, 


Fleven, 


Onzienre, 


Eleventh, 


Douze, 


Twelve, 


Douzieme, 


Twelfth, 


Treize, 


Thirteen, 


Treizieme, 


Thirteenth, 


Quatorze, 


Fourteen, 


Quatorzieme, 


Fourteenth, 


Quinze, 


Fifteen, 


Quinzieme, 


Fifteenth, 


Seize, 


Sixteen, 


Seizieme, 


Sixteenth, 


Dix-sept, 


Seventeen, 


Dix-septieme, 


Seventeenth, 


Lixhuit, 


Eighteen, 


Dix-liuitiome, 


Eighteenth, 


Dix-neuf, 


Nineteen, 


Dix-neuvieme, 


Nineteenth, 


Yingt, 


Twenty. 


Vingtieme, 


Twentieth. 



5. The cardinal numbers are used, in French, for the day of the 
month, except the jirst^ for which the ordinal number premier 
substituted. 



Le dix aotit, le cinq juillet, 
Le premier du mois prochain. 



TJie tenth of August, the fifth of July. 
The first of next month. 



6. The verb avoir, to have, is used actively, [§ 43, (2.)] for the day 
of the month. The verb etre may also be used. 



Quel jour du mois avons-nous ? 
Nous avoiis le vingt. 
C'est aujourd'hui le dix. 



What day of the month is it? 
It is the twentieth. 
To-day is Hie tenth. 



7. Before the word onze, the article le or la is not elided [§ 146]. 
Nous avons le onze de decembre, It is the eleventh of December. 

Resume op Examples. 



L'ouvrier a-t-il les outils que vous 

avez? 
Les maisons que j'ai, sont-elles aussi 

bonnes que celles que vous avez ? 
Corabien de francs avez- vous? 
Je n'ai que dix francs, mais mon 

frere en a plus de vingt 
Avons-nous le quatorze du mois ? 



Has the workman the tools which you 

have f 
Are the houses which 1 have, as good 

as those which you have f 
Hno many francs have you? 
I have only ten jrancs, but my brother 

has more than twenty {of them). 
Is it the fourteenth day of the 

month ? 



' In this word and its derivatives, c has the sound of g hard. 



NUMBERS. DAT OF THE MOKTH. 



69 



Kon, monsieur; nous n'avons que lo iVo, sir; it is only the eleventh. 

onze. 

Lequel do ces deux volumes avez- Which of those two volumes have you t 

vous? 

J'ai I'un et I'autre. I have both. 

Avez-vous la premiere place, ou la Have you the first, or the second 

deuxiemc ? place ? 

J'ai la premiere, et moa frere a la / have the first, and my brother has 

deuxieme. the second. 



Aujourd'hui, to-day; 
Canelle, f. cinnamon; 
Centime, m. centime — 

the 100th part of a 

franc ; 
Combien, how much, how 

many ; 
Cravate, f. cravat; 
Demi, half § 84, (2.) 



Exercise 35. 

Fevrier, m. February ; Outil, m. tool; 

Franc, m. franc; Ouvrage, m. worJc; 

Histoire, f. history ; CEuvres, f! works ; 

Italien, m. Italian ; Place, f. place ; 

Kilogramme, m. kilo- Quart, m. quarter ; 



gramme — about 

pounds ; 
Menuisier, m. joiner ; 
Mousseline, t muslin; 



two Septembre, m. Septem- 
ber ; 
Yolume, m. volume. 



II est meilleur que celui 
Combien d'enfants avez- 



1. Le cheval que vous avez est-il bon ? 2. 
que vous avez, et que celui de notre ami. 3. 
vous ? 4. Je n'en ai qu'un, mais I'ltalien en a plus que moi. 5. Avons- 
nous le dix septembre? 6. Non, monsieur; nous avons le neuf de 
fevrier. 7. Avez-vous ma cravate de sole, ou ma cravate de mousse- 
line? 8. J'ai I'une et I'autre. 9. Avez-vous liuit kilogrammes de 
canelle ? 10. Non, monsieur ; je n'en ai qu'mi demi-kilogramme. 
11. Combien de francs avez-vous, monsieur? 12. Je n'ai qu'un demi- 
franc, mais mon ami a un franc et demi. 13. Votre soeur a-t-elle 
vingt-cinq centimes ? 14. Qui, monsieur ; elle a un quart de frsuac. 
15. N'avons-nous pas le premier aout ? 16. Non, monsieur; nous 
avons le six septembre. 17. Est-ce aujourd'hui le dix ? 18. Kon, 
monsieur ; c'est le onze. 19. Votre frere a-t-il la premiere place ? 
20. Non, monsieur; il a la dixieme. 21. Yotre menuisier a-t-il 
beaucoup d'outils ? 22. Oui, monsieur ; il en a beaucaup. 23. Cet 
ouvrage a-t-il dix volumes ? 24. Non, monsieur ; il n'en a que neuf. 
25. J'ai le sixieme volume des oeuvres de Moliere, et le premier vo- 
lume 'de I'histoire de France de Michelet. 



I 



Exercise 16. 
1. Is that cinnamon good ? 2. That cinnamon is better than yours 
and your brother's. [R. 1 .] 3. What day of the month is it to-day ? 
4. It is the sixth. 5. Has your father twenty francs? 6. No, sir; he 
has only six francs fifty centimes. 7. How many volumes has your 
work ? 8. It has many, it has fifteen. 9. Has the joiner read (lu) the 
BGCond volume of Michelet'a history of France ? 10. Yes, sir j he haa 



10 VIKGTIEME LEgON". 

read the second volume (of it). 11. Has your friend Moliere's works? 
12. He has only two volumes of them. 13. Have you my cloth coat 
or my velvet coat ? 14. We have both. 15. We have this and that. 
16. How much cinnamon have you? 17. We have two kilogrammes. 
]8. How many centimes has the merchant? 19. He has twenty-six. 
20. Have you the third or the fourth place ? 21. 1 have neither the 
third nor the fourth, I have the tenth. 22. Are you not ashamed to- 
day ? 23. No, sir ; I am not ashamed, but I am afraid. 24. Have 
you a quarter of a franc ? 25. 'No, sir ; but I have half a franc. 
26. Is it the sixth of July ? 27. No, sir ; it is the fourth of March. 
28. Has your uncle six children ? 29. No, sir ; he has only one. 
30. Have you ten kilogrammes of meat? ^1. I have only five kilo- 
grammes. 32. Is the butcher's meat good ? 33. It (elle) is not very 
good. 34. How many kilogrammes have you (of it) ? 35. I have 
only two, but my brother has four. 



LEgON XX. LESSON XX. 

THE TIME OF THE DAY. AGE, ETC. 

1. For the time of the day, the verb etre is used unipersonally in 
French, in the same manner as the verb to he is used in English for 
the same object. The word heure, sing, heures, plur. represents the 
EngUsh expressions, o'clock, or timej and must always be expressed. 

Quelle heure est-il ? What o'clock (time) is it ? 

II est une heure. Jt is one o'clock. 

II est dix heures. Ji is ten; it is ten o'' clock. 

2. Midi is used for twelve o'clock in the day, and minuitj for mid- 
night, or twelve at night. Douze heures is never used, except in the 
sense of twelve hours. 

Est-il niidi ? Est-il minuit ? 75 it noon ? Is it midnight f 

3. Ut quart, et demie, [§ 84, (3.) J answer to the English expres" 
sions, a quarter, half-past, after, &c. 

n est neuf heures et quart. Jt is a quarter after nine. 

II est midi et demi. Jt ts half after twelve. 

11 est une heure et demie. Jt is half after one. 

4. Moins un quart, moins vingt minutes, answer to the English ex- 
pressions, a quarter lefore, twenty minutes before, &c. 



THE TIME OP THE DAT, ETC. 



n 



Tl est dix heures moins uu quart. 
II est neuf heures moius dix mi- 
nutes. 



It wants a quarter of ten. 
It is ten minutes before nine. 



5. The word demi, preceding the word heure, does not vary. 
Placed after it, it is variable. [§ 84, (2.) (3.)] 



Une demi-heure. 
Une heure et demie. 



Malf an hour. 

An hour and a half. 



6. The verb avoir, is used actively [§ 43, (2,) (3,)] in Trench, in 
fipeaking of age, and the word, an, year, is always expressed. 

Quel age avez-vous ? How old are you f lit. What age hava 

you? 
J'ai plus de vingt ans. I am more than twenty. 

7. Plus de, moins de, are used for more than, less than, before a 
number. 

Avons-nous plus de dix metres de Have we more than ten metres of this 

cette toiJe d'HolIande ? Holland {Holland linen) ? 

Vou3 en avez moins de six aunes. You have less than six ells of it. 

Resume op Examples. 



n n'est pas encore deux heures. 

Est-il une heure et demie ? 

II est midi et quart ou midi et demi. 

II est huit heures moins un quart. 

Quel age votre fils a-t-il ? 

II n'a que dix-huit ans. 

Yotre beau-frere n'a-t-il pas plus de 
dix-neuf ans ? 

Ma belle-soeur n'a pas moins de dix- 
huit ans et demi. 

Est-il plus de dix heures d votre 
montre ? 

II n'est que neuf heures d mon 
horloge. 

Votre fils est-il plus age que le 
mien ? 

II est plus jeune que lo votre. 



It is not yet two o^clock. 

Is it half-past one ? 

It is a quarter or half-past twelve. 

It wants a quarter of eight. 

How old is your son ? 

He is only eighteen years old. 

Is not your brother-in-law more than 
nineteen years old ? 

My sister-in-law is not less than eigh- 
teen years and a half 

Is it more than ten o'clock by your 
watch f 

It is only nine by my clock. 

Is your son older than mine f 
He is younger than yours. 



Exercise 37. 
Cela, that; 
Cinquante, fifty ; 
Cousin-germain, m. first 

cousin ; 
Enfant, m. child; 
Beau-pere, m. father-in- Fevrier, m. February; 

law ; Horloge, f clock ; 

Belle-mere, f. mother-in- Indienne, f printed cal- 

law ; ico ; 

Belle-sceur, t sister-in- Italienne, f Italian; 
law; jQxmQf young ; 



Age, e, old; 
Aune, f ell; 
Beau-frere, m. brother- 
in-law ; 
Beau-fils, m, son-in-law ; 



Jour, m. day; ^ 

Maintenant, now; 

Mars, m. March; 

Metre, m. metre, a French 
measure; about three 
French feet ; about 1.09 
yards ; 

Mois, m. m.onth ; 

Ruban, m. ribbon; 

Tard, late; 

Yerge, f. yard. 



72 VINGTIEME LEg03S'. 

1. Votre beau-frere est-il plus age que le mien ? 2. Le votre est 
plus jeune que le mien. 3. Quel age votre belle-mere a-t-elle ? 4. Elle 
a pres de cinquante ans. 5. Quelle heure est-il maintenant ? 6. II 
est six heures passees.- 7. £tes-vous certain de cela? 8. Oui, 
monsieur ; j'en suis certain. 9. Est-il plus de deux heures a votre 
montre? 10. E n'est que midi a ma montre. 11. Avez-vous plus 
de cinq ans, mon enfant ? 12. Je n'ai pas encore quatre ans. 
13. Avez-vous plus de six verges d'indienne ? 14. J'en ai moins de 
trois metres. 15. Combien d'aunes de ruban votre beau-pere a-t-il ? 
16. II n'a guere de ruban, il n'en a qu'une demi-aune. 17. Est-il midi 
moins un quart ? 18. II est plus tard, monsieur ; il est midi et quart. 
19. Quel jour du mois avons-nous ? 20. Nous avons le six octobre. 
21. N'est-ce pas le huit fevrier ? 22. Non, madame; c'estle buit de 
mars. 23. Combien de jardins votre cousin-germ ain a-t-il ? 24. II 
n'en a qu'un, mais il est tres beau. 25. II en a plus de dix. 

Exercise 38. 

1. How old is your brother-in-law ? 2. He is fifty years old. 
3. Is your sister-in-law older than mine ? 4. No, sir ; my sister-in- 
law is younger than yours. 5. Is your son twenty-five years old ? 
6. ISTo, madam ; he is only sixteen. 7. "What day of the month is 
it to-day ? 8. It is the eleventh. 9. Have you the twentieth vol- 
ume of Chateaubriand's works ? 10. ISTo, madam ; we have the 
eleventh. 11. "What o'clock is it, sir ? 12. It is only twelve o'clock. 
13. Is it no later ? 14. It wants a quarter of one. 15. It is a quar- 
ter after five. 16. How many yards of tliis Holland {toile d' Hol- 
lander f.) have you ? 17. I have^ten ells and a half. 18. I have six 
metres of it, and sixteen yards of Itahan silk. 19. Is your mother- 
in-law younger than your father-in-law ? 20. She is younger than 
he. 21. Are you twenty years old? 22. No, sir; I am only nine- 
teen and a half 23. "We are sure {sur) that it is ten o'clock. 24. We 
are sure that it is noon. 25. Is it twenty minutes of ten ? 26. No, 
sir; it is a quarter before twelve (midi). 27. How many houses 
have you ? 28. I have only one, but my sister-in-law has two. 
29. Have you mine (f.) or yours? 30. I have neither yours nor 
mine, I have your son-in-law's. 31. Has your^ mother-in-law five 
yards of that printed cahco ? 32. She has only two yards of it. 
33. "What o'clock h it by (a) your watch ? 34. It is half-past 
four, by my watch. 35. It is more than seven o'clock by mine 
(d la mienne.) 



THE FOtrn CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. ^3 

LEgON XXI. LESSON XXI. 

THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. 

1. The four classes or conjugations, into which the French verbs 
are divided are distinguished by the endings of the present of the 
infinitive [§ 44]. The first conjugation ends in er ; as chanter, to 
sing ; donner, to give ; parler, to speak ; chercher, to seek. 

The second conjugation ends in ir ; as ch^rir, to cherish; punib, 
to punish ; munir, to provide ; finir, to finish. 

The termination of tlie infinitive of the regular verbs of the third 
conjugation, is evoir ; as devoir, to owe ; recevoir, to receive ; that 
of the irregular verbs is oir, as valoir, to he worth. 

The fourth conjugation ends in re : as, rendre, to render / fendre, 
to split ; tendre, to stretch ; vendre, to sell. 

2. A verb preceded by another verb (other than the auxiharies 
avoir and etre), or by a preposition (other than en), is put in tho 
present of the infinitive. 

H va travailler ou lire, He is going to work or to read. 

3. In French, verbs are often connected V7ith others by preposi- 
tions not answering literally to those which accompany the same 
verbs in Enghsh. They also often come together without preposi- 
tions. The student will find in § 129, and the following sections of 
the Second Part, lists of verbs, with the prepositions w;hich they re- 
quire after them. 

4. The following idioms are followed by the preposition de when 
they come before a verb (§ 132) : 

Avoir besoin, to want; ^ Avoir le temps, to have time or Uis» 

Avoir coutume, to he accustomed; ure; 

Avoir dessein, to intend, to design; Avoir peur, to he afraid; 

Avoir envie, to have a wish, a desire; Avoir raison, to he right; 

Avoir honte, to he ashamed; Avoir regret, to regret; 

Avoir intention, or I'intention, to in- Avoir tort, to he wrong ; 

tend ; Avoir sujet, to have reason ; 

Avoir le courage, to have courage ; Avoir soin, to take care. 

Cet enfant a besoin de dormir, That child wants to sleep. 

Vous avez bonte de courir, You are ashamed to run. 

Resume of Examples. 

Avez-vous quelque chose a dire ? Have you any thing to say f 

Je n'ai rien a dire. / have nothing to say. 

Votre soeur n'a-t-elle rien a ecrire ? Has your sister nothing to write f 

Elle a deux lettres a ecrire. She has two lettera to write. 

4 



H VINGT ET UNIEME LEgON. 

A-t-elle le temps de les ecrire ? Has she time to write them ? 

Elle n'a pas dessein de les ecrire. She does not design to write them. 

Elle n'a pas riutention de les ecrire. She does not intend to write them. 

Elle n'a pas envie de les ecrire. She has no desire to write them. 

Avez-vous peur de danser ? Are you afraid to dance ? 

Je n'ai pas honte de danser. / am not ashamed to dance. 

Votre cousin a raison de sortir. Tour cousin is right to go out. 

N'avez-vous pas soin d'ecrire ? Do you not take care to write f 

Avez-vous le courage de lui parler ? Have you the courage to s^eak to him t 

EXEECISE 39. 

•43heter, to buy ; Faire, to make, to do ; Marcher, to walk ; 

Champ, ra. field; Fatigue, e, tired, weary ; Mars, m. March; 

Danser, to dance • Gazette, f. newspaper ; Ne — riea, nothing ; 

De bonne heure, early ; JuUlet, m. July ; Page, f. page ; 

Dormir, to sleep; Juin, m.June; Seize, sixteen; 

Ecrire, to write; Lire, to read; Travailler, to work, labor. 

1. Votre belle-mere a-t-elle quelque chose a faire ? 2. Elle n'a rien 
si faire. 3. A-t-elle deux pages a ecrire ? 4. Non, monsieur ; ella 
n'en a qu'une. 5. Avez-vous I'intention de lire cette gazette ? 6. Oui, 
madame ; j'ai I'intention de la lire. 7. Avez-vous raison d'acheter un 
habit de velours ? 8. J'ai raison d'en acheter un. 9. Votre petite 
fille a-t-elle besoin de dormir ? 10. Oui, monsieur ; elle a besoin de 
dormir, elle est fatiguee. 11. Avez-vous peur de tomber? 12. Je 
n'ai pas peur de tomber. 13. Le jardinier a-t-il le temps de travailler 
dans les champs ? 14. H n'a pas envie de travaOler dans les champs. 
15. Vos champs sont-ils aussi grands que les miens? 16. lis sont 
plus grands que les votres. 17. Avez-vous honte de marcher? 
18. Je n'ai pas honte de marcher, mais j'ai honte de danser. 19. Quel 
dge votre fils a-t-il ? 20. II a seize ans. 21. A vons-nous le deux 
mars ou le cinq juin ? 22. iSTous avons le vingt-huit juillet. 23. Est- 
il midi? 24. Non, monsieur; il n'est pas encore midi, il n'est que 
onze* heures et demie. 25. II est encore de bonne heure. 

Exercise 40. 
1. What has your brother-in-law to do ? 2. He has letters to 
write. 3. Does he want to work ? 4. Yes, sir ; he wants to work. 
5. Does he intend to read my book ? 6. He does not intend to read 
your book, he has no time. 7. Is your sister ashamed to walk ? 
8. My sister is not ashamed to walk, but my brother is ashamed to 
dance. 9. Has your cousin any thing to say ? 10. My cousin has 
nothing to say, she is afraid to speak {parler). 11. Is it late ? 12. No, 
madam ; it is not late, it is early. 13. Have you a wish to read my 

* No elision takes place before onze, onzieme, &c. 



AVOIR BESOIN, ETC. 75 

sister's letter (f.) ? 14. Have you the courage to go to the war ? 15. 1 
have not the courage to go to the war. 16. Is your sister right to buy 
a silk dress (f.) ? 17. Yes, sir; she is right to buy one. 18. Does 
tliat child want to sleep ? 19. No, sir ; that child does not want to 
sleep, he is not tired. 20. Has your brother's gardener a wish to 
work in my garden? 21. He has a wish to work in {dans) mine. 
22. How old is that chUd ? 23. That child is ten years old. 24. What 
is the day of the month ? 25. It is the rSnth of March. 26. Are you 
afraid to walk ? 27. I am not afraid to walk, but I am tired. 28. Have 
you time to read my brother's book ? 29. I have time to read his 
book. 30. Has the joiner a wish to speak? 31. He has a -wish to 
work and to read. 32.. Is your son afraid of falling ? 33. He is not 
afraid of falling, but he is afraid of werking. 34. What o'clock is it ? 
35. It is twelve. 



LEgON XXII. LESSON XXII. 

AVOIR BESOrN-, ETC. tTRE FACHE, ETC. 

1. The expressions, avoir besoin, to want; avoir soin, to take carej 
avoir honte, to he ashamed ; avoir peur, to he afraid^ require also the 
preposition de before a noun. Those idioms mean Hterally, to have 
need, to have care, etc. 

Avez-vous besoin de votre frere ? Do you loant your brother f 

J'ai soin de mes effets. / take care of my things. 

II a honte de sa conduits. He is ashamed of his conduct 

Elle a peur du chien. She is afraid of the dog. 

2. As these expressions require the preposition de before their ob- 
ject, they will, o^ course, require the same preposition before the 
pronoun representing that object. 

J'ai besoin de vous. I want you. 

J'ai soin de lui. / take care of him. 

De qui avez-vous besoin? Whom do you want? 

De quoi a-t-elle besoin ? What does she want ? 

3. When the object is not a person, and has been mentioned be- 
fore, the pronoun en takes the place of the preposition de, and that 
of the pronoun representing the object. 

Avez-vous besoin de votre cheval ? Do you want your horse f 

J'en ai besoin. / want it. 

4. The expressions, etre fache, to he sorry ; etre etonne, to he astoTi' 



^6 



VINGT-DEUXIEME LEQON. 



ished; etre content, to he satisfied, require the preposition de before a 
noun or pronoun. [§ 88.] 



Je suis fache de son malheur. 
Je suis etonue de sa conduite. 
Je suis content de luL 



I am sorry for his misfortune, 
lam astonislied at his conduct. 
I am pleased with him. 



5. Etre fache, in the sense of to le angry, requires the preposition 
contre. 

Tous etes fache contre mot You are angry with me. 

6. For rules on the government of adjectives, see § 87, and fol- 
lomng Sections. 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez-vous besoin d'argent? 

J'ai besoin d'argent. 

Je n'en ai pas besoin. [R. 3.] 

En avez-vous besoin ? 

J'en ai besoin, et mon frere en a 

besoin aussi. 
Avez-vous besoin de votre frere ? 
J'ai besoin de luL^ 
De quoi avez-vous besoin ? 
J'ai besoin d'un dietionnaire. 
Avez-vous soin de votre livre ? 
J'en ai soin. 

Avez-vous soin de votre pere ? 
J'ai soin de lui.^ • 

Votre frere est-il fache contre moi? 
II est fache contre votre soeur. 
Avez-vous peur de ce chien ? 
J'en ai peur. 

De qui avez-vous honte ? 
Je n'ai honte de personne. 
Avez-vous besoin de quelque chose ? 
Je n'ai besoin de rien. 



Do you want m^neyf 

J want inoney. 

I do not want any. 

Do you loant any? 

1 want some, and my brother wants 

some too. 
Do you want your brother t 
J want him. 
What do you want t 
I want a dictionary. 
Do you take care of yourhooTcf 
I take care of it. 

Do you take care of your faiher t 
I take care of him. 
Is your brother angry with me 7 
He is angry vnih your sister. 
Are you afraid of this dog ? 
Jam afraid of him. 
Of whom are you ashamed f 
I am ashamed of nobody. 
Do you want any thing? 
J want nothing. 



Besoin, m. want, need ; 

Car, for ; 

Conduite, f conduct; 

Domestique, m. servant; 

'ESets,^.. -p. things, clothes; Jeune honune, m. young 

'EnYie,'f. wish, desire; man; 



Exercise 41. 

£tonne, e, astonished ; 
Fache, e, sorry, angry ; 
Fatigue, e, weary, tired; 
Garcon, m. boy ; 



Lire, to read; 
Parler, to speak; 
Reposer, to rest; 
Soin, m. care; 
Travailler, to work ; 
Yieux, old. 



1. Qui a besoin de pain ? 2. Personne n'en a besoin. 3. it^Tavez- 
vous pas besoin de votre domestique ? 4. Oui, monsieur ; j'ai besoin 
de lui.^ 5. Yotre jardinier a-t-il soin de votre jardin? 6. Oui, 

^ The word en should be avoided, as much as possible, in relation to 
persons. 



AVOIR BESOIN, ETC. 11 

madame ; il en a soin. 7. A-t-il bien soin de son vieux pere ? 8. Oui, 
monsieur ; il a bien soin de lui, 9. Yotre garcon a-t-il honte de sa 
conduite? 10, Oui, monsieur; il en a honte. 11. Avez-vous peur 
de ce cheval-ci ou de celui-la ? 12. Je n'ai peur ni de celui-ci ni de 
celui-la. 13. Notre domestique a-t-il soin de vos effets ? 14. II en 
a bien soin. 15. Avez-vous peur de parler ou de lire ? 16. Je n'ai 
peur ni de parler ni de lire. 17. £tes-vous etonne de cette affaire? 
18. Je n'en suis pas etonne. 19. En etes-vous fache? 20. Oui, 
monsieur ; j'en suis bien fache. 21. Avez-vous besoin deee garcon? 
22. Oui, madame ; j'ai besoin de lui. 23. N'avez-vous pas besoin da 
son livre ? 24. Je n'en ai pas besoin. 25. Avez-vous envie de 
travailler ou de lire ? 26. Je n'ai envie ni de travailler ni de lire, 
j'ai envie de me reposer car je suis fatigue. 

Exercise 42. 

1. Do you -want your servant ? 2. Yes, sir ; I want him. 3. Does 
your brother-in-law want you ? 4. He wants me and my brother.^ 
6. Does he not want money ? 6. He does not want money, he has 
enough. 7. Is your brother sorry for his conduct ? 8. He is very 
sorry for his conduct, and very angry with you. 9. Does he take 
good (bien) care of his books ? 10. He takes good care of them. 
11. How many volumes has he? 12. He has more than you, he has 
more than twenty. 13. What dues the young man want ? 14. Ho 
wants his clothes. 15. Do you want to rest (vous reposer) ? 16. Is 
not your brother astonished at this ? 17. He is astonished at it. 
18. Have you a wish to read your brother's books ? 19. I have a 
wish to read them, but I have no time. 20. Have you time to work ? 
21. I have time to work, but I have no time to read. 22. Does the 
young brother take care of his things ? 23. He takes good care of 
them. 24. Is that little boy afraid of the dog ? 25. He is not 
afraid of the dog, he is afraid of the horse. 26. Do you want bread ? 
27. I do not want any. 28. Are you pleased with your brother's 
conduct ? 29. I am pleased with it. 30. Has your brother a wish 
to read my book ? 31. He has no desire to read your book, he is 
weary. 32. Is that yoang man angry with you, or with his friends ? 
33. He is neither angry with me nor with his friends. 34. Do yoi^ 
want my dictionary ? 35. I want your dictionary and your brother's. 

* Repeat the preposition c?e. 



"^8 



VINGT-TROISIEME LEgON, 



LEgox xxin. 



LESSON XXIII. 



THE PRESENT AXD PAST PARTICIPLES. THE PRESENT OF 

THE INDICATITE. 

1. If the ending or distinguishing characteristic of the conjugation 
of a verb, in the present of the infinitive, be removed, the part re- 
maining will be the stem of the verb : — 

1st Conj. 2d Conj\ Sc? Conj. Uh Conj, 

Chant-er Fin-ir Rec-evoir Rend-re. 

2. To that 5^6772. are added, in the different simple tenses of a reg- 
nlar verb, the terminations proper to the conjugation to which it be- 
longs. [§60.] 





3. Participle 


Present. 




Chant-ant 


Fin-issant 


Rec-evant 


Rend-ant 


Singing 


Finishing 


Beceiving 


Rendering, 




4. Participle Past. 




Chant-6 


Fin-i 


Rec-u^ 


Rend-u 


Sung 


Finished 


Received 


Rendered. 


5. Terminations of the Present of the 


Indicative. 


Je chant -e 


fin -is 


re§ -ois 


rend -a 


I sing 


finish 


receive 


render 


Tu pari -es 


cber -is 


aperf -oig 


vend -3 


Thou speakest 


cherishest 


perceAvest 


S€llesi 


11 don 11 -e 


fourn -it 


per9 -oit 


tend 


E^ gwes 


furnishes 


gathers 


te7ids 


Nous cherch -ons 


pun -issous 


cone -evona entend -ons 


We seek 


punish 


concevce 


hear 


Tous port -ez 


sais -issez 


d -evez 


perd -ez 


Tou carry 


seize 


owe 


lose 



lis 
They 



-ent 



love, liki 



un -issent 
unite 



deg -oivent mord -ent 



decei'oe 



lite 



6. The present (^ the indicative has but one form in French, there- 
fore Je chants^ may be rendered in Enghsh bj, / sing^ I do sing, or 
/ am singing. 

7. The plural of the present of the indicative may be formed from 
the participle present by changing ant into ons, ez^ ent. Ex : Chantant, 
nous chantons ; finissant, nous finissons ; recevant, nous recevons ; 
rendant, nous rendons. 

1 See § 52, (1). 



THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. 



19 



8. This rule holds good not only in all the regular, but in almost 
aU the irregular verbs. 

9. Verbs may be conjugated interrogatively in French (except in 
tlie first person singular of the present of the indicative,) [§ 98, (4.) 



(5.), L. 25, R. 1.] by placing the 
simple, tenses, and between the 
compound tenses. 

Chantez-vous bien? 
Avez-vous bien cbant^ ? 
N'avez-vous pas bleu chante? 

[L. 7, R. 2.] 
Ne chantez-vous pas bien ? 
Yotre pere parle-t-il bien ? [L. 

4, R. 6— L. 6, R. 4.] 



pronoun after the verb, in all the 
auxiliary and the participle, in the 

I>o you sing well ? 
Have you sung well? 
Have you not sung well ? 

Do you not sing well ? 

Does your father speak well ? 



10. The verb porter means to carry. It means also to wear, in 
speaking of garments ; apporter means io hring^ and emporter, to 
carry away. Aimer means to love, io like, to he fond of, and takes the 
preposition d before another vex'b. 



Quel habit portez-vous ? 

Je porte un habit de drap noir, 

Yotre frke qu'apporte-t-il ? [L. 

4, R. 6.] 
II apporte do I'argent a son amu 



Wliat coat do you wear ? 
/ tvear a coat of black cloth. 
Wliat does your hrother bring t 

He brings money to his friend. 



11. A noun used in a general sense [§ 77 (1.)] takes the article Is^ 



la, T, or les. 



Aimez-vous le boeuf ou le mouton ? Do you like beef or mutton f 
Je n'aime ni le boeuf ui le mouton. / like neither beef nor mutton. 

RiisuMi: OF Examples. 



Chantez-vous una chanson ita- 

lienne ? 
Nous ehantons des chansons alle- 

raandes. 
Portez-vous ce livre a Thorame ? 
Non, je le porte a mon frere. 
Eraportez-vous tout votre argent ? 
J'en emporte seulement uno partie. 
Finissez-vous votro lecou aujour- 

d'inii? 
Nous la finissons ce matin. 
N'aimez-vous pas Ics enfants? 
Je les aimc beaucoup. 
Recevez-vous beaucoup de lettres ? 
Nous en recevons beaucoup. 
Vcndez-vons des marchandises? 
Nous en vendons beaucoup. 
Yotre frere aime le boeuf et le mouton. 



Do you sing an Italian songt 

We sing German songs. 

Do you carry this book io the mant 
No, I carry it to my brother. 
Do you carry away all your vnoney} 
I carry away only a part of it. 
Do you finish your lesson to-day f 

We finish it this morning. 

Do you not like children ? 

J like them much. 

Do you receive many letters? 

We receive many. 

Do you sell goods ? 

We sell many. 

Tour brother likes beef and mutton. 



80 VINGT-TEOISi:feME LEgON. 

Exercise 43. 

^W* We shall hereafter put a hyphen between the stem and the terminaiicm of 
the verbs placed in the vocabularies. The number indicates the conjugation. 
Aim-er, 1. to love, to like, Donn-er, 1. to give; Non seulement, not only; 

to be fond of ; Fin-ir, 2. to finish ; Lecture, f. reading; 

Autre, other; rourn-ir, 2. to furnish; Parce que, because; 

Assez, enough ; Gard-er, 1. to keep ; Paille, L straw ; 

Chapeau, m. hat ; Guere, but little ; Perd-re, 4. to lose ; 

Cher-ir, 2. to cherish ; Habits, m. p. clothes, Port-er, 1. to carry, to 
Cherch-er, 1. to seek, to garments; wear; 

look for ; Mais, but ; Rec-evoir, 3. to receive ; 

Compagnon, m. compan- Maison, £ house ; Souvent, often ; 

ion; Marchand, m. merchant ; Toujours, always ; 

DsLvae, t lady ; MaXm, m. morriing ; Travail, m. Zafcor; 

De bonne heure, early ; Marchandises, t'^.goods ; Trouv-er, 1. to find; 
D-evoir, 3. to owe ; Neveu, m. nephew ; Yead-re, 4. to sell 

1. Votre mere aime-t-elle la lecture ? [R. 11.] 2, Oui, mademoi- 
selle ; elle I'aime beaucoup plus que sa soeur. 3. Quel chapeau votre 
neveu porte-t-il ? 4. H porte un chapeau de sole, et je porte un cha- 
peau de paille. 5. Cette dame aime-t-elle ses enfants ? 6. Oui, 
monsieur; elle les cherit. 7. Fournissez-vous des marchandises a 
ces marchands ? 8. Je fournis des marchandises a ces marchands, et 
ils me donnent de I'argent. 9. Yos compagnons aiment-ils les beaux 
habits? [H. 11.] 10. iSTos compagnous aiment les beaux habits et 
les bons hvres. 11. Cherchez-vous men frere ? 12. Oui, monsieur; 
je le cherche, mais je ne le trouve pas. 13. Yotre frere perd il son 
temps. 14. II perd son temps et son argent. 15. Perdons-nous 
toujours no tre temps ? 16. Nous le perdons tres souvent. 17. De- 
vez-vous beaucoup d'argent ? 18. J'en dois assez, mais je n'en dois 
pas beaucoup. 19. Yendez-vous vos deux maisons a notre mede- 
cin ? 20. Je n'en vends qu'une, je garde I'autre pour ma belle-soeur. 
21. Recevez-vous de I'argent aujourd'hui? 22. Nous n'en recevons 
guere. 23. Yotre menuisier finit-il son travail de bonne heure ? 
24. n le finit tard. 25. A quelle heure le finit-il? 26. II le finit a 
midi et demi. 27. Nous finissons le notfe a dix heures moins vingt 
minutes. 

EXEKCISE 44. 

1. Does your companion hke reading? 2. My companion does 
not like reading. 3. Does your father hke good books? [R. 11.] 
4. He hkes good books and good clothes.^ 5. Do you owe more 
than twenty dollars ? 6. I only owe ten, but my brother owes more 
than fifteen. 7. Are you wrong to finish your work early ? 8. I am 

1 Repeat the article. 



lEREGUIiAR VERBS. CHEZ, ETC. 81 

rlglit to finish mine early, and you are ■wrong not to {de ne pas) fin- 
ish yours. 9. Do you receive much money to-day ? 10. I receive 
but little. 11. Do we give our best books to that little child ? 12. We 
do not give them, we keep them because we want them. 13. Do 
you sell your two horses ? 1-1. We do not sell our two horses, we 
keep one of them. 15. Do you finish your work this morning? 
16. Yes, sir; I finish it this morning early. 17. Does your brother- 
in-law like fine clothes ? 18. Yes, madam ; he likes fine clothes. 
19. Do you seek my nephew ? 20. Yes, sir; we seek him. 
21. Does he lose his time ? 22. He loses not only his time, but ha 
loses money. 23. How much money has he lost to-day ? 24. He 
has lost more than ten dollars. 25. Does your joiner finish your 
house? 26. Pie finishes my house and my brother's. 27. Do you 
sell good hats ? 28. We sell silk hats, and silk hats are good. 
[R. 11.] 29. How old is your companion? 30. He is twelve years 
old, and his sister is fifteen. 31. Does your brother like meat? 
32. He likes meat and bread. 33. Do you receive your goods at 
two o'clock? 34. We receive them at half after twelve. So. Wo 
receive them ten minutes before one. 



LEgON XXiy. LESSON XXIV. 

lEEEGULAR VERBS. CHEZ, ETC. 

1. There are in French, as in other languages, verbs which aw 
called irregular, because they are not conjugated according to the 
rule, or model verb of the conjugation to which they belong. [§ 62.] 

2. Many irregular verbs have tenses which are conjugated I'egu- 
larly. 

3. The singular of the present of the indicative of the irregular 
verbs, is almost always irregular. 

4. In verbs ending in yer^ the y is changed into i before an e mute.* 
49.] 

5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Yerds, 

Aller, 1. to go ; Envoyer, 1, iosend; Yenir, 2, to come; 

Je vais, I go^ do go, or J'envoie[R. A:.'] I send, do Jeviens, I come, docome^ 

am going ; send, or am sending ; or am coming ; 

Tu vas, Tu envoies, Tu viens, 

II va, . II envoie, II vient, 

Nous allons, Nous cnvoyons, Nous venous, 

Yous allez, Yous envoyez, Yous venez, 

Us vont, lis envoient [R. 4.] lis viennent. 

* Many French authors do not make that change, but write /e»wye, etc 



82 VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. 

6. All verbs ending in enir are conjugated like venir. 

7. The student wiil find, in § 62, the irregular verbs alphabeticallj 
arranged. He should always consult that table, when meeting with 
an irregular verb. 

8. The expression a la maison^ is used for the Enghsh at homej at 
Ills or her Jiouse, etc. 

Le chirurgien est-il a la maison ? 75 the surgeon at home f 

ilon frere est a la maison. My brother is at home. 

9. The preposition cAez, placed before a noun or pronoun, answers 
to the EngUsh, at the house of, with (meaning at the residence o/), 
among, etc. [§ 142, (3.)] 

Chez moi, cliez lui, chez elle, At my house, at his Iwuse, ather house. 

Chez nous, cbez vous, chez eux, m. At our house, at your house, at their 
chez elles, /. house. 

That is literally, at the house of me, at the house of him, etc. 

Chez men pere, chez ma sceur, At my father^ s, at my sister's. 

10. The word avec answers to the English with, meaning merely 
in the company of 

Tenez avec nous, ou avec lui. Come with us, or with him. 

11. The word y means to it, at it, at that place, there. It is gener- 
ally placed before the verb, and refers always to something men- 
tioned. [§ 39, (18.) § 103, (2), § 104.] 

Votre soeur est-elle chez vous? Is your sister at your house? 

Oui, monsieur ; elle j est. Yes, sir / she is there. 

12. In French, an answer cannot, as in English, consist merely of 
an auxihary or a verb preceded by a nominative pronoun ; as, Do 
you come to my house to-day ? I do. Have you books? / have. 
The sentence, in French, must be complete; as, / go there; I have 
some. The words oui or non, without a verb, would however 
suffice. 

Allez-vous chez lui aujourd'hui ? Do you go to his house to-day 1 

Gui, monsieur; j'y vais. Yes, sir; I do. 

Avez-vous des Uvres chez vous ? Have you books at home ? 

Oui, monsieur ; nous en avons. Yes, sir ; we have. 

Resum^ op Examples. 

Ou le colonel est-il ? Where is the colonel f 

31 est chez son frere aine. Be is at his eldest broih&r's. 

N'est-il pas chez nous ? Is he not our house ? 

Non, moosieur ; il n'y est pas. No, sir; liQ is not. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. — CHEZ, ETC. 83 

Madame votre mere est-elle a la Is your mother at home t 

maison ? ^ 

Kon, madame ; elle n'y est pas. No, madam ; she is not. 

Allez-vous Chez nous, ou chez lui ? Do you go to our hov^e, or to his 

house ? 

Nous aliens cLez le capitaine. We go to the captain^s. 

N'est-il pas chez votre frere ? 75 he not at your l>rother''s ? 

Nou, monsieur ; il est chez nous. No, sir ; he is at our house. 

N'envoyez-vous pas vos habits chez Do you not send your clothes to your 

vos soeurs ? sisters'' f 

Je les envoie chez elles. I send them to their house. 

N'allez-vous pas chez ce monsieur ? Do you not go to that gentleman's ? 

Je n'y vais pas,'* je u'ai pas le temps I do not, [R. 12.] I have not time to 

d'y aller aujourd'hui. go there to-day. 

Exercise 45. 

AU-er, 1. ir. to go ; Horloger, m. watch-ma- Peintre, to., painter ; 

Ami, m. friend ; ker ; Relieur, m. hook-hinder; 

Associi, m. partner ; Hollandais, e, Dutch; Rest-er, 1. to remain, 

Capitaine. m. captain ; Magasin, m. warehouse, live ; 

Demeur-er, 1. to live, store, shop; Russe, Russian; 

dwdl ; Maison, f. house ; Yen-ir, 2. ir, to come ; 

Gilet, m, waistcoat ; Matin, m. morning ; Voisiu, e, neighbor. 

1. Ou allez-vous men ami ? 2. Je vais chez monsieur votre pere, 
est-il a la maison? 3. II y est ce matin. 4. D'ou venez-vous? 
5. Nous venons de chez vous et de chez votre soeur. 6. Qui est chez 
nous ? 7. Mon voisin y est aujourd'hui. 8. Ou. avez-vous I'inten- 
tion de portei- ces livres ? 9. J'ai I'lntention de les porter chez le fils 
du medecin. 10. Avez-vous tort de rester chez vous ? 11. Je n'ai 
pas tort d3 rester a la maison. 12. L'horloger a-t-il de bonnes 
montres chez lui ? 13. II n'a pas de montres chez lui, il en a dans 
son magasin. 14. Chez qui portez-vous vos livres ? 15. Je les 
porte chez le relieur. 16. Allez-vous chez le capitaine hollandais? 
17. Nous n' aliens pas chez le capitaine hollandais, nous allons chez 
le major russe. IS. Est-il chez vous ou chez votre frere ? 19. II 
demeure chez nous. 20. Ne demeurons-nous pas chez votre tailleur ? 
21. Vous J demeurez. 22. Votre peintre d'ou vient-il ? 23. II vient 
de chez son associe. 24. Ou portez-vous mes souliers et mon gilet? 
25. Je porte vos souliers chez le cordonnier, ct votre gilet chez le 
tailleur. 

Exercise 46. 

1. Where does your friend go ? 2. He is going [L. 23, R. G], to 
your house or to your brother's. 3. Does he not intend to go to 

^ The French, in speaking to a person whom they respect, prefix the 
■word Monsieur, Madame, or Mademoiselle to the word representing their 
interlocutor's relations, or friends. 

» See g 103, (2.) 



S4 VINGT-CINQFli:ME LEgON. 

your partner's ? 4. He intends to go there, but he has no time to-day. 
5. What do you want to-day ? 6.1 want my waistcoat, which (qui) 
is at the tailor's. 7. Are your clothes at the painter's ? 8. They are 
not there, they are at the tailor's. 9. Where do you hve, my friend ? 
10. I hve at your sister-in-law's. 11. Is your father at home ? 12. JSTo, 
sir ; he is not. 13. Where does your servant carry the wood ? 14. He 
carries it to the Russian captain's. 15. Does the gentleman who (qui) 
is with your father, Hve at his house? 16. No, sir; he lives with 
me. 17. Is he wrong to live with you ? 18. No, sir ; he is right 
to live with me. 19. Whence (d'ou) comes the carpenter ? 20. He 
comes from his partner's house, 21. Has he two partners ? 22. No, 
sir ; he has only one, who lives here (ici). 23. Have you time to 
go to our house, this morning ? 24. We have time to go there. 25. We 
intend to go there, and to speak to your sister. 26. Is she at your 
house ? 27. She is at her (own) house. 28. Have you bread, butter, 
and cheese at home ? 29. We have bread and butter there. 30. We 
have no cheese there, we do not hke cheese. 31. Is your watch at 
the watchmaker's ? 32. It (eUe) is there. 33. Have you two gold 
watches ? 34. I have only one gold watch. 35. Who intends to go 
to my father's, this morning ? 36. Nobody intends to go there. 



LEgON XXY. LESSEN XXY. 

INTEEROGATIVE FOEM OF THE PRESENT OP THE INDICATIVE. 

1. In the first person singular of the present of the indicative of 
almost all those French verbs, which in that person have only one 
syllable, and in those which end in ger or gir, the common interroga- 
tive form [L. 23, 9.] is not used. To render the verb interrogative, 
the expression est-ce que is prefixed to the affirmative form. [§ 98, 
(5.) (6.)] 

Est-ce que je vends du drap? Do I sell doth? 

Est-ce que je mange trop ? Do I eat too much ? 

Est-ce que j'agis bien ? Do I act well ? 

2. The first person singular of the indicative of avoir, to have ; etre, 
to he; aller, to go; pouvoir, to he able; devoir, to owe; savoir, ia 
know, etc., may however, be conjugated interrogatively according to 
the general rules. 

Ai-je vos mouchoirs ? Have I your handkerchiefs f 

Combien vous dois-je ? M?w much do I ewe you 1 



INTERROGATIVE FORMS, ETC. 85 

3. The form est-ce que is always allowable, and in conversation and 
familiar writing generally preferable/ even when the first person 
singular of the present of the indicative of a verb has several syl- 
lables, [§ 98, (6.)] 

Est-ce que je vous envoie des livres ? Do I send you dooTcs f 
Est-ce que je commence a parler ? Do I begin to speak 7 

4. Est-ce que may in conversation, be used with all the persons of 
those tenses susceptible of being conjugated interrogatively : — Qu'est- 
ce que vous lisez ? may be said, instead of, Que lisez-vous ? What do 
you read f 

5. Interrogative Form of the Indicative Present op 
Aller, to go. Envoyer, to send. Venir, to come. 

Est-ce que je vais 1 do I Est-ce que j'envoie ? do Est-ce que je viens 1 do I 
go, or am I going ? Isend, or am I sending ? come, or am I coming t 

Vas-tu? Envoies-tu? Viens- tu? 

Ya-t-il? Envoie-t-il ? Yient-il? 

Allons-nous? Envoyons-nous ? Venons-nous? 

Allez-vous ? Envoyez-vous ? Yenez-vous ? 

Yont-ils ? Envoient-ils ? Yiennent-ils ? 

6. The article ?e, preceded by the preposition d is contracted into 
au before a noun masculine commencing, with a consonant, or an h 
aspirate ; and into aux before a plural noun. [§ 13, (8.)] 

Allez-vous au bal ou au marche ? Do you go to the hall or to market f 

7. A I'eglise means at or to church; a I'ecole, at or to school: — 
Nous allons a I'eglise ot a I'ecole. We go to church and to school. 

8. Quelque part, means somewhere^ anywhere ; nulle part, nowhere^ 

Yotre neveu oh. est-il ? Where is your nejpheio 7 

II est quelque part. He is somewhere. 

II n'est nulle part. He is nowhere. 

Resume of Examples. 

Est-ce que je vais a I'ecole ? Do I go to school? 

Yous allez a I'eglise aujourd'hui. You go to church to-day. 

Est-ce que je commence mon travail 1 Do I begin my work T 

Est-ce que je parle anglais ? Do I speak English ? 

Est-ce que j'envoie ce livre a mon Do Isend this book to my brother f 

frere ? 
Allez-vous au marche demain ? Do you go to market to-morrow ? 

J'y vais apres-demain. / go there the day after to-morrow. 

' No Frenchman, for example, would ever say demande-jef do I ask? 
apporte-je? do I bring? etc., except perhaps in oratorical style or in poetry. 
Thia rule will apply also to the imperfect and past definite. 



86 



VII«"GT-CINQUIEME LEgON. 



Envoyez-vous voa enfanta a I'ecole ? 

Je les envoie chez le professeur. 

Je les y envoie cette aprcS-midL 

Yos habits ou sunt-ils ? 

lis sont quelque part. 

lis ne sont nuUe part. 

Est-ce que je demeure chez vous? 



Do you send your children to school f 

J send them to the professor^ s. 

I send them there this afternoon. 

Where are your clothes t 

They are somewhere. 

They are nowhere. 

JDo I live at your house f 



EXEECISE 47. 



Absent, e, absent; 
Adresse, f. address ; 
Banque, f. bank; 
Banquier, m. banker , 
Billet, m. note, ticket, 
Chapelier, m. hatter , 
Concert, m. concert ; 
Coi!p-er, 1. to cut ; 



Cuir, m. leather; 
Depuis, since; 
Ecole, f. school; 
Ecolier, m. scholar; 
Egiise, f. church; 
Marche, m. market; 

Ne-point, not, (a stronger Yert, e, green, 
negative than pas ;) 



Noir, e, black; 
Perruquier, m, hair-dresS' 

er ; 
Poste, f. post-0 fice ; 
Rouge, red; 
Village, m. village; 



1. Ou est-ce que je vais ? 2. Vous allez chez le chapelier. 3. Est-ce 
que je vais a la banque ? 4. Vous allez a la banque et au concert. 

6. Est-ce que je coupe votre bois ? 6. Vous ne coupez ni mon bois 
ni mon habit. 7. Est-ce que je porte un chapeau vert ? 8. Vous ne 
portez pas un chapeau A'ert, vous en portez un noir. 9. Votre 
ecolier va-t-il quelque part? 10. II va a 1' egiise, a I'ecole, et au 
marche. 11. Ne va-t-il pas chez le perruquier ? 12. II ne va nuUe 
part. IS. Ne portez- vous point des bottes de cuir rouge? 14. J' en 
porte de cuir noir. 15. N'allez-vous pas chez le banquier ? 16. Je 
ne vais pas chez lui, 11 est absent depuis hier. 17. Vient-il a la banque 
ce matin ? 18. II a I'intention d'y venir, s'il a le temps.^ 19. A-t-il 
envie d'aller au concert ? 20. II a grande envie d'y aller, mais il 
n'a pas de billet. 21. Demeurez-vous dans ce village ? 22. Oui, 
monsieur, j'y demeure. 23. Envoyez-vous ce billet a la poste ? 
24. Je I'envoie a son adresse. 

EXEKCISE 48. 

1. Do I wediV my large black hat ? 2. You wear a handsome 

green hat. 3. Does the banker go to the hair-dresser's this morning ? 

4. He goes there this morning. 5. Does he intend to go to the bank 

this morning ? 6. He does not intend to go there, he has no time. 

7. Do you send your letters to the post-office ? 8. I do not send 
them, they are not yet written {icrites). 9. Do I send jou a note? 

10. You send me a ticket, but I have no wish to go to the concert. 

11. Does your brother go to school to-morrow. 12. He goes (there) 
to-day, and remains at home to-morrow. 13, Do I go there ? 14. You 



* The i of si is elided before t7, t7s, but in no other case, 
only instance of the elision of 4. 



This is thd 



IDIOMATIC USB OF ALLER, VENIK,ETC. 8t 

do not go anywhere. 15. Where do you go ? 16, I am going to 
your brother's, is he at 'home ? 17. He is not at home, he is ab- 
sent. 18. Does your brother Kve in this village ? 19. He does 
not; [L. 24, 12] he lives at my nephew's. 20, Are you wrong 
to go to school ? 21, No, sir ; I am right to go to church and to 
school, 22. Do you wish to come to my house ? 23. I hke to go to 
your house, and to your brother's. 24. When are you coming to 
our house ? 25. To-morrow, if I have time. 26, Does the banker 
like to come here ? 27, He likes to come to your house. 28. Is the 
hair-dresser coming? 29, He is not yet coming. 30. What are you 
sending to the scholar? 31. I am sending books, paper, and clothes. 
32. Where is he ? 33, He is at school 34. Is the school in the vil- 
lage ? 35. It is there. 



LEgON XXYI. LESSON XXYI. 

IDIOMATIC USE OF ALLEE, VENIR, ETC. 

1. The verb alter, is used, in French, in the same manner as the 
Verb to gOj in English, to indicate a proximate future. 

Allez-vous ecrire ce matin? Are you going to write this morning t 

Je vais ecrire mes lettres. / am going to write my letters. 

2. The verb venir is used idiomatically, in French, to indicate a 
past just elapsed. It requires, in this signification, the preposition de 
before another verb, 

Je viens d'ecrire mes lettres. I have just written my letters. 

Nous veuons de recevoir des lettres. We have just received letters. 

3. AUer trouver, venir trouver, are used in the sense of to go io, 
io come to, in connection with nouns or pronouns representing 
persons. 

Allez trouver le ferblantier. Go to the tinman. 

J'ai envie d'aller le trouver. J have a desire io go to him. 

Venez mo trouver a dix heures. Come to me at ten o'clock. 

4. Alter chercher, means to ^o for, to go and fetch. 

Allez chercher le medecin. Go and fetch the physician. 

Je vais chercher du sucre et du cafe. 1 am going for coffee and sugar, 

5. Envoy er chercher, means to send for, to send and fetch. 

Envoyer chercher le marchand. Send for the merchant. 

J'envGie chercher des legumes. I send for vegetables. 



88 VINGT-SIXIEME LEgOK. 

6. The first and second persons of the plural of the imperative 
are, with few exceptions, the same as the corresponding persons of 
the present of the indicative. The pronouns nous, vous, are not 
used with the imperative. 

7. Plukal of the Imperative of Aller, Envoter, and Yenir. 

Aliens, let us go ; Envoyons, let us send ; Yenons, let us come ; 

Allez, go ; Envoyez, send ; Yenez, coine. 

8. Tous, m. ioutes^ f. followed by the article les and a plural noun, 
axe used, in French, in the same sense as the word every in English. 

Yotre frere vient tous les jours. Your Irother comes every day, 

Yous allez a recole tous les matins. You go to school every morning. 

9. Tout, m. toute, f. followed by Ze or la and the noun in the 
singular, are used for the English expression the whole, coming before 
a noun. 

n reste ici touts la journee. He remains here the whole day. 

10. A day of the week or of the month, pointed out as the time 
of an appointment or of an occurrence, is not preceded by a preposi- 
tion in French. 

Yenez lundi ou mardi. Come on Monday or Tuesday. 

Yenez le quinze ou le seize avril. Come on the fifteenth or sixteenth 

of April 

11. When the occurrence is a periodical or customary one, the 
article le is prefixed to the day of the week or the time of the day. 

n vient nous trouver le lundi. Me comes to us Mondays. 

II va trouver votre pere Tapres-midi Re goes to your father in the afternoon. 

RE^bME OF Examples. 

Je vais parler 4 votre pere. I am going to speaTc to your father. 

Nous venons de reeevoir de 1' argent. We have just received money. 

Que venez-vous de faire ? What have you just done ? 

Je viens de dechirer mon habit. / have just torn my coat. 

Yotre frere va-t-il trouver son ami? Does your brother go to his friend f 

II va le trouver tous les jours. Ha goes to him every day. 

II vient me trouver tous les lundis. He comes to me every Monday, 

Allez-vous chercher de I'argent? Do you go and fetch money? 

Je n'en vais pas chercher. I do not. [L, 24. 12.] 

Envoy ez-vous chercher des livres Do you send fior Arabic books? 

arabes ? 

Allez-vous chez cette dame lundi? Do you go to that lady^son Monday? 

J'ai Tintention d'y aller mardi. / intend to go there on Tuesday. 

J'y vais ordinairement le mercredi. I generally go there Wednesdays. 

H va i I'eglise le dimaaehe. Be goes to church Sundays* 



IDIOMATIC USE OP ALLEE, VESTIE, ETC. 89 

EXEECISE 49, 

Annee, f. year; Dimanche, m. Sunday ; Mardi, m. Tuesday; 

Apprend-re,4.ir. to learn; Ecossais, e, Scotch ; Mercredi, m. Wednes*^ 

Apres-midi, f. afternoon; Ecri-re, 4. ir. to write; day ; 

Commenc-er, 1. to com- Enseign-er, \. to teach; Musique, f. mMSic; 

mence ; Excepte, except; Trocham, e, next ; 

Compagne, f. compan- Jeudi, m. Thursday ; Yendredi, m. Friday; 

ion; Journee, f. day- Eest-er, 1. to remain, 

Connaissances, f. ac- Irian dais, e, /?•^s^; live; 

quaintances ; Lundi, m. Monday ; Samedi, Saturday ; 

Demain, to-morrow; Malade, sick; Teinturier, m. dyer. 

1. Qu'allez-vous faire ? 2. Je vais apprendre mes lemons. 
3. N'allez-vous pas ecrire a, vos connaissances ? 4. J"e ne vais ecrire 
a personne. 5. Qui vient de vous parler ? 6. L'Irlandais vient de 
nous parler. 7. Quand I'Ecossaise va-t-elle vous enseigner la mu- 
sique ? 8. EUe va me I'enseigner I'annee prochaine. 9. Va-t-elle 
commencer mardi ou mercredi ? 10. EUe ne va commencer ni mardi 
ni mercredi, elle a rintention de commencer jeudi, si elle a le temps. 

11. Votre compagne va-t-elle a I'eglise tous les dimanches ? 12. Elle 
y va tous les dimanches ct tous les mercredis. 13. Qui allez-vous 
trouver ? 14. Je ne vais trouver personne. 15. N'avez-vous pas 
rintention de venir me trouver demain ? 16. J'ai I'intention d'aller 
trouver votre teinturier. 17. Envoyez-vous cherclier le medecin? 
18. Quand je suis malade, je I'envoie chercher. 19. Eeste-t-il aveo 
vous toute la journee ? 20. II ne reste chez moi que quelques 
minutes. 21. Allez-vous a I'ecole le matin ? 22. J'y vais le matin 
et I'apres-midi. 23. Y allez-vous tous les jours ? 24. J'y vais fftus 
les jours, excepte le lundi et le dimanche. 25. Le samedi, je reste 
chez nous, et le dimanche, je vais a I'eglise. 

Exercise 50. 
1. What is the Irishman going to do ? 2. He is going to teach 
music. 3. Has he just commenced Ms work ? 4. He has just com- 
menced it. 5. Who has just written to you? 6. The dyer has just 
written to me. 7. Does your little boy go to church every day t 
8. No, sir ; he goes to church Sundays, and he goes to school every 
day. 9. Do you go for the physician ? 10. I send for him because 
ny sister is sick. 11. Do you go to my physician, or to yours? 

12. I go to mine, yours is not at home. 13. Where is he. 14. He 
is at your father's, or at your brother's. 15. Do you intend to 
send for the physician ? 16. I intend to send for him. 17. Am I 
right to send for the Scotchman ? 18. You are right to send for 
lum. 19. Do you go to your father in the afternoon ? 20. I go to 



90 VINGT-SEPTIEME LEgON". 

him in the morning. 21. Does your brother go to your uncle's every 
Monday ? 22. He goes there every Sunday. 23. Are you going 
to learn music ? 24. My niece is going to learn it, if she has time. 
25. Am I going to read or to write ? 26. You are gomg to read to- 
morrow. 27. Does he go to your house every day ? 28. Pie comes 
to us every Wednesday. 29. At what hour? 30. At a quarter 
before nine. 31. Does he come early or late ? 32. He comes at a 
quarter after nine. 33. What do you send for ? 34. We send for 
wine, bread, butter, and cheese. 35. What do you go for ? 36. We 
go for vegetables, meat and sugar. 37. We want sugar every 
morning. 

♦ ♦ » 

LEgON XXYII. LESSON XXVII. 

PLACE OP THE PE0:N-0UNS. 

1. The personal pronoun used as the direct regimen [§ 2, (2.) § 42, 
(4.)] or object of a verb,^ is, in French, placed before the verb, ex- 
cept in the second person singular, or in the first and second persons 
plural of the imperative used afiSrmatively. 

E me volt, 11 1'aime. He sees me, Tie loves him. 

II nous aime, il vous aime. He loves us, he loves you. 

2. The personal pronoun representing the indirect regimen of the 
verb, [§ 2, (3.) § 42, (5.)] answering to the dative of the Latin, and 
to the indirect object of the Enghsh with the preposition to expressed 
or understood, is also in French placed before the verb. 

II' me parte, 11 lui parte. He speaks to me, he speaks to him. 

II nous donne une fleur. He gives us a Jlower? 

II vous parle, il leur parte. He speaks to you, he speaks to them. 

3. The personal pronoun is generally placed after the following 
verbs : aller, to go ; accourir, to run to ; courir, to run ; venir, to 
come ; penser a, songer a, to think of. 

II vlent a moi. He comes to me. 

Ilrpense a vous, a eux. He thinks of you, of them. 

4. In the imperative used affirmatively, the pronouns follow the 
verb, and are joined to it by a hyphen. 

Aimez-les, parlez-leur. Love them, speak to them. 

^ The yoimg student will easily distinguish the personal pronoun used 
as the direct regimen of a verb, by the fact that there is in English no 
preposition between the verb and this pronoun. 

^ The preposition io is understood. Ha gives a flower to us. 



PLACE OP PRONOUNS. 



n 



5. The words ew and 1/ follow the above rules, except the 3d. 
J'en parle, j'y pense. I speah of it, I think of it. 

6. The pronoun used as indirect regimen, answering to the geni- 
tive or ablative of the Lalin, and to the indirect object which, in 
English, is separated from the verb by a preposition other than to, is 
in French, always placed after the verb. 

Je parle de lui, d'elle, d'eux. I speak of him, of her, of them. 

Je reste avec vous et avec eux. / remain with you and with them. 

7. AH pronouns used as objects of verbs, must be repeated. 

Je les aime, je les respecte, je Ilove^ respect and honor them. 
les honore. 



Resume of Examples. See § 32. 



M'entendez-vous ? 

Je ne vous entends pas. 

Les entendez-vous ? 

Je les vols et je les entends. 

II nous aime et il nous honore. 

Me parlez-vous do votre ami? 

Je vous parle de lui. [R- 6.] 

Nous parlez-vous de ces dames ? 

Je vous parle d'elles. 

Ne leur parlez-vous pas ? 

Je n'ai pas en vie de leur parler. 

Parlez-lui. 

Ne lui parlez pas. 

Allez a lui, courez a lui. 

Parlez-leur. Ne leur parlez pas. 



Do you hear or understand me ? 

I do not understand or hear you. 

Do you hear them ? 

I see them and understand them. 

He loves and honors us. 

Do you speak to me of your friend? 

I speak to yoic of him. 

Do you speak to us about those ladiesl 

I speak to you of them. 

Do you not speak to them ? 

I have no wish to speak to them. 

Speak to him or her. 

Do not speak to him. 

Go to him, run to him. 

Speak to them. Do not speak to them. 



Affaire, f. affair ^ 
Arbre, m. t7-ee; 
Avis, m. advice; 
Cerisier, ra. cherry-tree; 
Conimuniqu-er, 1. to com- 
municate : 



Exercise 51. 

Compagnon, m. compan- Matin, m, morning; 

ion ; !N ouvelle, f. news ; 

Deja, already; Pens-er, 1, to think; 

Ecri-re, 4. ir. to write; Poirier, m. pear-tree; 
Exemple, m. example; Pommier, m. apple-tree ; 
Envoy-er, 1. ir. to send; Eespect-er, 1. to respect. 

1. Allez-vous lui ecrire ? 2. Je vais lui ecrire et lui communiquer 
cette nouvelle. 3. Allez-vous lui parler de moi ? 4. Je vais lui par- 
ler de vous et de votre compagnon. 5. Leur envoyez-vous de beaux 
arbres ? 6. Je leur envoie des pommiers, des poiriers, et des cerisiers. 

7. Ne m'envoyez-vous pas des cerisiers? (See note, page 38.) 

8. Je ne vous en envoie pas, vous en avez deja. 9. Avez-vous raison 
de leur parler de cette affaire ? 10. Je n'ai pas tort de leur parler de 
cette affaire? 11. Venez a nous demain matim 12. Venez noua 



92 VINGT-HTJITIEME LEgON. 

trouver cette apres-midi. 13. AUez-vous les trouver tous les jours T 
14. Je Tais les trouver tous les soirs. 15. Leur donnez-vous de bons 
avis? 16, Je leur donne de bons avis et de bons exemples. 17.. Nous 
parlez-vous de tos sceurs? 18. Je vous paiie d'elles. 19. ISTe nous 
parlez-vous pas de nos freres ? 20. Je vous parle d'eux. 21. Ne 
les aimez-vous pas? 22. Nous les aimons et nous les respectons. 
23. Pensez-vous a ce livre, ou n'y pensez-vous pas ? 24. Nous y 
pensona et nous en parlous. 25. Nous n'j pensons pas. 

Exercise 52. 
1. When are you going to write to your brother ? 2. I am going 
to vrrite to him to-morrov;^ morning. 3. Do you intend to write 
to him every Monday ? 4. I intend to write to him every Sunday. 
5. Have you a wish to speak to him to-day ? 6. I have a wish to 
speak to him, but he is not here. 7. Where is he ? 8. He is at his 
house. 9. Do you speak to them ? 10. Yes, sir ; I speak to them 
about {de) this affair. 11. Do they give you good advice ? 12. They 
give me good advice, and good examples. 13. Do you go to your 
sister every day ? 14. I go to her every morning, at a quarter be- 
fore nine. 15. Does she like to see {voir) you? 16. She likes to see 
me and she receives me well. 17. Do you think of this affair? 
18. I think of it the whole day. 19. Do you speak of it with {avec) 
your brother ? 20. We speak of it often, 21. Do you send your 
companion to my house ? 22. I send him every day. 23. Are you 
at home every day ? 24. I am there every morning at ten o'clock. 
25. Do you like to go to church? 26. I like to go there every Sun- 
day and every "\Yednesday. 27. Do you speak of your houses? 
28. I speak of them {en). 29. Does your brother speak of his 
friends? 30. Yes, sir; he speaks of them {d'eux). 31. Does he 
think of them ? 32. Yes, sir ; he thinks of them (d eux). 33. Does 
he think of tliis news ? 34. Tes, • sir ; he thinks of it {y). 35. I 
love and honor them. 



LEgON XXYIII. LESSON XXVIII. 

BESPECTIVE PLACE OP THE PEOIN'OIIN'S. See § 101. 

1. When two pronouns occur, one used as a direct regimen or ob- 
ject (accusative), the other used as the indirect regimen or object 
(dative), the indirect object, ff not in the third person singular or 
plural, must precede the direct object. [§ 101, (1.)] 



RESPECTIVE PJiACE OP THE P K O N O U N S . 93 

Je vous le donne. / give it to you. 

II me le donne. He gives it to me. 

II nous le donne. Me gives it to us. 

2. When the pronoun used as an indirect object (dative), is in the 
third person singular or plural, it must be placed after the direct 
object. [§ 101, (2.)] 

Nous le lui donnons. We give it to him. 

Nous le leur donnons. We give it to them. 

3. The above rules of precedence apply also to the imperative used 
negatively. 

Ne nous le donnez pas. [R. 1.] JDo not give vt to tcs. 

Ne le lui donuez pas. [R. 2.] Do not give it him. 

4. With the imperative used affirmatively, the direct object pre« 
cedes in all cases the indirect object. [§ 101, (5.)] 

Donnez-le-nous. Give it to tis. 

Montrez-le-leur, Show it to them. 

5. Un and y always follow the other pronouns. 

Je lui en donne. / give him some. 

II nous y envoie. He sends vs thither. 

6. Present of the Indicative or the Ir^iegular Yerbs. 

YoiR, to see ; Vouloir, to will, be wil- PouvoiR, to be able ; 

ling ; 

Je vols, 1 see, do sec, or Je veux, / will or am Je puis, / can, I may, 

am seeing; willing; I am able; 

Tu vois, Te veux, Tu peux,^ 

II voit, II veut, II pent, 

Nous vojons, Nous voulons, Nous pouvons, 

Vous voyez, Yous voulez, Yous pouvez, 

lis voient, lis veulent, lis peuvent. 

7. The above verbs take no preposition before another verb. 

8. The preposition pour is used to render the preposition to, when 
the latter means in order to. 

Je vais chez vous, pour parler a I go to your house, to speak to your 
votre frere, et pour vous voir. brother, and to see you. 

J'ai besoin d'argent pour acheter / want money to {in order to) buy 
des marchandises. 



Resume of Examples. 

Youlez-vous nous le donner? Will you give it to us? 

Je veux vous le preter. / will lend it to you. 

Pouvez-vous me les donner ? Can you give them to me 7 

* After the verbs, pouvoir, to be able; oser, to dare; savoir, to know ; the 
negative pas may be omittedl 



94 VINGT-HUITlliMELEgOK. 

Je ne puis vous les donner. I cannot give tJiem to you. 

Votre frere peut-il le lui envoyer? Can your brother send it to himf 

II ne veut pas le lui envoyer. He will not send it to him. 

Qui veut le leur preter ? Who will lend it to them ? 

Personne ne veut le leur preter. iVo one will lend it to them. 

Envoyez-les-nous. Send them to us. 

Ne nous les envoyez pas. JDo not send them to us. 

Donnez-nous-en. Give us some (of it). 

Ne leur en envoyez pas. Do not send them any. 

Envoyez-le-leur, pour les contenter. Send it to them {in order) to scUisfy 

them. 

Je puis vous I'y envoyer. lean send it to you there. 

Exercise 53. 

Commis, m. clerk ; Guere, hut little ; Poisson, m. fish ; 

Connaissance, Lacquain- Marcliande do modes, f Pologne, f. Poland; 

iance; milliner; Freter, 1. to lend ; 

Croi-re, 4. ir. to believe; Montr-er, 1. to show ; Semaine, f. week; 
Dette, f. debt; Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; Sou vent, often; 

D-evoir, 3. to owe; Pay-er, 1. to pay ; Voyage, m. journey. 

1. Youlez-vous donner ce livre a, men frere ? 2. Je puis le lui 
preter, mais je ne puis le lui donner. 3. Voulez-vous nons les en- 
voyer ? 4. La marcliande de modes pent vous les envoyer. 5. Les 
lui montrez-vous ? 6. Je les vois, et je les lui montre. 7. Avez-voua 
peur de nous les preter ? 8. Je n'ai pas peur de vous les preter. 
9. Ne pouvez-vous nous envoyer du poisson? 10. Je ne puis vous en 
envoyer, je n'en ai guere. 11. Voulez-vous leur en parler ? 12. Je 
veux leur en parler, si je ne I'oublie pas. 13. Venez-vous souvent 
les voir ? 14. Je viens les voir tous les matins, et tons les soirs. 
15. Ne leur parlez-vous point de votre voyage en Pologne ? 16. Je 
leur en parle, mais lis ne veulent pas me croire. 17. Est-ce que je 
vois mes connaissances, le lundi ? 18. Vous les voyez tous les jours 
de la semaine. 19. Vous envoient-elles plus d'argent que le commis 
de notre marchand? 20. Elles m'en envoient plus que lui. 21. En 
envoyez-vous au libraire ? 22. Je lui en envoie quand je lui en dois. 
23. N'avez-vous pas tort de lui en envoyer ? 24. Je ne puis avoir 
tort de payer mes dettes. 25. lis vous en donnent, et ils vous en 
pretent quand vous en avez besoin. 



Exercise 54. 



1. Will you send us that letter ? 2. I will send it to you, if you 
will read it. 3. I will read it if (si) I can. 4. Can you lend me your 
pen? 5. I can lend it to you, if you will take care of it. [L. 22, (3.)] 
6. May I speak to your father ? 7. You may speak to him. he is 
here. 8. Are you afraid of forgetting it ? [L. 21, (4.)] 9. I am 



USE OF THE AETICLE. 95 

not afraid of forgetting it. 10. Will you send them to him ? 11. I 
intend to send them to him, if I have time. 12. Do you speak to 
him of your journey ? 13. I speak to him of my journey. 14. I 
speak to them of it. 15. Can you communicate it to him ? 16. I 
have a wish to communicate" it to him. 17. Do you see your ac- 
quaintances every Monday ? 18. I see them every Monday, and every 
Thursday, 19. Where do you intend to see them ? 20. I intend to 
see them at your brother's, and at your sister's. 21. Can you send 
him there every day ? 22. I can send him there every Sunday, if 
he wishes {sil le veuf). 23. Can you give them to me ? 24. I can 
give them to you. 25. Who will lend them books ? 26. No one 
will lend them any. 27. Your bookseller is willing to sell them 
good books and good paper. 28. Is he at home ? 29. He is at his 
brother's. 30. Are you wrong to pay your debts ? 31. I am right 
to pay them. 32. Will you send it to us ? 33. I am willing to send 
it to you, if you want it. 34. Are you willing to give them to us? 
35. We are wilHng to give them to your acquaintances. 



LEgON XXIX. LESSON XXIX. 

USE OF THE AKTICLE. (§ 77.) 

1. The article ?e, la, les^ as already stated, is used in French before 
nouns taken in a general sense. 

Les jardins sont les omements des Gardens are the ornaments of vil- 
viilages et des campagnes. lages and of rural districts. 

2. The article is also used in French, as in English, before nouns 
taken in a particular sense. 

Les jardins de ce village sont su- The gardens of this village are su- 
perbes. j jperb. 

3. It is also used before abstract nouns, before verbs, and adjectives 
used substantively. 

La paresse est odieuse. ■ Idleness is odiotis. 

La jeunesse n'est pas toujoura do- Youth is not always tradable. 

cile. 

Le boire et le manger sont neces- Eating and drinking are necessary to 

saires a la vie. life. 

4. The article is used before the names of countries, provinces^ 
rivers, winds, and mountains. [§ 77, (3.) (4.)] 

La France est plus grande que I'ltalie. France is larger than Italy. 
La Normandie est tr^a fertile. ^Normandy is very fertile. 



&6 



VINGT-NEUVIBME LE^OK, 



5. The article is used before titles. 

Le general Cavaignac 
Le marechal Nej. 



General Cavaignac. 
Marshal Ney. 



6. In respectful address or discourse, the words, monsieur, ma- 
dame, mademoiselle are placed before titles and designations of re- 
lationship. 



Monsieur le president. 
Madame la comtesse. 
Mademoiselle votre scbut. 



{Mr.) President. 
{Madam) Couniess. 
{Miss) your sister. 



7. The plural of monsieur, madame, and mademoiselle, is messieurs, 
mesdames, and mesdemoiselles. 

8. The student should be careful to distinguish a noun taken in a 
general or in a particular sense, from one taken in a partitive sense 
[§ 78.] 



General or particular sense. 

Nous aimons les livres, 
We like hooks. 
Nous avons les livres, 
We have the hooks. 



Partitive sense. 

Nous avons des livres, 
We have hooks, i. e., some books. 
Vous avez ecrit des lettres. 
Tou have written letters, i. e., soma 
letters. 



Resume of Examples. 



La modestie est amiable. 

Le courage est indispensable au 
general. 

Les fleurs sont I'ornement des jar- 
dins. 

Les fleurs des jardins de ce chateau. 

Avez-vous rintention de visiter la 

France ? 
J'ai rintention de visiter I'ltalie. 
Le capitaine Dumont est-il ici ? 
Le major Guillaume est chez lui. 
Yojez-vous madame votre mere ? 
Je vois monsieur votre frere. 
Mon frere n'aime pas les louangea 



Modesty is amiable. 
Courage is indispensable to the gene- 
ral. 
Flowers are the ornaments of gardens. 

The flowers of the gardens of this 

villa. 
Do you intend visiting France ? 

I intend visiting Italy. 

Is Captain Dumont here ? 

Major William is at home. 

Do you see your mother f 

I see your by-other. 

My brother is not fond of praises. 



Aim-er, 1. tobe fond of, 

to like; 
Apport-er, 1. to bring ; 
Bois, m. wood, forest ; 
G^itaine, m. captain; 
Caporal, m. corporal; 



Exercise 55. 

Cerise, f cherry ; 
Demeur-er, 1, to dwell, 

live ; 
£tudi-er, 1. to study; 
Fleur, f. flower; 
Fraise, f. strawberry ; 



Framboise, f. raspberry; 
Legume, m. vegetable; 
Loin, far ; 
Lundi, m. Monday ; 
Peche, f. peach ; 
Prune, f. plum. 



1. Aimez-vous le pain ou la viande ? 2. J'aime le pain, la viande, 
et le fruit. 3. Avons-nous des peches dans notre jardin ? 4, Nous y 



TTSIE OF THE ARTICLE. ^7 

avons des pecbes, des fraises, des framboise?, et des cerises. 5. Mon- 
sieur votre frere aime-t-il les cerises ? 6. II n'aiine guere les cerises, 
il prefere les prunes. 7. Avez-vous des legumes? 8. Je n'aime 
point les legumes. 9. Nous n'avons ni legumes ni fruits. [L. 8, 3. 4.] 
10. Nous n'aimons ni les legumes ni les fruits. 11. Allez-vous tous 
les jours dans le bois de monsieur votre frere? 12. Je n'y vais pas 
tous les jours. 13. Yotre soeur apporte-t-elle les fleurs ? 14. EUe 
les apporte. 15. Madame votre mere apporte-t-elle des fleurs? 

16. Elle en apporte tous les lundis. 17. Voyez-vous le general Ber- 
trand ? 18. Je ne le vois pas, je vols le caporal Ducbene. 19. Mes- 
demoiselles vos soeurs sont-elles fatiguees? 20. Mes sceurs sont 
fatiguees d'etudier. 21. Monsieur le president est-il cbez lui? 
22. Non, monsieur ; il est cbez monsieur le colonel Dumont. 23. De- 
meure-t-il loin d'ici ? 24. II ne demeure pas loin d'ici. 25. Oil 
demeure-t-il ? 26. II demeure cbez monsieur le capitaine Lebrun. 

Exercise 56. 
1. Does your sister like flowers ? 2. My sister likes flowers, and 
my brotber is fond of books. 3. Is be wrong to like books ? 4. No, 
sir ; be is rigbt to like books and flowers. 5. Have you many flowers 
in your gardens ? 6. We bave many flowers and mucb fruit. 7. Is 
your cousin fond of raspberries ? 8. My cousin is fond of raspberries 
and' strawberries. 9. Is tbe captain fond of praises ? 10. He is not 
fond of praises. 11. Has tbe gardener brougbt you vegetables ? 
12. He bas brougbt me vegetables and fruit.^ 13. Is be asbamed to 
bring you vegetables ? 14. He is neitber asbamed nor afraid to sell 
vegetables. 15. Is your motber tired? 16. My motber is not tired. 

17. Is your brotber at Colonel D's? 18. He lives at Colonel D's, but 
be is not at bome at present (d present). 19. How many peacbea 
bave you ? 20. I bave not many peacbes, but I bave many plums. 
21. Does Captain B. like peacbes ? 22. He likes peaches,* plum^ 
raspberries, and strawberries. 23. Are you going into {dans) j<x>^ 
brother's wood ? 24. I go there every morning. 25. Is General i#. 
here ? 26, No, sir ; be is not here, he is at your cousin's. 27. Does 
your friend, General H., live far from here ? 28. He does not live far 
from here, he lives at bis brother's. 29. Have you fine flowers in 
your garden? 30. We bave very fine flowers; we are fond of 
flowers. 31. Do you give them to him ? 32. I give them to you. 
33. I give you some. 34. I give them some. 35. Give us some. 
36. Do not give us any. 

* The student must not forget that the article is repeated before every 
noun. 

5 



06; TBBNTIEMELE^ON. — 

LEgON XXX. LESSON XXX. 

USE OF THE ARTICLE, COIJOlJrUED. 

1. Adjectives of nation will, according to Rule 3 of the last lesson, 
be preceded by the article. [§ 145.] 

II apprend le fran^ais, Tanglais, He learns French, English, German, 
rallemand, et I'ltalien. and Italian. 

2. After the verb parler, the article may be omitted before an ad- 
jective of nation, taken substantively. 

Yotre frere parle espagnol et portu- Your brother speaks Spanish and 
gais. Portuguese. 

3. The article is not used, in French, before the number which fol- 
lows the name of a sovereign. The number, (unless it be first and 
second) must be the cardinal, and not the ordinal. [§ 26, (3.)] 

Tous avez Thistoire de Henri qua- You have the history of Henry the 
tre. Fourth. 

4. A word placed in apposition with a noun or pronoun is not in 
French preceded by un, une, a or an, unless it be qualified by an ad- 
jective, or determined by the following part of the sentence. 

Votre ami est medecin. Your friend is a physician. 

Notre frera est avocat. Our brother is a barrister. 

"Votre ami est un bon medecin. Your friend is a good physician. 

Notre frere est un avocat celebre. Our brother is a celebrated advocate. 

5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Yerbs, 
Apprendre, to learn ; Connaitre, to know ; Savoir, to knovj ; 
J'apprends, / learn, do Je connais, 1 know, or Je ,sais, / know, or do 

learn, or am learning; do know ; know ; 

Tu apprends, Tu connais, Tu sals, 

II apprend, II connait, II sait, 

Nous apprenons, Nous connaissons, Nous savons, 

Vous apprenez, Yous connaissez, Yous savez, 

Ds apprennent. lis connaissent. lis savent 

6. Connaitre means to be acquainted with; savoir, to know, is said 
only of things. 

Connaissez- vous ce Fran^ais, cet Do you know thai Frenchman, that 

Anglais, cet Alleraand, et cet Englishman, that German, and 

Espagnol ? [§ 145.] that Spaniard ? 

Savez-vous le fran9ais, I'anglais, Do you know French, English, Ger- 

Tallemand, et I'espagnol ? man, and Spanish ? 



trSE OP THE ARTICLE. 99 

Kesume of Examples. 

Le Capitaine G-. sait-il le frangais ? Does Captain G. know French f 

II ne le salt pas, mais il I'apprend. He does not know it, but learns it. 

Connaissez-vous le Docteur L. ? J)o you know Dr. L. 1 

Je ne le connais pas, mais je sais oil / am not acquainted with him, hut 1 

il demeure. know where he lives. 

Ce monsieur est-il peintre ? Is that gentleman a painter t 

Non, il est architecte. No, he is an architect. 

Ce monsieur est un architecte dis- That gentleman is a distinguished 

tingue. architect. 

Ce Frangais parle grec et arabe. Tliat Frenchman speaks Greek and 

Arabic. 

H parle le grec, I'arabe, et I'italien, Se speaks the Greek, Arabic, and 

Italian languages. 

Avez-vous vu Charles dix, frere de Have you seen Charles the Tenth, a 

Louis dix-huit ? brother of Louis the Eighteenth ? 

EXEECISE 57. 

Allemand, e, German ; Grec, que, Greek ; Quatorze, fourteen ; 

Ancien, ne, ancient ; Hongrois, e. Hungarian ; Quatre, four ; 
Anglais, e, English; Langue, f. language; Eusse, Russian; 
Chinois, e, Chinese; Moderne, modern; Suedois, e, Swedish, 

Danois,e, Danish, Dane; Pays, m, country ; Swede; 

Port, very ; Polonais, e, Polish, Pole ; Tapissier, m. upholsterer. 

1. Connaissez-vous ce monsieur ? 2. Oui, madame ; je le connais 
fort bien. 3. Savez-vous de quel pays il est? 4. II est hongrois. 
5. Parle-t-il allemand ? 6. II parle allemand, polonais, russe, sue- 
dois, et danois. 7. N'est-il pas medecin ? 8. Non, monsieur ; avant 
la revolution, il etait capitaine. 9. Avez-vous envie d'apprendre le 
russe? 10. J'ai envie d'apprendre le russe et le grec moderne, 
11. Connaissez-vous les messieurs qui parlent a votre sceur ? ]2. Je 
ne les connais pas. 13. Savez-vous ou ils demeurent ? 14. lis de- 
meurent chez le tapissier de votre frere. 15. N'avez-vous pas I'his- 
toire de Louis quatorze, dans votre bibliotheque ? 16. Je n'ai ni 
celle de Louis quatorze, ni celle de Henri quatre. 17. Avez-vous 
tort d'apprendre le chinois ? 18. Je n'ai pas tort d'apprendre le chi- 
nois. 19. Yos compagnons apprennent-ils les langues anciennes ? 
20. lis savent plusieurs langues anciennes et modernes. 21. Parlez- 
vous anglais ? 22. Je sais I'anglais et je le parle. 23. Connaissez- 
vous I'Anglais que nous voyons? 24. Je ne le connais pas. 25. II 
ne me connait pas, et je ne le connais pas. 

Exercise 58. 
1. Does our physician know French ? 2. He knows French, Eng- 
lish, and German. 3. Does he know the French physician ? 4. He 
knows him very well. 5. Are you acquainted with that lady ? 6. I 



100 TEENTE ET TJNIBMB LEgON. 

am not acquainted -with her. 7. Is she a German or a Swede, 
8. She is neither a German nor a Swede, she is a Russian. 9. Do you 
intend to speak to her ? 10. I intend to speak to her in {en) Enghsh. 
11. Does she know EngUsh ? 12. She knows several languages ; 
she speaks English, Danish, Swedish, and Hungarian. 13. Is your 
brother a colonel? 14. ISTo, sir; he is a captain. 15. Is your up- 
holsterer a Dane ? 16. He is not a Dane, he is a Swede. 17. Are 
you a Frenchman ? 18. No, sir ; I am a Hungarian. 19. Do you 
know Chinese ? 20. I know Chinese, Russian, and modern Greek. 
21. Are you wrong to learn languages ? 22. I am not wrong to 
learn languages. 23. Do you know the Enghshman who lives at 
your brother's ? 24. I am acquainted with him. 25. I am not ac- 
quainted with him. 26. Do you like books? 27. I am fond of 
books. 28. Have you a desire to learn Russian ? 29. I have no 
desire to learn Russian. 30. Have you no time ? 31. I have but 
little time. 32. What do you learn ? 33. We learn Latin, Greek, 
Erench, and German. 34. Do you not learn Spanish ? 35. We do 
not learn it. 



LEgON XXXI. LESSON XXXL 

RELATIVE PEOXOITXS. (§ 38.) 

1. Qui, who^ luhich, used as nominative, may relate to persons or 
to things. 

Les fieurs qui sont dans votre jardin. The flowers which are in your garden. 

2. Qui, tuhonij used as the object of a verb, can only be said of 
persons. It is used interrogatively with or without a preposition. 

Qui votre frere voit-il ? Whom does your brother see ? 

T>e qui parlez-vous ce matin ? 0/ whom do you speak this morning ? 

3. Que, whom^ which, may be said of persons or things. It can 
never be understood, and must be repeated before every verb, 
[L. 19. 1.] 

Les personnes que nous voyons. The persons whom we see. 

Les langues que nous apprenons. The languages which we learn. 

4. Ce que, is employed for that which, or its equivalent what. 

Ce que vous apprenez est utile. TJiat which you learn is usefuL 

Trouvez-vous ce que vous cherchez? Do youjindwhai you seek f 



EBLATIVE PRONOUNS. 



lOX 



5. Que answers to the English pronoun what^ used absolutely be^ 
fore a verb. 

Que pensez-vous de cela ? Wliat do you ihinJc of that ? 

6. Quoi, what, when not used as an exclamation, is generally pre- 
ceded by a preposition, and relates only to things. 



De quoi voulez-vous parler ? 
A quoi pensez-vous ? 



Of what do you toish to speak ? 
Of what do you think ? 



7. Lequel, m., laquelle, /., lesquels, m. p., lesquelles,/ p., ivhich, or 
tuhich one, [L. 18. 6] or which- ones, relate to persons or things. 
They may be preceded by a preposition, contracted or not with the 
article. 



Lequel avez-vous apporte ? 
Duquel (de laquelle) parlez-vous ? 



WJiich one have you brought f 
Of which one do you speak 7 



8. Dont, of which, or of whom, whose, may relate to persons or 
things, in the masculine or feminine, singular or plural. It can never 
be used absolutely, and must always be preceded by an antecedent. 
It is preferable to de qui or duquel, etc. 



Les fleurs dont vous me parlez. 
Les demoiselles dont votre soeur vous 
parle. 



The flowers of ivhich you speak to me. 
The young ladies of whom your sister 
speaks to you. 



9. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Yerbs, 

Di-RE, 4. to say. Fai-re, 4. to make, to do. Mett-re, 4. Jo put. 

Je dis, / say, do say, or Je fais, / make, or do, I Je mets, I put, do put, or 

am saying. 
Tu dis, 
II dit, 

Nous disons, 
Vous dites, 
lis disent. 



am making or doing. 
Tu fais, 
11 fait, 

Nous faisons, [L. 63, note.] 
Yous faites, 
lis font. 



am putting. 
Tu mets, 
II met, 

Nous mettons, 
Yous mettez, 
lis mettent, 



RiiSUME OP 
Connaissez-vous le monsieur qui 

parle a notre cousin ? 
Je connais celui qui lui parle. 
Compreuez-vous co que je vous dis ? 
Qui vous a parle de cette aftaire ? 
L' Anglais dont vous parlez est ici. 

L'Espagnol dont la soeur est ici. 
Que faites- vous ce matin ? 
Que dites-vous a notre ami ? 
Nous fiiisons ce que vous nous dites. 
Pour qui faites-vous cet habit ? 
De quoi parlez-vous a votre frere ? 
Nous faisons ce que nous pouvons. 
Nous parlona de ce dont vous parlez. 



Examples. 

Do you know the gentleman who 

speaks to our cousin? 
Iknow him ivho speaks to him. 
Do you understand what I say to you ? 
Who has spoken to you of this affair? 
The Englishman of whom you speak 

is here. 
The Spaniai-d whose sister is here. 
What do you do this morning? 
What do you say to our friend? 
We do that which {what) you say to us. 
For whom do you make this coat ? 
Of what do you speak to your brother f 
We do what we can. 
We speak of that of which you speak. 



102 TEENTE ET UNIi&ME LEgON. 

Exercise 59. 

Arriv-er, 1. to arrive ; Habillement, m. dress, Presque, almost ; 

Avec, with ; clothes; Hien, nothing ; 

Coffre, m. trunk; HoUaudais, e, Dutch; Recommand-er, 1. to re- 

Command-er, 1. <oorc?er; Linge, m. linen; commend; 

Ecossais, e, Scotch; 'M.oxis,[euT,m . gentleman ; Soulier, m.shoe; 

Enlant, m. child; Nom, m. name; Vrai, e, true. 

Plaisir, m. pleasure; 

1. Qui connaissez-vous ? 2. Nous connaissons les Hollandais dont 
vous nous parlez. 3. Quelles le9ons apprenez-vous ? 4. Nous ap- 
prenons les lecons que vous nous recommandez. 5. Ce que je vous 
dis, est-il vrai ? 6. Ce que vous nous dites est vrai. 7. De qui nous 
parlez-vous ? 8. Nous vous parlous des £cossais qui viennent d'arri- 
ver. 9. Savez-vous qui vient d'arriver ? 10. Je sais que _le monsieur 
que nous connaissons vient d'arriver. 11. Vos soeurs que font-elles ? 

12. Elles ne font presque rien, elles n'ont presque rien a faire. 

13. Que mettez-vous dans votre cofifre ? 14. Nous j mettons ce que 
nous avons, nos habillements et notre linge. 15. N'y mettez-vous 
pas vos souliers ? 16. Nous j mettons les souliers dont nous avons 
besoin. 17. De quoi avez-vous besoin? 18. Nous avons besoin de 
ce que nous avons. 19. Get enfant sait-il ce qu'il fait ? 20. II sait 
ce qu'il fait, et ce qu'il dit. 21. Ne voulez-vous pas le leur dire? 
22. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. 23. Faites-vous ce que le marchand 
vous commando ? 24. Nous faisons ce qu'il nous dit. 25. II parle 
de ce dont vous parlez. 

Exercise 60. 
1. Have you what (ce dont) you -want ? 2. "We have what we 
want. 3. Is the gentleman whom you know, here ? 4. The lady of 
whom you speak is here. 5. Has she just arrived ? [L. 26. 2.] 6. She 
has just arrived. 7. Do you know that gentleman ? 8. I know the 
gentleman who is speaking with your father. 9. Do you know his 
name ? 10. I do not know his name, but I know where he lives 
(demeure). 11. What do you do every morning ? 12. We do almost 
nothing, we have very little to do. 13. Does the tailor make your 
clothes ? 14. He makes my clothes, my brother's, and my cousin's. 
15. Do you know what you say? 16. I know what I say, and what 
I do. 17. Do you know the Scotchman of whom your brother 
speaks? 18. I know him well. 19. What does he put into (dans) 
his trunk ? 20, He puts his clothes. 21. Is that which you say, 
true ? 22. What I say is true. 23. Do you understand that which 
I say to you ? 24. I understand all that you say. 25. Of whom 
does your brother speak ? 26. He speaks of the gentleman whoso 



METTEE, 6tER, PAIEE, ETC. 103 

sister is here. 27. Is your brother wrong to do what he does? 
28. He cannot be wrong to do it. 29. What are you doing ? 30. I 
am doing that which you do. 31. Where do you put my books? 
32. Into (dans) your brother's trunk. 33. Is your brother here? 
34. He is not here. 35. He is at my brother's, or at my father's. 



LEgON XXXIT. LESSON XXXII. 

PLAN OF THE EXERCISES IN COMPOSING- FRENCH. 

Hitherto the student has been occupied exclusively in acquiring 
facts, forms and principles, and in translating, by the aid of these, 
French into English and again English into French. Following still 
the plan of the work, let him now undertake the higher business of 
endeavoring to compose in French. With this intent, let him take 
some of the words, given for tliis purpose, in the lists at page 271, and 
seek to incorporate them in sentences entirely his own. The words 
taken from the lists, are to be used merely as things suggestive of 
thought. The form which, in any given case, the sentence may 
assume, should be determined by the models found in the Lessons 
preceding ; for, every sentence which the pupil has once mastered in 
the regular course of the Lessons, is or should be to him a^model, on 
which he may at pleasure build other constructions of his own. 
Indeed, this constructing sentences according to models, that is, 
shaping one's thoughts according to the forms and idioms peculiar to 
a foreign tongue, is the true and only secret of speaking and writing 
that language well. The pupil, therefore, as he passes along in the 
ordinary course of the Lessons, should frequently be found applying 
his knowledge in the way of actually composing independent sen- 
tences. In this way he will soon acquire a facility and accuracy in 
the language, which are hardly otherwise attainable at all. 



METTKE, OTER, TAIRE, ETC. 

1. The verb mettre is used in the same sense as the English to put 
on, in speaking of garments. Mettre le convert, means to lay the 
cloth, or set the table. 

Quel chapeau mettez-vous ? What hat do you put on f 

Votre frere met son habit noir. Your brother puts on his black coat. 

La domestique va mettre le couverL The servant is going to lay the cloth. 



104 



TEENTB-DEUXlijME LEgON. 



2. Uter means to taJce of, to take away, to take out. 



Mon domestique ote son chapeau. 
6tez ce livre de la table. 
3s['a-t-on pas ote le diner? 



My servant takes off his hoi. 

Take away that book from the table. 

Have they not taken away the dinner f 



3. The verb /aire is used before another verb, in the sense of to 
have, to cause. 

Yotre frere fait-il batir une maison ? Does you brother have a house built f 
II en lait batir plus d'une. Me has more than one built. 

4. It may be used in the same sense before its own infinitive. 

Je fais faire un habit de drap. I have a doth coat made. 

You3 faites faire des souliers de cuir. You have leather shoes made. 

5. Vouloir, [L. 28. 6.] followed by dire, is used in the sense of to 
mean. 

Que voulez-vous dire ? What do you mean ? 

Yotre soeur que veut-elle dire ? What does your sister mean t 

Resume of Examples. 



Ne mettez-vous pas vos habits? 
J'ai peur de les gater, 
Ne portez- vous jamais votre habit noir ? 
Je le mets tous les samedis. 
Pourquoi n'otez-vous pas votre 

manteau ? 
J'ai trop froid, j'ai peur de I'oter. 
Faites- vous raccommoder vos has ? 
Je fais raccommoder mes habits. 
Je fais fahe une paire de bottes. 
Je fais creuser un puits. 
Yotre frere que veut-il dire ? 
Que veut-il dire ? 
II ne veut rien dire. 
6tez-vous vos souhers et vos bas ? 

Je n'ote ni les uns ni les autres. 
Le diner est pret, le domestique va 

mettre le convert. 
Youlez-vous oter le convert ? 
Je vais mettre le convert. 
Je vais oter le convert. 



Do you not put on your clothes f 

J am afraid of spoiling them. 

Do you never wear your black coat f 

I put it on every Saturday. 

Why do you not take off your cloak f 

lam too cold, lam afraid to take it off. 

Do you have your stockings mended ? 

J have my clothes mended. 

I have a pair of boots made. 

I have a well dug. 

What does your by-other mean? 

What does he mean ? 

Re means nothing. 

Do you take off your shoes end stock- 
ings f 

1 take off neither these nor those. 

Dinner is ready ^ the servant is going 
to lay the cloth. 

Will you take away the things ? 

I am going to lay the cloth. 

1 am going to take away the things. 



Apothicaire, m. drug- 
gist; 
Apres, after; 
Cave, f cellar; 
Car, /yr, because ; 
Creus-er, 1. to dig; 
Dimanche, m. Sunday 
Diner, m. dinner ; 



Exercise 61. 

Fache, e, sorry, angry ; 
Gat-er, 1. to spoil; 
Gilet, m. waistcoat, vest; 
Grand, e, large, very ; 
Manteau, m. cloak; 
Noir, e, black; 
Pantoufle, f, slipper; 
Pourquoi, why ; 
Pret, e, ready ; 



1. to 



to put 



Eaccommod-er, 
mend ; 

Kemett-re, 4. i 
072. again; 

Tout a riieure, immedi- 
ately ; 

TJniforme, m. uniform ; 

Yelours, m. velvet. 



METTEE, 6TEK, PAIEB, ETC. 105 

1. Le General "N. met-il son uniforme? 2. H ne le met point. 
3. Pourquoi ne portez-vous point votre manteau noir ? 4. J'ai peur 
de le gater. 5. Mettez-vous vos souliers de satia tous les matins ? 
6. Je ne les mets que les dimanches. 7. II est midi, le domestique 
met-il le convert ? 8. II ne le met pas encore, il va le mettre tout-a- 
I'heure. 9. Le dmer n'est-il pas pret ? 10. Le domestique ote-t-il 
le couvert? 11. II ne I'ote pas encore, il n'a pas le temps de I'oter. 
12. Otez-vous votre habit, quand vous avez chaud? 13, Je I'ote, 
quand j'ai trop chaud. 14. Faites-vous faire un habit de drap ? 15. Je 
fais faire un habit de drap, et un gilet de satin noir. 16. Ne faites- 
vous point raccommoder vos pantoufies de velours ? 17. Ne faites- 
vous pas creuser une cave ? 18. Je fais creuser une grande cave. 
19. L'apothicaire, que veut-il dire ? 20. II veut dire qu'il a besoin 
d' argent. 21. Savez-vous ce que cela veut dire ? 22. Cela veut dire 
que votre frere est fache contre vous. 23. Avez-vous envie de met- 
tre votre manteau ? 24. J'ai I'intention de le mettre, car j'ai grand 
froid. 25. Je vais I'oter, car j'ai chaud. 

Exercise 62. 

1. Do you take off your coat ? 2. I do not take off my coat; I put 
it on. 3. Do you take off your cloak, when you are cold ? 4. When 
I am cold, I put it on. 5. Does your little boy take off his shoes and 
stockings ? [§ 21, (4.)] 6. He takes them off, but he is going to put 
them on again. 7. Does that little girl lay the cloth ? 8. She lays 
the cloth every day at noon (midi). 9. Does she take avs^ay the 
things after dinner? 10. She takes away the things every day. 
11. Do you intend to have a coat made ? 12. 1 intend to have a coat 
made. 13. I am going to have a coat and vest made. 14. Does 
your brother have his boots mended ? 15. He has them mended. 
16: What does your son mean ? 17. I do not know what he means. 
18. Is he angry with me, or with my brother? 19. He is neither 
angry with you, nor with your brother. 20. Is he afraid to spoil liia 
coat ? 21. He is not afraid to spoil it. 22. Does the druggist want 
money ? 23. He does not want money. 24. Does your sister take 
my book from the table ? 25. She does not take it away. 26. Why 
dt) you t§,ke off your shoes"? 27. I take them off because they hurt 
me (gCneni). 28. Do you intend to have a house huilt ? 29. I in- 
tend to have one built. 30. Does the tailor spoil your coat ? 31. He 
does not spoil it. 32. Who spoils your clothes? 33. No person 
spoils them. 34. What hat do you wear ? 35. I wear a black hat. 



106 TEENTE-TEOISIEME LEgON. 

LEgoN xxxni. lesson xxxiii. 

UISIPEESONAL VEEBS. 

1. The unipersonal verb is conjugated only in the third person 
singular of a tense. Its nominative pronoun, il, it, is used absolutely, 
i. e. , it represents no noun previously expressed. 

II pleut aujourd'hui. It rains to-day. 

2. The unipersonal verb assumes the termination of the class or 
conjugation to which it belongs. Some verbs are alwa3''s uniper- 
sonal, and will be found in § 62. Others are only occasionally so, 
and if irregular, will be found in the personal form in the same § 62. 

3. Present of the Indicative of the Unipersonal Verbs, 
T AVOIR, to he there : Pleuvoir, to rain : Neiger, to snow : 

H y a, there is, there are. 11 pleut it rains, it is 11 neige, it snows, it is 
See § 61-2, page 362. raining. snowing. 

Greler, to hail: Geler, to freeze: Degeler, to thaw: 

11 grele (§ 49) it hails. 11 gele (§ 49) it freezes, II de'gele (§49) it thaws, 
it is hailing. it is freezing. it is tliawing. 

4. II y a, means there is, or there are, and may be followed by a 
singular or plural noun, [§ 61-2.] 

II y a du gibier au marche. There is game in the market. 

II y a des poinmes dans votre jardin. There are apples in your garden. 

5. In relation to the weather, the verb /aire is used" unipersonally 
in the same manner as the Enghsh verb to he. 

II fait beau temps aujourd'hui. It is fine VJeather to-day. 
II fait chaud, 11 fait froid. It is warm, it is cold. 

6. The verb tire, however, is used when the word temps, weather^ 
precedes it. 

Le temps est beau ce matin. The weather is fine this morning. 

Resume of Examples. 

t'leut-il ce matin ? Does it rain this mornivg ? 

Il ne pleut pas, il neige. It does not rain, it snows. 

11 va pleuvoir ce matin. It is going to rain this morning. 

Ne gele-t-il pas ce matin? Does it not freeze this morning? 

n ne gele pas, il Mt du brouillard. It does not freeze, it is foggy. 

Y a-t-ii du Sucre chez vous ? Is there any sugar at your house ? 

il y en a beaucoup chez mon frere. There is a great deal at my hroiher^s. 

y a-t-il plusieurs personues chez Are there several persons at my houset 
moi? 



UNIPRHSONAL VERBS. 107 

H y a plug de deux persK^naes. There are more than two persons^ 

Wj a-t-ii personne a regli.a<f>? 75 there nobody at church? 

II n'j a encore personne. There is as yet no one there. 

Est-il trop tol ? Is it too soon ? 

Au contraire, il est trop tard. On the contrary, it is too late. 

Fait-ii froid ou chaud aujourc!:'hui ? Is it cold or warm to-day ? 

II fait chaud et humide. It is warm and damp. 

Fait-il du vent, ou du brouillard? Is it windy, or foggy? 

II fait uii temps bien desagreable. It is very disagreeable weather. 

Le temps u'est pas agreable. The weather is not agreeable. 

Exercise 63. 

Assemblee, f. assembly, Couvert, e, cloudy ; Manuscrit, m. manvr 

party ; j^curie, f. stable ; script ; 

Bibliotheque, £ Zi'&rary; i!,pa.is, se, thick ; Suiperhe, very beautiful ; 

Brouillard, m. fog ; Foin, m. hay ; Veau, m. veal; 

Cbambre, f. rooin ; Gibier, m. game ; Yent, m, wind ; 

Cinquante, fifty ; Humide, damp ; Yolaille, f. poultry. 

1. Quel temps fait-il aujourd'hui ? 2. II fait un temps superbe. 
3. Fait-il tres beau temps aujourd'hui ? 4. II fait un temps couvert 
et humide. 5. Pleut-il beaucoup ce matin ? 6. II ne pleut pas en- 
core, mais il va pleuvoir. 7. Fait-il du vent ou du brouillard ? 8. II 
ne fait pas de vent. 9. Le brouillard est tres epais. 10. Combien 
de personnes j a-t-il u I'assemblee? II. II y a plus de deux cents 
[L. 20. 7.] personnes. 12. N'y a-t-il pas beaucoup de manuscrits 
dans votre bibliotheque ? 13. II n'y en a pas beaucoup, il n'y en a 
que cinquante-cinq. 14. Fait-il trop froid pour vous, dans cette 
cbambre ? 15. II n'y fait ni trop froid ni trop chaud. 16. Y a-t-il 
beaucoup de foin dans votre ecurie ? 17. II y en a assez pour mon 
cheval. 18. Restez-vous a la maison, quand il pleut ? 19. Quand il 
pleut, je reste a la maison, mais quand il fait beau temps je vais chez 
mon cousin, 20. Y a-t-il de la viande au marche? 21. II y en a 
beaucoup ; il y a aussi du gibier. 22. II y a du veau, du mouton, et 
de la volaille. 23. N'y a-t-il pas aussi des legumes et des fruits ? 
24. II n'y en a pas. 25. II y en a aussi. 

Exercise 64. 

1. Are you cold this morning ? 2. I am not cold, it is warm this 
morning. 3. Is it foggy or windy ? 4. It is neither foggy nor windy, 
it rains in torrents (d verse). 5. Is it going to rain or to snow ? 
6. It is going to freeze, it is very cold. 7. It is windy and foggy. 
8. Is there any body at your brother's to-day ? 9. My brother is at 
Lome, and my sister is at church. 10. Is there any meat in the (au) 
market ? 11. There is meat and poultry. 12. Is it too warm or too 
cold, for your sister, in this room ? 13. It is not so warm in this 
room, as in your brother's library. 14. Are there good English 

5* 



JtOQ TRBNTE-QUATEIEME LEgON". 

books in your sister's library? 15. There are some good ones. 
1.6. Are there peaches and plums in your garden? 17. There are 
many. 18. Do you remain at your brother's, when it snows ? 
19. When it snows, we remain at home. 20. Are there ladies at 
your mother's ? 21. Your two sisters are there to-day. 22. Have 
you time to go and fetch them ? 23. I have no time this morning. 
24. Is your horse in the stable? 25. It is not there, it is at my 
brother's. 26. Dqes it hail this morning ? 27. It does not hail, it 
freezes. 28. "What weather is it tliis morning? 29, It is very fine 
s weather. 30. Is it too warm? 31. It is neither too warm nor too 
cold. 32. Is it going to freeze ? 33. It is going to snow. 34. Does 
it snow every day ? 35. It does not snow every day, but it snows 
very often (souvent). 



LEgON XXXIY. LESSON XXXIY. 

PLACE OF THE ADVEEB. (§ 136.) 

1. In simple tenses, the adverb generally foUows the verb, and is 
placed as near it as possible. 

Yotre commis ecrit tres bien. Tour clerk writes very well. 

Cette demoiselle lit tres maL That young lady reads very hadly. 

2. When a verb is in the infinitive, the two negatives ne and pas, 
ne aud rien, should be placed before it. 

Ne pas parler, ne pas lire. Not to speak, not to read. 

3. The adverb assez, enough, tolerably, pretty, precedes generally 
the other adverbs. It precedes also adjectives and nouns. 

Yous ecrivez assez correGtement. You write pretty correctly. 

Yous avez assez de livres. You have books enough. 

Cet enfant est assez attentif. That child is attentive enough. 

4. Yoici means, here is ; voila, there is. 

Yoici le livre que vous aimez. Here is the hook which you like. 

Yoila le monsieur dont vous parlez. There is the gentleman of whom you 

speak. 

5. I)ans is used for in or into, when the noun which foUows it is 
preceded by an article, or by a possessive, demonstrative, or numeral 
adjective. [§ 142, (2.)] 

Le crayon est dans le pupitre. The pencil is in the desk. 

Mettez cette lettre dans votre malle. Put this letter into your trimk. 

6. En renders to, in, or into, eoming after the verbs to le, to go, io 



PLACE OF THE ADVERB. 



109 



reside^ followed by the name of a part of the earth, a country, or 
province. 



Notre ami est en France. 
Yous allez en Italie. 



Our friend is in France. 
You go to Italy. 



7. The preposition d is used for the words at or to, in or into, be- 
fore tlie name of a town, city, or village, preceded by the verbs men- 
tioned above. 

II va a Paris le mois prochain. Ee is going to Paris next month 

8. The same preposition is used in the expressions d la camjpagne^ 
d la ville,^ d la cliasse, d la peche, au marches etc. 



Nous aliens a la campagne. 
Vous n'allez pas a la ville. 
Je vais a la chasse et a la peche. 
II ne va pas au marche. 



We go into the country. 
You do not go to the city. 
I go hunting and fishing. 
He does not go to market. 



9. Indicative Present of the Irregular Yerbs, 
CoNDUi-RE, 4. to conduct. £cRi-RE, 4. to write. Li-re, 4. to read. 

Je conduis, / conduct, do J'ecris, / write, do write, Je lis, / read, do read, ot 

conduct, etc. or am writing ; am reading ; 

Tu conduis, Tu ecris, Tu lis, 

II conduit, II ecrit, II lit. 

Nous conduisons, Nous ecrivons, Nous lisons, 

Yous conduisez, Yoiis ecrivez, Yous lisez, 

lis conduisent. lis ecrivent. lis lisent. 

Resume op Examples. 



I 



Yotre parent ecrit-il bien ? 

II ecrit assez bien. 

Nous avons assez de livres. 

Nous sommes assez attentifs a nos 

legons. 
Yoila la demoiselle dont vous parlez. 

Yotre cheval n'est-il pas dans le 

champ ? 
II n'y est pas, il est dans le jardin. 
Allez- vous en France cette annee ? 
Nous allons a Paris et a Lyon. 
0^ conduisez-vous ce jeune homme ? 
Je le conduis en AUemagne. 
Demeurez-vous a la ville? 
Nous demeurons a la campagne. 
AUez-vous souvent a la chasse ? 
Nous allons quelquefois a la peche. 



Does your relation write well f 

Be writes tolerably. 

We have books enough. 

We are attentive enough to our leS' 

sons. 
There is the young lady of whom you 

speak. 
Is not your horse in the field f 

It is not there, it is in the garden. 
Do you go to France this year ? 
We go to Paris and to Lyons. 
WJiere do you take this young man f 
I take him to Germany. 
Do you live in the city f 
We live in the country. 
Do you go often hunting 9 
We sometimes go fishing. 



* j^tre a la ville, to be, or rather, to dwell in the city, and not in the country. 
'fitre dans la ville, to be within the city, litre ea ville, to be out, not to be at 
home, to be in the city. 



110 TEENTE-QUATRIEME LEQCN. 

Exercise 65. 

Associe, m. partner ; Fort, very ; Suisse, f. Switzerland; 

C-dn'if, m. penknifti ; 'Peche, f. fishing ; Terre, T. farm, estate ; 

Campagne, f. country ; Prusse, f. Prussia; Yille, f. town, city; 

Chasse, f. hunting ; Rapidement, rapidly ; Yite, quickly ; 

Commis, m. cler/c , Reud-re, 4. to return ; Yoyage, m. journey. 

1. £crivez-vou3 encore la meme le9on ? 2. Je n'ecris plus la meme, 
j'en ecris une autre. 3. Yotre commis ecrit-il rapidement? 4. H 
€crit fort bien, mais il n'ecrit pas vite. 5. N'avez-vous pas assez 
d'argent pour acheter cette terre ? 6. J'ai assez d'argent, mais j'ai 
Tiatention de faire un voyage en France. 7. Yoila votre livre, en 
arez-vous besoin ? 8. Je n'en ai pas besoin, j'en ai un autre. 9. Avez- 
V0U3 encore besoin de mon canif ? 10. Je n'en ai plus besoin, je raia 
vous le rendre. 11. Notre cousin demeure-t-il a la ville? 12. II ne 
demeure plus a la ville, il demeure a la campagne. 13. Aime-t-il a 
aller a la chasse ? 14. H n'aime pas a aller a la chasse. 15. II va 
tous les jours a la peche. 16. Notre associe est-il a Paris, ou a 
Eouen? 16. II est a Marseille. 18. Ou avez-vous Tintention de con- 
duire votre fils? 19. Je vais le conduire en Italie. 20. Demeurez- 
vous a Milan, ou a Florence ? 21. Je ne demeure ni a Milan ni a 
Florence, je demeure a Turin. 22, Yotre ami demeure-t-il en Suisse? 
23. II ne demeure plus en Suisse, il demeure en Prusse. 24. Votre 
domestique est-il a I'eglise ? 25. Non, monsieur j il est a I'ecple. 

Exercise 66. 
1. Does your clerk write as well as your son? 2. He writes toler- 
ably well, but not as well as my son. 3. Have you books enough 
in your library ? 4. I have not books enough, but I intend to buy 
some more. 5. Here is your sister's letter, will you read it? 6. I 
intend to read it. 7. Does your son Hke to go fishing ? 8. He likes 
to go fishing and hunting. 9. When does he like to go fishing ? 
10. When I am in the country. 11. What do you do, when you are 
in the city ? 12. When I am in the city, I read and learn my lesson. 
13. Do you intend to go to France this year ? 14. I intend to go to 
Germany. 15. Will you go to the city, if it (sil) rains ? 16. When 
it rains, I always remain at home. [R. 1.] 17. How many friends 
have you in the city ? 18. I have many friends there. 19. Are 
there many English in France ? 20. There are many English in 
France, and in Italy {Italie). 21. Are there more English in Germany 
than in Italy ? 22. There are more English in Italy than in Ger- 
many. 23. Is it fine weather in Italy ? 26. It is very fine weather 
there. 25. Does it often freeze there? 26. It freezes sometimea 



ON, AVOIR LIEU, DEVOIR, ETC. Ill 

there, but not often. 27. Does that young lady read as well as her 
sister ? 28. She reads better than her sister, but her sister reads 
better than I. 29. Is there any one at your house ? 30. My father 
is at home. 31. Is your brother-in-law absent ? 32. My brother- 
in-law is at your house. 33. There is no one at home to-day. 



LEgON XXXV. LESSON XXXY. 

ON, AVOIR LIEU, DEVOIR, ETC. 

1. The indefinite pronoun on has no exact equivalent in English. 
It may be rendered by owe, we^ ihey^ people^ etc., according to the 
context. On has, of course, no antecedent, and seldom refers to a 
particular person, [§ 41, (4.) (5.) § 113.] 

On doit honorer la vertu. We should honor virtue. 

On nous apporte de 1' argent. Money is brought to us, 

2. As may be seen in the last example, on is often the nominative 

of an active verb, which is best rendered in EngHsh by the passive, 

[§ 113, (1.)] 

On dit que votre epouse est ici. It is said that your wife is here. 

On raconte des histoires singulieres. Singular histories are related. 

On recolte beaucoup de ble en Much wheat is harvested "(grown) in 
Prance. France. 

3. Avoir lieu answers to the English expression, to take place. 
Cela a lieu tons les jours. Tliat takes place every day. 

4. Au lieu de answers to the English, instead of. The verb which 
follows it must, according to Eule 2, Lesson 21, be put in the ia- 
finitive. 

Au lieu d'etudier, il joue. Instead of studying, he plays. 

5. Devoir, to owe, is used before an infinitive, like the English verb, 
io he, to express obligation. 

Je dois lui ecrire domain. lam to write io him to-morrow. 

Nous devons y aller demain. We are to go there to-morrow. 

6. Recevoir des nouvelles, means, to hear from. 

Devez-vou3 recevoir des nouvelles Are you to hear from your sister? 
de votre soeur? 

7. Entendre parler, answers to the English phrase, to hear of or about 

Entendez-vous souvent p'arler de Do you often hear of your friends? 
703 amis 7 



112 



TBBNTE-CINQTJIEMB LEQON. 



Resume of Examples. 



Que dit-on de nous dans la villa ? 
On ne parle pas de vous. 
Ne mange-t-on pas tous les jours ? 
On mange quand on a faim. 
Ou trouve de Tor en Caiiibrnie. 
Dit-on quelque chose de nouveau? 
On ne dit rien de nouveau. 
A-t-onre$u des nouvellesde George ? 

On n'a point entendu parler de lui. 
On n'a point regu de ses nouvelles. 
Devez-vous ecrire a notre ami ? 
Je dois lui ecrire demain. 
Le concert doit-il avoir lieu ce soir ? 
II doit avoir lieu ce matin. 
Je viens au lieu de mon frere. 
II danse au lieu de marcher. 



What do they say of us in the city f 

People do not speak of you. 

Do not people eat every dayf 

People tat when they are hungry. 

Gold is found in California. 

Bo they {people) say any thing new f 

Nothing new is said. 

Has any thing been heard frort^ 

George f 
Nothing has been heard of him. 
They have not heard from him. 
Are you to ivrite to our friend? 
I am to write to him to-morrow. 
Is the concert to take place this evening 7 
It is to take place this morning. 
I come instead of my brother. 
He dances instead of walking. 



E3j:ecise 67. 

Foum-ir, 2. to furnish; 
Habits, m. p. clothes; 
Malade, sick; 
Mois, m. month; 
Or, m. gold; 

1. Vous apporte-t-on de I'argent tous les jours ? 



Afrique, f. Africa; 
Alger, Algiers; 
Apport-er, 1. to bring ; 
Demain, to-morrow ; 
Diamant, m. diamond; 



Part-ir, 2, ir. to depart, io 

set out, to leave ; 
Prochain, e, next; 
Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know; 
Yoyage, m. journey, 

2. On ne m'en 



apporte pas tous les jours. 3. Yous fournit-on des habits quand 
vous en avez besoin ? [L. 22.] 4. On m'en fournit toutes les fois 
(every time) que j'en ai besoin. 5. A-t-on besoin d'argent quand 
on est malade ? 6. Quand on est malade, on en a grand besoin. 
7. Avez-vous recu des nouvelles de mon fils ? 8. Je n'ai point recu 
de ses nouvelles. 9. jSTe dit-on pas qu'il est en Afrique ? 10. On dit 
qu'H doit partir pour Alger. 11. Quand doit-il commencer son voya- 
ge ? 12. On dit qu'il doit le commencer le mois prochain. 13. Ce 
mariage a-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ou demain ? 14. On nous dit qu'il 
doit avoir heu cette apres-midi. 15. II doit avoir lieu a, cinq heures 
et demie. 16. Avez-vous envie de venir au lieu de votre frere ? 
17. Mon frere doit venir au lieu de notre cousin. 18. Avez-vous I'in- 
tention de lui dire ce qu'il doit faire ? 19. II salt ce qu'il doit faire. 
20. Savez-vous ce qu'on dit de nouveau? 21. On ne dit rien de 
nouveau. 22. Trouve-t-on beaucoup d'or en Californie ? 23. On y 
en trouve beaucoup. 24. Y trouve-t-on aussi des diamants ? 25. On 
n'y en trouve point, on n'y trouve que de Tor. 

EXEECISE 68. 
1. What do people say of me ? 2. People say that you are not 
very attentive to your lessons. 3. Is it said that much gold is found ia 



REPIiBCTIVE VEKBS. 113 

Africa ? 4. It is said that mucli gold is found ia California. 5. Do they 
bring you books every day ? 6. Books are brought to me [R. 2] 
every day, but I have no time to read them. 7. What should ono 
.do (doit-on /aire) when one is sick ? 8. One should send for a physi- 
cian. 9. Do you send for my brother ? 10. I am to send for him 
.this morning. 11. Do you hear from your son every day ? 12. I 
hear from him every time that your brother comes. 13. Does the 
sale (yente, f ) take place to-day ? 14. It takes place this afternoon. 
15. At what time Qieure) does it take place ? 16. It takes place at 
half after three. 17. I have a wish to go there, but my brother is 
sick. 18. What am I to do ? 19. You are to write to your brother, 
who, it is said {dit on), is very sick. 20. Is he to leave for Africa ? 
21. He is to leave for Algiers. 22. Do you come instead of your 
father ? 23. I am to write instead of him. 24. Does the concert 
take place this morning ? 25. It is to take place this afternoon. 
26. Do you know at what hour? 27. At a quarter before live. 
28. Is your brother coming ? 29. My brother is not coming, he has 
no time. 30. Are you angry with your brother ? 31. I am not 
angry with him. 32. Is there any thing new ? (Is any thing new 
said?) 33. There is nothing new. 34. What is said of him ? 35. Noth- 
ing is said of him. 



LEgON XXXYI. LESSON XXXVI. 

EEFLECTIYE VEEBS. [§ 43, (6.) § 56]. 

1. A verb is called reflective or pronominal, when it is conjugated 
with two pronouns of the same person, i. e., the usual nominative 
pronoun, and the pronouns me, te, se, etc. [§ 56.] In these verbs, the 
subject'is represented as acting upon itself 

Je m'applique a I'etude. I apply (myself) to study. 

Je me propose de voyager. J propose to (myself) to travel, i. e., it 

is my intention to travel. 

In these verbs, the second pronoun is in fact only the objective 
pronoun direct or indirect, which, according to Eules 1 and 2, Lesson 
27, is placed before the verb. 

2. The reflective form of the verb, which is much more frequently 

used in French than in English, often answers to the passive form so 

common in the latter language. 

Cela ae voit ton^ les iour<? \ ^'^^ ^^ ^^'^ ^'^^'"'^ cfa^/— literally, 

i.eia se voit tous les jours. -j ^^^^ ^^^^ ^.^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ 

Cette marchandise se vend facile- j That merchandise is easily sold. 
raent. \ That merchandise sells itself easily^ 



Cela. se Mt ftin ^f't 



( That is done thus. 
\ That does itself so. 



114 TEENTE-SIXlEME L E § O IS" . 

3. The verb se porter^ literally, to carry one^s self, is used idiomati- 
callj for to do or to he in speaking of health. 

Comment vous portez-vous ? How do you do ? 

Je me porte tres bien. / am very welL 

4. S'asseoir, [3. ir. see § 62.] to sit down, is also a reflective verb. 
Votre frere s'assied. Tour brother sits down. 

5. Se promener means to walk, to ride, etc., for pleasure, or health. 

Je me promene tous les jours. / take a walk every day. 

Je me promene a chevaL / take a ride. 

6. Marcher, oiler a cheval, alter en voiture, signify to walk or to 
ride, when we wish to express simply the manner of progressing. 

Marcbez-vous beaucoup tous les Do you walk much every day ? 

jours ? 
Je vais a cheval et en voiture. / ride on horseback and in a carriage. 

7. Conjugation or the Present of the Indicative of the 

Reflective Yerbs, 

Sb port-er, 1. to be or Se promen-er, 1. to walk S'asse-oir, 3. ir. to sit 

do ; or ride / down ; 

Je me porte, / am or Je m,e promene, / take Je m'assieds, / sit down 

do ; ' a walk or ride ; or am sitting down / 

Tu te portes, Tu te promenes, [§ 49.] Tu t'assieds, 

II se porte, II se promene, II s'assied, 

Nous nous portons, Nous nous promenons, Nous nous assejons, 

Yous vous portez, Yous vous promenez, Yous vous asseyez, 

lis se portent. lis se promenent. lis s'asseient. 

8. The reflective pronouns, in the imperative of reflective verbs, 
follow Rule 4, of Lesson 27, and Rules 3, 4, of Lesson 28 and also 
§100, (2) (3.). 

Asseyons-nous, asseyez-vous. Let us sit aown, sit down. 

Ne nous asseyons pas. Lei us not sit down. 

Resume op Examples. 

vA quoi vous appliquez-vous ? To what do you apply yourself? 

Je m'oecupe de mes affaires. / occupy myself with my affairs. 

Je m'adresse a mes amis. _ I apply to my friends. 

Yous adressez-vous a votre pere? Do you apply to your father 7 

Je m'adresse a lui [§ 100, (4.)] I apply io him. 

Monsieur votre pere, comment se How is your father? 

porte-t-il ? 

H se porte passablement bien. Ee is tolerably well. 

Pourquoi ne vous asseyez-vous pas ? Why do you not sit down? » 

Je m'assieds quand je suis fatigue. I sit down vjhen I am weary. -, 

Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. i have no time U) sit down. 



REFLECTIVE VEKBS. 115 

Teas promenez-vous tous les jours ? Do you take a walk every day f 

Je nie promtine en voituro au- / take a ride to-day {in a carriage). 

jourd hui. 

Vos amis se promenent-ils a cheval ? Do your friends take a ride ? 

N'airacz-vous pas a marcher ? Do you vat like walking ? 

J'aime beaucoup :l aller a cheval. Hike riding much. 

Aimez-voQS a vous promener? Do you like walking {for pleasure)! 

Asseyons-noiis, s'il vous plait. Lei us sit down, if you phase. 

Ne nous asseyons-nous pas ? Do loe not sit down ? 

Ne nous asseyons pas, il est trop Let us not sit down, it is too late. 

tard. 

Combien ce drap se vend-il la^ For how much is that cloth sold a 

verge ? yard ? 

II se vend vingt-cinq francs lo metre. It is sold iioenttj-five francs the metre. 

Comment cela s'appelle-t-il ? How is thai called 7 What is the 

name of that ? 

Comment vous appelez-vous [§49, What is your name? How do you 

(4.)] ? call yourself? 

Exercise 69. 

Banquier, m. banker ; Magnifique, magnificent; Pied, m.foot; 
Comment, how ; Matin, m. morning ; Port-er, to carry ^ wear ; 

Cheval, m. horse; Mieux, better ; Quelquefbis, sometimes \ 

Drap, m. cloth; Oblige, e, obliged; Quitt-er, 1. to leave; 

Fatigue, e,. weary, tired; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out; Voiture, f. carriage. 

1. Comment ce monsieur s'appelle-t-il ? 2. Je ne sais comment 
il s'appelle. 3. Cette dame ne s'appelle-t-elle pas L. ? 4. Ken, 
madame, elle s'appelle M. 5. Monsieur voire pere se porte-t-il bien 
ce matin ? 6. II se porte beaucoup mieux. 7. Fait-il beau temps 
aujourd'hui ? 8. II fait un temps magnifique ; n'allez-vous pas vous 
promener? 9. Nous n'avons ni cheval ni voiture. 10. Ne pouvez- 
Tous marcher? 11. Je suis trop fatigue pour marcher. 12. N'allez- 
vous pas a cheval tous les matins ? 13. Je me promene tous les 
matins. 14. Comment vous promenez-vous ? 15. Quelquefois a 
pied, et quelquefois en voiture. 16. A qui vous adressez-vous, quand 
vous avez besoin d' argent? 17. Je m'adresse a mon banquier? 
18. Ne voulez-vous pas vous asseoir ? 19. Nous vous somraes bien 
obliges. 20. Ce drap se vend-il fort bien ? 21. II se vend fort cher. 

22. Ne devez-vous pas aller S. la campagne, s'll fait beau temps? 

23. Yotre frere doit-il quitter la ville aujourd'hui ? 24. II doit partir 
domain matin. 25. Ma soeur se promene tous les matins. 

Exercise 70. 
1. Does your sister walk every day ? 2. She takes a walk every 
morning. 3. She likes riding on horseback, and in a carriage. 

I The English a or an, before a measure, is rendered into French by tha 
erticle fe, or la, etc. 



116 TRENTE-SEPTIEMB LEgON. 

4. What is that little girl called ? 5. She is called L. 6. Is not that 
gentleman called L. ? 7. No, sir ; he is called G-., and his cousin is 
called H. 8. How is your brother ? 9. My brother is very well, but 
my sister is not well. 10. How are your two daughters? 11. They 
are tolerably weU to-day. 12. Will you not sit down, gentlemen ? 

13. We are much obliged to you, madam, we have not time. 

14. Does that book sell well? 15. It sells very well. 16. How is 
that silk sold an ell {Taune) ? 17. It is sold six francs an elL 
18. Is it fine weather to-day ? 19. It is very fine weather ; will you 
not take a walk ? 20. I have no time to walk. 21. To whom does 
your brother apply? 22. He applies to his brother. 23. Is his 
brother at home ? 24. No, sir ; he is at Paris. 25. When does he 
intend to go to France ? 26. He intends to go to France, in one 
month. 27. Is your sister to leave to-morrow morning ? 28. She 
is to leave to-day, if {s'il) it is fine weather. 29. What do people 
say of this ? 30. Nothing is said about it [L. 35]. 31. Are you too 
much fatigued to walk ? 32. I am not too much fatigued, but I have 
no wish to walk. 33. Do you like walking or riding ? 34. I like 
riding, when I have a good horse. 35. I do not like walking. 



LEgON XXXVII. LESSON XXXYII. 

FSE OP EEFLECTIVE PRONOUN. SE SOUVENIR, ETC. 

1. The reflective pronoun is often used to express possession, in- 
stead of the possessive adjective. In such cases, the article takes the 
place of this adjective, before the noun. [§ 77, (9.)] 

Yous chauffez-vous les pieds ? Do you warm your feet 1 

Je me chaufife les mains et les pieds. I warm my hands and feet. 

2. Se souvenir [2, ir. See § 62.], se rappeler [§ 49, (4.)], correspond 
to the English verb to remember. Se rappeler takes a direct object, 
that is, no preposition intervenes between the verb and its object, if 
the same be a noun or a pronoun. 

Yous rappelez-vous ces demoiselles ? Do you rememTjer those young ladies f 
Je no me les rappalle pas. / do not remember them. 

3. Custom seems, however, to sanction the use of the preposition 
de between the verb se rappeler and an infinitive. 

Nous ne nous rappelons pas d'en We do not remember having been do- 
avoix ete prives (Condillac). ^rived of it. 



USE OP EBFLECTIVE PBONOTJN, ETC. Il7 



4. Se souvenir, takes the preposition de before a noun or pronoun, 
as well as before an infinitive. 



Vous souvenez-Yous de cette affaire ? 

Je ne m'en souviens pas. 

Jo me souviens de lui avoir ecrit. 



Do you remember that affair f 

J do not remember it. 

J remember having written to him. 



5. Se coucher, corresponds to the English verbs to retire, to go to hed. 
Je me couche de bonne heure. J retire early. 

6. Se lever [§ 49, (6.)] means to rise, to get uf. 

Jo mo leve au point du jour. I rise at the hreah of day. 

Resume of Examples. 



Yous coupez-vous les ongles ? 

Je me coupe les ongles et les cbe- 

veux. 
Vous coupez-vous les doigts ? 
Je me coupe souvent les doigts, 

quand je taille ma plume. 
Vous rappelez-vous [§ 49, (4.)] les 

malheurs du frere de votre ami ? 
Je me rappelle ses malheurs. 
Je me les rappelle distinctement. 
Je me rappelle de I'avoir vu. 
Vous souvenez-vous de cela ? 
Je ne m'en souviens pas du tout. 
A quelle heure vous couch ez-vous ? 
Nous nous couchons tous les jours 

au eoucher du soleil. 
Nous nous levons de meiUeure heure 

que vous. — au lever du soleil. 
II se leve a cinq heures du matin, et 

U se couche a dix heures et de- 

mie du soir. 



Do you cut your nails f 
1 cut my nails and hair. 

Do you cut your fingers ? 

I of ten cut my fingers, when I mend 

my pen. 
Do you remember the misfortunes of 

your friend'' s brother^ 
I remember his misfortunes. 
J recollect them distinctly. 
I remember having seen him. 
Do you remember that ? 
I do not remember it at all. 
At what hour do you retire ? 
We go to bed every day at sunset. 

We rise earlier than you, — at sun- 
rise. 

He rises at five o^cloclc in the morn- 
ing, and goes to bed at half after 
ten in the evening. 



Associe, m. partner ; 

Bois, m. wood; 

Boucher, m. butcher ; 

Se brul-er, 1. ref, to 
burn one's self; 

Charpentier, m. carpen- 
ter ; 

Se chauff-er, 1. ref, to 
warm one's self; 



EXEECISE 71. 

Cheveux, m. pi. hair ; 

De meilleure heure, ear- 
lier ; 

Doigt, Tn. finger ; 

Per, m. iron; 

Feu, m. fire ; 

Main, f, hand; 

S'occuper, 1. to occupy 
one's self; 



Parfaitement, perfectly ; 

Perruquier, m. hair- 
dresser ; 

Poele, m. stove; 

Pouce, m. thumb ; 

Promesse, f promise ; 

Se souvenir, 2. to remem- 
ber (see Venir, § 62.) ; 

Travaill-er, 1. to work. 



1. Le perruquier se coupe-t-il le pouce ? 2. Kon, monsieur ; il S9 
coupe les cheveux. 3. Le charpentier ne se coupe-t-il pas la main ? 
4. II ne se coupe pas la main, il coupe le bois. 5. Ne vous rappelez- 
vous pas cette dame ? 6. Je me rappelle cette dame et ces messieurSi 



lis TEENTE-SEPTIBME LEgON. 

7. De quoi vous occupez-vous ? 8. Nous nous occupons de nos af- 
faires. 9. Vous souvenez-vous des fusils de votre pere ? 10. Je 
ne m'en souviens point du tout. 11. Cette petite fille ne se briile-t- 
elle pas ? 12. Elle ne se brule pas, 11 n'y a pas de feu dans le poele. 

13. ^ourquoi le boucher ne se chauffe-t-il pas ? 14. Parcequ'il n'a 
pas Iroid. 15. Ces enfants se levent-ils de meilleure heure que moi ? 
16. Us se couchent de bonne heure, et lis se levent tous les matins a 
six heures. 17. Votre associe ne veut-il pas s'asseoir ? 18. 11 n'a 
pas le temps de s'asseoir. 19. Vous souvenez-vous de vos promes- 
ses ? 20. Je m'en souviens parfaitement. 21. Ne vous chauffez- 
vous pas, quand vous avez froid ? 22. Je ne me chauffe presque 
jamais. 23. Ne se couche-t-on pas, quand on a sommeil? 24. On 
se couche quand on a sommeil, et on mange quand on a faim. 
25. Quand on se porte bien, se leve-t-on de bonne heure ? 2G. Quand 
on se porte bien, on doit (should) se lever de bonne heure. 

Exercise 72. 

1. Do you rise early -when you are well ? 2. When I am well, I 
rise every morning at five o'clock. 3. Do you remember your cousin 
L.? 4. I remember him perfectly well. 5. Do you go to bed early? 
6. "We go to bed at ten o'clock. 7. Does not the tailor burn his 
fingers? 8. He does not burn bis fingers, his iron is not warm. 
9. Does the carpenter cut his thumb ? 10. He cuts neither his thumb 
nor his hand. 11. "Why do you not warm yourself? 12. I do not 
warm myself, because I am not cold. 13. Is it not very cold to-day ? 

14. It is not cold to-day, it rains. 15. Does your hair-dresser rise 
at sunrise ? IG. The carpenter rises at sunrise, and goes to bed at 
sunset. 17. Do you rise earlier than I? 18. We rise every morning 
at the break of day. 19. Do you cut your hair often ? 20. I cut my 
hair and my nails every month. 21. Do you remember that gentle- 
man ? 22. I remember him very well 23. I do not remember him. 
24. Do you cut your fingers, when you mend a pen ? 25. I cut my 
hand, when I work. 26. Do you remember what you learn ? 27. I 
do not remember all that (tout ce que) I learn, 28. Do you know if 
your father is well ? 29. He is very well to-day. 30. Is not your 
mother well ? 31. She is not very well. 32. Do you remember 
yoin- firiend's misfortunes ? 33. I remember them. 34. I remember 
that 



BE TROMPER, s'eKNUYER, ETC. 119 



LEgON XXXVIIL LESSON XXXVIIL 

SE TROMPER, s'eNNUYER, ETC. 

1. The -verb tromper, conjugated actively, corresponds to the Engi 
lish verb (o deceive. 

II trompe tout le monde. Me deceives every body. 

2. Conjugated reflectively, se tromper means to he mistaken; liter- 
ally, to deceive one^s self. 

On se trompe bien souvent. One is often mistaken. 

3. Ennuyer^ [§ 49, (2.)] used actively, means to weary the mind, to 
tease, to bore. 

Get homme ennuie ses auditeurs. Thai man wearies his hearers. 

Yous nous ennuyez par vos de- You tease, or weary iis by your ques- 
mandes. Hans. 

4. S'ennuyer has no exact correspondent in English. It signifies 
generally, to he or to become mentally weary of any thing or place. 

Nous nous ennuyons ici. We are tveary of being here. 

Yous ennuyez- vous a la campagne ? Are you toeary of being in the country f 

Je m'ennuie partout. I find no amusement anywhere. 

5. Je m'ennuie means in fact, / am mentally weary, I want change^ 
amusement, occupation, etc. 

6. S'amuser, answers to the English expressions, to amuse one's 
self, to take pleasure in, to spend one's time in, to find amusement in, to 
enjoy one's self. 

Nous nous amusons a la campagne. We enjoy ourselves in the country, 
Yous vous amusez a des bagatelles. You spend your time in trifles. 

Resume of Examples. 

On se trompe souvent soi-meme, en We often deceive ourselves, while seek<! 

cberchant a tromper les autres. ing to deceive others. 

Yotre commis ne se trompe-t-il pas ? Is not your clerk mistaken ? 

II se trompe bien rarement. He is very rarely mistaken. 

Ne vous trompez-vous pas frequem- Are you not frequently mistaken ? 

ment? 

Tout le monde est sujet a se trom- Fvery one is apt to le mistaken. 

per. 

Ce marchand trompe tout le monde. That merchant deceives every body. 

Sa conversation nous ennuie. His conversation wearies us. 

Yous ennuyez vos amis par vos You weary your friends by youf 

plaintes. complaints. 

Est-ce que je ne vous ennuie pas ? Do I not weary you ? 

Yous ennuyez- vous chez nous ? Are you weary of remaining with us ? 

Je m'ennuie a la ville, et je m'amuse I become weary of the city, and find 

a la campagne. • amusement in the country. 

A quoi vous amusez-vous ? With what do you amuse yourself? 

Je m'amuse a lire I'allemand. I amuse myself in reading German. 



120 TEENTE-HUITIEME LEgON". 

Exercise 73. 

Apprend-re, 4. ir. to Entend-re, 4. to hear ; Quand, wTim ; 

learn; Ennuyer, 1. *See§ 49,(2.) Quelquefois, sometimes ; 

Banquier, m. hanker ; Laugue, f. language ; Rec-evoir, 3. to receive ; 

Client, m. client, cus- Malade, sick; Rev-enir, 2. ir. to come 

tomer; Memoire, m. 6i7Z ; hack; 

Demeur-er, 1. to dwell; Prefer-er, 1. to prefer ; Tromp-er, 1. to deceive. 

1. Aimez-vous a demeurer a la campagne ? 2. Je prefere la cam- 
pagne a la ville. 3. Vous ennuyez-vous souvent a la campagne? 
4. Quand je m'ennuie a la campagne, je reviens a la ville. 5. Re^oit- 
on des nouvelles du General L. ? 6. On n'entend pas parler de lui. 
7. Vous trompez-vous quelquefois ? 8. Tout le monde se trompe 
quelquefois. 9. Le banquier trompe-t-il ses clients? 10. II ne 
trompe ni ses clients, ni ses amis, il ne trompe personne. 11. Ne 
vous trompez-vous pas dans ce memoire ? 12, Je ne me trompe pas. 
13. Yous amusez-vous a lire ou a ecrire ? 14. Je m' amuse a ap- 
prendre I'allemand et le francais. 15. Avez-vous tort d'apprendre 
les langues ? 16. J'ai raison de les apprendre. 17. Yous ennuyez- 
vous souvent? 18. Je m'ennuie quand je n'ai rien a faire. 19. A 
quoi vous amusez-vous, quand vous etes a la campagne ? 20. ISTous 
nous promenons le matin, et nous travaillons le reste de la journee. 
21. Yous portez-vous toujours bien? 22. Nous sommes quelque- 
fois malades. 23. Envoyez-vous chercher le medecin? 24. Nous 
I'envoyons chercher. 25. Je vais le chercher, 

♦ EXEECISE 74. 

1. Are you not mistaken ? 2. I am not mistaken. 3. Is not the 
banker mistaken ? 4. He is not mistaken, but his clerk is certainly 
(certainement) mistaken. 5. Does he not deceive you ? 6. He does 
not deceive me, he deceives nobody, 7. Are you not wrong to de- 
ceive your father ? 8. I do not intend to deceive him. 9. Does not 
tlie merchant make a mistake ? 10. He makes a mistake in the bill 
-which he writes. 11. Do you like the country or the city ? 12. I 
prefer the city, I soon become weary of the country. 13. Does not 
that child weary you by his questions ? 14. Does not that long story 
(recit, m.) weary you ? 15. It does not weary me, it amuses me. 
IG. Do you amuse yourself when you are in the country? 17. I 
amuse myself, I learn French and Italian. 18. Are you not weary 
of remaining at your uncle's ? 19, I am never weary of remaining 
there. 20. Is your brother often mistaken ? 21. Every body is 
Bometimes mistaken. 22. Does his conversation weary you ? 23. On 



SB PASSER, SE SERVIR, ETC. 121 

the contrary, it amuses us. 24. Is your brother heard from? 
25. Nothing is heard of him. [L. 35.] 26. Is your sister well? 
27. No, sir ; she is sick. 28. Do I weary you ? 29. You do not 
weary me. 30. Am I mistaken ? 31. You are not mistaken. 32. Is 
he often mistaken ? 33. He is often mistaken. 34. Do you not rise 
late? 35. No, sir; I rise early. 



LEgON XXXIX. LESSON XXXIX. 

SE PASSER, SE SERYIR, ETC. 

1. The reflective verb, se passer, is used idiomatically in the sense 

of to do without It is followed by the preposition de, when ifc 

comes before a noun or a verb. 

Vous passez-vous de ce livre ? Do you do without that book f 
Je ne puis m'en passer. / cannot do without it:- 

2. Se servir [2. ir. see § 0)2^ to use, also requires the preposition dA 

ii)efore its object. 

Je me sers de votre canif. I use your penknife. 

Je ne m'en sers pas. / do not use it. 

3. The second example of the two rules above, shows that when 
the object of those verbs is a thing, it is represented in the sentence 
by the pronoun en. 

Je m'en sers, je m'en passe. I use it, I do without ii. 

4. The pronoun^ used as indirect object of a reflective verb, if rep- 
resenting a person, follows the verb [§ 100, (4.)] 

Je puis me passer de lui. lean do without him. 

Je m'adresse a vous et a elle. I apply to you and to her. 

5. S'endormir [2. ir, see § 62.], to fall asleep, and s'eveiller, to 
awake, are also reflective. 

Je m'endors aussitot que je me I fall asleep as soon as I go to bed. 

couche. V 

Te m'eveille a six heures du matin. / awake at six o^clock in the morning} 

6. S'approcher, to come near, to approach ; s'eloigner, to draw hack^ 
io leave, take the preposition de before a noun. Their object, when 
a pronoun, is subject to Rules 3 and 4 above. 

Yotre fils s'approche-t-il du feu? Does your son draw near the fire? 

II ne s'en approche pas. He does not come near it. 

II s'eloigne de moi et de vous. He goes from me and from you. 

^ The rule does not apply to the reflective pronoun, which is sometimea 
Rn indirect object. 

6 



122 



TEENTE-NETJVIEME L E g O N", 



Resume of Examples. 



Tous seryez-vous de ce couteau ? 
Je ne m'en sers pas ; il ne coupe pas. 
De quels couteau x vous servez-vous ? 
Nous nous servons de couceaux 

d'acier. 
Pouvez-vous vous passer d'argent ? 
Nous ne pouvons nous ca passer. 
Vous passez-vous de votre maitre ? 
Kdus nous passons de lul 
"V^usadressez-vous a ces messieurs ? 
Kills nous adressons a eux et a vous. 
Yous vous endormez faciletnent. 
Je m'eveille de tres bonne heure. 
Pourquoi vous approchez-vous du 

feu? 
Je m'en approche, parce que j'ai 

froid ? 
Nous nous eloignons du feiL 
Nous nous en eloignons. 
Nous nous approchons de notre pere. 
Nous nous approchons de lul 



Do you use thai knife ? 
/ do not vse it ; it does not cut. 
Wliat knives do you use? 
We use steel knives. 

Can you do without money t 

We cannot do without it. 

Do you do without your teacher f 

We do without him. 

Do you apply to those gentlemen t 

We apply to them and to you. 

You go to sleep easily. 

J awake veryea'^ly. 

Why do you come near the fire f 

I come near it, because lam colci 

We go from the fire. 
We go from it. 
We go near our father. 
We go near him. 



Ordinairement, generat- 

ly; 

Plume, f. ^671 ; 
Pourquoi, why ; 
Pret-er, 1. to lend; 
Quart, m. quarter ; 
Taill-er, to mend. 



Exercise 75. 
Aussi, also; Encre, £ ink; 

Aussitot — que, as soon Fenetre, f. loindow; 

as; Feu, m.fire; 

Canif, m. penknife ; Fourcbette, f. fork ; 

Demoiselle, young lady ; Heure, f. hour, o''dock ; 
Domestique, m. ser- Moins, less ; (minus). 

vant ; Oblige, e, obliged ; 

1. Pouvez-vous vous passer d' encre. 2. Nous pouvons nous en 
passer, nous n'avons rien a ecrire. 3. Yous servez-vous de votre 
plume ? 4. Je ne m'en sers pas ; en avez-vous besoin ? 5. Ne voulez- 
vous pas vous approcher du feu ? 6. Je vous suis bien oblige, je n'ai 
pas froid. 7. Pourquoi ces demoiselles s'eloignent-elles de la fene- 
tre? 8. Eiles s'en eloignent parce qu'il j fait trop froid. 9. Ces 
enfants ne s'adressent-ils pas a vous ? 10. lis s'adressent a moi 
et a mon frere. 11. A quelle beure vous eveillez-vous le matin ? 
12. Je m'eveille ordinairement a six heures moins un quart. 13. Yous 
levez-vous aussitot que vous vous eveiHez ? 14. Je me leve aussitot 
que je m'eveille. 15. De quels livres vous servez-vous? 16. Je 
me sers des miens et des votres. 17. Ne vous servez-vous pas de 
ceux de votre frere ? 18. Je m'en sers aussi. 19. Les plumes dont 
[L. 31, R. 8.] vous vous servez sont-elles bonnes? 20. Pourquoi 
votre ami s'eloigne-t-il du feu? 21. II s'en eloigne parce qu'il a trop 
chaud. 22. Pourquoi votre domestique s'en approche-t-il ? 23. II 
s'en approche pour se chauffer. 24. Yous ennuyez-vous ici ? 25. Je 
ne m'ennuie pas. 



s'en allek, se plaiee, etc. 125^ 

Exercise 76. 
1. T7ill you lend me your penknife? 2. I cannot do witliout 
it, I want it to mend my pen. 3, Do you wish to use my book ? 
4. I wish to use it, will you lend it to me ? 5. "What knife does 
your brother use ? 6. He uses my father's knife, and my brother's 
fork. 7. Will you not draw near the lire ? 8. We are much obliged 
to you, we are warm. 9. Is that young lady warm enough ? [L. 34, 
3.] 10. She is very cold. 11. Tell her (dites-lui) to come near the 
fire ? 12. Why do you go from the fire ? 13. We are too warm. 
14. Does your brother leave the window ? 15. He leaves the win- 
dow, because he is cold. 16. To whom does that gentleman apply ? 
17. He applies to me and to my brother. 18. Why does he not ap- 
ply to me ? 19, Because he is ashamed to speak to you. 20. Do 
you awake early every morning ? 21, I awake early, when I go to 
bed early. 22. Why do you go to sleep ? 23. I go to sleep because 
I am tired. 24. Are you afraid to go near your father ? 25. I am 
not afraid to approach him. 26. Can you do without us ? 27. We 
cannot do without you, but we can do without your brother. 28. Do 
you want my brother's horse ? 29. No, sir ; we can do without it. 
30. Do you intend to do without money? 31. You know very 
well that we cannot do without it. 32. Is your brother weary of 
being here ? 33. He is not weary of being here. 34. Come near 
the fire, my child. 



LEgOI^ XL. LESSOIT XL. 

s'ex aller, se plaiee, etc. 

1. The verb aller (1. ir. § 62.), conjugated reflectively, and pre«» 
ceded by the word en-, i. e., s'en aller ^ corresponds to the Enghsh ex-i 
pressions to go away, to leave. 

2. Indicative Present of the Verb S'en Aller, to go away. 
Je m'en vais, / go away ; Nous nous en al- We go away ; 
Tu t'en vas, Thou art going away ; Ions, 

11 s'ea va, He goes away ; Yous vous en allez, You are goiny 

away ; 
lis s'en vont, They go away. 

3. The same Tense Conjugated Interrogatively. 
Est-ce que je m'en Z>o /g^o at^ay? Nous en siWonB- Do we go away ? 

vais? nous? 

T'eu vas-tu ? Art thou going Yous en allez- Do you go away? 

away ? vous ? 

S'en va-t-il ? Is he going away ? S'en vont-ils ? Do they go oway T 



124 



QT7AUANTIEME LEgON. 



4. Se facher, io he or hecome angry, requires the preposition conin 
or de before the noun or pronoun following it. 

Se fache-t-il centre votre frere ? Does he get angry with your brother t 
II se facbe centre luL Jle is angry with him. 

Yous vous tachez d'un rien. You get angry at nothing. 

5. Se rejouir, io rejoice, is followed by the preposition de. 
Je me rejeuis de votre bonheur. I rejoice at your happiness. 

6. Se plaire [4. ir. see § 62,] to take pleasure, io delight in any thing^ 
io like io he in a place, takes a before its object. 

Hike io he in the country. 

I take pleasure in, studying, in reading. 



Je me plais a la campagne. 
Je me plais a etudier, a lire. 



T. Se depecher, se hater, io make haste, take de before their ob- 
ject. 

Depechez-vous de finir vos lemons. Make haste to finish your lessons. 

Pourquei ne veus depechez-vous pas ? Why do you not make haste 7 

RiiSTJME OF Examples. 



Le marchand s'en va-t-il aujour- 
d'hui? 

Nous nous en aliens demain. 

Je m'en vais quand je suis fatigue. 

Pourquei vous fachez-vous centre 
lui ? ^ 

II se plait a jouer, il n'etudie ja- 
mais. 

Yous plaisez-veus chez vos parents ? 

De quel veus rejouissez-vous ? 

Nous nous rejouissens de votre 
succes. 

Nous nous en rejouissens. 

Peurquoi vous depechez-vous? 

Nous nous depecbons d'ecrire. 

Nous nous plaisons en Angleterre. 

Nous ne nous plaisons pas a Paris. 

Nous ne nous j plaisons pas. 

Yous plaisez-vou3 a New-York ? 

Nous nous y plaisons. 



Does the merchant go away to-day t 

We are going away to-morrow. 
I go away when J am tired. 
Why do you get angry with him f 

He takes pleasure inplaying, he never 

studies. 
Do you like to he at your relations f 
At vjhat do you rejoice ? 
We rejoice at your success. 

We rejoice at it. 

Why do you make haste? 

We make haste to write. 

We like to be in England. 

We do not like to be in Paris. 

We do not like to be there. 

Do you like to be in New York 7 

We like to he there. 



Ambassadeur, m. am- 
bassador ; 
Arrivee, f. arrival ; 
Autrui, m. others ; 
Bientot, soon; 
Cour-ir, 2. ir. io run; 



Exercise 77. 

Jamais, never ; Prechain, e, next ^ 

Jeu-er, 1. to play ; Eeteurn-er, 1. to return j 

Malheur, m. misfortune ; Semaine, f. week; 

Mieux, better; Souvent, often; 

Midi, noon ; Tante, f. aunt ; 

Parce que, because; Turc, turque, Turkish. 



1. Yous en allez-vous bientot? 2. Je m'en vais la semaine pro- 
chaine. 3. Peurquoi vous en allez-vous? 4. Parce que je ne ma 



s'en allee, se plaire, etc. 125 

plais pas ici. 5. Yous plaisez-vous mieux chez votre tante qu'ici ? 
6. Je m'j plais mieux. 7. N'avez-Tous pas tort de vous en aller si 
tot ? 8. J'ai raison de lu'en aller. 9. Ne vous rejouissez-vous pas 
des malheurs d'autrui? 10. Nous ne nous en rejouissons point 
11. Get homme se fache-t-il contre le jardinier? 12. II se faclie 
contre lui, parce qu'il ne veut pas se depecher. 13. Se fache-t-il bien 
souvent ? 14. II se faclie a tout moment, il se fache d'un rien. 15. Ne 
vous depecbez-vous jamais ? 16. Je me depeche toujours, quand j'ai 
quelque chose a faire. 17. Ne vous plaisez-vous pas a courir et a 
Jjuer? 18. Je me plais a jouer, et monfrere se plait a lire. 19. Vous 
rejouissez-vous de I'arrivee de I'ambassadeur turc ? 20. Je m'eq 
rejouis. 21. Ne vous plaisez-vous pas en Amerique ? 22. Je m'y 
plais beaucoup mieux qu'en France. 23. Votre ecolier ne se plait-U 
pas cliez voas ? 24. II se plait chez moi, mais il desire retourner 
chez son pere. 25. Depecbez-vous, il est deja midi 

Exercise 78. 

1. At -what hour does your friend go away ? 2. He goes away 
every morning at nine o'clock. 3. Do you go away with (avec) him ? 
4. I go away with him, when I have time. 5. Will you make haste 
to finish your letter ? 6. I make haste to finish it. 7. Does the gar- 
dener get angry with his brother ? 8. He gets angry with him, when 
he does not make haste. 9. Make haste my friend, it is ten o'clock. 
10. Why do you not make haste ? 11. I like to play, but I do not 
Hke to study. 12. Do you like to stay at my house ? 13. I hke to 
stay there. 14. Do you rejoice at the arrival of your mother? 
15. I rejoice at it. 16. Is not your brother wrong to go away so 
soon ? 17 He is right to go away, he has much to do at home. 
18. Do you rejoice at other people's misfortunes ? 19. I do not re- 
joice at them. 20. I rejoice at your success, 21. Does not your 
brother draw near the fire ? 22. He goes from the fire, he is too 
warm. 23. Does that young lady get angry with you ? 24. She 
gets angry at trifles {de rien). 25. Do you like to be in Paris ? 26. I 
hke to be there. 27. Can you do without me to-day ? 28. We 
cannot do without you ; make haste to finish your work (ouvrage). 
29. Do you want your penknife ? 30. I want to use it. 31. Make 
haste to rise, it is six o'clock. 32. Is it fine weather ? 33. No, su-; 
it rains. 34. Is your father well this morning? 35. Yes, sir; he ia 
very welL 



126 QUARANTE ET U N I i) M E LE§ON. 

LEgON XLI. LESSON XLll 

THE PAST INDEFINITE. [§ 121.] 

1. The past indefinite is composed of the j)resent of the ind^'catiro 
of one of the auxihary verbs, avoir and tire [§ 45, (8.)], and the par- 
ticiple past of a verb. See the different paradigms of verbs, § 47 
and following sections. 

J'ai parle, je suis arrive. I have spoken, I have arrived. 

2. The past indefinite is used to express an action entirely com- 
pleted, but performed at a time of which a part is not yet elapsed, 
or at a time entirely past, but not specified. [§121, (1.) (2.)] 

J'ai vu votre pere ce matin. I have seen your father this morning. 

Je ne vous ai pas encore parle. / have not yet spoken to you. 

3. The past indefinite may also be used, when the time is speci- 
fied. [§ 121, (3.)] 

Je lui ai ecrit la semaine demiere. / wrote to him last week. 
Je lui ai euvoye una lettre le mois I sent him a letter last month. 
dernier. 

4. In this tense, and in other compound tenses, the adverb is gen- 
erally placed between the auxiliary and the participle. [§ 136, (3.)] 

Yens nous avez souvent parle. You have often spoken to lis. 

Je ne i'ai pas encore vu. / have not yet seen him. 

5. The adverbs, aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, to-morrow / hier, yes- • 
terday , polysyllabic adverbs of manner ending in ment, and long 
adverbs generally, do not come between the auxiliary and the par- 
ticiple, but follow Eule 1, Lesson 34, See § 136, (5.) 

Vous avez lu dernierement. You read lately. 

6. The unipersonal verb y avoir, [L. 33, R. 3, 4,] placed before a 
Word, expressing time, corresponds with the English word, ago. 

J'ai re^u una lettre, il y a huit jours, /received a letter, eight days ago. 
Vous avez achete une maison, il y You bought a house, a year ago. 
a un an. 

Resume op Examples. 

Yos neveux nous ont parle. Your nephews spoke to us. 

Nous avons parle a votre pere. We spoke to your father. 

Le tailleur a-t-il fait men habit ? Has the tailor made my coat f 

Le boulanger a mis son chapeau. The baker has put on his hat. 

Le cordonnier a ote ses souUers. The shoemaJier has taken his shoes off. 



THE PAST INDEFINITE. 127 

Votre frere a dit quelque chose. Tour brother said something. 

Votre soeur qu'a-t-elle dit ? What did your sister say ? 
N'avez-vous rien dit a mon cousin ? Have you told my cousin nothing t 

Je ne lai ai rien dit. / have told him nothing. 

Je ue Tai jamais rencontre. I have never met him. 

Je ne leur ai jamais parle. / never spoke to them. 

Qu'avez-vous fait aujourd'hui? What have you done to-day f 

Hier, nous n'avons pas travaille. We did not work yesterday. 

En avez-vous souvent parle ? Have you often spoken about it f 

Je leur en ai souvent parle. / have often spoken to them about it, ' 

Je ne le leur ai pas encore dit I have not yet told them of it. 

N' avez-vous pas assez ecrit? Have you not written enough? 

II m'a ecrit, il y a longtemps. He wrote to me, a long time ago, 

II nous a repondu, il y a un mois. He replied to us, a month ago. 

Exercise 79. 

Avocat, m. barrister ; Gargon, m. boy ; Mis, from mettre, put on ; 

Cela, ceci, that, this; Hier, yesterday; Plant-er, 1. to plant ; 

Dit, told, said i Jouruee, f. day ; Poirier, m. pear-tree ; 

Etudi-er, 1. to study ; Iai, from lire, read; Soulier, m. shoe; 

Gant, m. glove ; Ministre, m. minister ; Vu, from voir, seen. 

1. Qui vous a dit cela ? 2. L'avocat me I'a dit. 3, Lui avez-vous 
parle de cette affaire ? 4. Je ne lui en ai pas encore parle. 5. L' avez- 
vous vu dernierement ? 6. Je I'ai vu, il y a quelques jours. 7. N'avez- 
V0U3 pas ecrit hier ? 8. Nous avons lu et ecrit toute la journee. 
[L. 2G, (9.)] 9. N'avez-vous pas ote vos gants et vos souliers ? 10. Je 
n'ai pas ote mes gants, mais j'al 6t^ mon chapeau. 11. Le tailleur 
n'a-t-il pas mis son chapeau ? 12. Oui, monsieur ; il a mis son cha- 
peau. 13. Qu'avez-vous fait h. ee petit garcon ? 14. Je ne lui ai rien 
fait. 15. iSTe lui avez-vous point dit que je suis ici ? 16. Je ne le lui 
ai pas encore dit. 17. Qu'avez-vous etudie ce matin ? 18. Nous avona 
etudie nos lecons, et nous avons lu nos livres. 19. Le jardinier du mi- 
nistre a-t-il plante le poirier ? 20. II I'a plante, il y a plus de huit jours. 
21. Avez-vous achete un habit de drap noir ? 22. J'en ai achete un. 
23. L' avez-vous porte aujourd'hui? 24. Je ne I'ai pas encore porte. 
25. Nous avons mis nos souhers et nos bas ce matin. 

Exercise 80. 

1. Have you studied to-day ? 2. We have no time to study, we 
have read a page. 3. Have you not written to my brother? 4. I 
have not yet written to him. 5. Has not the German written to my 
mother? G. He has not yet written to her. 7. Have you told (d) 
my mother that I have taken (pris) this book ? 8. I have not yet 
seen your mother. 9. What have you done this morning ? 10. We 
have done nothing. 11. Have you taken off your coat ? 12. I have 



128 QTTAEANTE-DEUXIi&ME LEgOlT. 

not taken off my coat, it is too cold. 13. Has the bookseller ■writ- 
ten to your brother ? 14. He wrote to him, a long time ago, 15. Did 
lie write to him, a month ago ? 16. He wrote to him, more than a 
yeas ago. 17. Have you planted a pear-tree ? 18. We have planted 
several. 19. Is it too cold to {pour) plant trees? 20. It is too warm. 
21. 'What has the gardener done to your httle boy ? 22. He has done 
nothing to him. 23. Has any one done any thing to him ? 24. No 
one has done any thing to him. 25. Is any thing the matter with him? 
25. Nothing is the matter with him. 27. Has your father put on his 
black hat ? 28. No, sir ; he has not put on his black hat. 29. What 
has your brother said? 30. He has said nothing. 31. Has your 
sister told you that? 32. She told it me. 33. Did you not work 
yesterday ? 34. We did not work yesterday, we have nothing to do. 
35. Your little boy has done nothing to-day. 



LEgON XLII. LESSON XLII. 

THE PAST PARTICIPLE. [§ 134.] 

1. The past participle, which, in French, forms a part of every com- 
pound tense, [§ 45, (8)] is susceptible of changes in its termination. 

2. The student will find in the table of the terminations of the 
regular verbs [§ 60], the different changes which the past participle 
of those verbs undergoes. The feminine terminations of the past 
participle of the irregular verbs, will be found in the alphabetical 
table, § 62. 

3. The last letter of the feminine termination is always an e mute. 

4. The plural of a past participle not ending with an s is formed 
by the addition of that letter to the singular, masculine or feminine. 

5. The past participle, accompanied by the auxiliary avoir^ never 
agrees with the nominative or subject [§ 134, (3.)]. 

Les demoiselles ont chante. TJie young ladies sang. 

Ces messieurs ont lu toute la journee. Those gentlemen read the whole day. 

6. The participle past, having tire as its auxiliary, assumes in it3 
termination the gender and number of the subject, [§ 134, (2.)] 

Ma fille est arrivee ce matin. My daughter arrived this morning. 

Nos freres ne sent pas venus. Our brothers have not come. 

7. The participle, accompanied by the auxiliary avoir, agrees iu 
gender and number with its direct object or regime direct, [§ 2, (2.) 
§ 42, (4.)] when the object precedes it, [§ 134, (4.)] 



THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 129 

lies dameg que nous arona vues. The ladies whom we have seen. 
Les lettres que nous avons lues. T^ie letters which we have read. 

8. When the rtgime direct or objective (accusative) follows the 
participle, no agreement takes place, [§ 134, (5.)] 

Avez-vous vu les' dames? Have you seen the ladies f 

Avons-nous lu les lettres ? Have we read the letters ? 

9. A past participle never agrees with its regime indirect, or indi- 
rect object (dative or ablative), [§ 2, (3.) § 42, (5.)] 

Les dames a qui nous avons parle. The ladies to whom, we have spoken, 

10. The past participle used adjectively, that is, without an aux- 
iliary, follows the rule of the adjective, [§ 66, (3.) § 134, (1.)] 

Des livres bien imprimes. Well printed books. 

11. The participle, preceded by the relative pronoun en, remains 
invariable, although the en should relate to a feminine or plural 
noun, [§ 135, (7.)] 

Avez-vous apporte des plumes ? Save you brought pens f 

J'en ai apporte. / have brought some. 

12. The presence of en does not, however, prevent the agreement 
of the participle, when it is preceded by a direct regimen, [§ 135, 

Les plumes que j'en ai apportees. The pens which Ihave brought from it 

Kesume of Examples. 

Yos soeurs ont-elles ecrit ? Have your sisters written ? 

EUes n'ont pas encore ecrit. They have not yet ivritten. 

Les lettres que nous avons ecrites. The letters which we have written. 

Avez-vous ecrit vos lettres ? Have you written your letters ? 

Je les ai lues ; je les ai ecrites. Ihave read them ; Ihave written them, 

Les avez-vous apportees ? Have you brought them ? 

Je ne les ni pa« apportees. Ihave not brought them. 

Avez-vous appel3 ces dames? Have you called those ladies? 

Je ne les ai piis appelees. I have not called them. 

Qui avez-vous vu co matin ? Whom have you seen this morning t 

Nous avons vu ces demoiselles. We have seen those young ladies. 

Nous les avons vues. We have seen them. 

Nous ne leur avons pas parle. We have not spoken to them. 

Avez-vous des livres relies ? Have you bound books ? 

J'ai des livres broches. / have unbound (stitched, in paper 

covers,) books. 

Avez-vous achete des pommes? Have you bought apples? 

J'en ai achete. Ihave bought some. 

Nous en avons achete. We have bought some. 

No\ia les en avons persuade^. We have persuade them of it. 



"130 QUAE ANTE-DEUXIEME LEgON. 

EXEECISE 81. 

Achet-er, 1. to buy, Dit, from Dire, 4. ir. Marchand, m. merchant; 

[§49,(5.)] said; Mnsique, f. music ; 

Apport-er, 1. to bring ; Entend-re, 4. to hear ; Oubli-er, 1. io forget; 

Appel-er, ], io call, Examin-er, 1. to exam- Point, not, a stroDgef 

[§ 49, (4.)] ine ; negative than pas ; 

Broch-er, 1, to stitch; Expres, on purpose; Rec-evoir, 3. io receive; 

Bourse, f. purse ; Eleur, f. flower; Reli-er, 1. to bind; 

Cass-er, 1. io break; Gard-er, 1. to keep; Revenus, m. p. income; 

Commission, f. errand ; Gravure, f. engraving ; Tasse, f cup ; 

Ponn-er, 1. to give; Laiss-er, 1. to leave; Yu, from voir, 3. ir. seen. 

1. Nous avez-vous apporte nos habits ? 2. Nous ne les avons pas 
encore apportes. 3. Les avez-vous oublies ? 4. Nous ne les avona 
pas oublies, mais nous n'avons pas eu le temps de les apporter. 
6. Pourquoi n' avez-vous pas appele les marchands ? 6. Je les ai 
appeles, mais ils ne m'ont pas entendu, 7. Avez-vous entendu cette 
musique ? 8. Je I'ai entendue. 9. N'avez-vous pas vu les jolies 
fleurs que j'ai apportees? 10. Je les ai vues; d qui les avez-voii3 
donnees? 11. Je ne les ai donnees a. personne, je les ai gardeea 
pour vous. 12. Avez-vous bien examine ces gravures ? 13. Je les 
ai bien examinees. 14. Les avez-vous achetees ? 15. Je ne les ai 
point achetees. 16. N'avez-vous point re§u vos revenus? 17. Je 
ne les ai point encore recus. 18. La domestique a-t-elle casse ces 
lasses? 19. EUe les a cassees. 20. A-t-elle casse des tasses 
expres? 21. EUe n'en a pas casse expres. 22. Avez-vous achete 
des livres relies, ou broches ? 23. J'ai achete des hvres rehes. 
24. Nous avez-vous dit ces paroles? 25. Nous vous les avons dites, 
mais vous les avez oubliees. 26. Je n'ai pas oubhe votre com- 
mission. 

EXEECISE 82. 

1. Have you seen my cups? 2. I have not yet seen them. 
3, Have you brought me my books? 4. I have not forgotten 
them, I have left them at my brother's. 5. Has your mother called 
your sisters? 6. She has not called them. 7. Has the servant 
told you this news ? (nouvelle. ) 8. She has told me tliis news. 
9. She has told it me. 10. Have you not forgotten my errand? 

11. We have not forgotten it, we have forgotten your money. 

12. Where have you left your purse ? 13. We left it at the merchant's. 
14. Have you brought the beautiful (heUes) engravings which I saw at 
your bookseller's? 15. I have not seen them. 16. Has your mother 
bought them ? 17. She has bought books, but she has bought no 
engravings. 18. Has that Uttle girl broken my cups? 19. She has 
broken them on purpose. 20. Does that lady receive her income 



trSE OF THE AUXILIAKIES, 131 

every month ? 21. She receives it every six months. 22. Is the 
house winch you have bought large ? 23. I have bought no house* 
24. Did you receive a letter from your father yesterday ? 25. I re- 
received a letter from him, four days ago. 26. Have you spoken to 
those ladies ? 27. I have spoken to them. 28. Have you given 
them flowers ? 29. 1 have given them some (en). 30. Are the books 
which you have bought bound ? 31. No, sir ; they are in papar 
covers. 32. Have you examined that house ? 33. I have not ex- 
amined it. 34 Your brother (en) has examined several (plvsieurs). 



LEgON XLIII. LESSON XLHI. 

USE OF THE AFXILIAEIES (§ 46). 

1. The active verb, [§ 43, (2.) (3.)] that is, the verb which has or 
may have a direct regimen or object, always takes avoir as its aux- 
ihary [(§ 46, (l.)J 

Nous avons ecrit a notre banquier. We have written to our hanker. 

2. Most neuter verbs, ^ i. e,, verbs which cannot have a direct object, 
take also the auxiliary avoir. 

Nous avons couru, marche, parle. We have run, walked, spoken. 

3. The compound tenses of a few neuter verbs are, however, con- 
jugated with ttre : aller, to go ; arriver, to arrive ; entrer, to enter ^ 
to go in; rentrer, to go in again; tomber, to fall ; decoder, mourir, 
to die ; naitre, to he horn ; partir, to start ; venir, to come; parVenir, 
to succeed ; devenir, to hecome ; revenir, to return. 

A quelle heure etes-vous venu ? At what hour did you come f 
Je suis2 ne en France. J was horn in France. 

4. A few neuter verbs [see list § 46, (3.)] take avoir, when they 
express action, and etre, when they express situation. 

Yotre frere a-t-il sorti ce matin ? ffas your hrother gone out this morris 

ing ? i. e.. Has he been out ? 

Yotre frere est-il sorti ? ^ Has your brother gone out f i. e., Is he 

out now ? 

5. The past indefinite of the verb etre [4. ir.] (J^ai ete, &c.) is 

* "There are in French," says Girault Duvivier, "about COO neuter 
Verbs; and of these upwards of 550 take avoir." 

'^ Observe that when the person spoken of^ is living, the French use the 
present and not, the past of the auxihary, with the past participle of naitre, 
to he horn : Cette dame est nee en Angleterre. That lady (is) was horn in 
England. Mon frere est ne en France. My hrother (is) was born in France, 



132 QU AR AITTE-TROISIEME LEgON". 

used instead of the past indefinite of aUer (Je suis alU) ; when speak- 
ing of a place where one has been. 

Le medecin a ete a Paris. Tlie physician has been at Paris. 

J'ai ete a I'eglise ce matin. / went to church this morning. 

6. When, however, we are still in a given place, or on the road 
towards it, the expression, Je suis alU^ &c., is used. 

Le medecin est alle a Londres. The physician has gone to London, 

Yotre sceur est allee a I'eglise. Your sister has gone to church. 

Resume op Examples. 

Avez-vous ete au bal hier au soir? Did you go to the balllasi evening f 

Kous n'y avons pas ete. We did not go. 

Oh cette demoiselle a-t-elle ete ? Whither did that young lady go ? 

EUe a ete chez son frere, et chez She went to her hrother^s, and to our 

nous. house. 

Oh votre soeur est-elle allee ce Where is your sister gone this morn- 

matin ? ing 1 

EUe est allee trouver sa cousine. She has gone to her cousin. 

N'avez-vous pas sorti aujourd'hui ? Did you not go out to-day ? 

Je n'ai pas encore sorti. / have not yet teen out. 

Ou monsieur le general est-il ? Where is the general f 

Je ne sais pas, monsieur, il est sorti. / do not know, sir, he has gone out 

Ou ce monsieur est-il ne ? Where was that gentleman iorn ? 

n est ne a Paris ou a Lyon. Me was born in Paris or Lyons. 

Yotre niece a-t-elle ete voir son Did your niece go to see her brother f 

frere ? 

EUe a ete le voir hier. She went to see him yesterday {and 

is back). 

EUe est aUee lo voir hier. She went to see him yesterday {and is 

not back). 

ExEuciSE 83. 

Bijouterie, f, yeweZry ; Magou, m. mason ; Orfevre, m. goldsmith; 

Chapelier, m. hatter; Magasin, m. warehouse; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out; 

iite, {from etre, 4. ir.) Malade, sick; E,etourn-er, 1. to return; 

been ; Marehandise, f. m,erchan- 

Espagne, f. Spain ; dise ; Sort-ir. 2. ir. to go out; 

Horloger, m. watch-ma- Ne, ( /row Naitre, 4. ir.) Yenu, {from venir, 2. ir.) 

Jeer ; to be born; come. 

1. A quelle heure votre soeur est-elle venue ? 2. Elle est venue 
^ huit heures moins un quart. 3. Ces demoiselles sont-elles nees ^ 
Eouen, ou a Caen ? 4. Elles ne sont nees ni a Rouen ni a Caen, 
eUes sont nees a Strasbourg. 5. L'horloger est-il chez lui ? 6. Non, 
monsieur : il est alle a son marasin. 7. A-t-il ete a Paris cetta 
annee ? 8. Qui, madame ; il y a ete. 9. Y a-t-il achete des marchan- 
dises? 10. II 7 a achete de la bijouterie. 11. Avez-vous ete trouver 
mon pere? 12. J'ai ete le trouver. 13. Yotre chapelier a-t-il sorti 
aujourd'hui ? 14. II n'a pas sorti, n est malade. 15. Le magon eslnil 



MKN"ER, PORTER, AMENER, ETC. 133 

^ la maison? 16. ISTon, madame ; il est sorti. 17. Quand est-il 
sorti ? 18. II est sorti il y a une heure. 19. Votre chapelier est-il 
arrive aujourd'hui, ou hier ? 20. II est arrive liier, a quatre heures 
du matin. 21. Notre tailleur a-t-il ete voir son pere aujourd'hui? 
22. II est parti pour Lyon. 23. L'orfevre de mon cousin n'est-il pas 
parti pour I'Espagne ? 24. Non, monsieur; il est retourne en Alie- 
magne. 25. Ma soeur a ^te a I'eglise ce matin, et elle est allee a 
Vecole, il y a une demi-lieure. 

Exercise 84. 
1. Is the physician at home ? 2. No, sir ; he is not at home ; he 
is out. 3. Have you been out this morning ? 4. No, sir ; X have not 
been out; I am sick. 5. Is your sister's little girl out ? 6. Yes, sir; 
she is out, she is at my brother's. 7. At what hour did the .hatter 
arrive ? 8. He arrived last evening at nine. 9. Did the jeweller go 
to Paris, or to Lyons this year? 10. He went to Paris six months 
ago, but he is back {de retour). 11. Did you go to my brother, or to 
my sister ? 12. I have not had time to go to them. 13. Where 
was that gentleman born ? 14. He was born in England, in Exeter, 
or in Portsmouth. 15. Was not your sister born in Paris? 16. No, 
sir ; she was born in Madrid, in Spain. 17. Did you tell me that 
your brother has bought a good house ? 18. He has bought a very 
good house, in London. 19. Do you know at what time the watch- 
maker arrived ? 20. He arrived this morning, at a quarter 'Dtfore 
five. 21. Has he brought much jewelry ? 22. He has not brought 
much jewelry, but he has brought many watches (montre, f.) 23. Has 
he been in Prance, or in Germany ? 24. He has been in France, iu 
Germany, and in Switzerland (Suisse). 25. Is your sister in (d ta 
maison), sir? 26. No, sir; she is out, she has gone to church. 
27. Did she go to school yesterday? 28. She went to school, and 
to church. 29. Is she there now? 30. No sir; she is back. 
31. Has the hatter arrived ? 32, Yes, sir; he has arrived. 33. "When 
did he arrive ? 34. He arrived yesterday, at nine o'clock in th® 
morning. 



LEgON XLIY. LESSON XLIY. 

MENER, PORTER, AMENER. APPORTER, ETC. 

1. Comhien de temps corresponds with the English expressiott 
Jiow long. 

Combien de temps avez-vous de- Eow long did you live. iit. JSaly t 
meur^ eu Italia ? 



134 QUABANTE-QTTATEIEMB LEgON. 

2. Comhien de fois answers to the English, how often, how many 
times. 

Combien de fois y avez-vous ete ? How many times have you been there t 

3. Jusqu^ou is used for how far, what distance, etc. 
Jusqu'ou avez-vous ete ? How far have you leen ? 

4. Jusqu'd quelle heure (till what hour,) means also, haw late, 

Jusqu'a quelle heure avez-vous at- How late did you wait f 
tendu? 

5. D'ou means whence; par ou, which way, in what direction, 

J 

Woh venez-vous mon ami? Wlience do you come, my friend f 

Par oh votre ami est-il alle ? Which way did your friend go t 

6. Mener [§ 49.], porter, to take, to carry ; amener, apporter, io 
"bring, to take with one ; emmener, emporter, to take, to carry away. 
"We use mener, amener, emmener, for to take, to bring, to take away, 
in the sense of conducting, leading, guiding, on foot or in a vehicle. 
Porter, apporter, emporter, mean to carry, to hear, to carry away, etc. 

Menez votre soeur a recole. Take your sister to school. 

Portez ce livre a votre soeur. Take this hook to your sister. 

RiisuMB OP Examples. 

Jusqu'oil votre frere est-il alia ? How far has your brother gone ? 

II est alle jusqu'a Paris, He has gone as far as Paris. 

Combiea de temps va-t-U y rester ? How long is he going io stay there ? 

II va y rester jusqu'au printemps. He is going to stay there until spring. 

Combien de temps avez-vous de- How long did you live in London ? 

meure a Londres ? 

Nous y avons demeure six ans. We lived there six years. 

Jusqu'oil avez-vous ete ? How far dcd you go ? 

Nous avons ete jusqu'aux Champs We went as far as the Champs -My- 

Ely sees. sees. 

Jusqaa quelle heure avez-vous How late did you write f 

ecrit ? 

J'ai ecrit jusqu'a minuit. Iiurote until midnight. 

D'ouces Allemandes viennent-elles ? Whence come those German ladies f 

EUes viennent d'Aix-la-ChapeUe. Tliey come from Aix-la- Ghapdle. 

Par ou sont-elles venues ? Which way did they come ? 

Elles sont venues par Bruxelles. Tliey came by Brussels. 

Menez- vous cette petite fille a Bo you take {lead) thai -little girl to 

I'ecole? school? 

Jo ne I'y mene pas, je I'y porte, elle / do not lead her there, I carry her 

est trop petite pour marcher. there, she is too small to walk. 

Amenez-vous vos eufants? Do you bring your children ? 

Portez-vous une lettre a la poste? Bo you take a letter to the post-office? 

J'emmene mon cheval, j'emporte I take away my horse, I take away 

ma montre. my watch. 



MEIS-EE, POETEE, AMEXEE, ETC. 135 

Exercise 85. 

Bruit, ra, noise; Ici, here; Pied, m.foot; 

prap, m. doth; Loin, far ; Quitt-cr, 1. to have; 

Eleve, m. pupil; Magnifique, magnificent ; Soieries, f. p. silJc goods , 

Tils, m. son ; Midi, noon ; Voiture, carriage ; 

Fin, c, fine; Nouvellc, f. news ; Yojageur, in. traveller; 

1. Le jeune homme est-Il alle loin ? 2. II n'est pas alle bien loin, 
il n'est alle que jusqu'u Paris. 3. Yos enfants font trop de bruit, 
pourquoi ne les emmenez-YOus pas ? 4. lis sont malades, ils ne peu- 
vent marcher. 5. Comment les avez-vous amenes ici ? 6. Je les ai 
amenes* en voiture. 7. A quelle heure amenez-vous le medecin ? 

8. Je I'amene tous les jours a midi. 9. Combien de foiapar jour 
menez-vous vos eleves a I'eglise ? 10. Je les mene a I'eglise deux 
fois par jour. 11. Combien de fois y avez-vous ^te ? 12. J'y ai ete 
plusieurs fois. 13. Par oii ces voyageurs sont-ils venus ? 14. lis 
sont venus par Amiens et par Rouen. 15. D'ou apportez-vous cette 
nouveUe? IG, Je I'apporte de Cologne. 17. D'ou avez-vous amene 
ces superbes chevaux ? 18. Je les ai amenes d' Angleterre. 19. Si 
vous quittez la Prance, avez-vous I'intention d'emmener votre fiis ? 
20. J'ai I'intention de I'emmener. 21. Qu'avez-vous apporte de 
Prance ? 22. Nous avons apporte de magnifiques soieries, des draps 
fins, et des chapeaux de Lyon. 23. Avez-vous amene votre fille a 
pied ou a cheval ? 24. Je I'ai amenee en voiture. 25. Yos freres 
nous ont apporte des livres. 

Exercise 86. 

1. How long did your son live in London ? 2. He lived there 
ten years. 3. How far has the physician gone ? 4. The physician 
has gone as far as Cologne. 5. Has he taken his son with him ? 
6. He ha? not taken him. 7. How have you brought your two lit- 
tle girls? 8. I brought one in a carriage, and I carried the other. 

9. Is she too little to walk ? 10. She is not too small to walk, but 
she is sick. 11. Have you brought your horse? 12. We have brought 
two horses. 13. Have you brought the books which you have pro- 
mised me (^romis) f 14. I have forgotten to bring them. 15. Has 
that lady brought her eldest (ainej son ? 16. She has brought all 
her children. 17. How did they come? 18. They came in a 
carriage. 19. Which way did your brother come from G-ermany ? 
20. He came by Aix-la-Chapelle and Brussels. 21. Do you intend 
to take your son to school this afternoon ? 22. I" do not intend 
to take him there, it is too cold. 23. Is that child too sick to walk? 
24. He is too sick to walk, and I intend to carry him. 25. Why do 



136 QUARAKTE-CINQUlijME LEgOK. 

you not take him in a carriage ? 26. My brother has taken my 
horse a^vay. 27. Have you brought the physician ? 28. I have not 
brought him, no one is sick at our house. 29. Will you take this 
book to church? SO. I have another, I do not want it. 31. Have 
you taken my letter to the post-office ? 32. I have forgotten it. 
33. How late did you write ? 34. I wrote until midnight (minuit), 
35. Whence do your sisters come ? 36. They come from Paris. 



LEgON XLY. LESSOiSr XLY-. 

AUXILIABY A2a) PAETICIPLE Or REFLECTIVE AND ITNIPEB- 
SOXAL YEKBS. 

1. The reflective or pronominal verb always takes tire as its aux- 
niary [§ 46, (2), 2.] 

Yotre cousin s'est proniene. Tour corisin has taken a walk. 

K'os amis se sent flattes. Our friends havefiatiered themselves. 

2. Although the past participle of a reflective verb be conjugated 
with eire, it agrees with its direct regimen, when that regimen pre- 
cedes it, and is invariable when the regimen follows it. The student 
ehould be careful to see, if the reflective pronoun be a direct, or an 
indirect regimen [§ 135.] 

Tous V0U3 etes flattees, Mesdemoi- You have flattered yourselves, young 

seUes. ladies. 

Ellea se sent donne la main. They have given (to) each other th& 

hand. 

It will be easily perceived that se, in the first sentence, is a direct 
regimen, and that the same word, in the second, represents an indi- 
rect object. 

3. Yerbs essentially unipersonal, i. e. , verbs which cannot be con-i 
jugated otherwise, take avoir as an auxiliary. 

H a plu, 11 a neige, il a gele. It rained, it snowed, it froze. 

4. Yerbs occasionally unipersonal, take ttre as an auxihary. 

D lui est arrive un malheur. A misfortune has happened to Mrrk 

5. Faire [4. ir.] used unipersonaUy, and y avoir, to he there, take 
the auxiliary avoir. 

A-t-il fait beau temps le mois passe ? Was it fine weather last month f 
Y a-t-il eu beaucoup de monde ? Ware there many people ther« ? 



KEPLECTIVE AND UNIPEESONAL VEEBS. 13Y 

6. The past participle of a unipersonal verb is always invariable 
[§ 135, (6.)] 
Les pluies qu'il y a eu cet ete. The rains which we have had this 



Resume of Examples. 

Les Italiennes se sont-elles prome- Did the Italian ladies take a walk ? 

nees ? 

Oui, monsieur ; elles se sont prome- Yes, sir ; they have taken a walk. 

nees. 

Kous nous sommes aper9us de cela. We perceived that. 

Votre mere s'est-elle bien portee ? Has your mother been well f 

Vos soeurs se sont-elles assises ? Did your sisters sit down ? 

Cette marchaudise s'est-elle bien Did that merchandise sell well 7 

vendue ? 

Yos enfants se sont-Us appliques a Did your children apply to study f 

Tetude? 

lis s'y sont appliques. Tfiey applied to it. 

Nous nous soiumes donne de la We gave (to) ourselves trouble. 

peine. [§135, (1.)] 

Quel temps a-t-il fait ce matin ? Wnat xoeather was it this morningf 

N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps ? Was it not fine iveather ? 

Quel malheur est-il arrive ? Wiat misfortmie has happened f 

Vous est-il arrive quelque chose? Has any thing happened to you f 

II ne m'est rien arrive. Nothing has happened to me. 

Exercise 87. 

Acier, m. s^eeZ; S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to Plu, /row pleuvoir, razwecf; 

S'adress-er, 1. ref. to ap- sit down; Plume, f. pen ; 

ply {to a person or S'emiuy-er, 1. pec. [§ Se port-er, 1. ref. to be 

■ place) ; 49.] to grow weary ; or do ; 

S'aperc-evoir, 3. ref. to Grel-er, 1. pec. to hail; Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be 

perceive; HoUaudais, e, Dutch; mistaken; 

S'appliqu-er, 1. to apply Neig-er, 1. pec. to snow ; Sa serv-ir. 2. ir. ref. to use; 

(to a thing) ; Peine, f. trouble ; Se vend-ro, 4. ref. to sell. 

1. A qui vos soeurs se sont-elles adressees ? 2. Elles se sont 
adressees a moi. 3. Ne se sont-elles pas trompees? [L. 38, 1.] 
4. Elles se sont trompees. 5. Vous etes-vous apercu de votre 
erreur? 6. Je ne m'en suis pas aper§u. 7. Yous etes-vous ennuyea 
Sb la oampagne ? 8. Nous nous y sommes ennuyes. [L. 38, 4.] 
9. Ces demoiselles se sont-elles ennuj^ees chez vous ? 10. Elles s'y 
sont ennuyees. 11. De quoi vous etes-vous servie pour ecrire, 
mademoiselle? [L. 39, 2.] 12. Je me suis servie d'une plume d'or. 

13. Ces ecolieres ne so sont-elles pas servies de plumes d'acier? 

14. Elles se sont servies de plumes d'argent. 15. La Hollandaise 
s'est-elle assise ? 16. Elle ne s'est point assise. 17. Lui est-il arrive 
uu malheur ? 18. II ne lui est rien arrive, elle ne se porte pas tres 
bien. 19. Ncn s'est-elle pas donne [§ 135, (1.)] de la peine pour rien ? 



158 quaeante-sixiIjme LEgom 

20. Cette sole ne s'est-elle pas bien vendue ? 21. Elle s'est tr^g 
bien vendue. 22. N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps toute la journee ? 
23. Non, monsieur ; il a plu/ il a neige et il a grele. 24. N'est-il rien 
arrive aux deux dames que nous avons vues ce matin ? 25. Non, 
madame ; il ne leur est rien arrive. 

Exercise 88. 
1. Has it rained to-day ? 2. It has not rained, but it has hailei 
and snowed. 3. Has any thing happened to your little boy? 
4. Nothing has happened to him, but he is sick to-day. 5. Did your 
sister sit down at your house? 6. She did not sit down, she was 
sick. 7. Did that cloth sell well ? 8. It sold well, we have sold 
it alL 9. Did you perceive your error (erreur) ? 10. We perceived 
it. 11. Were not your sisters mistaken in tliis affair ? 12. They 
were not mistaken. 13. Were not your cousins weary of being 
in the country ? 14. They were weary of being at my brother's. 
15. What have you used, to write your exercises ? 16. I used a gold 
pen, and my brother used a silver pen. 17. Have you used my pen- 
knife (canif) ? 18. I have used it. 19. What has happened to you ? 
20. jSTothing has happened to me. 21. Has your mother been well? 
22. She has not been well. 23. Did your brothers apply to their 
studies, at school ? 24. They apphed to their studies, and have fin- 
ished their lessons. 25. What weather was it this morning ? 2G. It 
was very fine weather. 27. Has your sister taken much trouble in 
this affair ? 28. She has taken much trouble for nothing. 29. Did 
the Dutch ladies walk ? 30. They walked this morning. 31. How 
far did they walk ? 32. They walked as far as your brother's. 

33. Did you shake hands ? (have you given each other the hand ?) 

34. We shook hands. 35. Those ladies flattered themselves very 
much (beaucou^). 



LEgON XLYI. LESSON XLVI. 

THE PASSIVE VERB. (§ 54.) 

1. The passive verb is conjugated by adding to the verb ttre, in all 
its tenses, the past participle of an active verb. See model, § 54. 

2. This participle must agree in gender and number with the sub- 
ject [i 134, (2.) L. 42, U. G.] 

^ This sentence might be written: Il a ^lu, neige, et grele. See Lesson 
87, Eule 2. 



THE PASSIVE VERB. tB9 

Qes vieillards sont respectes. UTiose old men are respected. 

Ces enfatits sont aimes de tout le Those children are loved by every- 
moude. body. 

3. The genius of the French language seems to prefer the active 
to the passive voice. Many expressions, wliich are in the passive in 
English, are accordingly rendered into French by the active or re- 
fiective [§ 128, (5.) § 113, (1.)]. 

Cetto maison est a louer ou a vendre. 77iai house is to he let or sold. 

Ma soeur est a plaindre. 3Iy sister is to be pitied. 

Get homme est a craindre. That man is to be feared. 

Cet homme s'appelle H. [L. 36, R. 2.] That man is called R. 

Get homme se trompe. [L. 38, R. 2.] That man is mistaken. 

On dit que cela est ainsi. [L. 35, R. 2.] Jt is said that it is so. 

On nous a dit cela. [L. 35, R. 2.] We have been told that. 

4. In answer to a question [see L. 24, E. 12], the pronoun le cor- 
responds in signification with the English word 50, or it, expressed 
or understood. Le refers then to a noun not determined (not preceded 
by an article or a possessive adjective), to an adjective, to a verb or 
even to a whole sentence. 

Ces enfaiits sont-ils aimes? Are those children loved t 

lis ne le sont pas. They are not (so). 

Ces demoiselles sont-elles soeurs ? Are those young ladies sisters f 

Elles ne le sont pas. They are not. 

5. When le refers to a determined noun, it often corresponds in 
signification to the pronoun he, she, or they, which may or may not be 
expressed in the English sentence. Le must then assume the gender 
and number of the noun to which it refers. 

£tes-vous la sceur do mon ami? Are you the sister of my friend? 
Je la suis. / am (she). 



Resume of Examples. 

Leur conduite est-elle approuvee ? Is their conduct approved ? 

Elle n'est approuv^s de personne. It is approved by nobody. 

Cette dame est-elle estimee et res- Is that lady esteemed and respected 7 

pectee ? 

Elle n'est ni estimee ni respectee. She is neither esteemed nor respected, 

Ces marchandises sont a vendre. Tliose goods are to be sold {for sale). 

Ces enfants sont a plaindre. Those children are to be pitied. 

A-t-on dit quelque chose a mon frere? Ho^s anything been said to my brother? 

On ne lui a rien dit. Nothing has been said to him. 

Savez-vous comment cela s'appelle ? Do you know hovj that is called f 

Madame, etes-vous maitresse ici? Madame, are you mistress heref 

Je ne le suis pas. Monsieur. I am not (so\ sir. 

£tcs-vous la maitresse de la maison ? Are you the mistress of the house t 

Je la suis, / am (she). 



140 qxjaean"te-sixieme legok. 

Exercise 89. 

S'appel-er, 1. pec. to le Croi-re, 4. ir. to believe; Pun-ir, 2. to punish, 

called [§ 49, (4.)] ; jficolier, m. scholar ; Earement, seldom ; 

Auteur, m. author ; Jardin, m. garden ; 
Blam-er, 1. to blame; Lou-er^ 1. to let, to praise; Souvent, often; 
Car, /or; Mere, t mother ; Us-er, 

Conduite, Z condixi ; Paresseux, se,idle; Y end-re, 4.. to sell; 

1. Yotre mere est-elle aimee de sa soeur ? 2. Elle est aimee de 
son frere et de sa soeur. 3. Les Italiens sont-ils aimes des Frangais ? 
4. Yos ecoliers ne sont-ils pas blames ? 5. lis sont blames quelque- 
fois. 6. Sont-ils souvent punis ? 7. lis sont rarement punis. 8. Par 
qui etes-vous puni, quand vous etes paresseux ? 9. Je ne suis jamais 
puni. 10. Sa conduite a-t-elle ete approuvee ? 11. Elle a ete ap- 
prouvee de tout le monde. 12. Elle a ete approuvee par^ ses amis. 
13. Get auteur est-il estime ? 14. II est estime de tout le monde. 
15. Le jardin du relieur est-il a vendre ou a louer? 16. On dit 
qu'il est a louer. 17. Le menuisier a-t-il fait faire un habit? 18. H 
en a fait faire deux. 19. Les habits que vous avez achetes sont-ils 
uses {worn out) ? 20. lis sont uses, j'en ai fait faire d'autres. 21. Dit- 
on que nos amis sont aimes de tout le monde ? 22. On ne le dit pas, 
car on ne le croit pas. 23. Les dames que nous avons vues h 
I'eglise hier au soir, sont-elles soeurs ? 24. EUes ne le sont pas, on 
dit qu'elles sont cousines. 25. On dit que I'ofl&cier que vient d'ar- 
river s'appelle S. 

Exercise 90. 

1. Are you blamed or praised? 2. I am neither blamed nor 
praised. 3. Is not your cousin esteemed by every body ? 4. She is 
esteemed by nobody. 5. What has been said of my brother ? 6. Noth- 
ing has been said of him. 7. Do you know if your brother's house 
is to be let ? 8. I have been told {on m'a dit) that it is to be sold. 
9. Is not an idle person to be pitied ? 10. The idle man is to be 
pitied. 11. Is your son sometimes punished at school ? 12. He ia 
always punished when he is idle. 13. Are your scholars praised, 
when they are diligent {diligent) ? 14. They are praised, v/hen they 
are diligent, and they are blamed when they are idle. 15. Is that 
lady esteemed and respected ? 16. She is loved, esteemed, and re- 
spected by every body . 17. What has been told you ? 18. We have 
been told that your brother is respected by every body. 19. Madam, 
are you Mr. S.'s sister ? 20. No, sir ; I am not. 21. Madam, are 

^ The prepositions de and ^ar are used indifierently after many passive 
verba 



S'eN ALLEE, ifilTEij, ETC. 141 

you pleased with your son's conduct ? 22. No, sir ; I am not, for he 
Is blamed by every body. 23. How is that large {gros) man called ? 
24. It is said that he is called H. 25. What is your brother's name? 
26. He is called James. 27. Have you been told that my brother 
has arrived? 28. We have been told so. 29. Are the goods which 
your brother has brought, for sale? 30. They are not for sale. 
31. Has the bookbinder had a coat made ? 32. He has had a coat 
made. 33. Is his other coat worn out? 34. The coat which he 
bought last year is worn out. 



LEgON XLYII. LESSON XLVII. 

s'eN ALLEE, £tEE, ETC. 

1. In the compound tenses of the verb s'en aller, to go away^ 
[L. 40. 1, 2], the pronoun en will of course keep its general place, 
after the other pronouns and hefore the auxiliary. It must never 
come between the auxiliary and the participle. 

Je m'en suis alle, I went away ; "Sous, nous eu We went away ; 

sommes alles, 

Tu t'en es alle, Tliou didst go Yous vous en etes You went away ; 

away ; • alles, 

II s'en est alle, He went away ; Bs s'en sont aUes, TJiey went away. 

Les dames s'en sont allees. The ladies have gone away. 

Les messieurs s'en sont alles. The gentlemen have gone away, 

2. The verb aller when referring to articles of dress answers to the 
English, to fit, to sit. 

Men habit va bien. My coatfiis or sits well. 

3. Seoir, [3. ir. see table § 62.] answers to the English, to suit, to 
hecome. 

Ce chapeau ne vous sied point. That hat does not become you. 

4. Essay er, (§ 49.) corresponds in signification to the EngHsh,io 
{ry on. 

J'ai essaye mon gilet, il ne me va / have tried my waiscoat, it does not 
pas bien. fit me well 

5. JEtre is often used in French for appartenir, to belong, [§ 106, (3.)] 

..,,,. o { ^0 whom does that house belong f 

A qui est cette maison ? | ^^^^^^ ^^^^^ -^ ^^^^j, 

EUe est a mon cousin. It is my cousin's. 



u% 



QU AE ANTE-SEPTIEME LEgOlT. 



Resume of Examples. 



A quelle heure voua en etes-vous 

alie ? 
Je m'en suis alle a neuf heures. 
Vous en etes-vous allees trop tot, 

mesdames ? 
Kous nous en sommes allees trop 

tard. 
Cette robe vous va-t-elle bien ? 
Elle ne me va pas bien. 
Cet habit vous sied-il fort bien? 
Je I'ai essaye, mais il ne me va pas 

bien. 
H va bien a mon frere. 
II me gene, il me serre trop. 
Cette robe ne lui va pas bien. 
Ces livres sont-ils a vous, ou a moi ? 
lis ne sont ni a moi ni a vous. 
A qui sont-ils done ? 
Les livres de qui avez-vous apportes ? 
J'ai apporte ceux de mon frere. 



At what hour did you go away f 

I went away at nine o'' clock. 

Did you go away too soon, ladies ? 

We went away too late. 

Does that dress fit you well t 

It does not fit me well. 

Does that coat become you very wttlf 

I have tried it on, hut it does not fit 

me well. 
It fits my brother icell. 
It hurts me, it presses me too much. 
TJiat dress does not fit her ivell. 
Are those books yours, or mine f 
TJiey belong neither to Tne nor to you. 
Whose are they then ? 
Whose books have you brought ? 
I have brought my brother^s. 



Beau-frere, m. brother- 
in-law ; 
Botte, f. boot; 
Clair, e, light; 
Couleur, f. color; 
Court, Bf^hort 



EXEBCISE 91. 

£troit, e, narrow, tight; Lire, 4. ir, to read; 



Fonce, e, dark, 
Gen-er, 1. to hurt, 



Gilet, m. waistcoat; 
Grand, e, large ; 



Q>om-^a.grLQ,t companion; Large, wide 



Mieux, better _ 
to Neuf, ve, new ; 
Oil, where; 
Serr-er, 1. to press ; 
Ten-ir, 2. ir. to hold; 
Vers, towards, about. 



1. Vos bottes ne vont-elles pas bien ? 2. Elles ne me vent pas 
bien, elles me serrent trop. 3. Sont-elles trop etroites? 4. Elles 
Bont trop etroites et trop courtes, elles me genent. 5. Le cordonnier 
s'en est-il alle ? 6. II ne s'en est pas encore alle. 7. A quelle heure 
les compagnes de votre soeur s'en sont-elles allees ? 8. Elles s'en 
sont allees vers six heures de I'apres-midi. 9. L'habit que vous 
tenez, est-il a vous ou a votre frere ? 10. II n'est ni a lui ni a moi, 
il est a mon beau-frere. 11. Lui va-t-il bien? 12. II lui va fort bien, 
et il lui sied bien. 13. Ou. I'a-t-il fait faire ? 14. II I'a fait faire en 
France ou en AUemagne. 15. A qui sont les livres que Ut made^ 
moiselle votre sceur ? 16. lis sont a moi. 17. Votre gilet va-t-il 
mieux que celui de votre beau-frere ? 18. II me va beaucoup mieux. 
19. Votre habit ne vous gene-t-il pas ? 20. II ne saurait {cannot) 
me gener, il est de beaucoup trop large. 21. Avez-vous essaye votre 
habit neuf? 22. Je I'ai essaye, mais la couleur ne me sied pas. 
23. Est-elle trop claire ? 24. Elle est trop foncee. 25. Les couleura 
foncees ne me sieent jamais. 



falloie, btc. 143 

Exercise 92. 
1. Have your friends gone away ? 2. They have not gone away, 
they are still here. 3. At what hour did your mother go away? 
4. She went away early this morning. 5. Did your little sister go 
away late ? 6. She went away too soon. 7. Does your sister's new 
dress become her? 8. It does not become her. 9. Why does it 
not become her ? 10. Dark colors never become her. 11. Do light 
colors become your brother's wife ? 12. They become her very 
well. 13. Are your new boots too narrow, or too wide ? 14. They 
are neither too narrow nor too wide, they fit very well. 15. Does 
your brother's waistcoat fit him? IG. It fits him, but it does not 
become him. 17. Light colors never become him. 18. Does 
your coat press you ? 19. It does not press me, it is by far too 
wide. 20. Whose house is that? 21. It is my father's and 
brother's. 22. Whose bookshave you brought this morning ? 23. 1 have 
brought my brother's and sister's. 24. Whose dresses are those ? 
25. They are my mother's, my sister's, and my cousin's. 26. Are 
not those G erman books yours ? 27. They are not mine, they are 
my friend's. 28. Are those pens yours or mine? 29. They are 
neither yours nor mine, they are my brother's. 30. Does this hat 
fit you well ? 31. Yes, sir ; it fits me well, but it does not become 
me. 32. Is your hat too small ? 33. It is too large. 34. Are your 
gloves too large ? 25. They are too small, I cannot put them on. 



LEgON" XLYIII. LESSON XLYIII. 

FALLOIR, TO BE NECESSARY^ ETC. 

1. The verb falloir [3. ir.], to he necessary, is always conjugated 
unipersonally. See table, § 62, page 364. 

II faut, il a fallu. Jt is necessary, it was or has been ne^ 

cessary. 
II faut etudier tous las jours. Jt is necessary to study every day. 

2. As falloir has always a unipersonal pronoun for its nominative 
or subject, a pronoun in the indirect regimen (dative — we, te, lui, 
nous, vous, leur,) placed before the verb, will be equivalent to the 
pronoun used as nominative to the English verbs must, io be 
obliged, etc. 

II me faut ecrire un th^me. I must write an exercise. 

Oh. nous faut-il aller? Where must we go ? 



144 QUAEANTE-HUITIEME LEgON. 

3. Falloir is used in the signification of to want, to need, to he 
under the necessity of having. 

II me faut un livre.^ I need a hook. 

11 lui faut de I'argent. Me is in want of money. 

4. Wlien must is used in the last acceptation, and has a noun as 
its nominative, the noun in the corresponding French sentence 
should be in the 'indirect regimen preceded by d. 

II faut un livre a ma soeur. My. sister must have a book {needs a 

book). 

Resume of Examples. 

jPour apprendre une langue, 11 faut To learn a language, it is necessary to 

etudier. study. 

11 fliut aller a I'eglise et a recole. It is necessary to go to church and to 

school. 

II faut Tester a la maison. It is necessary to remain at home, 

11 me faut lire un bon livre. Imv^t read a good book. 

II lui faut aller voir sa mere. She must go and see her mother. 

Que nous faut-U faire ? What must we do ? 

Que leur faut-il lire ? What must they read f 

Que leur faut-U ? . What do they want or needf 

II leur faut de I'argent ou du credit. Tliey must have money or credit. 

Yous faut-il cinquante francs? Do you want Jifty francs ? 

II me faut cinquante-cinq francs. I must have or I need Jifty-Jive francs. 

Combien d'argent faut-il a votre How much money dioes your father 

pere ? want ? 

II lui en faut beaucoup. He wants much (of it). 

Nous avons ce qu'il [R. 3.] nous faut. We have what we want. 

Exercise 93. 

Aller trouver, to go to a Davantage, more; Fort, very, very much; 

person ; Desir-er, 1. to wish, de- Modiste, milliner ; 

Cliirurgien, m. surgeon ; sire ; Ouvrage, m. work; 

Centime, m. lOO^/i of a Dette, f debt; Paj^er, 1. pec. [§ 49,(2.)], 

franc'; Envoy-er, 1. ir. [§ 49, to pay ; 

Combien, how much, (2.)], to send; Peine, f trouble; 

how many f Pin-ir, 2. to finish; Quand, when. 

1. Que faut-il faire aujourd'hui? 2. Aujourd'hui, il faut travailler. 
3. A-t-il fallu travailler fort, pour finir 1' ouvrage a temps ? 4. II a 
fallu travailler toute la journee. 5. Quand nous faut-il ecrire a notre 
ami ? 6. II faut lui ecrire aujourd'hui. 7. Me faut-il aller trouver 
mon pere ? 8. II vous faut aller le trouver, il desire vous parler. 
9. A-t-il besoin de quelque chose ? 10. II lui faut des livres, des plumes, 
et de I'encre. 11. Ne lui faut-il pas aussi de I'argent V 12. II lui en 
faut beaucoup pour payer ses dettes. 13. Yous faut-il encore quelque 
chose? 14. II ne me faut plus rien, j'ai tout ce qu'il me faut. 15. ISTe 

1 Another construction of these sentences wHl be found Lesson 22, 1, 2, 



SEOIE, CONVENIE, VALOIE, ETC, 145 

faut-il pas du papier a, votre soeur ? 16. II ne lui en faut pas da- 
vantage.^ 17. Que faut-il envoy er au chirurgien? 18. II faut lui 
envoyer de I'argent, il en a grand besoin. 19. La modiste a-t-elle 
tout ce qu'il lui faut? 20. Elle n'a pas tout ce qu il lui faut. 21. Com- 
bien vous faut-il ? 22. II me faut cinq francs. 23. ISTe vous faut-il 
pas davantage ? 24. II ne me faut pas davantage. 25. Que lui faut- 
il pour sa peine ? 26. II demande un franc vingt-cinq centimes. 

EXEECISE 94. 

1. "What must we do ? 2. You must bring your book and learn 
your lesson. 3. Is it necessary to write to your brother to-day ? 4. It 
is not necessary to write to him. 5. Has it been necessary to speak 
to your father ? 6. It has been necessary to speak to him. 7. Is it 
necessary to go to D. to-day ? 8. It is necessary to go there ( y). 
9. Must I go to your sister ? 10. You must go to*her, she wishes to 
speak to you. 11. How much money must your brother have? 
12. He must have ten francs fifty centimes. 13. How many books 
does your sister want ? 14. She must have many books, she reads 
(lit) much. 15. What will you send to the surgeon? 16. We must 
Bend him our horse; his own (le sien) is sick. 17. Must he not have 
paper? 18. He must have some ] he has letters to write. 19. Must 
he have much? 20. He must have a quire (main^ f). 21. Do you 
want any thing more ? {See No. 13, in the French exercise above.) 
22. I need something more. 23. I need nothing more. 24. Must 
you have one hundred francs ? 25. 1 must have ten dollars. 26. What 
does the surgeon want ? 27. He must have money, to (pour) pay 
his debts. 28. Has the tailor all that he wants ? 29. He has not all 
that he wants. 30. The milhner has received all that she wants. 
31. What must you have for your trouble ? 32. How much do you 
want ? 33. How much do we want ? 34. What must I do ? 35. You 
must write a letter. 36. What must she write ? 37. She must write 
four pages. 38. She must go to church. 



LEgON XLIX. LESSON XLIX. 

SEOIE, CONVENIE, VALOIE, ETC. 

1. The verb seoir [3. ir. Lesson 47, Rule 3.], is also used uniper- 
sonally. 

II ne vous sied pas de parlor ainsi. It does not become you to speak thus. 

* This adverb should never be placed before a substantive. 

1 



146 QtrAEANTE-NEUYIEME LEgOIT. 

2. The verb convenir [2. ir. see § 62.], to suit^ is at times used mii- 
personally. It then signifies to he suitable, advisaUe, &c. 

II convient de lui ecrire. It is advisable to write to him. 

3. The irregular verb valoir [see table, § 62.] corresponds in signifi- 
cation to the English expression, to he worth. 

Cette maison vaut cinq mille francs. That house is worth five thousand 

francs. 

4. Ne rien valoir means to he good for nothing ; ne pas valoir 
grand' chose, to he worth little, not to he good for much. 

Ce drap ne vaut rien. That cloth is good for nothing. 

Ifotre maison ne vaut pas grand'chose. Our house is not good for much. 

5. £tre riche de . . . means to he worth, to possess ; -when a person 
is the nominative of the verb, valoir is never used in this sense. 

Cette personne est riche de cinq That 'person is worth five thousand 
mille piastres. dollars. 

6. Yaloir mieux, conjugated unipersonallj, means to he better; 
valoir la peine, to he worth the while. 

H vaut mieux travailler que d'etre It is letter to labor than to be idle. 

oisif. 

n ne vaut pas la peine de parler, It is not worth the while to speak, 

quand on n'a rien a dire. when one ha^ nothing to say. 

Resume of Examples. 

H ne vous sied pas de nous faire des It does not become you io reproach us. 

reproches. 

H ne vous convient pas de parler de It is not suitable for you to speak so. 

la sorte. 

II ne nous convient pas d'y aller. It does not suit us to go there. 

Combien votre jardiu vaut-il ? How much is your garden toorth ? 

II vaut beaucoup plus que le votre. It is much more valuable than yours. 

II ne vaut pas autant que le mien. It is not worth as much as mine. 

Notre maison ne vaut rien. Our house is good for nothing. 

Votre habit ne vaut pas grand'chose. Your coai is not good for much. 

Cela ne vaut pas la peine. TJiat is not worth the lohile. 

Ce chateau peut valoir cent mille That villa may be worth one hundred 

francs. thousand francs. 

De combien votre oncle est-il riche ? Sow much is your uncle worth ? 

II est riche de deux cent mille francs. -2e is worth two hundred thousand 

francs. 

Ne vaut-il pas mieux lire que jouer ? Is it not better io read than to playf 

Exercise 95. 

Assur-er, 1. to assure; Cass-er, 1. io break] Couteau, m. knife; 

Au juste, precisely ; Centaine, f. about a hun- Marche, m. market ; 

Autre chose, something dred; Merit-er, 1. to deserve^ 

elsGi Chaine, f chain; merit. 



SEOIE, CONVENIR, VALOIE, ETC. 147 

Montre, f. watch ; Pouvoir, 3. ir. to he able ; Tout au plus, at most ; 

Negligence, f. neglect ; Reproch-er, 1. to re- Ya, from aller, to go ; 
]:^6gocia.nt,m. merchant; proach ; Yingtaine,l about twenty. 

1. Vous sied-il de nous reprocher notre negligence ? 2. II me 
sied de vous faire des reproches, quand vous le meritez. 3. Vou3 
convient-il d'aller trouver mon frere ? 4. II ne me convient pas 
d'aller le trouver, j'ai autre chose a faire. 5. Combien ce champ 
peut-il valoir ? 6. II peut valoir une vingtaine [§ 27, (2.)] de mille 
francs. 7. Valez-vous mieux que votre frere ? 8. Mon frere vaut 
beaucoup mieux que moi. 9. Ce couteau ne vaut-il pas plus que le 
votre? 10. Le mien est meilleur, il vaut davantage. 11. Combien 
votre montre vaut-elle ? 12. Elle ne vaut pas grand'chose, elle ne 
va pas bien. 13. De combien le negociant est-il riche ? 14. Je ne 
puis vous le dire au juste, il est riche d'une centaine de mille francs. 
15. Ne vaut-il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller au marche? 16. H 
vaut mieux aller au marche. 17. Yotre chaine d'or vaut-elle plus 
que la mienne ? 18. Elle vaut tout autant. 19. Elle ne vaut pas 
grand'chose, elle est cassee. 20. Cela vaut-il cinquante francs? 
21. Cela vaut tout au plus deux francs. 22. Avez-vous demande 
au marchand ce que cela vaut? 23. Je ne le lui ai pas demande. 
24. II m' assure que cela vaut une centaine de francs. 

Exercise 96. 
1. How much is my house worth ? 2. It is worth about twenty 
thousand francs. 3. Is that horse worth as much as this one? 

4. This horse is worth two hundred dollars, and that one three hundred. 

5. Is it worth the while to write to your brother ? 6. It is not worth 
the while. 7. Is it worth the while to go out, when one does not 
wish to walk ? ' 8. It is not (n'en) worth the while. 9. Does it suit 
you to write to my brother to-morrow ? 10. It does not suit me to 
write to him. 11. Does it become you to reproach me with my neg- 
lect? 12. It becomes me to blame (hllmer) you when you deserve 
it. 13. "What is that man worth ? 14. I cannot tell you exactly, 
about fifty thousand francs. 15. Is that cloth good ? 16. No, sir ; 
it is good for nothing. 17. Is your gun worth as much as mine ? 
18. Yes, sir ; it is worth more. 19. Will you go to my father's ? 
20. No, sir ; I have something else to do. 21. Is it better to go to 
market early than late ? 22. It is better to go early. 23. How 
much may your horse be worth ? 24. It is not worth much, it is 
very old. 25. Is your watch better than mine? 26. It is not worth 
much, it does not go. 27. Is that book worth two francs ? 28. It is 
worth one, at most. 29. Have you asked your sister what that 



148 CINQUANTIEME LEgON. 

book is worth? 30. 1 have not. [L. 24, R. 12 ; L. 46, R 4.] 31. What 
must I do ? 32. You must speak to your father. 33. Must he have 
money ? 34. He must have some. 35. Has he not sold his horse ? 
36. He has sold it, but it is not worth much. 



LEgON L. LESSON L. 

phendee, achetee, demandee. 

1. When the verbs prendre [4. ir. see § 62.], to take; voler, to rob, 
to steal ; acheter, to buy ; demander, to ash for ; payer, to pay, are 
followed by one regimen only, or by several regimens in the same 
relation ; these regimens, if nouns, are not to be separated from the 
verb by a preposition ; if pronouns, they take the form of the direct 
regimen, Ze, la, les. 

Avez-vous paye le livre ? Have you paid for the hooJc f 

Avez-vous paye le libraire ? Have you paid the bookseller ? 

Avez-vous demand e votre argent ? Have you asked for your money ? 

L'avez- vous 'demande ? Have you asked for him f 

2. When the verbs above mentioned are accompanied by several 
regimens, holding different relations, the regimen representing the 
thing or object will be direct, and come under the above rule, and 
that representing the person, will, if a noun, be preceded by the 
preposition d, and, if a pronoun, assume the form of the indirect 
regimen : lui, to Mm, to her ; leur, to them.. 

J'ai pris le livre a mon frere. I have taken the hook from my brother. 

J'ai paye le livre au libraire. i have paid the bookseller for the book. 

Je le lui ai paye. / have paid him for it. 

3. Demander is used also in the sense of to inquire for, to ask for. 
J'ai demande ce monsieur. Tasked for that gentleman. 

EESUME OP EXAMPLES. 

Vous a-t-on vole vos livres ? Has any one stolen your hooks from, 

you? 
On me les a voles [L. 35, 1, 2.] They have been stolen from me. 

A-t-on paye les souliers au cordon- Has the shoemaker been paid for the 

nier ? shoes f 

On ne les lui a pas encore payes. He has not yet been paid for them. 

Qu'a-t-on pris a votre pere ? What has been taken from your 

father f 
On lui a pris son argent. His money has been taken from Mm» 

Ne vous a-t-on rien paye ? Has nothing been paid you ? 

On m'a paye presque tout. IJiave been paid almost all. 

J'ai acbete des hvres au libraire, / bought books from the bookseller^ 



PRENDRE, ACHETEE, DEMANDEE, ETC. 149 

Qui avez-vous demande ? Whom have you asked for f 

J'ai demande mon frere aine. linquirecl for my eldest brother. 

Avez-vous demande de I'argent i Have you asked your friend for 

votre ami? money? 

Je ne lui en ai pas demande. / have not asked him for any. 

Exercise 97. 

Chapelier, m. hatter ; Legume, m. vegetable ; Rend-re, 4. to return ; 

Crayon, m. pencil ; Jjoyer, va. rent ; Renseignements, m. p. 

Demeur-er, 1. to dwell, to Pantoufle, f. slipper ; information ; 

live; Paysan, m. peasant; Revenus, m. p. income;. 

Fenetre, f. window ; Proprietaire, m. land- Tout, e, all ; 

Fraipi^-eT, 1. to knock ; lord; Yoyagem, m. traveller ; 

1. Que vous a-t-on pris ? 2. On m'a prls mes livres, mes crayons, et 
men canif. 3. Savez-vous qui vous les a pris ? 4. Je ne connais pas 
celui qui me les a pris, mais je sais qu'il demeure ici. 5. Avez-vous 
demande vos livres ? 6. Je les ai demandes a mon cousin. 7. Yous 
les a-t-il rendus ? 8. II me les a payes. 9. Vous a-t-on vole beaucoup 
de fruit cette annee ? 10. On m'a vole des legumes, mais on ne m'a 
point vole de fruit. 11. Avez-vous paye votre cbapeau au paysan ? 
12. Je ne le lui ai pas paye, je I'ai paye au chapelier. 13. A qui avez- 
vous demande des renseignements ? 14. J'en ai demande au voya- 
geur. 15. Savez-vous qui vient de frapper a la porte ? 16. C'est M. 
L., qui vous demande. 17. Qui avez-vous demande? 18. J'ai demande 
votre frere. 19. Votre frere a-t-il paye toutes ses dettes? 20. II ne 
les a pas encore payees, parce qu'il n'a pas recu ses revenus. 21. Lui 
avez-vous paye ce que vous lui avez achete ? 22. Je le lui ai paye. 
23. Ne leur avez-vous pas paye votre loyer ? 24. Je le leur ai paye. 
25. lis nous ont paye notre maison. 

Exercise 98. 
1. Have you paid your landlord ? 2. I have paid him my rent. 

3. Have you paid him for the windov^^s which you have broken ? 

4. I have paid him for them. 5. Has the hatter paid for all his hats ? 

6. He has not paid for them, he has bought them on credit (d credit). 

7. Do you pay what you owe, every day ? 8, I pay my butcher 
every week. 9. Have you paid him for his meat ? 10. I have paid 
him for it. 11. For whom did you inquire this morning ? 12. I in- 
quired for your brother. 13. Why did you not inquire for my father ? 
14. I know that your father is in England. 15. Has the hatter been 
paid for his hats? 16. He has been paid for thera. 17. Has your 
money been taken from you ? 18. My hat has been stolen from me. 
19. Have you asked your brother for your money? 20. I have asked 
him for it, but he cannot return it to me. 21. Has he no money? 



160 



CINQUANTE ET UlSTIEME LEgOK, 



22. He has just paid all his debts, and he has no money left {de reste). 

23. Have you asked your father for money ? 24. I have not asked 
him for any, I know that he has none. 25. From v^^hat bookseller 
have you bought your books ? 26. I bought them from your book- 
seller. 27. Are you vs^rong to pay your debts ? 28. I am right to 
pay them. 29. Who is inquiring for me ? 30. The physician is in- 
quiring for you 31. Who knocks ? 32. Your shoemaker knocks. 



LEgON LI. 



LESSON LL 



THE PAST DEFINITE. (§ 120.) 

1. The past definite may be called the narrative or historical tense 
of the French. It is used to express an action entirely past, definite 
and complete in itself. The time must be specified, and every por- 
tion of it must be elapsed. " One night at least," say the best French 
grammarians, '^ should have occurred since the action took place." 

Men frere partit hier pour Paris. My brother left yesterday for Paris, 

2. The student wiU bear in mind that the past indefinite [L. 41.] 
may be used for the past definite. The past definite, however, may 
never be used for the indefinite. In conversation, the indefinite is 
often preferred to the definite, as the latter would at times appear 
too formal [§ 121, (3)]. 

3. The past definite may generally be rendered in English, by the 
simple form of the imperfect, or by the same tense conjugated with 
did. The past definite can never be rendered in English, by the par- 
ticiple present of the verb preceded by was, were, etc. 

J'aUai a I'eglise hier matin. J went, or did go to church yesterday 

morning. 



Je 

I 

Tu 

Thou 

II 

Re 

Kous 

We 

Yous 

You 

lis 



4. Terminations of the Past Definite of the Four 
Conjugations. See L. 23, and § 60. 



chant -ai 

sang 

pari -as 

spokest 

donn -a 

ga/ve 

cherch -ames 

sought 

port -ates 

carried 

aim -erent 

loved, liked 



fin -is 

finished 

cher -is 

eherishedHt 

fourn -it 

furnished 

pun -imes 

punished 

sais -ites 

seized 

un -irent 



re§ -us 
received 
aperc -us 
perce.ivedst 
perc -ut 
gathered 
cong -\imes 
concealed 
d -iltes 



dec -urent 
d€^eM>6d 



rend 



vend -is 

soldedst 

tend -it 

tended 

entend -ini 

hea^d 

perd 



mord 
Ut, 



•ites 



-irent 



THB PAST DEFINITE. 151 

5. It will be seen that the terminations of the second, and fourth 
conjugations are alike. 

Resume of Examples. 

On noTis parla de vous bier. They spoke to us of you yesterday. 

Le banquier nous donna de I'argent The banker gave us money last year. 

I'annee derniere. 

Le banquier nous a donns de Far- The banker has given us money. 

gent. 

Le professeur nous parla de vous, The professor spoke to us about you^ 

I'annee derniere. last year. 

II nous a parle de ses amis, et dea He spoke to us of his friends, and of 

notres. ours. 

Pendant notre voyage, il nous ra- During our journey, he related to us 

conta ses aventures. his adventures. 

H nous a raconte I'histoire de sa vie. Be related to us the history of his life. 

Exercise 99. 

Aine, e, elder, eldest; Se lev-cr, 1. ref. to rise ; Proprietes, f. p. property ; 

Avee, with; Lorsque, when ; Eacont-er, 1. to relate; 

Se couch-er, 1, ref. to go Lyon, Lyons; Eemerci-er, 1. to thank; 

to bed; Neuf, ve, new ; Sejour, m. stay; 

Dernier, e, last ; Ordinairement, general- Semaine, f week ; 

S'echapp-er, 1. ref to ly ; Soldat, m. soldier ; 

escape ; Pendant, during ; Tard, late ; 

Habillement, m. dress ; Pri-er, 1. to beg ; Trop tot, too soon. 

1. Le banquier recut-il beaucoup d'argent la semaine derniere 7 

I. II en recut beaucoup. 3. Aussitot que vous apercutes votre fi ere, 
tie lui parlates-vous pas ? 4. Des que je I'apercus, je lui parlai. 
^. Avez-vous deja porte vos habillements neufs ? 6. Je ne les ai pas 
encore portes. 7. Quand il vous donna de I'argent hier, le remer- 
ciates-vous? 8. Je le remerciai, et je le priai de vous remercier. 
9. Avez-vous trouve vos livres ? 10. Je ne les ai pas encore trouves. 

II. Lorsque vous vintes nous voir, ne finites-vous pas vos affaires 
avec mon pere? 12. Je les finis alors, et je le payai. 13. N'avez- 
vous pas vu votre soeur ainee, pendant votre sejour a Lyon ? 14. Je 
ne I'ai pas vue. 15. Ne vous couchates-vous pas trop tot, hier au 
soir ? 16. Je me couchai tard. 17. A quelle heure vous etes-vous 
leve ce matin ? 18. Je me suis leve a cinq heures ; je me leve ordi- 
nairement de bonne heure. 19. Ne cherchates-vous pas a vous 
echapper de votre prison, I'annee derniere ? 20. Je n'ai jamais cherche 
a m'echapper. 21. Avez-vous vendu vos proprietes ? 22. Je ne 
les ai pas vendues. 23. Qu'avez-vous donne au soldat ? 24. Je ne 
lui ai rien donne. 25. Pendant son sejour a B., nous lui donnames 
tout ce qu'il voulut. 



152 CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LEgON 

Exercise 100. 
1. Wliat did you receive last week ? 2. We received fifty franc3 
from your fiiend, and twenty-five fi-om your brother. 3. Did you 
take your son to church with you yesterday ? 4. I did not take him 
there (y). 5. What did you lose last year? 6. We lost our money, 
our clothes, and our horses. 7. Have you looked (cherchts) for 
them ? 8, I looked for them, but did not find them. 9. Did they 
speak of your brother yesterday ? 10. They spoke of him and of 
you. 11. What did the physician give you? 12. He gave me 
nothing. 13. At what hour did your sister rise yesterday ? 14. She 
rose at five o'clock. 15. Did you rise early this morning? 16. We 
rose at half-past six. 17. Has your cousin sold all his property? 
18. He has not sold it, he has given it to his eldest sister. 19. Has 
the traveller related his adventures to you ? 20. He related them 
tome. 21. Did that man tvj (chercht) to speak to your father? 
22. He tried to speak to him. 23. Did the professor speak of your 
brother, during his stay at your house ? 24. He spoke of him. 
25. Has your friend worn his new coat ? 26. He has not worn it 
yet. 27. Have you thanked your brother ? 28. I have thanked 
him. 29. What have you given to your eldest sister ? 30. I have 
given her nothing, I have nothing to give her. 31. When your 
brother gave you a book last year, did you thank him ? 32. I did not 
thank him. 33. Is it late ? 34. It is not late, it is only six. 35. Is 
it fine weather, or bad weather? 36. It is very fine weather. 



LEgOX LII. LESSON- LII. 

THE PAST DEFTNTTE, CONTTNTTED. 

1. The terminations of the past definite of irregular verbs, are sel^ 
dom arbitrary,^ but, an irregular verb of one conjugation will some^ 
times, in this tense, assume the terminations of another conjugation. 
In a few instances the stem [L. 23.] of the verb is entirely changed. 



Avom, to have; t^' 


TEE, to be ; 


YoiR, to see; 


Lire, to read; 


J' e -us, Ihad 


f -us. I was 


V -is, I saw 


1 -us, / read 


Tu e -us 


f -us 


V -IS 


1 -us 


11 e -ut 


f -ut 


V -it 


1 -ut 


Nous e -umeg 


f -\imes 


V -imes 


1 -xames 


Yous e -vltes 


f -utes 


V -ites 


1 -htes 


Ds e -urent 


f -urent 


V -irent 


1 -urent 



^ This termination is arbitrary only in verbs ending in enir, in which an 
n comes after the i of the termination : vinmes, tmraes, etc. 



THE PAST DEFINITE. 



163 



2. Avoir and tire, it will be perceived, take in this tense a new 
stem, e-us, /-us ; ttre and ZiVe, though belonging to the 4th conjuga- 
tion, take the terminations of the 3d, and votV, a verb of the 3d, takes 
the terminations of the 4th. 

3. In other instances, the stem of the verb drops some of its let- 
ters, and sometimes adopts others. This may be seen in the verbs 



Yenir, Prendre, 


Craindre, 


CONNAITRE, 


CONDUTRB, 


to come; to take; 


to fear ; 


to know ; 


to conduct. 


Je V -ins pr -is 


craign -is 


conn -us 


conduis -is 


Tu V -ins pr -is 


craign -is 


conn -us 


conduis -is 


11 V -int pr -it 


craign -it 


conn -ut 


conduis -it 


Nous V -inmes pr -imes 


craign -imes 


conn -umea 


conduis -imes 


Yous V -intes pr -ites 


craign -ites 


conn -iltes 


conduis -ites 


lis V -inrent pr -irent 


craign -irent 


conn -urent 


conduis -irent 



4. Like venir, are conjugated all verbs ending in enir ; like crain- 
dre^ connaitre, and conduire^ those ending in indre, aHre, aud uire ; 
and like prendre^ those composed of this verb and a prefix : as, com- 
jprendre^ surprendre^ &c. 

5. We would at all times refer the student to the table of irregu- 
lar verbs, § 62, for those tenses of the irregular verbs, with which he 
is not familiar. 

Resume of Examples. 
Ne conduisites-vous point votre fils 

en Espagne, I'annee derniere ? 
Je I'y conduisis, et je I'y laissai. 
Aussitot que vous vitas votre frere, 



ne le reconniites-vous pas ? 
Je le reconnus, aussitot que je 

I'apercus, 
Le pharmacien ne vint-il pas vous 

voir ? 
II vint me voir; il fut bien etonne 

de trouver chez moi, un de sea 

anciens amis. 
Ne prites-vous pas conge de vos 

amis, bier? 
Je pris conge d'eux, et je les priai 

de m'ecrire. 



Did you not take your son to Spain, 
last year? 

J took him thither, and left him. 

As soon as you saw your brother, did 
you not recognize him ? 

I recognized him, as soon as 1 per- 
ceived him. 

Did not the apothecary come to see 
your 



Accompagner, 1, to ac- 
company ; 

A la fin, at last ; 

Amicalement, kindly ; 

Arrivee, f. arrival ; 

Attend- re, -4. to wait for ; 

Au secours, to the assis- 
tance ; 

Conge, m. leave ; 

Cour-ir, 2. ir. to run ; 



He came to see me; he was much 
astonished to find one of his old 
friends, at my house. 

Did you not take leave of your friends, 
yesterday ? 

I took leave of them, and begged them 
to write to me. 

Exercise 101. 
De mou mieux, as well Histoire, f. history ; 



as I could; 
Se depech-er, 1. ref. i( 

make haste; 
Des que, as soon as ; 
Ecolier, m. scholar ; 
S'ennuy-er, 1. pec. to be 

come weary ; 
Se hat-er, 1. re£ 

hasten; 



Infer m-er, 1. to inform; 
Notaire, m, notary; 
Lu, from lire, 4, ir. to 

read ; 
Peintre, m. painter ; 
Perd-re. 2. to lose; 
Sans, without', 
to Sfecour-ir, 2. ir. 6> «2W- 

cor. 



154 CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LE^OK. 

1. Nos ecoliers s'ennuyerent-ils hier d'attendre si longtemps? 
2, Ds furent obliges d'attendre si longtemps, qua la fin ils perdirent 
patience. 3. Ne recutes-vous point votre parent amicalement, lors- 
qu'il vint vous voir ? 4. Je le recus de mon mieux. 5. Ne lutes- 
Tous pas la lettre de votre frere, avant hier ? 6. Je la lus, et je I'en- 
voyai a mon oncle. 7. ISTe courutes-vous pas au secours de votre 
frere, aussitot que vous le vites en danger ? 8. Je me hatai de le 
secourir, 9. Ne vous etes-vous pas depeches de venir ? 10. Noi:3 
nous sommes depeches. 11. Aussitot que vous eutes apercu mon frere, 
ne m'informates-vous pas de son arrivee ? 12. Je vous en informal. 
13. A quelle heure votre soeur est-elle venue aujourd'hui ? 14. EUe 
est venue a midi. 15. Yos compagnons vinrent-ils hier vous prier de 
les accompagner ? 16. lis vinrent me voir, mais ils me quitterent 
sans me parler de leur voyage. 17. Ne peignites-vous pas un 
tableau, I'annee derniere? 18. Je peignis un tableau d'histoire. 
19. Le peintre itahen a-t-il fini son portrait? 20. II le finit hier. 
21. II I'a fini ce matin. 22. Des que j'eus recu cette nouvelle, 
j'euvoyai chercher le notaire. 23. Ce jeune homme a-t-il pris conge 
de son pere. 24. II a pris conge de lui. 25. II prit conge de lui 
hier. 

EXEECISE 102. 

1. Did the notary accompany you yesterday ? 2. He accompanied 
me as far as (jiLsque cliez) your brother's. 3. Did your companion 
take leave of you yesterday ? 4. He took leave of me this morning. 
6. Did you read yesterday, the book which I have lent you ? 6. I 
read it the day before yesterday {avant hier). 7. At what time did 
the painter come this morning? 8. He came at half-past nine. 
9. Has he finished your father's portrait ? 10. He painted all day 
yesterday, but the portait is not yet finished. 11. Did you not run 
to your father's relief, when you saw him in danger ? 12. I hastened 
to succor him. 13. What did you do when you came ? 14. As 
soon as I came, I sent for my brother. 15. Did you take your sister 
to Germany last year? 16. I took her there this year. 17. Did you 
take your children to school yesterday ? 18. I took them to my 
brother's. 19. Do you paint a historical picture ? 20. I painted last 
year a liistorical picture. 21. Did your sister beg you to accompany 
her ? 22. She begged me to accompany her. 23. Did you send for 
" the notary, as soon as you heard from your father ? 24. I sent for 
him. 25. When did the notary take leave of you ? 26. He took 
leave of me this morning at nine. 27. Has the apothecary finished 
bis letter ? 28, He has not yet finished it. 29. Were you not 



THE IMPERFECT. 165 

much (hien) astonished yesterday to see that lady ? 30. I was not 
astonished to see lier. 31. Did you make haste to read your book, 
last night Qiier au soir) ? 32. I made haste to read it. 33. Have 
you finished it ? 34. I have not yet finished it. 



LEgON LIII. LESSON LIIL 

THE IMPERFECT. (§ 119.) 

1. The imperfect, or simultaneous past tense, may be called the 
descriptive tense of the French. The action which it represents, or 
the situation which it describes, is imperfect of itself. This tense 
leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undetermined. 
It may often be rendered in English by the auxiUary was, and the 
participle present of the verb [§ 119, 120.] 

J'ecrivais ce matin quand vous etes Twos writing this morning when you 

entre. came in. 

Je passais hier quand vous m'ap- I was passing yesterday when you 

pelates. called me. 

2. The imperfect is also used to express an action which is cus- 
tomary or often repeated. It may then be rendered in EngUsh by the 
words used to, placed before the verb. 

L'annee derniere, j'allais tous les Last year, I went {used to go) every 

jours a recole. day to school. 

Quand nous demeurions a la cam- When we lived, {used to live) in the 

pagne, nous nous couchions or- country, we used to go to bed at nine 

dinairement a neuf heures. o'clock. 

3. The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past 
tense which takes did^ as an auxiliary. The past definite never cor- 
responds in meaning to the English imperfect, composed of the 
auxiliary " was,'' and the participle present. It cannot be rendered 
by the verb preceded by " used to.'" 

J'allais a la chasse hier matin quand / was going hunting yesterday morn- 
nous nous rencontrames. ing when we met (did meet). 
J'allai a la chasse hier matin, I went (did go) hunting yesterday 

morning. 

4. The imperfect is formed from the participle present, by changing 
ant into ais, etc., § 61. It may also be formed by adding ais, etc., to 

^ Except when, in interrogative sentences, did is used as an auxiliary 
to used to expressed or understood. 



156 



CINQUANTE-TKOISIEME LEgON. 



the stem of the verb, for the 1st and 4th conjugations, issais, etc., for 
the 2d, and evais for the 3d. 

5. Terminations of the Imperfect of the four Conjugations. 



Je 


chant -ais 


fin -issais 


rec -evais 


rend -ais 


I 


teas singing 


was finishing 


was receimng 


wa^ rendering 


Tu 


pari -ais 


cher -issais 


aperc -evais 


vend -ais 


77bou 


wast speaking 


ua^t cherishing 


wast perceiving 


wast selling 


11 


donn -ait 


fourn -issait 


perc -evait 


tend -ait 


Be 


^Daf; giving 


wan fwrnifJiing 


was gathering 


was. tending 


Kous 


cherch -ions 


pun -issions 


cone -evions 


entend -ions 


We 


were seeking 


were punishing 


were conceiving 


were hearing 


Vous 


port -iez 


sais -issiez 


d -eviez 


perd -iez 


Tou 


were carrying 


were seizing 


were owing 


were losing 


lis 


aim -aient 


un -issaient 


dec -evaient 


mortl -aient 


Ihey 


were Iming 


were uniting 


were deceiving 


were biting. 



Ili:su:^rE op Examples. 



Je chantais quand on m'apporta 

votre lettre. 
J'aimais autrefois a lire les poetes 

anglais. 
J'etais dans votre chambre lorsque 

vous etes entre. 
Comment votre pere se portait-il, 

lorsque vous demeuriez en France? 
Avez-vous paye a mon pere ce que 

vous lui deviez, et ce que vous lui 

aviez promis ? 
Je parlai bier toute la matinee. 
Je parlais bier a votre pere, lorsque 

votre ami nous rencontra. 
Je chercbais votre pere. 



/ was singing when ihey brought tm 

your letter. 
I used to like formerly to read tJie 

English jwets. 
J was in your room when you came 

in. 
How was your father when you lived 

in France ? 
Have you paid my father what you 

owed him, and what you hadpromr 

ised him ? 
/ spoke yesterday the whole morning. 
I ivas speaking to your father, when 

your friend met us yesterday. 
I was looking for your father. 



Autrefois, formerly 

Brun, e, brown; 

Chambre, f room; 

Crayon, m. pencil; 

Demeur-er,l. to live,dwell ;'PaTch.em.ux, 

De nouveau, again; ment; 



EXEECISE 103. 

£colier, m. scholar; 
Noir, e, black- 
Merit-er, 1. to deserve; 
Pantoufle, £ slipper ; 

m. parch- 



Presque pas, almost none, 

but little ; ' 
Retrouv-er, 1. to find 

again ; 
Tbeme, m. exercise; 
Vert, e, green. 



1. De qui parliez-vous ce matin quand je suis venu vous trouver ? 
2. Ma cousine parlait de son frere, et je parlais du mien. 3. N'aimiez- 
vous pas mieux le boeuf que le mouton, autrefois? 4. J'aimais le 
boeuf, mais je n'ai jamais aime le mouton. 5. Ne vendiez-vous pas 
beaucoup de livres, lorsque vous demeuriez a Paris ? G. J'en vendais 
beaucoup, parceque j'etais libraire. 7. Le libraire a-t-il vendu beau- 
coup de crayons ce matin ? 8. II a vendu beaucoup de crayons au- 
jourd'hui. 9. Yendiez-vous beaucoup de parchemin, lorsque vous 



THE IMPERFECT. • ISY 

€tiez libraire? 10. Je n'en vendais presque pas. 11. Votre frere 
portait-il un habit vert, lorsqu'il demeurait ^ Londres ? 12. II portait 
un habit brun et des pantoufles noires. 13. Que cherchiez-vous ? 
14. Je cherchais mon hvre. 15. Depuis quand I'aviez-vous perdu ? 
16; Je I'avais perdu depuis hier. 17. L'avez-vous retrouve ? 18. Je 
I'avais retrouve, mais je I'ai perdu de nouveau. 19. Ce boulauger 
vous fournissait-il de bon pain ? 20. II nous en fournissait d' excel- 
lent. 21. Punissiez-vous souvent vos ecoliers ? 22. Je les punissais 
quand ils le meritaient. 23. Ou etiez-vous ce matin, quand je vou3 
cherchais? 24. J'etais dans ma chambre. 25. Je finissais mon 
theme. 

Exercise 104. 

1. Who was at your house this morning ? 2. My friend G-. was 
there, and was looking for you. 3. Were you looking for me this 
morning? 4. I was not looking for you, I was looking for your 
scholar. 5. Did you speak to my father yesterday ? 6. I was speak- 
ing to him, when they brought me your letter. 7. Did you use to 
sell much meat, when you lived in B. ? 8. I sold much meat, because 
I was a butcher. 9. Did your father use to wear a white hat, when 
he hved in London ? 10. He used to wear a black hat, and my brother 
wore a black coat. 11. Were you singing when my father came ? 
12. No, sir ; I was finishing my exercise. 13. Had you lost your 
pencil this morning? 14. I had lost it, and was looking for it when 
you spoke to me. 15. Has your brother paid all that he owed ? 
16. He has not paid for his coat. 17. How was your mother when 
she lived in Italy ? 18. She was very well. 19. You used to like 
reading Qa lecture^ did your sister (use to) like it also ? 20. She 
liked it also. 21. Where was your sister this morning, when I was 
looking for her ? 22, She was at my mother's. 23. What song were 
you singing this morning? 24. I was singing an Itahan song. 
25. Have you been afraid to speak to me ? 26. I have never been, 
afraid to speak to you. 27. Have you brought my book? 28. I 
have not brought it. 29. Of what were you speaking ? 30. I was 
speaking of nothing. 31. What were you giving to my brother ? 
32. I was not giving him any thing. 33. What were you carrying? 
34. I was carrying a tree. 35. Where were you carrying it ? 86. I 
was carrying it home. 



158 CINQU.ANTE-QUATEIEME LEgON. 

LEgON Liy. LESSON Liy. 

THE IMPERFECT, CONTINUED. 

1. The imperfect of the indicative of every French verb, regular 
or irregular, ends in aw, ais, aii, ions, iez, aient 

2. ISTo verb of the first conjugation er, is irregular in this tense. 

3. The only irregularity found in the irregular verbs of the second 
conjugation ir, is that, to form the imperfect, the stem of these verbs 
takes ais, etc., instead of issais : as, ven-ir, Je ven-ais, cour-ir, je 
courais ; cueill-b', je cueill-ais. Exception: Puir, ^o^^ee — jefuyais. 

4. The irregular verbs of the third conjugation oir, change that 
termination (pir) into ais, etc., Hke the regular verbs of the same : 
as, sa,Y-oiv, je sav-ais ; qn-ovc, fav-ais. Exceptions: se-oir, to become, 
voir, to see, and their compounds, and dechoir, [see § 62.] 

5. The changes which the stem of the irregular verbs of the fourth 
conjugation undergoes, in this tense, are too various to admit of a 
complete classification. We, however, offer the following. 

Prendre, to take. ficRiRE, to write. Craindre, to fear. 

Je pren -ais, etc. J'ecriv -ais, etc. Je craign -ais, etc. 

CONXAiTRE, io know. CoNDUiRE, to conduct. 

Je connaiss -ais, etc. Je conduis -ais, etc. 

6. Like prendre and ecrire are conjugated, in this tense, those verbs 
in which prendre and tcrire appear in composition ; as comprendre, 
je comprenais ; souscrire, je souscrivais. — Like craindre and con- 
naitre, those ending in indre and aitre ; teindre, je teignais ; paraitre, 
je paraissais. — Like conduire, those ending in ire : as, lire, je lisais ; 
faire, je faisais ; luire, je luisais ; dire, je disais, etc. — ^Exceptions : 
lire, taire, ecrire, and their compounds. 

7. Mettre and its compounds, and etre are regular in this tense. 

8. The participle present, from which the French grammarians de- 
rive the imperfect, presents, of course, the same irregularities : venant, 
valant, prenant, ecrivant, craignant, connaissant, conduisant. Ex- 
ceptions : avoir, ay ant ; savoir, sachant. 

Resume op Examples. 

De quoi notre ami avait-il peur ? Of what was our friend afraid? 

31 n'avait peur de rien. He was afraid of nothing. 

N'aviez-vous pas besoin de men Did you not wajit my brother? 

frere ? 

Nous avions besoia de lui. We wanted him. 

Le marchand n'avait-il pas besoin Did not the merchant want money f 

d'argeat ? 

II en avait grand besoin. Se had great need of iL 



THE IMPEEPECT. 159 

Quelle voiture conduisiez-vous ? What carnage were you driving ? 

Pour qui ine preniez-vous ? For whom were you taking me f 

Je venais vous trouver quand je J was coming to you when I met you. 

vous rencontrai. 

A qui ecriviez-vous ce matin ? To whom w&i e you writing this morn- 
ing? 

J'ecrivais a ma sceur et a mon I was writing to my sister and to my 

frere. brother. 

Exercise 105. 

Autrement, otherwise; Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; Teind-re, 4. ir. io dye,' 

Cass-er, 1. to break ; Peche, i. fishing; Teinturier, m. dyer; 

Chasse, f. hunting; Peind-re, 4. ir. to paint; Toile, f. linen. cloth; 

Dire, 4. ir. to say ; Reveu-ir, 2. ir. to re- Rencontr-er, 1. io meet; 
Montre, f. loatch ; turn ; Val-oir, 3. ir. to be worth ; 

Moins, (au) at least; Sav-oir, 3. ir. io know ; Ven-ir, 2. ir. io come, to 

Mort, e, dead; Setromp-er, l.iobemis- have just; L. 26, 2. 
Offens-er, 1. to offend; taken; Vite, quickly. 

1. Pourquoi n'ecriviez-vous pas plus vite ce matin ? 2. Parce que 
j'avais peur de me tromper. 3. Ne craigniez-vous pas d'oiFenser 
cette dame ? 4. Je craignais de I'ofFenser, mais je ne pouvais faire 
autrement ? 5. Que peigniez-vous ce matin ? 6. Je peignais uu 
tableau d'histoire. 7. Yotre teinturier que teignait-il? 8. II teignait 
du drap, de la sole, et de la toile. 9. De quelle couleur les teignait- 
il ? 10. II teignait le drap en noir, et la soie et la toile en vert. 
11. Conduisiez-vous le jeune Polonais a, I'ecole, lorsque je vous ai 
rencontre ? 12. Je conduisais mon fils aine a I'eglise. 13. Que lisiez- 
vous ? 14. Je lisais des livres que je venais d'acheter. 15. Ne saviez- 
vous pas que ce monsieur est mort ? IG. Je I'avais oublie. 17. Com- 
bien la montre que vous avez cassee valait-elle ? 18. Elle valait au 
moins deux cents francs. 19. Ne valait-il pas mieux rester ici, que 
d'aller a la chasse ? 20. II valait beaucoup mieux aller a I'ecole. 
21. Votre ami que vous disait-il ? 22. II me disait que son frere est 
revenu d'Espagne. 23. N'alliez-vous pas a, la chasse tous les jours, 
lorsque vous dcmeuriez a la campagne ? 24. J'allais souvent a la 
peche. 25. Mon frere allait tous les jours a I'ecole, quand il etaifc ici. 

Exercise 106. 
1. Were you afraid this morning when you came to our house ? 
2. I was afraid. 3. Of what were you afraid ? 4. I was afraid of 
the •horse. 5. Was not your friend afraid of falling? (de iomber. 
See L. 21, R. 2, 4.) 6. He was not afraid of falling, but he was 
afraid of making a mistake (de se tromper. See 2. in Exercise above.) 
7. Were you not afraid of offending your brother ? 8. I was afraid 
of offending him. 9. Were you taking your son to school ? 10. I 



160 CINQTJANTE-CINQUIEME LEgOK. 

was conducting him to school. 11. Was the dyer dyeing your coat? 
12. He was not dyeing my coat,, he was dyeing silk. 13. Wliat color 
was he dyeing the silk-? 14. He was dyeing some red, and some 
green. 15. Was he dyeing liis hnen cloth black or green ? 16. He 
was neither dyeing it black nor green, he was dyeing it pink (rose). 
17. Were you aware (saviez-vous) that your uncle is dead ? 18. I 
did not know it (imperfect). 19. What was the gentleman read- 
ing? 20. He was reading a letter which he had just received. 
21. Were you cold when you came here? 22. I was cold, hun- 
gry, and tliirsty. 23. Were you not ashamed of your conduct? 
(conduite). 24. I was ashamed of it, 25. Were you not in want 
of money ? 26. I was not in want of it. 27. Did you not want 
your father ? 28. We did not want him. 29. Whither were you 
going when I met you ? 30. I was going to your house. 31. Were 
you driving your brother's carriage ? 32. I was driving my own (la 
mienne). 33. Were you writing to my father or to me ? 34. I was 
writing to your friend's cousin. 35. Your friend was taking me for 
your eldest brother. 



LEgON" LY. LESSON LY. 

THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. (§ 122, 123.) 

1. The past anterior is formed from the past definite of the aux- 
iliary and the past participle of the verb : j'eus parle, / had spoken; 
je fus venu, / had come. 

2. The past anterior expresses generally a momentary action, 
which took place before another action. The latter immediately 
follows the former, and often depends upon it. The action expressed 
by this tense is not a customary one. The past anterior is often 
preceded by a peine, scarcely ; des que, aussitot que, as soon as ; 
quand, lorsque, when; [§ 122. § 123, (3.)] 

Des que j'eus fini ma tache, je m'en As soon as I had finished my task, T 
allai. i^^nt away. 

3. This tense partakes of the nature of the past definite. 

4. The pluperfect is composed of the imperfect of the auxiliary 
and the past participle of the verb ; j'avais parle, Ihad spoken ; j'etais 
venu, Ihad come. 

5. To this tense might be applied nearly all the rules on the use 
of the imperfect. The action which it expresses, or the situation 



PAST ANTERIOR AND PLUPERFECT, 



161 



"wliich it depicts, is frequently a customary one, or one often re- 
peated. 

Des quej'avaisfinimat^che, je m'en As soon as my tash was finished, I 
allais. used to go away. 

RjESUME OF Examples. 



Aviez-vous eu soin de vos effets ? 
J'en avais eu soin. 
If 'aviez-vous pas eu besoin de moi ? 
J'avais eu besoin de vous et de votre 

frere. 
N'aviez-vous pas eu I'intention de 

me parler? 
Nous avions eu envie de dormir. 
Des que vous eutes fini votre lettre, 

ne la portates-vous pas a la poste ? 
Des que vous aviez lini vos lettres, 

ne les portiez-vous pas a la poste ? 

Des que vous fCitos arrive no com- 
mengates- vous pas a ecrirc? 

Des que vous etiez arrive, ne com- 
mengiez-vous pas a ecrire ? 



ffad you taken care of your things f 

I had taken care of them. 

Had you not wanted me f 

J had wanttd you and your brother. 

Had you not intended to speak io me f 

We had had a wish to sleep. 

As soon as you had finished your letter, 

did you not carry ii to the post-office^ 
As soon as your letters were finished, 

did you not (commonly) take them 

to the post-office? 
As soon as you had arrived, did you 

not commence xuriting ? 
As soon as you used to arrive, did you 

not [generally) commence writing f 



Perd-re, 1. ir 
Eemont-er, 


'. io lose 
1. to 


wind 


up ; 
Retrouv-er, 


1. io 


find 


again ; 
Sort-ir, 2. ir. 
Spectacle, m 


to go out; 
. play. 



Exercise 107. 

Arret-er, 1. io stop; figar-er, 1. to mislay; 

Bal, m. hall; Invit-er, 1. to invite; 

Bourse, f purse; Se lev-er, ref. to rise ; 

Se coucher, 1. ref. to go Malade, sick ; 

to bed ; Musicien, m. musician, 

Dangereusement, dan- Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; 

gerously ; Part-ir, 2. to set oid ; 

Diner, m. dinner ; 

1. Ne saviez-vous pas ovl le musicien etait alle ? 2. Je savais 
qu'il etait alle a Paris. 3. Ne vous avait-on pas dit que votre frere 
est mort? 4. On m'avait dit qu'il etait dangereusement malade. 
5. Ne vous coucliiez-vous pas ordinairement, des que vous aviez fini 
vos lecons? 6. Des que je les avais finies, j'allais au spectacle. 

7. Des que vous eutes fini vos lecons, que fites-vous hier au soir? 

8. Aussitot que jodes eus finies, j'allai au bal. 9. Cette petite fiUe 
n'avait-elle pas envie de dormir ? 10. EUe avait plus envie de dormir 
que d'etudier. 11. Qu' aviez-vous fait de {with) votre livre, quand je 
Tous le demandai ? 12. Je 1' avais egare. 13. Od I'tiviez-vous egare? 
14. Je I'avais oublie dans le jardin. 15. Pourquoi votre montre etait- 
elle arretee ? 16. Parce que j'avais oublie de la remonter. 17. L'hor- 
loger ne I'avait-il pas remontee ? 18. II avait oublie de le faire. 
19. N'aviez-vous pas perdu votre bourse? 20. Je I'avais perdue, 



162 CINQUANTE- SIXIEMB LEgON. 

mais je I'ai retrouvee. 21. Yotre cousin etait-il parti ? 22. H n'etait 
pas encore parti. 23. Etait-il sorti? 24. II etait sorti avec ma mere. 
25. Ou etait-il alle ? 26. II etait alle chez mon frere, qui I'avait 
invite a diner. 

EXEBCISE 108. 

1. Had you not intended to speak to mj brother? 2. I had in- 
tended to speak to him, but he had gone. 3. Did your sister go to 
bed last evening, as soon as she had read Qu) her book ? 4. She 
went to bed as soon as she had read it. 5. Did she usually go to 
bed, as soon as she had read her book ? 6. She generally went to 
bed, as soon as she had read six pages. 7. Were you told that your 
sister was sick ? 8. I was told that she had been dangerously sick. 
9. Did you know what you had done with your pen ? 10. I knew 
that I had mislaid it. 11. Had your sister mislaid hers? 12. She 
had left Qaissee) it in my room. 13. How many of your books have 
you mislaid ? 14. I had mislaid five, but my brother has found 
them. 15. Where had you left them ? 16. I had left them in the 
garden. 17. Had your brother's watch stopped ? 38. It had stopped. 
19. Why had it stopped ? 20. He had forgotten to wind it up. 
21. Had he not lost his key? {clef, f.) 22. He had not lost it. 
23. Had you wanted my father or me ? 24. I had wanted your ht- 
tle girl. 25. Was she out ? 26. She was out with your brother. 
27. Had she gone to my sister's? 28. She had gone thither. 
29. Plad the dyer gone ? 30. He had not yet gone, he intended to 
leave at five. 31. Had you spoken to him, when I came yesterday ? 
32. I had spoken to him. 33. Had you told him that my sister i3 
here ? 34. I had told him. 35. Is he still here ? 36. No, sir ; he 
has gone, he went this morning at six. 



•< ♦ »■ 



LEgON LYI. LESSON LYI. 

PLACE OF THE SUBJECT AISTD OP THE OBJECT. 

1. We have given [L. 6, R, 4, and § 76 (4.)] a rule for the place of 
the noun, subject or nominative of an interrogative sentences To 
avoid confusing the student, we have hitherto refrained from intro- 
ducing another construction which is often used by the French, 
instead of that given in the rule. When the sentence commences 
with ou, wJiere ; que, what ; quel, which ; combien, how much, how 
many ; and quand, when ; the noun may be placed immediately after 



PLACE OP SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 163 

the verb. This construction is similar to that of the English inter- 
rogative sentence, when the verb has no auxiliary [§ 76, (5.)] 

Oh. sent nos amis at nos parents? Where are our friends and relations f 
Qu'ecrit votre correspondaat ? What writes your correspondent 1 

2. When there are, in a French sentence, two regimens of equal 
length, the direct should precede the indirect [§ 76, (7.)]. 

Avez-vous donne les jouets a Ten- Have you given the child the play* 

fant ? things t 

Avez-vous donne cette lettre a Have you given the man that letter f 

rhomme ? 

3. The regime indirect precedes the direct, when the latter is fol- 
lowed by a relative pronoun, or by other words qualifying it, and 
rendering it much longer than the indirect [§ 76, (8)], The indirect 
regimen should also precede the direct, when the sentence would 
otherwise be equivocal [§ 76, (9)]. 

Avez-vous donne a Tenfant, les jouets Have you given the child, the play- 
que vous lui aviez promis ? things which you had promised 

him ? 

Resume op Examples. 

Quel age a cette demoiselle ? How old is that young lady ? 

Que veulent dire ces messieurs ? What do those gentlemen mean ? 

Oh sent alles messieurs vos freres? Where have your brothers gone ? 

Combien d'enfants a ce monsieur ? How many children has thai geutle- 

man ? 

Avez-vous paye cet argent au mar- Have you paid the merchant that 

cband ? money ? 

J'ai paye mon habit au tailleur. I paid the tailor for my coat 

Vous avez paye au tailleur, lo gilet You have paid the tailor for th,e waist' 

que vous avez achete. coat which you have bought. 

N'aviez-vous pas demande cela i Had you not asked the child for that f 



I'enfant ? 



Exercise 109. 



Accompagn-er, 1. to ac- Chaine, f, chain ; Dernier, e, last ; 

company ; Chapeau, m. hat, bon- Pres, near, nearly ; 

Aine, e, eldest ; net ; Proprietaire, m. landlord; 

Associe, m. partner; Cinquante, t fifty ; Eend-re, 4. to return; 

Anhev^ii&tQ.m. landlord ; Clef; f. key ; Serrurier, m. locksmith; 

Bouteille, f. &o«^e; Commis, m. cZer/<;; Serviette, f. wop A;m. 

1. Ou. etaient vos parents I'annee derniere ? 2. lis etaient en An- 
gleterre. 3. Oa sont restes les messieurs qui vous accompagnaient 
ce matin ? 4. lis sont restes chez leurs associes. 5. Que lisaient 
vos amies, lorsque vous les avez quittees ? 6. Elles lisaient les nou- 
velles qu' elles venaient de recevoir, 7. Que dit monsieur votre pere ? 



164 CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. 

8. H ne dit rieru 9. Quel age a ce monsieur ? 10. II a pres de cin- 
quante ans. 11, Quel age ont vos enfants ? 12. L'aine a dix ans, et 
le plus jeune a six ans. 13. Aa^cz-vous demande votre chaine d'or a 
ce monsieur ? 14. Je la lui ai demandee. 15. Avez-vous rendu au 
commis, I'argent qu'il vous avait prete ? IG. Je le lui ai rendu. 
17. Aviez-vous en vie d'envojer vos clefs au serrurier ? 18. J'avais 
envie de les lui envoyer, car elles sont cassees. 19. Aviez-von3 
oublie de payer votre habit au tailleur? 20. J'avais oublie de le 
lui payer. 21. Yalait-il la peine d' envoyer ces plumes a I'ecoKer ? 

22. II ne valait pas la peine de les lui envoyer, il en avait d'autres, 

23. Yalait-il la peine d' envoyer ces bouteilles a I'aubergiste ? 24. H 
valait la peine de les lui envoyer, car il n'en avait pas. 25. Avez-^ 
Tous demande des serviettes a votre psre ? 26. Je n'ai pas voulu 
lui en demander. 

Exercise 110. 

1. What does the tailor mean ? 2. I do not know what he means. 
3. Where is your eldest sister ? 4. She is at my brother's, or at my 
sister's. 5. What was the locksmith saying to you ? 6. He was 
saying that he has brought my key. 7. How many letters have you 
carried to the post-oflace ? 8. I have carried seven, three for you, 
and four for my father. 9. Have you given my sister the letter 
which I have written ? 10. I have not given it to her, I left it upon 
my table. 11. Where is the gentleman who has brought that pen- 
knife ? 12. He Hves at my father's ; do you wish to speak to him ? 

13. I wished to send him a letter which I brought from England. 

14. Have you returned to that man the money which he l\ad lent 
you ? 15. 1 have returned it to him. 16. Has your mother paid the 
milliner (modiste) for her bonnet? 17. She has not yet paid her for 
it. 18. How old is the shoemaker's eldest son ? 19. He is twenty- 
one. 20. Had you a wish to send your brother the key of your 
room ? 21. I had a wish to send it to him. 22. Was it worth the 
while to give your brother that book? 23. It was worth the while 
to give it to him, for (car) he wanted it. 24. Was it worth the 
while to send these bottles to tlie druggist {apothicaire) ? 25. It 
was worth the while to send them to him. 26. Where is the land- 
lord? 27. He is in England. 28. Is your sister at home ? 29. jSTo, 
sir ; she is out. 30. How many children has the locksmith ? 
31. He has ten. 22. How many books has the physician ? 33. He 
has five hundred volumes. 34. Have you given the gentleman that 
letter ? 35. I have forgotten to give it to him. 



PLACE OF THE VEEB, ETC. 165 



LEgON LYII. LESSON LYII. 

PLACE OF VERB. PRESENT TENSE USED IN FRENCH, WHERE 

THE PAST IS USED IN ENGLISH, ETC. 

1. The French avoid placing the verb at the end of such sentences 
as the following when the nominative is a noun. 

Dites moi o^ demeure M. H. Tell me where Mr. H. lives. 

Jg ne sais o^ est men pere. / do not know where my father is. 

Savez-vous ou est G-eorge ? Do you know where George is ? 

2. In speaking of a state, condition, or action, commenced in the 
past, but still continuing, the French use the present of the indica- 
tive. The past is commonly used in English in similar cases. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il qu'il est How long has he been here ? 

ici? 

II y a deux beures qu'il ecrit. He has been writing these two hours. 

II y a un mois qu'il demeure a Paris. He has lived in Paris one month. 

II y a deux ans qu'il est mort. He has been dead these two years. 

3. When, however, the state no longer continues, the past may be 
used in French, in the same manner as it is used in English. 

Combien de temps avez-vous de- How long did you live in L. t 

meure a L.? 

Combien de mois avez-vous appris How many months did you learn 

Tallemand ? German ? 

II y a un mois que je ne Tai vu. / have not seen him this month. 

4. Combien y a-t-il . . . Combien de milles y a-t-il . . . Quelle 
distance y a-t-il ? answer to the English expressions How far . . . 
JBbw many miles is it ... What is the distance, etc. 



Ri^suMis or Examples. 

Oombien de temps y a-t-il que vous How long have you had that house 7 

avez cette maison ? 

II y a deux ans que nous I'avons. We have had it these two years. 

Combien de temps avez-vous eu How long did you have this house t 

cette maison ? 

Kous I'avons eue dix ans. We had it ten years. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il que votre How long has your brother been 

frere apprend le grec ? learning Greek ? 

II y a six ans qu'il I'apprend. He has been learning it six years. 

Quelle distance y a-t-il de Calais i How far is it from Calais to Bou- 

Boulogne ? hgne ? 

II y a huit lieues de Calais i Bou- It is eight leagues from Calais to 

logne. Boulogne. 



166 cinqtjante-septieme legon. ^*^ 

Exercise 111. 

AfiBclie, f. hill ; Compagnie, f. company ; Maintennnt, now^ 

An, m.,anaee, f. year; Demeurer, 1. to Uve ; Mois, m, mordh; 

Angleierre, f. England; Demi, e, half; Morceau, va. piece ; 

Attend-re, 4. to expect^ Fatigue, e, tired; 'Ne,from naitre, 4. to he 

to wait for ; Imprimeur, m. printer ; born ; 

Copenhague, Copenha- Lieue, f. league. ; Yerger, m. orchard; 

gen ; Londres, London ; Yienne, Viemia. 

1. Combien de temps y a-t-il que M. L. demeure a Paris ? 2. 11 y 
a dix ans qu'il j demeure. 3. N'a-t-il pas demeure a Lyon ? 4. II y 
a demeure autrefois. 5. Pouvez-vous me dire ou est le fils du 
capitaine ? 6. II y a un an qu'il est en Angleterre. 7. Savez-vous 
ou demeure M. B. ? 8. II demeurait autrefois a Rouen ; je ne saia 
pas ou il demeure maintenant. 9. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes 
ici? 10. II y a plus de deux mois que nous sommes ici. 11. Com- 
bien de temps y a-t-il que vous avez ce verger ? 12. II y a un an 
que nous I'avons. 13. Ou. cet imprimeur est-il ne ? 14. II est ne 
a Falaise. 15. Savez-vous combien il y a de Paris a Yienne ? 16. II 
y a trois cent-six Heues de Paris a Yienne, et deux cents lieues de 
Yienne a Copenhague. 17. Y a-t-il longtemps que la compagnie est 
venue ? 18. II y a plus de deux heures qu'elle est ici. 19. Y a-t-il 
longtemps que vous avez lu cette affiche ? 20. II y a plus de trois 
heures que je I'ai lue. 21. N'y a-t-il pas plus d'une demi-heure que 
votre soeur lit ? 22. II y a si longtemps qu'elle lit, qu'elle en est 
fatiguee. 23. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous attendez ce morceau de 
musique ? 24. II y a plus d'un an que J3 I'attends. 

Exercise 112. 
1. Ho-w long has the printer been here ? 2. He has been here 
more than a year. 3. Do you not know w^here my father lives ? 
4. I know where he lives, but I have no time to go to his house to- 
day. 5. How long has the physician lived in Paris ? 6. He has lived 
there ten years. 7. How long did he hve in England ? 8. He lived 
in England six years and a half. 9. Can you tell me where the lock- 
smith lives ? 10. He lives at my brother's. 11. Have you been 
waiting long for this book ? 12. I have been waiting for it more 
than a year. 13. How long has your son been learning Greek ? 
14. He has been learning it these two years. 15. Was not your sis- 
ter born in Falaise ? 16. No, sir; she was born at Paris. 17. How 
long has your brother had this orchard ? 18. He has had it more 
than six months. 19. How far is it from Paris to Lyons ? 20. It is 
one hundred and sixteen leagues from Paris to Lyons. 21. Is it 
farther (jtlvs lain) from Lyons to Geneva (Gtneve) than from Lyons 



CHAKGEE, TARDBK. 167 

to Tarin ? 22. It is farther from Lyons to Turin than from Lyons to 
Geneva. 23. How long did your father Uve in Germany? {AUe- 
magne.) 24. He hved in Germany two years, and in England six 
months. 25. How long have you lived in Paris? 26. We have 
been here six months. 27. How long did you hve in Eome ? 28. We 
lived there more than a year. 29. How long has your brother been 
gone ? 30. He has been gone these two years. 31. Have you been 
learning German more than one year ? 32. I have been learning it 
more than four years. 33. Your sister has been learning music one 
year and a half. 



LEgON LVHL LESSON LYHL 

CHANGER, TARDER. 

1. Changer [1. see § 49, (1.)], used in the sense of to change, to leave 
one thing for another, is folio w^ed by the preposition de; changer 
d'habit, de chapeau, etc., to put on another coat, hat, etc.\' changer 
d'avis, to change one's mind ; changer de maison, to move, to change 
houses ; changer de place, changer de pays, changer de climat, to go 
to another place, country, climate ; changer de nom, to change one's 
name. The student will perceive that the noun following changer, is 
not preceded by a possessive adjective, Hke the noun of the English 
sentence. 

Youlez-vous changer d'habit? Will you change your coat? 

Ce monsieur a change de nom. That gentleman has changed his name. 

2. Changer contre, means to exchange for ; changer pour, to change 
for, to get change for. 

Toulez-vous changer votre chapeau Will you exchange your hat for minef 

contre le mien ? 
Changez ce billet pour de I'argent. Change that Ml for silver. 

3. Tarder means to tarry, to he long in coming. Tarder, used 
unipersonally, and accompanied by an indirect object, means to long^ 
to wish for. 

Votre scEur tarde bien a venir. Your sister is very long coming. 
II me tarde de la voir. / long to see her. 

Resume op Examples. 

N'avez-vous pas change d'apparte- Have you not taken another aparU 

ment ? ment 7 

Nous avous change de maison. , We have changed houses. 



168 CINQUANTE-HiriTIEME LEgON". 

"Votre frere a change de conduite. Tour Irother has changed his conduct 

Cotte dame a change de religion. That lady has changed her religion. 

Centre quoi avez-vous change votre For what have you exchanged your 

clieval ? horse ? 

J'ai besoin de monuaie, pouvez-vous / want change^ can you change ms 

me changer cette piece de vingt this twenty franc piece 7 

francs ? 

Ce garco'n a beaucoup tarde. That toy tarried very much. 

II nous tardait d'arriver. We longed to arrive. 

II leur tardait de re voir leurs amis. They longed to see tlieir friends again, 

II me tarde de re voir la France, I long to see Prance again. 

Exercise 113. 

Air, ra. air ; Jeune, young ; Pays, m. country ; 
Avis, m. mind, meaning ; Maitre, m. master, owner ;Fiece, f. piece ; 

Blanc, che, white; Manteau, m. cloak; Eentr-er, 1. to come in 

Combat, m. covihat] Monnaie, f. change; again, to go in again; 

Conduite, f. conduct ; Mouille, e, wet ; Yie, f. life, conduct ; 

Gr\s, e, gray ; Farce q\\e, because ; Yisage, m. countenance, 

Guinee, f. guinea ; Passe, e, past, last ; face. 

1. Get homme n'a-t-il pas change de vie ? 2. E a change de con- 
duite. 3. Cette grande maison n'a-t-elle pas change de maitre ? 

4. EUe a change de maitre, le capitaine Gr. vient de I'acheter. 5. Vous 
etes mouille, pourquoi ne changez-vous pas de manteau ? 6. Parce 
que je n'en ai pas d'autre, 7. Votre cousine ne change-t-elle paa 
souvent d'avis? 8. Elle en change bien souvent. 9. Pendant le 
combat, ce jeune soldat n'a-t-il pas change de visage ? 10. H n'a 
point change de visage ? 11. Ce malade ne devrait-il pas changer 
d'air ? 12. Le medecin lui recommande de changer de pays. 13. Ou 
est votre cheval gris ? 14. Je ne I'ai plus, je I'ai change centre un 
blanc. 15. Avec qui I'avez-vous change ? 16. Je I'ai change avec 
le jeune homme qui demeurait ici le mois passe. 17. Le mar- 
chand peut-il me changer cette piece de quarante francs ? 18. II ne 
saurait (cannot) vous la changer, il n'a pas de monnaie. 19. Avez- 
vous la monnaie d'une guinee ? (change for a guinea). 20. Combien 
de schellings y a-t-il dans une guinee ? 21. II y en a vingt et un. 
22. Yotre petit garcon ne tarde-t-il pas a rentrer ? 23. H tarde beau- 
coup. 24. ISTe V0U3 tarde-t-il pas d'aller en ItaHe ? 25. II me tarde 
d'y aller, 

EXEKCISE 114. 

1. Why do you not change your coat ? 2. For a very good rea- 
son, (raison^ f.) because I have no other. 3. Has your father changed 
houses ? 4. No, sir ; but we intend to do so (de le faire) to-morrow. 

5. Has that child changed his conduct ? 6. He has changed his con- 
duct, he is very good now (mainienanf). 7. Have you changed your 



PLURAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 169 

religion ? 8. No, sir ; I have not changed my religion. 9. Do you 
not change your place very often ? 10. I change my place when I 
am tired. 11. Does not your sister change her mind every day? 
12. She does not change her mind every day. 13. Was not your 
brother afraid, did not his countenance change ? 14. His counte- 
nance changed, but he was not afraid. 15. Have you not changed 
rooms (chambre, f.) ? 16. I have not changed rooms, my room is 
very good. 17. Do you not long to be in France ? 18. I long to 
be there. 19. Does not your mother tarry too long ? 20. She is 
very long in coming. 21. Have you changed the forty franc piece? 
22. I have not changed it yet . 23. Why have you not changed it ? 
S4. Because your father has no change. 25. Have you the change 
for a guinea ? 26. No, sir ; I have only twelve shillings. 27. How 
many cents are there in a dollar ? 28. There are one hundred. 
29. Has that gentleman exchanged that house ? 30. Yes, sir ; he has 
exchanged it for a warehouse. 31. Will you exchange your hat for 
mine ? 32. No, sir ; your hat is too small for me. 33. With whom 
have you exchanged your horse,? 34. I have exchanged it with my 
brother. 35. I have exchanofed it for a white one. 



LEgON LIX. LESSON LIX 

PLURAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 

1. We have given in Lesson 11, rules for forming the plural of 
nouns, but have in accordance with our plan of not presenting too 
many difficulties at once, deferred until the present Lesson, the rules 
for the formation of the plural of compound nouns. 

2. When a noun is composed of two substantives, or of a substan- 
tive and an adjective, both take the form of the plural : un chef-lieu, 
des chefs-Heux, a chief place, chief places ; un gentilhomme, des 
gentilshommes, a nobleman, noblemen [§ 9, (1.) (3.)]. 

3. When, however, two nouns are connected by a preposition, the 
first only becomes plural : Un chef-d'oeuvre, des chefs-d'oeuvre, a 
master-piece, master-pieces [§ 9, (2.)]. 

4. In words composed of a noun and a verb, preposition or ad- 
verb, the^^oim only becomes plural; passe-port, passe-ports, pass- 
port, passports [§ 9, (6.)]. 

5. Words composed of two verbs^ or of a verb, an adverb, and a 

8 



110 CINQTJANTE-NEUVIEME LEgON. 

preposition, are invariable: un passe-partout, des passe-partout, 
master-key, master-keys [§ 9, (8.)]. 

6. We have seen [L. 5, R. 4.] that the name of the material al- 
ways follows the name of the object, and that both are united by the 
preposition de. The name of the profession or occupation, also fol- 
lows the noun representing the individual, and the same preposition 
de connects the two : un maitre d'armes, a fencing -master ; un maitre 
de dessin, a drawing master ; un marchand de farine, a dealer injlour 
[§ 76, (12.) § 81, (4.)]. 

7. The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, etc., always precedes the noun 
describing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose to 
which it is adapted ; the name of an apartment, that of the use to 
which it is appropriated. The connecting preposition is a: un 
moulin a vapeur, a steam mill ; un bateau a vapeur, a steamboat; un 
moulin a eau, a water mill; la salle a manger, the dining-room, 
[§ 76, (13.) (14.) § 81, (4.) (5.)]. 

Resume of Examples. 

Lille et Arras sent les chefs-lieux Lisle and Arras are the chief places 

des departements du Nord et du of the departments of the North and 

Pas-de-Calais. of the Pas-de- Calais. 

Les cbemins de fer et les bateaux Railroads and steamboats are very 

a vapeur sent tres nombreux en numerous in America. 

Amerique. 

Cette maison contient un salon, una Tliat house contains a drawing-room, 

salle a manger, uue cuisine, et plu- a dining-room, a kitchen, and seve- 

sieurs chambres a coucher. ral bed-rooms. 

Les moulins a vent sent plus com- Windmills are more common irv 

muns en France que les moulins France than water or steam-mills. 



a eau ou a vapeur. 



Exercise 115. 



Armes, f. -^.fencing ; Departement, m. depart- Se munir, ]. ref. to pro- 

Bat-ir, 2. to build ; ment ; vide ones self with ; 

Bouteille, f. bottle; Dessin, m. drawing ; Ordinaire, usual; 

Cabriolet, m. gig; Eugag-er, \. to engage; Roue, f. wheel; 

Chat-haant, m. owl; Faire hat-ir, 2. to have Yoyng-er, 1. to travel; 

Chauve-souris, f. bat ; buili ; Voile, f. sail. 
Italic, £ Italy; 

1. Faut-il avoir un passe-port pour voyager en France ? 2. II faut 
en avoir un. 3. Les Anglais se munissent-ils de passe-ports pour 
voyager en Angleterre ? 4. On n'a pas besoin de passe-port en 
Angleterre. 5. Aimez-vous a voyager sur les chemins de fer? 
6. J'aime mieux voyager sur les chemins de fer que sur les chemins 
ordinaires. 7. Avez-vous apporte vos passe-partout? 8. Je n'ai 
point de passe-partout, je n'ai que des clefs ordinaires. 9. Yotre 



PLUEAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 171 

frere est-il venu dans un bateau a vapjeur ? 10. II est venu dans un 
bateau a voiles. 11. Avez-vous une voiture a quatre chevaux? 

12. Non, monsieur ; nous n'avons qu'un cabriolet a un cheval. 

13. Votre fiere a-t-il bati un moulin a vapeur ? 14. II a fait batir 
deux moulins, I'un a vent et 1' autre a eau. 15. Yotre compagnon 
a-t-il engage un maitre d'armes? 16. Non, monsieur; il a deja un 
maitre de dessin, et un maitre de danse. 17. Combien de chambres 
a coucher avez-vous? 18. Nous en avons deux. 19. Avez-vous 
une bouteille de vin? 20. Non, monsieur; mais j'ai une bouteille a 
vin (wine-hoUle) [§ 81.]. 21. Yoyez-vous les chats-huants ? 22. N"on, 
mais je vols les chauves-souris. 23. J'ai une voiture a quatre 
roues. 

Exercise 116. 

1. Is your father in England ? 2. No, sir ; he is in France with 
my brother. 3. Have they taken passports ? 4. Yes, sir ; they have 
taken two. 5. Is it necessary to have a passport to travel in Amer- 
ica ? 6. No, sir ; but it is necessary to have one to travel in Italy. 
7. Is there a steamboat from Calais to Dover (Bouvres) ? 8. There 
are several. 9. Is there a railroad from Paris to Brussels (Bruxelles)? 

10. There is one from Paris to Brussels, and one from Paris to Tours. 

11. Has your brother bought a wind-mill? 12. No, sir; but he 
has built a steam-mill. 13. Are there many wind-mills in America ? 

14. No, sir ; but there are many water and steam-mills. 15. Have 
your sisters a dancing-master? 16. They have a dancing-master, and 
a music master. 17. Does your cousin learn drawing ? 18. He does 
not learn it, he cannot find a drawing-master. 19. Is the fencing- 
master in the dining-room ? 20. No, sir ; he is in the drawing-room. 
21. Is your cousin in his bed-room? 22. No, sir; he is out (sorti). 
23. How many rooms are there in your house. 24. Five ; a kitchen, 
a dining-room, a drawing-room, and two bed-rooms. 25. Are there 
owls here? 26. Yes, sir; and bats too. 27. Have you seen those 
master-pieces ? 28. Yes, sir ; I have seen them. 29. Have you sent 
them to the chief place of the department ? 30. I have sent them 
there. 31. Have you a two-horse gig? 32. I have a four-horse 
one. 33. Has your brother a two-wheel carriage ? 34. He has a 
two-seat carriage (d deux sieges). 



172 



SOIXANTIEME LEgON. 



LEgON LX. * LESSON LX. 

THE TWO FUTURES, SliSIPLE, AXD AXTEEIOK. [§ 124.] 

1. The future of every verb, in the French language, ends witli 
rai, ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. 

2. This tense, in all the regular verbs, as also in the irregular verbs 
not mentioned in the next lesson, may be formed from the present 
of the infinitive by changing the r of the first and second conjuga- 
tions, and the oir and re of the third and fourth, into the termiaations 
9,keady given, and here again repeated. 

3. Conjugation" of the Future Simple of the Regular Yerbs, 



Je 


chante -rai 


fini -rai 


recev -rai 


rend -rai 


I 


icill sing 


will finish 


will receive 


will render 


Tu 


parle -ras 


cberi -rag 


apereev -ras 


vend -raa 


Tliou 


u-ilt Kpeah 


ojcilt cherish 


wilt 2'>ei"cec')ie 


vilt sell 


11 


donne -ra 


fourni -ra 


percev -ra 


tend -ra 


ITe 


shall give 


%c ill famish 


will gather 


tcill tend 


Nous 


cherche-rons 


pimi -rons 


concev -reus 


entend -rons 


We 


wUl Keek 


shall puni-sli 


icill conceive 


^cill hear 


Yous 


porta -rez 


saisi -rez 


dev -rez 


perd -rez 


Tow 


will carry 


will seise 


xiill owe 


will lose 


Us 


aime -rent 


uni -rout 


decev -ront 


mord -ront 


Tliey 


vMl love 


will unite 


will deceive 


wiU bite 



4. The future anterior is merely the past participle of the verb, 
conjugated with the future of one of the auxiliaries avoir and eire : 

J'aurai fini; je me serai flatte. I shall have done ; I shall have flattered 

myself. 

5. The student, when rendering English into French, should be 
careful to distinguish will, taken as an auxiliary, from the same word 
employed as a separate verb. In this latter case, it is always equiva- 
lent to the verb, to wish, or to he willing, and should not be rendered 
by the future of the verb, but by the present of vouloir : 

Ke lui ecrirez-vous pas ? Will you not write to him ? (are you 

not going to write to him ?) 
Ne voiilez-vous pas lui ecrire ? Will you not (are you not willing) to 

write to him ? 

In the first example wiU is used as an auxiliary to write ; in the 
second it is used as a separate verb. 

E-EsuiiE OF Examples. 

Quand parlerez-vous ^ ce monsieur ? When will you speak to that genilc' 

man? 
Yous foumira-t-il des provisions ? Will he furnish you provisions ? 
Us ne recevront pas leurs revenus. Iliey wiU not receive their income. 



THE TWO FUTURES, ETC. 173" 

Ne vendrez-voTis pas vos proprietea ? Will you not sell your property f 

Que voulez-Tous avoir ? What do you wish to have ? 

Que veut lire votre frere ? Wfiai will your brother readf 

Apporterez-vous des pommes ? Will you bring apples ? 

Kous araenerous nos enfants. We will bring our children. 

Yous apporierez des legumes. Tou will bring vegetables. 

Exercise 117. 

Abreuvoir, m. watering Champ, to., field; Men-er, 1. [§49, (6.)] to 

place; Chuteau, m. villa; take, to lead; 

Appel-er, 1. [§ 49, (4.)] Colporteur, m. pedlar, Se ■ promcn-er, 1. ref. 

to call ; haivker ; [§ 49, (6.)] to loalk or 

Apres-midi, f. o/i^ernoorz; Conner a manger, to/eecZ; ride for pleasure, or 

Avoine, f. oats ; Ecurie, f. stable ; health ; 

Ble, m, wheat; Foin, m. hay; Recolt-er, 1. to harvest; 

Cachet-er, 1. [§ 49, (4.)] Geler, 1. [§ 49, (5.)] to Sem-er, 1. [§ 49, (6.)] to 

to seal ; freeze ; sow. 

1. Menerez-vous vos enfants h I'ecole ? 2. Je les menerai sL 
I'ecole et a I'eglise. 3. Le jardinier apportera-t-il des legumes au 
marche? 4. II y en apportera. 5. Ou menerez-vous ce cheval? 
6. Je le menerai a l' ecurie. 7. Lui donnerez-vous §, manger? 
8. Je lui donnerai du foin et de I'avoine. 9. Lui donnerez-vous de 
I'eau? 10. Je le menerai a I'abreuvoir. 11. Paierez-[§ 49, (2.)] vous 
ce que vous devez? 12. Ne voulez-vous pas vous promener ? 13. Je 
me promenerai cette apres-midi. 14. Yous promenerez-vous a pied, 
ou a cheval? 15. Je me promenerai a cheval, et ma soeur se prome- 
nera en vqiture. 16. March erez-vous beaucoup, dans votre voyage 
a Paris ? 17. Nous ne marcherons pas du tout. 18. N'appellerez- 
[§ 49, (4.)] vous pas le colporteur ? 19. Je ne I'appellerai pas. 
20. N'acheterez- [§ 49, (5.)] vous pas ce chateau? 21. Nous I'ache- 
terons si nous pouvons. 22. Ne gelera-t-il pas [§ 49, (5 )] cette 
nuit ? 23. Je ne le crois pas, il fait trop chaud. 24. Ne semerez- 
[§ 49, (6.)] vous pas tout le ble que vous recolterez ? 25. Je n'en 
gdmerai qu'une partie, je vendrai le reste. 26. Je cachetterai mes 
lettres, et je les porterai a la poste. 

Exercise 118. 

1. WUl not the gentleman call his children ? 2. He will call his 
children and his sister's. 3. Will you not bring your children? 
4. I cannot bring them. 5. Will you not take a ride this afternoon? 
6. We wiU ride in a carriage to-morrow. 7. Will you not buy my 
father's horses? 8. I shall not buy them, I have no money. 9. Will 
you not call the pedlar ? 10. I do not wish to call him, I do not 
wish to buy anything. 11. Will you pay the tailor? 12. I will 
pay him for my coat. 13. Will it not freeze to-morrow. 14. It will 



174 SOIXANTE ET UNIBME LEgON. 

freeze to-morrow ; it is very cold. 15. Will you not sow oats in 
this field ? {See note, Lesson 7). 16. I will not sow oats, I will sow 
wheat there. 17. Will you take your sister to school ? 18. I will 
take her there this afternoon. 19. "Will you not take your son to 
market ? 20. I will not take him there. 21. Will not the gardener 
take his horse to the watering place ? 22. He will take him there. 
23. Will you give oats to your horse? 24. I will give him hay. 
25. Will you bring your son with you? 26. I will bring him to- 
morrow. 27. Will he bring his horse ? 28. He wiR bring his horse 
and carriage. 29. Why do you carry that little child? 30. He is 
too sick to (pour) walk. 31. Will your brother sell his property ? 
32. He will only sell part of it. 33. Will not your servant carry the 
letter to the post-office? 34. I will seal it and give it to him. 
35. Will you feed my horse ? 36. I will not feed him, I have 
no oats. 

» » » 

LEgON LXI. LESSOR LXI. 

lEEEGULAEITIES OF THE FUTURE. 

1. The two irregular verbs of the first conjugation aller, to go, and 
envoyer, to send, make in the future firai, fenverrai [see § 62.] 

2. All the verbs of the second conjugation, which end in enir, 
change that termination into iendrai, etc., for the future ; as, tenir, 
to hold ; venir, to come ; je tiendrai, je viendrai. Acquerir, to ac- 
quire ; conquerir, to conquer ; requerir, to require; mourir, to die; 
and courir, to run, and its compounds, double the r in the future : — 
j^acquerrai, je mourrai, je courrai. Cueillir, to gather, and its com- 
pounds, change the i preceding the r into e : je cueillerai 

3. In the third conjugation, s'asseoir, to sit down, and seoir, to sit, 
make je m^assiirai and je sitrai. Falloir, to he necessary, vouloir, to 
he willing, and valoir, to he worth, make il faudra, je voudrai, and je 
vaudrai Yoir, to see, and revoir, to see again, make je verrcii, j& 
reverrai. Pouvoir, to he able, makes je pourrai, and pourvoir, to pro- 
vide, je pourvoirai. Savoir, to know, and avoir, to have, make je 
saurai, and faurai. 

4. £tre, to he, faire, to maJce, and its compounds, are the only verbs 
of the fourth conjugation, which are irregular in the future: je serai, 
jeferai^ etc. 

5. The futures, simple and anterior, are used in French after an 
adverb of time, in eases similar to those in which the English use 
the present and perfect of the indicative, with a future meaning. 



IBEEGULAEITIES OP THE FUTURE. 175 

Quand vous verrez ces messieurs, . . When you see those gentlemen . . , 
Des que vous aurez regu cette lettre As soon as you have received this 
vous partirez. letter you will leave. 

Kesume of Examples. 

Irez-vous en France cette annee ? Shall you go to France this year t 

Nous irons en France et en Italie. We shall go to France and Italy. 

Nous vous enverrons chercher. We shall send for you. 

Ne viendrez-vous pas nous trouver ? Will you not come to usf 

Ne nous assicrons-nous pas ? Shall we not sit down ? 

Quand ils viendront, j'aurai ma WJien they come, I shall have my letter, 

Cela vaudra"-t-il la peine ? Will that be worth the while ? 

Get habit ira-t-il bien ? Will that coat Jit well f 

II faudra leur envoyer de I'argent. It will be necessary to send them 

money. 

Exercise 119. 

Avec, with ; Guitare, f. guitar ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out, 

Bientot, soon; Lentement, slowly; to leave; 

Connait-re, 4. ir. to Malade, ill, sick; Permett-re, 4. ir. to per' 

know ; Marcli-er, to walk, to go mil ; 

DemaXxi, to-morrow ; on foot; VlsasXr, rci. pleasure ; 

Demeure, f. dwelling ; Moi-meme, myself; Pret-er, 1. to lend ; 

Fraise, f. strawberry ; Ou, where ; Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out. 

1. No viendrez-vous pas nous voir demain ? 2. J'irai vous voir, si 
le temps le permet. 3. N'enverrez-vous pas chercher le medecin, si 
votre fils est malade ? 4, Je I'irai chercher moi-meme. 5. Quand je 
serai fatigue, je marcherai plus lentement. 6. Quand vous connaitrez 
sa demeure, irez-vous le voir ? 7. J'irai le voir, aussitot que je saurai 
ou il demeure. 8. Ne le verrez-vous pas aujourd'hui? 9. Je le 
verrai cette apres-midi. 10, Pourrez-vous nous accompagner ? 
11. Je le ferai avec beaucoup de plaisir. 12. Ne leur enverrez-vous 
point des fraises ? 13. Je leur en enverrai, quand les miennes seront 
inures. 14. Ne faudra-t-il pas leur ecrire bientot ? 15. Quand nous 
aurons re9U des nouvelles de leur parent, il 'faudra leur ecrire. 
16. Que ferons-nous demain ? 17. Nous irons a la chasse. 18. N'irez- 
vous paschez votre pere ? 19, Nous irons certainement. 20, Quand 
votre guitare sera arrivee, la preterez-vous ? 21. Je ne pourrai la 
preter. 22, A quelle heure partirez-vous demain ? 23, Je partirai 
a cinq heures du matin, 24. Ne sortirez-vous pas ce soir ? 25. Je 
ne sortirai pas, et je me coucherai de bonne heure. 

Exercise 120. 
1. Will you send for the physician ? 2. I will send for him this 
afternoon. 3. Will not the little girl go and fetch apples? 4. She 
will send for some. 5. Will you not sit down, when you are tired? 



176 



SOIX ANTE-DEUXlijME LEgON. 



6. We will not sit down, we have no time. 7. What will your 
brother do, when he is tired ? [E. 5.] 8. He will do what [ce que] 
he can. [R. 5.] 9. Will it be worth the while to (de) write to him ? 

10. It will not be worth the wMle, for (ca?-) he will not come. 

11. Will it not be necessary to speak to the merchant ? 12. It will 
not be necessary to speak to him. 13. WiU it be necessary for us to 
take passports ? 14. It will be necessary. (i7 le faudra.') 15. Will 
not your Httle boy walk more slowly, when he is tired ? 16. When 
Le is tired, he will sit down. 1 7. What will your sister do to-mor- 
row ? 18. She will go to church and to school. 19. WiU she not 
come here ? 20. She will not be able to come. 21. Will you walk, 
or go on horseback ? (Irez-voiis a pied^ ou a cheval f) 22. I shaU go on 
horseback. 23. Why do you not go in a carriage ? 24. Because my 
carriage is in London. 25. Wuen will you see them? 26. I shall 
see them as soon as I can. 27. Will they come to our house to- 
morrow ? 28. They will do so with much pleasure. 29. When you 
see that gentleman, will you speak to him / 30. I will not speak to 
Mm. 31. When you have written your letters, what will you do ? 
32. I shall come to your house. 33. When you have read that book, 
will you send it to me ? 34. I will send it to you. 35. Will you 
send it to-day ? 36. I will send it to-morrow. 37. They will come 
to you to-morrow. 



LEgON LXII. LESSON LXIL 

THE TWO COXDITIOXALS. (§ 125.) 

1. The conditional present may be formed from the future, by 
displacing the terminations ot, as, a, ons, ez, ont, and substituting 
those of the imperfect of the indicative, ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient. 

2. Every verb in the French language, regular and hregular, has 
in this tense the above terminations. 

3. Conjugation of the Conditional Present of the Eegulab 



Verbs, 



Je chanter -ais 

I would sing 
Tu parler -ais 
Tliou wouldst speak 

II donner -ait 
Re should give 
Nouschercher -ions 
We xcould -seek 
Vous porter -iez 
Y'lU should carry 
Bs aimer -aient 
They would love 



finir -ais 
would finish 
cherir -ais 
v:ouldst cherish 
fournir -ait 
shouldfu'/vvish 
punir -ions 
should punish 
saisir -iez 
xcould seize 
unir -aient 
shauld unit& 



recevr -ais 
would receive 
apercevr -ais 
woullst perci-ive 
percevr -ait 
would gather 
concevr -ions 
would conceive 
devr -iez 
shoidd owe 
decevr -aient 
would deceive 



rendr -ais 
would render 
vendr -ais 
xcould st sell 
tendr -ait 
should lend 
entendr -ions 
should hear 
perdr -iez 
would lose 
mordr -aient 
should TiiU 



THE TWO CONDITIONALS. lYY 

4. The irregularities of the conditional do not appear in the ter- 
minations, but in the stem of the verb. They are precisely the same 
as those of the future. Those irregularities will be found in the last 
lesson, and need not be repeated here. The conditional of any irreg- 
ular verb may be formed, by placing after the last r of the future, the 
terminations of the imperfect of the indicative. 

5. The conditional past is formed from the conditional present of 
one of the auxiharies, avoir^ ttre^ and the past participle of the verb 
[§ 125, (2.)] 

J'aurais ecrit, je me serais flatte. / should have luritten, I should have 

flattered myself. 

6. The two futures and the two conditionals should not be used 
after the conjunction si (if). But in such case, the present and the 
imperfect of the indicative should be used. 

S'il pouvait quitter son pere, 11 vien- If he could leave his father, he would 

drait. come. 

Si j'etais a votre place, j'irais. If I were in your place, I would go. 

Kksums of Examples. 

Nous irions a la chasse, si nous We would go hunting, if we had time, 

avions le temps. 

Je lirais, si j'awiis des livres iei. I would read.if I had hooks here. 

J'aimerais mieux aller a pied qu'a I would prefer walking to riding. 

cheval 

Votre mere se porterait mieux a Tour mother would le letter in Paris, 

Paris. 

Nous nous passerions facilement de We might easily do without that hook. 

ce livre. 

Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui ecrire? Would it not he hetter to lorite to Mm 9 

Ne faudrait-il pas lui ecru'e ? Would it not be necessary to write to 

him? 

Je m'assierais, si j'etais fati,(?ue. I loould sit dmon if I were tired. 

Cet habit m'irait bien, s'il etait asscz Tnat coat would fit me well, if it were 

large. b?-oad enough. 

Exercise 121. 
S'amus-er, 1. ref, to S'ennuy-er, 1. ref. [§49.] Peut-etre, perhaps; 

amuse one^s self; to he or become weary ; Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to he 

S'approch-er, 1. ref. to Interromp-re, 4. ir. to mistaken; 

come near ; interruj^t ; Se por-ter, 1. ref. to he 

Certainement, certo?*nZy ; Tnvit-er, 1. to invite ; or do; 

S'eloign-er, 1. ref. to go Mett-re, 4. ir. to put on; Sech-er, 1. to dry ; 

from; Mouill-er, 1. to loet ; Vite, quick, quickly; 

Demeur-er, 1. to live ; 6t-er, 1. to take off; Yoyage, m. journey. 

1. Quel habit mettriez-vous, si vous alliez a la chasse? 2. Je 
mettrais un habit vert. 3. N'oteriez-vous pas vos bottes, si elles 
^taient mouiUees ? 4. Je les 6teraia, et je les ferais sechei*. 5. Si 



178 SOIXANTE-DEUXIIJME LEQON. 

vous aviez froid, ne vous approcheriez-vous pas du feu ? 6. Je m'en 

approcherais certaineraent. 7. Votre petit garcon ne s'en ^loigne- 
rait-il pas, s'il avait trop cliaud ? 8. II s'en eloignerait bien vite. 
9. Vous ennuieriez-vous ici ? 10. Je ne m'ennuierais pas, je m'amuse- 
rais a lire. 11. Ne vous tromperiez-vous pas, si vous faisiez ce cal- 
cul? 12. Je me tromperais peut-etre, si j'etais interrompu. 13. Vien- 
driez-vous, si on vous invitait ? 14. Je viendrais avec beaucoup de 
plaisir. 15. Ne vous porteriez-vous pas mieux, si vous lisiez moins ? 
16. Je me porterais beaucoup mieux. 17. Ne faudrait-il pas lui parler 
de votre affaire ? 18. II faudrait lui en parler. 19. Combien d'argent 
vous faudrait-il? 20. II me faudrait mille francs, si je faisais ce 
voyage. 21. Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui parler, que lui ecrire? 
22. II vaudrait mieux lui ecrire. 23. Si vous etiez a ma place, que 
feriez-vous ? 24. Si j'etais a votre place, je lui paierais ce que je lui 
dois. 25. Si j'avais le temps, je porterais volontiers vos lettres b, la 
poste. 

EXEECISE 122. 

1. "Would you not read if you had time ? 2. I would read two 
hours every day, if I had time. 3. What coat would your brother 
put on, if he went to church ? 4. He would put on a black coat. 
5, "Would you put on a black hat ? 6. I would put on a straw hat, 
(chapeau de paille) if it was warm. 7. Would you not draw [L. 39, 6.] 
near the fire, if you were cold ? 8. We would draw near it. 
9. Would you not take off your coat ? 10. I would take it off, if 
it were wet. 11. Would you go to my father's, if he invited 
you ? 12. I would go to his house and to your brother's, if they in- 
vited me. 13. Would you put on your boots, if they were wet? 
14. If they were wet, I would not put them on. 15. How much 
money would you want, if you went to England ? 16. We would 
want three thousand francs. 17. Would you not be better, if you 
lived in the country ? 18. I should not be better, 19. Would it 
not be better to write to your brother? 20. It would be better to 
write to him. 21. Would you read the book, if I lent it to you? 
22. I would certainly read it. 23. If you were in his place, would 
you go to school ? 24. If I were in his place, I would go. 25. If 
you were in my place, would you write to him ? 26, I would write 
to him every day. 27. Would your sister be mistaken ? 28. She 
would not be mistaken, she is very attentive. 29. If you rose every 
morning at five, would you be better ? 30. I should not be better. 
31. Would you prefer going on foot ? 32. I would prefer going on 
horseback. 33. Would you not sit down ? 34. I would sit down, 
if I were tired. 



TAIEE USED IDIOMATICALLY, ETC. 1T9 

LEgON LXIIL LESSON LXEI. 

FAIEE USED IDIOMATICALLY, ETC. 

1. The ve^b/a^Ve' is used in the formation of a number of idiomatic 

sentences. See L. 32, R. 3, 4. Faire faire, to have made^ to bespeak ; 

faire raccommoder, to have mended ; faire la cuisine, to cook ; faire cuire, 

to cook, to hake; faire bouillir, to boil; faire rotir, to roast; faire 

chauffer, to warm (in speaking of food) ; faire bonne chere, to live 

well. 

Nous avoas fait faire des habits. We have had clothes made. 

Vous faites raccommoder vos gilets. Tou have your waistcoats mended. 

2. The past participle of faire never varies, when it precedes an 
infinitive. 

Les livres que vous avez fait venir. The looks which you have sent for. 

3. Faire peur, to frighten; faire attention, to pay attention; faire 
tort, to injure ; faire mal, faire du mal, to hurt, take a before a noun. 

Nous avons fait peur a ces enfants. We have frightened those children. 
Vous leur avez fait mal. . Tou have hurt them 

4. The last example will show that, when a noun preceded by d, 
expressed or understood, is replaced by a pronoun, that pronoun will 
take the form of the indirect regimen (dative). By an exception to 
the rules for the place of personal pronouns, when faire attention has 
for its indirect object a pronoun representing a person, that pronoun 
follows the verb. 

Nous ferons attention a lui. We will pay attention to him. 

5. In speaking of the parts of the body, the French use the article, 
7e, la, les, etc., instead of the possessive adjective, [§ 77, (9.)J when 
the possession is expressed by a reflective (L. 37, R. 1.) or other per- 
Bonal pronoun, or by some other word in the sentence. 

Vous m'avez fait mal a la main. You have hurt my hand. 

Le bras lui fait mal. His arm hurts or pains Mm, 

Resume op Examples. 
Perez-vous raccommoder vos sou- Will you have your shoes mended f 

liers ? 
Je ferais faire un habit, si j'avais de / would bespeak a coat, if I had 

I'argent. money. 

* In the present participle of faire and its compounds, in the first person 
plural of the present of the indicative and the imperative, and throuahout 
the imperfect, the ai of the first syllable is pronounced nearly like u in tub ; 
also in the word bienfaisance, . , 



180 SOTXANTE-TROISIEME LEgON. 

H ne salt pas faire la cuisine. He does not understand cooMng. 

Avez-vous fait cuire votre viande ? Have you cooked your meat ? 

Ferez-vous ciiautfer votre bouillon ? Will you warm your iroth f 

Vous lui avez isdi mal au coude. You have hurt his elbow. 

Vous m'avez fait mal au pied. Tou have hurt my foot. 

Vous avez fait peindre votre mai- You have had your new hov^e painted. 



son neuve. 



EXEECISE 123. 



Bat-ir, 2, to huild ; Gigot de mouton, m. kg Oli, where; 
Bouillon, m, broth ; of mutton ; Pied, m. foot ; 

Bras, m, arm; Gravure, f engraving; Poignet, m. wrist; 

Chicn, m, dog ; Magon, m, mason ; Tete, f. head ; 

Cuisinier, m. cook ; Main, f. hand; Tout a Vhem-e,hy-and-iy; 

£paule, t shoulder; Ma.rch-eT,l. to step,tread ; Travail, m. work, labor. 

1. Quand ferez-vous batir une maison ? 2, J' en ferai batir une 
I'annee prociiaine, si je recois men argent. 3. Avez-vous fait bouil- 
lir ce gigot de mouton ? 4. Je I'ai fait rotir. 5. Le cuisinier a-t-il 
fait chauffer votre bomllon ? 6. II ne I'a pas encore fait chauffer, 
mais il le fera tout-a-l'heure. 7. E"' avez-vous pas fait venir des 
livres? 8. Nous n'en avons pas fait venir, mais nous avons fait venir 
des gravures. 9. N'avez-vous pas fait peur a ces petites filles ? 
10. iSTous leur avons fait peur, 11. Ferez-vous attention a votre 
travail? 12. J'y ferai attention. 13. Avez-vous fait mal a cette 
petite fille ? 14. Je ne lui ai pas fait mal, 15. N' avez-vous pas fait 
mal a ce chien ? 16, Je lui ai fait mal. 17, Ou avez-vous fait mal 
si votre fils ? 18, Je lui a fait mal au bras et a la main. 19. Ne lui 
avez-vous pas fait mal au pied ? 20. Je lui ai fait mal a I'epaule. 
21. A qui ce macon a-t-il fait mal? 22. II n'a fait mal a personne. 
23. Yous ai-je fait mal au pied? 24. Vous m'avez marche sur le 
pied, et vous m'avez fait mal. 25. La tete. I'epaule, le bras, le 
yoignet, et la main me font maL [R. 5.] 

EXEECISE 124. 

% WiU you have your coat mended ? 2. I will not have it 
mended. 3. Wni not your brother have his house painted ? 4. He 
will have it painted next year. 5. Will you not have a coat made ? 
6. I would have one made, if I had money. 7. Have you hurt your 
your brother ? 8. I have hurt him, I have stepped upon his foot. 
9. Does his* arm pain him? 10. Yes, sir; his shoulder, arm, and 
wrist pain him. 11. Will not your son pay attention to his work? 
12. He vdU pay attention to it, he has nothing el.-e ()'ien autre chose) 
to do. 13. Have I hurt your hand or your elbow ? 14. You have 
hurt my fingers {doigts), 15. Does your cook understand cooking ? 



FAIEE, CONTINUED, 181 

16. He understands cooking. 17. Has the cook roasted that leg of 
mutton? 18. He has boiled it. 19. Has he not warmed it ? 20. He 
has not had time to warm it. 21. Has the physician sent for en- 
gravings ? 22. He has sent for books. 23. Have you hurt his 
elbow ? 24. I have not hurt his elbow, but his hand. 25. Have I 
not hurt your fingers? 26. You have hurt my wrist. 27. Where 
have you hurt your son ? 28. I have not hurt him. 29. Would the 
cook boil that meat, if he had time? 30. He would not boil it, he 
would roast it. 31. When will he warm your broth ? 32. He will 
warm it by-and-by, if he has time. 33. If you had stepped upon 
my foot, would you not have hurt me? 34. I should certainly have 
hurt you, if I had stepped upon your foot. 



LEgON LXIY. LESSON LXIV. 

FAIEE, CONTINUED. 

1. Falre connaissance, to hecome^ or get acquainted, takes the prepo- 
sition avec before its object. Faire un mille, etc., faire un voyage, 
faire un tour de promenade, mean to go, or travel a mile, etc., to go 
on a journey^ to taJce a walk. 

Nous avons fait vingt milles ei. che- We travelled twenty miles on horse- 
val. lack. 

2. Faire ses adieux, faire des emplettes, faire des progres, faire dea 
questions, faire du feu, correspoi^d in signification to the English ex- 
pressions, to hid farewell, to make purchases, to improve or progress, to 
ask questions, to make afire. 

J'ai fait mes adieux a mes parents. / Md farewell to my relations. 
Avez-vous fait du feu dans ma Have you made afire in my room ? 
chambre ? 

3. Faire sortir means, to send out, or to order out; faire entrer, to 
let in, to hid come in ; faire attendre, to keep waiting. 

Yous les avez fait entrer dans ma You made them come into my rooTn, 

chambre. 
Yous avez fait attendre men pere. You made my father wait. 

4. Faire son possible, to do one^s hest, takes the preposition pour. 
Faire semblant, to pretend; faire usage, to make use, are followed 
by de. 

Nous avons fait notre possible. We have done our hest. 

Nous avons fait semblant de lire. We pretended to read. 



182 SOIXANTE-QUATEIEME LEgON. 

Resume of Examples. 

ITous avons fait connaissance avec We have become acquainted with 

eux. them. 

Vous avez fait vingt lieues en dix Tou travelled twenty leagues in ten 

heures. hoiLrs. 

Nous ferons un tour de promenade. We shall take a walk. 

Je lui ai fait plusieurs questions. I asked him several questions. 

lis nous ont fait leurs adieux. They have bid us farewell. 

Vous nous avez fait attendre. You have made us tuait. 

Get enfant fait semblant de dormir. Tliat child pretends to he asleep. 

Vous faites semblant de lire. You pretend to he reading, or do as 

if you were reading. 

Nous ferons notre possible pour le We will do our best to see him. 

voir. 

Exercise 125. 

Aise, glad ; Se fach-er, 1. ref. to he- Mendiant, m. beggar ; 
Aliment, m. food ; come angry ; Negociant, m. merchant ; 

Credit, m, credit; Paire I'aumone, to give Quart, m. quarter; 
Demand-er, 1. to asJc ; alms; Rarement, seldom; 

Dorm-ir, 2. ir. to sleep; Laiss-er, 1. to leave, let; Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed; 

]&L,ude, f. study ; Lieue, f league; Eiz, m. rice. 

1. Seriez-vous bien aise de faire connaissance avec ce monsieur? 
2. J'en serais bien aise. 3. Ce cheval fait-il une lieue en un quart 
d'lieure ? 4. II a fait ce matin une lieue en douze minutes, 5. Leur 
avez-vous fait des questions? G. Je leur en ai fait.^ 7. Quellea 
questions leur avez-vous faites ? 8. Je leur ai demande s'ils avaient 
fait des emplettes. 9. Vos eleves font-ils des progres dans leurs 
etudes? ]0. lis n'en font pas beaucoup, ils viennent rarement a 
I'ecole. 11. Si vous etiez chez vous, feriez-vous semblant de dormir ? 
12, Je ne ferais certainement pas semblant de dormir. 13, Pourquoi 
ne faites-vous pas entrer ce mendiant ? 14. Ma mere vient de lui 
faire I'aumone. 15. Le negociant fait-il usage de son credit ? 16. II 
en fait usage. 17. De quels aliments ce malade fait-il usage ? 18. II 
fait usage de riz et de bouillon. 19. Faites-vous votre possible pour 
reussir ? 20. Je fais tout mon possible. 21. Avez-vous fait entrer 
ces enfants, ou les avez-vous fait sortir ? 22. Je les ai laisses ou ils 
€taient. 23. Vous avons-nous fait attendre ? 24. Vous nous avez 
fait attendre plusieurs heures. 25. Si vous faisiez attendre ces 
dames, elles se facberaient. 

Exercise 126. 
1. Does that child pretend to read? 2. He pretends to read. 
8. Does not that gentleman pretend to sleep ? 4. He does not pre- 
tend to sleep, he sleeps really (rtellement). 5. Will you take a walk 

1 See Lesson 42. 11, and § 135, (7.) 



FAIRE, CONTINUED. 183 

this morning? 6. I would do so with pleasure, if I had time. 
7. Have you become acquainted with the physician? 8. I have 
not yet become acquainted with him. 9. How many questions 
have you asked (a) the child ? 10. I asked him many questions. 
11. Have you asked him if he had studied his lesson ? 12. I did 
not ask him. 13. Will not that little girl do her best to learn her 
lesson ? 14. She will do her best to learn it. 15. Of what food do 
you make use, when you are sick ? 16. We make use of bread 
and rice. 17. Have you forgotten to bid farewell to your mother? 
18. I had not forgotten it, I intended to go to her house this after- 
noon. 19. With whom have you become acquainted ? 20. With 
the bookseller. 21. Do you not keep those ladies waiting ? 22. I 
do not keep them waiting, they are not ready (pretes). 23. Do I 
make you wait ? 24. You do not make me wait. 25. Have you 
left your children in your room? 26. I have not done so (Ze). 
27. Have you sent them out ? 28. I have not sent them out, I have 
let them remain where they were. 29. Have you made purchases 
this morning ? 30. I have made none, I have no money. 31. Has 
the servant made a fire in my room ? 32. He has made one. 33. Will 
J^ou do your best to come to-morrow ? 34. I will do my best to 
fiome early, 35. We travelled yesterday forty leagues in sixteen 
hours. 



LECON LXV. LESSON LXY. 

FAIRE, CONTINUED. 

1. Faire is also used in the sense of playing the part of, or pretend- 
ing to he. 

II fait le grand seigneur. He plays the great lord. 

2. Faire also means to matter^ to concern, to help. 

Cela ne fait rien. That is no matter. 

Cela ne vous fait rien. That w nothing to you, does not con- 

cern you. 
Qu'est-ce que cela nous fait ? What is that to usf 

Je ne puis qu'y faire. I cannot help it. 

3. Se faire mal, conjugated reflectively, means to hurt on^s self. 
Se faire is used reflectively, in the sense of the Enghsh verbs, to he- 
come, to turn. It is also used with the signification (rf the words 



184 SOIXANTE-CINQXTIEMB LEgOlT. 

cause, have, get, etc. Se faire takes Hre as its auxiliarj. [§ 46. 
L. 45.] 

Je me suis fait medecin, Ihave become a physician. 

Je me suis fait faire une pairs de Ihave had a pair of boots made for 

bottes. me. 

Je me suis fait raser. I have had my beard shaved. 

Kous nous sommes fait couper les We have had our hair cut. 

cheveux. 

Je me suis fait mal au doigt. Ihave hurt my finger. 

4, Besides the instances mentioned [L. 33, E. 5.], faire is used 
tinipersonally in many idiomatic expressions, 

H fait jour, 11 fait nuit. It is daylight, it is nighi. 

II fait de la boue, n fait dela poussiere. It is muddy, it is dusty. 

n fait clair de lune. il fait obscur. It is moonlight, it is dark. 

II ^t bou ici, n fait clier ici. It is comforiohle here, it is dear here. 

RESUiiE OF Examples. 

Ce jeune homme fait le savant That young man plays the learned 

man. 

Cela ne me fait rien. That is nothing to me. 

Que pouYons-nous y faire ? What can we do to it ? 

Mon fi'ere s'est fait orfevTe. My brother has turned goldsmith. 

Pourquoi vous faites-vous raser? Wlip do you get thaved? 

Je me ferai couper les cheveux. IiciU have my hair cut. 

Je me suis fait batir une maison. Ihave had a house built for me.. 

Nous nous sommes fait mal a la tete. We have hurt our heads. 

II commence a se faire tard. It is beginning to grow late. 

Fait-il cher vivre a Paris ? Is it dear living in Paris? 

H fait beaucoup de boue. It is very muddy. 

ExEPwCiSE 127. 

Absolument. absolutely ; ^fitudiant, m. student; Peintre, m. painter; 
Artisan, m. mechanic; Pou, foUe, fool, simple- Personne. m. nobody ; 
Bijoutier, m. jeweller ; ton; Tanneur, m. tanner; 

£on marche, cheap; Impertinent, e, imper- Yigneron, m. vine dres- 
Chagrine, e, vexed; tinent ; ser ; 

'Dem:Qes,t^. provisions ; Ouvrier, m, workman; Titrier, m. glazier. 

1. Pourquoi cet ouvrier fait-iI le malade ? 2. II fait le malade, 
parce qu'il n'a pas envie de travailler. 3. Cet etudiant ne fait-il 
pas le savant ? 4. II ne fait pas le savant, il fait le fou. 5. Sied-il 
£1 ce jeune homme de faire le maitre ici ? 6. II ne sied a personne 
de faire I'impertinent. 7. Cela fait-il quelque chose ? [R. 2.] 8. Cela 
ne fait absolument rien. 9. Cela peut-il faire quelque chose a cea 
vignerons ? 10. Cela ne leur fait rien du tout. 11. N'etes-vous pas 
bien chagrines de cela ? 12. Nous en sommes bien faches, mais 
nous ne pouvons qu'y faire. 13. Yotre associe ne s'est-il pas fait 
bijoutier T 14, Non, monsieur ; il s'est fait peintre. 15. Cet artisan 



AVOIR MAL, ETC. 185 

ne s'est-il pas fait vitrier? 16. II s'estfaittanneur, etsonfr^res'est 
fait soldat. 17. La modiste ne s'est-elle pas fait couper les cheveux? 
18. EUe se les est fait couper. 19, Ne yous levez-vous pas aussitot 
qn'il fait jour? 20. Oui, monsieur; je me leve de tres bonne heure. 
21. jSTe fait-il pas clair de lune? 22. II fait tres clair, mais il ne 
fait pas clair de lune. 23. Fait-il bon vivre en Amerique ? 24. II 
fait tres bon vivre en Amerique, les denrees y sont a bon marciie. 

Exercise 128. 
1. Does not tbat gentleman play the learned man? 2. He playg 
tbe lord and fool at the same time (d lafois). 3. Does not that boy 
pretend to be sick ? 4. He pretends to be sick, he does not wish to 
study his lessons. 5. When you have no wish to work, do you pre- 
tend to be sick. 6. I never pretend to be sick. 7. Is it muddy to- 
day ? 8. It is not muddy, it is dusty. 9. Will it be moonhght tliis 
evening? 10. It will not be moonlight, it will be very dark. 11. Is 
it comfortable here? 12. It is very comfortable. 13. Is it too 
warm or too cold ? li. It is neither too warm nor too cold here. 
15. Wni you have your hair cut ? 16.1 had my hair cut yesterday 
morning. 17. Will you not go home, it is beginning to grow late ? 
18. Is it not very dark out? (dehors.) 19. It is not dark, it is moon-^ 
light. 20. Has not the glazier turned goldsmith ? 21. He has not 
turned goldsmith, he has turned soldier. 22. Does that conceri; 
your brother ? 23. That does not concern him. 24. Are you not 
sorry for that ? 25. I am sorry for it, but I cannot help it. 26. Why 
do you get shaved ? 27. Because I cannot shave myself 28. Have 
you not hurt those children ? 29. I have not hurt them. 30. Have 
you not hurt your arm ? 31. No, sir ; but I have hurt my head. 
32. Has not your sister hurt her hand ? 33. She has hurt her hand, ' 
and my mother has hurt her elbow. 34. Have you not hurt youl* 
head ? 35. I have not hurt my head, but I have hurt my hand. 



LEgON LXYI. LESSON LXVI. 

AYOm MAL, ETC. 

1. Avoir malj means to have a pain or ache, a sore. Wlien used 
in relation to one of the limbs, it means generally, to have a sore, a 
bruise, a cut, etc. The name of the part of the body is preceded by 
the preposition a and the article [See L. 63, E. 5, § 77, (9.)] 

N'avez-vous pas mal au doigt ? Have you not a sorefing&r t 

Je n'ai paa mal a la tete. My head does not ache. 



186 SOIXANTE-SIXIEME L E g O N. 

2. Avoir une douleur, or des douleurs, corresponds to the English 
to hav.e a pain or pains. 

J'ai une douleiir au bras. J have a pain in my arm. 

3. The construction mentioned in Rule 1, is used after avoir, taken 
in the sense of tenir, to hold, and after avoir froid, and avoir chaud 
[Lesson G3, Rule 5.) 

Yous avez les armes a la main. Tou have your arms in your hands. 

J'ai chaud aux mains et aux pieds. My hands and feet are warm. 

4. The article le, etc., is used before words indicating moral and 
physical properties, in cases where the English use a or an, or omit 
the article. When, however, an adjective precedes the norm, un, une^ 
or de, des, are at times used. 

Cette dame a I'esprit juste. Thatlady has a correct mind. 

Yotre soeur a les yeux noirs. Your sister has black eyes. 

5. A moral or physical property, which in the individual is single, 
is not put in the plural in French, though the reference be to a num- 
ber of individuals. 

Ces dames ont I'esprit juste. UTiose ladies have correct minds. 

Ces gardens se sent fait mal a la tete. Those boys have hurt their heads. 

Resume of Examples. 

K'avez-vous pas mal au pied ? Have you not a sore foot f 

Cette demoiselle a le mal de tete. That young lady has the headache. 

N'avez-vous pas mal aux dents? Do not your teeth ache ? 

Men frere a le mal de dents. My brother has the toothache. 

Mon cousin a mal au cote. My cousin has a pain in his side. 

II a des douleurs de poitrine. He has pavns in his chest. 

What have you in your hand f 
Qu'avez-vous a la main ? -{ WJiai is the matter with your 

handf 
I have nothing in my hand. 
Je n'ai rien a la main. •{ Nothing is the matter with my 

hand. 
J'ai chaud aux mains, et froid aux My hands are warm, and my feei 

pieds. cold. 

Tos soeurs ont le gout delicat. Your sisters have a delicate taste. 

Ces messieurs om; le nez aquilin. Tnose gentlemen have Eoman noses. 

Exercise 129. 

Bleu, e, blue; Mal de gorge, m. sore Pied, m.foot; 
Bouche, f mouth; throat; Presque, almost; 

Dent, £ tooth; Mal d'oreille, m. ear- Teint, m. complexion; 
Doigt, m. finger ; ache; Tete, f. head; 

Gorge, f. throat; Niece, f. niece; Visage, m.face; 

Memoire, f memory; Noir, e, black i Xeux,^?^. o/oeil, eyes. 



AVOIB MAL, ETC. 187 

1. Ce jeune homme a-t-il mal a la gorge ? 2. Oui, monsieur ; il 
J a deux jours qu'il a le mal de gorge. 3. Avez-vous souvent mal 
a, la tete ? 4. J'aile mal de teLe presque tous les jours. 5. N'avez- 
vous pas mal au bras ? 6. J'ai mal au bras, et a la main. 7. Votre 
soeur a-t-eile le mal d'oreille ? 8. Oui, madame ; elle a le mal d'oreille 
et le mal de dents. 9. N'avez-vous pas froid u, la tete ? 10. Non, 
monsieur; mais j'ai froid aux doigts. 11. N'avez-vous point froid 
au visage ? 12. ISTon, monsieur ; je n'y ai point froid. 13. Ce mon- 
sieur a-t-il le nez aquilin ? 14. II a le nez aquilin, et la bouche 
grande. 15. Cette demoiselle a-t-elle de belles dents ? 16. Elle a 
de belles dents, et de beaux yeux. IT. Ce petit gar9on a-t-il les 
pieds petits? 18. II a les pieds petits, et les mains grandes. 

19. Yotre niece n'a-t-elle pas les yeux bleus ? 20. Non, monsieur; 
elle a les yeux noirs. 21. Yos ecoliers se sont-ils fait mal au visage? 
22. lis se sont fait mal a la poitrine. 23. Yos filles ont-elles une 
bonne memoire ? 24. Elles out la memoire excellente. 25. Cea 
Italiennes n'ont pas le teint frais. 

Exercise 130. 
1. What is the matter with your hand ? 2, I have had a sore hand 
these ten days. 3. Has your brother sore fingers ? 4. He has sore 
fingers, and a sore hand. 5. What has your brother in his hand ? 
6. He has a pen in his hand. 7. Has your little boy a sore throat ? 
8. He has a sore throat. 9. Has not your eldest sister the tooth- 
ache ? 10. She has not the toothache, but she has a sore finger. 
11. Why does not the soldier walk ? 12. He cannot walk, he has a 
sore foot. 13. Have you not sore feet ? 14. My feet are not sore. 
15. If your fingers were sore, would you write ? 16. If I had sore 
fingers, I should not write. 17. If your brother had the headache, 
would he study his lesson ? 18. He could not study his lesson, if 
he had the headache. 19. Has not that gentleman pains in his chest ? 

20. He has pains in his chest and in his side. 21. Has your little 
girl black eyes, or blue eyes? 22. She has black eyes, and a fresh 
complexion. 23. Has not your daughter the tooth-ache ? 24. She 
has the tooth-ache, and the ear-ache. 25. Are not your hands and 
feet cold ? 26. My hands are cold, but my feet are warm. 27. Have 
not those ladies aquiline noses ? 28. They have aquiline noses, and 
a fair complexion (?e teint beau). 29. Has your sister large hands ? 
30. No, sir; my sister has small hands. 31. Have not those little 
girls hurt their heads? 32. They have not hurt their heads, they 
have hurt their faces. 33. That Uttle boy has black hair (cheveux). 



188 SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 

LEgOK LXYII. ^ LESSON LXYII. 

AYOIK BEAU, ETC. 

1. Avoir heau — Vous avez beau, corresponds in signification to the 
English expression, it is in vain for you to. It must be followed by 
the infijiitive. 

Vous avez beau dire, il ne viendra It is in vain for you to speak, lie will 
pas. not come. 

2. Epouser, marier, to marry ^ have^ in French, a different mean- 
ing. Marier^ conjugated actively, can only have as its nominative 
the person performing the ceremony, or giving one or both of the 
parties in marriage ; epouser takes, as its nominative, the contracting 
parties only, and must always be followed by a direct regimen. Se 
marier, to get married^ and marier, conjugated passively, take the 
same nominative as epouser. 

M. L. a marie sa fille avee M. G. Mr. L. has married his daughter to 

Mr. a. 

M. G-. a epouse la fiUe de M. L. Mr. G. has married Mr. L.^s daugh- 
ter. 
M. Gr. et illle. L. sent maries. Mr. G. and Miss L. are married. 

Men frere va se mariei'. My brother is going to he married. 

3. Un de mes amis^ is equivalent to the EngUsh, a friend of mine. 

Yotre ami a epouse une de mes Tour friend has married a friend of 
amies. mine. 

Resume of Examples. 

lis ont beau dire et beau faire, ils Wliatever they may say or do, they 

ne I'empeeheront pas de se ma- loill not prevent his marrying. 

rier. 

Vous avez beau lui faire des re- It is in vain for you to remonstrate 

montrances. loith him. 

L'eveque de B, a marie ma soeur. The bishop of B. has married my 

sister. 

Le capitaine G. a epouse ma ecu- Captain G. has married my cousin. 

sine. 

Quand il se mariera, n nous iavitera When he marries, he will invite us 

a la noee. to the wedding. 

Voire cousine est mariee avee men Your cousin is married to my cousin. 

cousin. 

Votre cousine a epouse un de mes Your cousin has married a cousin of 

cousins. mine. 

Le colonel a epouse una de mes The colonel has married a sister of 

soeurs. miuQ. 



AVOIR BEAU, ETC. 189 

Exercise 131. 

Atne, e, elder, eldest; Devoir, 3. to owe, to he Parent, e, relation ; 
Archeveque, m. arch- about; , Frincesse, f. princess ; 

bishop ; ;6poux, pi. couple, man Prochain, e, next ; 

Cadet, te, younger ; and wife ; Savoir, 3. ir. to knoiv ; 

Demoiselle, f. young Infanterie, t'. infctntry ; Regiment, m. regiment; 

lady; !]^vtque, m. bishop; Yieillard, old man. 

1. Yotre niece ne va-t-elle pas se marier? 2. EUe se mariera 
I'annee prochaine. 3. Qui epousera-t-elle ? 4. Elle epousera le fil3 
aine du general M. 5. Savez-vous qui a marie ces deux epoux? 
6. L'archeveque de Paris les a maries. 7. N'a-t-il pas aussi marie 
Mile. L. ? 8. II I'a mariee avec M. G-. 9. Qui voire demoiselle a-t- 
elle epouse ? 10. Elle a epouse M. L,, capitaine ai^ 25^™® regiment 
d'infanterie. 11. Ce vieillard n'a-t-il pas tort de /i^e marier ? • 12. II 
n'a pas tort de se marier, mais il a tort d'epouser cette demoiselle. 
13. Quand ces princesses vont-elles se marier? IJ. Elles se ma- 
rieront le mois prochain. 15. Qui les mariera ? IG. L'eveque 
d' Arras les mariera. 17. Qui doivent-elles epouser? 18. L'ainee 
doit epouser M. W., et la cadette M. G. 19. Le capitaine G. n'a-t-il 
pas epouse une de vos parentes ? 20. Oui, monsieur ; il a epouse 
une de mes cousines. 21. Qui est cette demoiselle ? 22. C'est 
une de mes soeurs. 23. N'avez-vous pas un de mes livres ? 24. J'ai 
un de vos livres, et une de vos plumes. 25. Je viens de parler a une 
de vos soeurs. 

Exercise 132. 

1. Is your brother going to marry Miss L. ? 2. Yes, sir ; it is in, 
vain for us to speak to him, he v^ill marry her. .3. WiU not- jjour 
father marry your sister to Mr. G. ? 4. No, sir ; he v^^ill marry her 
to Mr. L. 5. Is Captain H. married ? 6. No, sir ; he is not yet 
married, but he will be married next year. 7. Whom does he in- 
tend to marry ? 8. He intends to marry a cousin of mine, who is 
at my brother's. 9. Who will marry them ? 10. My eldest brother 
intends to marry them. 11. Is your youngest sister married? 12. No, 
sir ; she is not married. 13. Is she going to be married ? 14. She 
will marry when she is [L. 61, 5.] old enough {assez dgte). 15, "Whom 
did Colonel J. marry ? 16. He married a sister of mine. 17. How 
long have they been married [L. 57, 2.] ? 18. They have been mar- 
ried two years. 19. Is not that young lady wrong to get married ? 
20. She is wrong to marry, she is too young, 21. Who married 
General S. and Miss N. ? 22. The bishop of Arras married them. 
23. Did not the archbishop of York marry that couple ? 24. Tha 



190 SOIXANTE- HITITIEME LEgON. 

archbishop of Paris married them. 25. "Will not your aunt marry ? 
26. She will not marry. 27. Is not your sister at home ? 28. No, 
sir ; she is with {chez) an aunt of mine. 29. Is your brother at your 
house ? 30. ISTo, sir ; he is with one of my relations. 31. Is he 
married ? 32. He is not married.^ 33. Is Captain H. married ? 
34. He was married last week. 35. He married Miss H. 



LEgON LXVIII. LESSO]^ LXYIII. 

DIMENSION, WEIGHT, ETC. 

1. The verb avoir is used in expressing the size of an object. The 
preposition de precedes the noun of dimension. When there is no 
verb in the sentence, the preposition must be placed before the num- 
ber, and again before the noun of dimension. 

Cette muraille a dLs pieds de That wall is ten feet high. 

hauteur. 

Ce puits a cent pieds de profondeur. That well is one hundred feet deep. 

Une table de quatre pieds de Ion- A table four fed long. 

gueur. 

2. In sentences where sizes are compared, and the verb ttre is 
used, the preposition de is placed before the number expressing the 
excess. 

Yous etes plus grand que moi de You are taller than I by two inches. 
deux pouces. 

3. W^hen the price of an article is mentioned, the article le is used 
before the noun expressing the measure, weight, etc. When the 
remuneration, or rent, etc., for a definite space of time is mentioned 
the preposition ^ar {per) is used. 

Le beurre se vend un franc la livre. Butter is sold a franc apourod. 
II gagne six francs par jour. He earns six francs per day. 

4. The same preposition is used, when we speak of the number of 
times any occurrence takes place in a given space of time. 

Je vais a la poste deux fois par jour. I go to the post-office twice a day. 

Kesume op Examples. 

La canelle se vend deux francs la Cinnamon is sold two francs a pound. 

livre. 

Celte soie vaut six francs le metre. That silk is worth six francs a metre. 

Ce clocher a cinq cents pieds de That steeple is five hundred feet hig?i. 

hauteur. 



DIMENSION, WEIGHT, ETC. 191 

Get etang a kuit pieds de profon- That pond is eight feet deep. 

deur. "^ 

Une cliambre de quinze pieds de A room fifteen feet long, hy eighteen 

longueur, sur dix-huit de largeur, feet broad, and eight fed high. 

et huit de hauteur. 

De quelle taille est votre frere ? Ebw tall is your brother ? 

Sa taille est de cinq pieds huit His height is five feet eight inches, . 

pouces. 

Notre ami est-il grand ou petit ? Is our friend tall or short ? 

31 est de taille mojenne. ffis height is middling. 

Votre maison est plus haute que la Tour house is higher than mine by 

mienne do cinq pieds. five feet. 

Je vais a I'ecole deux fois par jour. I go to school twice a day. 

II nous paie huit francs par semaine. He pays us eight francs a week. 

Exercise 133. 

Bon marche, cheap ; Grandeur, f. size ; Profondeur, f. depth ; 

Cassonade, fl brown su- Hauteur, f. height ; Pouce, m. inch ; 

gar; Largeur, f. breadth; Semaine, tweek; 

£co3sais, e. Scotch, Longueur, f. length; TailJe, f. height, size; 

Scotchman ; Loy er, m. rent ; Une fois, once ; 

l^paisseur, C thickness; Metre, m. metre; Verge, £ perch, yard, 

;&tofife, £ stuff; Moyen, ne, middling; rod. 

1. Votre maison est-elle grande ? 2. Elle a cinquante pieds de 
long, et vingt-cinq de large. 3. Quelle longueur votre jardin a-t-il? 
4, II a vingt-cinq verges de longueur, et douze de largeur. 5. De 
quelle grandeur est ce livre ? 6. II a dix-huit pouces de longueur, 
treize de largeur, et trois d'epaisseur, 7. Votre maison est-elle 
plus longue que celle-ci ? 8. Elle est plus longue de deux pieds. 
9. Quelle profondeur a ce puits? 10. De quelle hauteur est ce 
clocher? 11. II a trois cent cinquante-trois pieds de hauteur. 12. De 
quelle taille est cet officier? 13. II est de haute taille. 14. De 
combien cet Ecossais est-il plus grand que son frere ? 15. 11 est plus 
grand de toute la tete. 16. N'etes-vous pas de beaucoup plus grand 
que moi? 17. Je suis plus grand que vous de trois pouces. 
18. Combien cette etoffe se vend-elle la verge? 19. Elle se vend 
trois francs le metre. 20. La cassonade ne se vend-elle pas cher? 
21. Elle se vend a bon marche. 22. Combien de lettres ecrivez-vous 
par semaine ? 23. Je n'en ecris que six par semaine. 24. Combien 
payez-vous par semaine pour votre loyer ? 25. Je ne paie que dix 
francs par semaine. 

Exercise 134. 
1. How large is your father's garden ? 2. It is twenty-five rods 
long, and ten broad. 3. Is your cousin's house large ? 4. It is fifty- 
six feet long, and forty broad. 5. Is your house larger than mine ? 



192 SOIXANTE-NETTYIJEJME LEgON. 

6. It is larger than yours by ten feet. 7. Bo you know how deep 
that well is ? 8. It is twenty-five feet deep, and six feet broad. 
9. How is that cloth sold a metre ? 10. It is sold forty-five francs a 
metre. 11. How much do you receive a week for your work? 12. I 
receive fifty francs a week for my work. 13. How much does your 
friend pay a month for his board {pension^ f.)*? 14. He pays seventy 
francs a month. 15. Are you taller than your cousin ? 16. I am 
taller tlian he, by the whole head. 17. Is not your nephew taller than 
your son ? 18. He is taller than my son, by three inches. 19. How 
large is this room ? 20. It is sixty feet long by forty. 21. What 
size is your brother ? 22. He is tall, he is taller than I. 23. How 
many books do you read a week ? 24. I read ten volumes a week. 
25. How is butter sold a pound? 26. Butter is sold two francs a 
pound. 27. Do you know how much your son earns a day? 
28. He earns as much as yours, he earns ten francs a day. 29. How 
much is that silk worth a metre ? 30. It is worth six francs a metre. 
31. Our friend's stature is middhng. 32. Do you go to church twice 
a day ? 33. I go to church once a day. 34. Does your son go to 
the post-office every day ? 35. He goes thither six times a day. 



LEgON LXIX. LESSON LXIX. 

METTEE, SE METTEE, ETC. 

1. Mettre (4. ir.) forms, in French, many idiomatic expressions. 
Mettre a meme de, to enable ; mettre pied a terre, to alight^ to land; 
mettre le pied, to set one's foot ; mettre a la porte, to turn out of doors ; 
mettre au fait de, to accqimint with ; mettre a I'abri, to shelter ; mettre 
a I'ombre, to put in the shade ; mettre un habit a I'endroit, ^ I'envers, 
to put on a coat right side out, wrong side out, &c. 

Nous Tavons mis a meme de con- We enabled Mm to know the truth. 

naitre la verite. 
H a mis cet insolent a la porte. He turned that insolent person out of 

doors. 

2. J/e^^re, conjugated reflectively, I.e., se mettre, mean^ to place 
one's self, to dress one's self; se mettre a table, to sit down to tahle ; 
se mettre en colore, to lecome angry, to put one's self into a passion. 

n se met a rombre, au soleil. Me places himself in the shade, in the 

sun. 

3. Se mettre, followed by an infinitive, means to commence, to hegin. 
lis se mirent a pleurer. They commenced weeping. 



METTEE, SE METTEE, ETC. 



193 



A Vanglaise, d la fran(;aise, are used elliptically for, a la mode 
fran^aise, a la mode anglaise, after the French, after the English 
fashion. 

Kesumb of Examples. 

Ce cavalier a mis pied a terre. Tliat horseman has come down from 

his horse. 
Vous n'osez mettre le pied cliez lui. You dare not set your foot inside his 

house. 
Mettez ces enfants a I'abri de la pluie. Shelter those children from the rain. 
Vous avez mis votre manteau a You have put on your chdk inside out 

I'envers. 
Ce monsieur se met toujours a I'an- Tliat gentleman always dresses after 

glaise. the English fashion. 

Hier, nous nous mimes a table a dix Yesterday, we sat down to table at ten 

lieures. o^ clock. 

Pourquoi vous mettez- vous a Torn- Why do you go into the shade ? 

bre ? ■ 

Ces enfants se mirent a rire. Those children commenced laughing. 

Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas ^ Why do you not set yourself to work f 

I'ouvrage ? 
Je vais me mettre en pension. J will commence hoarding. 

Nous aliens nous mettre en voyage. We are going to commence our jour- 
ney. 

Exercise 135 

A I'italienne, after the Eflfets, m. p. things ; ifitudi-er, 1, to study ; 

Italian fashion ; Entr-er, 1. to come in; Mise, f mettre, dressed; 

A merveille, exceedingly Endroit, m. right side ; Pluie, f. rain ; 

well ; Envers, m. wrong side ; Rire, 4, ir. to laugh ; 

Couvert, See L. 32, 1. ; ^^tourdi, e, giddy per- Soleil, m. sun; 

Defend-re, 4. to forbid ; son ; Tablier, m. apron. 

1. Avez-vous defendu a cet homme de mettre le pied chez vous ? 
2. Je le lui ai defendu. 3 . Avez-vous mis ces effets a I'abri de la 
pluie ? 4. Je les ai mis a I'abri de la pluie et du vent. 5. Avez-vous 
mis votre frere au fait de cette affaire ? 6. Je ne Ten ai pas mis au 
fait. 7. Ne I'avez-vous pas mis a meme d'etudier ? 8. Je I'ai mis 3. 
meme de s'instruire, s'il desire le faire. 9. Youlez-vous mettre cela 
decote? 10. Je vais le mettre au soleil. 11. Votre ami n'a-t-il 
pas voulu entrer ? 12. II n'a point voulu mettre pied a terre. 
13. Votre teinturier n'a-t-il pas mis son tablier tl I'envers ? 14. Non, 
monsieur ; il I'a mis a I'endroit. 15. N'avez-vous pas mis cet etourdi 
a la porte ? 16. ISTous lui avons ferme la porte au nez {in his face). 
17. A quelle heure vous mettez-vous a table ? 18. Aussitot que le 
couvert sera mis [L. 61, (5.)]. 19. Cet homme se met-il bien? 
20. II se met toujours a I'anglaise, ou a I'italienne. 21. Ces enfants 
ne se mirent-ils pas a pleurer ? 22. Au lieu de se mettre a pleurer, 
ils se mirent a rire. 23. Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas ^ 



lU 



SOIXAKTE-DIXIEMH LEgON. 



ecrire ? 24. H est temps de se mettre sL table. 25. Ces Sicilienneg 
sont-elles bien mises ? 26. Elles sont mises a merveille {extremeli/ 
well dressed.) 

Exercise 136. 
1. Did the gentleman alight this morning ? 2. He -would not 
alight, he had no time. 3. Have you put that insolent person out of 
doors ? 4. No, sir ; but I forbade him to set his foot in my house. 
6. Did you shelter those little children from the rain ? G. I sheltered 
liem from the rain and the wind. 7. Have you enabled your son 
to study medicine Qa mtdecine)) ? 8. I enabled him to study medi- 
cine, if he wishes to do so. 9. Have you put on your coat inside 
out ? 10. I have not put it on inside out, but right side out. 11. Did 
you put yourself in a passion ? 12. No, sir ; I did not become 
angry. 13. Did you sit down to table at four o'clock, yesterday? 
14. We sat down to table at six o'clock. 15. Do you intend to 
commence boarding ? 16. I intend to board with Mr. L. {chez M. L.) 
17. When do you commence your journey? 18. We commence our 
journey to-morrow morning. 19. Did your son commence laugh- 
ing ? 20. No, sir ; he commenced weeping. 21. Why do you not 
commence working ? 22. Because I am going to commence read- 
ing. 23. Does that lady dress after the English fashion ? 24. She 
dresses after the Italian fashion. 25. Are those ladies well dressed ? 
26. They are extremely well dressed. 27. Will you not place your- 
self in the shade ? 28. I wHl place myself in the sun, I am very 
cold. 29. Is your coat inside out ? 30. No, sir ; it is right side out 
3.1. Is this the right side of this cloth ? 32. It is the wrong side. 
33. Are you not dressed after the English fashion? 34. I am 
dressed after the Italian fashion. 35. You are well dressed. 



LEgON LXX. 



LESSON LXX. 



THE IMPEEATIYE. 

1. Conjugation of the Imperative of the Regular Yerbs. 



Qu'il 



Qu'ils 



Chant -e 


fin -is 


re^ -ois 


rend -s 


€iiig 


finish 


receive 


render 


pari -e 


cher -isse 


aper? -oive 


vend -e 


let him speak 


let him cherish 


let him perceive 


let /dm sell 


donn -ons 


fourn -issons 


pare -evens 


tend -on3 


let us give 


let us furnish 


let us gather 


let us tend 


Cherch -ez 


pun -issez 


cone -evez 


entend -ez 


seek 


punish 


co7iceive 


It ear 


port -ent 
leathern carry 


sais -issent 


d -oivent 


perd -ent 
let them loss 


let them seiee 


let them OW6 



THE IMPEEATIVE, 1&5 

2. The second person singular, and the first and second persons 
plural of the imperative^ are the same as the first person singular, and 
the first and second persons plural, of the present of the indicative. 
The pronouns are dropped. 

Je parle, jparZe ; je ^rm, finis. IspeaJc, speak; I finish, finish. 

3. Exceptions — Avoir, to have, makes in those persons of the im- 
perative, aie, ayons, ayez ; etre, to he : sois, soyons, soyez / savoir, to 
"know : sache, sachons, sachez ; and aller, va, and vas before y not fol- 
lowed by an infinitive. 

4. Vouloir has only the second person plural, veuillez, have the 
goodness to ... . 

5. A third person singular and plural is given, in the imperative, by 
most of the French grammarians. These parts, however, belong 
properly to the subjunctive, as they express rather a strong wish than 
a command. The English expressions, let him speak, that he may 
speak, are rendered in French by qu'il parte. 

6. A droite, a gauche, correspond in signification to the English 
to the right, to the left. 

Allez a droite, a gauche. Go to the right, to the left. 

7. For the place of the pronouns in connection with the imperative, 
see Lesson 27, Rule 1, 4 ; Lesson 28, Rule 1, 2, 3, 4. 

Resume of Examples. 

Prenons la premiere rue a droite. Let us take the first street to the right. 

Ne cherchez plus a le tromper. Seek no longer to deceive Mm. 

Sachons nous contenter du neces- Let us know how to content ourselves 

saire, loith necessaries. 

Faites bien attention a ce que vous J^ay great attention to what you say. 

dites, 

Dites toujours la verite. Always tell the truth. 

AUoas 1 messieurs ; depechez-vous. Oome ! gentlemen ; make haste. 

Tenez, monsieur; voila votre argent. Mere, sir; here is your money. 

Veuillez accepter ce present. Be so kind as to accept this present. 

ExEKClSE 137. 

Clef, f. A;ey ; Prochain, e, neo^i^; Renvoj-er, 1. to send 

Crayon, m. pencil; Promett-re, 4. ir. to pro- back; 
Institutrice, f. ^eac/ier ; mise; ^ans fante, without fail ; 

Obe-ir, 2. to obey ; Rapport-er, 1. to bring Se serv-ir, 2. ref. to use / 
Partie, tpart; back; Tiers, m. third; 

Precepteur, m. instruc- Remett-re, 4. ir. to de- Verrez, 3. ir. from voir, 
tor ; liver ; to see. 

1. Envoyez chercher le medecin ; votre petit garcon est malade. 
2. Nous I'avons deja envoye chercher. 3. Yous n'avez pas besoin 



196 SOIX ANTE-DIXli:ME LEgON". 

de votre crayon, pretez-le-moi [L. 27, R. 4 ; L, 28, R. 4]. 4. Je ne 

saurais vous le preter, je m'en sers. 5. Donnez-le-moi, ou me le 
pretez (ou pretez-le-moi). [§ 100, (6.)] 6. Je I'ai promis a votre in- 
stitutrice. 7. Si rous ne le lui avez pas dit, dites-le-lui aussitot que 
possible. 8. ISTe le lui dites pas encore. 9. Parlez-lui-en, [§ 39, 17.] 
la prochaine fois que vous le verrez. 10. Ayez patience, mon ami, 
votre pere ne tardera pas a venir. 11. Obeissez a votre precepteur. 
12. Je lui obeis toujours. 13. Donnez-lui-en une bonne partie. 14. Je 
lui en ai deja donne plus des deux tiers. 15. Avez-vous porte cette 
clef au serrurier? 16. J'ai oublie de la lui remettre. 17. Portez-la- 
lui sans faute cette apres-midi. 18. Yeuillez me dire ou demeure 
M. G-. 19. Prenez la premiere rue a gauche, il demeure dans la deu- 
xieme maison a droite. 20. Allons, mesdemoiselles, depechons-nous. 

21. Menez-les-y le plus tot possible. 22. Ne me les rapportez pas. 
23. Renvoyez-les-moi domain. 24. Portons-les-y. 25. IsTe les y 
portons pas. 26. Pretez-les-lui, mais ne les lui donnez pas. 

Exercise 138. 
1. G-ive a book to the young man. 2. I have already given liim 
one, and he does not read it. 3. Lend it to him, if you will not give 
it to him. 4. I will not lend it to him. 5. Make haste, young la- 
dies, it is ten o'clock. 6. Have the goodness to give me a pen. 7. 1 
have given one to your brother. 8. Obey your father, and speak to 
your sister. 9. Will you not send for the letter ? 10. I will send 
for it 11. Send for it as soon as you can. 12. Do not do so (?e), 
but write to my cousin. 13. Come, children (mes enfants)^ learn 
your lesson. 14. Give him some [§ 39, 17], or lend him some [§ 100, 
(6)]. 15. Do not make haste, we have (le) time. 16. Have pa- 
tience, my child, the merchant will soon come. 17. Send it to him, 
if you cannot give it to him. 18. Write to him this afternoon, with- 
out fail. 19. I would write to him, if I had time. 20. Let us take 
the first street to the left. 21. Take the second street to the right. 

22. Pay attention to what your brother says. 23. Let us tell the 
truth. 24. Let us read that book to-day. 25. Pay your debts as 
Boon as possible. 26. Let us obey our instructor. 27. Carry the 
key to him. 28. Bring me back the books which I have lent you. 
29. Do not bring them back to me, read them. 30. Let us have pa- 
tience, we shall soon have money. 31. Let us speak to them, they 
are at my father's. 32. Tell them that I intend to write to them to- 
morrow morning. 33. Co to church this afternoon. 34. Bring me 
back my letters. 35. Do not carry them there, but bring them to 
me as soon as 



VBEB AFTER THE IMPERATIVE, ETC. 197 

LEgON LXXI. LESSON LXXI. 

VEKB AFTER THE IMPERATIVE, ETC. 

1. A verb, following another verb in the imperative, is put in the 
infinitive, (according to general Rule, L. 21, 2.) The conjunction 
■which often comes between the two verbs, in Enghsh, is not used in 
Prench. 

AUez parler au musician. Go and speak to the musician. 

Allez faire votre ouvrage. Go and do your work. 

Courez voir ces messieurs. Run and see those gentlemen. 

2. Prendre garde, to taJce care, to tahe heed ; when followed by an- 
other verb in the infinitive, means to take care not to. 

Prenez garde de tomber. Take care not to fall. 

3. Prendre Je deuil, means to go into mourning ; prendre la peine, 
io take the trouble ; prendre les devants, to go on hefore ; prendre un 
parti, to take a determination ; prendre du cafe, du the, &c., to take 
coffee, tea, &c. 

Resume of Examples. 

Envoyez chercher le tapissier. Send for the upholsterer. 

Allez chercher votre parapluie. Go and fetch your umbrella. 

Courez voir votre pere. Run and see your father. 

Prenons garde de nous blesser. Let us take care not to hurt ourselves. 

Preuez garde de decliirer vos habits. Take care not to tear your clothes. 

N'avez-vous pas pris le deuil? Have you not pi d on mourning f 

Prenez la peine de vous asseoir. Take the trouble to sit down. 

Prenez du the ou du cafe. Take tea or coffee. 

Quel parti avez-vous pris ? What resolution have you taken ? 

Exercise 139. 

Attend-re, 4. to expect, Gat-er, ]. to spoil; Robe, f dress; 

to vjait for ; Gouverneur, m. govern- Soin, m. care ; 

Cbocolat, m, chocolate; nor; Tomb-er, 1, to fall, 

Courrier, m. courier; Lorsque, when; Tacher, 1. to stain, to 

Croi-re, 4, ir. to believe; Port-er, 1. to wear ; spot; 

Dechir-er, 1. to tear ; Quelquefois, sometimes; Se tai-re, 4. ir. to be silent. 

1. Allez voir mon frere, il a quelque chose a vous communiquer. 
2. Courez leur dire que je les attends. 3. Mon frere a bien pris 
garde de dechirer ses habits. 4. Yotre cousine a-t-elle pris garde de 
tacher sa robe ? 5. EUe a pris garde de tomber, car en tombant elle 
I'aurait gatee. 6. Ces petites fiUes ont-elles pris le deuil ? 7. EUea 
viennent de le prendre. 8. Pour qui prenez- vous le deuil ? 9. Je 
porte le deuil de ma mere. 10. Prenez-voua du the ou du cafe Id 



198 SOIXANTE-OIfZIEME LEgON. 

matin ? 11. ISTous prenons du the et du cafe. 12. Ke prenez-vous 
pas quelquefois du chocolat ? 13. Nous n'en prenons que lor sque 
nous sommes malades. 14. Quel parti le gouverneur a-t-il pris? 
15. II a pris le parti de se taire. 16. Prendrez-vous mon parti, {my 
part) ou celui de votre fils? 17. Je prendrai le votre, si je crois que 
vous avez raison. 18. Pourquoi ne prenez-vous pas la peine de lire 
sa lettre ? 19. Parce qu'elle n'en vaut pas la peine. 20. Votre cour- 
rier a-t-il pris les devants? 21. 11 n'a pu prendre les devants. 
22, N'avez-vous pas tort de prendre son parti? 23. Je n'ai pas tort 
de le prendre. 24. Avez-vous pris le the' (your tea) ? 25. Nou3 
n'avons pas pris (pur) le the, nous avons pris le cafe.'"* 

Exercise 140. 
1. Has your brother taken care not to spoil his hat ? 2. He has 
taken care not to spoil it, he has only one. 3. Go and speak to your 
sister, she calls you (appelle). 4. Will you not take a cup (iasse) 
of tea ? 5. I have just taken my tea. 6. What have you said to 
your little girl ? 7. I have told her to take care not to tear her 
dress. 8. Let us take care not to tear that book. 9. My son has 
just brought it. 10. Has he taken his tea ? 11. He has not yet 
taken tea, it is too early. 12. At what hour do you take tea^ at your 
house ? 13. AYe take tea at six o'clock. 14. Do you take tea' or 
coiTee for breakfast (a votre dl-jeuner) ? 15. We take coffee. 16. Is 
your courier gone on before ? 17. He has not been able to go on 
before. 18. "What j-esolution have you taken? 19. I have taken 
the resolution to study my lesson. 20. Have you taken care not to 
tear your books ? 21. I have taken care not to stain them. 22. What 
has your brother determined ? 23. He has determined to remain 
silent. 24. Have you taken my part? 25. I have taken my 
brother's part. 26. Are you right to take his part ? 27. I am right 
to take his part, because he is right. 28. Are you not afraid to take 
his part ? 29. I am not afraid to take his part. 30. Will you take your 
sister's part or mine ? 31. I will take my sister's part. 32. Go and 
read your book, you do not know your lesson. 33. I know my 
lesson, and I know also that you are my friend. 34. Let us go to 
our father, he wants us. 

1 Le the, the meal called tea ; du the, the beverage called tea. 

2 Le cafe — -prendre le cafe, is often said of the coffee generally taken by 
the French after dinner. 

He m'attendez pas pour diner ; je Do not expect me to dinner ; I wiU 
viendrai seulement au cafe. only come to the (or to take) coffee. 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



109 



LEgON LXXII. 



LESSON LXXII. 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. All tlie French verbs, regular and irregular, end in this tense 
with e, es, e, ions, iez, ent. 

2. Conjugation of the Present of the Subjunctive of the 

Eegular Yerbs. 



Que je chant -e 
That I may sing 
Que tu pari -es 

That tliou may est speak 
Qu'il donn -e 

T.uit he may give 
Que nous cherch -ions 
That we may seek 
Que vous port -iez 
That you tnay carry 
Qu'ils aim -ent 

That they may love 



fin -isse 


re§ -oive 


may finish 


may receive 


eher -isses 


aper? -oives 


may est cherish 


may est perceive 


fourn -isse 


per9 -oive 


may furnish 


may gather 


pun -issions 


cone -evions 


may punish 


onay conceive 


sais -issiez 


d -eviez 


may seize 


may owe 


un -issent 


deg -oivent 


may unite 


may deceive 



rend -e 
m.ay render 
vend -63 
mayest sell 
tend -e 
may tend 
entend -ions 
m,ay hear 
perd -iez 
inay lose 
mord -ent 
inay bite 



3. In the first conjugation, the subjunctive is, in the singular, simi- 
lar to the present of the indicative. Exception : aller — je vais, que 
j aille. ■ 

4. The first and second persons plural of the subjunctive, in the 
four conjugations, are the same as the corresponding persons of the 
imperfect of the indicative. The third person plural is like the cor- 
responding person in the indicative present. Exceptions : avoir, 
subj anctive, nous ayons, vous ayez, ils aient ; savoir : nous sachions^ 
vous sachieZj Us sachent ; etre : nous soyons, vous soyez, ils soient; faire : 
nous fassionSj nous fassiez, ils /assent; aUer: ils aillent ; vouloir: ils 
veuillent ; valoir: ils vaillent. 

5. The subjunctive may also be formed from the participle present, 
by changing ant into e, es, e, ions, iez, ent : as, chantant, je chante ; 
finissant, je finisse ; ouvrant, j'ouvre ; sachant, je sache ; craignant, 
je craigne. 

6. The verbs presenting exceptions to this last rule are the fol- 
lowing, which the student will find conjugated in the Second Part 
of this grammar, § 62. 



Acquerir 


Concevoir 


Mourir 


Prendre, 


Savoir 


Yenir 


Aller 


Decevoir 


Mouvoir 


(and 


Tenir (and 


(and 


Apercevoir 


Devoir 


Pereevoir 


its com- 


its com- 


its com- 


Avoir 


Etre 


Pouvoir 


pounds) 


pounds) 


pounds) 


Boire 


Faire 


Pourvoir 


Eecevoir 


Valoir 


Youloir 



7. The past of the subjunctive is formed from the subjunctive 



200 



S OIX ANTE-DOUZIEME LEgON". 



present of one of the auxiliaries, avoir^ ttre, and the past participle 
of a verb [§ 45], 

Que j'aie parle, que je sois venu. That 1 may have spoken, that I may 

have come. 

8. A verb is put in the subjunctive, when it is preceded by the 
conjunction que, and another verb expressing consent, command, 
doubt, desire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, regret, fear, apprehen- 
Bion, &c. [§ 127, (2.)] 



Je veux que vous lui parliez. 

Je desire que vous arriviez a temps. 



I wish you to speak to him. 
I wish you to arrive in time. 



9. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb 
preceded by que, must also be preceded by ne, which, however, has 
no negative sense [§ 127, (3) ; § 138, (4.) (5.) (6.)] 

Je crains qu'il ne tombe. / am afraid lest he fall. 

10. After craindre, to fear ; apprehender, to apprehend; avoir peur, 
to he afraid ; trembler, to tremble ; pas is used in connection with the 
we, when we wish for the accomplishment of the action or occur- 
rence expressed by the second verb [§ 138, (7)]. 

Je tremble qu'il n'arrive pas 
temps. 

Resume of Examples. 

Le m^decin veut-il que je boive de Does the physician wish me to drink 

I'eau ? water ? 

Je consens que vous alliez le voir. / consent that you go to see him. 

Nous doutons que vous arriviez a We doubt your arriving in time. 

temps. 

Je Grains que votre maitre ne vous 7 fear lest your master -may punish 

puiiisse. you. 

Je crains que votre maitre ne vous I fear that your master may not pun' 

punisse pas. ish you. 

Je m'etonne qu'U ne sache pas cela. I am astonished that he does not 

know that. 



I tremble that he may not arrive in 
time. 



J'exige que vous lui donniez cela. 
Voulez-vous qu'il aille a la chasse ? 
Que voulez-vous que je dise ? 

J'aime mieux que vous me payiez. 



Artisan, m. mechanic ; 
Atelier, m. workshop; 
Au dessus, above ; 
Bracelet, m. bracelet; 
Deja, already ; 



1 require you to give him that. 
Do you wish him to go hunting ? 
What do you wish me to [thai I 

should) say f 
J would rather that you should pay 

me. 

Exeecise 141. 

Empech-er, 1. to prevent; Moulin a scie, saw-mill; 
Fortement, very much ; Obe-ir, 2. to obey ; 
Force, f. strength; Eempl-ir, 2. to fulfill; 

Magasin, m. warehouse ; Rue, f. street ; 
Malsain, e, unhealthy ; Tomb-er, 1. iofalL 



USE OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 201 

1. Que voulez-vous que nous fassions ? 2. Je desire que vous 
fassiez attention a vos etudes. 3. Ne craignez-vous pas que la pluie 
ne vous empeche de sortir? 4. ISTous craignons fortement que la 
pluie ne nous empeche de remplir nos engagements. 5. Doutez-vous 
qu'il soit chez lui maintenant ? 6. Je doute qu'il j soit, il est deja 
dix heures. 7. Exigez-vous qu'il parte de bonne heure? 8. Je 
m'etonne qu'il ne soit pas deja parti. 9. Aimez-vous mieux que 
je vous rende ces bracelets ? 10. J'aime mieux que vous me les 
payiez. 11. Yotre voisin craint-il que son enfant ne sorte ? 12. II 
craint qu'il ne tombe dans la rue. 13. Ne desirez-vous pas que vos 
eleves vous obeissent? 14. Je souhaite qu'ils m'obeissent et qu'ils 
obeissent a leurs professeurs. 15. Ne craignez-vous pas que cet 
artisan ne tombe malade ? 16. Je crains qu'il ne tombe malade, car 
son atelier est tres malsain. 17. Ne regrettez-vous pas qu'il soit 
oblige de travailler ? 18. Je regrette qu'il soit oblige de travailler 
au dessus de ses forces. 19. Ne desirez-vous pas qu'on lui apprenne 
cette nouvelle ? 20. Je desire qu'on la lui apprenne le plus tot pos- 
sible. 21. Votre pere ne veut-il pas que vous achetiez un magasin ? 
22. II veut que j'achefce un moulin a scie. 23. Desirez-vous que je 
vous quitte ? 24. Je desire que vous restiez avec moi. 25. Je veux 
que vous partiez ce matin. 

Exercise 142. 
1. Do you wish me to speak to the mechanic ? 2. I wish you to 
tell him to (de) come here to-morrow morning. 3. What do you 
wish me to do ? 4. I wish you to bring me a book. 5. Do you not 
wish me to read your letter ? 6. I wish you to read it, and (que) 
give it to my sisters. 7. Does not your sister fear lest the rain may 
prevent her going out ? 8. She fears that the rain may prevent our 
going out. 9. Do you doubt that your father be at home now? 
10. I doubt his being there. 11. Do you require me to do my work 
now ? 12, I wish you to do your work before going out (avant de 
sortir). 13. Do you not regret your being obliged to work ? 14. I 
do not regret my being obliged to work. 15. Are you not astonished 
that he knows that? 16. I am astonished that he knows all. 
17. Do you require me to pay him to day ? 18. I wish you to pay 
him to-morrow. 19. What would you have me do (See No. 1, of 
the above exercise) ? 20. T will have you pay him immediately. 
21. Do you fear lest the master punish your son ? 22. I fear that he 
may not punish him. 23. What would you have me say ? 24. I 
would have you say the truth. 25. Does not your father wish you 
to buy a house ? 26. He wishes me to buy a warehouse. 27. Do 



202 SOIXANTE-TEEIZIEMB LE^ON. 

you wish us to leave you ? 28. I wish you to go away to-morrow. 
29. Do you wish me to stay with you ? 30. I wish you to stay 
here. 31. Do you wish me to tell him that news ? 32. I wish you 
to tell it to him. 33. Do you wish your children to obey their 
teacher ? 34. I wish them to obey him. 



LEgON LXXIII. LESSON LXXIII. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE, CONTINUED. 

1. A verb, preceded by the conjunction que and one of the uni- 
personal verbs, il faut, it is necessary ; il importe, it matters, it is 
important ; il convient, it is proper, becoming ; il vaut mieux, it is 
letter ; il plait, it pleases, suits ; il se peut, il pent se faire, it may he ; 
il est juste, it is just ; il est bon, it is proper ; il est necessaire, it is 
necessary ; il est important, it is important ; il est temps, it is time ; 
il est indispensable, it is indispensable ; il est a propos, it is proper ; 
il est facheux, it is sad, it is a pity; il est urgent, it is urgent, or by 
another verb, or expression implying necessity, will, or propriety, 
must be put in the subjunctive [§ 127, (4.)] 

II faut que vous restiez ici. You must remain here. 

II est juste que vous soyez recom- Jt is just you should be rewarded. 
pense. 

2. The unipersonal verb il est, governs the indicative present or the 
future, when it is used affirmatively, and followed by que, coming 
after one of the adjectives, sur, sure; certain, certain; vrai, true; 
demontve, proved ; incontestable, incontestable; evident, evident, and 
others, having a positive and affirmative sense. 

II est certain qu'il vient ou qu'il It is certain that he comes or that he 
viendra. will come. 

3. When, however, the verb il est, used in the above connection, 
is negative or interrogative, it is followed by the subjunctive. 

n n'est nullement certain qu'il It is by no means certain that he will 
Vienna. come. 

4. After certain conjunctions, afin que, in order that ; quoique, al- 
iliough, etc., [see full list, § 143, (2.)] the subjunctive is always used. 

Quoique vous fassiez, quoique vous Wliatever you may do, whatever you 
disiez. may say. 

5. Other important rules, on the government of conjunctions, will 
be found iii said § 143. 



USE OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 208 

Resume of Examples. 

Que faut-il que votre soeur fasse ? What must your sister do ? 

Faut-il que je lui ecrive ? Must I write to him ? 

II est necessaire que vous lui ecriviez. It is necessary for you to write to Mm. 

II est temps que vous lui donniez son It is time that you should give him his 

argent. money. 

N'est-il pas facheux qu'il soit arrive Is it not a pity that he (should have) 

si tard ? arrived so late ? 

II est certain qu'il est arrive. It is certain that he has arrived. 

II n'est point certain qu'il se soit It is not certain that he has hurt him- 

blesse. self. 

Restez ici jusqu'a ce' qu'il arrive. Eemain here until he comes. 

Pourvu que vous finissiez a temps. Provided that you finish in time. 

Exercise 143. 

Affaire, f. affair; Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish; Point, m, point, degree; 

Ainsi, thus; Se lev-er, I. ret', to rise; Pourvu que, provided 

Creancier, m. creditor ; Linge, m. linen; that; 

Se couch-er, 1. ref. to Manqu-er, 1. to want; Regl-er, 1. to regulate ; 

retire; Necessaire, m. necessa- Rest-er, I. to remain; 

Dire, 4. ir. to say ; ries ; Satis fai-re, 4. ir. to sat- 

Emprunt-er, 1. to lor' Ordre, m. order ; isfy ; 

row; 0\ih\i-ev, I. to forget ; Tel, \e, such ; 

1. Que faut-il que je dise ? 2. II faut que vous disiez ce que vous 
avez entendu. 3. Ne faut-il pas que je finisse cette histoire ? 4. II 
n'est pas necessaire que vous la finissiez. 5. N'est-il pas a propos 
que je satisfasse mes creanciers ? 6. II est a propos que vous le fassiez. 

7. N'est-il pas juste que je vous paie ce que je vous ai emprunte ? 

8. II est juste que vous me le payiez. 9. Se peut-il que votre frere 
ait oublie sa famille ? 10. II ne peut pas se faire qu'il I'ait oubliee. 

11. Est-il certain que votre frere se soit oublie a un tel point? 

12. II est certain qu'il s'est oublie. 13. II est bien facheux qu'il se 
soit oublie ainsi. 14. Eesterez-vous jusqu'a ce que j'aie mis ordre a 
mes affaires? 15. Je resterai jusqu'a ce que vous les ayez reglees. 

16. Ne fai:dra-t-il pas que je fournisse des provisions a cette famille? 

17. II faudra que vous lui en fournissiez, pourvu que vous en ayez. 

18. Ne vaudra-t-il pas mieux que vous lui pretiez de I'argent, que de 
le laisser manquer du necessaire ? 19. II vaudra mieux que nous 
lui en pretions. 20. Que faut-il que nous fassions ? 21. II faut que 
vous portiez ce linge cliez moi. 22. N'est-il pas temps que je me 
couche ? 23. II est temps que vous vous coucliiez. 24. Faut-il qu© 
je me leve ? 25, II faut que vous vous leviez. 

Exercise 144. 
1. What must our friend do ? 2. He must remain at our house 
until I come. 3. What must our neighbor do ? 4. He must put his 



204 SOIXANTE-QITATOEZIEME LEgON. 

affairs in order. 5. Is it not right that you should pay your credi- 
tors ? 6. It is right that I should pay them. 7. Is it time for your 
little boy to go to school ? 8. It is time for him to go to school, it is 
ten o'clock. 9. Must I write to your correspondent to-day or to- 
morrow? 10. You must write to him to-morrow morning. 11. Is 
it not a pity that your brother has torn his cap (casqueite) ? 12. It is 
a pity that he has torn it. 13. Is it necessary for your mother to 
finish her letter ? 14. It is not necessary that she finish it. 15. Is it 
certain that your son has forgotten his money ? IG It is certain that 
he has forgotten it. 17. It is by no means certain that he has for- 
gotten it. 18. Must you furnish money to that mechanic? 19. I 
must furnish him some, he has none. 20. Whatever you may do 
you wiU not succeed (reussir). 21. Whatever your brother may 
say, nobody will beheve him (croire, ir.). 22. Must I write to you? 
23. You must write to me. 24. Do you wish me to be sick ? 25. I 
do not wish you to be sick. 26. Do you require me to tell you 
that ? 27. It is necessary that you tell me all. 28. Do you wish 
me to go to your house ? 29. I wish you to go there. 30. Must I 
get up ? 31. You must rise immediately (d Tinstanf). 32. Must 
your brother retire ? 33. He must go to bed immediately. 34. It is 
time for him to go to bed, it is twelve o'clock. 



LEgON" LXXIY. LESSON LXXIY. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE, CONTINUED. 

1. The verbs croire, to believe ; dire, to say ; esperer,to Tiope ; gager 
and parier, to let ; penser, to think ; sentir, to feel ,-^ voir, to see ; and 
others expressing affirmation or something certain and positive, are 
(when they have que after them) followed by the indicative present 
or fiiture [§ 127, (2) Note]. 

Je pense, je crois, je dis qu'il / think, I believe, I say thai he will 
viendra. come. 

2. The above verbs, when used in the same connection, and conju- 
gated negatively or interrogatively, are followed by the subjunctive, 
when the idea is very doubtful. 

Je ne crois pas qu'il puisse venir. / do not believe he will be able to come. 

3. A verb, preceded by another verb and by a relative pronoun, ia 



TJSE or THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 205 

put in the subjunctive, while there is an idea of uncertainty, and in 
the indicative, when the idea is certain [§ 127, (2.) Note]. 

J'ai un homme qui me rendra ser- / have a man who will oblige me. 

vice. 

J'ai besoiii d'un homme qui me / want a man who will {may) oblige 

rende service. me. 

4. A verb, preceded by a superlative relative, or by the words, le 
seuJj le premier, le dernier, is put in the subjunctive [§ 127]. 

Voila le seul chapeau que j'aie. That is the only hat I have. 
Voila le meilleur homme que je There is the best man 1 know, 
connaisse. 

Resume of Examples. 

Je crois que le concert a eu lieu. / believe that the concert took place. 

Je ne pense pas que notre ami / do not think that our friend will 

vienne. come. 

J'espere que vous apprendrez cela I hope that you will learn that by 

par coeur. heart. 

Je ne pense pas qu'il puisse appren- I do not think that he can learn all 

dre tout cela par coeur. that by heart. 

Je crois que ce marchand s'enrichit / believe that this merchant grows rich 

aux depens d'autrui. at the expense of others. 

Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enrichisse a I do not believe that he enriches him- 

vos depens. self at your evpense. 

Je ne crois pas que vous reussissiez / do not believe that you will succeed 

a gagner votre vie. in earning your living. 

J'ai une carafe qui contient un litre. 7 have a decanter which holds a litre. 

Je cherche une carafe qui contienne I seek a decanter which holds a litre. 

un litre. 

Je vous prete le meilleur chapeau I lend you the best hat 1 have, on con- 

que j'aie, a condition que vous me diiion that you will return it to me 

le rendiez demain. to-morrow. 

EXEECISE 145. 

S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to Fort, strong; Rentr-er, 1. to come in 

sit down; Litre, m. litre, about a again; 
Compt-er, 1. to depend; quart. Sorte, f. kind; 

Crista I, m. crystal; Negociant, m, merchant; SufiB-re, 4. ir. to suffice; 

Dehont, standing ; Faraso\, m. parasol ; Taunenr, m. tanner ; 

Dur-er, 1. to wear, last ; Portier, m. porter ; Tard-er, 1. to tarry. 

1. Pensez-vous que ce drap dure longtemps? 2. Je crois qu'il 
durera bien, car il est fort. 3. Croyez-vous que notre portier tarde a, 
rentrer ? 4. Je crois qu'il ne tardera pas. 5. Desirez-vous que noua 
restions debout ? 6. Je desire au contraire que vous vous as- 
Beyiez. 7. Croyez-vous que ces etudiants puissent apprendre cinq 
pages par coeur, en deux heures ? 8. Je crois que c'est impossible. 
9. Esperez^vous que notre ami arrive de bonne heure ? 10. J'espere 



206 SOIXANTE-QUATOEZIEME LEQON. 

qu'il arrivera bientot. 11. Quelle sorte de carafe vous faut-il? 

12. n m'en faut une qui contienne un litre. 13. J'en ai une de 
cristal, qui contient deux litres. 14. Pensez-vous que ce negociant 
s'enrichisse a vos depens ? 15. Je sais qu'il s'enrichit aux depens 
d'autrui. 16. Quel parasol pensez-vous me preter ? 17. Je pense 
vous preter le meilleur que j'aie. 18. Le tannsur reussira-t-il a 
gagner sa vie ? 19. Je ne crois pas qu'il y reussisse. 20. Pensez- 
vous que cet argent suffise a votre pere ? 21. Je crois qu'il lui 
suffira. 22. Croyez-vous que ces messieurs comptent sur moi? 
23. Je sais qu'ils comptent sur vous. 24. Pensez-vous que le concert 
ait lieu aujourd'hui ? 25. Je crois qu'il n'aura pas lieu. 

EXEECISE 146. 

1. Do you believe that the concert has taken place ? 2. I believe 
that it has taken place. 3. Do you believe that your sister's dress 
%vill wear well ? 4. I think that it will wear well, for the silk is very 
good. ,5. Do you believe that our friend will succeed in earning a 
livelihood ? 6. I beheve he will succeed in it {y), for he is very dili- 
gent. 7. Do you think that the tanner grows rich at my expense ? 
8. I think that he enriches himself at the expense of others. 9. Does 
the merchant grow rich at my father's expense ? 10. He grows 
rich at your expense. 11. "What kind of a house must you have 
(vous faut-il) ? 12. I must have a house which has ten rooms. 

13. I have a good house which has twelve rooms. 14. What kind 
of a decanter do you seek ? 15. I seek one which holds three litres. 
16. I have one which holds two litres, 1 will lend it to you. 17. What 
coat will you send me ? 18. I will send you the best I have, take 
care not to stain it. 19. Do you think that the student will learn all 
that by heart? 20. I do not think that he will learn it. 21. Do 
you believe (that) he will come ? 22. I believe that he will come 
soon. 23. Do you think that your father depends upon me ? 24. I 
know that he depends upon you. 25. Does not that gentleman de- 
pend upon me ? 26. I think that he depends upon your brother. 
27. Will the porter soon come in again ? 28. I hope that he will 
not tarry long. 29. Will you not lend me your umbrella ? 30. I 
will lend it to you with pleasure. 31. Does my brother remain 
standing ? 32. He does not wish to sit down. 33. Do you wish 
me to sit down ? 34. I wish you to remain standing. 35. I wish 
that he may come. 



USE OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



207 



LEgoN Lxxy. 



LESSON LXXY. 



THE I3IPEEFECT AND PLUPEEFECT OF THE SUBJUISTCTIYE. 



1. The terminations of the imperfect of the subjunctive are, in all 
the verbs, regular and irregular, of the four conjugations, sse, sses, t, 
ssionSj ssiez, ssent. 

2. The vowel preceding the t of tlie third person singular, always 
'takes the circumflex accent. 

3. Conjugation of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive of the 

Eegular Yerbs. 



Que je chant 

That I might sing 

Que tu pari 

Ihat thou mightest speak 

Qu'il donn -at 

Tliat he might give 

Que nous cherch -assions 

27irtf we might seek 

Que vous port -assiez 

That you might carry 

Qu'ils aim -assent 

That they tmght love 



fin -isse reg -usse rend -isse 
m,ight finixh onight receive migM render 

cher -isses aperc -usses veud -isses 
mightest cherish mightest percei-ce mightest sell 



fourn -it 
might furnish 
pun -issions 
might punish 
sais -issiez 
might seize 
un -issent 
m,ight unite 



pare -tit 
might gather 
cong -ussions 
might conceive 
d -ussiez 
miglit oice 
di§ -us-ent 
Tnight deceive 



tend -it 
m,ight tend 
en tend -issiona 
might hear 
perd -issiez 
might lose 
mord -issent 
migM bite 



4. This tense may be formed from the past definite, [L. 51] by 
changing, for the first conjugation, the final i of the first person sin- 
gular of the past definite into sse, sseSj etc., and adding se, ses^ etc., to 
the same person in the other three conjugations. This rule has no 
exceptions. 

J'allai, fallasse ; je finis, jefinisse. I went, I might go ; I finished, I might 

finish. 

5. All the observations made Lesson 52, on the changes of the 
stem of the irregular verbs, in the past definite, apply equally to the 
imperfect of the subjunctive. 

6. The pluperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the imperfect 
of the same mode, of one of the auxiUaries avoir, eire, and the past 
participle of the verb. 



Que j'eusse fini ; quo je fusse venu. 



Tliat I might have finished, ihat I 
might have come. 



7. All the rules given on the use of the subjunctive, in the three 
preceding lessons, apply, of course, to the imperfect and pluperfect of 
the mode. 

8. In the same manner as the present or future of the indicative 
of the first part of a proposition, governs under the above-mentioned 



208 



SOIXA2TTE-QT7INZIEME L E g O N. 



rules, the verb of the second part, in the present or past of the sub- 
junctive, so the imperfect and other past tenses of the indicative, 
and the two conditionals, govern the verb in the second part of the 
proposition, in the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive. 



Ne fallait-il pas que je lui parlasse ? 

H faudrait que je lui donnasse ce 
livre. 



Was it not necessary thai I should 

speak to him f 
It would be necessary for me to give 

him that book. 



Resume of Examples. 



Toudriez-vous que je donnasse un 

coup de baton a cet enfant ? 
Je voudrais que vous tirassiez un 

coup de fusil sur cet oiseau. 
Exigeriez-vous que nous revins- 

sions de bonne heure ? 
Que voudriez-vous que ces hommes 

fissent ? 
Que vouliez-vous que je fisse ? 
II faudrait que j'eusse mon argent. 

Je ne voulais pas que vous mourus- 

siez de froid. 
Elle craignait que vous ne mourus- 

siez de misere et de faim. 
Youdriez-vous quo je jetasse un 

coup d'oeil sur ces papiers ? 



Would you wish me to give thai child 

a blow with a stick ? 
I would wish you to fire your gun 

upon that bird. 
Would you require us to return early f 

Wliai would you wish those men to 

do? 
What did you wish me to do f 
It would be necessary for me to have 

my money. 
I did not wish you to die with the 

cold. 
She feared lest you might die with 

want and hunger. 
Would you wish me to cast a glance 

upon these papers ? 



Exercise 147. 



Becasse, f woodcock; 
Bord, m. shore; 
Charg-er, 1. io load ; 
Coup, m. blow; 
Coup de fusil, m. shot 
Coup d'oeU, m. glance, 
Demi-use, half-worn ; 
Eouet, m. whip; 



Ivrogne, m. drunkard, 
Lievre, m. hare; 
Mer, f sea; 
ISTeuf; ve, neio ; 
Perdrix, f partridge ; 
Poste, m. post ; 



1. to re- 



out; 



Ressembl-er, 

semble ; 
Eetablissement, 

covery ; 
Sante, f. health; 
Sort-ir, 2. ir io g 
Se rend-re, 4. ref. to re- Suisse, Switzerland ; 
pair ; Tir-er, 1. to fire, shoot. 

1. Youdriez-vous que j'achetasse un habit a demi-use ? 2. Je vou- 
drais que vous en achetassiez un neuf. 3. Youlait-on que ce soldat 
malade se rendit a son poste ? 4. On voulait qu'il se rendit a son 
regiment. 5. Faudrait-il que je demeurasse an bord de la mer ? 6. II 
faudrait, pour le retablissement de votre sante, que vous vous ren- 
dissiez en Suisse. 7. Ne pensez-vous pas que cet enfant ressemble ^ 
sa mere ? 8. Je ne pense pas qu'il lui ressemble. 9. A qui ressemble- 
t-H? 10. II ressemble a sa soeur ainee. 11. Consentiriez-vous que 
votre fille epousat cet ivrogne ? 12. Youdriez-vous que nous mou- 
Tussions de misere ? 13. Je craignais que ces dames ne mourussent 
[§ 127, (3.) L. 72, 9.] de froid. 14. Ne voulez-vous pas tirer sur ee 



GOVERNMEIS^T OP VERBS. 209 

li^vre ? 15. Je tirerais sur cette becasse, si mon fusil etait charg^. 

16. Combien de coups de fusil voudriez-vous que je tirasse? 17, Si 
vous aviez de la poudre, je voudrais que vous tirassiez sur cette per- 
drix. 18. Voulez-vous que je jette un coup d'oeil sur cette lettre ? 

19. Je voudrais que vous la lussiez. 20. Que voudriez-vous que je 
fisse? 21. Je voudrais que vous fissiez attention a vos etudes. 

22. Faudrait-il que je sortisse ? 23. II faudrait que vous restassiez a la 
maison. 24. Que voudriez-vous que je fisse a ce cbeval? 25. Je 
Toudrais que vous lui donnassiez des coups de fouet. 

Exercise 148. 
1. What would you have me do ? 2. I would have you cast a 
glance upon this letter. 3. "Would you wish me to give that dog 
blows with a stick ? 4. I would wish you to give that horse blows 
with a whip. 5. Would you require us to return at five o'clock ? 
6. I would require you to return early. 7. Do you think that your 
brother resembles your father ? 8. I do not think he resembles my 
father. 9. Whom do you think that he resembles ? 10. I think he 
resembles my mother. 11. How many shots have you fired ? 12. 1 
have fired five shots at that woodcock. 13. Would you not have me 
fire at that partridge ? 14. 1 would have you fire at that partridge, if 
your gun was loaded. 15. Where would it be necessary for me to 
dwell ? 16. It would be ne;jessary for you to dwell on the sea-shore. 

17. Would you have me die with hunger? 18. I would not have you 
die of hunger. 19. Would you have your brother die with cold ? 

20. I would not have him die with cold or want* 21. What would 
you have your son do ? 22. I would have him learn his lessons. 

23. Would you have him learn German ? 24. I would have him learn 
German and Spanish. 25. Have you fired (sur) at that hare ? 26. I 
have not fired at that hare. 27. Would it be necessary for me to go 
out ? 28. It would be necessary for you to go out. 29. Would it be 
necessary for me to remain here ? 30. It would be necessary for you 
to go to church. 31. What did you wish? 32. I wished you to 
write to me. 33. Did you wish me to buy a coat half worn out ? 
34. I wished you to buy a good hat. 



LEgON LXXVI. LESSON LXXYI. 

REGIMEN OR GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. (§ 129.) 

1. Many verbs come together, in French, without prepositions, 
which are, in English, joined by them. Many others are connected, in 



219 S0IXANTE-SEI2IEME LEgOK. 

Prench, by prepositions different from those connecting the corres- 
ponding verbs in English. No satisfactory general rules can be 
given on this point. We have given, in the Second Part of this 
grammar^ [§ 130, 131; 132] copious lists of the verbs in general use, 
with the prepositions which follow them, when they come before 
other verbs. We have also hitherto noted the prepositions usually 
placed after the verbs introduced in our lessons. 

2. The student will recollect, that a verb following another verb 
(not avoir or ttre) or a preposition (not en) must be in the infinitive. 

3. The following verbs, extracted from the Ust, § 130, although 
they in English, take a preposition before another verb, do not take 
one in French. 

Aller, 1. ir. to go Falloir, 3. ir. to le ne- Savoir, 3. ir. io know 

Compter, 1. to intend cessary Souliaiter, 1. io wish 

Courir, 2. ir. to run Mener, 1. to lead, to take, Yaloir mieux, 3. ir. to he 

Daigaer, 1. to deign to conduct letter 

DesLrer, 1. to desire Penser, 1. to think Venir, 2. ir. to come 

Devoir, 3. to owe Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able Vouloir, 3. ir. to wish, 

Envoyer, 1. ir. to send Pretendre, 4. to jjretend io will, to require, to 

Espsrer, 1. to hope Preferer, 1. to prefer desire. 

Resume of Examples. 

Comptez-vous diner avec nous ? Do you intend to dine with us f 

Je vais diner chez mou psre. I ani going to dine at my father's, 

Ne voulez-vous pas donner a man- Will you not feed that dog? 

ger a ce chien ? 

Desirez-vous monter dans ma cham- Do you wish io go up to my room 7 

bre? 

Je prefere descendrechez voire pere. I prefer to go down to your father's. 

Demeure-t-il en haut, ou en bas ? Does he live above, or below ? 

Preferez-vous demeurer au rez-de- Do you preftr to live on the ground 

chaussee ? floor 1 

Je desire demeurer au premier etage. I wish to live in the first story. 

Nous preferons louer le second etage. We prefer io take the second story. 

Kous esperons louer une chambre We hope to rent a room in the second 

au second- story. 

ExEEClSE 149. 

Cabinet, m. closet; En haut, up stairs, Plaisir, m. favor, plea^ 

Com-pt-ev, 1. io ci2)her ; above; sure; 

Demhin, to-morrow ; Faisan, m. pheasant ; Salle, i parlor ; 
Dejeila-er, 1. io break- Jon-er, 1. to play ; Touch-er, 1. to touch, 

fOjSt ; Lou-er, 1. to rent, to let ; play ; 

En bas, down stairs, be- Pinc-er, 1. to play, {lit. Troisieme, third story ; 

low; to pinch;) ' Yiolon, m. violin. 

1. Combien de chambres comptez-vous louer? 2. Nous comp- 
tons louer une salle au rez-de-chaussee et deux cabinets au troisieme. 
3. Ne preferez-vous pas louer une chambre a coucher au second?. 



GOVERNMENT OP VERES. 211 

4. Nous preferons demeurer au rez-de-chaussee. 6. Ne pouvez-vous 
rester a diner avec nous aujourd'hui ? 6. Je vous remercie, je pre- 
fere venir demain. 7. M. votre 'pere viendra-t-il demam dejeuner 
avec nous ? 8. II compte venir demain de bonne lieure. 9. Que 
vouloz-vous leur dire ? 10. Je veux les prier de me faire ce plaisir. 
11. Comptez-Yous faire ce plaisir a mon .frere ? 12. J'espere le lui 
faire. 13. Preferez-vous demeurer en haut, ou en bas ? 14. Nous 
preferons demeurer en bas. 15. Que pensez-vous faire de ce jeune 
faisan ? 16. Kous pensons I'envoyer a, M. votre beau-frere. 17. Ke 
savez-vous pas jouer du violon? 18. Je sais en jouer. 19. Mile- 
votre cousins sait elle toucher le piano? 20. EUe sait toucher le 
piano et pincer la harpe. 21. Ne savez-vous pas ecrire ? 22. Nous 
Savons lire, ecrire, et compter. 23. Savez-vous jouer de la guitare ? 
24. Nous ne savons pas en jouer. 25. Nous souhaitons trouver ua 
appartement au rez-de-chaussee. 

Exercise 150. 
1. Does your brother-in-law intend to rent the ground floor? 
2. He intends to rent two rooms in the second story. 3. How 
many rooms does your son intend to take? 4. He intends to take 
two rooms in the second story. 5. Does he prefer to live on the 
second floor ? 6. He prefers to live on the ground floor. 7. Does 
your father wish to come to dinner with us to-morrow ? 8. He in- 
tends to come to-morrow, at two o'clock. 9. Do you prefer to live 
up stairs, or down stairs? 10. I prefer to hve above. 11. Does 
your sister know how to play on the piano ? 12. She knows how to 
play on the piano. 13. Where do you intend to live {demeurer) ? 
14. "We intend to live at your father's. 15. Will you go up to my 
room ? 16. I will go down to your father's. 17. Do you wish to 
live on the ground floor ? 18. I wish to live on the second floor. 
19. Is it necessary to stay here ? 20. It is not necessary to stay 
here. 21. What do you think of doing with {de) your book ? 22. I 
think of giving it to my son. 23. What do you wish me to say to 
that gentleman ? 24. I wish to beg him to do me a favor. 25. Do 
you wish to send that pheasant to your mother ? 26. I wish to send 
it to her, she is sick. 27. Cannot your sister play on the violin? 

28. She cannot play on the violin, but she can play on the guitar. 

29. Does your sister wish to hve up stairs ? 30. She prefers living 
down stairs. 31. Will you not do me that favor? 32. I will do it 
with pleasure. 33. Cannot your brother stay and dine with us to- 
day ? 34. He has promised my father to come and dine with him. 
35. Our friend knows how to read, write, and cipher. 



212 



SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIEMB LEgON". 



LECON LXXVn. 



LESSON LXXYII. 



GOVEEXilENT OF VERBS, CONTINUED. 

1. !Many verbs, in French, are joined with other verbs following, 
by means of the preposition de, of, where the corresponding verbs, 
in English, either take no preposition, or one other than of. Besides 
avoir hesoin^ &c. [L. 21. R. 4.], the following verbs extracted from 
li&t, § 132, belong to this class : 



Achever, to finish 
Bruler, to 6wr??, to long 
Cesser, io cease 
Commander, to com- 

mand 
Coaseiller, io advise 
Defendre, to forbid 
Dire, to say 



Dispenser, to dispense Negliger, to neglect 

Empecber, to prevent Prier, io beg 

Eviter, to avoid Promettre, to promise 

Se flatter, to flatter one''s Proposer, to propose 

self Refuser, to refuse 

Jurer, to swear Supplier, to entreat 

lilanquer, to fail Trembler, to tremble, 
Menacer, to threaten be in great fear 



to 



RESTjiiE OF Examples. 



Pourquoi n'achevez-vous pas d'ap- 

prendre ce meder ? 
Kous brilons de continuer nos 

etudes. 
II ne cesse de nous tourmenter. 
Me defendez-vous de faire du bien a 

cet homme ? 
Ne negligez pas de lui faire une 

visite. 
Me promettez-vous de faire une 

visite a mon ami ? 
Je vous prie d'aller tout-droit chez 
• vous. 
Je vous conseille de venir par le 

ehemin de fer. 
Ne manquez pas de lui faire mes 

compliments. 
L'avez-vous menace de le frapper ? 
J'ai refuse de lui faire credit. 
Me proposez-vous de lui confier cet 

argent ? 
Je vous conseille de le lui confier. 
J'evite de lui reprocher ses fautes. 



Why do you not finish learning thai 
trade ? 

We burn {long) to continue our stud- 
ies. 

He does not cease tormenting ics. 

Do you forbid my doing good to that 
man f 

Do not neglect paying him a visit. 

Do you promise me io pay a visit to 

viy friend ? 
I beg you will go straight home. 

I advise you to come by the railroad. 

Do not fail to present my compli- 

ments to him. 
Have you threatened to strike him f 
I refused to give him credit. 
Do you propose to me to trust him 

with this money ? 
I advise you to trust him with it. 
I avoid to reproach him with his 

faults. 



Exercise 151. 

Gard-er, 1. to keep ; 



1. to forget; 
4. to do, to ren- 



./i.rros-er, 1. to water 

AvTOSoir,m.watering-pot ; Jardinier, m, gardener ; 

Au contraire, on the con- Lendemain, m, next day, 

trary ; day after ; 

Corrig-er, 1. to correct ; Noel, m. Christmas ; 
Paire part, io communi- Se rend-re, 4. ref to re- Voie, f conveyance, way, 

cate ; ^air ; or m/)de of travelling. 



Oubli-er 
Rend-re, 

der ; 
Tout-droit, siraiglit ; 
Veille, f eve, day before • 



GOVERNMENT OF VEEES. 213 

1. Pourquoi ne cessez-vous pas de lire ? 2. J'aurais tort de cesser 
de lire, avant de savoir ma lecon. 3. Avez-vous defendu a, votre 
jardinier d'arroser ces fleurs ? 4. Au contraire, je lui avals com- 
mande de les arroser. 5. Pourquoi a-t-il neglige de le faire ? 6. Parce 
qu'il a oublie d'apporter I'arrosoir. 7. Que desire faire M. F. ? 8. II 
brule de continuer I'etude de la medecine. 9. N'avez-vous pas 
tort de faire des visites a ce monsieur ? 10, J'aurais tort de le ne- 
gliger. 11. N'avez-vous pas refuse de rendre ce service a votre en- 
nemi ? 12. J'aurais eu tort de refuser de le lui rendre. 13. Quelle 
voie nous avez-vous conseille de prendre ? 14. Je vous ai conseille 
de prendre le bateau a vapeur. 15. Avez-vous menace de frapper cet 
enfant? 16. Je I'ai menacd de le corriger. 17. Avez-vous refuse 
de vendre des marchandises a mon frere ? 18, J'ai refuse de lui en 
v^ndre a credit. 19. Avez-vous dit a mon fils de se rendre a la 
maison? 20. Je I'ai prie d'y aller tout-droit. 21. Vous proposez- 
vous de venir la veille de Noel ? 22. Nous nous proposons de venir 
le lendemain. 23. Votre compagnon se propose-t-il de garder le 
secret ? 24. II se propose de faire part de cela a tout le monde. 

EXEECISE 152. 

1. Have you forbidden my cousin to speak to the gardener ? 2. I 
have not forbidden hiiii to speak to him. 3. Has your mother ordered 
the gardener to water her roses (roses) ? 4. She has ordered him to 
Water them. 5. Has he forgotten to do it ? 6. He has neglected to 
do it; he has not forgotten it. 7. What conveyance will you take to 
go to Paris ? 8. I advise you to take the railroad. 9. Have you told 
(a) your son to take the steamboat ? 10. No, sir ; I have told him 
to take the stage (diligence, f.). 11. Is not your brother wrong to 
neglect paying a visit to his brother-in-lav^r ? 12. He is wrong to 
neglect it. 13. Does not that young German long to read that 
letter ? 14, He longs to continue his studies. 15. Do you propose to 
trust him with that money ? 16. 1 propose to trust him with it. 17. Do 
you neglect to reproach him with his faults ? 18. 1 avoid to reproach 
him with them. 19. Have you threatened to punish your son? 20. I 
have threatened to strike him. 21. Do not fail to present my com- 
pliments to my sister's friends. 22. I will not fail, (je riy manquerai 
pas). 23. Have you refused to sell him goods ? 24. I have refused 
to sell him goods on credit. 25. Which mode of travelling do you 
advise me to take ? 26. I advise you to take the railroad. 27. Do 
you forbid him to come ? 28. T have forbidden his writing. 29. Have 
you failed to pay your gardener? 30. I have not failed to pay 



214 



SOIXANTE-DIX^HUITIEME LEgOK. 



him. 31. I have forgotten to pay you. 32. Do 'not neglect to ■write 
to me. 33. Tell him to go to my father. 34. Do not cease to work. 
35. Tell him to come Christmas Eve. 36. I have told him to come 
the day after. 



LEgON LXXYIII. 



LESSON LXXVni. 



GOVEENMENT OF VERBS, CONTINUED. 



1. Many French verbs reach their object by means of prepositions, 
while the corresponding English verbs govern their object directly, 
that is, without intervening prepositions. Other French verbs reach 
their object through prepositions different from those used in English. 
We give here a few verbs coming under those two classes, commen- 
cing with the first. 

2. Verbs which have a preposition before a noun, in French, but 
have none in English. 



Abuser de, to abuse 
S'approcher de, to ap- 

p 'oach 
Convenir a, to suit 
Deplnire a, to displease 
Desobeir a, to disobey 
pouter de, to doubt 
Echapper a, to escape 



Jouir de, to enjoy Plaire a, to please 

Manquer a, to offend, to Se souvenir de, to remem- 

fail ber 

Medire de, to slander Se servir de, to use 
Se mefier de, to mistrust Ressembler a, to resem- 
Obeir a, to obey ble 

Pardonner a, to forgive Survivre d, to su'.-e-ive 



3. Verbs reaching their object through different prepositions in the 



two languages. 



S'affligerde, io grieve /or Louer de, to jprawe /or Remercier de, to thank 



Feliciter de, to congratu- Profiter de, to profit 
late on, or /or Penser a, to think of 

Gerair de, to grieve for Se passer de, to do with- 

S' in former de, to inquire out 
about 



for 

Eire de, to laugh at ■ 
Rougir de, to blush at 
Songer a, to think of 



ResumIi of Examples. 



N'avez-vous pas abuse de notre pa- 
tience ? 

Nous en avons abuse. 

Vous avez desobei a vos parents. 

Vous pardonnerez a vos ennemis. 

Vous penserez constammeut a vos 
devoirs. 

Vous y penserez constammeut. 

Ne riez-vous pas de nos erreurs ? 

Nous n'en rions point. 

N© ressemble-t-il pas a son pere? 



Have you not abused our patience t 

We have abused it. 

You have disobeyed your parents. 

You will forgive your enemies. 

You will think constantly of your 

duties. 
You will think of them constantly. 
Do you not laugh at our mistakes t 
We do not laugh at them. 
Does he not resemble his father. 



GOVERNMENT OP YEEBS. 215 

Exercise 153. 

Arrangement, m. ar- Coeur, m. heart; Ne — plus, no more; 

rangement ; Devoir, m. duty ; Nouvelle, f. news ; 

Circonstance, f. circum- Faute, f. fault ; Parent, m. relation ; 

stance ; S'informer, 1. ref. to in- Peintre, m. painter ; 

Conduite, f. conduct ; quire ; ' Prochain, m. neighbor ; 

Complaisance, f. hind- Malheur, m. misfor- Sellier, m. saddler; 

ness ; tune; Succes, m. success. 

1. Cat arrangement vous convient-il ? 2. II ne me conviect pas^ 
mais il convient a notre parent. 3. Cela ne deplait-il pas au peintre ? 
4, Votre conduite lui deplait beaucoup. 5. IsTe craignez-vous pas 
d'abuser de la padence de votre ami ? 6. Je crains d'en abuser. 
7. Ne pensez-vous jamais a vo3 devoirs.? 8. J'j pense tous les jours. 
9. Avez-vous pense a votre frere aujourd'hui? 10. J'ai pense a lui, 
et J8 me suis souvenu de ses bontes. 11. A-t-il eu soin de son pere, 
et lui a-t-il obei ? 12. II lui oboifc constamment. 13. Ne lui a-t-il 
jamais desobei? 14. II lui a desobei plusieurs fois, mais il gemit de 
sa faute. 15. ISTe les remerciez-vous pas de leur complaisance ? 
16. Je les en remercie de tout mon cceur. 17. Le sellier vous a-t-il 
felicite de votre succes ? 18. II m'en a felicite. 19. N' avez-vous 
pas ri de notre malheur ? 20. ISTous n'en avons pas ri, nous ne rions 
jamais des malheurs d'autrui. 21. Ne vous souvenez-vous pas des 
nouvelles que je vous ai apprises ? 22. Je ne m'en souviens plus. 
23. Yotre pere ne vous a-t-il pas defendu de medire de votre pro- 
chain ? 24. II me I'a defendu. 25. Nous nous sommes informes de 
toutes les circonstances de cette affaire. 

Exercise 154. 
1. Have you not abused your friend's kindness? 2. I have not 
abused his kindness, I have abused his patience. 3. Does not your 
conduct displease your parents? 4. My conduct does not please 
them. . 5. Why have you not obeyed your father ? 6. I have obeyed 
him (lui). 7. Have you not laughed at my mistakes ? 8. I havo 
not laughed at your mistakes. 9. Has the young man laughed at 
the painter's mistakes ? 10. He has not laughed at his mistakes. 
11. Has your saddler laughed at your cousin's misfortunes ? 1 2. He 
has not laughed at his misfortunes. 13. Do you ever laugh at the 
misfortunes of others ? 14. We never laugh at our neighbor's mis- 
fortunes. 15. Do you remember the lesson which you learnt yes- 
terday ? 16. I do not remember it (en). 17. Does that young lady 
resemble her mother? 18. She does not resemble her mother. 
19. Have you thanked your friend for his kindness ? 20. I have 
thanked him for iU 21, Has your mother forbidden you to read 



216 SOIXANTE-DIX-NEU VIEME LEgON. 

that book? 22. She has forbidden it (me Va). 23. Why do you 
not forgive your enemies ? 24. I forgive them with all my heart. 
25. Do you not think of your duties ? 26. I think of them (y) every 
day. 27. Have you congratulated your friend? 28. I have con- 
gratulated him on his success. 29. Have you not slandered those 
gentlemen ? 30. I never slander my neighbor. 31. Does that house 
suit you? 32. It suits me, but it does not suit my father. 33. Does 
that house suit the painter ? 34. It suits him very well, but it is 
too small for me. 35. My father has forbidden my speaking to that 
gentleman. 



LEgON LXXIX. LESSON LXXIX. 

BEGIMEI!?" OF ADJECTIVES. (§ 87.) 

1. The regimen, or complement of an adjective, is generally a 
noun or a verb completing its signification. The regimen is usually 
connected with the adjective, by means of a preposition. 

2. That preposition is often different, in French, from that con- 
necting the corresponding English adjective with its regimen [§ 87, 
(1.) (3.)]. 

3. When an adjective follows the verb ttre, used unipersonally, the 
preposition de connects that adjective with its regimen [§ 87, (4.)]. 

n est necessaire de travailler pour It is necessary to labor in order to 
vivre. live. 

4. The following adjectives, extracted from lists, § 88, 89, 90, 
reach their regimen through prepositions different in French and 
Enghsh. 

Amoureux de, in love Mecontent de, displeased FvoTpve Sb, fit for 

with with Eebelle a, rebellious tch 

Cheri de, beloved by Eeconnaissant de, grate- wards 

Content de, pleased with ful for Bon pour, hind towards 

Desole de, ^rieuecZ /or 'R&m^li de, filled with Insolent avec, insolent 
Fache de, sorry for Bon a, good for towards 

Inquiet de, uneasy about Cruel a, cruel towards Poll envers, polite to, or 
Ivre de, intoxicated with Exact a, exact in towards. 

Resume oe Examples. 

K'etes-vous pas content de vos pro- Are you not pleased with your pro- 

gres ? gress ? 

J'en suis fort content. lam very much pleased with it. 

Votre domestique est-H exact a Is your servant exact in fulfilling 

remplir ses devoirs ? his duties ? r 



EEGIMBN OP ADJECTIVES. 



217 



Avez-voua rempli de via cette bou- Have you filled that bottle with winef 

teUle ? 

Avez-vous rempli d'axgent votre Have you filled your purse with 

bourse ? money f 

Je Ten ai remplie. I have filled it with it. 

II est tres facile de blamer les ac- It is very easy to blame the actions of 

tions d'autrui. others. 

11 est glorieux de mourir pour sa It is glorious to die for one^s country, 

patrie. 

II est plus agreable de vojager eji It is more agreeable to travel in sum- 

ete qu'en hiver. mer than in winter. 

EXEECISE 155. 

Abatt-re, 4. ir. to cut Bois a brMer, m. fire- Nettoy-er, 1. to clean; 

down ; wood ; Peuple, m. people ; 

Achat, m. purchase; Chagrine, e, vexed; Pommier, m, apple-tree; 

Arrach-er, 1. to pull up; Encre, f. ink; Prunier, va. plum-tree ; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Fendre, to cleave^ split ; Roi, m. king ; 

er ; Gloire, f. glory ; Sci-er, 1. to saw ; 

Bourse, f. purse ; Liberte, f. libei'ty ; Tonneau, m. cask. 

1. Co heros n'etait-il pas amoureux de la liberte et de la gloire ? 
2. II en etait amoureux. 3. Ce roi n'etait-il pas cheri de son 
peuple? 4. n en etait cheri. 5. Ces negociants ne sont-ils pas 
contents de leur achat ? 6. lis n'en sont pas contents. 7. N'etes- 
vous pas chagrine de ne pouvoir nous accompagner? 8. J'en suis 
desole. 9, Savez-vous de quoi 1' aubergiste a rempli ce tonneau? 
10. II I'a rempli de vin. 11. De quoi ferez-vous remplir cette bou- 
teille, quand vous I'aurez fait nettoyer ? 12. Elle est deja remplie 
d'encre. 13. N'etes-vous pas bien fache d'avoir fait abattre vos 
pommiers ? 14. J'en suis bien content, car ils n'etaient bons a rien. 
15. N'est-il pas necessaire de faire arracher ces pruniers? 16. II 
n'est pas necessaire de les faire arracher. 17. Est-il possible do 
fendre ce morceau de bois ? 18. II est possible de le fendre. 
19. l]tes-vous exact a nettoyer vos habits ? 20. J'y suis tres exact. 
21. De quoi avez-vous rempli votre bourse ? 22. Je I'ai remplie 
d'argent. 23. Est-il necessaire de faire scier votre bois a briiler ? 
24. II est necessaire de le faire scier. 25. N'etes-vous pas reconnais- 
iant des services qu'on vous rend ? 26. J'en suis tres reconnaissant. 

Exercise 15Q. 
1. Are you not grieved vc^ith having lost your money ? 2. I am 
Borry that I have lost my purse. 3. With vs^hat will you fill that 
bottle ? 4. I will have it filled with ink. 5. Is it not necessary to 
have our wood sawed ? 6. It is necessary to have our fire-wood 
sawed. 7. Your garden is too small, is it not necessary to have somo 

10 



218 QUATKE-VINGTIEME LEgON. 

plum-trees pulled out ? 8. It is necessary to have some plum-trees 
cut down. 9. Have you filled your friend's purse with silver ? 10. I 
have filled it with gold. 11. Are all your bottles filled with wine ? 
12. They are all filled with ink. 13. Are you sorry to have filled 
your bottles with ink? 14. I am glad to have filled them with ink, 
for I want ink. 15. Are you pleased with this book? 16. lam 
pleased with it. 17. Is that land good for any thing ? 18. It is good 
fjr nothing. 19. Is that lady beloved by her children ? 20. Sho is 
biloved by her friends, and by her children. 21. Are you grateful 
foT those services ? 22. I am grateful for them. 23. Is it not pos- 
sible to spht that piece of wood ? 24. It is not possible to split it. 
25. Is it agreeable to travel in winter ? 26. It is not as agreeable to 
travel in winter as in summer. 27. It is easy to blame others. 
28. Is it not glorious to die for one's country? 29. It is glorious to 
live and to die for one's country. 30. Have you filled the inkstand ? 
(encrier). 31. I have filled it with ink. 32. Would it not be ne- 
cessary to pull up all those trees ? 33. It would not be necessary to 
pull them all up, for my garden is very large. 34. Henry the Fourth 
(^uatre) was beloved by his people. 



LEgON LXXX. LESSON LXXX. 

GOVEENMENT OF PBEPOSITIONS, ETC. (§ 139.) 

1. Some prepositions govern the nouns that follow them without 
the aid of other prepositions. Avant, before (at an earlier period)] 
[(§ 142, (1.)] devant., before (opposite place)', [§ 142, (1.)] derriere, 
behind ; chez, at the house of ; concernant, touching ; excepte, except / 
outre, besides ; selon, according to ; voici, here is ; voila, there is, etc., 
[§ 139, (1.)] 

2. Others, being rather prepositional phrases, govern their object 
by means of the preposition de : — hors de, out of; loin de^ far from ; 
a fleur de, even with; a force de, by dint of; a I'egard de, with regard 
to; a I'insu de, without the knowledge of unknown to; a raison 
de, at the rate of; au dega de, this way of; au dela de, that way of 
[§ 139, 2.]. 

3. Others take a — quant a, as far ; jusqu'a, as far <is, etc. [§ 139, 3.]. 

4. Two or more verbs, adjectives, or prepositions may in French 
have a regimen in common, provided they govern in the same man- 
ner or case [§ 92, (1.) (2.) § 140, and § 133.]. 



GOVEENMENT OP PREPOSITIONS 



219 



Kous aimon3 et nous louons nos We love and praise our children. 

enfants. 

Ce jardin est utile et agreable a That garden is useful and agreeable 

notre pere. to our father. 

Au dedans ou au dehors du roy- Within or without the kingdom. 

aume. 

5. When, however, two or more verbs, adjectives or prepositions 
coming together in the same sentence, do not govern their regimen 
in the same manner, they cannot have a regimen in common. The 
regimen must be repeated, or replaced by a pronoun, or another turn 
must be given to the sentence. The following sentences could not, 
therefore, be translated literally into French. 

Tliat man is useful to and loved hy his family — I write to and receive letters 
from my brothers — To be exposed to or sheltered from the rain. We must 
say: 



Get homme est utile a sa famiUe, et 

il en est aime. 
J'ecris des lettres a mon frere, et 

j'en regois de lui. 
£tre expose £l la pluie, ou en ^tre 

a I'abri. 



Tliat man is useful to his family, and 
he is beloved by them. 

I write letters to my brother, and re- 
ceive some from him. 

To be exposed to the rain, or to &« 
sheltered from it. 



Utile and aime, tcrire and recevGir, expose and d Tahri, take dif- 
ferent regimens. 

ResumI: of Examples. 

We arrived before the laitle. 



Kous sommes arrives avant la ba- 

taille. 
Vous vous asseyez toujours devant 

moi. 
Les avez-vous places sur la table ? 
Je les ai places dessous. 
Je les ai mis sous la chaise ou des- 

sus. 
lis demeurent derriere notre maison. 
J'ai loue une chambre de derriere. 
Nous occupons le devant de la mai- 
son. 
Je les ai rencontres derriere votre 

jardin. 
Vous avez achete cette terre a I'insU 

de votre pere. 
J'ai paye le jardinier a raison de 

deux francs par jour. 



Tou always sit before me. 

Save you placed them upon the table f 

J have placed them under. 

I have put them under the chair of 

upon it. 
They lived behind our house. 
Ihave rented a back room. 
We occupy the front of the house. 

I met them behind your garden. 

You have bought that estate without 
the knowledge of your father. 

I paid the gardener at the rate oftw0 
francs per day. 

EXEECISE 157. 

Dessous, under, under Hectolitre, m. hectolitre, 
it; 100 liire"; 

Dgssus, above, upon it ; Plat, m. dish ° 
Dehors, outside, without ; S'enrich-ir, 2. to become Pop^me de terre, f. po- 
Derriere, ra. iac/c; rich; iato ; 



Assiette, f. plaie ; 
Coftt-er, 1. to cost ; 
Dedans, inside, within 



Devant, m. front ; Hors, out ; 



Sur, upoTif about. 



220 QUATRE- VINGTIEME LEgOIC. 

1. N'avez-vous pas ferine la porte de devant ? 2. ITous I'avons 
fermee, mais nous n'avons pas ferme la porte de derriere. 3. Qui 
est arrive avant moi ? 4. Le monsieur qui est assis devant la fenetre. 
6. Qui demeure derriere votre maison ? 6. II n'y a point de maison 
derriere la notre. 7. Ne pensez-vous pas qu'a force de travailler, il 
s'enrichira ? 8. Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enrichisse, s'il vend ses mar- 
chandises a si bon marche. 9. Appreud-il la musique a I'insu de 
ses parents ? 10. II I'apprend a leur insu. 11. Vous etes-vous 
marie a I'insu de votre soeur ? 12. Je me suis marie a son insu. 
13. Notre ami n'est pas dans la maison, il est dehors. 14. II n'est 
pas hors de la ville, il est dedans. 15. Avez-vous de I'argent sur 
vous ? 16. Je n'ai pas d'argent sur moi. 17. Demeurez-vous sur le 
derriere, ou sur le devant de la maison ? 18. Nous demeurons sur le 
devant. 19. La cuisiniere a-t-eUe mis les assiettes sur la table, ou 
dessous? 20. Elle a mis les assiettes, les plats, les cuilleres, et les 
fourchettes sur la table. 21. Combien ces pommes de terre vous 
coutent-elles ? 22. Je les ai achetees a raison de cinq francs I'hecto- 
litre. 23. Avez-vous fait reparer le dedans ou le dehors de la mai- 
son ? 24. J'ai fait reparer I'interieur et rexterieur. 

Exercise 158. 

1. Have you bought that house without your father's knowledge ? 
2. I have bought it without his knowledge. 3. Have you forgotten 
to shut the front door ? 4. I have shut the front door and the back 
door. 5. I have brought all my books, except two or three. 6. Does 
your brother occupy the front of your house ? 7. He occupies the 
back. 8. Whom have you met behind that house ? 9. I met nobody 
behind the house. 10. Does that gentleman live behind your house ? 
11. Nobody lives behind our house. 12. There is no house behind 
yours. 13. Have you a knife about you? 14. I have no knife 
about me. 15. Do you carry a knife about you ? 16. I never carry 
a knife about me. 17. Has not your brother money about him? 
18. He has no money about him. 19. Will you put these pencils 
upon the table, or under it ? 20. I will put them in the drawer 
(tiroir). 21. How much have you given for that wheat? 22. I 
bought it at the rate of twenty-five francs the hectolitre. 23. Is that 
lady's house out of the city ? 24. It is not out of the city ; it is 
within. 25. Has not your sister placed the plates upon the table ? 

26. She has put the plates upon the table, and the spoons under it. 

27. Have you had your house repaired ? 28. I have had the inside 
repaired, but not the outside. 29. How much does that silk coat cost 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, CB. 221 

you ? 30. I have bought it at the rate of five francs the metre. 
31. Did you many without your father's knowledge ? 32. I mar- 
ried without his knowledge. 33. Have you sold my books without 
my knowledge ? 34. I sold them without your knowledge. 35. I 
gold them without my sister's knowledge. 



LEgON LXXXI. LESSON LXXXI. 

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, CE. (§ 108.) 

1. The pronoun ce answers to the English pronoun it, used before 
the verb to he, in such sentences as, it is I, it is thou, etc. The latter 
pronouns (I, thou, etc.) are rendered by moi, toi, hii, elle, nous, vous, 
eiwc, m., elles, £ The verb remains in the singular, except when the 
pronoun following it is in the third person plural, in which case it 
may be put in the plural or in the singular [§ 116, (2.)]. If the pro- 
noun is followed by qui, the verb is better in the plural, and, if fol- 
lowed by que, in the singular. 

C'est moi, c'est lui, c'est elle. It is I, it is he, it is she. 

Ce sent elles qui parlent. It is they who speak. 

C'est elles que nous cherchons. It is they whom we seek 

2. If the relative pronoun qui and another verb follow eire, this 
second verb must agree in number and person with the pronoun pre- 
ceding the relative. 

C'est vous qui avez fait cela. It is you who have done that. 

C'est nous qui avons dechire cette It is we who have torn that silk. 
sole. 

3. Ce also renders the English pronoun it, used absolutely, but not 
unipersonally before the verb to he [§ 108, (5.)]. 

Ce fut en AUemagne qu'il trouva It was in Germany that he found his 
son ami. friend. 

4. Celui qui, celle qui, ceux qui, m., celles qui, /., are equivalent to 
the English pronouns, he who, she who, they who — celui que, celle que, 
ceux que, celles que, render he whom, etc. 

Celui ou celle qui chante. Se or she who sings. 

Resume op Examples. 

Est-ce voua qui nous avez averti de Is it you who have warned us of 

cela ? this ? 

C'est nous qui vous en avons avertL It is we who have warned you of it. 



222 QUATEE-VIKGT-ITNIEME LEQON. 

Est-ce vous, mesdames, que nous Is it you, ladies, whom we Tmve met f 

avons rencontrees ? 

Ge n'est pas nous, c'est eux que It is not we, it is they whom you have 

V0U3 avez vus. seen. 

Ce n'est pas vous, ce sont eux qui It is not you, it is they who have done 

ont fait cela. that. 

C'est en Angleterre que je vous ai It is in England that I saw you. 

vu. 

Connaissez-vous ces deux Portu- Do you know those two Portuguese f 

gais? 

Je connais celui qui parle a AL L. I know him who speaks to Mr. L. 

EXEECISE 159. 

Appel-er, 1. io call; Connaissance,f. acgwam^- De temps en temps, /rowi 
A toute force, hy oil ance; time to time; 

means; 'ExTp]iq\i-ev,l. to explain; 'Nnmero, 'No., number {of 

Avert-ir, 1. io warn ; Guerre, f. war ; a series, street, etc.) 

Blessure, f. wound; De jour en jour, /row cZay Phrase, f. sentence; 

Combl-er, 1. to over- to day ; Prelud-er, 1. to prelude. 

whelm ; 

1. Est-ce vous, madame, qui avez appele votre domestique? 2. Ce 
n'est pas moi qui I'ai appele. 3. Est-ce vous, mon ami, qui voulez 
a toute force aller en Espagne? 4. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est mon 
cousin. 5. N'est-ce pas lui qui a averti ce matelot de son danger ? 
6. Ce n'est pas lui, c'est moi qui Ten ai averti. 7. Est-ce nous que 
vous attendez de jour en jour ? 8. Ce n'est pas vous, c'est eux que 
j'attends. 9. Est-ce vous, madame, qui nous avez comblees de 
bienfaits ? 10. Ce n'est pas moi, madame. 11. N' est-ce pas en 
Italic que vous avez fait connaissance avec lui ? 12. Ce n'est pas en 
Italic, c'est en Russie. 13. Est-ce vous, mesdames, ou vos cousines, 
que nous avons vues au bal ? 14. C'est nous, ce n'est pas nos cou- 
sines, que vous avez vues. 15. Ne connaissez-vous pas ces deux 
messieurs ? 16. Je connais celui qui parle a Madame L. 17. Est-ce 
vous qui avez recu une blessure a la guerre ? 18. Ce n'est pas moi, 
c'est mon voisin. 19. N' est-ce pas vous qui nous avez explique 
cette phrase ? 20. Est-ce vous, monsieur, qui demeurez au No- 18? 
21. Ce n'est pas moi qui j demeure. 22. Entendez-vous ces musi- 
ciens ? 23. J'entends celui qui chante. 24. Je n'entends pas bien 
celui qui joue. 25. Nous entendons ceux qui preludent. 

Exercise 160. 

1. Is it you, my friend, -who have w^arned me of my danger ? 
2. It is not I who have warned you of it. 3. Is it they whom you 
expect from day to day ? 4. It is not they whom we expect. 5. Is 
it you who have done this ? 6. It is not we, it is you who have 



DEMONSTBATIVE PRONOUN, CE. 223 

done it. 7. "Was it in England that you bought this hat ? 8. It was 
not in England ; it was in Germany. 9. Was it not in Russia that 
you became acquainted with him ? 10. It was not in Russia ; it was 
in Italy. 11. Was it you who were calling us ? 12. It was not we ; 
it was he. 13. Are you not acquainted with the two Poles who 
are reading? 14. I know the one who is near you. 15. Is that 
(est-ce Id) the lady whom you expected ? 16. It is not (she). 17. Is 
it you, gentlemen, who have loaded my brother with kindness ? 

18. It is not (we), sir ; we have not the pleasure of knowing him. 

19. Is it you who have been wounded in the (au) arm ? 20. It is 
not (I). 21. Do you not hear those two ladies ? 22. I do not hear 
the one who sings. 23. I hear the one who plays. 24. Was it you 
who came to our house this morning ? 25. It was not I ; I was in 
London then (alors). 26. Was it you, sir, who did us that favor? 
27. It was not (I) ; it was my sister. 28. Was it your son who 
wished by all means to go to London ? 29. It was not he ; he is 
now in Germany. 30. Is it you who wrote that letter ? 31. We 
have written no letter. 32. Who lives at (au) No. 20 ? 33. I Hve 
there {c'est moi). 34. Is it we whom you have seen ? 35. It was 
not you whom I saw. 



LEgON LXXXIL LESSON LXXXH. 

CE, IDIOMATIC USE OF QUE. 

1. The pronoun ce (and not the pronouns t7, e??e, etc.), must be 
used for he, she, they, coming before the verb to he. when that verb is 
followed by a noun, or an adjective used substantively, preceded by 
the, a or an, by some or any understood, or by a possessive or demon- 
strative adjective. When the word used in apposition with ce is plural, 
and in the third person, the verb is put in the plural, although ce re- 
mains unchanged [§ 108, (2.) (3.)]. 

C'est un Polonais. Ee is a Pole. 

Ce sent des Anglais. They are Englishmen. 

C'est cette dame qui m'a parle do It is thai lady who spoke to me of 
vous. you. 

2. Ce is used as the nominative of the verb etre, in sentences like 
the following, and the conjunction que is used idiomatically after it. 
The verb in this case is not put in the plural. 

Qu' est-ce que ces enfants ? What are those children f 

Qu'est-ce que I'ltalie ? What is Italy ? . ■ 

I Qu'est-ce que le jardinage ? What is gardening t '^ 



224 QUATEB-VINGT-DEirXi:feME LEgOlT, 

3. Que is used idiomatically in a number of sentences. In the 
following it gives greater force to the expression. 

Ce sent de bons livres que les votres ? Yours are indeed good hooks. 
Je dis que oui ; je crois que non. I say yes ; I believe not. 

Resume of Examples. 

Qui sont ces messieurs qui parlent Who are the gentlemen who speak to 

a M. L. ? Mr. L. ? 

Ce sont mes cousins, qui yiennent They are my cousins, who have jusi 

darriver. arrived. 

De quel pays sent ces marchands ? Of what country are those merchants? 

Ce sont des Polonais, ils viennent They are Poles, they have just ar- 

d'arriver. rived. 

Us ne sont pas polonais, ils sont They are not Poles, they are Pus- 

russes. sians. 

Ce ne sont pas des Polonais, ce sont They are not Poles, they are Bus- 

des Russes. sians. 

Qu'est-ce que la Touraine ? What is Touraine ? 

C'est le jardin de la Prance. It is the garden of France. 

Votre fenetre ne donne-t-elle pas Does not your window look on the 

sur la rue ? street f 

Non, c'est sur la cour qu'elle donne. No, it looks on the yard. 

Je crois que oui ; je crois que non / believe so ; I believe not. 

EXEECISB 161. 

Bris-er, 1. to break; Stranger, e, foreign; Soieries, f. p. silks, 
Charron, m. wheel-wrighi /Fenetre, f. window ; Sucre, m. sugar ; 
Confitures, f. p. jpre- Lyon, Lyons; Suisse, Swiss; 

serves; Mouchoir, m. handker- Sui-prend-re, 4. ir. to 

Donn-er, 1. to give, look ; chief; catch, surprise; 

icossais, e, Scotch ; 'Rone, t wheel ; Yol-er, 1. to steal. 

1. Connaissez-vous ces etrangers? 2. Oui, monsieur; qe sont les 
freres de notre voisin. 3. Ne sont-ils pas ecossais ? 4. Non, mon- 
sieur ; ils sont suisses. 5. Ne sont-ce point des Ecossais qui vous 
ont fait present de cette casquette ? 6. Non, monsieur ; ce sont des 
Suisses. 7. N'est-ce pas votre domestique qui vous a vole du vin ? 
8. Ce n'est pas lui, c'est son frere. 9. N'est-ce pas lui qui a pris vo3 
confitures? 10. Ce n'est pas lui, ce sont ses enfants. 11. Ne. 
sont-ce pas la les enfants que vous avez surpris a voler votre sucre ? 
12. Ce sont leurs freres. 13. Ne sont-ils pas cousins ? 14. lis ne 
sont pas cousins, ils sont freres. 15. Qu'est-ce que ces soieries ? 
16. Ce sont des marchandises qu'on vient de nous envoyer. 17. N'est-ce 
pas une belle ville que Lyon ? 18. C'est une grande et belle ville. 
19. N'est-ce pas la le mouchoir que vous avez perdu ? 20. Je crois 
que oui. 21. N'est-ce pas sur le jardin que donnent vos fenetres ? 
22. Oui, monsieur J c'est sur le jardin qu'elles donnent. 23. N'est-ca 



AGBEBMENT OP VERB WITH SUBJECT. 225 

pas notre charron qui a fait cette roue ? 24. Ce n'est pas lui qui I'a 
faite. 25. Ce sont nos amis qui I'ont brisee, et c'est le menuisier qui 
I'a faite. 

Exercise 162. 
1. Is that lady your friend's sister ? 2. No, sir; she is a stranger. 

3. Who are the two gentlemen who are speaking to your sister ? 

4. They are Swiss gentlemen. 5. Are those the gentlemen whom 
you have invited ? 6. It is they (eux). 7. Do you not know that 
man ? 8. I know him very well ; he is the man who has stolen my 
wine. 9. What is Italy ? 10. It is the garden of Europe. 11. Is 
not that the letter which you intended to carry to the post-ofl&ce ? 
12. No, sir ; it is another. 13. Is the city of Havre fine ? 14. Yes, 
sir; Havre is truly a large and beautiful city. 15. Is not that the 
man whom you have caught stealing your fruit? 16. It is not, it is 
another. 17. Is not this the cap that you have bought ? 18. Yes, 
sir ; I believe so. 19. Do not the windows of your room look on 
the street ? 20. No, madam ; they look on the garden. 21. Do not 
the windows of your dining-room look on the yard {cour) ? 22. No, 
sir ; they look on the lake (lac). 23. Is it that little child who has 
taken your preserves ? 24, It is his brother or his sister. 25. What 
are those engravings ? 26. They are engravings which I bought 
in Germany. 27. Are these gentlemen Scotch? 28. They are not 
Scotch ; they are Italian. 29. Are those ladies Scotch ? 30. No ; 
they are the Italian ladies who came yesterday. 31. What is Mar- 
seille ? 32. It is one of the finest cities in {de) France. 33. Is it 
not your tailor who made that coat ? 34. It is not he, it is an Eng- 
lish tailor who made it. 35. It is your friend who broke my watch. 



LEgON LXXXIII. LESSON LXXXIH. 

AGREEMENT OP THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 

1. In French, as in other languages, when a verb has two subjects 
in the singular, it is generally put in the plural [§ 114, (2.)]. 

L'oncle et la tante sont arrives. The uncle and aunt have arrived, 

2. When a verb has two or more subjects of different persons, it 
is put in the plural, and assumes the termination of the first person 
rather than that of the second or ihirdj and the termination of the 



226 QITATEE-VINGT-TEOISIBME LEgON. 

second in preference to that of the third. A pronoun recapitulating* 

the others, is placed immediately before the verb. 

Tons et moi nous irons demaia a la Tou andlwiU go hunting to-morrow. 

chasse. 

Vous et lui vous irez demain a I'ecole. Tou and he will go to school to-morrow. 

Sa mere et moi nous avons ecrit His mother and I have written that 

cette lettre. letter. 

3. The above examples "^ill show, that, when a verb has several 
subjects, all of them pronouns, or partly pronouns and partly nouns, 
the words moi^ toi, lui, eux, are used instead of Je, tu, il, ils [§ 33, 
(10.) (11.)] 

4. For further rules on this subject, see § 114 and 115, and also the 
next lesson. 

5. Gener corresponds in signification to the English to trovMe, to 
incommode, to disturb, to he in the way, and to hurt (in speaking of 
shoes and garments). Se gener means to constrain, or trouble one's self. 

Est-ce-que je vous gene ? Am I in your way f 

Resume of Examples. 

Oil irez-vous, votre frere et vous ? Where will you go, your brother and 

you? 

Lui et moi, nous irons en Angleterre. He and I will go to England. 

Vous, elle et lui, vous acheterez du You, she and he will buy wheat. 

ble. 

Eux et moi, nous nous sommes fait They and 1 have hurt our heads. 

mal a la tete. 

Tous et lui, vous devriez vous pre- You and he should adapt yourselves 

ter aux circonstances. to circumstances. 

tiui et moi, nous vous generous sans Se and I will without doubt incom- 

doute. mode you. 

Ma cousine et moi, nous craignons My cousin and I fear to be in your 

de vous gener. way. 

Je ne me gene jamais chez mes / am never under constraint with my 

amis. friends. 

Ne vous genez pas ; m»ttez-vous a Be wider no constraint ; place your- 

votre aise. self comfortably. 

Nous n'aimons pas a gener les au- We do not like to incommode others. 

tres. 

Nous n'aimons pas a nous gener. We do not like to incommode our- 
selves. 

EXEECISE 163. 
A perte, at a loss; Nullement, by no means; Se pre ter, 1. ref. to adapt 

A profit, with a profit ; Pardon, excuse me ; one's self. 

Bras, arm; Persist-er, 1. to persist; Soeiete, f company, so- 

perang-er, 1. to disturb; Place, £ room; ciety ; 

Econome, economical ; Frodigne^prodigal, lavish ;Tous deux, both. 

1 This pronoun is sometimes omitted by the best French writers ; see 2d 
Example, § 33, (10.) 



AGREEMENT OP VERB "WITH SUBJECT. 227 

1. Si nous restions plus longtemps ici, nous craindrions de vous 
gener. 2. Vous ne nous genez nullement ; votre societe nous est 
tres agreable. 3. N'avez-vous pas ete trop prodigues, vous et votre 
frere ? 4. Lui et moi au contraire, nous avons ete tres economes. 
6. N'avez-vous pas tort de gener ce monsieur ? 6. Nous n' avons 
nullement envie de le gener. 7. Est-ce que mon bras vous gene, 
monsieur ? 8. Non, monsieur ; nous avons assez de place, vous ne 
me genez pas. 9. Ne devriez-vous pas vous preter aux circonstances ? 

10. Nous faisons, elle et moi, notre possible pour nous j preter. 

11. Ce jeune homme persiste-t-il dans sa resolution ? 12. Nous y 
persistons, lui et moi. 13. Persistez-vous tous deux a rester ici? 

14. Nous y persistons tous deux, 15. Get homme est-il gene dans 
ses afifaires {uncomfortably situated^ hadly off) ? 16. II etait geno 
dans ses affaires, il y a un an. 17. Ne vous genez pas, monsieur. 
18. Je ne me gene jamais, monsieur. 19. Est-ce-que mon frere voua 
derange ? 20. Non, monsieur ? il ne me derange pas. 21. Je ne 
voudrais pas vous deranger. 22. Pardon, si je vous derange. 23. Vous 
et votre associe vous avez vendu vos marchandises a perte. 24. Vous 
et moi nous vendons toujours a profit. 25. Votre pere, votre frere, 
et moi nous avons achete des marchandises. ^ 

Exercise 164. 
1. Do -we incommode you, my brother and I? 2. No, sir; you 
do not incommode us ; wq are very glad to see you. 3. Are you not 
afraid to disturb your friend ? 4. We are afraid to disturb liim, he 
has much to do. 5. Is my foot in your way, sir ? 6. No, sir ; your 
foot is not in my way. 7. Will you and your brother go to Ger- 
many this year ? 8. We intend to go there, he and I. 9. He, you 
and I should write our lessons. 10. Should you not, you and your 
friends, adapt yourselves to circumstances? 11. We should do so, 
if it were possible. 12. Do I not disturb you, sir ? 13. You do not 
disturb me by any means. 14. Does not my little boy disturb you ? 

15. He does not disturb me. 16. He disturbs nobody. 17. Does 
not your partner sell his goods at a loss ? 18. He never sells at a 
loss. 19. He and I always sell at a profit. 20. Do you persist in 
your resolution ? 21. Your friend and I persist in our resolution. 
22. I n -ver feel under constraint at your house. 23. Be, under no 
constraint (make yourself at home). 24. Are you not wrong to in- 
commode them ? 25. I do not intend to incommode them. 26. Wo 
do not like to incommode ourselves (to put ourselves out of tlie way). 
27. My little boy and I will, perhaps, be in your way. 28. No, sir; 



228 QUATRE-VINGT-QUATEIEME LEgOK. 

we are very glad of your company. 29. Do I disturb you ? 30. No, 
sir; you do not disturb us. 31. Do I disturb your father ? 32. No, 
sir ; you disturb no one. 33. Excuse me, sir, if I disturb you. 
34. Have you not been very lavish ? 35. No, sir ; I assure you 
that your son and I have been very economical. 



LEgON LXXXIV. LESSON LXXXIY. 

AGREEMENT OF THE YEKB WITH ITS SUBJECT, CONTHOJED. 

1. When a verb is preceded by several nouns not connected, it 
agrees with the last only, provided the nouns are in some way 
synonymous, or the mind dwehs more forcibly upon the last. 

Son amour, sa tendresse pour ses Eis love, his tenderness for his chU- 

enfants est connue de tout le dren, are known to every body. 
monde. 

Yos amis, vos parents, Dieu vous Tour friends, your relatives, God wiU 

recompensera. reward you. 

2. When two or more nouns are united by the conjunction ow, thp 
verb agrees with the last only. 

Charles ou G-eorge ^crira a votre Charles or George will write to yov/r 
ami. friend. 

3. When a noun and a pronoun, or two or more pronouns (not 
being aU in the third person), are joined by ou, the verb is put in the 
plural. 

Yous ou moi nous partirons demain. You or I will go io-morrow, 

Yotresoeurou vousvousirezal'eglise. Your sister or you will go to church, 

Yous ou lui vous avez pu seuls com- You or he alone have proldbly comf 
mettre cette action. mitted this act. 

4. When two nouns are joined by ni repeated, or when ni Tun ni 
T autre is used as nominative to a verb, the verb is put in the plural, 
if the two nouns, or the two persons represented by nlTun ni T autre, 
perform or may perform the action together. 

Ni I'un ni I'autre ne liront. Neither the one nor the other will read. 

5. When, however, only one at a time can perform the action, the 
verb is put in the singular. 

Ni Tun ni I'autre ne sera nomme Neither the one nor the other will le ap- 
prefet de c© departmgnt. "pomUd 'prefect of that department 



AGREEMENT OF VERB WITH SUBJECT. 229 

Resume of Examples. 

Ni I'un ni I'autre n'ont trouve le vin Neither the one nor the other found 

bon. the wine good. 

L'un et I'autre ont trouve le diner Both found the dinner lad. 

mauvais. 

Comment se trouvent messieurs vos Eow do your brothers find themselves t 

freres ? 

Ni l'un ni I'autre ne se trouvent bien. Neither find themselves well. 

L'un et I'autre se trouverent au ren- They hoth found themselves at the renr 

dezvous. dezvous. 

Jfi l'un ni I'autre ne sera elu presi- Neither will le elected president. 
, dent. 

L'un ou I'autre y trouvera a reflire. One or the other will find fault with it. 

Jjuiouvousvousavez trouve quelque He or you have found something to 

chose a redire a notre conduite. Name in our conduct. 

Ni lui ni moi nous n'avons trouve a Neither he nor 1 have found any fault 

redire a la conduite de vos enfants. with your children's conduct. 

Exercise 165. 

Auteur, m. author ; Plutot, rather; Se trouv-er, 1. ref. to find 

Devoir, m. duty; Eempl-ir, 2. to fulfil; one's self; to le pres- 

l^criture, f. writing. Eoti, m. roast meat ; ent. 

]&li-re, 4. ir. to elect ; Secretaire, m. secretary ; Veiller, 1, to watch ; 

Expos-er, 1. to expose; Trouv-er, 1. to find, to Yie, f. life. 
Interet, m. interest ; like, to fancy ; 

1. Remplissez-vous bien votre devoir ? 2. Nous ne le remplissons 
ni l'un ni I'autre. 3. Cherchent-ils l'un et I'autre a s'exposer? 4. Ni 
l'un ni I'autre ne olierclient a exposer leur vie (La Bruyere). 5. M. 
votre pere et M^^e- votre mere, se trouvent-ils mieux aujourd'hui ? 
6. Ni l'un ni I'autre ne se trouvent mieux. 7. Avez-vous trouve ^ 
redire a mon ecriture ou a celle de mon secretaire ? 8. Je n'ai trouve 
a redire ni a I'une ni a I'autre. 9. Get auteur ne trouve-t-il pas a 
redire a tout? 10. II trouve a redire a tous les livres. 11. Y 
trouvez-vous quelque chose a redire ? 12. Ni lui ni moi nous n'y 
trouvons rien a redire. 13. Lui ou moi, nous veillerons a vos 
interets. 14. Ni lui ni moi nous ne cesserons de veiller a la con- 
duite de votre fils. 15. Nous y veillerons plutot que d'y trouver ^ 
redire. 16. Lui et moi nous nous trouvames ensemble au rendez- 
vous. 17. Yous y trouverez-vous l'un ou I'autre ? 18. Nous noug 
y trouverons l'un ou I'autre. 19. L'un ou I'autre sera-t-il elu presi- 
dent? 20. Ni l'un ni I'autre ne sera elu. 21. Comment trouvez- 
vous ce roti ? 22. Je le trouve excellent. 23. Je trouve ce livre 
bon. 24. Je ne le trouve pas bon. 25. Je trouve cela bien fait. 

EXEECISE 166. 
1. How do you like that book? 2. Neither my sister nor I like 
it. 3. Did your brothers find the dinner good? 4. Botib found it 



230 QITATRE-VINGT-CINQITlilME LEgON. 

very good. 5:' Did the professor find fault with your conduct? 
6, He did not find fault with it. 7. Neither he nor my father find 
fault with my conduct. 8. Do they both watch over your con- 
duct ? 9. They both watch over my conduct, and over my interests. 
10. Have you both fulfilled your duty ? 11. We have fulfilled it. 
12. Have you not both criticised my writing ? 13. Neither has criti- 
cised it. 14. Do not your two sisters fijid themselves better to-day ? 
15. One finds herself better. 16. The other does not find herself so 
well 17. Do not those ladies find fault with every tfeng ? 18. They 
find fault with nothing. 19. Will either be elected prefect of the 
Department ? 20. Neither will be elected. 21. How do you, like 
this bread? 22. I find it very good. 23. Did your two friends 
arrive in time at the appointed place ? 24. Neither was there in (d) 
time. 25. Do you find fault with that {celd) ? 26. I do not find 
fault with it (y). 27. Will you both expose yourselves to this dan- 
ger ? 28. We will not expose ourselves to it. 29. Do you find 
fault with my secretary's conduct ? 30. I do not find fault with it. 
31. Do you find fault with his writing ? 32. I find fault with it, for 
it is very bad. 33. Will you not watch over my interests ? 34. My 
brother and I will watch oyer them. 35. We wiU not cease to watch 
over your interests. 



LEgON LXXXY. LESSON LXXXV. 

AGEEEMENT OF THE VEEB WITH THE SUBJECT, CONTINUED. 

1. A verb, having as its subject a general collective noun, [§ 3, (6.)] 
preceded by the article, agrees with the noun [§ 115, (1)]. 

La foule des pauvres est grande. Tlie crowd of the poor is great 

2. A verb preceded by a partitive collective [§ 3, (6.)] takes the 
number of the noun following the collective, unless attention be par- 
ticularly directed to the collective itself [§ 115, (2)]. 

Une foule de pauvres regoivent A crowd of poor people receive assisU 
des secours. ance. 

3. The words, la plupart, most ; un nombre, a number, Szc, and the 
adverbs of quantity, peu, assez, heaucoup, plus^ moins, trop^ tant^ 
combien, belong to this class. 

4. Rester is often used unipersonally in the sense of to have left. 
The adverbial expression de reste is often used in the same manner 
as the English word left. 



AGREEMENT OF VEEB WITH SFBJEOT. 231 

H me reste deux francs. I have two francs left — or 'literally 

There remains to me two francs. 
Nous avons cinquante ecus de reste. We have fifty crowns left. 

5. Devenir (2. ir.) to become, with etre as an auxiliary, corresponds 
in signification to the English to become, followed by of. It is also 
Englished by to become, or simply to turn. 

Qu'est devenu votre frere ? What has become of your brother ? 

11 est en Franco, et est devenu He is in France and has turned law- 
avocat. yer. 

Resume of Exa^mples. 

La plupart de mes heures sent con- Most of my hours are devoted to labor. 

sacrees au travail 

La foule des humains est vouee au The mass of mankind is devoted to 

malheur. misfortune. 

La plus grande partie des voyageurs The greatest number of travellers say 

le disent, et le repetent. it, and repeat it. 

Ne vous reste-t-il que cela ? ffave you only that left ? 

Voila tout ce qu'il ine reste. That is all that I have left. 

Je ne sais ce qu'ils sont devenus. J do not know what has become of 

them. 

Je ne sais ce que vous deviendrez. I do not know what will become of y oil 

Exercise 167. 

S'appliqu-er, 1. ref. to Chemin, m. way, road; Habile, skilful; 

apply ; Desol-er, 1. to desolate; Maigre, thin, lean; 

Apprenti, m. apprentice ; Egar-er, 1. to mislay ; Naissance, f. birth; 
Aveugle, blind; Eraplettes, £ p. purcha- Parent, m. relation; 

Bagatelle, f. trifle; ses ; Eue, f. street; 

Boiteux, se, lame; ij&tat, m. trade; Savant, e, learned. 

1. La plupart de vos parents ne sont-ils pas venus vous voir ? 
2. Beaucoup sont venus. 3. Que sont devenus les autres ? 4. Je ne 
saurais vous dire ce qu'ils sont devenus. 5. Que deviendra ce jeune 
homme, s'il ne s'applique pas a I'etude ? 6. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il 
deviendra. 7. Je sais qu'il ne deviendra jamais savant. 8. Combien 
de francs avez-vous de reste ? 9. II ne me reste qu'un franc. 

10. Combien vous restera-t-il, quand vous aurez fait vos emplettes? 

11. II ne me restera qu'une bagatelle. 12. Get apprenti est-il devenu 
habile dans son etat ? 13. II y est devenu habile. 14. Ce monsieur 
est-il aveugle de naissance, ou I'est-il devenu ? 15. II Test devenu. 
16. Savez-vous ce que sont devenus ces jeunes gens ? 17. lis sent 
devenus medecins. 18. Ne savez-vous pas ce que sont devenus mes 
livres ? 19. lis sont egares. 20. Ne deviendrez-vous pas boiteux, si 
vous marchez tant ? 21. Je deviendrai boiteux et maigre. 22. La 
foule ce s'est-elle pas ^gar^e dans ce bois ? 23. La foule s'y est 



232 QUATEE-VIKGT-SIXIIJME LEgON. 

egareej^ et n'a pu retrouver son chemin. 24. Une nuee de barbares 
desolerent le pays. (Acad.) 25. Une foule de citoyens mines, 
remplissaient les rues de Stockholm. (Voltaire.) 

Exercise 168. 
1. Have not most of your friends become rich ? 2. Most of them 
have become poor. 3. Has not that young lady become learned? 
4. I think that she wiU never become learned. 5. Is not the Ameri- 
can army (armee) very smaU ? 6. The American army is small, but 
most of the American soldiers are very brave (braves). 7. Can you 
teU me what has becomer of that gentleman ? 8. I cannot tell you 
what has become of him. 9. Is your brother blind by birth (was 
your brother born blind) ? 10. No, sir ; he has become so. 11. Were 
you born lame ? 12. No, sir ; I became so three years ago {il 
y a). 13. Are not most of your hours devoted to play {jeu, m )? 
14. No, sir ; they are devoted to study. 15. How much of your 
money have you left? 16. I have only twenty-five francs left. 
17. Do you know how much I have left ? 18. You have only a trifle 
left. 19. How much shaU you have left to-morrow ? 20. I shall 
only have six francs left. 21. 1 shall only have two francs left, when 
I have made my purchases. 22. What has become of your gram- 
mar ? 23. I have mislaid it. 24. Do you know what has become 
of my hat ? 25. You have left (laissi) it upon the table. 26. Will 
not that gentleman become bhnd ? 27. He will not become blind, 
but lame. 28. Has your son become skilful in his trade ? 29. He 
has not become skilful in it. 30. What has become of him ? 31. He 
has lost his way in the wood. 32. Did the crowd lose its way ? 
33, Most of the soldiers lost then* way. 34. A cloud of locusts 
(sauierelles) desolated our country. 



LEgON LXXXVI. LESSON LXXXYI. 

REPETITION OF THE ARTICLE, POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE. 

1. The article, the demonstrative and the possessive adjectives, 
must be repeated, as before said, before every noun or adjective used 
substantively, which they determine [§ 80, 93, 21]. 

2. The prepositions d, de, and en, are repeated before every word 
which they govern [§ 141]. 

3. The verb quitter, to leave (to guif), is said of persons and places, 
said also of things, in the sense of to abandon, to give uj^. 



EEPBTITIOK OP ABTICLE, ETC. 233 

Vous avez quitte vos parents et vos Tou have left your relations and 

amis. friends. 

Nous avons quitte nos etudes. We have discontinued our studies. 

4. Laisser, to le(Xve, to let, is generally said of things. It is, how- 
ever, said of persons in the sense of to suffer to remain. 

Yous avez laisse votre livre sur la Tou kft your book upon the table. 
table. 

The examples below will illustrate the use of those two verbs. 

Resume of Examples. 

N'avez-vous pas quitte votre mai- Have you not left your house ? 

son? 

J'ai quitte men pays et mes parents. / have left my country and relations^ 

J'ai laisse ma bibliotheque en Eu- J left my library in Europe. 

rope, 

Ne voulez-vous pas laisser votre fils Will you not leave your son here f 

ici? 

je n'aime pas a le quitter. / do not like to quit him. 

J'ai laisse votre lettre a son domes- I left your letter with his servant. 

tique. 

Mon pere m'a laisse cinquante mille My father left me fifty iJumsand 

francs. francs. 

Les avez- vous kisses tranquilles ? Have you lei them alone ? 

Je leur ai laisse le champ libre. / have left them a free choice {free 

room). 

Ce malade a quitte le lit. That sick man has left his bed. 

Votre frere a quitte le barreau. Your brother has left the bar. 

Je vous laisserai ce chapeau i ce I will let you have that hat ai that 

prix. price. 

Exercise 169 

A bon compte, cheap ; Mauvais, e, bad ; Pension, f. boarding' 

Carte, f. card ; Moins, less ; school ; 

£pee, f. sword^ army 'Noj&n, m. fruit-stone; ToTtiev, m. porter ; 

(figuratively). Pourquoi, why ; Prix, m. price ; 

Habitude, f. habit ; Pavie, m. clingstone Robe, f. gown ; 

Juge, m. judge ; peach ; Service, m. service, army, 

1. Yos oncles, vos cousins, et vos neveux, ont-ils quitte le com- 
merce ? 2. lis ont quitte le commerce, et sont devenus medecins. 
3. Le capitaine G. n'a-t-U pas quitte le service ? 4. 11 a quitte la France, 
mais il n'a pas quitte le service. 5. Ou avez- vous laisse votre fils ? 
6. Je I'ai laisse dans une pension. 7. Est-il trop jeune pour quitter 
ges etudes ? 8. II est trop jeune, il n'a que douze ans. 9. A qui 
avez-vous laisse votre carte de visite? 10. Je I'ai laissee chez le 
portier. 11. Pourquoi ne le laissez-vous pas parler ? 12. Parce qu'il 
est temp3 que nous vous quittions. 13. Me permettez-vous de lui 



234 QUATEE-VINGT-SEPTIEME LEgOK. 

commutiiquer cela ? 14. Je vous laisse le champ libre a cet egard. 

15. Ce jeune homme n'a-t-il pas quitte ses mauvaises habitudes ? 

16. II les a quittees. 17. M. L. n'a-t-il pas quitte la robe pour I'epee ? 

18. Oui, monsieur ; 11 n'est plus juge, il est capitaine. 19. Ces peches 
quittent-elles facilement le noyau ? 20. Non, monsieur ; ce sont des 
pavies. 21. Je vous laisse cet habit pour cinquante francs. 22. A 
quel prix me le laisserez-vous ? 23. Je vous le laisserai pour dix 
francs. 24. Je vous le laisse a bon compte, je ne saurais vous 1© 
laisser a moins. 

Exercise 170. 
1. The son, daughter, and cousin, have left Paris. 2. My father, 
mother, and sister, have left me here. 3. Do you hke to leave your 
country ? 4. I do not like to leave my friends and country. 5. My 
parents do not like to leave me here, I am too young. 6. Why 
does not your brother let his son speak [L. 97, 4,] ? 7. Because he 
has nothing to say. 8. Have you let him alone ? 9. I have let him 
alone. 10. Why do you not let me alone ? 11. I wiU let them alone. 
12. Has your friend left his bed ? 13. He has not yet left his bed, 
he is yet very sick. 14. Has Captain Gr. left the army ? 15. He has 
not left the army. 16. Has not that gentleman left the army for the 
bar ? 17. He has not left the army. 18. My friend has left the bar. 

19. At what price will you let me have this silk? 20. I will let you 
have it at two francs a yard. 21. Can you not let me have it for less ? 
22. I let you have it cheap. 23. Will you let me have that book for 
twenty francs ? 24. I will let you have it for twenty-two. 25. I 
could not let you have it for less. 26, With whom (a qui) have you 
left my book ? 27. I left it with your sister. 28. Why did you not 
leave it with my servant ? 29. Because he had left your house. 
30. Do you like to leave your friends ? 31. I do not like to leave 
them. 32. Where have you left your book ? 33. I left it at my 
father's. 34. Has that merchant given up commerce ? (le commerce). 
35. He has not given it up. 36. Those peaches do not part easily 
from the stone, they are chngstone peaches. 



LEgOK LXXXYII. LESSON LXXXVII. 

EEPETITIOlSr OF NOMINATIVE PEONOUNS, ETC. 

1. The nominative pronouns je, tu, H, eUe, nous, vous, its, eUes^ 
must be repeated, when the first verb of the sentence is negative, 
and the second aflarmative, when the verbs are in different tenses, 



EEPBTITIOH OP NOMIITATIVE PEONOTJNS. 235 

and when the different propositions are connected by conjunctions 

other than et^ ou, ni, mais [§ 99. 2.J 

II ne lit pas ; il ecrit. He does not read ; he vjrites. 

EUe ne viendra pas ; elle est partie. She will not come; she is gone. 

2. The pronouns of the third person are often omitted before the 
second verb in cases not coming within the above rule. The other 
nominative pronouns are also, sometimes, omitted. We should not, 
however, advise the student to omit the latter pronouns. It is al- 
ways correct to repeat the nominative pronouns, 

3. The student will bear in mind, that the objective pronouns must 
always be repeated. 

4. Connaitre a, answers to the English expression, to "know hy. 

Je le connais a sa demarche. / Tcnow him hy his walk {carriage). 

5. Connaitre de nom, de visage, de vue, mean to know by name, hy 
sight. 

6. Se connaitre a quelque chose, or en quelque chose, corresponds 
in signification to the Enghsh expression, to be a judge of something^ 

Vous V0U3 connaissez en pierreries. Tou are a judge of precious stones. 

Resume of Examples. 

Je le connais, je I'aime, et je lui I know him, love hivn, and do justice 

rends justice. Gresset. to him. 

II s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, il He listens to himself, is pleased with 
s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. himself, adorns himself, loves him- 

self. 
A quoi connaissez-vous ce mon- By what do you know that gentle- 

sieur ? man ? 

Je le connais a son habit noir. J know him hy his black coat. 

Je le connais, de vue. I know him by sight. 

J'ai reconnu ma mere a la voix. I recognized my mother by her voice. 

A quoi vous connaissez-vous ? Of what are you a judge ? 

Je me connais en marchandises. Jam a judge of goods. 

Je ne m'y connais pas. Jam not a judge of it (of them). 

II ne s'y connaifc point du tout. He is not at all a judge of it (of 

them). 
11 s'y connait mieux que moL He is a better judge of it (of them), 

than J. 
Je m'y connais aussi bien que lui. J am as good a judge of it (of them\ 

as he. 

Exercise l*?!. 

Artisan, m. mechanic ; ]6tofFe, f. fabric, cloth of Gracieux, se, graceful; 
Blond, e, light ; different kinds ; Grain, m. grain ; 

Boucle, e, curled; Fabrieant, m. manufac- Orfevre, m. goldsmith; 

Chevelure, f. head of turer; CEuvre, f. work; 

hair ; Forgeron, m. blacksmith; Poesie, f. poetry ; 

"^heveux, m. p. hair; Gestes, m. p. gestures; Tout, quite. 



236 QUATKE-VINGT-SEPTIBME LEgON. 

1. Ke reconnaissez-vous point votre amie ? 2. J"e la reconnais ^ 
Ba chevelure blonde. 3. A quoi reconnaissez-vous cette demoiselle ? 
4. Je la reconnais a sa demarche gracieuse. 5. N'auriez-vous point 
connu votre ami a la voix ? 6. Je Vy aurais reconnu. 7. A I'oeuvre 
on connait I'artisan (La Eontaine). 8. Ne le reconnaitrez-vous point 
a ces marques ? 9. Je Vj reconnaitrai, 10. Get orfevre ne se con- 
nait-il point a cela? 11, II ne s'y connait point du tout. 12. Vous 
J connaissez-vous aussi bien que le forgeron ? 13. Je m'y connais 
tout aussi bien que lul 14. Ne vous connaissez-vous point en 
poesie ? 15. Je ne m'y connais guere. 16. Le fabricant se connait- 
il aussi bien en etoffes qu'en grain? 17. II se connait beaucoup 
mieux a celles-la qu'a celui-ci. 18. Ne connaissez-vous pas ce mon- 
sieur a ses gestes vehements ? 19. Je le connais a ses cheveux 
boucles. 20. Ne vous etes-vous pas fait connaitre (told your name) ? 
21. Je me suis fait connaitre. 22, Ne nous ferons-nous pas con- 
naitre ? 23. Vous vous ferez connaitre. 24. II se feront connaitre 
par leurs vertus (they will make themselves known). 

Exercise 172. 

1. Do you not know that man ? 2. Yes, sir ; I know him by his 
large (grand) hat. 3. By what do you recognize me ? 4. I recog- 
nize you by your walk. 5. Do you recognize my friend by his ges- 
tures ? 6. No, sir; I recognize him by his black coat. 7. Do you 
know him weU ? 8. I know him by sight, but I have never spoken 
to him. 9. Are you a judge of iron ? 10. No, sir ; the blacksmith 
is a judge of iron. 11. By what will you know your book? 12. I 
shall know it by those marks. 13. Have you not known your friend 
by her voice? 14. No, madam; I knew her by her Ught hair. 
15. Have you told your name? 16. I have not told my name. 
17. Did you know your sister's friend by her curled hair ? 18. I 
knew her by it. 19. Is the merchant a good judge of cloth ? 20. He 
is a better judge than I. 21. Is he a better judge of it than the 
manufacturer ? 22. He is quite as good a judge as he. 23. Is not 
the goldsmith as good a judge of precious stones as you ? 24. He is 
a better judge of them than I. 25. Of what are you a judge ? 26. I 
am a judge of nothing. 27. Are not your sisters good judges of 
poetry ? 28. They are not at all judges of it. 29. Do you not 
know that young lady by her dress (rohe) ? 30. I know her by her 
graceful carriage. 31. Have they made themselves known? 

32. They have made themselves known by their merit (mtrite). 

33. Is not the workman known by his work ? 34. The workman 
is known by his work, 35. He is a judge of it. 



QUBLQUE, QUEL QUE, TOUT, ETC. 237 

LEgON LXXXVni. LESSON LXXXVIII. 

QUELQUE, QUEL QUE, TOUT, ETC. 

1. Quelque, whatsoever, however^ some, any, followed by a noun 
takes the form of the plural. It is invariable, when it is followed 
by an adjective or an adverb [§ 97, (1.) 2. 3]. 

Quelques livres que vous ayez. WJiatever books you may ha 

Quelque bons qu'ils sclent. However good they may be. 

2. Quel que, followed by a verb, is ^v^itten as two words, the first 
(quel) agreeing in gender and number with the nominative of that 
verb [§ 97, (1.) 1.]. 

Quelles que soient vos vertus. Whatever your virtues may he. 

3. The above examples show that quelque — que, and quel — que, 
govern the subjunctive. 

4. Tout meaning entirely, quite, nothing, hut, though an adverb, 
varies through euphony, before a feminine word, commencing with 
a consonant or an h aspirate. 

L'esp^rance, iouie trompeuse qu'elle JBbpe, deceitful as it is, serves at least 

est, sert au moins a nous mener a to conduct us to the termination of 

la fin de la vie par un chemin life by an agreeable road, 
agreable. (La Bruyere.) 

5. The word gre signifying consent, will, meaning, &c., forms a 
number of idioms. 

Je lui sais [savoir, 3. ir,] bon gre d© lam thankful to him (I e. owe him 

cette action. ^ good-will) for that action. 

II nous sait mauvais gre de cela. He is displeased with us for that. 

Resume of Examples. 

Ne le ferez-vous pas de bon gre ? . Will you not do it loillingly ? 

II s'est marie centre le gre de ses Re married against the will of his 

parents. parents, 

Sa chevelure vole au gre du vent. His hair flies at the will of the wind. 

Je sais mauvais gre a votre frere de / am displeased at your brother for 

vouloir se meler de mes affaires. wishing to interfere with my affairs. 

Je lui en sais bon gre. Jam thankful to him for it. 

J'espere que vous ne me saurez pas / hope that you will not be displeased 

mauvais gre, si je ne vous ecris with me, if I do not write to you. 

pas. 

C'est, a men gre, le meilleur enfant He is, to my thinking, the best child 

du monde. in the world. 



238 QXJATEE-VIKGT-HUITIEMB LEgON. 

EXEECISE 173. 

Bon gre, mal gre, willing Men-er,l.to take, to lead; Partir, 2. ir. to leave; 

or not willing ; Non-er,l.to tie, to fasten; Quitt-er, I. to leave: 

Chambre, f. room; Obliger, 1. to oblige; Secret, m. secret ; 

Gard-er, 1, to keep; Offre, f. offer ; Silence, m. silence; 

Lit, m. bed; E,ecommand-er, 1. to re- Suite, f. consequence; 

Malgre, in spite of; commend ; Yoler, 1. to fly. 

1. Savez-vous mauvais gre a, votre oncle de ce qu'il a dit? 2. Je 
ne lui en sais aucun mauvais gre (Voltaire). 3. Ne me sauriez- 
vous pas bon gre, si je vous menais avec moi ? 4. Je vous en saurais 
le meilleur gre du monde. 5. Ne leur savez-vous pas bon gre d' avoir 
garde ce secret ? 6. Je leur sais bon gre de I'avoir garde. 7. Ne 
leur avez-vous pas re^pmmande de garder le silence ? 8. Je leur ai 
recommande de le garder. 9. Ce malade garde-t-il encore le lit ? 
10. II ne garde plus le lit, mais il est encore oblige de garder la 
chambre. 11. Votre chevelure est-elle bien nouee ? 12. Non, mon- 
sieur; elle vole au gre du vent. 13. G-arderez-vous votre domestique? 
14. Je le garderai, il fait tout a mon gre. 15. Quelques offres qu'on 
lui fasse, il ne veut pas me quitter ? 16. Quelque bonnes que soient 
ces dames, elles ne sont pas a mon gre. 17. Quelles que soient les 
suites de. cette affaire, je vous sais bon gre de vos intentions? 
18. Toute belle qu'elle est, elle n'est pas a mon gre. 19. L'avez-vous 
fait malgre vous ? 20. ISTon, monsieur ; je I'ai fait de bon gre. 
21. Bon gre, mal gre, il partira. 22. Me garderez-vous le secret? 
23. Je vous le garderai. 24. II change d' opinion au gre des evene- 
ments. 

Exercise 174. 

1. Will he marry against his father's consent ? 2. He will not 
marry against his parents' consent. 3. Why are you displeased with 
me ? 4. I am not displeased with you. 5. Is your little girl's hair 
tied ? 6. It is not tied ; it waves (floite) with the wind. 7. What 
do you think of my book ? 8. It is, in my opinion, the best book 
that I have read [L. 74, 3, 4]. 9. Will you not be displeased with 
me, if I do not come to-day ? 10. I shall not be displeased with 
you. 11. Will you not read that letter ? 12. However well written 
it may be, I will not read it. 13. Are those ladies handsome ? 
14. However* handsome and good they may be, they do not strike 
my fancy. 15. Are you displeased with my brother? 16. Ko, 
sir ; I am thankful to him for his intentions, whatever may be the 
consequences of his conduct 17. Will you keep this secret (for 
me) ? 18. I will keep it willingly. 19. Does your sister keep her 



SERVIR, s'lL VOUS PLAtT, ETC. 239 

bed •willingly? 20. She does not keep her room willingly. 21. Will- 
ingly or not, she must keep her room, when she is sick. 22. Will 
you keep silent on this point? 23. I will willingly. 24. I am 
thankful to you for your good intentions. 25. Are you thankful 
to him for this {de cela) ? 26. I am thankful to him for it. 27. Will 
the judge keep his servant? 28. He will keep him. 29. Does he 
do his work to his fancy ? 30. He does it to his fancy. 31. Is 
your brother obhged to keep in the house ? 32. He is obliged to 
keep his bed. 33. Has he not left his room? 34. He has not 
yet left his room ; he is too sick to leave it. 35. I should be under 
the greatest obligations in the world to you, if you would do this. 



LEgON LXXXIX. LESSON LXXXIX. 

SEE VIE, S'lL YOTJS PLAIT, ETC. 

1. Servir [2. ir.] is used in French in the sense of the Enghsh 
expression to help to. 

Que VOUS servirai-je ? To what shall I help you ? 

Nous servirai-je de la soupe ? Shall I help you to some soup ? 

Vous n'avez pas servi monsieur. Tou have not helped that gentleman. 

2. J"e vous remercie, / thank you, said in answer to an offer, is in 
French a refusal. This phrase is never employed like the Enghsh 
expression, / thank you for (this or that), to signify a request. The 
French make use of other forms : — Oserai-je vous prier de . . . Oserai- 
je vous demander . , . Je vous prie de . . . Je vous prierai de . . . Je 
vous demanderai , . . 

Je vous demanderai une aile de cette / wiU thank you for a wing of thai 
volaille, un morceau de ce roti ? fowl, a slice of that roast meat. 

3. S'il vous plait, corresponds to the English, if you please. The 
verb is used unipersonally in that sentence, and in the following. 

Comme il vous plaira. As you please. 

II ne me plait pas d'y aller. It does not suit or please me to go then. 

Que vous plait-il ? What would you please to have ? 

4. Au plaisir de vous revoir, au re voir, adieu, jusqu'au re voir, mean, 
till I have the pleasure of seeing you again, till I see you again, etc. 

Resume of Examples. 

Qu'aurai-je le plaisu* de vous servir ? To what shall I have the pleasure of 

helping you ? 
Je vous demanderai un morceau de IwiU thank you, ov I will trouble you 
00 jambon. for a slice of thai ham. 



240 QUATRE-VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgOK. 



Yous offrirai-je im morceau de co 

roti? 
Je vous remercie, monsieur; je 

prendrai de preference une aile 

de cette volaille. 
N'a-t-on pas encore servi ? 
Je vous souhaite le bon soir. 
J'ai souhaite le bonjour a madame. 

Ayez la complaisance de vous as- 

seoir. 
Messieurs, ayez la complaisance 

d'entrer. 



Shall I offer you a slice of this roasi 

meat ^ 
I thank you, sir ; I would prefer a 

wing of that fowl. 

Is not the dinner yet on the table f 

I wish you good evening. 

I have wished the lady a good moru' 

ing. 
Have the goodness to sit down. 

Gentlemen^ have the kindness to walk 
in. 



Adieu, m. adieu; 
Aile, f. wing; 
Attend-re, 4. to wait for ; 
Bouilli, m. boiled meat, 

beef; 
Conge, m. leave; 
Cotelette, f. cutlet; 



, Exercise 175. 

Grace, f. thanks ; Pri-er, 1. to heg, to desire ; 

Jambon, m. ham; Remerciment, m. thanks; 

Legume, m. vegetable; Roti, m. roast meat; 

Mett-re, (se) ir, ref. 4. to Soupe, f. soup ; 

sit down ; Sufflsamment, adv. suf- 

Ortolan, m. ortolan; fficientlxj ; 

Perdrix, f. partridge ; TranchCj £ slice. 



1. Monsieur, qu'aurai-je le plaisir de vous servir ? 2. Je vous de- 
manderai un morceau de ce jambon. 3. Je vous prie de servir ces 
messieurs. 4. Oserai-je vous demander un morceau de ce bouilli? 

5. Yous ofirirai-je un morceau de ce roti ? 6. Je vous rends grace, 
monsieur; j'en ai sufflsamment. 7. Mademoiselle, aurai-je I'lion- 
neur de vous servir une aile de cette perdrix ? 8. Je vous remercie, 
monsieur ; je prendrai de preference un de ces ortolans. 9. Monsieur^ 
vous enverrai-je de la soupe ? 10. Madame, je vous prie de servir 
mademoiselle. 11. Je vous en demanderai apres. 12. Jean, pre- 
sentez cette cotelette a monsieur. 13. Ces legumes sont delicieux. 
14. Monsieur, je suis bien aise que vous les trouviez bons. 15. Mon- 
eieur, ne voulez-vous pas vous asseoir? 16. Mille remerciments, 
monsieur; mon pere m'attend a la maison. 17. Ne leur avez-vous pas 
souhaite le bonjour ? 18. Je leur ai souhaite le bon soir. 19. Leur 
avez-vous dit adieu ? 20. J'ai dit adieu a mon frere. 21. J'ai pris 
conge d'eux. 22. Les avez-vous pries d'entrer ? 23. Je les en ai 
pries. 24. Messieurs, on a servi. 25. Ayez la complaisance de 
vous mettre id 

Exercise 176. 
1. Madam, to what shall I help you ? 2. I will trouble you for a 
slice of that ham. 3. Shall I send you a wing of this fowl ? 4. No, 
sir; I thank you. 5. I thank you, sir {sil vous plait, monsieur). 

6. Sir, shall I have the pleasure of helping you to a slice of this ham ? 



TENIK, FAIRE TENIR, ETC. 241 

7. I thank you, sir ; I would prefer a slice of the partridge. 8. Shall 
I offer you a little of this boiled meat ? 9. I thank you, sir ; I have 
some. 10. Madam, shall I send you a httle of this soup? 11. Much 
obliged to you, su" [see No. 16, in the above exercise]. 12. Sir, will 
you have the goodness to help this young lady ? 13. With much 
pleasure, sir. 14. John, take this soup to the gentleman. 15. These 
ortolans are deUcious. 16. 1 am very glad that you like them. 17. Is 
the dinner on the table ? 18. No, sir ; it is not yet on the table. 
19. It is too early. 20. Does it please you to go there ? 21. It does 
not please me to go to his house ; but I will go if you wish it. 
22. Shall I go with you ? 23. As you please. 24. Will not your friend 
sit down ? 25. He is much obliged to you ; he has not time to-day. 
26. Have you wished your friend a good morning ? 27. I wished 
him a good evening. 28. Have you not bid him farewell ? 29. I 
have bid him farewell 30. Have the goodness to sit down here. 
31. I have taken leave of them. 32. I have taken leave of all my 
friends. 33. Madam, have the goodness to walk in. 34. We are 
much obliged to you, sir. 35. Our father is waiting for us at home. 



LEgON XC. LESSON XC. 

TENIE, EAIEE TENIR, ETC. 

1. The verb tenir [2. ir.], to hold, often corresponds in signification, 
to theEnghsh verb to keep; tenir un hotel, to keep a hotel; tenir table 
ouverte, to keep open table ; tenir sa chambre propre, to keep one's 
room clean ; tenir la porte, les fenetres ouvertes, to keep the door, the 
windows open ; tenir les yeux ouverts, fermes, to keep one's eyes opened, 
shut ; tenir la tete droite, to keep one's head upright ; tenir sa parole, 
to keep one's word; tenir compagnie a quelqu'un, to stay or remain 
with some or any one. 

2. Tenir un langage singulier, tenir des propos .... des discours .... 
would be rendered in English by to make use of singular languoge, 
to use peculiar expressions, to advance things, &c. 

Ce jeune homme tient des propos Uiat young man says foolish things, 
insenses. 

3. Tenir is also used in the sense of being attached to, to he tenof 
cious of 

Je tiens ^ mon argent, a la vie. lvalue (i. e. Tiold to) my money, my 

life. 
Je tiens a mon opinion. / am tenacious of my opiniork 

11 



tit QFATRE-VINGT-DIXIEME LEgOS". 

4. Tenir is also used of a color which is fast or not. 

Cette couleur tiendra ou ne tiendra This color is fast (i. e. holds) or not, 
pas. 

5. Faire tenir is used in the sense of to forward, to send. 

Faites-lui tenir cet argent, cette Forward him this money, this letter. 
lettre. 

6. Se tenir or s'en tenir conjugated reflectively, may often be ren* 
dered by to remain, to abide by, to be satisfied with. 

H se tient debout, assis. Sis remains standing, seated. 

Je m'en tiens a votre opinion. i am satisfied with your opinion. 

Resume of Examples, 

M. L. tient un hotel superbe. Mr. L keeps a superb hotel. 

Votre petite tiile ne tient pas sa Your little girl does not keep her room 

chambre bien propre. very clean. 

Pourquoi tenez-vous les portes ou- Why do you keep the doors open t 

vertes ? 

H fait si chaud que nous tenons It is so warm thai we keep all the win- 

toutes les fenetres. ouvertes. dows open. 

Tenez la tete droite, et les yeux Keep your head upright, and your 

ouvert3. eyes open. 

Pourquoi ne tenez-vous pas votre Why do you not keep your word f . 

parole ? 

Tenez compagnie a votre soeur ; Stay with your sister ; she is sick. 

elle est malade. 

Votre ami tient des propos bien Your friend makes use of very singvr 

singuliers. lar expressions. 

Vou3 tenez des discours bien legera You use very light language. 

La couleur de votre drap tiendra- Js the color of your cloth fast ? 

t-elle? 

Lui avez-vous fait tenir ce livre ? Eave you sent him that hook t 

A quoi vous en tiendrez-vous ? What will he your decision t 

Je m'en tiendrai a ce quej'ai dit. I shall abide by what I have said." 

Pourquoi se tient-d toujours de- W7iy does he always remain stand- 

bout ? ing ? 

L'incredule s'en tiendra-t-il an pre- Will the unbeliever he satisfied with 

aent, qui doit finir demain ? the present, which is to end to-mor- 

Massillon. row f 

Exercise 177. 

Cocber, m. coachman; Gens, i>\. people; Prefer-er, 1. to prefer ; 

Debout, standing ; Indispose, e, indisposed; Recommand-er, 1. to re- 

Defend-re, 4. to forbid ; Insolent, e, insolent; commend; 

De pres, closely; Lieu, m. place; Regard-er, 1. to look; 

En dehors, out, outside ; Lyon, Lyons ; Rue, street ; 

S'enrhumer, 1. ref. to get Malade, sick; Sav-oir, 3, ir. to know; 

a cold; ParMtemen^ i^e^/ec^ ; Vie, £ Zi/& 



TENIR, FA IRE TENIR, ETC. 243 

1. Quel hotel voire frere tient-il ? 2. H tient I'hotel de I'Europe, 
rue de Ljon. 3. Votre petit gar9on se tient-il bien propre ? 4. H 
Be tient bien propre. 5. A quoi vous en tiendrez-vous ? 6. Je m'en 
tiendrai a ce que je vous ai dit. 7. Ne savez-vous pas a quoi vous 
en tenir ? 8. Je sais parfaitement a quoi m'en tenir. 9. Pourquoi 
vous tenez-vous debout ? 10. Parce que nous n'avons pas le temps 
de nous asseoir. 11. N'avez-vous point defendu a ces jeunes gens de 
tenir de tels propos ? 12. Je le leur ai defendu. 13. Yotre cocher 
n'a-t-il pas tenu un langage bien insolent ? 14. N'avez-vous pas 
peur de vous enrhumer, en tenant les portes ouvertes ? 15. Nous 
prefererions les tenir fermees. 16. Yotre maitre vous recommande- 
t-il de tenir la tete droite ? 17. II me recommande de tenir les pieds 
en dehors. 18. Pourquoi votre ami ne vous tient-il pas compagnie ? 
19. Sa soeur est indisposee ; il est oblige de rester avec elle. 20. Yotre 
oncle ne vous a-t-il pas tenu heu de pere ? 21. II" m'a tenu lieu de 
pere et de mere. 22. Regarderez-vous de plus pres a cette affaire ? 
23. Non, monsieur; je m'en tiendrai a ce que j'en sais. 24. Ce 
medecin ne tient-il pas a son opinion ? 25. II y tient plus qu'il ne 
tient a la vie de ses malades. 



Exercise 178. 

1. Does that gentleman keep open table ? 2. He keeps a hotel in 
Paris. 3. Why do you keep the windows open ? 4. We keep them 
open, because we are too warm. 5. Has not your friend kept his 
word ? 6. He has kept his word ; he always keeps his word. 7. Have 
you not told your scholar to keep his head upright ? 8. I have told 
him to keep his head upright, and his eyes open. 9. Why do you 
not stay with your sister ? 10. Because I have promised to go to 
my cousin's this morning. 11. Have you forbidden your little boy 
to make use of these expressions? 12. I have forbidden him. 
13. Does he make use of insolent language ? 14. He does not. 
15. What will be your decision ? 16. I will abide by what I told 
your father. 17. Have you forwarded that money to your friend? 
18. I have not yet forwarded it to him. 19. Will you forward it to 
him to-morrow ? 20. I will forward it to him, if I have an oppor- 
tunity. 21. Why do you not keep standing ? 22. Because I am 
weary. 23. Do you think that the color of your coat is fast ? 24. I 
think that it is fast ; it {eUe) appears very good. 25. Will you not 
look closely into your brother's affairs ? 26. I shall not look closely 
into them. 27. I will be satisfied with your opinion. 28. Are you 
not too tenacious of your opinion ? 29. I am not too tenacious of 



244 QTJATEE-VINGT-ONZIifeME LEgOK. 

it. 30. Does not your physician adhere too tenaciously to hia 
opinion? 31. He adheres to it. 32. Does that lady hold yonr 
mother's place ? 33. She is a mother to me. 34. Our cousin is a 
father to us. 35. That physician does not value the life of Ms pa- 
tient. 



I LEgON XCI. LESSON XCI. 

IDIOMATIC USE OF ^TEE. 

1. The verb tire forms a great many idioms besides those which 
we have already mentioned : etre en retard, to he late, to tarry ; etre 
en etat, a memo de, to he able to ; etre en peine de, to he uneasy 
ahout ; etre en vie, to he alive, to live ; etre en chemin pour, to he on 
the way to ; etre au fait, au courant de, to he familiar with / etre a la 
veille de, to he on the eve of ; etre de trop, to he unnecessary, to he in 
the way ; etre bien avec, to he on good terms with ; etre brouille avec, 
to he on had terms with ; etre aux prises avec, to he in open rupture, 
quarrel or hatile with / etre d'avis, to he of opinion, etc. 

2. Etre, as already said [L. 47, 5.], is used in the sense of appar- 
tenir, to helong. It is also employed in the sense of to hehoove, to he-- 
come. In the latter sense, it takes generally the preposition de before 
another verb. 

Est-ce a vous de lui faire des re- Does it become you to cast (make) re- 

proches ? proaches upon him ? 

C'est a vous d parler. It is your turn to speak. 

3. T etre is often used for to he at home, to he in. 

Votre pere y est-il ? Is your father at home f 

Resume op Examples. 

Ne sommes-nous pas detrop ici ? Are we not in the way here ? 

Nous ne sommes pas bien avec nos We are not*' on good terms with our 

parents. relations. 

Nous sommes au courant de tout We are familiar with all thai. 

cela. 

Je suis a memo de satisfaire a sa J am able to satisfy his demand. 

demande. 

Nous sommes brouilles. We are not on good terrns ; we are at 

variance. 

Ma soeur est a la veille de se My sister is on the eve of her mar- 

marier. riage. 

Nous sommes d'avis que vous alliez It is our opinion that you should go 

lui faire des excuses. and apologize to him. 

Ce n'est pas a lui de nous reprocher It does not become him to reproach its 

aotre bontd with ovir kindness. 



IDIOMATIC USB OP fiTRE. 245 

A qui est-ce k lire ? TThose turn is it to readf 

C'est a ma soeur a lire ce matin. It is my sister's turn to read this 

morning. 

Cette maison est a lui et a moi. That house is his and mine. 

Elle est a moi, elle est a lui. /;; is mine, it is his. 

Cos souliers ne sonfc pas a nous. These shoes are not ours. 

lis appartiennent a noLre frere. They belong to our brother. I 

lis lui appartiennent. They belong to him. I 

Monsieur' n'y est pas. The gentleman is not at home, \ 

Madame 7 est. The lady is in. \ 

EXEECISE 179. 

Achet-er, 1. to buy ; S'embarqu-er, 1. ref. to Part-ir, 2. ir. to start, set 

Apparten-ir, 2. ir. to be' embark; ' out; 

long ; Gravure, f. engraving ; Proprietaire, m. land- 

Aniv-er, 1. to arrive ; Hote, m. host ; lord; owner of the 

Correspondant, corres- Libraire, m. bookseller; house. 

pondent ; Mois, m. month; Punir, 2. to punish; 

Craind-re, 4. ir. to fear ; Montre, f. watch; Veille, £ eve, day be- 

Dev-oir, 5. to owe, to be MoTtjdead ; from mouTir, fore; 

obliged; to die; Yie, f. life. 

1. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes brouilles ? 2. 11 y a plus d'un 
mois que je suis brouille avec lui. 3. Yotre ami est-il encore en vie ? 
4. ISTon, monsieur ; il y a dix ans qu'il est mort. 5. Votre corres- 
pondant est-il en chemin pour Paris? 6. Je crois qu'il doit etre 
arrive. 7. Ce jeune homme n'est-il pas en retard ? 8. Qui, mon- 
sieur; il ne vient jamais a temps. 9. Ces gravures sont-elles a 
vous, ou a votre libraire ? 10. EUes sont a moi ; je viens de les 
acheter. 11. Ne craignez-vous pas d'etre de trop ici? 12. Nous 
sommes trop bien avec notre bote pour craindre cela. 13. A qui 
est-ce a aller chercher les livres ? 14. C'est a moi a les aller cherclier. 
15. Est-ce a vous de le punir, quand il le merite ? 16. C'est a moi 
de le punir, car je lui tiens lieu de pere. 17. Ces maisons n'appar- 
tiennent-elles pas a notre proprietaire? 18. EUes ne lui appar- 
tiennent pas. 19. EUes sont a notre correspondant. 20. A qui 
sont ces lettres ? 21. EUes ne sont point si moi, eUes sont a ma 
cousine. 22. Cette montre est a lui. 23. N'etes-vous point a la 
veiUe de partir pour Londres ? 24. Nous sommes a la veiUe de nous 
embarquer pour Cadiz. 25. II y a longtemps que nous sommes 
aux prises. 

Exercise 180. 

1. Are you able to pay him ? 2.1 am not able to pay him ; I have 
not received my money. 3. Are you on good terms with your 

^ Monsieur, madame, not followed by a name, are generally understood 
to mean the master and mistress of the house, the heads of the fiimily. 



"1246 QTJATRB-VIKGT-DOUZIBME LEgON. 

bookseller ? 4. I am not on good terms with him^ 5. I am on bad 
terms with him. 6. How long have you been on bad terms with 
him ? 7. It is more than a month. 8. Are you not able to satisfy 
my friend's dllnand ? 9. I am able to satisfy it {d'y satisfaire). 
10. Are you on your way to Naples ? 11. No, sir; I am on my 
way to Eome. 12. Is not your physician on the eve of starting for 
Montpellier ? 13. He is on the eve of starting for Paris. 14. Am 1 
in the way here ? 15. No, sir ; you are not in the way. 16. Whose 
turn is it to speak ? 17. It is my turn to speak and to read. 18. Is 
it my place (d moi) to make apologies to him ? 19. It is your 
brother's place to apologize to him. 20. Does it become you to pun- 
ish that child ? 21. It behooves me to punish him. 22. Do you hold 
the place of a father towards him ? 23. I hold the place of a father 
towards him. 24. Is that coat yours ? 25. No, sir ; it is not mine | 
it is my brother's. 26. Have you broken openly with him ? 27. We 
have been quarrelhng two months. 28. Is not that large house yours ? 
29. No, sir; it is not mine; it is my sister's. 30. Does it become 
your brother to reproach him with his kindness? 31. It does not 
become him to do it. 32. Whose turn is it to go and fetch the books ? 
33. It is my place to go and fetch them. 34. Is the gentleman in ? 
35. No, sir ; the gentleman is not in ] but the lady (of the house) 
is in. 



LEgON XCII. LESSON XCII. 

aya:n'cee, eetaedee, etc. 

1. Avancer, retarder, correspond to the Enghsh verbs to gain, to 
lose, to put forward, to put back, in speaking of a watch or clock, etc. 
The preposition de is placed before the word expressing the vari- 
ation. 

Ma montre retarde d'une demi- My watch is half an hour too slow. 

heure. 
La mienne avance d'un quart Mine is a quarter of an hour too fast 

d'heure. 
J'ai avauce cette horloge d'une I set that clock half an hour forward. 

demi-heure. 
Retardez vptre montre de cinq Fut your watch five minutes back. 

minutes, 

2. Mettre [4. ir.] a I'heure, means to set right, to put right, to set. 
Mettez cette montre a I'heure. Set that watch right. 

3. S'accorder, to agree, is said also of clocks, watches, etc. 



AVANCER, RETARDEE, ETC. 



2ii 



Resume of Examples. 



Totre montre va-t-elle bien ? 

Elie retarde d'une demi-heure par 

jour. 
Elle avance d'un quart d'heure par 

semaine. 
Be conibien avance-t-elle ? 
Je viens de mettre ma montre a 

I'heure. 
Si votre montre retarde, pourquoi ne 

I'avancez-vous pas ? 
Ma pendule avance, je viens de la 

retarder. 
Quelle heure est-il a votre montre ? 
Mon horloge sonne les heures et les 

demies, 
J'ai oublie de la monter {or remon- 

ter). 
Voire montre est derangee. 
II faudra la faire nettoyer. 
La sonnerie en est derangee. 
Votre pendule et ma montre ne 

s'aceordent pas. 
Les pendules a ressort vont mieux 

que les pendules a poids. 
L'horloge a sonne deux heures. 



Does your watch go wellf 
It loses half an hour a day. 

It gains a quarter of an hour a week. 

How much does it gain ? 
Jhaveju^t set my watch right. 

If your watch loses, why do you not 

set it forward f 
My clock gains, I have just set it 

hack. 
What o'clock is it by your watch ? 
My clock strikes the hour and the ha^ 

hour. 
I have forgotten to wind it up. 

Tour watch is out of order. 
It will be necessary to have it cleaned. 
The striking part is out of order. 
Your clock and my watch do not 

agree. 
Spring clocks go better than weight 

clocks. 
The clock has struck two. 



Exercise 181. 



Aiguille, f. 
S'arret-er, 



hand ; 
1. ref. 



pendu 



Balaneier, 

lum ; 
Boite, f. watch-case; 
Cadran, m. face, dial 
Cass-er, 1. to break; 
Double, double; 



Droit, e, straight ; 
to Fele, e, cracked; 
Juste, right, correct; 
Matin, m. morning ; 
Perfection, f. perfection ; 
Plat, e, flat, thin ; 
Eegl-er, 1. to regulate; 
Repetition, (montre a) f. Vite, quick, quickly, 
repeater ; 



Eessort, (grand) m. mairt^ 

spring ; 
Secondes, (montre a) 

watch with a second 

hand; 
Timbre, m. bell of a 

clock ; 



1. N'avez-vous pas une montre a repetition? 2. J'ai une montre 
d'or, a double boite. 3. Va-t-elle mieux que la mienne ? 4. Elle ne 
va pas bien, elle retarde d'une heure par jour, 5. Est-ce une montre 
a secondes ? 6. C'est une montre a secondes et a cadran d'or. 
7. Votre horloge ne sonne-t-elle pas ? 8. Elle ne sonne plus, le 
timbre en est casse. 9. Pourquoi ces pendules ne s'accordent-elles 
pas? 10. Parce que I'une avance et I'autre retarde. 11. N'avez-vous 
point casse le grand ressort de votre montre ? 12, Je I'ai casse en la 
remontant. 13. Votre pendule est elle juste? 14. Oui, monsieur; 
elle est juste, je viens de la faire regler. 15. La sonnerie de cette 
pendule est-elle derangee 16. La sonnerie en est derangee, et 1© 



248 QTTATRE- VINGT-TREIZlilME LEgON. 

timbre en est fele. 17. La petite aiguille de ma montre plate est 
cassee. 18. Le balancier de votre horloge n'est pas droit ? 19. De 
combien votre pendule avance-t-elle ? 20. Elle avance de cinq mi- 
nutes par jour. 21. La perfection d'une pendule n'est pas d'aller 
vite, mais d'etre reglee (Delille). 22. Yotre montre s'arrete-t-elle 
Eouvent? 23. EUe s'arrete tons les matins. 24. Yotre pendule 
s'est arretee. 

Exercise 182. 
1. Does your watch gain or lose ? 2. It does not lose ; it goes 
Tery well. 3. It loses twenty-five minutes a day. 4. Does your 
clock gain much? 5. It gains one hour a week. 6. How much 
does your son's gold watch lose ? 7. It loses much ; it loses one 
hour in {en) twenty-four Qieures). 8. I have put it forward one 
hour. 9. I will put it back half an hour. 10. Does not your clock 
strike the half hour? 11. No, sir; it only strikes the hour. 
12. Have you forgotten to wind up your repeater? 13. I have 
forgotten to wind it up, and it has stopped. 14. Is your silver watch 
out of order ? 15. It is out of order, and it will be necessary to 
have it cleaned. 16. What o'clock is it by your watch? 17. It is 
three o'clock by my watch, but it gains. 18. How much does it 
gain a week ? 19. It gains more than five minutes a day. 20. Is 
your watch right ? 21. No, sir ; it is not right ; it is out of order. 
22. Does your clock strike right? 23. It does not strike right; the 
striking part is out of order. 24. Have you broken the hands of 
your clock ? 25. I have broken the hour hand and the dial. 26. Has 
the clock struck three ? 27. It has struck twelve. 28. It has stopped. 
29. Does it stop every morning ? 30. It does not stop every morn- 
ing; it stops every evening. 31. Your watch does not agree with 
mine. 32. Have you broken the main- spring of your brother's 
watch? 33. He has broken it in winding it up. 34. My brother's 
watch is right ; he has had it cleaned and regulated. 



LEgON XCHL LESSON XCIIL 



SE DEMETTEE, S EMPAEER, ETC. 

1. Se demettre [4. ir.] le bras, le poignet, corresponds to the 
English expression to dislocate one^s arm^ wrist, to put one's arm, wrist 
out of joint. In this sense se demettre takes no preposition before 
its object. 

Je me suis demia I'epaule. / havQ dislocated my shoulder. 



BE DfjMETTRE, S^EMPARER, ETC. 249 

2. Se demettre, used in the sense of to resign, to give up, takes the 
preposition de before its object. 

II s'est demis de sa place. Be has resigned his place. 

3. S'emparcr, to seize, to lay hold of, takes de before its object. 
II s'est empare de ce chapeau. He seized upon this hat. 

4. S'empecher, to prevent one's self, to forbear, to help, takes de be- 
fore another verb. 

Je ne puis m'empecher de rire. / cannot help laughing. 
Je ne puis m'en empecher. / cannot help doing so. 

5. S'inquieter answers to the English expression, to he or become 
uneasy, to trouble one^s self; it takes de before its object, be this ob- 
ject noun, pronoun or verb. 

Je ne m'inquiete pas de cela. / am not uneasy about that. 

6. Se comporter answers to the expressions to behave, to deport 
one's self 

7. S'attendre means to await, to expect. It takes ri before its ob- 
ject. 

Je ne m'attendais pas k cela. I did not expect that. 

Je ne m'y attendais pas. I did not expect it. 

Resume op Examples. 

Yous etes-vous d^mis I'epaule ? Eave you dislocated your shoulder f '' 

Je me la suis demise [L. 4.5, 2. I dislocated it. 

§ 135]. 

Cette demoiselle s'est demis le poi- Thai young lady has dislocated her 

gnet. wrist 

Qui le lui a remis ? Who set it for her ? 

Le Dr. L. a remis I'epaule a ma Dr. L. set my sister's shoulder. 

soeur. 

Yous etes-vous demis de votre Have you resigned your situation f 

place ? 

Je m'en suis demis [§ 135, 1]. I have resigned it. 

Nous ne pouvions nous empecher We could not help smiling, during 

de sourire, pendant ce recit. that narration. 

Vous etes-vous empare de ce livre ? Have you seized that booh 9 

Je m'eu suis empare. I laid hold of it. 

De quoi vous inquietez-vous ? Why do you trouble yourself f 

Je ne m'inquiete de rieu. J trouble myself about nothing. 

Comment ce jeune homme se com- How does that young man behave ? 
" porte-t-il? 

II se comporte comme 11 faut. He behaves properly. 

Je ne m'attendais pas a une telle I did not expect such an answer. 

reponse. 

Jo ne m'y attendais nullement. / did not expect it, by any means* 

11* 



250 qttatee-yingt-teeizieme legon. 
Exercise 183. 

AVa.YemT,infuiure; Ganche, left ; 'Prxs^ti, m. peasant ; 

Bras, m. arm; Mieux, better; Poignet, m. wrtst; 

Cass-er, 1. to break; Monde (tout le), every Prusse, f. Prussia; 

Ttroit, e, right ; hody; Sejour, m. 5to?/ ; 

Durant, during ; Oblige, oUiged; Traitement, m, treat- 

£critoire, f. inkstand; Pareil, ie, similar, such ; ment ; 

Ennemi, m. eiiemy ; Part, f. part ; Tille, £ city. 

1. ITe Yous etiez-vous pas demis le bras ? 2. Je ne me I'etais pa3 
demis ; je me I'etais casse. 3, Si tous alliez en Amerique, vous &&- 
mettriez-vous de votre place ? 4. Je serais oblige de m'en demettre ? 
6. Y a-t-il longtemps que votre cousin s'est demis de la sienne ? 
6. H y a un mois qu'il s'en est demis. 7. L' ennemi s'est-il empare de 
la viUe ? 8. II s'en est empare. 9. Yotre fils se comportera-t-il 
mieux a ravenir ? 10. II s'est tres bieu comporte durant son sejour 
en Prusse. 11. Vous attendiez-vous a un pareil traitement de sa 
part ? 12. Je ne m'y attendais pas. 13. A quoi vous attendiez- 
vous ? 14. Je m'attendais a etre traite comme il faut. 15. Pourquoi 
vous etes-vous moque de lui ? 16. Parce que je n'ai pu m'en empe- 
cher. 17. Si vous laissiez votre ecritoire ici, le paysan s'en empare- 
rait-il ? 18. II s'en emparerait certainement. 19. Votre associe se 
comporte-t-il bien envers vous ? 20. E se comporte bien envers tout 
le monde. 21. Qui a remis le poignet a votre sceur? 22. Le Dr. 
G. le lui a remis. 23. M. votre pere ne s'est-il pas demis le bras 
droit ce matin? 24. H ne se Test pas demis; 11 se Test casse ce 
matin a cinq heures. 

EXEECISE 184. 

1. Has not Dr. L. resigned his place ? 2. He has not resigned it. 
3. He would resign it, if he went to Germany. 4. Are you obhged 
to resign your place ? 5. I am not obliged to resign it. 6. Has your 
cousin dislocated his arm ? 7. He has not dislocated his arm, but his 
shoulder, 8. Who set it for him ? 9. Doctor F. set it for him. 
10, Has not your mother dislocated her wrist? 11. She has not 
dislocated her wrist ; she has broken her arm. 12. Has the enemy 
seized the town ? 13. The enemy has seized the town. 14. WiU. 
not some one lay hold of your hat, if you leave it here ? 15. Some 
one will lay hold of it. 16. How has your son behaved this morn- 
ing ? 17. He behaved very well. 18. He always behaves properly. 
19. Do you not trouble yourself uselessly (inutileraent) ? 20. I do 
not trouble myself at all {du tout). 21, Did you expect such treat- 
ment from {de la part de) your son ? 22. I did not expect such 
treatment from him {dQ sa pari). 23. Does that young lady behave 



n'importe, n'est-ce pas, etc. 251 

well towards her mother? 24. She behaves well towards every 
body. 25. Will you behave better in future ? 26. We will behave 
well. 27. Have you broken your finger {doigt) ? 28. 1 have broken 
my thumb (pouce). 29. Could you help going to sleep {de dormir) ? 
30. We could not help smiling. 31. My sisters could not help laugh- 
ing. 32. Why are you imcasy ? 33. Because my son does not be- 
have weU. 34. Did your father expect to be well treated? 35. He 
expected to be treated properly. 36. We did not expect such an 



LEgON XCiy. LESSON XCIV. 

n'impoete, n'est-ce pas, etc. 

1. N'importe, an ellipsis of il n'importe, answers to the English 
expression no matter^ it does not matter , never mind. 

Donnez-moi un livre, n'importe le- Give me a booh, no matter which. 
queL 

2. Qu'importe ? answers to the English phrase what matter f 
What does it matter ? When that expression is followed by a plural 
subject the verb importer is put in the plural. 

Que nous importenfc leurs mur- What do we care for their mur- 
mures ? murs t 

3. N'est-ce pas ? corresponds to the English expressions, is it not? 
is he not, &c, ? do they not ? following an assertion. 

II fait froid; n'est-ce pas? It is cold; is it noil 

4. N'est-ce pas ? frequently precedes the assertion. 

U'est-ee pas que votre frere est Tour brother is come ; ishe not f 
arrive ? 

5. Regarder, to look at, is used in the sense of to concern. 
Ccla regarde votre frere. That concerns your brother. 

6. En vouloir a quelqu'un, S. quelque chose, means to have a 
design against or upon, a grudge against any one, to he angry with 
one on account of something. 

D en veut a notre vie. Ee has a design against our life. 

Resume of Examples. 

Pourvu que vous veniez, n'importe Provided you come, no matter which' 

par quel cbemin. way. 

Pourvu qu'il le fasse, n'importe Provided he does it, no matter how. 

comment. 



252 QITATEE-VINGT-QXJATOEZIEME LEgON. 

Apportez-moi quelqne chose, n'im- Bring me something^ no matter what 
porte quoi, 

J'en mourrai ; n'importe 1 shall die through it ; no matter. 

II n'est pas satisfait ; qu'importe ? He is not satisfied with it ; what mat- 
ters it ? 

H refuse nos presents ; qu'importe ? He refuses our presents ; what does it 

matter ? 

Que nous importe cette affaire ? What do we care for that affair 1 

Que nous importe son arrivee ? What is his arrival to us 7 

Vous viendrez : n'est-ce pas ? ? -i^ -77 -77 j a 

XT) 4. • j„^ o y You Will come : Will you not? 

Nest-ce pas que vous viendrez? ) ' ^ 

Est-ce que cela me regarde ? Does that concern me ? Is that any- 

thing to me? 

Cela ne regarde personne. That concerns nobody. That is no- 

hody'^s business. 

II en veut a nos biens. He has a design upon our property. 

II en veut a nos amis. He has a. grudge against our friends. 

Cela vous regarde-t-il ? Is that your business f 

ExEEClSE 185. 

Accordi-ev, 1. to grant; Effort, m. e/bri ; Pouv-oir, 3. ir. to he 
Approuv-er, 1. to ap- Hasard, m. chance ; able ; 

prove ; Loin, far ; Qualite, £ quality ; 

Auteur, m. author; Se moqu-er, 1. ref. to Sang, m. blood ; 

Bien, very ; laugh at ; Ya, from aller, to go , 

Condamn-er, 1. to con- Murmure, m. murmur ; Velours, m. velvet ; 

demn ; Peu, little ; Vers-er, 1. to pour, shed ; 

Demaude, f. request ; Flainte, f. complaint ; Yil, e, vile ; 

1. Que vous apporterai-je de Londres ? 2. Apportez-nous ce que 
vous pourrez, n'importe quoi. 3. Lui avez-vous dit d'apporter du 
velours ? 4. Je lui ai dit d'en apporter, n'importe de quelle qualite. 
6. Pourvu que quelqu'un vienne, n'importe qui. 6. Que m'importe 
qu'Arnaud m'approuve ou me condamne? (Boileau.) 7. You3 
accorde-t-il votre demande ? 8. II refuse ; qu'importe ? 9. Est-il 
satisfait des efforts que vous avez faits ? 10. II n'en est pas satisfait ; 
qu'importe? 11. II n'a pas voulu nous recevoir; peu m'importe. 
12. Qu'importent les plaintes et les murmures des auteurs, si le public 
s'en moque? (Feraud.) 13. Qu'importe qu'au hasard, un sang vil 
soit verse ? (Racine.) 14. Cela vous regarde ; n'est-ce pas ? 15. Cela 
ne me regarde pas. 16. Cela ne regarde que moi. 17. Yous leur 
avez dit que ces affaires ne les regardaient pas; n'est-ce pas? 
18. Yous m'en voulez ; n'est-ce pas ? — N'importe, 19. A qui en 
voulez-vous ? 20. ISTous n'en voulons a personne. 21. ISTous ne vous 
en voulons pas. 22. Yous m'en voudrez; n'est ce pas? 23. En 
voulez-vous a la vie de votre ami ? 24. Je n'en veux pas a sa vie. 
25. II m'en veut; qu'importe? 26. Val Cesar est bien loin d'ea 
vouloir si sa vie? (Yoltaire). 



MONDE, TOUT LE MONDE, ETC. 253 

Exercise 186. 
1. Which way will your brother come ? 2. Provided he comeg 
to-morrow, it does not matter which way. 3. Will he write to 
your brother ? 4. He will not write to him ; but it is no matter. 
5. Will you not lend me a book ? 6. Which book do you wish to 
have ? 7. ISTo matter which. 8. Shall I bring you some silk from 
Paris ? 9. Bring me what you can ; no matter what. 10. Does that 
concern your brother? 11. That does not concern him, but it con- 
cerns me. 12. Does he refuse to write to us ? 13. He refuses to 
(de) write, but what does it matter ? 14. Bring me a book, no mat- 
ter which. 15. Your brother will come, will he not ? 16. Has he 
been willing to receive your brother? 17. He has refused to receive 
him, but no matter. 18. He is pleased, is he not ? 19. He is not 
pleased, but it is no matter. 20. Is that your business ? 21. It is 
my business. 22. It is my brother's business. 23. I have told you 
that it is nobody's business. 24. Has that man a design against your 
father's life ? 25. He has no design against his Hfe, but he has a 
degign upon his property. 26. Are you angry with us on that ac- 
count ? 27. I am not angry with you for this. 28. Have you a 
grudge against my friends ? 29. I have no grudge against theix?. 
30. That concerns you, does it not? 31. That concerns me. 32. Is 
that your business ? 33. It is very warm this morning ; is it not ? 
34. My sister will come this afternoon ; will she not ? 35. If she 
does not come, it does not matter. 36. What is her coming, to us ? 



LEgON XCV. LESSON XCV. 

MONDE, TOUT LE MONDE, GENS, ETC. 

1. The word monde, world, is often used in French in a restricted 
sense. It has then the meaning oi people, company, retinue, servants^ 
etc. Tout le monde, is used for the Enghsh expression everybody. 

T avait-il beaucoup de monde i Were there many people at church f 

I'eglise ? 

Se mettant a la tete de son monde, Placing himself at the head of his 

H ouvrit lui-meme la porte. people, he himself opened the door, 
Voltaire. 

Tout le monde le croit. •' Every hody believes it. 

2. The word gens also means people, and is of the masculine gen-* 
der ; but, by a singular anomaly, the adjectives which precede gena 
are put in the feminine, while those which follow it must be in the 
masculine gender. 



254 QITATEE- VINGT-QXJINZIBME LEgON, 



Cesontles meilleures gens dumonde. They are the hest people in the world 
Cea gens sont fort dangereux Those people are very dangerous. 

3. The Avords tovi, tel, quel, certain, not preceding immediately 
the TTord gens, are put in the mascuhne, except when the word 
coming between is an adjective, having a different termination in the 
two genders. 

Tons ces gena la etaient-ils chre- Were all those people Christians t 

tiens ? Pascal. 

Tons ces gens la sont sottement All those people are foolishly ingeni- 

ingenieux. . J. J. Rousseau, oics. 

4. The words tout, tel, quel, certain, are put in the feminine when 
they precede immediately the word gens, or are separated from it by 
an adjective having a different termination in the feminine. 



Quelles gens etes-vous ? 
vos atfaires ? 



Quelles sont 

(RAJUINE.) 

Quelles bonnes et dignes gens^ 

Resume 

Apres s'etre fait craindre de tout le 
monde, 11 craignit tout le monde 
aussL Flechiek. 

II dit du mal de tout le monde. 

Tout le monde le dit. 

Avez-vous amene beaucoup de 
monde ? 

Le monde n'est pas encore arrive. 

II n'y avait pas grand monde. 

II y a du monde avec lui. 

II a congedie tout son monde. 

Ce capitaine a tout son monde. 

Yoila de sottes gens. 

II s'arrete chez les premieres bonnes 
gens qu'il trouve. Boiste. 

H y a a la ville, comme ailleurs, de 
fore sottes gens, des gens fades, 
oisifs, desoccupes. LaBruyeee. 

Quels braves gens ! 

Quelles viles et mechantes gens ! 



What people are you ? What is your 

business f 
What good and worthy people ! 

Examples. 

After having inspired every hodywifh 
fear, he feared every body. 

He slanders every "body. 

Every body says so. 

Have you brought many people t 

The company has not yet come. 
There were not many people there. 
T/iere is some,person with him. 
He has discharged all his servants 

{people). 
T/iat captain has all his crew. 
Those are foolish people. 
He stops with the first good people 

that he finds. 
There are in the city, as elsewhere, 

very silly people, tedious, idle, un* 

employed people. 
What worthy people ! 
What vile and wicked people ! 



Exercise 187. 

S'accommoder, 1. refl Des que, as soon as ; Perd-re, 4. to lose ; 

to put up with, to agree Equipage, m. crew ; Eassembl-er, 1. to bring 

with; Eveill-er, 1. to awake; together; 

Attend-re, 4. to await, to Gens d'epee, military Reven-ir, 2. ir. to return ; 

expect; men; 8a\on, m. drawing-room ; 

Bord (a), on board; Gens de lettres, men of Serv-if, 2. ir. to serve; 

Gampagne, t country ; letters ; Terre, f. land, shore ; 

Demel-er, 1. to settle, ar- Gens de robe, lawyers ; Yoyag-er, 1. [§ 49.] ta 

range / Patron, uLpairon saint ; travel. 



MONDE, TOUT LE MONDE, ETC. 255 

1. Avez-vous rassemble beaucoup de monde chez vous ? 2. H- n'est 
venu que peu de monde. 3. A quelle heure servira-t-on le diner 
aujourd'hui ? 4. On le servira, des que notre monde sera venu. 
6. Le capitaine a-t-il tout son equipage a bord ? 6. ISTon, monsieur ; 
il a envoye du monde a terre. 7. Vos gens se levent-ils de bonne 
heure? 8. II faut que tous les jours, j'eveille tout mon monde 
(Racine). 9. Les Moscovites perdirent trois fois plus de monde que 
les Suedois (Yoltaire). 10. Ou est madame votre mere ? ll.»Elle 
est dans le salon, il y a du monde avec elle {company). 12. Tout le 
monde pent voyager comme moi (X. de Maistre). 13. Ainsi va le 
monde. 14. Elle attend pour quitter le monde, que le monde I'ait 
quittee (Flechier). 15. Vos gens sont-ils revenus de la campagne ? 
16. Nous attendons nos gens aujourd'hui. 17. Y a-t-il ici une societe 
de gens de lettres? 18. Non, monsieur; il n'y a qu'une societe de 
gens de robe. 19. Connaissez-vous ces braves gens ? 20. Je crois 
que ce sont des gens d'epee. 21. Tels sent les gens aujourd'hui. 
22. Telles gens, tels patrons (La Bruyere). 23. Tous mes gens 
sont malades. 24. II faut savoir s'accommoder de toutes gens 
(L'Academie). 25. Que pouvez-vous avoir a d^meler avec de telles 
gens ? 

Exercise 188. 

1. Are there many people at your brother's ? 2. There are not 
many people there. 3. Does that young man slander every body ? 
4. He slanders nobt)dy. 5. Have you brought many people with 
you ? 6. We have brought but few people with us. 7. Is there com- 
pany with your mother ? 8. There is no company with her. 9. Who 
has told you that? 10. Every body says so. 11. Has the company 
come ? 12. The company has not yet come. 13. Has your mother 
discharged two servants (domesUques) ? 14. She has discharged all 
her people. 15. Do you know those people ? IG. I know them 
very well; they are very worthy people. 17. When he travels, he 
Btops always with good people. 18. Are there foolish people here ? 
19. There are foohsh people everywhere (partout). 20. Do you 
awake your people every morning ? 21. Yes, sir ; I must awake 
them every day, 22. What can your brother have to settle with- 
those people ? 23. They are the best people in the world. 24. Were 
there many people at church this morning ? 25. There were not 
many people there. 26. Are your people sick ? 27. Yes, sir ; all 
my people are' sick. 28. There is here a society of learned men. 
29. There axe in Paris several societies of lawyers. 30. What 



253 QUATEE-VINGT-SEIZIEME LEgON. 

worthy people 1 31. What good people ! 32. Do you expect your 
people to-day ? 33. We expect them this evening. 34. So goes 
the world. 35. Has your captain aU his crew ? 36. He has all his 
crew on board. 



. LEgOl^ XCYI. LESSON XCYI. 

EN, USED TO EXPRESS PKOPEETT, ETC. 

1. When property or possession is affirmed of tilings inanimate, 
the relation of possession is often expressed by the relative pronoun 
en [§ 95, (5.)]. 

YoUa un bel arbre ; le fruit en est Thai is a fine tree ; its fruit is exr 
excellent, cellent. 

2. When, however, the inanimate possessor is the subject of the 
same clause, the possessive adjective is used [§ 95, (4.)]. 

Cet arbre a perdu son fruit. Thai tree has lost its fruit 

3. Entendre, to hear, is used in the sense of to understand. It is 
also used reflectively. It means then, to he understood, to understand 
one's self, or one another, or to agree with one another. It means also, 
to le expert in any thing. In this latter sense it takes a before its 
regimen. This regimen is at times replaced by the pronoun y. 

Comment entendez-vous cela ? JIow do you wndersiand ihatf 

Cela s'entend. That is understood. 

II s'entend aux affaires. Ee is expert in business. 

4. Se faire entendre corresponds to the EngUsh, to make one^s self 
understood, to make one's self heard. 

Nous nous sommes fait entendre. We made ourselves understood. 

5. Taire [4. ir.] means to conceal, to keep to one's self. Se taire, to 

"be silent. 

Taisez-vous. Taisons-nous. £e silent {hold your tongue). Lei us 

he silent. 
t- Dites-lui de so taire. Tell him to ie silent. 

Resume op Examples. 

L'auteur d'un bienfait est celui qui The author of a good deed is the one 
en regoit les plus doux fruits. who receives its sweetest fruits. 

DUCLOS. 

Votre jardin est magnifique ; lea Tour garden is magnificent; its tress 
arbres ea sent superbea. ar6 very l&autiful. 



EN, USED TO EXPEESS PROPEETY, 25Y 

La vie a ses plaisirs et ses peines. Life has its pleasures and its troubles. 

L'etude a ses charmes. Study has its charms. 

Entendez-vou3 bien le latin? Do tjou understand Latin well? 

Get avoue n'entend rien aus affaires. T/iai attorney has no knowledge of 

business. 

II ne s'y entend pas. ITe is not expert in this. 

Je lui ai donne a entendre qu'il / gave him to understand that he was 

etait de trop ici. in the way here. 

Qu'entendez-vous par la ? What do you mean by that ? 

II y avait tant de bruit, que nous There was so much noise, that wa 

n'avons pu nous faire entendre. could not make ourselves heard. 

Taisez le premier, ce que vous vou- Keep to yourself, that which you would 

lez qu'on taise. Latin Maxim. wish to have kepi secret. 

Pourquoi ne vous taisez-vous pas ? Why are you not silent ? 

Nous I'avons fait taire. We made him hold his tongue {si- 
lenced him). 

Exercise 189. 

Agrement, m. pleasure; Ch^rurgien, m. surgeon ; Manche, f. sleeve; 
Avantage, m. advan- Consent-ir, 2. ir. to con- Mel-er, 1 . to mix ; 

tage.; sent; Muet, te, dumb, mute, 

Basque, f. skirt of a Court, e, short; Pays, m. country; 

coat; 'F ovQQ, f. force, power ; Raison, f. reason ; 

Brave, worthy ; Fort, very ; Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed. 

1. Est-ce un habit neuf que votre fils porte ? 2. Cast un habit 
neuf ; le drap en est tres fin. 3. Les manches n'en sont-elles pas trop 
courtes ? 4. Je crois que les manches en sont trop courtes et les 
basques trop longues. 5. La campagne n'a-t-elle pas ses avantages ? 
6. J'aime la campagne ; j'en connais les avantages. 7. Paris a ses 
agrements. 8. J'aime Paris ; j'en connais les agrements. 9. Ce chi- 
rurgien s'entend-il a la medecine ? 10. II n'y entend rien du tout. 
11. Entendez-vous la medecine? 12. Je ne m'y entend pas. 13. Je 
ne I'entends pas. 14. Je n'y entends rien. 15. Avez-vous reussi t, 
Tous faire entendre ? 16. Nous n'y avons pas reussi. 17. Mon voi- 
sin est un brave homme, et je m'entends fort bien avec lui. 18. Faire 
taire certaines gens est un plus grand miracle que de faire parler les 
muets. (Balzac). 19. Savez-vous de quel pays est cet homme ? 
20. II tait son pays et sa naissance. 21. Par la force de la raison, 
elle apprit I'art de parler et de se taire (Flechier). 22. Voulez- 
Tous vous taire, impertinente? vous venez toujours meler vos imper- 
tinences a toutes choses (Moliere). 23. Qui se tait consent 
(Proverb). 

Exercise 190. 

1. Have you a very good garden ? 2. We have a very large one, 
but its soil {terre^ f.) is not good. 3. Is your brother's coat new ? 
4. He has a new coat, but its sleeves are too short. 5. Are not its 



258 QXTATBE-VINGT-DIX-SEPTlSlME L K § O IT. 

skirts too long ? 6. No, sir ; its skirts are too short. 7. Have you 
not heard that preacher {predicateur) ? 8. There was so much noise 
that I could not hear him. 9, Does not the country have its plea- 
sures ? 10. The country has its pleasures. 11. Does not your bro- 
ther hke the city ? 12. He hkes the country ; he knows its pleasures. 
13. What does your brother mean by that ? 14. He means what he 
says. 15. Is your father expert in business? 16. My father has no 
knowledge of business. 17. Does that young man understand Eng- 
lish well? 18. He understands French and English very well. 19. Do 
you agree well with your partner ? 20. My partner is an honest 
man [§ 86.] ; I agree very well with him. 21. Does that young man 
conceal his age ? 22. He conceals his age and his country. 23. Does 
your father understand medicine ? 24. He does not understand it. 
25. He has no knowledge of it. 26. Be silent, my child. 27. Tell 
that child to be silent. 28. Silence gives consent. 29. Will you not 
be silent? 30. What have you given him to understand ? 31. We 
gave him to understand that study has its charms. 32. Have you 
silenced him ? 33. Yes, sir ; we sOenced him. 34. Tell him to be 
silent. 35. I have already (deja) told him to be silent 36. Let us 
be silent 



LEgON XCYII. LESSON XCVIL 

THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. THE VERBAL ADJECTIVE. 

1. The present participle is invariable, and ends always in ant. It 
expresses action, not situation. It cannot be rendered into English 
by an adjective, but is rendered by the participle present, or by the 
present of the indicative, preceded by a relative pronoun. The pres- 
ent participle has often, or may have a regimen. [§ 64.] 

Ces hommes, prevoyant le danger, Those men, foreseeing the danger 
s'enfuirent. _ fled. 

2. The part of the verb used after the preposition en is always the 
present participle. 

En ecrivant, en lisant. In writing, in reading. 

3. When the word ending in ant, is used to express the quahties, 
properties, or moral or physical situation of a noun, it is a verbal 
adjective, and assumes, in its termination, the gender and number of 
the noun which it qualifies. It must in this case be rendered into 
English by an adjective. 

Ces hommes sent prevoyanta. Those men aa-Q eautioits, provident 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE, ETC, 259 

4. The verbs entendre, io hear ; faire, to cause, to make ; laisser, to let, 
etc., followed by another verb completing their meaning, are not in. 
French separated from that verb. In the corresponding sentences in 
Enghsh, the two verbs are usually separated by other words, 

J'ai laisse tomber men couteau. / have lei my knife fall (dropjped). 
J'ai entendu dire cela. / have heard that said. 

Resume of Examples. 

Je connais des personnes, dormant / know persons sleeping (who sleep) 

d'un sommeil si protbnd, que le so profoundly, that the noise of 

bruit de la foudre ne les reveille- thunder would not awake them. 

rait pas. Bescher. 

Les eaux dormanteg sent meilleures Sleeping (still) waters are tetter for 

pour les chevaux que les eaux horses than living waters. 

vives. BcFFON. 

Nous avons trouve cette femme We found that woman dying. 

mourante, 

Cette famme, mourant dans la crainte That woman, dying in the fear of 

de Dieu, ne craignait point la God, did not fear death. 

mort. 

On est heureux en se contentant de One is happy in contenting one's self 

peu. with little. 

Avez-vous laisse passer ce voleur ? Have you let that thief pass ? 

Je I'ai laisse passer. I let him pass. 

Pourquoi avez-vous fait faire un Why have you had a coat made 

habit ? 

Je n'ai pas fait faire d'habit. I have had no coat made. 

J'ai laisse tomber quelque chose. J let something fall. ' 

Lui avez-vous entendu dire cela ? Have you heard him say thait 

Je le lui ai entendu dire. / heard him say it. 

Je I'ai entendu dire. / heard it said. 

Je I'ai entendu dire a ma soeur. / heard my sister say it. 

Exercise 191. 

S'appliqu-er, 1. ref to Essayer, 1. to try ; Pleuv-oir, 3. ir. io rain; 

ajiply ; Se hat-er, 1. re£ to T rev enant, e, obliging ; 

Besoin, m. want; hasten; Preven-ir, 2. ir. to antici' 

Cbaugement, m. altera- Lecture, f reading ; pate; 

Hon; Obligeant, e, obliging; Repet-er, 1. to repeat; 

"Difficnlte, f. dificulty ; Plai-re, 4. ir. /o^Zease; Suivant, e,folloiuing; 

]&raouss-er, 1, io blunt; Plume, f. pen; Suiv-re, 4. ir. io follow ; 

Empecher, 1. to prevent; Pointe, t point ; Voyant, e, bright showy. 

1. Ma cousine est-elle aussi obligeante que la votre ? 2. Elle est 
aussi obligeante, et bien plus charmante que la mienne. 3. Yos en- 
fants sont-ils prevenants ? 4. Mes enfants, prevenant tous mes be- 
soins ne me laissent rien a desirer, 5. Lisez bien attentivement les 
pages suivantes. 6. Ces demoiselles, suivant I'exemple de leur mere, 
s'appliquent a la lecture. 7. Les couleurs voyantes ne me plaisent 
point 8. Mes sceurs, voyant qu'il allait pleuvoir, se hdterent de re- 



260 QUATRE-VINGT-DIX-HXJITIEME LEgOU". 

venir. 9. Qu'avez-vous laisse tomber ? 10. J'ai laisse tomber ma 
plume ; la pointe en est emoussee. 11. Les avez-vous fait parler ? 

12. Je les ai fait parler, mais avec difficulte. 13. Avez-vous fait 
faire des changements dans votre maison ? 14. J'y en ai fait faire. 

15. A quoi en avez-vous fait faire ? 16, J' en ai fait faire a la salle a. 
manger et au salon. 17. Avez-vous laisse passer cet homme? 18. Je 
n'ai pas essaye de Ten erapecher. 19. A qui (whom) avez-vous en- 
tendu dire cela ? 20. Je I'ai entendu dire a men pere. 21. Je le lui 
ai entendu repeter. 22. H vous I'a entendu dire. 23. II vous a vu 
faire cela. 24. II vous I'a vu faire. 25. Je I'ai vu passer. 

Exercise 192. 
1. Are still -waters good for horses ? 2. Buflfcn says that they are 
better for horses than living waters. 3. Are your sisters cautious ? 
4. They are not very cautious. 5. My sisters, foreseeing that it was 
going to rain, brought their umbrellas. 6. What have you let fall ? 
7. I have let my knife and book fall. 8. Do very bright colors please 
your brother ? 9. Very bright colors do not please him. 10. Have 
you read the following pages? 11. Have you seen the dyiug wo- 
man ? 12. Your sister, dying in the fear of God, was very happy. 

13. Your sister, following your example, applied herself to study. 

14. Have you made them read ? 15. I made them read and write. 

16. I made my brother wri.te. 17. I have had a book bound {relier). 
18. Has your father had alterations made in his house ? 19. He has 
had some made in it. 20. In which room has he had some made ? 
21. He has had some made in my brother's room. 22. Whom have 
you heard say that ? 23. I heard my sister say it. 24. Have you 
heard him say that ? 25. I have not heard him say it. 26. Have 
you seen my father pass ? 27. I have not seen him pass. 28. I have 
heard him speak. 29. Make him speak. 30. Let it fall. 31. Do not 
let it fall. 32, What has your brother dropped ? 33. He has dropped 
nothing. 34. Whom have you heard say that ? 35. I heard your 
brother say it. 36. I have heard you repeat it. 37. We have seea 
you do that. 



LEgON XCVIII. LESSOR XCVIII. 

PEACTICAL RESUME OF THE RULES ON THE PAST PAR- 
TICIPLE. 1. 

The participle past is vaeiable under any of the following con- 
ditions : 

1. When employed as an adjective ; in which case it agrees in 
gender and number with the iMun which it qualifies. 



STTLES ON THE PAST PAETICIPLE. 261 

Bes livres imprimes. Printed looks. 

Ces femmes paraissent bien abat- Those women appear very dejected. 
tues. 

2. When used in the formation of the tenses of passive verbs ; 
when it always agrees with the subject of the proposition. 

EUes sont bien regues de tout le They are well received by every 
monde. body. 

3. When employed in forming the compoupd tenses of neuter 
Verbs having e^re as an auxiliary ; in which place, as in the preceding 
case, it agrees with the subject or nominative. 

Yotre scEur est partie ce matin. Tour sister went away this morning. 

4. When employed in forming the tenses of active verbs having 
avoir as an auxiliary ; in which connection it agrees not with the 
subject, but with the direct object or regimen, provided that object 
jprecedes it. 

Les maisons que nous avons ache- J%e houses which we have bought. 
tees. 

5. When used along with efre in the formation of the compound 
tenses of reflective verbs, wherein the reflective pronoun is the direct 
object; in which position it agrees with that pronoun or direct 
object. 

Ces dames se sont flattees. Those ladies have flattered themselves. 

■ 6. When used along with ttre (as in Rule 5.) in the formation of 
the compound tenses of those reflective verbs, in which the reflective 
pronoun is not the direct, but the indirect object of the proposition; 
in which event it agrees .with the direct object, provided (as in Eule 
4.) that object precedes it. 

Les histoires qu'elles se sont racon- The stories which they related to each 
tees. other. 

7. When forming part of a compound tense of a verb governing a 
succeeding infinitive, it is at the same time preceded by a direct ob- 
ject, which IS represented as performing the action denoted by the 
infinitive ; in which condition it agrees with that direct object. 

Les dames que j'ai entendues chan- The ladies whom I heard sing {sing- 
ter. ing). 

8. When, in a sentence containing the pronoun en, the participle 
is preceded by another object or regimen which is direct / in which 
case it agrees with that direct object. 

Je les en ai avertis. I have warned them of it 

Vous les en avez ioformes. You have informed them of it 



262 QUATEE-VINGT-DIX-HTTITli:ME LEgON. 

Resume of Examples. 

Vous avez des livres bien relies. Tou have well hound hooks. 

Vos filles sont estimees. Your daughters are esteemed. 

Ces terres sout bien labourees. Taose laads are well plouglied. 

Mes voisines sont tombeea d'ac- My neighbours have come to an un- 
cord, derstanding. » 

Elles sont venues nous trouver. They came to us. 

La, victoire que nous avons rem- The victory which we have gained. 
portee. 

Les champs que vous avez laboures. The fields which you have ploughed. 

Vous vous etes repentis de votre Tou have repented {you) of your 
faute. fault. 

Elle s'est souvenue de sa promesse. *S^^e remembered her promise. 

Les soldats que j'ai vus passer. The soldiers whom I saw passing. 

Les musiciennes que j'ai entendues The mvsical ladies whom I heard 
jouer. playing. 

L'indiscretion que nous nous sommes The indiscretion with which we re- 
reprochee. preached one another. 

Les evenements qu'elles se sont The events which they related to or\t 
racontes. another. 

Les fruits que j'en ai re^us. The fruits which I received from it. 

Les nouvelles que j'en ai apportees. The news which I brought frora it 

Exercise 193. 

A Tordinaire, as usual ; Fleur, f. floioer ; Se reproch-er, 1. ref. to 
Avert-ir, 2. to warn; Malade, sick person; reproach one's self ; 

Boue, f. mud; Merveille (a), wonder' Serieux, se, serious ; 

Coutume, (de), usually^ fully, perfectly ; Souri-re, 4. ir. to smile ; 

usual; Parven-ir, 2. ir. to sue- Suivant, according to; 

Cueill-ir, 2. to gather ; ceed ; Tomb-er, 1. to fall; 

Dechiffr-er, 1. to deci- Se port-er, 1. to be, to Tomb-er d'accord, to come 

pher ; do ; to an understanding ; 

Decourag-er, 1. to dis- Plus tot, sooner, earlier ; Trouv-er, 1. to find; 

cou7-age; Pi-re, 4. ir. to laugh ; Vol-er, 1. to steal. 

1. Cette demoiselle ne se trouve-t-elle pas bien fatiguee ? 2. Elle 
est fatiguee et decouragee. 3. Yotre sceur est-eile allee a I'eglise 
suivant sa coutume ? 4. Ma mere et ma soeur j sont allees. 
5. Yotre soeur est-elle revenue plus tot que de coutume ? 6. Elle est 
revenue plus tard qu'a 1' ordinaire. 7. Cette pauvre malade est-elle 
tombee? 8. Elle est tombee dans la boue. 9. Ma mere est-elle 
parvenifte a dechiffrer ma lettre ? 10. Elle n'y est pas parvenue. 
11. Quelles fieurs avez-vous cueillies ? 12. Les fleurs que j'ai trouv^es 
sont plus belles que celles que vous m'avez envoyees. 13. Votre 
cousine ne s'est-elle pas bien portee ? 14. Elle s'est portee a mer- 
veille. 15. De quel livre vous etes-vous servie, mademoiselle? 16. J"e 
me suis servie du votre. 17. Nous nous sommes servies des notres. 
18. Quelles fautes votre fils s'est-il reprochees ? 19. Les fautes qu'il 
s'est reprochees ne sont pas serieuses. 20. Les avez-vous vu3 



EULES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 263 

rire ? 21. Je les ai vus sourire. 22. Les avez-vous vus voler des 
fruits? 23. Je les ai vus voler des pommes. 24. Les avez-vous 
avertis de leurs fautes ? 25. Je les en ai avertis. 26. Je ne les en 
ai pas avertis. 

Exercise 194. 
1. Are your books well bound ? 2. They are "well bound, and 
well printed. 3. Did not your little girl find herself discouraged ? 
4. She found herself tired, but not discouraged. 5. Have your sis- 
ters come to an understanding ? 6. They have not come to an un- 
derstanding. 7. My brothers have come to an understanding. 
8. Who came to you ? 9. Your friends came to us. 10. Has not 
your sister gone to church? 11. My sister has gone to church as 
usual. 12. Did your sister return sooner than usual ? 13. My sis- 
ter returned later than usual. 14. Are the fields which you have 
ploughed, large ? 15. The fields which I have bought are very large. 
16. Where are the gentlemen whom you saw pass? 17. The ladies 
Tvhom I heard sing are in their room. 18. Did your poor sister fall? 
19. Did that poor sick woman fall in the mud ? 20. Did your sis- 
ter succeed in reading that book? 21. She succeeded in reading 
it. 22. Have you warned your sisters of their danger ? 23. I have 
warned them of it. 24. I have not warned them of it. 25. What 
pen has your mother used ? 26. She has used mine. 27. Have not 
those young ladies used my book ? 28. They have not used it. 
29. Has your mother been well ? 30. She has been perfectly well. 
31. Has she remembered her promise ? 32. She has remembered it. 
33. Have you seen those boys laugh ? 34. I have seen them smile, 
35. Have you seen them play ? 36. I have heard them play. 



LEgON XCIX. LESSON XCLS. 

PRACTICAL RESUME OF THE RULES ON THE PAST PAR- 
TICIPLE. II. 

The participle past is invariable : 

1. In active verbs, when the direct regimen follows the participle. 

Mes nieces ont etudie leurs legons. My nieces have studied their lessons 
Elles ont neglige leurs etudes. They have neglected their studies. 

2. In neuter verbs conjugated with avoir. 

Mes cousines ont disparu. • , My cousins have disappeared. 

Les ciaq heures qu'elles ont dormi. The Jive hours which they have slepL 



fi64 quatre-vingt-dix-neitviIjme LEgON. 

In the latter sentence, the word pendant is understood after heures. 

Les cinq heures pendant lesquelles TJie five hours during which they 
elles ont dorml slept. 

3. In unipersonal verbs, whether conjugated with etre or with 
avoir. 

Les chaleurs qu'il a fait cette annee. TJie heat there has been this year. 
II est arrive bien des malheurs. Many misfortunes have happened. 

4. In reflective or pronominal verbs, of wliich the second pronoun 
is an indirect regimen, when no direct regimen precedes. 

EUe s'est propose de partir. She proposed to herself to leave. 

5. When the participle precedes an infinitive, and is preceded by 
a direct regimen, and this direct regimen is not the actor, but the ob- 
ject acted upon. In this case the infinitive is generally rendered in 
English by the passive voice. 

Les chansons que j'ai entendu chan- The songs which I heard (being) sung 
ter. 

6. When the direct regimen preceding a participle, is not the ohjed 
of this particple, but of a verb following. 

La regie que je vous ai conseille The rule which I advised you to 
d'etudier. study. 

7. The participle of faire, /a*7, followed by an infinitive, is always 
invariable. 

Je les ai fait raccommoder. I have had them mended. 

8. After the pronoun, en, when no direct regimen precedes. 

Vous a-t-on donne des fleurs ? Have they given you flowers ? 

On m'en a donne. They have given me (some) of them. 

Resume of Examples. 

Elles nous ont donne de bons con- They have given us good advice. 

sails. 

Elles nous en ont donne. They have given us some. 

Les trois lieues qu'il a couru The three leagues which he ran. 

Les anoees que ces edifices ont The years that those edifices have 

dure. lasted. 

La belle journee qu'il a fait hier ! What a beautiful day it was yester- 

day ! 

C'est la plus belle fete qu'il y ait It is the finest feast that there has 

eu. been. 

II s'est presente deux de vos amis. There appeared two of your friends. 

Ces demoiselles se sont nui. Those young ladies have injured one 

another. 

Les Asiatiques se sont fait une es- The Asiatics have made the education 

pece d'art de reducation de I'ele- of the elephant a kind of wU 

phaut 



ETJLES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 265 

Elle s'est imagine I'idee de pouvoir She conceived the idea that she might 

reussir. succeed. 

Les fruits que j'ai vu voler. The fruits which I saw 'being stolen. 

Les soldats blesses que j'ai vu por- The wounded soldiers whom I saw 

ter. (being) carried. 

La chanson que j'ai entendu chan- The song which Iheard sung. 

ter. 

Les pommes que je vous ai defendu The apples which I forbade you to 

de manger. eat. 

Je les ai fait partir. I obliged them to leave. 

Elles m'ont apporte des orangea. They have brought me oranges. 

Elles m'en ont apporte. They have brought me {some) ofthem^ 

Exercise 195. 

Auberge, f. inn ; Jou-er, 1. to play ; Nuit, f. night ; 

Bien, m. good; Habill-er, 1. to dress; Piece, t piece; 

Dernier, e, last; Dorm-ir, 2. to sleep ; Eacont-er, 1, to relate; 

Disparait-re, 4. ir. to dis- Lion-d'Or, m. Golden Reven-ir, 2. ir. to re^ 

appear; Lion; turn; 

Enterr-er, 1. to bury ; Mort, e, dead; Soieries, silk goods, silks. 

1. Quelle auberge vous a-t-on recommandee ? 2. On m'a recom- 
mande I'auberge du Lion-d'Or. 3. Quelles nouvelles avez-voua 
apportees? 4. J'ai apporte des nouvelles agreables. 5. Vos voisines 
sont-elles habillees ? 6. Elles ne sont pas encore habiUees. 7. Ont- 
elles bien dormi, la nuit derniere ? 8. Elles n'ont pas bien dormi. 
9. Quand sont-elles arrivees ? 10. Elles sont arrivees a quatra 
heures et demie. 11. Ont-elles dormi plus de cinq heures ? 12. Lea 
SIX heures qu'elles ont dormi leur ont fait beaucoup de bien. 13. Vos 
soeurs se sont-elles amusees ? 14. En jouant, elles se sont fait 
mal au bras. 15. Se sont-elles raconte notre conversation ? 16. Elles 
se la sont racontee. 17. Vos amies ont-elles disparu ? 18. Elles 
n'ont pas disparu ; elles sont revenues chez elles. 19. Les soldats 
que vous avez vus partir, sont-ils revenus ? 20. II sont morts ; je les 
ai vu enterrer. 21. Ne les avez-vous pas fait ^tudier? 22. Je les 
ai fait lire. 23. Avez-vous apporte des soieries ? 24. Je n'en ai pas 
apporte. 25. Les soieries que j'en ai apportees sont superbes. 

Exercise 196. 
1. Have you not recommended my nieces ? 2. I have recom- 
mended them. 3. Have you brought me good oranges ? 4, I have 
brought you some. 5. Have you given any to my daughters ? 6. I 
have given them some. 7. I would have given them- some, if I had 
had many. 8. Have you not neglected your studies ? 9. I have 
not neglected them ; I never neglect them. 10. The years which 
that church has lasted, speak in favor (en faveur) of the architect. 
11. The tea miles which he has am, have fatigued him. 12. Have 

12 



266 eBNTIEMB LEgON, 

your sisters injured eacli other ? 13. They have flattered themselves. 
14. Did my friends present themselves ? 15. There came three of 
your sisters. 16. What did they imagine ? 17. They conceived the 
idea of reading Tasso {Le Tasse). 18. Have you seen them (m.) 
steal my apples ? 19. I saw them steal your peaches. 20. Have 
you heard them (f.) sing? 21. I have heard them sing. 22. The 
songs which I heard sung, are not new. 23. I found in your room 
the books which I had forbidden you to take. 24. The peaches, 
■which I have forbidden you to eat, are not ripe (inures). 25. Have 
you seen those soldiers ? 26. I saw them pass last week. 27. I saw 
them carried to the hospital (d Thopital) this morning. 28. Have 
you brought oranges from France ? 29. I brought some. 30. The 
oranges which I brought from it (en) are good. 31. Have you 
brought silk goods ? 32. I have brought some. 33. I have brought 
none. 34. Are the silk goods which you brought from that place, 
good? 35. I brought but two pieces. 



LEgON C. LESSON C. 

EXAMPLES ILLUSTEATING THE VARIOUS USES OF THE PRIN- 
CIPAL CONJUNCTIONS. 

A MOINS QUE. 

H n'en fera rien, d moins que vous ITe will do nothing of the kind, 

ne lui parliez. unless you speak to him. 

A moi-ns que vous ne preniez bien Unless you choose your time well, 

votre temps, vous n'en viendrez pas you will not accomplish it. 
a bout 

Quel indigne plaisir peut avoir What unworthy pleasure can ava- 

I'avarice? rice offer? 

Etque sert d'amasser, d moins What is the use of hoarding up mi' 

gtt'on ne jouisse ? Boursault. less we enjoy ? 



Aussi, lis n'ont aucune force pour Therefore, they have no strength to 

le posseder silrement. Pascal, possess it safely. 

Ma douleur serait trop mediocre, My grief would he too trifling if I 

si je pouvais la depeindre; aussi je could depict it, so that I will not un- 

ne I'entreprendrai pas. dertake it. 

MmE. DE SEVIGNi. 

AU EESTE. 

C'est ce qu'il y a de pins sage ; au This is the wisest way ; besides it 

reste^ c'est aussi ce qu'il y a de plus is also the most just, 
juste. Mabuontel. 



VAEIOUS USES OP CONJUNCTIONS 



267 



CAR. 



Voila les perils, yoici le moyen de 
les eviter ; car enfin, le bras de Dieu 
n'est pas raccourei. Massillon. 

Le peuple se figure une felicite 
imaginaire dans les situations ele- 
vees, oil il ne pent atteindre, et 11 
croit {car tel est l'homme),que tout 
ce qu'il ne peut avoir, c'est cela 
meme qui est le bonheur qu'il 
cherche. Massillon. 



Those are the dangers, ihis is the 
way of avoiding them; for finally, 
the influence of God is not less j)OW- 
erful. 

The people picture to themselves 
an imaginary happiness in elevated 
stations which they cannot reach, and 
they believe (for such is man), thai 
all that which they cannot obtain, 
forms thai very happiness which 
they seek. 



COMME— QUE. 



Comme I'ambition n'a pas de 
frein, et que la soif des richesses nous 
consume tons, 11 en resulte, que le 
bonheur nous fuit, a mesure que nous 
le cherchons. Th. Corneille. 



As ambition has no limits, and as 
the thirst of riches devours us all, 
the result is, that happiness avoids 
VrS, as we proceed in our search after 
it. 



DONC. 



Votre maitre vous aime; done 
vous devez 1' aimer. 

Je suis, done, un temoin de leur 
peu de puissance. Racine. 

Et d'oii peut done venir ce change- 
ment extreme ? Yoltaire. 

Si ce n'est toi, c'est done ton frere. 
•^Je n'en ai pas. — C'est done quel- 
qu'un des tiens. La Fontaine. 

Aliens done! repondit-on, et la 
transaction n'eut pas lieu. 

De Cussy. 



Your master loves you; therefore, 
you should love him. 

I am, therefore, a witness of their 
want of power. 

Whence, therefore, can ihis extreme 
change proceed^ 

If it is not you, then it is your 
brother. — / have none. — Then it must 
be some one of your family. 

Well then 1 replied they, and the 
affair did not take place. 



DE MEME QUE. 

De meme que le soleil brille sur As the sun shines upon the earth, 
la terre, de meme le juste brillera so will thejv^t shine in heaven. * 
dans les cieux. L'academie. 



ET. 



C'est etre faible et timide que 
d'etre inaccessible et fier. • 

Massillon. 
Une famille vertueuse est un vais- 
seau tenu pendant la tempete par 
deux aucres, la religion et les moeurs. 
Chateaubriand. 
Quel carnage de toutes parts I 
On egorge a la fois les enfants, lea 
vieillards, 
Et la soeur et le frere, 
Et la fiUe et la mere, 
Le fils dans les bras de son pere. 
Eaoine, Esihei'. 



To be inaccessible and proud, is to 
be weak and ti/nid. 

A virtuous family is a vessel 
strengthened during the tempest by 
two anchors, religion and morals. 

What carnage on all sides f 
They murder at once the children, 
the old men, the sister, and the broth- 
er, the daughter and the mother, the 
son in the arms of his father. 



268 



CENTIEME LEgON. 



LORSQUE — QUAND. 



Lorsque I'mnocence habitait la 
terre. Bossuet. 

Quand vous me hairiez, je ne m'en 
plaindrais pas. Eacixe. 

Quand nous n'aurions egard qu'au 
repos seul de notre vie, quand nous 
n'aurions point d'autre interet ici- 
bas que de nous preparer des jours 
heureux, quel bonheur de prevenir 
d'avance, et d'etouffer dans leur 
naissance tant de passions violentes. 
Massillon. 



When innocence inkaliied {he 

earth. 

If even you hated me, I would not 
complain. 

If even we considered merely the 
repose of our lives, If even we had 
no other interest here than to pre- 
pare for ourselves happy days, what 
happiness it vjould he, to prevent he- 
forehand, to stifle in their birth, so 
many violent passions. 



MAIS. 



C'etait deja la puissance impe- 
riale, qu'on lui a vue depuis, mats 
avec I'assentiment universel des 
peuples, avec des formes moins 
royales, mais plus dignes peut-etre. 
Thiers. 

L'harmonie ne frappe pas simple- 
ment I'oreillo, mais 1' esprit. 

BOILEAU. 

C'est un parti sage a la guerre do 
se tenir sur la defensive, mais ce 
n'est pas le plus brillant. 

La Rochefoucauld. 

11 n'y a point de mais qui tien- 
ne ; je ne donnerai point ma fille a 
un muet. Bruets. 



It was already the imperial power, 
of which we have since seen him pos- 
sessed, but with the consent of the 
people, with forms less regal, but_per- 
haps more worthy. 



Harmony does not 
the ear, but the mind. 



only strike 



To keep on the defensive is a wise 
resolution in war, but it is not the 
most brilliant. 

There is no but in the matter; 
I vjill not give my daughter to a 
mute. 



^^. 



Heureux celui qui salt se conten- 
ter de peul Son sommeil n'est 
trouble ni par les craintes, ni par 
les desirs honteux de I'avarice. 

Trad. d'Horace. 

Yous perdez ainsi la confiance de 
Vos amis, sans les avoir rendus ni 
meiUeurs ni plus habiles. 

YOLTAIRE. 

On n'est jamais si heureux, ni si 
malheureux qu'on se I'imagine, 

La Rochefoucauld. 

Cette loi sainte ne connait plus, ni 
|)auvre, ni riche, ni noble, ni roturier, 
ni maitre, ni esclave. Massillo27. 



Happy is he who can content him* 
self with little ! His sleep is dis- 
turbed neither by ike fear, nor by 
the shameful desires of avarice. 
_ Transl. of Horace. 

You lose thus the confidence of your 
friends, without having rendered 
them either better or more skilful. 

We are never so happy nor so uvr 

happy as we fancy. 

That holy law knows no longer 
either poor or rich, noble or plebeian, 
master or slave. 



OR. 



Or sus, mettons-nous a I'ouvrage. 
Or fa, Gil Bias, me dit-il un jour, 
le temps de ton enfance est passe. 
Le Sage. 



Kow then, let us go to work. 

Now then, Gil Bias, said he to me 
one day, the iim^ of your childhood is 
over. 



VAEI0T7S USES OP CONJUNCTIONS. 



269 



ou. 



La fortune, soit bonne ou raau- 
vaise, soit passagcre ou constante, 
ne peut rieu sur I'ame du sage. 

Marmontel. 
La liberte de publier ses pensees, 
ou la liberte de la presse, doit etre 
reglee sur la liberie meme d'agir. 
B. DE St. Pierre. 



Fortune, he it good or had, he it 
transient or constant, has no jpower 
over the soul of the tuise. 

The liberty of publishing one!s 
thoughts, or the liberty of the press, 
should he regulated upon the liberty of 
action itself. 



PARCE QUE. 



- Las grands homraes entreprennent 
de grandes choses, parce gw'elles 
sont grandes, et les fous parce quHls 
les croient faciles. Yauvenargues. 
La tout est beau, parce que tout 



Great men undertake great things 
because they are great, and fools, 
because they believe them easy. 

Every thing there is beautiful, be- 



est vral J. J. Rousseau. cause every thing is true. 

POURTANT. 

Le style le moins noble a pour- The least elevated style has, never- 
iant sa noblesse. Boileau. theless, its elevation. 



PUISQUE. 



Pourquoi le demander, puisque 
vous le savez ? Racine. 

Ne vous lassez jamais d'examiner 
les causes des grands changements, 
puisque rien ne servira jamais tant 
a votre instruction. Bossuet. 

Puisque vous le voulez, je vais 
changer de style. Boileau, 



Why ask about it, since you know 
it? 

Never he weary of examining into 
the causes of great changes, since 
nothing will ever be of so much ser- 
vice to your instruciion. 

Since you will have it so, I will 
change my style. 



que. 



Jamais on ne vit un si grand ex- 
emple, que le courage n'est point in- 
compatible avec la mollesse. 

Yoltaire, 

A quoi vous servira d'avoir de 
I'esprit, si vous ne I'employez pas, et 
que vous ne vous appliquez pas ? 
Bossuet. 

Toutefois, que sert-il de me justi- 
fier ? Racine. 

QuHl fasse ce qu'il lui plaira. 

Sais-tu quelque chose de plus? 

Oh I que oui. Brueys. 

C'est une maladie d'esprit, que de 
Bouhaiter des choses impossibles. 
Fenelon. 

La veritable conversion du coeur 
fait autant aimer Dieu qu'on a aime 
les creatures. Pascal. 

Crois-tu que dans son coeur, 11 ait 
jure ta mort ? Racine. 



Never was such a striking exam- 
ple seen, that courage is not incom-^ 
patible with effeminacy. 

Of what use tvill be your loit, if 
you do not employ it, and do not ap- 
ply yourselves ? 

However, what is the use of justify- 
ing myself? 

Let him do what he pleases. 

Bo you know any thing more f 

Tliat I do! 

Wishing for impossible things, is a 
disease of the mind. 

TJie true conversion of the heart 
makes us love God as rnuch as we 
have loved the creatures. 

Do you believe that he has sworn 
your death in, his heart f 



270 



EXERCISES IK COMPOSING* 



Cen'est pas g-we j'eusse^mieuxfait It is not that I might have dond 

que vous. Mme. de Sevigne. better than you. 

IlafallugMemes malheursm'aient It was necessary that my misfor- 

instruit, pour m'apprendre ce que je tunes should instruct me, to teach me 

ne voulais pas croire. Fenelon. what I would not believe. 



QUOIQUE. 



Quoique Dieu et la nature aient 
fait tous les hommes egaux, en les 
formant d'une meme boue, la vanite 
humaine ne peut souffrir cette ega- 
lite. BossuET. 

Si vous le vouliez, nous partiriona 
ensemble. 

Si vous le prenez sur ce ton, je 
me retire. 

Nul empire n'est sur, s'il n'a 
I'amour pour base. Racine. 

/S'il le faut, nous partirons. 

Votre esprit a toujours en reserve 
quelque si, quelque mais. 

Destouches. 



Although God and nature have 
made all men equal, in forming them 
from the same earth, human vanity 
cannot bear that equality. 



SI. 



If you wished it, we would go iO' 
gether. 

If you go on in this way, I with' 
draw. 

No empire is safe, unless it has 
affection for its basis. 

If it must be so, we will go. 

Your mind has always in reserve 
some if, some but. 



SINON. 



lis repondirent, qu'il fallait re- 
tablir I'equilibre europeen rompu; 
qu'il fallait le retablir sinon sur le 
continent, oil il ctait tout a fait 
detruit, au moins sur 1' Ocean. 

Thtees. 



Soil qu'il le fasse, soit qu'il ne le 
fasse pas. 

Un mal funeste et contagieux se 
repandit dans les principales villes 
de la Normandie; soit que I'intem- 
perie des saisons eut laisse dans les 
airs quelque maligne impression, soit 
qu'un commerce fatal eiit apporte 
des pays eloignes, avec de fragiles 
richesses, des semences de maladie et 
de mort, soit que I'ange de Dieu eiit 
etendu la main pour frapper cette 
malheureuse province. Flechier. 



They replied, that if was necessary 
to re-establish the disturbed Euro- 
pean balance; that it was necessary 
to restore it, if not on the continent, 
where it was entirely destroyed, at 
least on the Ocean. 

-que. 

Whether he does it, whether he 
does it not. 

A fatal and contagious disease 
spread in the principal cities of 
Normandy ; be it that the inclemency 
of the season had left in the air some 
malignant impression, be it that a 
fatal commerce had brought from 
distant countries, with perishable 
riches, the seeds of disease and death, 
be it that the angel of God had 
stretched forth his hand to smite thai 
unfortunate province. 



EXERCISES IN COMPOSIXa 

The words in the following lists are given, as before intimated 
(page 103), as suggestive of thought. In conducting the exercise, 
the Teacher selepts a particular word, as Belieur (Bookbinder), and 



EXERCISES IK COMPOSING, 



271 



requires each pupil to compose a French sentence containing this 
term. The pupil is duly notified that he is at liberty to take any 
thought suggested by the word, and to produce a sentence of any 
form found in any of the foregoing Lessons ; regard being had all 
along to all the Kules, Notes, Exceptions, etc., that may bear upon 
the case. Thus, adopting as a model the sentence, Voire marchand 
est hien obligeant (Lesson 17, Resume) ; Le Danois a-t-il quelques 
pommes ? (Lesson 18, Rule 7) ; Connaissez-vous le Docteur L. ? (Les- 
son 30, Resume) ; Ce monsieur est-il peintre f etc., etc., let him en- 
deavor to produce others of the Hke kind. 

A little practice will render the exercise both easy and interesting. 
It will soon come to be easy to incorporate not only owe, but iwo^ 
three or more of the words taken from the lists. 



Le Temps et ses Divisions. 



1. 



Time and its Divisions. 



Tin siecle, an 


age, a century. 


Midi, ^ 


noon. 


Un an, une annee, 


a year. 


L'apres-midi, 


the afternoon. 


Une saison, 


a season. 


Le soir. 


the evening. 


Tin mois, 


a month. 


La nuit, 


the night. 


Une quinzaine, 


a fortnight. 


Minuit, 


midnight. 


Une semaine, 


a week. 


Aujourd'hui, 


to-day. 


Un jour, 


a day. 


Demain, 


to-morrow. 


Une heure, 
tJne demi-heure, 


an hour, 
half an hour. 


Apres-demRin. { *^^ ^^^ ^^^^ *«" 
- ^ "*» 1 morrow. 


Un quart d'heure, 
Une minute, 


j a quarter of 
( an hour, 
a minute. 


Hier, 
Avant-hier, 


yesterday, 
the day before 
yesterday. 


Une seconde, 


a second. 


La veille, 


the day before. 


Le matin, 


the morning. 


Le lever du soleil, 


sunrise. 


La matinee, 


the forenoon. 


Le coucher du soleil, 


sunset. 


Les Saisons. S 


J. The Seasons. 


Le printemps, 


the spring. 


L'automne, (tonn) 


the autumn. 


L'ete, 


the summer. 


L'hiver, 


the winter. 


Les Mois. \ 


J. The Months. 


Janvier, 


January, 


JuiUet, 


July. 


Tevrier, 


February, 


Aoiit, (oo) 


August. 


Mars, (Marss) 


March. 


Septembre, 


September. 


Avril, 


April. 


Octobre, 


October. 


Mai, 


May. 


JSTovembre, 


November. 


Juin, 


June. 


Decembre, 


December. 


Les Jotjrs. ^ 


t. The Days. 




Dimanche, 


Sunday. 


Jeudi, 


Thursday. 


''Lundi, 


Monday. 


Vendredi, 


Friday. 


Mardi, 


Tuesday. 


Samedi, 


Saturday. 


Mercredi, 


"Wednesday. 


Tous les jours, 


every day. 



273 



LISTS OP WORDS 



Les Principaijx Pats. 



5. 



The Principal Countries. 



L'Afrique> 
L'Algerie, 
L'Allemagne, 
L'Amerique, 
L'Angleterre, 
L'Autriche, 
L'Arabie, 
L'Asie, 
La Baviere, 
La Belgique, 
Xa Boheme, 
Le Bresil, 



Africa. 

Algeria, Algiers. 

Germany. 

America. 

England. 

Austria. 

Arabia. 

Asia. 

Bavaria. 

Belgium. 

Bohemia. 

Brazil. 



La Bretagne, (Grande), Great Britain. 



Le Canadi 

Lo Bas Canada, 

Le Haut Canada, 

La Castille, 

Le Chili, 

La Chine, 

La Corse, 

Le Danemarc, 

L'Ecosse, 

L'Egypte, 

L'Espagne, 

L'i:i]urope, 

Le3 Etats-Unia, 

La France, 

Gailes, (Le Pays de) 

La Gaule, 

La Grece, 

Lo Hanovre, 



Canada. 

Lower Canada. 

Upper Canada. 

Castile. 

Chili. 

China. 

Corsica. 

Denmark. 

Scotland. 

Egypt. 

Spain. 

Europe. 

the United States. 

France. 

Wales. 

Gaul. 

Greece. 

Hanover. 



L'Helvetie, (see) Helvetia- 

La Hongrie, Hungary. 

L'Inde, India. 

Les Indes Occidentales, "West Indies. 
Les Indes Orientales, East Indies. 



L'Irlande, 
L'Islande, (iss) 
Le Japon, 
La Judee, 
Le Mexique, 
La Moscovie, 
Naples, 

La Normandie, 
La Norvege, 
La Palestine, 
Les Pays-Bas, 
Le Piemont, 
Le Perou, 
La Perse, 
La Pologne, 
La Prusse, 
La Russie, 
La Sardaigne, 
La Savoie, 
La Saxe, 
La Sicile, 
La Suede, 
La Suisse, 
La Syrie, 
La Turquie, 
Le Wtlrtemberg, 



Ireland. 

Iceland. 

Japan. 

Judea. 

Mexico. 

Muscovy. 

Naples. 

Normandy. 

Norway. 

Palestine. 

the Netherlands. 

Piedmont. 

Peru. 

Persia. 

Poland. 

Prussia. 

Russia. 

Sardinia. 

Savoy. 

Saxony. 

Sicily. 

Sweden. 

Switzerland. 

Syria. 

Turkey. 

"Wurtemberg. 



Nations. 



6. 



Nations. 



Un Africain, 
Un Algerien, 
Un Allemand, 
Un Americain, 
Un Anglais, 
Un Arabe, 
Un Asiatique, 
Un Autrichien, 
Un Bavarois, 
Un Beige, 
Un Bohemien, 
Un Bresilien, 
Un Breton, 
Un Canadien, 
Un Castillan, 
Un Chilien, 
Un Chinois, 
Un Corse, 
Un Danois^ 



an African. 

an Alger ine. 

a German. 

an American. 

an Englishman. 

an Arab. 

an Asiatic. 

an Austrian. 

a Bavarian. 

a Belgian. 

a Bohemian. 

a Brazilian. 

a Breton. 

a Canadian. 

a Castihan. 

a Chilian. 

a Chinese. 

a Corsican. 

a Dane. 



Un ]&cossais, 
Un Egyptien, 
Un Europeen, 
Un Francais, 
Un Gallois, 
Un Gaulois, 
Un Grec, 
Un Hanoverien, 
Un Helvetien, 
Un HongTois, 
Un Indien, 
Un Irlandais, 
Un Islandais, 
Un Japonais, 
Un Juif, 
Un Mexicain, 
Un Moscovite, 
Un Napohtain, 
Un Normand, 



a Scotchman. 

an Egyptian. 

a European. 

a Frenchman. 

a Welch man. 

a Gaul. 

a Greek. 

a Hanoverian. 

a Helvetian^ 

a Hungarian. 

an Indian. 

an Irishman. 

an Icelander. 

a Japanese. 

a Jew. 

a Mexican. 

a Muscovite. 

a Neapolitan. 

a Norman, 



FOE COMPOSING FRENCH 



2YS 



Fn N"orvegien, 
Un Parisien, 
Un Peruvien, 
Un Persan, 
Un Piemontais, 
Un Polonais, 
Un Prussien, 
Un Russe, 
Un Sard©. 



a Norwegian. 

a Parisian. 

a Peruvian. 

a Persian. 

, Piedmontese. 

a Pole. 

a Prussian. 

a Russian. 

a Sardinian. 



Un Savoyard, 
Un Saxon, 
Un Sicilien, 
Un Suedois, 
Un Suisse, 
Un Syrien, 
Un Turc, 

Un "Wurtembergeoia 



a Savoyard. 

a Saxon. 

a Sicilian. 

a Swede. 

a Swiss. 

a Syrian. 

a Turk. 

[ a Wurtem' 

[ bergian. 



Peofessions et Metiers. 



7. 



Un acteur, 
Un apothicaire, 
Un artiste, 
Un aumonier, 
Un auteur, 
Un avocat, 
Un avoue, 
Un banquier, 
Un barbier, 
Un berger, 
Un bijoutier, 
Une blanchisseuse, 
Un bottler, 
Un boucher, 
Un boulanger, 
Un brasseur, 
Une brodeuse, 
Un carrossier, 
Un chapelier, 
Un charbonnier 
Un charcutier 
Un charlatan, 
Un charretier, 
Un charron, 
Un chaudronnier, 
Un chirurgien, 
Un cordier, 
Un cordonnier, 
Un corroyeur, 
Un coutelier, 
Une couturiere, 
Un couvreur, 
Un cure, 
Un dentiste, 
Un drapier, 
Un ebeniste, 
Un ecclesiastique, 
Un epicier, 
Un eveque, 
Un faucheur, 
Un fermier, 
Un fripier, 
Une fruitier©, 



an actor. 

an apothecary. 

an artist. 

a chaplain. 

an author. 

a barrister. 

an attorney. 

a banker. 

a barber. 

a shepherd. 

a jeweller. 

a washerwoman. 

a bootmaker. 

a butcher. 

a baker. 

a brewer. 

an embroiderer. 

a coachmaker. 

a hatter. 

a coal-man. 

a pork butcher. 

a quack. 

a cartman. 

I waggonmaker. 

a coppersmith. 

a surgeon. 

a ropemaker. 

a shoemaker. 

a currier. 

a cutler. 

a seamstress. 

a slater, tiler. 

a vicar. 

a dentist. 

a draper. 

a cabinetmaker. 

a clergyman. 

a grocer. 

a bishop. 

a mower. 

a farmer. 

a fripperer, 

a fruit- woman. 



Professions and Trades. 

Un gantier, a glover. 

Un graveur, an engraver. 

Un horloger, a clock or watchmaker. 
Un instituteur, a schoolmaster. 

Une institutrice, a schoolmistress. 
Un imprimeur, a printer. 

Un jardinier, a gardener. 

Uh joaillier, a jeweller. 

Un libraire, a bookseller. 

Un macon, a mason, a bricklayer. 
Un maitre d'ecole, a schoolmaster. 
Un manouvrier, a day-laborer. 

Un marchand de chevaux, j a horse- 
Un maquignon, ] dealer. 

Unmarechalferrant, \ ^^^^"^^' ^.^°^- 
mg-smith. 

, blacksmith. 

a physician. 

a joiner. 

a reaper. 

a musician. 

a naturalist. 

a merchant. 

an optician. 

an orator. 



Un marechal, 

Un medecin, 

Un menuisier, 

Un moissonneur, 

Un musicien, 

Un naturaliste, 

Un negociant, 

Un opticien, 

Un orateur, 

Un orfcvre, a gold and sUver smith. 

Le pape, the pope. 

Un parfumeur, a perfumer. 

Un patre, a shepherd, herdsman. 



Un peintre, 
Un perruquier, 
Un philosophe, 
Un poissonnier, 
Une poissonniere, 
Un predicateur, 
Un pretre, 
Un rafifineur de 
Sucre, de sel, 
Un ramoneur 
de cheminees, 
Un relieur, 
Un savetier, 
Un sculpteur, 



a pamter. 
a hairdresser. 
a philosopher. 

a fishmonger. 

a preacher, 
a priest. 

a sugar, salt refiner. 

a chimney-sweeper. 

a bookbinder. 

a cobbler. 

a sculptor. 



274 



LISTS OP WORDS 



TTn sellier, 
Un serrurier, 
Un tailleur, 
Un tapissier, 
Un teinturier, 



a saddler. 

a locksmith. 

a tailor, 

an upholsterer. 

a dyer. 



Un tisserand, 
Un tonnelier, 
Un tourneur, 
Un vitrier, 
Un voiturier, 



L'HOMME. 



Les ancetres, the ancestors. 

Un arriere-petit-fils, | ^ g^^e^^t-grand- 

Un beau-fils, a son-in-law, step-son. 
Un beau-frere, a brother-in-law. 

TT v, , A-^ (a father-in-law, 

Unbeau-pere, j step-father.' 

( a daughter-in-law, 

( step-daughter. 

j a mother-in-law, 

( step-mother. 

a sister-in-law. 

a great-grandfather. 

a daughter-in-law. 

the cousin. 



Une beUe-fiUe, 



Une belle-mere, 

Une belle-soeur, 

Un bisaieul, 

Une bru, 

Le coushi, ) 

La cousine, ) 

Le cousin germain, ) the first 

La cousine germaine, ) cousin. 

Les descendants, the descendants. 

L'enfance, childhood. 

Un epoux, ) 

Une epouse, ) 

Une famille, a family. 

Une femme, a woman, wife. 

Les fiangailles, /. p. betrothing. 

Le fiance, la fiancee, the betrothed. 

Une fille, a girl, a daughter. 



a consort. 



a weaver. 
a cooper. 
a turner, 
a glazier. 
a cartman. 



8. 



Man. 



Unfils, 
Le futur, 
La future, 
Un gendre, 
Un grand-pere, 
Une grand'mere, 
Un jeune homme, 

Une jeune fille, -j 

La jeunesse, 



a son. 

the bridegroom. 

the biide. 

a son-in-law. 

a grandfather. 

a grandmother. 

a young man. 

a young woman, 

girl. 

youth. 



Un jumeau, une jumelle, a twin. 



Un mari, 

Une marraine, 

La naissance, 

Une nourrice, 

Un nouveau marie, 

Une nouvelle mariee, 

L'oncle, 

Un orphelin, ) 

Une orphehne, ) 

Un parrain, 

Un petit-fils, 

Une petite-fille, 

La tante, 

Un veuf, 

Une veuve, 

La vieillesse, 



a husband. 

a godmother. 

the birth. 

a nurse. 

a bridegroom. 

a bride. 

the uncle. 



an orphan. 

a godfather. 

a grand-son, 

a grand-daughter. 

the aunt. 

a widower. 

a widow. 

old age. 



Le Corps Hijmain. 



9. 



The Human Bodt. 



Une artere, 
La barbe, 
La bouche, 
Le bras, 
Le cervelle, 
La chair, 
Les cils, 
Le coeur, 
Le corps, 
Le cote, 
Une cote, 
Le cou, 
Le coude, 
Le crane, 
La cuisse, 
Le doigt, 
Le dos, 



an artery. 

the beard. 

the mouth. 

the arm. 

the brain. 

thg flesh. 

the eyelashes. 

the heart. 

the body. 

the side. 

a rib. 

the neck. 

the elbow. 

the skuU. 

the thigh. 

the finger. 

the back. 



L'epaule, 
L'6pine (du dos), 
Les favoris, 
Le foie, 
Le front, 
Les gencives, 
Le genou. 
La gorge, 
Les hanches, 
La jambe, 
La joue, 
La langue, 
La levre, 
Un membre, 
Le menton, 
La moelle, 
Une moustache, 



the shoulder. 

the spine. 

the whiskers. 

the liver. 

the forehead. 

the gums. 

the knee. 

the throat. 

the hips. 

the leg. 

the cheek. 

the tongue. 

the lip. 

a limb. 

the chin. 

the marrow. 

a mouitache. 



FOR COMPOSING FRENCH. 



575 



Tin muscle, 

Un nerf, 

Le nez, 

Un ongle 

Un orteil, ) 

Un doigt du pied, ) 

Un OS, 

L'ouie, 

Le palais, 

La paupiere, 

La peau, 

Le pouce, 

Les poumons, 



a muscle. 

a nerve. 

the nose. 

a nail. 

a toe. 

a bone 

the hearing. 

the palate 

the eyelid. 

the skin. 

the thumb. 

the lungs. 



La prunelle, the pupil of the eye. 



La rate, 
Les reins, 
Le sang, 
Le sein, 
Les sourcils, 
Un squelette 
Le talon, 
Le teint, 
Les tempes, 
La tete, 
Un trait, 
Une veine, 
Le visage, 
La vue. 



the spleen. 

the loins.. 

the blood. 

the bosom. 

the eyebrows. 

a skeleton. 

the heel. 

the complexion. 

the temples. 

the head. 

a feature. 

a vein. 

the face. 

the sight. 



Maladies, Infirmit:6s, etc. 10. Maladies, iNFiRMmES, etc. 



Une attaque, 
Du baume, 
Le begaiement, 
Une blessure, 
La cecite, 
Un chancre, 
Une cicatrice, 
La colique, 
Une contusion. 
La crampe, > 
Une dislocation, 
Un emetique, 
Une enfture, 
Un enrouement, 
Une entorse, 
L'epilepsie, 
Un evanouissement. 
La fievre, 

La fievre nerveuse. 
La fievre scarlatine, 



an attack, fit. 

balsam. 

stammering. 

a wound. 

blindness, 

a cancer. 

a scar. 

colic. 

a bruise. 

cramp. 

a dislocation, 

an emetic. 

a swelling. 

a hoarseness. 

a sprain. 

epilepsy, 

fainting. 

fever. 

nervous fever. 

scarlet fever. 



La goutte, gout. 

Une guerison, a cure. 

L'hydropisie, dropsy. 

Une indisposition, an indisposition. 

Louche, adj. squinting. 

Un malaise, an mdisposition. 

La migraine, the head-ache. 

Le mutisme, dumbness. 
De I'onguent, m. pommade, f. salve. 

Une ordonnance, a prescription. 



La petite-verole, 
La pulmonie, 
Un remede, 
Un rhume. 
La rougeole, 
Une saignee, 
La surdite, 
Une toux, 
Un ulcere, 
Un vertigo. 



the small-pox. 

consumption. 

a remedy, 

a cold. 

the measles. 

a bleeding. 

deafness. 

a cough. 

an ulcer. 

dizziness. 



Habillements. 11. 

Une agrafe, a clasp. 

Une aiguille, a needle. 

Une aiguille de cheveux, a hair-pin. 

Une bague, a ring. 

Bes bas, stockings. 

Du basin, dimity. 

De la batiste, cambric. 

De la bijouterie, jewelry. 

Un bonnet, a cap. 

Une boucle, a buckle. 

Une boucle, a lock of hair, curl. 

Des boucles d'oreilles, ear-rings. 

Une bourse, a purse. 

Uu bracelet, a bracelet. 

Des bretelles, braces, suspenders. 



Articles op Dress. 



Un© brosse. 



a brush. 



Une brosse a dents, 
Un calegon, m. s. 
Une ceinture, a i 
Des chaussons, 
Du cirage, 
Des ciseaux, 
Une coiffure, 
Un collet, 
Un collier, 
Du coton, 
Une cravate, 
Du crepe, 
De la dentelle, 
Un diamant, 
De la doublure, 
Uu Serin, 



a tooth-brush. 

drawers. 

ish, belt, band. 

socks. 

blacking. 



a head-dress. 

a collar. 

a necklace. 

cotton. 

a cravat. 

crape. 



a diamond. 

lining. 

jewel-boXi 



276 


LISTS OP WORDS. 




Une epee, 


a sword. 


Un parapluie. 


an umbrella. 


Des eperons, 


spurs. 


Un parasol, 


a parasol. 


Une epingle, 


a pin. 


Un peigne, 


a comb. 


Uu etui, m. 
Un eventail, 


a needle-casG. 
a fan. 


Des pendants-d'oreiUes, ] ^^^d^nts' 


Un flacon, 


a smelling-bottle. 


Une perle. 


a peavl. 


La fourrure, 


the fur. 


Une poche. 


a pocket 


Un frac, 


a dress coat. 


De la pommade, 


pomatum. 


La frange, 


the fringe. 


LTne red in go te, 


a great coat. 


La garniture, 


the trimming. 


Une robe. 


a dress, robe. 


Un gilet, 
Du grenat, 


a vest, waistcoat, 
garnet. 


tJnerobedecbambre, {'^^ 


Des guetres, 


gaiters. 


Du satin. 


satin. 


Uu habit, 


a coat. 


De la sole, 


silk. 


De I'ivoire, 


ivory. 


Un Soulier, 


a shoe. 


Du linge, 


linen. 


Un tablier, 


an apron. 


Des lunettes. 


spectacles. 


Du taffetas, 


talfeta. 


La manche, 


the sleeve. 


Du velours, 


velvet. 


De la mousseline, 


muslin. 


Une veste, 


a vest. 


Un pantalon, m. 


sing, pantaloons. 


Un voile, 


a veil 


La Ville, la 


Maisojt, etc. 12. Town, House, eto. 


Une antichambre 


an antechamber. 


Une ecurie, 


a stable. 


Une ardoise, 


a slate. 


Les environs, •] 


the environs, neigh- 


Un arsenal, 


an arsenal. 


borhood. 


Un bane, 


a bench, seat. 


Un escalier. 


stairs. 


Une barriere, 


a gate. 


Un etage, 


a story, a floor. 


La bibliotheque, 


the library. 


Un faubourg. 


a suburb. 


Un bourg, a borough, small town. 


Une fenetre, 


a window. 


La bourse, 


the exchange. 


Une ferme. 


a farm. 


Une brique, 


a brick. 


Une fontaine, 


a fountain, well. 


La capitale, 


the capital city, 
metropolis. 


Un four. 


an oven. 


La gouttiere, 


the gutter. 


Un carillon, 


a chime of bells. 


Un grand chemin 


' (• a highway. 


Une caserne, 


a barrack. 


Une grand'route, 


Une cave, 


a cellar. 


Une grange, 


a bam. 


Une chambre, 


a chamber, room. 


Un grenier, 


a garret. 


Une chambre a coucher, a bedroom. 


Une haie, 


a hedge. 


Une chapelle. 


a chapel. 


Un hameau, 


a hamlet. 


Un chateau, a country-house, villa. 


Un hopital, 


an hospital. 


Une chaumiere, 
De la chaux, 


a hut, cottage, 
lime. 


L'h6tel de viUe, 


the guildhall, city- 
hall, town-hall. 


Une cheminee, 


a chimney. 


Un meuble. 


1 piece of furniture. 


Un cimetiere, • 


a burying-ground. 


Des meubles, 


furniture. 


church-yard. 


La monnaie, 


the mint. 


Une cloche, 


a bell. 


Un mur, 
Une muraille, 


a wall. 


Une cloche d'eglise, a church-bell. 


Un clocher. 


a church-steeple. 


Un palais, 


a palace. 


Une clochette, 


a small bell. 


Une paroisse. 


a parish. 


Un cloitre, 


a cloister. 


Le pave, 


the pavement. 


Une cour. 


a yard, court. 


Une pepiniere. 


a nursery of trees. 


Un convent, 


a convent. 


Une persienne, a blind, open shutters. 


Une cuisine, 


a kitchen. 


Un plafond, 


a ceiling. 


La donaue, 


the custom-house. 


Une planche, 


aboard. 



FOB COMPOSING PEENOH. 



211 



Le plancher, 
Un poele, 
Une pompe, 
Un pont, 
Une porte, 



the floor. 

a stove. 

a pump. 

a bridge. 

a door, gate. 



a meadow. 



La poste, the post, post-ofQce. 

Une poutre, a beam. 

Une prairie, ) 
Un pre, ) 

Une prison, ; a prison. 

Un puits, a well. 

Un quartier, a quarter. 

Une rampe, ) j a balustrade of a 

d'escalier ) ( staircase. 
Un rez-de-ehaussee, a ground-floor. 
La sacristie, the vestrj. 

Une salle, a parlor, sitting-room. 



Une salle eL manger, a dining-room. 
Ui salon, a drawing-room, halL 

Uue serre, a conservatory. 

Une serre-chaude, a hot-house. 

Une serrure, a lock. 

Une sonnette, a bell. 



Un theatre, 


a theatre. 


Un toit. 


a roof. 


Une tour, 


a tower. 


Une tuile, 


a tne. 


Un verger. 


an orchard. 


Un verrou, 


a bolt. 


Un vestibule, 


a hall, entrv. 



La vigne, le vignoble, the vineyard. 
Un village, a village. 

Un volet, a window-shutter. 

Une voute, a vault. 



Meubles, etc. 



13. 



a match. 

a Mction-match. 

tinder. 

a cup-board. 

a plate. 

a cask, barrel. 

a bowl, washbowl. 

a warming-pan. 

a cradle. 

a tinder-box. 

a taper. 

a kettle. 

a fire-steel. 

a frame. 

a coffee-pot. 

a chandelier. 

a saucepan. 

a box, casket. 

a candle. 

Du charbon de bois, charcoal 

Du charbon de terre, stone-coal. 
Une chaudiere, a boiler. 

Un coffre, a chest. 

Une commode, a chest of drawers. 
Une corbeille, a basket. 

Un couteau, a knife. 

Un crible, a sieve. 

Une cruche, a pitcher. 

Une cuiller,or cuill^re, a spoon. 
Un cuvier, a tub. 

Un drap, a sheet. 

Une ecumoire, a skimmer. 

Un entonnoir, a funnel. 

XJn essuie-main, a towel. 



Une allumette, 
Une allumette i 
chimique, ] 
De I'amadou, 
Une armoire, 
Une assiette, 
Un baril, 
Un bassin, 
Une baseinoire, 
Un berceau, 
Une boite £i fusil, 
Une bougie, 
Une bouilloire, 
Un briquet, 
Un cadre, 
Une cafetiere, 
Un caadelabre, 
Une casserole, 
Une cassette, 
Une chandelle, 



Un fer a repasser, a smoothing iron. 

Une fourchette, a fork. 

Un fourgon, a poker. 

Un foyer, a hearth. 

Une lampe, a lamp. 

Une lanterne, a lantern, 

Un Ut, a bed. 

Un Ht de plume, a feather bed. 

Une lumiere, a light 

Un lustre, a sconce. 

Un marchepied, a footstooU 

Un mortier, a mortar. 

Les mouchettes, the snufiera, 

Un moutardier, a mustard-pot, 

Une nappe, a tablecloth, 

Un oreUler, a pillow. 

Un panier, a basket. 

Un paravent, a screen- 
Une peinture, a painting, a pictiire. 

Uue pelle, a shoveL 

Une pierre a fusil, a flint» 

Les pincettes, the tongs. 

Une poele, a frying-pan. 

La poivriere, the pepper-box, 

Un pot, a kettle. 

Un pupitre, a desk. 

Une saliere, a saltcellar. 

Du savon, soap. 

Un seau, a paiL 

Une serviette, a napkin. 

Un sofa, a sofa. 

Une soucoupe, a saucer. 

Un soufflet, bellows; 

Une soupiere, ^ soup-tureen, 

Ua suciier, a sugar-dish. 



278 


LISTS OF WORDS 




Tine table, 


a table. 


Un tire-bouchon, 


a cork-screw. 


Un tableau, 


a picture. 


Un tiroir, 


a drawer. 


Une tablette, 


a shelf. 


Un traversin, 


a bolster. 


Un tapis, 
Une tasse, 


a carpet 
a tea-cup. 


Des ustensiles de 
cuisme. 


kitchen utensils. 


Une theiere, 


a tea-pot. 


Un verre, 


a glass. 


Plats, 


ETC. 14. Dishes, 


etc. 


Duboeuf; 


beef. 


Une omelette, 


an omelet. 


Du bouilli, boiled beef, boiled meat. 


Un pate, 


a pie. 


Bu bouillon, 


broth. 


Une perdrix, 


a patridges. 


Une caille, 


a quail. 


Du pore, 


pork. 


Un canard, 


a duck. 


Du poulet. 


chicken. 


Des confitures, f. p. 


preserves. 


Des rafraichissements, refreshments. 


Une cotelette, 


a cutlet. 


Du roti. 


roast meat 


Un dindon, 


a turkej. 


Une saucisse, 


a sausage. 


Un gigot de mouton, 


a leg of mutton. 


De la soupe, 


soup. 


Un jambon, 


ham. 


De la soupe maigre, 


vegetable soup. 


Un la pin, 


a rabbit. 


Une tarte. 


a tart. 


Un lievre, 


a hare. 


Du veau, 


veaL 


Du mouton, 


mutton. 


Du vermicelle, 


vermicelle. 


Unoeu^ 


an egg. 


De la volaille. 


fowL 


LEGUMES, Grain, etc. 1, 


5. Yegetabt,es, Grain, etc. 


De Tail, m., pL aulx 


or aux, garlic. 


Du millet, 


millet. 


Des asperges, 


asparagus. 


Des navets. 


turnips. 


De I'avoine, 


oats. 


Des ognons, 


onions. 


Une betterave, 


a beet 


De I'orge, 


barley. 


Du ble, 


wheat 


De loseille, 


sorreL 


Une carrotte, 


a carrot. 


Un panais. 


a parsnip. 


Du celeri, 


celery. 


Du persil, 


parsley. 


Du cerfeuil, 


chervil. 


Une plante, 


a plant 


Un champignon, 


a mushroom. 


Des pois, 


peas. 


Un chou, 


a cabbage. 


Une pomme de terre, a potato. 


Un choufleur, 


a cauliflower. 


Une racine, 


a root 


Un concombre. 


a cucumber. 


Un radis, a 


radish (tumip). 


Du cressoD, 


cress. 


Du raifort, 


horse-radish. 


Des epinards, 


spmage. 


Une rave, 


a radish (long). 


Des feves, 


beans. 


Du riz. 


rice. 


Un grain, 


a kernel 


De la salade, 


salad. « 


Une herbe, 


an herb. 


De la sauge, 


saga 


De la laitue. 


lettuce. 


Du seigle. 


rye. 


Des lentilles, 


lentils. 


Du thym, 


thyme. 


Du mais, 


maize. 


Une trufie, 


a truffle. 


Arbres Fruitiees, Fruits. 1( 


3. Fruit Trees, 


Fruits. 


Un abricot, 


an apricot. 


Un chataignier, 


a chestnut-tree. 


Un abricotier, 


an apricot-tree. 


Un citron. 


a citron, lemon. 


Une amande, 


an almond. 


Un citronnier, 


a lemon-tree. 


Ua amandier, 


an almond-tree. 


Un coing. 


a quince. 


Un ananas, 


a pineapple. 


Une datte, 


a date. 


Une aveline, 


a filbert. 


Une figue, 


a fig. 


Uae cMtaigne, 


a chesluut 


Un figuier, 


a fig-tree. 



FOR COMPOSING FRENCH, 


279 


TTne fraise, 


a strawberry. 


Une orange, 


an orange. 


TJne framboise, 


a raspberry. 


Un oranger, 


an orange-tree. 


Un framboisier, a 


raspberry-bush. 


Une pavie, a clingstone peach. 


Une groseille, a gooseberry, currant. 


Une peche, 


a peach. 


Ungrosemer,|---^-«— 


Un pecher, 
Une poire. 


a peach-tree, 
a pear. 


Un melon, 


a melon. 


Un poirier. 


a pear-tree. 


Une mure, 


a mulberry. 


■ Une pomme, 


an apple. 


Un murier, a mulberry-tree. 


Un pommier, 


an apple-tree. 


Une nefle. 


a medlar. 


Une prune. 


a plum. 


Une noisette, 


a hazel-nut. 


Un prunier, 


a plum-tree. 


Une noix, 


a nut. 


Du raisin. 


grapes. 


Un noyer, 


a nut-tree. 


Une vigne, 


a grape vme. 


Arbres Foeestiers. 17. EoREST Trees. 


Un bouleau, 


a birch. 


Un orme, 


an elm. 


Un buisson, 


a bush. 


Un peuplier, 


a poplar. 


Un chene. 


an oak. 


Un rameau, 


a bough. 


L'ecorce, 


the bark. 


Un sapin, 


a pine. 


Un erable, 


a maple. 


Un saule, 


a willow. 


Un frene. 


an ash. 


Un tilleul, 


a linden-tree. 


Un hetre, 


a beech. 


Un tremble, 


an aspen. 


Un melese, 


a larch. 


Un tronc, 


a trunk. 


Fleues, 


ETC. 1 


5. Flowers, 


ETC. 


Une auricule, 


an auricula. 


Un oeillet, 


a pink. 


Un chardon, 


a thistle. 


Une ortie, 


a nettle. 


Du chevre-feuille, 


honeysuckle. 


Un pavot. 


a poppy. 


Une giroflee, 


a gillyflower. 


Une pensce, a forget-me-not. 


Une jacinthe, 


a hyacinth. 


Un pied d'alouette, 


a larkspur. 


Du jasmin, 


jessamine. 


Une primevere, 


a cowslip. 


Un lis, 


a lily. 


Une rose, 


a rose. 


Une marguerite, 


a daisy. 


Un tournesol, 


a sunflower. 


Une mauvaise herbe 


, a weed. 


Une tulipe, 


a tulip. 


Un myrte, 


a myrtle. 


Une violette, 


a violet 


Oiseaux. 1 


J. Birds. 


Un aigle, 


an eagle. 


Un corbeau, 


a raven. 


Une aile, 


a wing. 


Une corneille, 


a crow. 


Une alouette, 


a lark. 


Un coucou, 


a cuckoo. 


Un autour. 


a hawk. 


Un cygne. 


a swan. 


Une autruche, 


an ostrich. 


Un dindon, 


a turkey. 


Le bee, 


the beak. 


Un faisan. 


a pheasant. 


Une becasse. 


a woodcock. 


Un geai. 


a jackdaw. 


Une becassine. 


a snipe. 


Une grive, 


a thrush. 


Une bergeronnette, 


a wagtail. 


Un heron, .. 


a heron. 


Une caille, 


a quail. 


Une hirondelle, 


a swallow. 


Un canard. 


a duck. 


Une linotte. 


a linnet. 


Un canari, 


a canary-bird. 


Un merle. 


a blackbird. 


Un cliardonneret, 


a goldfinch. 


Une oie, 


a goose. 


Une chauve-souris, 


a bat. 


Un oiseau de proie, 


a bird of prey. 


Une cigogne, 


a stork. 


Un paon, 


a peacock. 


XJne ealorabe, 


a dove. 


Ua passereau, 


a sparrow. 



280 



LISTS OP WOEpS. 



Tin perroquet, 
TJne perdrix, 
Une pie, 
Un pigeon, 
Une poule, 
Un poulet, 



a parrot. 

I partridge. 

a magpie. 

a pigeon. 

a hen. 

a chicken. 



Un roitelet, 
Un rossignol, 
Un rouge-gorge, 
Un serin, 
Une tourterelle, 
Un vautour, 



a wren. 

a nightingale. 

a redbreast. 

a canary-bird. 

a turtle-dove, 

a vulture. 



QUADEUP^DES. 



20. 



Quadrupeds. 



Un agneau, 
Un blaireau, 
Un castor, 
Un cerf, (cer) 
Un chamois, 
Une chevre, 
Un chevreuil, 
Un ecureuil, 
Un furet, 
Un herisson, 
Un lapin. 



a lamb. 

a badger. 

a beaver. 

a stag. 

a chamois. 

a goat. 

a roebuck. 

a squirrel. 

a ferret. 

a hedgehog. 

a rabbit. 



Un lievre, 
Un lion, 
Un loup, 
Une mule, 
Un ours, 
Un poulain, 
Un pourceau, 
Un renard, 
Un singe, 
Une taupe, 
Un tigre, 



a hare. 

a lion. 

a woK 

a mula 

a bear 

a colt. 

a hog, swine. 

a fox. 

a monkey. 

a mole. 

a tiger. 



POISSONS. 



21. 



Fishes. 



Une anguille, 
Une baleine, 
Un brochet, 
Une carpe, 
Une chevrette, 
Une ecrevisse, 
Un esturgeon, 
Un hareng, 
Un hareng saur, 
Un homard, 



an eel. 

a whale. 

a pike. 

a carp. 

a shrimp. 

a crawfish. 

a sturgeon. 

a herring. 

red herring. 

a lobster. 



Un merlan, 
Une morue, 
Une perche, 
Un requin, 
Un saumon, 
Une sole, 
Une tanche, 
Une'tortue, 
Une truite, 
Un turbot, 



a whiting. 

a codfish. 

a perch. 

a shark. 

a salmon. 

a sole. 

a tench. 

a turtle. 

a trout. 

a turbot. 



Insectes, etc. 



22. 



Insects, etc. 



Une abeille, 
Une araignee, 
Une chenille, 
Une cigale, 
Une couleuvre, 
Un cousin,. 
Un crapaud, 
Un escarbot, 
Une fourmi, 
Une grenouiUe, 
Un grillon, 
Une guepe, 



a bee. 

a spider. 

a caterpillar. 

grasshopper. 

an adder. 

a gnat. 

a toad. 

a beetle. 

an ant. 

a frog. 

a cricket. 

a wasp. 



Un lezard, 
Un limagon, 
Une mouche, 
Un papillon, 
Une puce, 
Une punaise, 
Une sangsue, 
Une sauterelle, 
Un serpent, 
Une teigne, 
Un ver, 
Une vipere, 



a lizard. 

a snail. 

a fly. 

a butterfly. 

a flea. 

a bug. 

a leech. 

a locust. 

a serpent. 

a moth. 

a worm. 

a viper. 



OUTILS, ET(f. 

Une alene, 
Les balances, 
Une beche, 
Une brosse, 
Une brouette, 
Un cached 



23. 



Tools, etc. 



an awl. 

scales. 

a spade. 

a brush. 

a wheelbarrow. 

a seal 



Une carabine, 
Une charrue, 
Un chevalet, 
De la cire, 
Une cognee, 
Dq la colk^ 



a rifle. 

a plough. 

an easeL 

wax. 

a hatchet 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



281 



TTn compas, 


compasses. 


Un marteau, 


a hammer. 


Un echafaudage, 


a scaflfold. 


Une meule, 


a grindstone. 


Une echelle, 


a ladder. 


Un pain a cacheter, 


a wafer. 


line enclume, 


an anvil. 


Une pelle, 


a shovel. 


Un etau, 


a vice. 


Une pince, 


a crowbar. 


Une faucille, 


a sickle. 


Un pinceau, 


a brush, pencil. 


Une faux, 


a scythe. 


Une poulie, 


a pulley. 


Un fleau, 


a flaU. 


Un rabot, 


a plane. 


Un fusil, 


a gun. 


Un rouleau, 


a roller. 


Une hache, 


an axe. 


Une sabliere, 


a sand-box. 


Un hamegon, 


a fishhook. 


Une scie, 


a saw. 


Une herse, 


a harrow. 


Une serrure, 


a lock. 


Une houe, 


a hoe. 


Des tenailles, 


pincers. 


Une ligne, 


a line. 


Une truelle, 


a trowel. 


Une lime, 


a file. 


Une vis, 


a screw 



ABREVIATIONS. 

A. P. A protester. 

A. S. P. Accepte sous protet. 

A. S. P. C. Accepte sous protet, pour 

a-compte. 
B""- Baron. 
C'^''- Chevalier. 
C'«- Comte. 
Qtesae. Comptesse. 
D""- Docteur. 

j)r. j^n. Docteur-medecin. 
E. Est. 

J.-C, Jesus-Christ. 
LL. AA. II. Leulrs Altesses Impe- 

riales. 
LL. AA. RR. Leurs Altesses Eoya- 

les. 
LL. AA. SS. Leurs Altesses Sere- 

nissimes. 
LL. Em. Leurs ^fimindnces. 
LL. Ex. Leurs Excellences. 
LL. HH. Leurs Hautesses. 
LL. MM. Leurs Majestes. 
LL. MM. II. Leurs Majestes Impe- 

riales. 
LL. MM. RR. Leurs Majestes Roya- 

les. 
M. ou M""- Monsieur. 
M^- ou M''"e- Maitre. 
M. A. Maison assuree. 
M. A. C. I. Maison assuree centre 

I'incendie. 
M.^- Marchand. 
M<^9. Marohande. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

To he protested. 

Accejjied under protest. 

Accepted under protest, on account 

Baron. 

Chevalier, hnighi, sir. 

Count. 



Doctor. 

Doctor of medicine. 

East. 

Jesus Christ. 

Their Imperial Highnesses, 

Their Royal Highnesses. 

Their Most Serene Highnesses. 

Their Eminences. 
Their Excellencies. 
Tfieir Highnesses. 
Their Majesties. 
Tlieir Imperial Majesties. 

Their Royal Majesties, 

Sir, Mr. 

Master. 

House insured. 

House insured against fir^ 

Dealer, shopkeeper, m« 
Dealer, shopkeeper^ t, 



282 



ABBEBVIATIONS. 



M"«- Mademoiselle. 

Ms^- Monseigneur. 

M'^- Marquis. 

jj;ise. Marquise. 

MM. Messieurs. 

M-^e- Madame. 

Mst. Manuscrit. 

N. B. Nota bene 

N. D. Notre-Dame. 

2Sr.-N.-E, Nord-nord-est. 

N.-N.-O. Nord-nord-ouest. 

N*- Negociant. 

N'«- Negociante. 

N°- Numero. 

N. S. Notre -Seigneur. 

N. S. J.-C. Notre-Seigneur Jesus- 
Christ. 

0. Quest. 

%" Pour cent. 

O.-N. Ouest-nord. 

O.-S. Ouest-sud. 

P. S. Post-scriptum. 

R. P. Reverend pere. 

S. Sud. 

S. A. I. Son Altesse Imperiale. 

S. A. R. Son Altesse Royale. 

S. A. S. Son Altesse Serenissime. 

S.-E. Sud-est. 

S. Em. Son Eminence. 

S. Ex. Son Excellence. 

S. Gr. Sa Grandeur. 

S. H. Sa Hautesse. 

S. M. Sa Majeste. 

S. M B. Sa Majeste Britannique. 

S, M. C. Sa Majeste Catholique. 

S. M. I. Sa Majeste Imperiale. 

S. M, R. Sa Majeste Royale. 

S. M. S. Sa Majeste Suedoise. 

S. M. T. C. Sa Majeste Tres Chre- 
tienne. 

S. M. T. P. Sa Majeste Tres Fidele. 

S.-O. Sud-ouest. 

S. P. Saint Pere. 

SS. PP. Les Saints Peres. 

S. S. Sa Saintete. 

S.-S.-E. Sud-sud-est. 

S.-S.-0. Sud-sud-ouest. 



Miss. 

My lord. 

Marquis. 

Marchioness. 

Messrs. Gentlemen, 

Madam. Mrs. 

Manuscript. 

Nota bene. 

Our Lady. 

North-north-east. 

North-north-west. 

Merchant, m. 

Merchant, £ 

Number. 

Our Lord. 

Our Lord Jesus Christ. 

West, 

Per cent. 

West-north. 

West-south. 

Postscript. 

Reverend father. 

South. 

His or Her Imperial Highness. 

His or Her Royal Highness. 

His Most Serene Highness. 

South-east. 

His Eminence. 

His Excellency. 

His Grace (to a Bishop). 

His Highness (the Turkish Emperor). 

His or Her Majesty. 

His or Her Britannic Majesty. 

His Catholic Majesty. 

His Imperial Majesty. 

His Royal Majesty. 

His Swedish Majesty. 

His Most Christian Majesty. 

His Most Faithful Majesty, 

South-west. 

Holy Father. 

The Holy Fathers. 

His Holiness. 

South-south-east. 

Southrsoutk-west, 



FASQUELLE'S 

NE¥ FRENCH COURSE. 

PAKT SECOKP. 

§ 1. — Pakts of Speech. 

(1.) There are, in French, ten sorts of words or parts of speech : 
Nouns or Substantives, Participles, 

Articles, Adverbs, 

Adjectives, Prepositions, 

Pronouns, Conjunctions, 

Verbs, Interjections. 

(2.) These are divided into variable, and invariable words. 
(3.) The variable words are those the termination of which ad- 
mits of various changes ; by these changes, various modifications of 
meaning are expressed. The variable words are of six kinds : 
The Noun, The Pronoun, 

The Article, The Yerb, 

The Adjective, The Participle. 

(4.) The invariable words are those the termination of which 
never changes : 

The Adverb, The Conjunction, 

The Preposition, The Interjection. 

(5.) All variable parts of speech have two numbers : the singulary 
which denotes but one, and the plural^ which denotes more than one. 
(6.) All variable parts of speech, except the verb, have two gen- 
ders ; the masculine and the feminine. 

§ 2. — Cases. 

The cases adopted by French grammarians are : 

(1.) The nominaiif ov sujet; answering to the nominative or sub- 
ject of the Enghsh, and to the nominative of the Latin. 

(2.) The regime direct, or direct object of the English, accusative 
of .the Latin. 

(3.) The regime indirect, indirect object of the English, answers to 
the oblique cases of the Latin, the genitive, dative, and ablative. 



284 GENDEE. — § 3, 4, 5. 

§ 3. — The ^NToun or Substantative. 

(1.) The noun or substantive is a word which serves to name a 
person or a thing; as Jean, John ; maison, house. 

(2.) There are two sorts of nouns : proper and common. 

(3.) A proper noun is appUed to a particular person, or thing ; as, 
Napoleon, Napoleon; Paris, Paris. 

(4.) A common noun belongs to a whole class of objects ; as, livre, 
hooTc ; homme, man. 

(5.) Some common nouns, although singular in number, present 
to the mind the idea of several persons or things, forming a collec- 
tion ; they are for this reason denominated collective nouns ; as, troupe, 
troop ; peuple, people. 

(6.) Collective nouns are general, or partitive ; general^ when they 
represent an entire collection ; as, I'armee des Francais, the army of 
the French : partitive, when they represent a partial collection ; as, 
une troupe de soldats francais, a troop of French soldiers. 

(7.) A common noun composed of several words, as, chef-d'oeuvre, 
masterpiece ; avant-coureur, forerunner^ is called a compound noun. 

(8.) Of the two properties of nouns, gender and number^ we shall 
commence with the first. 

§ 4. — Gender. 

(1.) There are in the French language, only two genders : the 
masculine and the feminine. 

(2.) The mascuhne belongs to men, and animals of the male kind, 
as, Charles, Charles ; lion, lion. 

(3.) The feminine gender belongs to women, and animals of the 
female kind ; as, Sophie, Sophia ; honne, lioness. 

(4.) Through imitation — often .on account of derivation, often 
"without any real motive — the mascuhne and feminine genders have 
been given, in French, to the names of inanimate objects ; thus, pa- 
pier, paper, is mascuhne, and plume, pen, is feminine. 

§ 5. ^RULES EOE DETERMINING GeNDER BY THE MeANING. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

(1.) Male beings; as, homme, (1.) Female beings: as, femme, 

man ; lion, lion. woman ; lionne, lioness. 

(2 ) Objects to which male (2.) Objects to which female 

qualities are attributed: ange, qualities are attributed: fee, /afr?// 

angel ; genie, genius (a spirit) ; lune, moon, 
solei], sun. (3.) Virtues : la charite, char- 

(3.) The names of the seasons : ity ; except courage, courage ; 

le printemps, the spring, etc. ; and merite, merit^ which are masc. 
of the months, Janvier, January ; (4.) Vices : la mechancete, wich- 

fevrier, February^ etc edness ; except I'orgueil, prid^ 

masc 



GENDEE 



§ 5. 



285 



Ifasculine. 
(4.) The days of the week: 
lundi, Monday; mardi, Tuesday, 
etc. 

(5.) The names of the cardinal 
points and the winds : as, Test, 
the East; I'ouest, the West, etc. 
[See exceptions opposite.] 

(6.) The names used in the 
French decimal system : as, cen- 
time (hundredth part of a franc); 
kilogramme (1000 grammes, about 
two pounds); metre, etc. 

(7.) Metals : le fer, iron; I'acier, 
steel, etc. 

(8.) Colors: le vert, green; le 
jaune, yellow. 

(9.) The names of empires and 
kingdoms when ending with a 
consonant : le Danemarc, Den- 
mark ; le Brcsil, Brazil. 

(10.) Mountains : le Jura, Mount 
Jura; le Puy-de-Dome/ the 
Puy de Dome ; le Cenis, le St. 
Bernard, Mount Cenis, Mount St. 
Bernard. 

(11.) The names of rivers when 
ending with a consonant : le Rhin, 
the Rhine ; le Nil, the Nile. 



(12.) Trees, shrubs : le chene, 
the oak ; le frene, the ash ; le rosier, 
the rose-bush. [Exceptions op- 
posite.] 

(13.) The name of a language : 
as, le francais, French; Talle- 
mand, German, etc. 

(14.) The letters of the alpha- 
bet : un a, an a ; un z, a z. 

(15.) Compound words formed 
of a verb and of a noun, either 
mascuhne or feminine, or of a 
prononn and a verb : porte-feuille, 
pocket-book; rendez-vous, rendez- 
vous. 



Feminine. 

(5.) Festivals : la Saint Jean, i.e. 
la fete de St. Jean, St. John's 
day ; la Chandeleur, Candlemas ; 
except Noel, Christmas, masc. 

Bise, a poetical term for North 
wind. Tramontane, a term, ap- 
plied on the Mediterranean to the 
North wind. Brise, breeze ; mous- 
sons, trade-winds. 



(6.) The names of countrieg 
when ending in e mute : la France, 
I'Espagne, I'Amerique, etc. 

ExG. Bengale, Hanovre, Me- 
xique, Peloponese. 

(7.) Chains of mountains in the 
plural : les Alpes, the Alps ; les 
Pyrenees, the Pyrenees ; les Yo- 
ges, les Cevennes, etc. 

(8.) The names of rivers when 
ending with e mute : la Seine, the 
Seine ; la Loire, the Loire. 

Exc. Le Rhone, the Rhone ; le 
Danube, le Tibre, le Cocyte, masc. 

(9.) Aubepine, hawthorn; bour- 
daine, black alder ; epine, thorn / 
hieble, dwarf-elder ; ronce, brier , 
yeuse, ilex. 



(10.) Garde-robe, wardrobe ; 
perce-neige, spring-crocus ; perce- 
feuiUe, hare's-ear. 



* The word Puy, from the Celtic puech, mountain, is applied to a nuin* 
ber of places ia France : Puy-en-Yelay ; Puy-notre-Dame, etc. 



286 GENDER, BY THE TEEMINATION. — § 6 



Masculine. 

(16.) Nouns, pronouns, verbs, 
etc., used substantively : le boire 
et le manger, eating and drinking. 

(17.) Numbers — cardinal, ordi- 
nal, and proportional — used sub- 
stantively : le dix, the tenth ; le 
neuvieme, the ninth ; le tiers, the 
third. [Exceptions opposite.] 



Feminine, 



(11.) Moitie, half; and all num- 
bers ending with aine ; douzaine, 
dozen; centaine, hundred, etc. 



§ 6. — Gendee, bt the teemin-ation. 

(1.) The exceptions to the mascuhne will be found opposite the 
termination, in the feminine column ; and the exceptions to the fem- 
inine, in the mascuhne column, also opposite. 





(2.) a 


onso 
B 


rtants. 


Masculine Terminations. 




Feminine Terminations. 


"ermin- Example. 


English. 


Termin- Example. English, 


ation. 






aXion. 


EB Horeb, 


Mount Horeh 






UB radoub, 


refitting a ship. 






MB plomb. 


lead. 


c 




AC sac, 


sack. 






EG bee, 


leak. 




^ 


10 mastic, 


putty. 






00 soc, 


ploughshare. 






uo d>ic, 


duke. 






NO tronc, 


trunk. 






RC clerc, 


clerk. 






so fisc. 


revenue. 


D 




ED pied. 


foot 






ID nid. 


nest 






CD tripod, 


tripod. 






UD Talmud, 


Talmud. 






ND marchand, 


merchant. 






ED bord, 


border. 


F 




EP chef, 


chief. 




Exc— clef, key; nef, ship. 


IT suif. 


taUow, 




nave ; soif, thirst. 


UF oeuf, 


egg- 






RF cerf, 


stag. 


G 




NG rang, 


rank. 








K 




CK arack, 


arrack. 







GBNDEE, BY THE TERMINATION. — § 6. 287 



Masculine Terminations. 



JF^minine Terminations. 



AL 


bal, 


baU. 


EL 


sei; 


salt 


IL 


soleil, 


sun. 


OL 


sol, 


soil. 


UL 


calcul, 


calculation. 


AM 


Adam, 


• 
Adam. 


EM 


harem, 


harem. 


IM 


daim, 


deer. 


OM 


nom, 


name. 


UM 


parfum, 


perfume. 


AN 


cadran, 


dial 


EN 


examen, 


examination. 


IN 


raisin, 


grape. 


ON 


not preceded by is or gi, 




si, ti, xi 


.. 




baton, 


stick. 




gazon. 


turf. 




jlason, 


blazon. 



M 



N 



bison, bison; horizon, ^o- 
rizon ; oison, gosling ; 
poison, poison ; tison, 
firebrand. 

bastion, bastion; bestion, 
figure-head of a ship. 



Exc. — faim, ^wn^rer/male- 
faim, excessive hunger. 



Exc. — fin, end; -mom^hand. 

Exc. — chanson, song; cuis- 
son, baking ; contre- 
facon, counterfeiting ; 
facon, mode ; moisson, 
harvest; moussonSj^rade- 
winds ; rancon, ransom. 



ISDN maison, 



house. 



[Exceptions opposite.] 

GioN region, region. 

siON pension, pension. 

TioN question, question. 

xioN reflexion, reflection. 



AP 
OP 
UP 


drap, 

galop, 

coup. 


cloth. 

gallop. 

blow. 


Q 

R 




OQ 


coq-d'Inde, turkey. 




AR 
ER 


char, 
fer, 


car. 
iron. 


Exc. — cuiller, spoon; mer, 


IR 


plaisir. 


pleasure. 




sea. 
chair, flesh. 



OR or, gold. 

UR not preceded by e 
azur, azure. 

bonheur, happiness ; coeur, 
heart ; choeur, chorus ; de- 
nominateur, denominator ; 
deshonneur,c^isAowor;equa- 
teur, equator; exteriem*, 



Exc. — ^tour, tower^ cour 
court. 
EUR chaleur, heat. 
hauteur, height. 
[Exceptions, opposite.] 



288 GENDER, BY THE TERMINATION. — 8 6, 



Masculine Terminations. 





exterior 


; honneur, honor; 




interieur, interior; labeur, 




labor ; 


raallieur, misfor- 




tune ; multiplicateur, mul- 




tiplier ; 


pleurs, tears; re- 




gulateur, regulator ; venti- 




lateur, ventilator. 


AS 


bras, 


arm. 


ts 


grds, 


sandstone. 


IS 


souris, 


smile. 


OS 


OS, 


hone. 


us 


blocus, 


hlockade. 


PS 


temps, 


weather. 


RS 


vers, 


verse. 


AT 


climat, 


climate. 


ET 


arret, 


arrest. 


IT 


lit, 


led. 


OT 


cachot. 


dungeon. 


UT 


bout. 


end. 


NT 


pont, 


bridge. 



E — Continued. 

Feminine Terminations. 
EUR — Continued. 

[Exceptions opposite.] 



Exo. 
amaiyllis, amaryllis ; bre- 
bis, sheep ; fois, time ; sou- 
ris, mouse; vis, screw; 
oasis, oasis. 



RT tort. 



wrong. 



X 



foret, 


forest. 


nuit, 


night. 


dot. 


dower. 



AS 
EX 


climax, 
silex, 


climaxA. 
silex. 




IX 


prix, 


price. 




ux 

NX 


courroux, 
lynx, 


anger, 
lynx. 


Z 


AZ 
EZ 


gaz, 
nez, 


gas. 
nose. 




IZ 
A 


riz, 
acacia. 


rice, 
acacia 


(3.) Vowels. 
A 



dent, tooth; gent, people; 

jument, mare. 

part, share ; la plupart, the 

most 



Exo. — croix, cross; noix, 
nut ; paix, peace ; voix, 
voice ; perdrix, par- 
tridge ; poix, pitch. 

Exc. — chaux, lime; faux, 
scythe; toux, cough. 



E 



Exc. — ^vinula, a sort of cat- 
erpillar ; sepia, sepia. 



A complete classification of nouns ending in e mute (a majority of 
wliich are feminine) would be, from its length, of little practical use to 
the student, who would find it easier to apply to his dictionary than to 
such list. W© will give here the principal terminations, classing them 



GENDER, BY THE TBEMINATION. — § 6. 289 



according to their gender, and placing the exceptions under the exam- 
ples given for the terminations, instead of putting them, as hitherto, 
in the opposite column. 

Feminine Terminations, 
ACE grace, grace. 

Exc. — espace, space, 
ADE parade, parade. 

Exc. — stade, stadium , 

grade, grade. 
haie, hedge. 

importance, importance. 



Masculine Terminations. 
ABE astrolabe, astroldb. 

Exc. — Souabe, Suahia ; 
syllabe, syllable. 
ACLE miracle, miracle. 

Exc. — debacle, breaking 
up of the ice ; made, a 
mineral. 
ACRE sacre, consecration. 

Exc. — nacre, mother of 
pearl 
AGE courage, courage. 

Exc. — image,ma5'e; rage, 

rage; page, page of a 

hooJc ; cage, cage; nage, 

swimming; -plage, beach. 

AIRE salaire, salary. 

Exc. — aflfaire, of air; aire, 
floor; glaire, white of 
egg ; grammaire, gram- 
mar ; paire, pair ; jug- 
ulaire, jugular-vein / 
haire, hair-cloth; chaire, 
pulpit ; serpentaire, 
snake-root ; parietaire, 
pelUtory ; and a few 
other names of plants. 
ARE hectare, hectare (a 
measure). 

cadastre, register. 

chaume, thatch. 

Exc. — paume, tennis. 

not immediately preceded 
by t or ti: abreg€, 
abridgment. 

college, college. 

Exc. — Norvege, Norway. 

careme, Lent. 

Exc. — creme, cream ; 
breme, bream ; bireme, 
trireme, galley with two 
or three rows of oars. 

pretre, priest. 

Exc. — fenetre, window ; 
guetre, gaiter. 



ASTRE 
AUME 



£ME 



ixRE 



EURRB 
IDRE 



beurre, 
cidre, 



butter, 
cider. 



AIE 

ANCE 
ANSE 
ASSE 



dause. 



dance. 



Par- 



EINE 
ENCE 



masse, mass. 

Exc. — Parnasse, 
nassus. 

nuee, cloud. 

Exc. — apogee, apogee; 
athee, atheist ; camee, 
cameo ; colisee, coli- 
seum ; coryphee, cory- 
pheus ; empyree, highest 
heaven ; lycee, lyceum ; 
mausolee, mausoleum ; 
musee, museum ; hy- 
menee, marriage; pe- 
rigee, perigee ; pygmee, 
pygmy; trochee, trochee ; 
trophee, trophy; spon- 
dee, spondee ; scarabee, 
scarabee. 

baleine, whale. 



Exc. — silence, silence. 
ENNE antienne, anthem. 

Exc. — renne, reindeer 
ENSE offense, offence. 
ESSE tristesse, sadness. 
IE charpie, lint. 

Exc. — genie, genius ; peri- 
hoWe, perihelion ; incen- 
die, conflagration ; para- 
pluie, umbrella; pavie, 
clingstone peach. 



ifeRE 


chaudiere, 


, boiler. 


INE 


doctrine, 


doctrine. 


IQUE 


pratique, 


practice. 


IVE 


rive, 


shore. 


ISSE 


coulisse. 


sliding -shutter. 


LLE 


paille. 


straw. 



13 



Exo. — inter valle, interval^ 



290 



GENDEE. — 5 7. 



ISQUE 



ISTE 



UGE 



Masculine Terminations. 
prisma, prism. 
risque, risk. 
Exc. — ^bisque, soup. 
ebeniste, cabinet-maJcer. 
Exc. — batiste, cambric ; 

liste, list ; piste, track. 
refuge, refuge. 



USTE arbuste, shrvb. 



PPE 
SSE 



TTE 



Feminine Terminations. 

libelle, libel ; vermicelle, 
vermicelli ; violoncelle, 
violoncello ; chevre- 

feuille, honey-suckle ; 
portefeuille, pocket-book; 
vaudeville, vaudeville. 

bosse, bunch. 

Exc. — colosse, colossus ', 
carrosse, coach. 

nappe, table-cloth. 

not preceded by u. 

terre, land. 

Exc. — ^lierre, ivy; parterre, 
flower-garden; tonnerre, 
thunder ; paratonnerre, 
lightning rod ; verre, 
glass. 

amitie, friendship. 

patte, paw. 

Exc. — amulette, amulet / 
squelette, skeleton. 



TJRE 

USE 
UYE 



cuve, 



excuse, 
tub. 



midi, noon. 

Exc. — foi, faith; fourmi, 
ant; apres-midi, after- 
noon ; loi, law ; merci, 
mercy. 



U revenu, revenue. 

Exc. — bru, daughter-in- 
law ; vertu, virtue ; glu, 
hird-lime ; eau, voater ; 
peau, skin; tribu, tribe. 

§ 7. — Nouns Masculine in one acceptation, and Femi- 



MascuUne. 



NINE IN THE OTHER. 



Aide, 

Aigle, 

Aune, 

Barbe, 

Carpe, 

Cartouche, 


assistant, 
eagle, 
alder. 

Barhary horse, 
wrist {anatomy), 
ornaments {sculp- 
ture), 
male and female, 
crape. 
ddighL 


Couple, 
Crepe, 
Delice (sing.), 



Feminine. 



Aide, 


assistance. 


Aigle, 


standard. 


Aune, 


eU. 


Barbe, 


heard. 


Carpe, 


carp. 


Cartouche, 


cartridge. 


Couple, 


a pair, a brace, two. 


Crepe, 


pancake. 


Delices (pL), 


delights. 





PLITEAL OF 


NOUNS.— 


§ 8. 291 




Masculine. 




Feminine. 


Espace, 


space. 


Espace, 


leading {in print- 
ing). 


Exemple, 


example. 


Exemple, 


writing-copy. 


Faux, 


forgery. 


Faux, 


scythe. 


Foret, 


drill. 


Foret, 


forest. 


GreflFe, 


office of clerk of a 
court. 


Greffe, 


graft. 


Heliotrope, 


sun flower. 


Heliotrope, 


a mineral. 


Hymne, 


classical chant, 


Hymne, 


Christian hymn. 


Livre, 


hook. 


Livre, 


pound. 


Manclie, 


handle. 


Manche, 


sleeve, 


Memoire, 


memoir, hill. 


Memoire, 


memory. 


Mode, 


mode, (grammar,) 
system. 


Mode, 


fashion. 


Moule, 


mould, model. 


Moule, 


shell-fish. 


Mousse, 


cabin hoy. 


Mousse, 


moss. 


CEuvre, (m. 


<S)f.) work. 


(Euvres, 


literary works. 


Office, 


divine service. 


Office, 


pantry. 


Ombre, 


a game. 


Ombre, 


shadow, spectre. 


Orgue (sing. 


,), organ. 


Orgues (pL), 


organ. 


Palme, 


hand, a measure. 


Palme, 


the advantage. 


Panache, 


plume. 


Panache, 


pea-hen. 


Parallele, 


comparison. 


Parallele, 


parallel line. 


Pendule, 


pendulum. 


Pendule, 


clock. 


Periode, 


acme, height. 


Periode, 


period, epoch 


Pivoine, 


a bird. 


Pivoine, 


a flower. 


Plane, 


plane-tree. 


Plane, 


joiner's tool. 


Platine, 


platina. 


Platines, 


small metallic 
plates. 


Poele, 


stove, pall. 


Poele, 


frying-pan. 


Poste, 


place, office. 


Poste, 


post-office. 


Pretexte, 


pretence. 


Pretexte, 


a Roman robe. 


Eegale, 


organ-pipe. 


Eegale, right 


of receiving the reve- 






nues of a vacant bishopric. 


Remise, 


hackney-coach. 


Remise, 


carriage-house. 


Serpentaire, 


constellation. 


Serpentaire, 


dragon-wort. 


Solde, 


balance of account. 


Solde, 


pay. 


Somme, 


nap, sleep. 


Somme, 


sum. 


Souris, 


smile. 


Souris, 


mouse. 


Tour, 


tour, turn, trick. 


Tour, 


tower. 


Vague, 


space, emptiness 


Vague, 


wave. 


Vase, 


vase, vessel. 


Vase, 


mire, slime. 


Voile, 


veil. 


VoUe, 


sail 



§ 8. — Formation of the Plfeal of Nouns. 
(1.) The plural in French, as in English, is formed by the addition 
of s to the singular. 

Singular. Plural. 

maison, house maisons, houses. 

ville, ioivn ; villes, towns. 

(2.) First exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with Sj a;, or z, 
have the same form in the pluraL 



292 PLURAL OP NOUNS. — § 8. 

Singular. Plural. 

fils, son ; fils, sons. 

voix, voice; voix, voices. 

nez, nose; nez, noses. 

(3.) Second exception. — ^Nouns ending in the singular with au and 
et*, take x in the plural. 

Singular. Plural. 

chapeau, hat; chapeaux, hats; 

feu, fire; feux, ^^re^. 

(4.) Third exception. — The following nouns ending in ou take x in 
the plural 

Singular. Plural. 

bijou, jewel ; bijoux, jewels. 

caillou, pebble ; cailloux, pebbles. 

chou, cabbage; choux, cabbages. 

genou, knee; genoux, knees. 

hibou, owl; hiboux, ovjIs. 

joujon, plaything ; ioupnx, playthings. 

(5.) Fourth exception. — The following nouns ending in ail, change 
that termination into aux in the plural. 

Singular. Plural. 

bail, lease; baux, leases. 

corail, coral; coraux, corals. 

email, enamel; emaux, enamels. 

soupirail, air-holes; soupiraux, air-holes. 

sous-bail, under-lease; sous-baux, under-leases. 

travail, labor; travaux, labors. 

(6.) Fifth exception. — The following nouns form their plural irreg- 
ularly. 

Singular. Plural. 

ail, garlic. aux. 

betail, cattle. bestiaux. 

(7.) Sixth exception. — ^Nouns ending in the singular with aZ, change 
that termination into aux in the plural^ 

Singular. Plural. 

general, general; generaux, generals. 

cheval, horse; chevaux, horses. 

mal, evil ; maux, evils. 

(8.) Ciel, ceil, aieul, travail, have two plurals. 

Singular. Plural. 

ciel, heaven; cieux, heavens. 



ciel, 



tester of a led] . , j testers of beds. 



ciels, -j 



sky of a picture ; ' } skies of pictures. 



1 Bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; chacal, jackal; regal, treat, follow tho 
general rule 



PLtTRAL OP COMPOUND NOUNS — § 9. 293 

ceil, eye; yeux, eyes. 

oeil-de-boeuf, oval window ceils-de-boeuf, oval windows* 

ai'eul, ancestor; aieux, ancestors. 

aieul, grandfather ; aieuls, grandfathers. 

travail, labor ; travaux, labors. 

travail, irave; travails, traves. 

§ 9. — Plural of Compound Nouns. 
(1.) "When two nouns form a compound substantive, both take the 
plural ending. 

Singular. Plural 

chef-lieu, chief place ; chefs-lieux, chief places. 

heutenant-colonel, lieutenant- lieutenants-colonels, lieutenant' 

colonel ; colonels. 

(2.) When a compound noun is formed of two substantives joined 
by a preposition, the first only takes the plural ending. 
Singular. Plural. 

arc-en-ciel, rainbow ; arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 

chef-d'cEuvre, masterpiece; chefs-d'ceuvre, masterpieces. 

The words tete-a-tete and coq-a-1'ane {an incongruous discourse), remaiu 
unchanged in the plural. 

(3.) When a noun and an adjective form a compound noun, both 
are varied in the plural. 

Singular. Plural. 

gentilhomme, nobleman; gentilshommes, noblemen. 

porte-cochere, carriage-door ; portes-cocheres, carriage-doors. 

basse-cour, poultry-yard ; basses-cours, poultry-yards. 

(4.) For the sake of euphony, the mark of the pluraP is omitted io 
the adjective of the following compound words. 

Singular. Plural 

grand'mere, grandmother; grand'meres, grandmothers. 

grand'raesse, high-mass; grand'messes, high-masses. 

(5.) The words, monsieur, sir, Mr., gentleman ; madame, madam^ 
or Mrs., mademoiselle, miss, form their plural as follows. 
Singular. Plural 

monsieur, sir, etc. ; messieurs, sirs, gentlemen. 

madame, madam, etc. ; mesdames, ladies, etc. 

mademoiselle, miss, etc. ; mesdemoiselles, young ladies, etc. 

(6.) In words composed of a noun and a verb, a preposition, or an 
adverb, the noun takes the form of the plural ; provided, however, 
there is plurality in the idea. 

Singular. Plural. 

passe-port, passport ; , passe-ports, passports. 

avant-garde, vanguard; avant-gardes, vanguards. 

* The mark of the feminine also. 



294 



PLUEAL OP NOUNS. — § 10, 11, 12, 



(7.) Compound nouns of which the second word indicates plural- 
ity, take s in the singular and plural. 

Singular. Plural 

cure-dents, a tooth-pick; cure-dents, tooth-picks. 

casse-noisettes, nut-crackers ; casse-noisettes, nut-crackers. 

(8.) Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb joined to an ad- 
verb, or a preposition, are invariable. 

Singular. Plural 

passe-partout, master-key ; passe-partout, master-keys. 

pour-boire, coachman's fee ; pour-boire, coachman's fees. 

§ 10. — Nouns which have no Plukal. 

(1.) The names of metals considered in themselves: as, or, gold; 
argent, silver ; plomb, lead ; etain, pewter / fer, iron ; cuivre, copper ; 
vif-argent, quicksilver. 

(2.) Aromas : such as baume, halsam ; encens, incense^ etc. 

(3.) The names of virtues and vices, and some names relating to 
physical and moral man : as, la jeunesse, youth ; la beaute, beauty ; 
la bonte, goodness ; le courage, courage. 

(4.) Adjectives used substantively: as, le beau, ihe heautiful; 
I'utile, the useful^ etc. 
§ 11. — Nouns which have no Singular in the sense 
heke given. 
Arrhes, 
Annales, 
Appas, 



earnest money. 

annals. 

charms. 
Arrerages, arrears. 

Arrets (etre aux), to le under arrest. 



Assises, 

Broussailles, 

Catacomb as, 

Ciseaux, 

Confins, 

Denrees, 

Yivres, 

Decombres, 

lEtrennes, 

Environs, 

Alentours, 



assizes. 

brushwood. 

catacombs. 

scisso7^s. 

confines. 

provisions. 



Entraves, 

Fiangailles, 

FuneraUles, 

Frais, 

Gages, 

Gens, 

Lunettes, 

Moeurs, 

Mouchettes, 

Pierreries, 

Pincettes, 

Pleurs, 

Sem allies, 



rums. 

New Year's presents. Tenebres 

Tenailles, 

environs. Vitraux, 



betrothing, 
funeral, 
expenses, costs, 
wages, 
people, 
spectacles, 
manners, 
snuffers. 

jewels, diamonds, 
tongs, 
tears, 

seeding time, 
darkness, 
pincers, 
window-glass. 



§ 12. — Peoper Names. 

(!.■) Proper names, when not used figuratively, are invariable, even 

when preceded by the plural article, les.'^ 

L'Espagne s'honore d'avoir pro- Spain prides itself on having given 
duit les deux Seneque. - birth to the two Senecas, 

Ratnouard. 

^ Often used by the French before the names of celebrated individuals. 
See second example. 



THE ARTICLE. — § 13. 295 

Les Locke, les Montesquieu, les Locke, Montesquieu, J. J. Hous- 

J, J. Rousseau, en se levant en Eu- seau, as they arose in Europe, called 

rope,appelerent les peuples mode rne3 upon modern nations to claim their 

a la liberte. Chateaubriand. liberty. 

(2.) When proper names are used figuratively, they take the form 
of the plural. 

La France a eu ses Oesars et ses France has had its Caesars and 
Fompees. Noel et Chapsal. Fompeys. 

That is, generals like Pompey and Caesar. 

Un coup d'oeil de Louis enfan- A glance from Louis produced 
tait des Corneilles. Delille. Corneilles. 

That is, poets like Corneille. 

§ 13. — The Auticle. 

(1.) The article is a word prefixed to a noun, or to a word used 
substantively, to determine the extent of its signification. 

(2.) Modern French grammarians recognize only one article, 

(3.) This article, contracted with the preposition de, is often used 
before a word in a partitive sense. [§ 78.] 

(4.) The words un, masc, une, fem., answering to the indefinite 
article a or an in English, are now, very properly,^ classed with the 
numeral adjectives. We shall, however, for the sake of convenience, 
devote a few lines to them under this head. 

(5.) The article ?e, the, is la for the feminine, and les for the plural. 

(6.) The article is subject to two kinds of changes : elision [§ 146] 
and contraction. 

(7.) Elision is the suppression of the letters e, a, t,' which are re- 
placed by an apostrophe ['] before a vowel, or an h mute [so© 
Lesson 3, (10)] : thus, 

I'esprit, the mind, instead of le esprit, 

ramitie, the friendship, " la amitie. 

rhomme, the man, " le homme. 

riiumanite, humanity, " la humanite. 

(8.) Contraction is the union of the article le, les, with one of the 
prepositions, d, de. Thus we say by contraction : 

au livre, to the book, instead of a le livre. 

aux bruits, to the fruits, " a les fruits, 

du livre, of ths book, " de le livre. 

des fruits, o/ i/ie /rm'te, " deles fruits. 

^ No difference can be made in rendering English into French, between 
a and one, so that in French, un homme, means a man, or one man. The 
other numeral adjectives might, with as much propriety, have been called 
articles as this word un. " See § 146. 



296 



THE ARTICLE. — § 13 



(9.) The contractions au, du, are not used before masculine words 
commencing with a vowel, or an h mute, nor before feminine words. 

a rhomme, to the man. 

d I'ami, to the friend. 

de I'homme, of the man. 

de I'ami, of the friend. 

(10.) The article used before words taken in a partitive sense 
[§ 78, (1)J, comes in connection or contraction with the preposition 
de. It is rendered in Enghsh by some or any, expressed or under- 
stood. 

du pain, m. Iread, some bread, or o/^^e bread {a part of). 

de I'argent, m. money, some money, of the money (apart of) 

de la viande, f. meat, some meat, of the meat (apart of) 

de I'argenterie, f. silver-plate, some silver-plate, of the silver-plate (a part of) 
des livres, m. books, some books, of the hooks (a part of) 

(11.) The English indefinite article, a or an, is rendered in French 
by un for the masculine, and une for the feminine. When those 
words are conne<?ted with the preposition de, the e of the preposition 
is elided. 



Masculine. 
un homme, a man. 
d'un homme, of or from a man. 
d un homme, at or to a man. 



Feminine. 
une femme, a woman. 
d'une femme, of or from a woman, 
a une femme, at or to a woman. 



j commencing with 
( a consonant, 
\ commencing with 
\ a vowel or h mute. 



Resume of the above Observations. 

le, before a masculine word, 
la, before a feminine word, 
r, before a word of either 

gender, 
les, for the plural, in all cases. 
du, before a masculine word, 
de la, before a feminine- word, 
de r, before a word of either 

gender, 
des, for the plural, in all cases. 
au, before a masculine word, 
£i, la, before a feminine word, 
a r, before a word of either 

gender, 
aux, for the plural, in all cases. 
un, before a masculine noun, 



j commencing with 
l a consonant, 
j commencing with 
\ a vowel or h mute. 

( commencing with 
{ a consonant, 
commencing with 
a vowel or h mute. 



the. 



of the, 
^ from th&. 
some, 
any. 



at or to the 



une, before a feminine noun, 
d'un, before a masculine noun, 
d'uae, before a feminine noun, 
a un, before a masculine noun, 
d une, before a feminine noun. 

Le pere et la mere sent au de- 
sespoir. 3. de St. Pieehe. 



The father 
despair. 



a, an, one. 
of or from a, an, one. 
at or to a, an, one. 
and mother are irk 



THE ADJECTIVE. — § 14-1, § 14-2, 29Y 

X'amitie dans nos coeurs verse un Friendship pours a peaceful happi- 

bonheur paisible. Demoustier. ness into our hearts. 

i'honneur aux grands coeurs est Honor is dearer than life in noble 

plus char que la vie. Corneille, hearts. 

Les filles et les gargons chanterent Tlie hoys and girls sang in chorus, 
en choeur. B. de St. Pierre. 

Sur les rives du Grange, on voit On the banks of the Ganges, we see 

fleurir Z'ebene. Delille. the ebony in bloom. 

La violette se cache timidement, The violet conceals herself timidly, 

au milieu des filles de ^'ombre. in the midst of the daughters of the 

Deleuze. shade. 

Le remords se reveille au cri de Remorse is aroused by the cry of 

la nature. De Belloy. nature. 

La moitie des humains vit aux The half of mankind lives at the 

depens de Z'autre. Destotjches. expense of the other, 

§ 14-1. — The Adjective. 

(1.) The adjective serves to denote the quality or manner of being 
of the noun. 

(2.) Adjectives are of two sorts : qualifying adjectives^ and deter" 
mining adjectives. 

(3.) We call qualifying adjectives those which add to the idea of the 
object that of a quality proper to it ; as, bon, good ; noble, noble ; 
courageux, courageous. 

(4.) Determining adjectives are those which add to the idea of the 
object that of a particular limitation or determination ; as, quelque, 
some ; tout, aU ; autre, other ; mon, my ; nul, no ; un, one ; deux, 
two. 

§ 14-2. — Qualifying- Adjectives. 

(1.) These adjectives may express qualities : 1. Simply ; 2. "With 
comparison ; 3. Carried to a very high degree. Thence the three de- 
grees of quahfioation : the positive, the comparative, and the super- 
lative. 

(2.) The positive is nothing but the adjective in its simplest signi- 
fication : 

Moi, je suis a Paris triste, pauvre, At Paris, I am sad, poor, and so- 
rectus. Boileatj. eluded. 

(3.) The comparative is the adjective expressing a comparison be- 
tween two or several objects. There is, then, between the objects 
compared, a relation of equality, superiority, or inferiority. 

(4.) I'he comparison of equality expresses a quality in the same de- 
gree in the objects compared. It is formed^ by placing aussi, as, or 

' In French, adjectives cannot be compared, as in Eno^lish, by means of 
changes in the termination. With the exception of raeilleur, better ; moin- 
dre, less ; and pire, worse, all comparisons must be formed by means c^ 
adverbs. 



298 QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. — § 14-2. 

autant, as much, before tlie adjective, and the conjunction que, cw, 
after it : 

L' Allemagne est aiissi peuplee que Germany is as popubus as France. 
la France. Voltaire, 

A leur tete est le chien, superbe At their head stands the dog, as 

autant ^w'utile. Delille. nolle as useful. 

5. The relation or comparison of superiority expresses a quality 
in a higher degree in one object than in another. This comparison 
is formed by placing plus, morBj before the adjective, and que, than^ 
after it : 

Les actions sent plus sineeres que Actions are more sincere than 

les paroles. Mlle. de Scudery. words. 

Le pied du cerf est mieux fait que The foot of the stag is heiter formed 

celui du boeuf. Buffox. than thai of the ox. 

(6.) The comparison of inferiority expresses a quality in a lower 
degree in one object than in another. It is formed by placing moins, 
less J before the adjective, and que, than, after it : 

Le naufrage et la mort sent moins Shipwreck and death are less fatal 
fanestes que les plaisirs qui atta- than those pleasures which attach 
quent la vertu. Penelon. virtue. 

(7.) We have only three adjectives which are comparatives of 
themselves : meiUeur, better ;^ moindre, less ; pire, worse. 

Meilleur, instead of jplus hon^ which is never used in the sense of 
"better : 

II n'est meilleur ami ni parent We have no letter friend, no letter 
que soi-meme. La Fontaine. relation than ourselves. 

^ Mieux, letter ; pis, worse ; moins, less. The English words better^ 
worse, less, are sometimes adverbs, and when tbey are so, should be ren- 
dered by the several words placed at the commencement of this note. A 
"practical way of determining the nature of those words in English is: 

1. To change the word letter into the expression "tn a letter manner.''^ 
If this change may be made without changing the sense, the word better 
is an adverb, and must be rendered by mieux : 

He reads letter {in a letter man- II lit mieux que son frere. 
ner) than his Ir other. 

2. If you change loorse into " in a worse inanner,^^ it should be trans- 
lated pis, or more elegantly, plus mal : 

He reads worse {in a worse man- II lit pis (plus mal) que son frere. 
ner) than his Irother. 

3. "When you may substitute " a smaller amount or quantity'''' for the 
word less, it should be rendered moins : 

He reads less {a smaller amount) H lit moins que son frere. 
than his brother. 



GENDER, ETC., OP ADJECTIVES. — § 15. 299 

Pire, instead of plus mauvais^ which may however be used : 

Le remede est parfois pire que le The remedy is at times worse than 
mal. Lenoble. the evil. 

Moindre, instead of ]plus petit, an expression also in use : 

Ce n'est pas etre petit que d'etre Being less than great is not being 
moindre qu'un grand. Boiste. small. 

(8.) The superlative, or tliird degree of qualification, expresses the 
quality carried to a very high, or to the highest degree ; thence there 
are two sorts of superlatives : the relative and the absolute. 

(9.) The superlative relative marks a very high or the highest de- 
gree relatively, or with comparison. It is formed by placing, le, la, 
les, the ; mon, my ; ton, thy ; son, his ; notre, our ; votre, your ; leur, 
leurs, their, before the comparative of superiority or inferiority. 

Un bienfait regu est la pliis sacree A benefit received is the most ja- 
de toutes les dettes. Mme. Necker. cred of all debts. 

La probite reconnue est le pliLs silr Acknowledged probity is ihi most 

de tous les serments. (The same.) secure of all oaths. 

(10.) The words le plus, le moins, must be repeated before every 
adjective. 

Ce sent les livres les plus agre- TJie'se books are the most agree- 

ables, les plus universellement lus, able, the most universally read, and 

et les plus utiles. the most useful. 
Berxardin de St. Pierre. 

(11.) The superlative absolute expresses also a very high degree, 
but absolutely, without comparison. It is formed by placing be- 
fore the adjective one of these words, tres, fort, infinimentj extreme' 
ment, etc. 

II y a a la ville, comme ailleurs, There are in cities, as elsewhere^ 

de /or^ Sottas geus. La Bruy^re. very silly people. 

Je vons prie de croire que je ne / beg you to believe that you ar$ 

Bonge qu'a vous, et que vous m'etes my only thought, and that you art 

tx.tr emement chere. extremely dear to me. 
Mme. de Sj^vign^. 

§ 15. — Gender and N'umber op Adjectives. 

(1.) The adjective has, of itself, neither gender nor number ; it 
must assume the gender and number of the noun to which it belongs. 

(2.) The termination of the adjective varies according to the gender 
and number of the noun which it qualifies or determines. 

Un homme prudent, Une femme prudente. 

A prudent man. A prudent woman. 

Des hommes prudents, Des femmes prudentes. 

Prudent mevk Frudent women. 



800 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. — S 16, 



§ 16. — Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives. 

(1.) All adjectives ending -with e mute, remain unchanged in tho 
feminine. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Un homme agreaUe. Una femme agredble. 

An agreeable man. An agrteable tvoman. 

Un mur solide. Una maison solide. 

A strong (solid) wall. A strong {solid) hoiise. 



(2.) Adjectives not ending in 
addition of e. 



e mute, form tlieir feminine by the 



MasciUine. 




Feminine. 




TJn garyon diligent. 




Une fiUe diligenie. 




A diligent boy. 




A diligent girl. 




Un homme x^oU. 




Una dame polie. 




A polite man. 




A polite lady. 




(3.) Exceptions. 




Mas. Fern. 






EL ' 




ELLE, 


tel, teUe, 


such. 




EIL 




EILLE, 


pareil, pareille, 


like. 




EN ■ 


Change those 


ENNE, 


ancien, ancienne, 


ancient. 


djectives 


ET 


terminations 


ETTE, 


muet, muette, 


mute. 


endmgin 


ON 


" for thefemi- ' 


ONNE, 


boD, bonne, 


good. 




F 


nine into 


VE, 


neuf, neuvs, 


new. 




S 




SSE, 


gras, grassa, 


fat. 




X _ 




. SE, 


heureux, hem-euse, 


happy. 



(4.) The following, although ending with these terminations, form 
their feminine otherwise. 



complet, 


complete, 


coneret, 


concrete, 


discret, 


discreet. 


inquiet, 


uneasy, 


secret, 


secret. 


rep] at. 


replete, 


mauvais, 


bad, 


iiiais, 


silly. 


ras, 


close-shorn, 


doux, 


soft, sweet. 


faux, 


false. 


prefix, 


prefixed. 


roux, 


reddish. 


tiers, 


third, 



make in the feminine 



follow the general rule 
and make in the 
feminine. 



make in the feminine 



' complete. 

concrete. 

discrete. 

inquiete. 

secrete. 
^ replete. 

mauvaise. 

niaisa. 

rasa, 

douce. 

fausse. 

prefixe. 

rousse. 

tierce. 



(5.) Adjectives ending in eur, as also some substantives of the 
fsame termination, have three several modes of forming the femi- 
nine: 

Isi. Those which are derived from the participle present of a 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. — 8 16. 



301 



French verb by dropping ant^ and substituting eur, change the final 
letter (f) into se, as " 



''res. Part 




Masculine. 


Feminine. 


dansan^, 


■whence 


dansewr ; 


and thence danseuse. 


trompa;z^, 




trompewr; 


" trompeuse. 



maTce in the fern- ^ 
inine 



Here, however, note that chanteur, when signifying a professional 
singer^ takes for the feminine cantatrice. Like anomalies appear iA 
the following: 

ambassadeur, amhassador, 
bailleur, lessor, 
chasseur, hunter, 
demandeur, plaintiff, 
defendeur, defendant, 
devineur, guesser, 
enchanteur, enchanter, 
gonverneur, governor, 
pecheur, sinner, 
serviteur, servant, 



bailleresse. 

chasseresse. 

demanderesse. 

defenderesse. 

devineresse. 

enchanteresse. 

gouvernanto. 

pecheresse. 

servante. 



2d. Those ending in teur and derived from the Latin, and conse- 
quently, not falhng under the Rule (1st) just given, form the feminine 
by changing teur into trice ; as, 



Masculine. 
acteur, actor, 
admirateur, admirer, 



Feminine. 
actrice, actress. 
admiratrice, admirer. 



Exceptions to Rule 1st, however, are the following : 
make in the feminine 



debiteur, debtor, 
executeur, executor, 
inspecteur, inspector, 
inventeur, inventor, 
persecuteur, persecutor. 



debitrice. 

executrice. 

inspectrice. 

inventrice. 

^ persecutrice. 



3d Those ending in trieur, also majeur, mineur, meiUeur^ follow 
the general rule, that is, add e to form the feminine ; as, 



exterieur, exterior, 
superieur, superior, 
majeur, of age, major, 
mineur, minor, 
meilleur, better, 



make in the feminine 



' exterieure. 
superieure. 
majeure, 
mineure. 
meilleure. 



(6.) Adjectives, as also nouns, indicating occupation chiefly exer- 
cised by men, are alike in the mascuhne and the feminine ; as, 



auteuii author, 



litterateur, literary person. 



302 



lEBEGULAR ADJECTIVES. — § 17 



(7.) The following adjectives having two forms for the masculine, 
form their feminine as follows : 

Masculine lefore Masculine before 

a consonant. a vowel or h mute. Feminine. 

beau, bel, belle, handsome. 

fou, fol, folle, foolish. 

mou, mol, raolle, soft. 

nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, new. 

vieux, vieil, vieille. old. 

Irregular Adjectives. 
(8.) The following adjectives form their feminine irregularly : 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


absous, absolved, 


absoute. 


benin, benign, 


benigne. 


blanc, white, . 


blanche. 


caduc, decrepit, infirm. 


caduque. 


coi, quiet, 


coite. 


dissous, dissolved, 


dissoute. 


favori, favorite, 


fevorite. 


frais, fresh, 


fraiche. 


franc, free, frank. 


franche. 


geatil, pretty, genteel. 


gentille. 


grec, Grecian, Greek, 


grecque. 


hebrew, Hebrew, 


hebraique, v^ed only of ihc 




Hebrew tongue. 


jouvenceau {o\)&Q\QtQ),a stripling, 


jouvencelle. 


juraeau, twin, 


jumelle. 


long, long, slow. 


longue. 


maitre, viaster, masterly. 


maitresse. 


maliQ, cunning, malignant, 


maligne. 


mulatre, mulatto, 


mulatre or mulatresse. 


muscat, muscat. 


muscade. 


nul, null, none, 


nulle. 


oblong, oblong, 
public, puf)lic, 


oblongue. 


publique. 


resous, resolved, changed, 


resolue. 


sec, dry, barren. 


seche. 


sot, silly. 


sotte. 


traitre, traitor, treacherous, 


traitresse. 


turc, Turkish, 


turque. 


vieillot, oldish. 


vieillotte. 


The following have no feminine : 


artisan, mechanic. 


partisan, partisan. 


chatain, chestnut color. 


temoin, witness. 


dispos, active. 


velin, vellum, of vellum. 



§ 17. — Formation of the Plural of Adjectives. 
(1.) General Rule.— The plural of adjectives is formed by the ad- 
dition of s to the masculine, or to the feminine termination. 



lEEEQULAR ADJECTIVES. — § lY. 303 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

grand, g7-eat, ^aads ; grande, grandea. 

petit, small, petits; petite, petites. 

(2.) This rule has no exceptions, with regard to the feminine ter- 
mination. 

(3.) With regard to the masculine termination, it is subject to the 
three following exceptions : 

First Exception. — Adjectives ending in the singular with s or cc, do 
not change their form in the plural. 

Singular. Plural. 

heureux, happy^ heureux. 

doux, sweet, soft, doux. 

Second Exception. — Adjectives having in the singular the termina- 
tion eau, form their plural masculine by the addition of x. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


beau, handsome, beautiful, 


beaux, 


juraeau, twin, 


jumeaux. 


nouveau, new, 


nouveaux. 



Third Exception. — Adjectives ending in al, form their plural mas- 
culine by changing al into aux. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


liberal, liberal, 


liberaux. 


national, national, 


nationaux. 


rural, rural. 


ruraux. 



We quote from Bescherelle's Grammaire Nationale, those adjectives 
ending in al, which follow the general rule. 



Singular. 


Plural 


amical, friendly. 


amicals. 


bancal, bandy-legged, 


bancals. 


fatal, fatal. 


fatals. 


final, final, 


finals. 


frugal, frugal, 


frugals. 


filial, filial, 


filials. 


glacial, frozen, icy 


glacials. 


initial, initial. 


initials. 


labial, labial. 


labials. 


matinal, early. 


matinals. 


medial, medial, 


medials. 


naval, naval, 


navals. 


pascal, paschal, 


pascals. 


penal, penal, 


penals. 


theatral, theatrical, 


theatrals. 



304 ADJECTIVES. — § 18, 19, 

§ 18. — Agreement op Adjectives with Nouns. 
(1.) The adjective must agree, in gender* and number, with the 
noun or pronoun which it qualifies : 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

le "beau jardin, les heaux jardins ; la lelle maison, les lelles maisons. 

the fine garden, the fine gardens ; the fine Jiouse, the fine houses. 

le grand livre, les grands livres ; la. grande carte, les grandes cartes. 

the large book, the large books ; the large map, the large maps. 

(2.) This agreement must take place, not only when the adjective 
immediately precedes or follows the noun or pronoun, but also when 
it is separated by other words : 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Singular. — Plaise a Dieu de te Singular. — L'honneur de passer 

rendre assez bon pour meriter la vie pour bonne I'empechait de se mon- 

heureuse ! Fenelon. trer mauvaise. Marivaux. 

May God render thee sufficiently The honor of passing for good pre- 

good to deserve the blessed life. vented her showing herself bad. 

Plural. — Jamais, en quoi que ce Plural — Loin de nous raidir con- 

puisse etre les mechants ne sent tre les inclinations qui sent bonnes, 

bons a rien de bon. il faut les suivre pour servir Dieu. 

J. J. RousSEAii. Mme. de Maintenon. 

The wicked are never, in any cir- Far from resisting our good incli- 

'cumsiances, fitted (good) to perform nations, we should follow them in 

any thing good. order to serve God. 

(3.) "When an adjective relates to two or more substantives, 
whether in the singular or the plural, and all of the same gender, it 
must agree with the nouns in gender, and be put in the plural : 

Le riche et I'indigent, I'imprudent et The rich and the poor, the impru- 

le sage, dent and the wise, being svi)jeci to 

Sujets a meme loi, subissent meme the same law, experience the same 

sort. J. J. Rousseau. fate. 

(4.) When the words which the adjective qualifies are of different 
genders, the adjective must be put in the masculine plural : 

Je tache de rendre heureux, ma / try to render happy, my wife, 

f3mme, men enfant, et meme mon my child, and even my cat, and my 

chat, et mon chien. dog. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

L'ordre et I'utilite publics ne peu- Public order and utility cannot he 

vent etre le fruit du crime. the fruits of crime. 
Massillon. 

For special rules on this pomt, see § 83. 
§ 19. — ^Determining or Deter:minative Adjectives. 
There are four sorts of determining adjectives — the demonstrative^ 
the possessive, the numeral, and the indefinite. 



ADJECTIVES. — § 20. 805 

§ 20. — ^Demonstrative Adjectives. 

(1.) The demonstrative adjectives are used, when an object is to 
be particularly specified or pointed out. They are never, in French, 
used substantively, that is, without the nouns which they determine : 

Singular. 

Masculine. — Ce, this or that, placed before a word commencing with a 

consonant. 
Get, this or thai placed before a word commencing with a 
vowel or anh mute. 
Feminine. — Cette, this or that, placed before aU sorts of nouns. 

Plural. 
Ces, for both genders. 

Examples. 
Masculine Singular. Feminine Singular. 

ce soldat, this or that soldier. cette femme, this or that woman. 

cet ami, that or this friend. cette epee, that or this sword. 

cet homme, this or that man. cette harpe, this or that harp. 

Plural. 
ces hommes, these or those men; ces femmes, these or those women. 

Voyez ce pkpillon ecliappe du torn- See that butterfly escaped from the 

beau ; tomb : his death was a slumber, and 

Sa mort fut un somrQei], et sa tombe his tomb a cradle. 
un berceau. Delille. 

. . . . Cet admirable don, That admirable gift, instinct, is 

L'instinct, sans doute est loin de doubtless far beneath majestic rear 
I'auguste raison. (The same.) son. 

Lei, cette jeune plante en vase dis- There that young plant prepared 

as a vase, receives the dew in its 



Dans sa coupe elegante accueille la elegant cup. 
rasee. (The same.) 

Ces honneura que le vulgaire ad- Do these honors, admired by the 

mire, vulgar, awake the dead from their 

Reveillent-ils las morts au seln de sepulchres? 
monuments ? SouLifi. 

(2.) When is it necessary to make, in French, a difference similar 
to that existing between the Enghsh words this and that, the adverbs 
ci and Id must be placed after the noun. 

ce livre-ci, this book (here), ce livre-la, that booJc (there), 

ces livres-ci, these looks, ces livres-la, those books. 



806 POSSESSIVB ADJECTIVES. — § 21. 

§ 21. — Possessive Adjectives. 
(1.) The possessive adjectives, which are always joined to a noun, 
relate to possession or property; they are: 



Singular. 




Plural, 




Masculine. 


Feminine. 


for 


loth genders. 




mon, 
ton, 
son, 
notre, 


ma, 
ta, 
sa, 
notre, 




mes, 
tes, 
ses, 
nos. 


my. 

thy. 

his, her, its. 

our. 


votre, 
leur, 


votre, 
leur. 




vos, 
leurs, 


your, 
their. 



(2.) In French, these adjectives take the gender and number of 
the object possessed, and not, as in EngHsh, those of the possessor. 

Masc. sing. Fern. sing. PI. hath genders. 

mon frere, my brother, ma scBur, my sister, mes cousins, my cousins. 

ton livre, thy book, ta plume, thy pen, tes maisons, thy houses. 

son papier, his or her sa table, his or her ta- ses babits, Jiis or her 

paper, ble. clothes. 

notre cheval, our horse, notre vache, our cow, nos prairies, our meadows, 
votre lit, your bed, votre chaise, your chair, vos crayons, your pencils. 

leur foin, their hay, leur paille, their straw, leurs fermes, their farms. 

Sobriete dans toute chose, Sobriety in all things, is, my 

Mon ami, c'est I'art de jouir, friend, the true enjoyment. 

Du Tremblay. 

Ma main de quelque fleur esquisse My hand sketches the picture of 
la peinture. Castel. some flower. 

Mes sens sont glaces d'effroi. My senses are frozen with fear. 

J. B. RoussEAtr. 

De son propre artifice on est sou- One is often the victim of his own 
Vent victime. artifice. 

Colin d'Harleville. 

A sa vocation cbaque etre doit Every being should fulfil his voca- 
l-epondre. Fr. de Neufchateau. Hon. 

II faut de ses amis endurer quel- We must bear something from our. 
que chose. Moli^re. friends. 

Notre vie est une maison, Our life is a house; to set it on fire 

y mettre le feu c'est folie. is folly. 

Nivernais. 

Vos mailles se rompront sous la Tour meshes will break under the 
charge pesante. Castel. heavy burden. 

Leurs flem'S suivront mes pas, en Tlieir flowers will follow my steps, 
recreant ma vue. (The same.) and please my sight. 

(3.) The adjectives mon, my ; ton, thy ; son, Ms or her, are used 
instead of ma, ta, sa, before feminine words commencing with a 
vowel, or an h mute, in order to prevent the meeting of two vowels^ 
or of a vowel and an h mute ; thus we say, 

mon epee my sword, and never ma epee. 
ton epouse, thy wife, instead of ta epouse. 
son armee, his army, but never sa armee. 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — 8 22 



307 



C'en est fait, mon heure est venue. 

BOILEAU. 



All is over, my hour is come. 



(4.) The possessive adjectives must be repeated before every noun. 



Mon frere, ma soeur, et mes cou- 
sins sont a Paris. 



My brother, sister, and cousins are 
at Faris. 



§ 22. — NuMEKAL Adjectives. 

(1.) There are two kinds of numeral adjectives : the cardinal and 
the ordinal. 

(2.) The cardinal numbers indicate simply the number or quality, 
without any reference to order : as, un, one ; deux, two^ etc. 

(3.) The ordinal numbers mark the order or rank which persons 
and things occupy: as, premier, ^irs^ ; second, second, etc. 

"We shall, for the purposes of comparison, place the cardinal and 
ordinal numbers in parallel columns. 



(4.) Cardinal Numbers. 




(5.) Ordinal Kumhers. 




un, feminine une, 


one. 


premier, feminine premiere, 


first 


deux, 


2 


deuxieme or second, /. seconde, 2d. 


trols, 


3 


troisieme, 


3d. 


quatre, 


4 


quatrieme. 


4th. 


cinq, 


5 


cinquieme, 


5th. 


six, 


6 


sixieme, 


6th. 


sept, 


7 


septieme, 


7th. 


huit, 


8 


huitieme, 


8th. 


neu^ 


9 


neuvieme, 


9th. 


dix, 


10 


dixieme. 


10th. 


onze, 


11 


onzienie, 


11th. 


douze, 


12 


douzierae, 


12th. 


treize, 


13 


treizieme. 


IStli. 


quatorze, 


14 


quatorzieme, 


14th. 


quinze, 


15 


quinzieme, 


15th. 


seize, 


16 


seizieme, 


16th. 


dix-sept, 


17 


dix-septieme, 


17th. 


dix-huit, 


18 


dix-huitieme, 


18th. 


dix-neuf, 


19 


dix-neuvieme, 


19th. 


vingt, 


20 


vingtieme, 


20th. 


vingt et un. 


21 


vingt et unieme, 


21st. 


vingt-deux, &c., 


22 


vingt- deuxieme, &C., 


22d. 


trente, 


30 


trentieme, 


30th. 


trente et un, 


31 


trente et unieme, 


31st. 


trente-deux, &c., 


32 


trente-deuxieme. 


82d. 


quarante, 


40 


quarantieme, 


40th. 


quarante et un, 


41 


quarante et unieme, 


41st. 


quarante-deux, &c., 


42 


quarante-deuxieme, 


42d. 


cinqnante, 


50 


cinqnantieme, 


50th. 


cinquante et un. 


51 


cinquante et unieme, 


51st. 


cinquante-deux, &c., 


52 


cinquante- deuxieme, 


52d. 


soixante, 


60 


soixantieme, 


60th. 


soixante et un, 


61 


soixante et unieme, 


61st. 


Boixante-deux, &c., 


62 


soixante-deuxieme, 


62d. 



308 NUMEEAL 


ADJECTIVES.— § 23. 




Cardinal Numbers, 




Ordinal Numbers. 




soixante-dix:, 


•70 


soixante-dixieme, 


70th. 


sobcante-onze, 


71 


soixante-onzieme, 


71st. 


soixante-douze, 


72 


soixaute-douzieme, 


72d. 


soixante-treize, 


73 


soixautc-treizieme, 


73d. 


soixante-quatorze, 


74 


soixante-quatorziemo 


74th. 


soixante-quinze, 


75 


soixante- quinzieme 


75th. 


soixante-seize, 


76 


soixante-seizieme, 


76th. 


soixante-dix-sept, 


77 


soixante-dix-septieme, 


77th. 


soixante-dix-huit, 


78 


soixante-dix-huitieme, 


78th. 


soixante-dix-neu^ 


79 


soixante-dix-neuvieme, 


79th. 


quatre-viugts, 


80 


quatre-vingtieme, 


80th. 


quatre-vingt-un, 


81 


quatre-vingt-unieme, 


81st 


quatre-vingt-deux, 


82 


quatre-vingt-deuxieme, 


82d 


quatre-viagt-dix, 


90 


quatre-vingt-dixieme. 


90th. 


quatre-vingt-onze, 


91 


quatre-vingt-onzieme. 


91st. 


quatre-vingt-douze, &c., 


92 


quatre-vingt-douzieme, 


92d. 


cent, 


100 


centieme, 


100th. 


cent-un, 


101 


eent-unieme, 


101st. 


deux cents, 


200 


deux centieme, 


200th. 


deux cent-un, 


201 


deux cent-unieme, 


201st. 


troi^ cents, 


300 


trois centieme, 


300th. 


trois cent-un, 


301 


tiois cent-unieme. 


301st. 


mille, 


1000 


millieme, 


1000th. 


deux mille, 


2000 


deux millieme, 


2000th. 


deux mille ciaquante, 


2050 


deux mille cinquantieme. 


2050th. 


un million, 1,000,000 


millionieme, 1,000,000th. 



§ 23. — YaEIATIONS of the CARDINAIi !N"UMBEES. 

(1.) The following cardinal numbers vary : 

(2.) Un, one, a, or an, takes the gender of the noun to -which it is 
prefixed : 

un livre, a booJc ; une feuiUe, a leaf. 

When used substantively, un takes, at times, the form of the 

plural 

Masc. Les uns et les autres. These and those, 

Fern. Les unes et les autres, (The ones and the others). 

(3.) Vingt and cent, when multiplied by one number, and not fol- 
lowed by another, take the form of the plural : 

qua.tve-v i7igis, eighty ; six cents, six hundred. 

L'homme vit quatre-vingts ans, Man lives eighty years, the dog 
le allien n'en vit que dix. Buffon. only ten. 

On m'apporta chez moi, douze They brought me, at my Iwuse, 
cents francs. J. J. Rousseau. twelve hundred francs. 



(4) Vingt and omt^ however, when multiplied by one number, and 



NUMBEAL ADJECTIVES. — § 24. S09 

followed by another, or if not followed by a number, used to indi- 
cate a particular epoch, do not take the form of the plural. 

quatve-vingt-cmq hommes, eighty-five men. 

cinq cent-deuiz hommes, five hundred and two men. 

Charlemagne fut proclame em- Charlemagne was proclaimed emr 

pereur d'Occident, le jour de Noel, peror of the West, Christmas-day, in 

en huit cent Voltaike. the year eight hundred. 

(5.) Mille — (thousand^ For the date of the year, reckoned from 
the commencement of the Christian era to the yeai two thousand of 
the same, we use the abbreviated form, mil. 

L'an mil huit cent cinquante, The year one thousand eight hun- 

dred and fifty. 

(6.) With regard to the years which have preceded our era, and 
those which will follow our present thousand, we write the full form, 
miUe. 

La premiere irruption des Gaulois, The first irruption of the Gauls 

eut lieu sous le regne de Tarquin, took place under the reign of Tarquin, 

environ l'an du monde trois meVie about the year of the world 34:1Q. 
quatre cent-seize. Vertot. 

(7.) Million, billion, take the plural form. 

§ 24. — Miscellaneous Observations on the Caedinal 
Numbers. 

(1.) In French, in computing from twenty to thirty, thirty to forty, 
&c., the larger number must always precede the smaller. We may 
not say, as often in English, one and twenty^ but always vingt et un, 
vingt-deux, &c. 

(2.) The conjunction et, after vingt, trente, &c,, is only used before 
un : thus we say vingt et un, twenty (and) one, and simply vingt-deux, 
twenty-two, &c. 

(3.) The word one frequently precedes in English the words 'hun~ 
dred attd thousand ; it must not be rendered in French. We say : 

mille hommes, one thousand men. 

cent francs, one hundred francs. 

(4.) When the words cent and mille are used substantively before 
the name of objects generally reckoned or sold by the hundred or 
thousand in number or in weight, the word un may be placed beforo 
them, the name of the object being preceded by the preposition cZ«. 

Un cent, un mille, (millier) de briques, 
One hundred, one thousand (of) bricks. 
Un cent (un quintal) de sucre, 
One himdred (weight) of sugar. 



"310 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — § 25. 

(5.) The words septante, seventy ; octante, eighty ; and nonante, 
ninety, are now nearly obsolete, being used only in a few provinces 
of Erance. They are, as may be seen in the preceding table, replaced 
by the awkward expressions, so2icawfe-c^^ sixty-ten; quatre-vingts, four- 
twenties (four score) ; quatre-vingt-dix, four-score-ten, etc. 

(6.) Before the words onze, eleven, and onzieme, eleventh, the arti- 
cle is not elided. We say le onze, le onzieme, la onzieme. In pro- 
nunciation, the s of the plural article les is silent when this article 
precedes onze or onzieme. 

§ 25. — Obseevatiois^s on the Ordinal Xumbees. 
(1.) It will be seen that the ordinal numbers, with the exception of 
premier and second, are formed from the cardinal — 

1. By the change of /into vieme in neuf; 

2. By the change of e into ieme in those ending with that rowel; 

3. By the addition of isme in those ending with a consonant; 

4. Cinq requires uieme to make cinquieme, fifth. 

(2.) All ordinal adjectives may take the form of the plural. 

(3.) Premier and second alone vary for the feminine, and make 
premiere, seconde. 

(4.) Uhieme {first) is only used in composition with vingt, trenie, 
etc. 

(5.) Second, deuxieme (second) — Deuxicme supposes a series, a con- 
tinuation ; second merely indicates the order : 

1st. "We may say of a work which has four or more volumes : 
J'ai le deuxieme (or le second) vo- I have the second volume of that 
lume de cat ouvrage. work. 

2d. In speaking of a work which has only two volumes, we should say : 

J'ai le second (not le deuxieme) 1 have the second volume of BeS' 
volume du diclionnaire de Besche- cherelle^s Dictionary. 
relle. 

3d. Under the ordinal numbers may be placed the following worda^ 
which are often used substantively ; 

Trentenaire, thirty, 

Quarantenaire, forty, 

Ciuquantenaire, fifty years old, 

Sexagenaire, sexagenarian, 

Septuagenaire, septuagenarian, 

Octogenaire, octogenarian, 

Nonagenaire, nonogenarian, 

Centenaire, centenarian, of one hundred " " 

4th. Trentenaire and quarantenaire are law terms : 

Possession trentenaire, quarante- Thirty, forty years' possession, 
naire. 



of thirty years^ 


duration ; 


of forty 


« 


t( 


of My 


(1 


« 


of sixty 


u 


(( 


of seventy 


u 


i( 


of eighty 


(( 


u 


of ninety 


(( 


« 



NUMERAL NOITNS 



§ 27. 



311 



5th. Of the others; sexagenaire, septuagenaire, and octogenaire only are 
in frequent use : 

Un octogenaire plantait, etc. A man eighty years old was plant- 

La Fontaine. ing trees. 

§ 26. — Rules. 
(1.) In speaking of the days of the month, the French use the car- 
dinal, not the ordinal number : 



the second of March, 
the seventeenth of April. 
The opening of the States-general 
took place on the fifth of May, 1789. 



le deux mars, 
le dix-sept avril, 
L'ouverture des Etats-generaux 
cut lieule cinq mai, 1789. Thiers. 

(2.) We must, however, say : 

le premier (not fwn) juin, the first of June. 
(3.) The cardinal numbers are also employed in speaking of sove- 
reigns and princes : 



Charles dix^ 
Louis dix-huit, 
Louis onze avait trente-huit ana, 
quand il monta sur le trone. 

Anquetil. 
La mort de G-regoire sept n'etei- 
gnit pas le feu qu'il avait d,Ilume. 

VOLTAIEE. 



Charles the Tenth. 

Lewis the Eighteenth. 

Lewis the Eleventh was thirty-eight 
years old, when he ascended the 
throne. 

The death of Gregory the ^e^'enth 
did not extinguish the fire which he 
had kindled. 



(4.) "We must say, however, 

Henri premier, Henry the First. 

(5.) Deux and second are, in this case, used indifferently : 

Charles deux, Charles second, Charles the Second. 

(6.) In speaking of Charles the Fifth, of Germany, and ot the 

Pope Sixtus the Fifth, the obsolete word quint (fifth) is used. 

ChsiTles-quint, Charles the Fifth. 

Qixte-quint, Sixtus the Fifth. 

We shall, in order to render reference easier, place here somd ob- 
servations on nouns and adverbs of number. 

§ 27. — Numeral Nouns. 
(1.) The numeral nouns in use with the French are : 



unite, 


unit ; 


trentaine, 


thirty ; 


couple, paire, 


couple, pair; 


quarantaine, 


two score; 


trio. 


trio, three; 


cinquantaine, 


fifty ; 


demi-douzaine, 


half dozen; 


soixantaine. 


sixty ; 


huitaine, 


eight days ; 


quatre-vingtaine, 


eighty ; 


neuvaiae, 


nine (nine days of 1 centaine, 


hundred ; 




prayer); 


deux centaines, &c., 


. two hundred; 


diraine, 


ten, half a score; 


1 millier, 


one thousand i 


douzaine. 


dozen ; 


deux milliers, 


two thousand^ 


quinzaine, 


fifteen, fortnight ; 


1 myriade, 


a myriad ; 


''ingtaine, 


scorBf twenty; 


1 millioDf 


a million ; 



312 INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. — § 30. 

(2.) The termination aine signifies sometimes nearly, and when 
added to words of number is equivalent to the English some, in cases 
like the following : I have some twenty books, *. e., about twenty- 
books. J'ai une vingtaine de livres. 

§ 28. — Fractional !N"umeeals. 

nn quart, one quarter ; un cinquieme, one fifth ; 

deux quarts, two quarters ; deux cinquiemes, two fifths; 

trois quarts, three quarters ; un sixieme, etc., one sixth, etc. ; 

le tiers, the third; un dixieme, etc., one tenth, etc. ; 

deux tiers, two thirds ; un centieme, one hundredth ; 

la moitie, the half; un millieme, one thousandth ; 

(1.) It will be seen that, with the exception of tiers, quart and 
moitie, these numbers take the form of the ordinal numerals. They 
may, therefore, take the form of the plural when necessary. 

(2.) The word demi, when used adjectively and preceding the noun 
is invariable. 

une demiAxewTQ, f., half an hour. 

une cZemz-aune, f. half an ell. 

(3.) When coming after the noun to denote an additional half, it 
agrees in gender with the noun. 

une heure et demie, one hour and a half; 

une aune et demie, one ell and a half. 

(4.) When used substantively, demi may take the form of th» 
plural. 

Cette horloge sonue les heures et TTiat clock strikes the hours and ih& 
les demies. half-hours. 

§ 39. — Oedinal Adverbs. 

^ first ; Quatriemement, fourthly ; 

(1.) Premierement, y in the first Cinquiemement, fifthly; 

) place ; Sixiemement, sixthly ; 

Deuxiemement, [ nndhi • Septiemement, seventhly; 

Secondement, ) ^' Dixiemement, tenthly. 

Troisiemement, thirdly ; 

(2.) These, like adverbs of manner, are formed by the addition of 
ment to the feminine form of the adjective. 

§ 30. — Indefinite Adjectives. 
(1.) The indefinite adjectives are used when anything is to be re- 
presented or referred to in a general or indefinite manner. They are, 



aucun. 


not any, not one ; 


quel. 


what ; 


chaque, 


every, each; 


quelconque, 


whatever ; 


meme, 


same ; 


quelque, 


some ; 


nul, 


no; 


tel, 


such ; 


plusieurs. 


, several ; 


tout, 


all. 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. — § 30. 313 

(2.) AucuN is generally followed by a noun, with which it nxust 
agree. It is followed by ne when it comes before a verb. 

aucun homme, no man ; aucune fecame, no woman. 

Aucun chemin de fleurs ne conduit Ko flowery phih leads to ghry. 
d la gloire. La Fontaine. 

On meprise tous ceux qui w'ont All those who have no virtue ars 

aucune vertu. La Rochefoucauld, despised. 

(3.) Aucun is by the French authors sometimes used in the plural 

Us ne peuvent souffrir aucun em- They can bear no legitimate domin- 
pire legitime, ne mettent aucunes ion, set no hounds to their crimes. 
bomes a lours attentats. 

Montesquieu. 

Aucun and nul should be put in the plural, only before such words 
as are not used in the singular, or have in the singular a different 
acceptation. 

(4.) Chaque is of both genders, and is used only in the singular. 
Jt always precedes the noun, and cannot be separated from it by an 
adjective or by a preposition. It should never be used without a noun. 

Chaque age a ses plaisirs, chaque Every age has its pleasures, every 
etat a ses charmes. Delille. situation Us charms. 

(5.) Meme, placed before the noun, has the sense of same, in Eng- 
lish. Placed after the noun, it means, generally, himself, herself, it- 
self or themselves. It may often be rendered by the word even. 
When mtme is an adjective it may take the form of the plural, but 
does not vary on account of gender. 

c'est la meme vertu ; c'est la vertu meme; 

it is the same virtue. it is virtue itself. 

Le peuple et les grands n'ont ni The people and the great have 

les memes vertus, ni les memes vices, neither the same virtues nor the same 

Vauvenargues. vices. 

Les ecorces memes des vegetans The bark even of vegetables is in 

Bont en harmonie avec les tempera- harmony with the temperature of the 

tures de I'atmosphere. atmosphere. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

(6.) It is at times diflficult to distinguish meme an adjective, from 
meme an adverb, which is invariable. [See § 97, (2,) (3.)] 

(7.) Nul is a stronger negative than aucun. It agrees in gender 
and number with the noun which it qualifies. Like aucun, when re- 
lating to the subject of the sentence, it requires ne before the verbs. 

Nul homme n'est heureux ; nulle . No man is happy ; nothing can 

chose ne peut le rendre tel. Boiste. render him so. 

Nulle paix pour I'impie ; il la No peace for the impious ; he seeks 

chercke, elle le fuit. Racine. it, it avoids him. 

u 



314 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. — 8 80, 



(8). Nul is sometimes used alone, in the sense of no one . 



Uul n'est content de sa fortune, 
ni mecontent de son esprit. 

Mme. Deshouli^res. 



No one is pleased with his forittne^ 
nor displeased with his own wit. 



(9.) Plusieurs is, of course, always in the plural. It does not vary 
its form : 



II faut bien qu'il y ait plusieurs 
ralsons d'ennui, quand tout le monde 
est d'accord pour bailler. Florian. 



TJiere must necessarily he several 
reasons for ennui, when all agree in 
yawning. 

(10.) Quel takes the gender and number of the noun to which it 
relates. It is sometimes immediately followed by its noun, from 
which it may be separated by one or several words : 

Quel tableau ravissant presentent What a delightful picture the 
les campagnesi Delille. country offers/ 



Quelle invisible force a sou mis 
I'univers? L. Eacine. 

Quels sons harmonieux, qu^ls efforts 

ravissants, 
De la reconnaissance egalent les 

accents ? 



What invisible hand has con- 
quered the universe ? 

Wit at harmonious sounds, what 
ravishing strains, equal the voice of 
gratitude ? 



(11.) QuELCONQUE is always placed after the noun, and varies only 
for the plural : 

Toutes les jouissances sont pre- All enjoyments are preceded hy 

cedees d'un travail quelconque. some sort of exertion. 
Mme. Campax. 

Deux points quelconques etant Two points of some kind being 

donnes . . . The Academt, given .... 

(12.) QuELQUE in the sense of some (a certain number), or whatever, 
a«:rees in number with the noim : 



II y a du merite sans elevation, 
mais il n'y a point d'elevation sans 
qudque merite. La Rochefoucauld. 
Quelques vains lauriers que pro- 

meita la guerre, 
On peut etre heros sans ravager la 

terre. Boileau. 

(13.) Quelque having the sense of about or some or however, is in- 
variable : 



Tliere is merit without elevation, 
but there is no elevation without some 
merit. 

Whatever vain laurels war may 
promise, one m,ay he a hero without 
ravaging the earth. 



Quel age avez-vous ? Vous avez 
bon visage 1 Eh ! quelque soixante 
ans. Racine, les Plaideurs. 

Alexandre perdit quelque trois 
cents hommes, quand il vainquit 
Porus. D'Ablancourt. 

Quelque mechants que soient les 
hommes, ils n'oseraient paraitre 
ennemis de la vertu. 

La Rochefoucauld. 



How old are you f You look well. 
Oh ! some sixty years. 

Alexander lost some three hundred 
men, when he vanquished Porus. 

However wicked men may he, they 
do not dare to appear enemies of 

virtue. 



THE PRONOUN. — § 31, 32. 315 

(14) Tel makes in the feminine teUe ; in the plural masculine, 

iels ; in the plural feminine teUes, It agrees with the noun which it 

qualifies : 

tel livre, such hook ; telle lettre, such letter ; 

iels livres, such books; ielles lettres, such letters. 

(15.) Tout meaning every, is of course always in the singular 
but varies for the feminine : 

Tout citoyen doit servir son pays ; Every citizen should serve his 

h soldat de sou sang, le pretre de country ; the soldier with his blood, 

son zele. La Motte. the priest with his zeal. 

En ioute chose, il faut considerer In every thing, we must consider 

la fin. La Fontaine. the end. 

(16.) Tout, in the sense of dll^ agrees in gender and number with 
the noun to which it relates : 

tout I'argent, all the money ; ioute la toUe, all the cloth. 

H etait au-dessus de tous ces Ee was above all those vain objects 

vains objets qui forment tous les which form all the desires and all th& 

desirs et toutes les esperances des hopes of men. 
hommes. Massillon. 

See § 97 (5). 

§ 31. — ^The Peonoitn. 

(1.) The pronoun, in French, as in other languages, is a word 
used to represent the noun, in order to prevent its too frequent 
repetition. 

(2.) The pronoun? serves also to designate the parts which each 
person or thing takes in speech. This part is called person. 

(3.) There are three persons: the first, or that which speaks; the 
second, or that spoken to ; the third, or that spoken of 

(4.) There are five sorts of pronouns : 

The personal; The demonstrative; 

The possessive ; The relative ; 

The indefinite. v 

§ 32, — The Perso:n-al Pkonotjis^s. 
(1.) The personal pronouns are so called because they seem to 
designate the three persons more especially than the other pronouns. 
These pronouns are : 

Reflective Form. 
Singular. Plural. 

myself; nous, ourselves; 
thyself; yoms, yourselves ; 
) himself; 

y herself ; se, themselves; 
) itself; 





Nominative Form. 






Singular. 


Plural. 




1. 


je, I; 


nous, we ; 


me, 


2. 


tu, thou ; 


vous, you, ye ; 


te, 


3. 


i il, he, it, m. ; 


ils, m, they ; 


se, 




(eUe, she, it, f.; 


eUes, f. they. 


SOl, 



316 PBESONAL PRONOUNS. — § 33. 

(2.) Direct regimen^ or Accusative. 
"WTien placed before the verb. When placed after a verb. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

1. me, me; nous, us; moi, me; nous, tLs; 

2. te, thee; vous, you; toi, tJiee ; vous, you; 
' "3, Mm, it-m- , „ 4-l^^ .\ both le, Mm, it m • , ,, ( both 

li /.er, .•^; £ ; ^^^' ^^^^ ' \ gend. la; Aer,' t^,' f. ; ' ^^^' ^^^^' { gend, 
(3.) Indirect regimen^ or Dative. 
When placed before the verb. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. me, to me ; nous, to us ; 

2. te, to thee ; vous, to you ; 
Mm: 






( ^0 7i2 

-^ to he 
( to 2i 



3. lui, K fo ner ; /r. ^i j \ 

' ' ' (both genders). 



"When placed after the verb. 
Singular. Plural. 

moi, a moi, to me ; nous, a nous, to us ; 

toi, a toi, to thee; vous, a vous, to you; 

, . (a lui, I to Mm ; , (a eux, m. ) . ,, 

^"^ \ a eUe, [ to her'; 1^^' ] a elles, f. [ ^^ ^^'"^^ 

(4.) Indirect regimen ; Genitive and Ablative. 
Always placed after the verb. 

Singular. Plural. 

de moi, of or from me ; de nous, of or from us ; 

de toi, " thee; de vous, " you; 

de lui, " Mm; d'eux, " them, m.; 

d'eUe, " her; d'elles, " iAem, f. 

§ 33. — Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 

(1.) The French, as well as the English, use the second person 
plural for the second person singular, in addressing one person. 

(2.) The second person singular, however, is used, as in English, 
in addressing the Supreme Being : 

Grand Dieu! tes jugements sont Great God! thy judgments are 
remplis d'cqtiitc. Des Bareeaux. full of equity. 

(3.) It is also used in poetry, or to give more energy to the diction. 

mon souverain roi ! my sovereign king ! 

Me voici dene tremblante et seule Here I am trembling and alone be- 
devant toi. Racine, Esther. fore thee. 

(4.) It is used by parents to children, and also among intimate friends. 

(5.) The pronoun il is used unipersonally, in the same manner as 
the Enghsh pronoun it. 

il pleut, it rains ; il gele, it freezes. 

(5.) Observe, that the personal pronouns of the third person are 
not used for the indirect regimen to represent inanimate ©bjects. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. — § 33. SlV 

The relative pronouns en, of or from it [§ 39 (17)], t, to it [§ 39 (18)] 
are used instead of the personal pronouns. Thus, in speaking of a 
house, we do not say, Je lul ajouterai une aile, I will add a wing to it. 
"We must say • 

J'y ajouterai une aile ; I will add a wing to it (thereto). 

In speaking of an author, we may say : 

Que pensez-vous de lui ? What do you think of him ? 

But in speaking of his book, we should say : 

QvCen pensez-vous? Wliat do you think of it (thereof) f 

(6.) The word meme, plural mtmes, may be used after the pronoun 
in the sense of self selves. 

le roi lui-meme. the king himself. 

la reine elle-meme. iJie queen herself 

les princes eux-menies. the princes themselves. 

les princesses elles-memes. the princesses themselves. 

(7.) The pronouns, moi, ioi, lui, eux, are often used after the verb, 
to give greater force to a nominative pronoun of the same person, 
in those cases where the emphasis is placed on the nominative in 
English, or where the auxiliary do is used. 

je le dis, moi, I say so, or / do say so. 

il le dit, lui, he says so, or he does say so. 

(8.) The same pronouns, moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of the 
nominative pronouns, je, tu, il, ils, for the English pronouns, I, thou, 
he, they, when those pronouns are employed without a verb in an 
answer, when they are used by themselves, or have a verb under- 
stood after them. 

Qui est arrive ce matin ? Moi. Who arrived this morning ? I. 

Lui et moi. Vous et eux. He and I. You and they. 

Vous ecrivez mieux que lui. You write letter than he. 

Yous lisez aussi bien que moi. You read as well as I. 

(9.) The same pronouns are used in exclamations, and in those 
cases where the English pronouns, /, thou, etc., are followed by the 
relative pronoun who ; also after c'est, Cttait, etc. 

Moi, lui ceder ! I, yield to him! 

Eux, aller a Londresl They, go to London! 

Moi qui suis malade. / who am sick. 

Lui qui est officier. He who is an officer. 

Eux qui sont savants. They ivho are learned. 

C'est moi ; c'est lui. It is I; it is he. 

Ce sont eux. It is they. 

Penelope, sa femme, et moi qui Penelope his wife, and I who am 
Buis son fils, nous avons perdu I'es- his son, have lost the hope of seeing 
perance de le revoir. FiixELOif. him again. 

(10.) These same pronouns are also used instead of the nomi- 
natives, /e, tUf etc., when the verb has several subjects which are all 



318 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. — § 84. 

pronouns or partly nouns and partly pronouns. The verb may then 
be immediately preceded by a pronoun in the pluralj representing in 
one word all the preceding subjects. 

Yotre pere et Tnoi, nous avons Your fatlier and I were a long 
ete longtemps enuemis I'un de time enemies. 
I'autre. Fexelon. 

Rica et moj sommes peuL-etre les Bica and 1 are perhaps the first. 
premiers. Montesquieu. 

(11.) The recapitulating pronoun and the verb sometimes come 
first in the sentence. 

Nous avons, voxis et moi, besoin You and I have need of tolerance. 
de tolerance. Yoltaire. 

(12.) The reflective pronoun se, himself^ etc., is used for both 
genders, and for both numbers ; for persons and for things ; and 
always accompanies a verb. 

Les yeux de Tamitie se trompent The eyes of friendship are seldom 
rarement. Yoltaire. deceived {deceive themselves). 

(13.) The same pronoun has sometimes a reciprocal and sometimes 
a reflective meaning, according to the context : 

ils se flatten t, they flatter themselves. 

ils se flattent, they flatter one another, each other. 

(14.) Sox, himselfj itself, etc., is of both genders and numbers, 
and is apphed to persons and things. It is used in general and inde- 
terminate sentences ; having commonly an indefinite pronoun for 
the nominative : 

On a souvent besoin d'un plus We have often need of one more 
petit que soi. La Fontaine. humble than ourselves. 

II depend toujours de soi d'agir It is always in our power to act 
honorablement. Girault-Duvivier. honorably. 

Etre trop mecontent de soi est To be too much displeased with 
une faiblesse. MiiE. de Sable. one's self is a weakness. 

For additional rules on the personal pronouns, see Syntax, § 98, 
and following. 

§ 34. — Possessive Pro]S"ouns. 

(1.) The possessive pronouns which are formed from the personal 
pronouns, represent, in the radical part, the possessor, while in ter- 
mination they always agree with the thing possessed. Some relate 
to one person, some to several. 

(2.) POSSESSIVES RELATING TO OnE PeRSON. 

The object possessed being in the — 
Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. MascuUne. Feminine. 

1. le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, rnine ; 

2. le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine ; 

3. le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, his, hers, it3. 



POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. — § 35. 319 

(3.) Two OR MORE Persons: 
The object ^possessed being in the — 
Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Mas. and Fern. ' 

le nutre, la nutre, les notres, ours; 
le votre, la votre, les votres, yours; 
le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs. 

§ 35. — Remarks ox the Possessive Pronouns. 
(1.) It may be seen from the above table that, as before said, the 
termination of the possessive pronoun agrees in gender and number 
■with the object possessed. 

Votre canif et le mien, Yotre plume et ei la mienne. .. 

Your penknife and mine. Your pen and mine. 

Yds freres 3t les miens. Tos sceurs et les miennes. 

Your brothers and mine. Your sisters and mine. 

On voit les maux d'autrui, d'un We see the misfortunes of otherSj 

autre oeil que les siens. Corneille, differently from our own. 

Les ministres du roi sentent que Tlie ministers of the "king feel that 

leur gloire, comme la sienne, est their glory, like his own, is in no- 

dans le bonheur national. iional happiness. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

(2.) These pronouns should relate to a noun previously expressed. 
Q^his rule is often violated in mercantile correspondence : 

J'ai regu la voire en date du, etc., I received yours dated the, etc 

is incorrect. It should read thus : 

J'ai regu votre lettre en date du, etc. / received your letter dated, etc. 

(3.) These pronouns may, however, be used absolutely when we 
mean thereby our family, our relatives, or intimate friends. 

Moi, j'ai les miens, la cour, le peu- / have my family or friends, the 

pie a contenter. La Fontaine. court, the people to please. 

Malheureux qui porte chez les Wretched is he who carries among 

siens le glaive et les flambeaux. his fellow-citizens the sword and the 

Colardeau. torch. 

C'est a nous a payer pour les We must hear the penalty of the 

crimes des notres. Racine. crimes of our family or people. 

(4.) Le mien and le tien are also used absolutely as the word mine 
and thine in English, in the sense of possession, property : 

Et le mien et le tien, deux freres And mine and thine, two punctili' 

pointilleux. Botleau. ou^ hrothers. 

Le tien et le mien, sont les sources 3Iine and thine (meum and tuum) 

de toutes les divisions et de toutes are the sources of all divisions and 

les querelles. Girault-Duvivieb. quarrels. 



820 DEMONSTEATIVE PBONOUNS. — § 30, 37. 

§ 36. ^DEMONSTEATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Singular, 
Masculine. Feminine. 

celui-ci, celle-ci, this, 

celui-la, celle-la, that, 

ce, it, they. 
Absolute Demonstrative Pronouns. 





Plural. 




Masculine. 


Feminine. 




ceux, 


celles, 


these; 
those; 


ceux-ci, 


celles-ci, 


these ; 


ceux-la, 


ceUes-la, 


those. 



cela S [ not used in the plural. 



§ 37. — Remaeks on the Demonsteative Peonottns. 
(1.) The demonstrative pronouns celui, ceUe, etc., assume the gen- 
der and number of the nouns which they represent. 

Je ne counais d'avarice permise Meihinks no avarice is allowable 

que celle du temps. it^less it be that of time. 
Stanislas Leczixsky. 

Les seules louanges que le coeur The only praises which the heart 
donne, sont celles que la bonte s'at- gives, are those which goodness de- 
tire. Massellon. serves. 

(2.) These pronouns are sometimes used absolutely before qui, que^ 

dont, etc., in the same manner as the English personal pronouns Ae, 

ihey, etc., before who, whom, etc. 

Celui qui rend un service doit Ee who renders a service should 

Voublier ; celui qui le regoit, s'en sou- forget it ; he who receives it should 

venir. Barthelemy. remember it. 

Aimer ceux qui vous haissent, ceux To love those who hate you, those 
qui vous persecutent, c'est la cbarite who persecute you, is the charity of 
du Chretien ; c'estl'esprit de la reli- tlie Christian ; it is the spi7'it of re- 
gion BouRDALOUE. Ugion. 

(3.) Celui-ci, ceUe-ci, etc. ; celui-la, ceUe-lri, are used when it is de- 
sirable to denote the comparative proximity or remoteness expressed 
in English by the words this and that. 

celui-ci, this one. celui-la, that one. 

(4.) Celui-ci, celui-la, etc., are often used to express contrast or 
comparison. They are then"~equivalent to the English expressions 
the former, the latter ; this one, that one. 

Un magistrat integre et un brave An upright magistrate and a brave 

officier, sont egalement estimables; officer are equally estimable; the 

celui-ld fait la guerre aux ennemis former makes luar against domestio 

domestiques, celui-ci nous protege enemies, the latter protects us against 

contre les ennemis exterieurs. foreign enemies. 

GrIRAULT-DUVIVIER. 

Tel est I'avantage ordinaire Siich is the ordinary advantage 

Qu*ont sur la beaute les talents : which talents possess over beauty; 

Ceux-ci plaisent dans tous les temps ; the former please at all times ; tha 

Celle-ld n'a qu'un temps pour plaire. laitsr has but one time to please, 
Voltaire. 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. — §38,39. 321 

(5.) Ceci, cela, have no plural, and are used only of things. They 
do not refer to a word expressed before, but serve to point out objects : 
prenez ceci, take this. donnez-moi cela, give me that 

J'ai deja dit ce qu'il faut faire, / have already said what should be 
quand uu enfant veut avoir ceci et done, when a child will have this and 
cela. J. J. Rousseau. that. 

(6.) (7(3, a pronoun, must not be confounded with the demonstra- 
tive adjective ce. The pronoun ce is often used without an antece- 
dent, as tlie nominative of the verb etre in the same manner as the 
English pronoun if : 

c'est moi, it is I. c'est vous, it is you. 

Ce u'est plus le jouet d'une flamme It is no longer the sport of an un- 

servUe ; worthy flame ; 

Ceat Pyrrhus ; c'est le fils et le rival It is Pyrrhus ; it is the son. and 

d'AciaiUe. Racine. the rival of Achilles. 

For particular rules on this pronoun, see § 108. 
§ 38. — Relative Pkonoun:s. 

(1.) The relative pronouns are so named on account of the inti- 
mate relation which they have to a noun or pronoun which precedes, 
and of which they recall the idea. The noun or pronoun so preced- 
ing the relative pronoun is called the antecedent. 

(2.) Table of the Relative Pkonouns. 

qui, who, which ; (sujet, nominal.) de qui, of from whom, ) Regime indi- 
que, whom, which; (reg. direct, ace.) dont, of , from whom; y rect, genitive 

which; ) and ablative* 

a qui, to whom ; (regime indirect, dative.) 
lequel, who, which ; composed of the article le and quel. 
Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 

lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, who, which; 

duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, of, from, whichi 
auquel, a laquelle auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

y, to it, of it, etc. en, of it, of them, etc. 

quoi, what, which, why, etc. 

§ 39. — Remarks on the Relative Pronouns. 

(1.) Qui, who, which, is generally the subject or nominative. It is 
used for both genders and numbers, for persons and for things. (See 
No. 6 of this §.) 

(2.) When used for things, qui cannot be preceded by a preposi- 
tion. Its use, in this respect, is restricted to the nominative. 

(3.) It is used relatively and absolutely. 

(4.) It is used relatively when it has an antecedent expressed. 



822 EELATIVE PRONOUNS. — § 39. 

^ Le premier qui fut roi, fut un The first who lecame TciTtg, was an 

pere adore. Aubert. adored father. 

L'amour avidement croit tout ce Love believes eagerly all that flat- 

qui le flatte. Racine, ters it. 

(5.) It is used absolutely when it has no antecedent expressed. 
It then offers to the mind a vague and indeterminate idea. It is 
rendered in EngKsh by he who, she who, they who. 

Qui veut parler sur tout, souvent Who (he who) wishes to speaTc on 

parle au hasard. Andrieux. every subject, speaks often at random. 

Lacbe, quiyent mourir, courageux He loho wislies to die is a coward; 

qui peut vivre. Racine, Jun. he who can support life has oourage. 

Qui ne fait des heureux, n'est He who does not render others 

pas digne de I'etre. hapjjy, is rvot worthy to be so. 

(6.) Qui is also used absolutely "when it is interrogative. It may 
then be nominatif or regime : 

qui parle ? who speaks 7 qui voyez-vous ? whom do you see ? 

(7.) Que, whom, what, which, stands generally for the regime direct. 

This pronoun is used for persons and things. It is of both genders 

and. numbers: 

les lettres que j'ai, the letters which I have. 

las hommes que j'ai vus, the men whom I have seen. 

(8.) It is relative when it has an antecedent : 

La gloire prete un charme aux Glory lends a charm to the horrors 

horreurs ^w'on affronte. which we face. 
Delavigne. 

Des lois que nous suivons, la pre- Of the laws which we follow, the 

miere est rhonneur. Voltaire. first is honor. 

(9.) It is absolute when it has no antecedent, and signifies quelle 
chose ? what thing f quoi ? what ? 

que voulez-vous ? what will you (have) ? 

que dit-on? what do people say ? 

(10.) Quoi, what, is invariable, and said only of things. It may 

be used absolutely and relatively : 

j'ignore ce a quoi 11 pense, I am ignorant of what he thinks. 

In the above sentence it is relative, being preceded by its ante- 
cedent ce. 

(11.) Quoi, when absolute, means quelle chose, what thing? and ig 
used mostly in interrogative and doubtful sentences : 

II y a dans cette affaire je ne sais TJiere is in that affair I know not 

quoi, que je n'entends pas. what, which I do not understand. 
L'Academib. 

II y avait je ne sais quoi dans ses Tliere was I know not what, in his 

yeux pergants, qui me faisait peur. piercing eyes, which inspired me with 

I'enelon. fear. 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. — § 39. 325 

(12.) DoNT, of whom, of which, whose, is used for both genders and 
numbers, for persons and for things. It is always employed rela- 
tively, and is, therefore, always preceded by an antecedent : 

Un plaisir dont on est assure de A pleasure of which we are sure 

se repentir, ne peut jamais etre tran- to repent^ can never he a peaceful 

quille. Mme. db La Valliere. one. 

II faut plaindre le sort du prince We must pity the fate of that un- 

infortune, dont I3 coeur endurci n'a fortunate prince, whose hardened 

jamais pardonae. Chenier. heart has never forgiven. 

(13.) Dont is preferable to de qui, of tuhom^ and duquel, of which. 

When, however, the pronoun has the sense oifrom whom, i. e., when 

used to denote a transfer, de qui is better : 

Le libraire de qui j'al refu ces Tlie looTcseller from whom I have 
livres. received these books. 

(14.) Lequel, laquelle, lesquelles, who, which, should only be 
used in the nominative, and in the direct regimen, in order to avoid 
ambiguity. They may relate to persons or things : 

Cast un eflfet de la divine Provi- It is an act of divine Providence, 
dance, lequel attire I'admiration de which (act) attracts the admiration of 
tout le monde. Bussi-Rabutin. every one. 

(15.) Lequel, preceded by a preposition — that is, duquel, auquel, 
dans lequel, &c., must always be used for things in the indirect regi- 
men. The word qui, as has been mentioned above, cannot relate to 
things in the oblique cases : 

Un livre curieux serait celui dans That would he a curious hook in 

lequel on ne trouverait pas un men- which not a falsehood were found. 
songe. Napoleon. 

La Seine, dans le lit de laquelle The Seine, in the bed of which the 

vienuent se jeter 1' Yonne, la Marne, Tonne, the Marne, and the Oise empty 

et rOise. themselves. 

(16.) Lequel, in all its modifications, may be used absolutely or 
interrogatively : 

lequel ? which one 1 duquel ? of which one ? 

lequel voyez-vous? which one do you see? 

(17.) En, of it, of them. This pronoun is of both genders and 
numbers, and relates almost always to animals and things. It is often 
used for the English words, some, any, when employed absolutely^ 
or even when understood. It is also used as an indirect regimen 
in relation to things, and sometimes, but not often, in relation to 
persons [§ 92 (2)], instead of the personal pronouns lui, elles, eux, 
elles. [§ 103, Rule 1.] 

Voua en parlez, you speak of it. J' en ai, I have some of it. 



824 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 40, 41, 



La fortune a son prix ; rimprudent Fortune has its worth ; the im/- 

en abuse, prudent abuses it, the hypocrite 

L'hypocrite en medit, et I'lionnete speaks evil of it, and the worthy 

bomme en use. Delille. man uses it. " 

Les limites des sciences sont com- The limits of science are like the 

me rhorizon : plus on en approche, horizon, the more we approach (them) 

plus elles reculent, Mme. Necker, the more they recede. 

Li* vie est un depot confie par le Life is a trust confided ly heaven; 

ciel ; to dare to dispose of it, is a crime. 

Oser en disposer, c'est etre criminel. 
G-resset. 

(18.) Y, to it, to them, thereto, of it, etc. This relative pronoun, of 
both genders and numbers, is used instead of d lui, a eUe, en lui, etc. 
It is used of things, and also adverbially in the sense of there. 

JV pense, / think of it. J'y donne mes soins, / devote my care to it. 

J'ai connu le malheur, et jV sais I have known misfortune, and 1 

compatir. Guichard. can sympathize with it. 

Wy songeons plus, cher Paulin; plus Let us think no more of this, dear 

yy pense, Paulin ; the longer I think of it, the 

Plus je sens cbanceler ma cruelle mo7'e I feel my cruel constancy waver. 

Constance. Racine. 

Vous avez pen de bien ; joignez You have but Utile property ; join 

y ma fortune. Dorat. my fortune to it. 

En quelque pays que j'aie ete, j'y In ivhaiever country I have been, 

ai vecu comme si j'eusse dii y passer I lived {there) as if I was to spend 

ma vie. Montesquieu. my life in it. 

(19.) Although numerous instances may be found in -^hich French 
authors have used y with regard to persons, these are licenses which 
it is not desirable to imitate. 

§ 40. IXDEFIKFFE PeONOTINS. 

(1.) The indefinite pronouns indicate persons and things without 
particularizing them ; they are — 



autrui. 


others. 


quiconque. 


whoever, 


chacun. 


every one. 


I'un I'autre, 


one anothef 


on, 


one, people, they. 


Y\m et Tautre, 


both. 


personne, 


no one, nobody. 


tel, 


such. 


quelqu'un, 


some one, somebody. 


tout, 


every thing, all. 



§ 41. — Remaeks o]sr the Indefi:ntte Peonouns. 
(1.) Autrui, others. This pronoun is applied only to persons. It 
has no change of form for gender or number, and is used only as an 
indirect regimen. 

L'honnete homme est discret ; il The gentleman is discreet ; he oh< 

remarque les defauts ^''autrui, mais serves the defects of others, but never 

il n'en parle jamais. St. Evremond. alludes to them. 

Ne fais point a autrui ce que tu ne Do not unto others that which thou 

Voudrais pas qu'on te fit. wouldst not like to be done unto thee. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. — §41. S25 

(2.) Chacttn, every one, each one. When this pronoun is absolute, 
and means every one, everybody, it is invariable. 

Le sens commun n'est pas chose Common sense is no cor.imon 

commune, thing, though every one believes he 

Chacun pourtant, croit en avoir has enough of it. 
assez. Yalaincourt. 

Chacun est prosterne devant les Every one lows before the foriu- 

gens heureus. Destouches. nate. 

(3.) When chacun is used relatively, it may take the form of the 

feminine. 

Chacune de nous (des femmes) se Every one of us {women) thought 
pretendait superieure aux autres ea herself superior in beauty to the 
beaute. . Montesquieu. others. 

(4.) On (one, people, they) is always in the nominative ; and although 
always construed with a verb in the third person singular, it conveys 
most generally the idea of plurahty. It is commonly used in indefinita 
sentences. 

On ^t, people say, they say, it is said. On parle, somebody speaJcs, etc. 

On garde sans remords ce qu'ow We (one, people) keep without re- 
acquiert sans crime. Corneille. morse that which we {one, people) ac- 
quire without crime. 

On relit tout Eacine ; on choisit We {people, they) read again and 
dans Voltaire. Delille. again all Racine ; we (etc.) select in 

Voltaire. 

On ne surmonte le vice qu'en le We conquer vice only by avoid- 
fiiyant. Fenelon. ing it. 

(5.) On, coming immediately after the words et, si, ou, and 

qui, is generally preceded by the article T, used for euphony. 

Ce que Von congoit bien, s'ex- That which we understand well, W6 

prime clairement. Boileau. express clearly. 

C'est d'un roi que Von tient cette It is from a king that we derive 

maxime auguste, this august maxim, that one is only 

Que jamais on n'est grand, qu'autant great in proportion as he is just. 

que Pon est juste. Boileau. 

(6.) Personne, no one, nobody, used as an indefinite pronoun, is 
always masculine and singular. When used as nominative to a verb 
'(^expressed, it is followed by ne. 

n n'est personne qui ne cherche a There is no one who does not seek 

se rendre heureux, — Chinese thought, to render himself happy. 

Personne ne veut etre plaint de ses No one wishes to be pitied on ac- 

erreurs. Yadvenargues. count of his mistakes. 

Note. — The word personne, used as a noun, and meaning a particular 
person, is of the feminine gender. 

(7.) QuELQu'uN, somebody, some one, any one, anybody, used abso- 
lutely, is invariable. 



B26 



INDEFINITE PEOKOFNS. — 8 41. 



Envier quelqu'un c'est s'avouer 
Bon inferieur. Mlle. de L'Espinasse. 

Qutljuun a-t-il jamais doute 
serieusement de I'existeuce de Dieu ? 

GIEAULT-DUVIVIER. 



To envy any one is confessing one's 

self his inferior. 

Has any one ever had serious 
doubts of the existence of God ? 



(8.) Quelqu'un, used relatively, changes for gender and number. It 
has then the sense of some of, some one of. 

Connaissez-vous quelqu'une de ces Do you know any one of those 
dames, quelques-uns de ces mes- ladies^ any of those gentlemen 7 
Bieurs? Gieault-Duvivier. 



(9.) QmcoNQUE, whoever, wliosoever, is generally masculine, and 
has no plural. It is only said of persons : 

Quiconque flatte ses maitres, les 
trahit. Massillon-. 

Quiconque est capable de mentir, 
est indigne d'etre compte au nombre 
des liommes. Fenelon. 



Quiconque est soupconneux, invite 
la trahisoru Voltaire. 



Whoever fiaiters his masters, betrays 
them. 

Whoever is capable of falsehood is 
unworthy to be counted among the 
number of men. 

Whoever is suspicious, invites 
treachery. 



(10.) L'uN l' AUTRE, one another, each other, the one and the other. 
This pronoun makes in the feminine Tune Tautre, and ia the plural 
les uns les autres, les unes les autres : 

Tout le monde se confiait Tun a 
Vautre cette confidence. Rulhieres. 



Tout le pen pie suivit Virginie, les 
uns par cariosite, les autres par con- 
sideration pour Icilius. Yertot. 

II y a deux sortes de ruines ; fune 
I'ouvrage du temps, Vautre I'ouvrage 
des Lommes. Chateaubriand. 



Every body confided one to another 
this communication. ^ 

All the people followed Virginia, 
some through curiosity, some through 
respect for Icilius. 

T/iere are two sorts of ruins ; one 
the work of time, the other the work 
of men. 



(11.) L'uN et l' autre, les uns et les autres, both. This expression' 
inay be used of persons and things : 



La Condamine a parcouru Tun et 
Vautre bemisphere.i Buffox. 

Lun et Vautre consul suivaient 
ses etendards. Cornetlle. 

Sous Vune et Vautre epoque, il 
perit un tres grand nombre de ci- 
toyens. Earth elemy. 

lis se reunissaient les uns et les 
autres contre Feunemi commua 

Girault-Duvivier. 



La Condamine travelled over loth 
hemispheres. 

Both consuls followed his stand- 
ards. 

At both epochs, a large number of 
citizens perished. 

Tliey united with one another 
against the common enemy. 



(12.) Tel, telle, such, many a person, many, is an indefinite 
pronoun in the following and in similar sentences : 

' The noun is in the singular, because the word hemisphere is under- 
stood after the word Vun. This rule is observed by the best French 
authors. 



^ V^tEBS.— § 42. S21 

Tel donne, a pleines mains, qui Many a one may give houniifuUy, 

n'oblige personne. Corn^eille. without obliging any one. 

Td brille au second raug, qui. Many a •person may shine in the 

s'eclipse au premier. Voltaire. second rank, who is eclipsed in the 

first. 

Tel est pris qui croyait prendre. Many are caught while attempting 

La. FoxTAiNE. to catch others. 

Telle, sans aucun attrait pour la Many \a nu7i] for whom reireai 

retraite, se consacre au Seigneur par has no attractions, consecrates herself 

pure flerte. Massillon. to the Lord through mere pride. 

Tels que I'on croit d'inutiles amis, Many friends luhom we think vse- 

dans le besoin rendent de bons less, render us in our need valudbl& 

services. Boursault, services. 

(13.) Tel, in connection with monsieur, madame, etc., as monsieur' 
tin tel, madame une telle, Mr., Mrs. such-a-one is used substantively. 

(14.) Tout, every one, every thing. This word, employed absolutely, 
is invariable. 

A la seule vertu, sois sur quo Be assured that it is with virtue 

tout prospers. F. de Neufchateau. alone, that every thing prospers. 

Tout n'est pas Caumartin, Bignon, Every one is not Caumartin^ 

ni d'Aguesseau. Boileau. Bignon, nor d^Aguesseau. 

Son grand genie embrassait tout. His great genius embraced everij 

Bossuet. thing. 

§ 42. — Verbs. 

(1.) The verb is that part of speech which expresses an action 
done or suffered by the subject, or simply indicates the condition of 
the subject. 

(2.) The subject or nominative of a verb is the person or thing 
doing the action, or beingin the condition expressed by the verb. It 
replies to the question qui est-ce qui? who? for persons; and qu'est- 
ce qui ? which ? what ? for things. 

(3.) Verbs admit two kinds of regimen ; the direct regimen and 
the indirect regimen. 

(4.) The direct regimen, or immediate object, is that which com- 
pletes in a direct manner the signification of & verb ; that is to say, 
without the aid of any other intermediate word. It answers to the 
question qui ? whom ? for persons, and quoi ? what ? for things. 

(5.) The indirect regimen, or remote object, is that which completes 
the signification of the verb by means of an intermediate word, such 
as the prepositions d, de, pour, avec, dans, etc. — a qui ? to whom ? 
de qui ? of or from whom ? pour qui ? for whom ? avec qui ? etc., 
for persons ; and a quoi ? to what ? de quoi ? of or from what ? etc., 
for things. 

(6.) Verbs are regular, irregular, or defective. 1 44, (2). 



S28 VEEBS.— § 43. 



# 



§ 43. — ^DrPFERENT SOETS OF YeEBS. 

(1.) There are five sorts of verbs : activej passive, neuter, reflective 
or pronominal, and unipersonal. 

(2.) The active verb is that which expresses an action performed 
by the subject, and having some person or thing for its object. The 
object is the direct regimen of the verb. 

(3.) Every Prench verb after which quelqu'un^ some one, quelquQ 
those, something, may be placed, is an active verb. Thus, in the fol- 
lowing sentences, proUger, changer, chanter, etc., are active verbs, be- 
cause we may say proUger quelqu'un, to protect some one ; changer 
^uelque chose, to change something. 

Dieu ^ro^e^e rinnocence. Racixe. God protects innocence. 
L'habit change les moeurs. Dress changes the manners. 

YOLTAIRE. 

Les cygnes ne chantent pas leur Swans do not sing their death. 
mort. BuFFON. 

(4.) The passive verb is the contrary of the active verb. The ac- 
tive verb presents the subject as performing an action immediately 
directed towards an object ; whereas the passive verb presents the 
subject as suffering or receiving an action. The passive verb is com- 
posed of the past participle of an active verb and the auxiliary ttre^ 
to be. (See § 54.) 

IsTos campagnes sont fertilisees par Our fields are fertilized ly th« 

la pluie. L'AcADEjriE. ain. 

II etait guide par la force de son He wa^ guided hy the force of his 

genie. Massillox. genius. 

Les petits esprits sont trop Messes Little minds are too much vexei 

des petites choses. with trifles. 
Rochefoucauld. 

(5.) The neuter verb marks, like the active verb, an action per* 
formed by the subject ; but this action can only reach the object in- 
edirectly ; that is, by means of a preposition. Hence it is, that the 
neuter verb never has a direct regimen, and that the words quelqu'un 
and quelque chose cannot be placed after it. A neuter verb can never 
be used in the passive voice. 

Socrate passa le dernier jour de Socrates spent the last day of his 

sa vie a discourir de rimmortalite life in discoursing upon tlie immoT' 

de I'ame. L' Academie. iality of the soul. 

Le feu qui semble eteint, dart The fire which seems extinct^ sleeps 

Eouvent sous sa cendre. Corxeelle. often- wider its ashes. 

Les Plateens citerent les Lacede- The Plateans cited the Lacedemo' 

moniens a comparaltre devant lea nians to appear before the AmphiO' 

AmphictyoDS. Le Gexdre. tyons. 

(6.) The reflective or pronominal verb is conjugated with two pro- 



CONJUGATIONS OP VEBBS. — §44,45. 329 

nouns of the. same person ; je me, iu ie, il se, nous nous, vous vous, ils 

se. (See § 56.) 

Je me flatte, I flatter myself. Vous vous felicitez, you congratu- 

late yourselves. 

II ne faut pas se flatter : les plus We should not flatter ourselves : the 

experimentes ont fait des fautes ca- most experienced have committed cap- 

pitales. BossuET. ital errors. 

Les peuples se feliciteront d'avoir The nations will congratulate them- 

"un roi qui lui ressemble. selves upon having a king who re- 

Massillon. semlles him. 

H ne faut pas permettre a I'homme We should not allow a man to de- 

de se mepriser entierement. spise himself entirely. 

BOSSUET. 

(7.) The unipersonal verb can only be used in the third person 
singular : II pleut, it rains ; il gele, it freezes ; il tonne, it thunders. 

Pour bien juger les grands, ilfaut To judge properly of the great, it is 

les approcher. Aubert. necessary to approach them. 

n faut rendre meilleur le pauvre We should {it is necessary to) im- 

qu'on soulage. Saint-Lambert. prove the poor whom we relieve. 

(8.) There are two A^erbs called auxiliary, because they serve to 
conjugate all others. They are — avoir, to have ; and etre, to he. 

§ 44. — Conjugations. 
(1.) The French verbs are divided into four large classes or conju- 
gations : 

1st. The first conjugation comprises all verbs of which the present of the 
infinitive ends in er ; as parler, to speak ; aimer, to love, etc. 

2d. The second conjugation embraces all those of which the infinitive 
ends in ir; as cherir, to cherish; punir, to punish, etc. 

3d. The third conjugation contains all the verbs, which, in the infinitive 
end in oir ; such as recevoir, to receive ; pouvoir, to he able, etc. 

4th. The fourth conjugation comprises all the verbs terminating with 
RE in the infinitive ; as rendre, to render ; prendre, to take, etc. 

(2.) The verbs are again divided into regular, irregular, and defec" 
iive : 

1st. The regular verbs are those which, in all their tenses, are conjugated 
like the model verb of the conjugation to which they belong. 

2d. The irregular verbs are those which are not, in all their tenses, con- 
jugated like the model verb. 

3d. The defective verbs are those which want certain tenses or persons. 

§ 45. — Modes and Tenses. 
(1.) There are six modes ; the indicative, the conditional, the 
imperative, the subjunctive, the infinitive, and the participle : 

1st. The indicative, whatever may be the tense, indicates or declares in 
a positive, absolute manner : j'abandonne, / abandon ; j'ai abandonue, / 
have abandoned; j'abandonnerai, I will abandon. 



330 



MODES AND TENSES.— 8 45. 



2d. TJie conditional indicates a condition or a supposition : j'abandon- 
nerais si. . . .7 would abandon if. . . . 

3d. The imperative is used to express a command, prayer, or exhorta- 
tion: abandonuez cet enfant, abandon that child. 

4th, The subjunctive is used "ofter propositions expressing doubt, con- 
tingencv, or necessity: il est douteux que je I'abandonne, it is not certain 
thai I may abandon him. 

5th. Tlie infinitive presents the signification of the verb in an unlimited 
manner : abandonner ses enfants, to abandon one's children. 

6th. The participle, while retaining the power of tlie verb, at the same 
time partakes of the nature of an adjective : abandonnant ses parent^ 
abandoning his relatives; abandonne de ses enfants, abandoned by his children, 

(2.) The indicative has eight tenses : 

1st. Tlie present: je parle, I speak ; je donne, I give. 

2d. The simultaneous past, or imperfect: je parlais, I was speaking. 

3d. The past definite : je parlai, / spoke, I did speak. 

4th. The past indefinite : j'ai parle, / have spoken ; j'ai donne, / have given. 

5th, The past anterior: j'eus parle, J had spoken. 

6th. The pluperfect: j'avais parle, I had been speaking. 

•Zth. The future absolute : je parle rai, J shall, will speak. 

8th. The future anterior : j'aurai parle, I shall have spoken. 



(3.) The conditional has two tenses : 

1st. The present or future, je parlerais, 
2d. "The past, j'aurais parle, 

(4.) The imperative has one tense : 

parle, 

(5.) The subjunctive has four tenses : 

1st. The present or futm-e, que je parle, 

2d. The imperfect, que je parlasse, 

3d. The past, que j'aie parle, 

4th. The pluperfect, que j'eusse parle, 

(6.) The infinitive has two tenses : 



1st. The present relative, 
2d. The past, 



parler, 
avoir parle, 



I should, would speak. 
I should have spoken. 



speak. 



that I may speak, 
that 1 might speak, 
that I may have spoken, 
that I might have spoken. 



to speak. 

to have spoken. 



(7.) The participle has three tenses : 

1st. The present relative, parlant, 
2d. The past active, ayant parle, 

3d. The past or passive, parle, 



ving. 
having spoken, 
spoken. 



(8.) Tenses are simple or compound, 

1. Simple^ when they are expressed in a smgle word: je parle, / 
sjpeah. 

2. Compound, when they require the assistance of the verb avoir 
or etre : j'ai parle, / have spoken ; je stiis arrive, / have airived. 



USE OP THE AUXILIARY VERBS.— § 46. 831 

§ 46. — Use of the Auxiliary Verbs, Avoir akd JItre. 

(1.) The auxiliary avoir is used : 

1. In the conjugation of its own compound tenses : j'ai eu, / have 
"had. 

2. In the conjugation of the compound tenses of the verb etre : 
j'ai ete, I have been. 

3. In the compound tenses of the active verbs ; j'ai aime, I have 
loved. 

4. In the compound tenses of most neuter verbs expressing an 
action : j'ai marche, I have walked. [See exceptions to this rule (3.) 
below.] 

5. It is also used in the conjugation of verbs which are always 
unipersonal : il a plu, it has rained ; il a grele, it has hailed, etc. 

(2.) The verb etre is used in the conjugation of : 

1. All the tenses of passive verbs: je suis aime, lam loved. 

2. The compound tenses of all reflective or pronominal verbs : je me 
suis flatte, I have flattered myself; je me suis promene, I have walked. 

3. The compound tenses of the following neuter verbs, though the 
same express action : 



aller, 


to go ; 


naitre, 


to le lorn; 


arriver, 


to arrive; 


tomber, 


to fall; 


choir, 


to fall; 


venir. 


to come ; 


deceder, 


to decease; 


parvenir, 


io succeed; 


mourir, 


to die ; 


devenir, 


to become; 




revenir, 


to return. 





entrer, 


io enter; 


sortir, 


io go out] 


passer, 


to pass ; 


partir. 


to depart ; 


vieillir, 


io grow old; 


grandir, 


to grow ; 


raster. 


to remain, to dwell, 



4. A few unipersonal verbs, which are not always, but occasionally 
such : il lui est arrive un malheur, a misfortune has happened io Mm. 
(3.) A certain number of neuter verbs :' as — 
accourir, to run towards ; 
disparallre, to disappear; 
croitre, to grow ; 

cesser, to cease] 

perir, to perish ; 

monter, to mounts to ascend; 

descendre, to go down; 

take sometimes avoir, and sometimes etre. 

1. They take avoir, when we have in view the action expressed by 
the verb ; 

2. And etre, when situation or condition is the principal idea which 
we wish to express : 

Examples. 

With AVOIR. With ETRE. 

Elle a disparu subitement. EUe est disparue depuis quinzo 

jours. 
She disappeared suddenly. She has been gone a fortnight 



332 USE OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. — §46. 



La fievre a cesse hier. 
The fever ceased yesterday. 

Le iDarometre a descendu de 
plusieurs degres en peu d'heures. 

The barometer went dovjn several 
degrees in afevj hours. 

II a passe en Amerique en tel 
temps. 

He went to America at such a time. 

Le trait a parti avec impetuosite. 

L'ACADEMIE. 

The dart went with impetuosity. 



La fievre est cessee depuis quelque 
temps. 

It is some time since the fever 
ceased. 

II est descendu depuis une lieure. 

He has been down one hour. 

Les chaleurs soni passees. 



The heat is passed. 

Les troupes sont partis depuis sLs 

mois. L'ACADEMIE. 

The troops have been gone si<c 
months. 

Ce grand bruit est cesse. 

Mjie. de Sevigxe. 

That great noise is over {has 
ceased.) 

(4.) Raster and demeurer, when meaning to dwell, to reside, take the 
auxiliary avoir ; when they mean to remain, to he left, they take tire : 



Le sang avait cesse de couler. 

BOISTE. 

TJie blood had ceased to flow. 



AVOIR. 

J'ai reste plus d'un an en Italic. 
Montesquieu. 

I resided Tnore than a year in 
Italy 

II a demeure deux ans a la cam- 
pagne. L'Academie. 

He lived (dwelt) two years in the 
country. 



ETRE. 

Elle donnerait pour vons sa vie, 
le seul bien qui lai soil reste. 

Marmontel. 

She would give for you, her life, 
the only possession which remains to 
her. 

Deux cents hommes sont de- 
meures sur le champ de bataille. 
L'Academie. 

Tlco hundred men remained on the 
field of battle. 



(5.) Echapper, to escape, to pass unnoticed, to le forgotten, takes tho 
auxiliary avoir. In the sense of, to say inadvertently, it takes etre. 



AVOIR. 

Cette difference ne m'a pas echap- 

pe. EOUSSEAU. 

Thai difference has not escaped 
me. 

J'ai retenu le chant, les vers m'oni 
echappe. Yoltaire. 

1 retained the tune, but the verses 
have escaped my memory. 



ETRE. 

Ce mot m'est ecliappe ; pardonnez 
ma francliise. Yoltaire. 

That word escaped my lips ; excuse 
my frankness. 

Excusez les fautes qui pourront 
m^etre echappees. Boileau. 

Excuse the faults which I may have 
committed inadvertently. 



(6.) Convenir, to lecome, to suit, takes avoir. T\^hen it is used in 
the sense of agreeing, or settling upon a price for an article, it takes 
etre. 



Cette maison m'a convenu. 
That house suited me. 



Nous sommes convenus du prix. 
L'Academie. 
We agreed upon the price. 



AXTXILIABT VERBS. — 8 47 



333 



§ 4:1. — Paradigms of the Auxiliary Verbs. 

To familiarize the student with the frequent use made by the 
French, of the indefinite pronoun on [§ 41, (4.)], we have introduced 
it in our conjugation of the verbs. 

(1.) AVOIR, TO ^^F^.— AFFIRMATIYELY. 
Indicative Mod 





SIMPLE TENSES. 


coMPOumy 


TENSES. \ 






PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


J'ai, 




I have 


J'ai eu, 


I have had 


Tu as, 




ihou hast 


Tu as eu, 


ihou hast had 


11 a, 




he has 


11 a eu, 


he has had 


On a, 




one has, people have 


On a eu, 


one has had 


Nous avons, 


we have 


Nous avons eu, 


we have had 


Vous avez, 


you have 


Vous avez eu, 


you have had 


Us ont, 




they have 


lis ont eu, 


they have had 



IMPERFECT. 

J'avais, I had, was having, or I used 

to have 
Tu avais, thou hadst 

II avait, he had 

On avait, one had, people had 

Nous avions, we had 

Vous aviez, you had 

lis avaient, they had 



PLUPERFECT. 



J'avais eu, 



Tu avais eu, 
II avait eu. 
On avait eu, 
Nous avions eu, 
Vous aviez eu, 
lis avaient eu, 



I had had 



ihou- hadst had 

he had had 

one had had 

we had had 

you had had 

they had had 



PAST DEFINITE. 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



J'eus, 
Tu eus, 
II eut. 
On eut. 
Nous eumes, 
Vous eCites, 
lis eurent, 



I had, or did have 

thou hadst. etc. 

he had 

one had, etc. 

we had 

you had 

they had 



J'eus eu, 
Tu eus eu, 
II eut eu, 
On eut eu, 
Nous eumes eu, 
Yous eutes eu, 
lis eurent eu, 



I had had 

thou hadst had 

he had had 

one had had 

we had had 

you had had 

they had had 



nrruRE. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



J'aurai, 
Tu auras, 
11 aura. 
On aura, 
Nous aurons, 
Vous aurez, 
lis auront, 



/ shall or will have 
thou wilt have 
he tvill have 
one luill have 
ive shall have 
you will have 
they will have 



J'aurai eu, 
Tu ouras eu, 
11 aura eu. 
On aura eu, 
Nous aurons eu, 
Vous aurez eu, 
Us auront eu, 



I shall, will have had 

thou shall have had 

he ivill have had 

one will have had 

we luill have had 

you will have had 

they will have had 



334 



AUXILIARY VE 



EBS. — B 47 



— -^ 



Conditional Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
PRESENT. 



J'aurais, 
Tu aurais, 
11 aurait, 
On aurait, 
Nous aurions, 
Vous auriez, 
lis auraient, 
i 



/ should have 

ikou couldst have 

he would have 

one would have 

we would have 

you would have 

they would have 



COMPOUND TENSES. 

PAST. 
J'aurais eu, / should have had 

Tu aurais eu, thou woxddst have had 
11 aurait eu, he should have had 

On aurait eu, one should Jiave had 
Nous aurions eu, we should have had 
Yous auriez eu, you should have had 
lis auraient eu, they should have had 



Impeeative Mode. 



Aie, 

Qu'lI ait, 
Qu'on ait, 
Ayons, 
Ayez, 
Qu'ils aient, 



have thou 

let him have 

let one^ people, them, have 

let us have 

have ye or you 

let them have 



Subjunctive Mode, 

PRESENT. 

Que j'aie, that I may " 

Que tu aies, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait, that he may 

Qu'on ait, that one may 

Que nous ayons, that we may 
Que vous ayez, that you may 
Qu'ils aient, that they may 



PAST. 

Que j'aie eu, that I may ' 

Que tu aies eu, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait eu, that he may 

Qu'on ait eu, that one may 

Que nous ayons eu. that we may 
Que vous ayez eu, that you may 
Qu'ils aient eu, thai they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse, that I might 

Que tu eusses, that thou mightest 

Qu'il eut, that he might 

Qu'on eut, that one might 

Que nous eussions, that we might 



Que vous eussiez, that you might 
Qu'ils eussent, that they might _ 

Infinitive Mode 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse eu, that I might ' 
Que tu eusses eu, thai thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut eu, that he might 

Qu'on eut eu, that one might 
Que nous eussions eu, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez eu, thai you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might ^ 



Avoir, 
Ayant, 



PRESENT. 



PRESENT, 



PAST. 



to have \ Avoir eu, 

Participle. 
having \ Ayant eu, 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 



to have had 



COMPOUND. 



having had 



Eu, 



had 



AUXILIARY VERBS. — §47. 



835 



(2.) AVOIR, TO EAVE: COiTJUGATED NEaATIVELT. 
Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



Je n'ai pas, 
Tu n'as pas, 
II n'a pas, 
Oa n'a pas, 
Nous n'avons pas, 
Vous n'avez pas, 
lis n'ont pas, 



/ have not 

thou hast not 

he has not 

one has not 

we have not 

you have not 

they have not 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je n'ai pas eu, 
Tu n'as pas eu, 
.11 n'a pas eu, 
On n'a pas eu, 
Nous n'avons pas eu, 
Yous n'avez pas eu, 
lis n'ont pas eu, 



/ have ' 

thou hast 

he has 

one has 

we have 

you have 

they have 






IMPERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT. 



Je n'avais pas, 
Tu n'avais pas, 
11 n'avait pas, 
Oil n'avait pas. 
Nous n'avions pas, 
Vous n'aviez pas, 
lis n'avaient pas, 



/ had not 

thou hadst not 

he had not 

one had not 

we had not 

you had not 

they had not 



Je n'avais pas eu, 
Tu n'avais pas eu, 
II n'avait pas eu, 
On n'avait pas eu, 
Nous n'avions pas eu 
Vous n'aviez pas eu, 
lis n'avaient pas eu, 



Ihad^ 

thou hadst 

he had 

one had 

we had 

you had 

they had ^ 



PAST DEFINITE. 



PAST ANTERIOR, 



Je n'eus pas, 
Tu n'eus pas, 
11 n'eut pas, 
Oa n'eut pas, 
Nous n'eumes pas, 
Vous n'eutes pas, 
lis n'eurent pas, 



/ had not 

thou hadst not 

he had not 

one had not 

we had not 

you had not 

they had not 



Je n'eus pas eu, 
Tu n'eus pas eu, 
II n'eut pas eu. 
On n'eut pas eu, 
Nous n'eumes pas eu 
Vous n'eutes pas eu, 
Us n'eurent pas eu. 



I had'] 

thou hadst 

he had I 

one had 

we had 

you had 

they had 






FUTURE. 

Je n'aurai pas, / shall not ' 

Tu n'auras pas, thou wilt not 

II n'aura pas, he will not 

Oa n'aura pas, one will not 
Nous n'aurons pas, we shall not 

Vous n'aurez pas, you shall not 

Us n'auront pas, they will not 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

Je n'aurai pas eu, I shall "" 

Tu n'auras pas eu, thou shall 
11 n'aura pas eu, he will 

On n'aura pas eu, one will 

Nous n'aurons pas eu, we will 
Vous n'aurez pas eu, you will 
lis n'auront pas eu, they will ^ 



Conditional Mode. 



PRESENT. 

Je n'aurais pas, / should ^ 

Tu n'aurais pas, thou wouldst 
II n'aurait pas, he would 

On n'aurait pas, one would 

Nous n'aurions pas, we would 
Vous n'auriez pas, you would 
lis n'auraient pas, they would ^ 



PAST. 

Je n'aurais pas eu, I should 
Tu n'aurais pas eu, thou shouldst 
II n'aurait pas eu, he would 
On n'aurait pas eu, one would 
Nous n'aurions pas eu, we would 
Vous n'auriez pas eu, you would 
lis n'auraient pas eu, they would ^ 



>- ?» 



336 



AUXILIAET VEEBS. — 8 47. 



Imperative Mode. 



N'aie pas, 
Qu'il n'ait pas, 
Qu'oQ n'ait pas, 
N'ayons pas, 
N'ayez pas, 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, 



have not 
let him not have 
let one not have 
let us not have 
have not ye or you 
let them not have 



Subjunctive Mode. 



SIMPLE TEN'SES. 
PRESENT. 

Que je n'aie pas, that I may " 
Que tu n'aies pas, that thou 

may est 
Qu'Q n'ait pas, that he may 

Qu'on n'ait pas, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas, that we 

may 
Que vous n'ayez pas, that you 

may 
Qu'ils n'aJent pas, that they may 



COMPOUND TENSES. 

PAST. 

Que je n'aie pas eu, that 1 may 
Que tu n'aies pas eu, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas eu, that he may 
Qu'on n'ait pas eu, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas eu, that 

we may 
Que vous n'ayez pas eu, that 

you may 
Qu'ils n'aient pas eu, that they 
may 



mPERPECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas, that I might 

Que tu n'eusses pas, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il n'eut pas, that he might 
Qu'on n'eut pas, that one might 

Que nous n'eussions pas, that 

we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas, that you 

might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas, that they 

might 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas eu, that I 

might 

Que tu n'eusses pas eu, that 

thou mightest 

Qu'U n'eut pas eu, that he might 

Qu'on n'eut pas eu, that one 

might 
Que nous n'eussions pas eu, that 

we migJit 
Que vous n'eussiez pas eu, thai 

you might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu, thai 
they might 



PRESENT. 

No pas avoir, 

PRESENT. 

N'ayant pas, ^ 



Infinitive Mode. 

not to have \ N'avoir pas eu, 
Participle. 



PAST. 



not to have had 



COMPOUND. 

not having \ N'ayant pas eu, not having 

Past or Passive. 
Pas eu, Not had 



h<fi 



AUXILIABT VEEBS. — § 47. 



88Y 



(3.) AYOIR,— INTERROaATIYELY. 
Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSE3. 



PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 




Ai-je? 


have If 


Ai-je eu ? 


have I ' 




As-tu? 


hast thou f 


As-tu eu? 


hast thou 




A-t-a?i 


has he? 


A-t-il eu? 


has he 


«.. 


A-t-on ?* 


has one ? 


A-t-on eu ? 


has one 


^1 


Avons-nous ? 


have we ? 


Avons-nous eu? 


have we 


-< 


Avez-vous ? 


have you ? 


Avez-vous eu ? 


have you 




Ont-ils ? 


have they t 


Ont-ils eu ? 


have they _ 




IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 




Avais-je? 


had If 


Avais-je eu ? 


had I' 




Avais-tu ? 


hadst thou f 


Avais-tu eu ? 


hadst thou 




Avait-il? 


had he ? 


Avait-il eu ? 


had he 


•.. 


Avait-on ? 


had one f 


Avait-on eu ? 


had one 


■'q 


Avions-nous ? 


had we ? 


Avions-nous eu 7 


had we 


rfa 


Aviez-vous ? 


had you f 


Aviez-vous eu ? 


had you 




Avaient-ils ? 


had they ? 


Avaient-ils eu ? 


had they ^ 




PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 




Eus-je? 


had I? 


Eus-je eu ? 


had I' 




Eus-tu ? 


hadst thou ? 


Eus-tu eu ? 


hadst thou 




Eut-il ? 


had he f 


Eut-il eu ? 


had he 


<«. 


Eut-on? 


had one f 


Eut-on eu ? 


had one 


■'a 


Eumes-nous ? 


had we? 


Eumes-nous eu ? 


had we 


r«t 


Elites- vous ? 


had you ? 


Eutes-vous eu? 


had you 




Eurent-ils ? 


had they f 


Eurent-ils eu? 


had they ^ 




FUTURE. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 




Aurai-je ? 


shall I have f 


Aurai-je eu ? 


shall r 




Auras-tu ? 


Shalt thou have ? 


Auras-tu eu ? 


shall thou 


•>. 


Aura-t-il? 


will he have ? 


Aura-t-il eu ? 


shall he 


'§ 


Aura-t-on ? 


shall one have ? 


Aura-t-on eu ? 


shall one 


.•< 


Aurons-nous ? 


shall we havef 


Aurons-nous eu 7 


shall we 


1 


Aurez-vous ? 


will you have ? 


Aurez-vous eu ? 


shall you 


Auront-ils? 


shall they have f 
Condition 


Auront-ils eu? 
AL Mode. 


shall they , 




PRESENT. 


PAST. 




Aurais-je ? 


should I have? 


Aurais-je eu ? 


should I ' 




Aurais-tu ? 


shouldst thou have ? 


Aurais-tu eu ? 


wouldst thou 


««» 


Aurait-il ? 


should he have ? 


Aurait-il eu? 


would he 


1 


Aurait-on ? 


would one have? 


Aurait-on eu? 


should one 


► "^ 


Aurions-nous ? 


would we have 7 


Aurions-nous eu ? 


should we 


1 


Auriez-vous ? 


should you have ? 


Auriez-vous eu ? 


should you 


Auraient-ils ? 


should they have ? 


Auraient-ils eu? 


would they __ 






» See Lesso 


a 4, Rule 6. 








1. 


5 







S38 



AUXILIARY VERBS. — 5 47. 



(4.) AYOIEj—NEaATITELT AND INTERROGATIYELT. 
Indicatite Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 


COMPOUOT) TEiN-SES. 




PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFDflTE. 




N'ai-je pas ? 


have I not? 


N'ai-je pas eu? have I' 




N'as-tu pas ? 


hast thou not ? 


N'as-tu pas eu ? hast thou 




N'a-t-Q pas ? 


has he not ? 


N'a-t-il pas eu? has he 


«». 


N'a-t-on pas ? 


has one not ? 


N'a-t-on pas eu ? has one 


-r§ 


N'avons-nous pas ? 


have we not ? 


N'avons-nous pas eu ? have we 


1 


N'avez-vous pas ? 


have you not ? 


N'avez-vous pas eu ? have you 


N'ont-Uspas? 


have they noti 


N'ont-ils pas eu ? have they ^ 




niPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 




N'avais-je pas ? 


had I not ? 


N'avais-je pas eu ? Jiad J ' 




N'avais-tu pas? 


hadst thou not ? 


N'avais-tu pas eu ? hadst thou 




N'avait-il pas ? 


had he not ? 


N'avait-il pas eu? had he 




N'avait-on pas? 


had one not ? 


N'avait-on pas eu ? had one 


. « 


N'avions-nous pas ? 


had we not ? 


N'avio?)S-nous pas eu? had we 


1 


N'aviez-vous pas ? 


had you not ? 


N'aviez-vous pas eu ? had you 


s: 


N'avaient-ils pas? 


had they not f 


N'avaient-ils pas eu? had they ^ 




PAST EEFIXITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 




K'eus-je pas ? 


had I not? 


N'eus-je pas eu ? had I ' 




N'eus-tu pas? 


hadst thou not 7 


N'eus-tu pas eu ? hadst thou 




K'eut-il pas ? 


had he not f 


N'eut-il pas eu ? had he 


^ 


N'eut-on pas ? 


had one not ? 


N'eut-on pas eu? had one 


--< 


N'eumes-nous pas ? 


had we not ? 


N'eumes-nous pas eu ? had we 


■s 


N'eutes-vous pas ? 


had you not ? 


N'eutes- vous pas eu ? had you 


s 


N'eurent-ila pas ? 


had they not ? 


N'eurent-ils pas eu ? Jiad they ^ 




FUTUEB. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 





N'aurai-je pas ? 
N'auras-tu pas ? 
N'aura-t-il pas ? 
N'aura-t-on pas? 
N'aurons-nous pas ? 
N'aurez- vous pas? 
N'auront-ils pas? 



shaUI'' 




shaU thou 


*i. 


shall he 




shall one 


' rSi 


shall we 


o 


shaU you 


R 


shall they ^ 





N'aurai-je pas eu ? shall I ' 

N'auras-tu pas eu ? shalt thou 
N'aura-t-il pas eu ? shall he 
N'aura-t-on pas eu ? shall one 
N'aurons-nous pas eu ? sJmll we 
N'aurez- vous pas eu ? shall you 
N'auront-ils pas eu ? shall they ^ 



Conditional Mode. 



PAST. 



N'aurais-je pas ? should I 

N'aurais-tu pas ? shouldst thou 
N'aurait-il pas ? should he 

N'aurait-on pas ? should one 
N'aurions-nous pas ?. should we 
N'auriez-vous pas ? should you 
N'auraient-ils pas ? should they 



^J 



N'aurais-je pas eu ? should I 
N'aurais-tu pas enlshovMst thou 
N'aurait-il pas eu ? should he 
N'aurait-on pas eu ? should one 
N'aurions-nous pas enf should we 
N'auriez-vous pas eu "^should you 
N'auraient-ils pas eu ? should 
ihey J 



A.1TXILIAIIT VERBS. — 5 47. 



339 



(5.) ifiTRE, to 5^,— AFFIRMATITELT. 
Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



Je suig, 
Tues, 
II est, 
On est, 

ISTous sommes, 
Yous etes, 
lis sont, 



lam 

thou art 

he is 

one is 

we are 

ye or you are 

they are 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



J'ai ete, 
Tu as e'te, 
II a ete, 
On a ete, 
Nous avons ete, 
Yous avez ete, 
lis ont ete, 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

I have "been 

, thou hast teen 

he has teen 

one has been 

we have teen 

you have teen 

they have been 



Jetais, 
Tu etais, 
11 etait, 
On etait, 
Kous etiong, 
Yous etiez, 
lis etaient, 



IMPERFECT. 

I was or / v^ed to be 

thou wast 

he was 

one was 

we were 

you were 

they were 



PLUPERFECT. 



J'avais ete, 
Tu avals ete, 
II avait ete, 
On avait ete, 
Nous avions ete, 
Yous aviez ete. 
Us avaient ete, 



/ had been 

thou hadst been 

he had been 

one had been 

toe had been 

you had been 

they had been 



PAST DEFINITE, 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je fus, 
Tufus, 
II fut. 
On fut, 
Nous fumes, 
Yous fiites, 
Us furent. 



/ was 

thou wast 

he was 

one was 

we were 

you were 

they were 



J'eus ete, 
Tu eus ete, 
II eut ete, 
On eut ete, 
Nous eumes ete, 
Yous elites ete, 
lis eurent ete, 



I had been 

thou hadst been 

he had been 

one had been 

we had been 

you had been 

they had been 



FUTURE. 



Je serai, 
Tu seras, 
B sera^ 
On sera, 
Nous serons, 
Yous serez, 
lis seront, 



I shall be, will be 
thou wilt be 
he shall be 
one shall be 
we shall be 
you shall be 
they shaU be 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

J'aurai ete, J shall 

Tu auras ete, thou shall 

II aura ete, he shall 

On aura ete, one shall 

Nous aurons ete, we shall 

Yous aurez ete, you will 

lis auront ete, they will ^ 



Conditional Mode. 



PRESENT. 



Je seraig, 
Tu serais, 
II serait, 
On serait, 
Nous serions, 
Yous seriez, 
lis seraient, 



I should be 

thou shouldsi be 

he would be 

one should be 

we would be 

you should be 

they would be 



PAST. 



J'aurais ete, 
Tu aurais 6te, 
II aura it ete, 
On aurait ete, 
Nous aurions et(5, 
Yous auriez ete. 
Us auraient ete, 



/ should 

thou shouldst 

he would 

one would 

we would 

you should 

they should 



340 



AUXILIARY VERBS. — § 47- 

Imperative Mode. 



Sois, 


he thou 


Qu'il soit, 


let him be 


Qu'on soit, 


let one be 


Soyous, 


lei us be 


Soyez, 


be ye or you 


Qu'ils soienl^ 


let them be 



Subjunctive Mode. 



SrMTLE TENSES. 



Que je «3oig, that I may he 
Que tu sois, that thou mayest be 

Qu'il soit, that he may he 

Qu'on soit, that one may be 
Que nous soyons, that ice may be 

Que vous soyez, that you may be 

Qu'ils soient, that they may he 



COMPOUND TENSES. 

PAST. 

Que j'aie ete, that I may 

Que tu aies ete, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait ete that he may 

Qu'on ait ete, that one may 
Quo nous ayons ete,(hatwe may 
Que vous ayez ete, that you may 
Qu'ils aient ete, that they may ^ 



Imperfect. 

Que je fusse, that I might he 

Que tu fusses, that thou mighiest be 

Qu'il fut, that he might be 

Qu'on fut, thai one might he 

Que nous fiissions, that we might be 

Que vous fussiez, that you might be 

Qu'ils fussent, thai they might he 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse ete, thai I might 
Que tu eusses ete, that thou 

mighiest 
Qu'il eut ete, that he might 

Qu'on eut ete, thai one might 
Que nous eussions ete, thai we 

might 
Que vous eussiez ete, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent ete, that they 

might 



ttte, 



£tant, 



PRESEKT. 



Infinitive Mode. 

to he I Avoir ete. 
Participle. 

being \ Ayant ete. 

Past or Passive. 
£t6, been 



past. 



to have been 



compound. 



having been 



BEGULAE VERBS.— S 48 



841 



§ 48. — ^Regular Verbs. 
FIRST CONJUGATION",— ENDING IN EB. 

MODEL VEEB. 

CHANTER, TO SING. 
Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TEXSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je chante, 
Tu chantes, 
II chante, 
On chante, 
Nous chantons, 
Vous chantez, 
Us chantent, 



/ sing 

ihou singest 

he sings 

one sings 

we sing 

you sing 

they sing 



IMPERFECT. 



Je chantais, I was 



Tu chantais, 
11 chantait. 
On chantait, 
Nous chantions, 
Vous chantiez, 
lis ohantaient. 



singing, or I 

used to sing 

ihou wast singing 

he loas singing 

one was singing 

we were singing 

you were singing 

they were singing 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Je chantai, 
Tu chantas, 
11 chanta. 
On chanta, 
Nous chantames, 
Vous chantates, 
Us chanterent. 



J sang or did sing 

ihou sangest 

he sang 

one sang 

we sang 

you sang 

ihey sang 



Je chanterai, 
' Tu chanteraa, 
11 chantera. 
On chantera. 
Nous chanterons 
Vous chanterez, 
lis chanteront, 



FUTURE. 

J shall or will sing 

ihou wilt sing 

he will sing 

one will sing 

we shall sing 

you will sing 

ihey will sing 



J'ai chante, 
Tu as chante, 
II a chante, 
On a chante, 
Nous avons chante, 
Vous avez chante, 
lis ont chante, 



I have sung 

thou hast sung 

he has sung 

one has sung 

we have sung 

you have sung 

they have sung 



PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais chante, 



I had 



Tu avals chante, 
II avait chante, 
On avait chante, 
Nous avions chantCj 
Vous aviez chante. 
Us avaient chante, 



ihou had^ 

he had 

one had 

we had 

you had 

they had 



r^ 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



J'eus chante, 
Tu eus chante, 
II eut chante, 
On eut chante, 
Nous eumes chante, 
Vous elites chante, 
lis eurent chante. 



I had sung 

ihou hadst sung 

he had sung 

one had sung 

we had sung 

you had sung 

they had sung 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 



J'aurai chante, 
Tu auras chante, 
II aura chante, 
On aura chante, 
Nous aurons chante, 
Vous aurez chante, 
ILs auront chante, 



/ will 

ihou shalt 

he will 

one will 

we shall 

you will 

ihey shall _ 



Conditional Mode. 



PRESENT. 

Je chanterais, I should, would sing 
Tu chanterais, thou shouldst sing 



PAST. 



II chanterait, 
On chanterait, 
Nous chanterions, 
Vous chanteriez, 
Ua chauteraient^ 



he should sing 
one should sing 

we would sing 
you would sing 
ihey would sing 



J'aurais chante, I should 

Tu aurais chante, thou wouldst 
II aurait chante, he would 

On aurait chante, one would 
Nous aurions chante, we would 
Vous auriez chante, you would 
lis auraient chante, ihey would ^ 



842 



BBGXTLAE VEEBS.— §48, 



Impeeatite Mode. 



Cha-nte, 
Qu'il chante, 
Qu'on chante, 
Chan tons, 
Chantez, 
Qu'ils chantent, 



sing thou 
let him sing 
let one sing 
let us sing 
sing ye or you 
let ihem sing 



Subjunctive Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
PRESENT. 

Que je chante, that I may sing 

Que tu chantes, that thou may est sing 

Qu'il chante, that he may sing 

Qu'on chante, that one may sing 

Que nous chantions, that we may sing 

Que -^us chantiez, that you may sing 

Qu'ils chantent, that they may sing 



COMPOITNT) TENSES. 
PAST. 

Que j'aie chante, that I may ' 
Que tu aies chante, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il ait chante, that he may 
Qa'on ait chante, that one may 
Que nous ayous chante, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez chante, that you 

may 
Qu'ils aient chante, ^Aa^ they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je chatitasse, that I might sing 
Que tu chantasses, that thou mighiest 

sing 
Qu'il chantat, that he might sing 

Qu'on chantat, that one might sing 
Que nous chantassions, that we might 

sing 
Que vous chantassiez, that you might 

sing 
Qu'ils chantassent, that they might 

sing 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse chante, that I might ' 
Que tu eusses chante, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut chante, that he might 
Qu'on eut chante, that one might 
Que nous eussions chante, that 

loe might 
Que vous eussiez chante, that 

you might 
Qu'Us eussent chante, thai they 
might 



\ Infinitive Mode. 

present. past. 

Chanter, to sing \ Avoir chante, to have sung 



Chantant, 



Participle, 
present. compound. 

singing | Ayant chante, having sung 



PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Chante, sung 



pecitliae verbs. — § 49. 84^ 

§ 49. — Remarks on the Peculiaeitie3 of some; Verb? 
OF THE First Conjugation. 

(1.) In verbs ending in ger^ in order to retain the soft pronunciation 
of the (7/ the e of the infinitive is preserved, whenever the g would 
come before a, or : 

Nous mangeons, we eat ; instead of nous mangons ; 

Je mangeai, I did eat; " je mangai; 

Jugeant, judging; " Jugant. 

(2.) In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i, before e. es, entf 
and e (not accented), followed by r and one or more vowels : 

Je paie, / pay ; instead of je paye ;^ 

lis essaient, they try; *' ils essay ent ; 

Je paierai, I will pay; " je payer ai. 

(3.) In verbs terminating in cer,^ to preserve to the c its soft pro- 
nunciation, a cedilla (5) is put under it, when it comes before a ov o : 

Commengant, commencing; instead of commencant; 

Nous placoas, we place; " nous placons; 

(4.) In verbs ending in eter and eler, the t or Z of the infinitive is 
doubled, when it comes before e, es, ent and e (not accented), followed 
by r and one or more vowels : 

J'appelle, I call; instead of fappele; 

Je jetterai, / will throw ; " je jeierai ; 

J'appellerais, I would call; " j^appelerais. 

(5.) The following verbs form exceptions to the last rule : 



Acheter, 


to buy ; 


Decolleter, 


to uncover the throat; 


Bourreler, 


to torment; 


Etiqueter, 


to ticket; 


Congeler, 


to congeal; 


Geler, 


to freeze; 


CoUeter, 


to collar ; 


Harceler, 


to teaze; 


Coqueter, 


to coquet; 


Peler, 


to peel; 


De'celer, 


to detect; 


Suracheter, 


to over buy ; 


Degeler, 


to throw ; 







In the above verbs, when the t or I comes before e, es, ent, or e (not 
accented) followed by r and one or more vowels, a grave accent (^) 
is put over the e^ which precedes the t or I: 

Je pele, I peel ; . Je pelerai, I will peel; 

J'achete, I buy; J'acheterai, I will buy; 

(6.) A grave accent is also used in verbs ending in 

ecer, emer, ener, ever: 

^ See Lesson 3, 9. 

2 Some French authors, however, retain the y in verbs of this class. 

3 This rule applies also to and u in verbs of the third conjugation, 
ending in cevovr, Je regois, / receive ; J'apergois, / perceive. 



844 



EEGTJLAR VEBBS. — 8 50. 



and the acute accent of the inj&nitive of those ending in 

ecer, egler, eler, erer, 

ebrer, egner, emer, eter, 

echer, egrer, ener, etrer, 

eder, eguer, equer, 

is changed into a grave one, when the consonant following the first 
c of these terminations, comes before e, es, ent, and e (not accented)^ 
followed by r and one or more vowels : 

Je seme, I sow; Je mene, Head; 

Je celebrerai, I will celebrate ; II regnera, he wiU reign. 

(7.) In the tables of peculiar, irregular, defective, and unipersonal 
verbs, we wOl place a model verb of each class embraced in the pre- 
ceding remarks, and also include, in the same table, the names of the 
principal verbs coming under these remarks, with reference to the 
models, 

§ 50. — Regular Yekbs. — Continited. 

SECOND CONJUaATION,— ENDING IN IH. 

MODEL VERB. 

EINIE, TO FINISH 
Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TEKSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PEESENT. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je finis, 
Tu finis, 
II finit. 
On finit, 
Nous finissons, 
Vous finissez, 
lis finissent, 



I finish 

thou finishest 

he finishes 

one finishes 

we finish 

you finish 

they finish 



J'ai fini, 
Tu as fini, 
II a fini, 
On a fini, 
Nous avons fini, 
Vous avez fini, 
lis ont fini, 



I have finished 

thou hast finished 

he has finished 

one has finished 

we have finished 

you have finished 

they have finished 



IMPERFECT. 

Je finissais, I was finishing, or used 

to finish 
Tu finissais, thou wast finishing 

II finissait, he was finishing 

On finissait, one was finishing 

Nous finissions, we were finishing 
Yous finissiez, you were finishing 
lis finissaient, they were finishing 

PAST DEFINITE. 

I finished, did finish 

thou didst finish 

he finished 

one did finish 

we finished 

you finished 

they finished 



PLUPERFECT.^ 

J'avais fini, / had finished 



Tu avais fini, 
II avait fini, 
On avait fini, 
Nous avions fini, 
Vous aviez fini, 
lis avaient fini, 



thou hadst finished 

he had finished 

one had finished 

• we had finished 
you had finished 
they had finished 



Je finis, 
Tu finis, 
II finit, 
On finit, 
Nous finimes, 
Vous finites, 
lis finirent, 



PAST ANTERIOR. 

J'eus fini, / had finished 



Tu eus fini, 
II eut fini. 
On eut fini, 
Nous eumes fini, 
Vous eutes fini, 
Ds eurent fini, 



thou hadst finished 

he had finished 

one had finished 

we had finished 

you had finished 

they had finished 



REGULAR VERBS. — 5 60 



345 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je finirai, 
Tu finiras, 
II finira, 
On finira, 
Nous finirons, 
Vous finirez, 
lis finiront, 



I shall finish 
thou wilt finish 
he will finish 
one will finish 
we shall finish 
you will finish 
they will finish 



J'aurai fini, 
Tu auras fini, 
II aura fini, 
On aura fini, 



/ shall have " 
thou wilt have 
he shall have 
one shall have 



Nous aurons fini, we shall have 
Yous aurez fini, you will have 
lis auront fini, they shall have 



Conditional Mode. 



PAST. 



Je finirais. 


I would finish 


J'aurais fini, 


I should ^ 




Tu fiuirais. 


thou shouldsi finish 


Tu aurais fini, thou wouldst 


1 


11 finirait, 


he would finish 


11 aurait fini. 


he might 


On finirait. 


one might finish 


On aurait fini, 


one should 


■f 


Nous finiriona, 


we would finish 


Nous aurions fini, 


we would 


Vous finiriez, 


you might finish 


Yous auriez fini, 


you might 


i 


Us finiraient, 


they should finish 

Imperati 

Finis, 

Qu'il finisse, 
Qu'on finisse, 
Finissons, 


lis auraient fini, 

VE Mode. 

finish thou 
lei him, finish 
let one finish 
let us finish 


they should ^ 






Finissez, 


finish ye or you 






Qu'ils finissent, 


let them finish. 






SUBJUNCTI 


VE Mode. 






PRESENT. 


PAST. 







Que je finisse, that I may ' 

Que tu finisses, that thou may est 
Qu'il finisse, that he may ^ 

Qu'on finisse, that one may > -g 
Que nous finissions, that we may ^ 
Que vous finissiez, that you may 
Qu'ils finissent, that they may 



Que j'aie fini, that 1 may 

Que tu aies fini, that thou may est 
Qu'il ait fini, that he may 

Qu'on ait fini, that one may 
Que nous ayons fini,^Aa^ we may 
Que vous ayez fiva^that you may 
Qu'ils aient fini, that they may ^ 



imperfect. 

Que je finisse, that I might 
Que ta finisses, i7ia< thou mighiest 

Qu'il finit, that he might 

Qu'on finit, that one might 

Que nous finissions, that we 

might 
Que vous finissiez, that you 

might 
Qu'ils finissent, thai they might ^ 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse fini, that I might "" 
Que tu eusses fini, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut fini, that he might 
Qu'on eut fini, that one might 
Que nous oussions fini, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez fini, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent fini, ^^aUAeymi^A^ ^ 



346 



EEGULAB VEEBS.-^§ 61 



Infinitive Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

PEESENT. PAST. 

Pinir, to Jinish \ Ayoit &i[, to have finished 

Participle, 
present. compound. 

Finissant, finishing \ Ayant fini, having finished 

Past or Passive. 
Pini, 



§ 51. — Regular Verbs, — Continued. 
THIRD CONJUGATION",— ENDING IN 

MODEL VERB. 

RECEYOIR, TO RE QEIYE. 
Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je regoiSji 
Tu re^ois, 
II regoit, 
On regoit, 
Nous recevons, 
Yous recevez, 
Rs regoivent, 



I receive 

thou receivest 

he receives 

one receives 

we receive 

you receive 

they receive 



J'ai reyu, 
Tu as regu, 
II a regu, 
On a re§u, 
Nous avons recu, 
Yous avez regu, 
lis ont re9u, 



/ have received 

thou hast received 

he has received 

one has received 

we have received 

you have received 

they have received 



Je recevais, 

Ta recevais, 
11 reeevait, 
On reeevait, 
Nous recevions, 
Yous receviez, 
Da recevaient, 



DIPERFECT. 

/ was receiving, or / 

used to receive 

thou wast receiving 

he was receiving 

one was receiving 

we were receiving 

you were receiving 

they were receiving 



PLUPERFE'^T. 

J'avais regu, J had received 

Tu avais Tegn,thou hadst received 
II avait refu, he had received 
On avait regu, one had received 
Nous avions regu, we had received 
Yous aviez TQ<pji,you had received 
Rs avaient XQi^n^they had received ^ 



PAST DEFINITE. 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je re9us, 
Tu refus, 
II re9ut, 
On regut, 
Nous regumes, 
Yous reciites, 
Rs regurent, 



I received or did receive J'eus regu 



thou receivedsi 

he received 

one received 

we received 

you received 



Tu eus re9u, 
II eut re9u, 
On eut regu, 
Nous eumes regu, 
Yous eutes recu, 



they received I Rs eurent regu, 



I had received 

thou hadst received 

he had received 

one had received 

we had received 

you had received 

they had received 



» See note 2, § 49, (3.) Also, § 52. 



REGULAR VERBS. — 8 51 



«1^? 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



FUTURE. 



Je recevrai, 
Tu recevras, 
II recevra, 
Oa recevra, 
Nous recevrons, 
Vous recevrez, 
lis recevronfc, 



/ shall receive , 
thou wilt recdve 
he shall receive 
one shall receive 
we shall receive 
you wiU receive 
they will receive 



rUTpRB ANTERIOR. 
J'aurai regu, / shall have 



Tu auras reyu, 
11 aura regu, 
On aura recju, 



ihou wilt have 

he will have 

one will have 



Nous aurons regu, we shall have 
Vous aurez recu, you xuill have 
lis auront regu, they will have 



Conditional Mode. 



PRESENT. 



PAST. 



Je recevrais, 
Tu recevrais, 
II recevrait, 
On recevrait, 
Nous recevrions, 
Vous recevriez, 
lis recevraient, 



/ should receive 

thou wouldst receive 

he should receive 

one might receive 

we should receive 

you might receive 

they should receive 



J'aurais regu, 
Tu aurais regu, 
11 aurait regu, 
On aurait regu, 
Nous aurions regu 
Vous auriez regu, 
lis auraient regu, 



I should 

ihou wouldst 

he might 

one would 

, we should 

you might 

they might 



Imperative Mode. 

Eegois, receive ihou 

Qu'il regoive, let him receive 

Qu'on regoive, let one receive 

Eecevons, let us receive 

Recevez, receive ye or you 

Qu'ils regoivent, let them receive 



Subjunctive Mode. 



PRESENT. 



Que je regoive, that I may 

Que tu regoives,/Aa^ thou may est 
Qu'il regoive, that he may 

Qu'on regoive, that one may 
Que nous recevions, that we 

may 
Que vous receviez, that you may 
Qu'ils regoivent, that they may ^ 



PAST. 



Que j'aie regu, that I may " 

Que tu aies TQq\i,that ihou rnayest 
Qu'il ait regu, that he may 

Qu'on ait regu, that one may 
Que nous ayons regu, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez regu, that you may 
Qu'ils aient regu, that they may ^ 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je regusse, that I might 
Que tu regusses, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il regut, that he might 

Qu'on regut, that one might 
Que nous regussions, that we 

might 
Quo vous regussiez, that you 

might 
Qu'ils regussent, that they might 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse regu, that I might 
Que tu eusses regu, that ihou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut regu, that he might 
Qu'on eut regu, that one might 
Que nous eussions regu, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez regu, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent regu, that they 

might 



848 



EEGULAB VEEBS. — § 52, 53, 



Infinitive Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 

PEESENT, PAST. 

Kecevoir, to receive J Avoir recu, to have received 

Participle. 

present. compound. 

Becevant^ receiving \ Ayant regu, having received 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Regu, received 

§ 52. — Remarks. 
(1.) In the verbs of this conjugation, ending in cevoir, in order to 
preserve to the c its soft pronunciation, a cedilla (g) is put under it^ 
when it comes before a, o, u : — 

Je regois, I receive ; J'apergois, I perceive. 

(2.) There are only seven regular verbs in this conjugation. They 
are: — 



Apercevoir, 
Concevoir, 
Decevoir, 
Devoir, 



to perceive; 
to conceive; 
to deceive] 
to owe ; 



Percevoir, to colled duties, taxet; 
Recevoir, to receive ; 
Eedevoir, to owe 



§ 53. — Regulae Verbs. — Continued. 
POUPTH CON^JUGATION,— ENDma IN ER 

* MODEL VERB. 





VENDEE, 


TO SELL, 






iNDiCATiva Mode. 




PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFESIITE. 


Je vends, 


I sell 


J'ai vendu, 


I have sold 


Tu vends, 


thou sellest 


Tu as vendu, 


thou hast sold 


P vend, 


he sells 


11 a vendu, 


he has sold 


On vend, 


one sells 


On a vendu, 


one has sold 


Nous vendona, 


we sell 


Nous avons vendu, 


vje have sold 


Tous vendez, 


you sell 


Yous avez vendu, 


you have sold 


lis vendent, 


they sell 


lis ont vendu, 


they have sold 



IMPERFECT. 

Je vendais, / was selling or used to 
sell 



Tu vendais, 
P vendait, 
On vendait, 
Nous vendions, 
Tqus vendiez. 
Da vendaient, 



thou wast selling 

he was selling 

one was selling 

we were selling 

you were selling 

they were sdling 



PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais vendu, / had sold or been 

selling 
Tu avals vendu, thou hadst sold 

II avait vendu, he had sold 

On avait vendu, one had sold 

Nous avions vendu, we had sold 

Yous aviez vendu, you had sold 

lis avaient vendu, ihey had sold 



KBGtJLAR VERBS. — § 53. 



349 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
PAST DEFINITE. 



Je vendis, 
Tu vendis, 
II vendit, 
Oa vendit, 
Nous vendimes, 
Vous vendites, 
Jls vendirent^ 



/ sold or did sell 

thou Boldest 

he sold 

one sold 

we sold 

you sold 

they sold 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
PAST ANTERIOR. 



J'eus vendu, 
Tu eus vendu, 
11 eut vendu, 
On eut vendu, 
Nous eumes vendu, 
Vous elites vendu, 
lis eurent vendu, 



/ had sold 

thou hadst sold 

he had sold 

one had sold 

we had sold 

you had sold 

they had sold 



FUTURE. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je vendrai, 
Tu vendras, 
II vendra. 
On vendra, 
Nous vendrons, 
Vous vendrez, 
Us vendront, 



I shall sell 
thou wilt sell 

he will sell 
one will sell 

we will sell 
you will sell 
they will sell 



J'aurai vendu, 
Tu auras vendu, 
II aura vendu. 
On aura vendu, 



I shall have sold 

thou wilt have sold 

he shall have sold 

one will have sold 



Nous aurons vendu, we shall have sold 
Vous aurez vendu, you will have sold 
lis auront vendu, they shall have sold 



Conditional Mode. 



Je vendrais, 
Tu vendrais, 
11 vendrait, 
On vendrait, 
Nous vendrions, 
Vous vendriez, 
lis vend! aient, 



present. 

/ should sell 

thou wouldst sell 

he might sell 

one would sell 

we should sell 

you might sell 

they would sell 



PAST. 



J'aurais vendu, / should 

Tu aurais vendu, thou wouldest 
II aural t vendu, he might 

On aurait vendu, one should 
Nous aurions vendu, we should 
Vous auriez vendu, you should 
lis auraient vendu, they should ^ 



Indicative Mode. 



Tends, 
Qu'il vende, 
Qu'on vende, 
Vendons, 
Vendez, 
Qu'ils vendent, 



seU thou 
let him sell 
let one sell 
let us sell 
sell ye or yott 
lei them sell 



Subjunctive Mode. 



PRESENT. 



Que je vende, that I may sell 

Que tu vendes, that thou mayest sell 

Qu'il vende, that he may sell 

Qu'on vende, that one may sell 

Que nous vendions, that we may sell 

Que vous vendiez, that you may sell 

Qu'ila vendent, that they may seU 



PAST. 



Que j'aie vendu, (hat Imay ' 
Que tu aies vendu, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il ait vendu, thai he may 
Qu'on ait vendu, that one may 
Que nous ayons vendu, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez vendu, that you 

may 
Qu'ils aient vendu, ^f they may ^ 



350 



PASSIVE VEBBS. — § 54 



gIMPLB TENSES. 



COMPOTJITD TENSES. 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je vendisse, that I'migJit sell 
Que tu vendisses, that thou mightest 

sell 
Qu'il vendit, thai he might sell 

Qu'on vendit, that one might sell 

Que nous vendissions, that we might 

sell 
Que vous vendissiez, that you might 

sell 
Qu'ils Tendissent, that they might 

sell 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse vendu, that I might 
Que tu eusses vendu, that iJiou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut vendu, that he might 
Qu'on eiit vendu, that one might 
Que nous eussions vendu, that 

toe might 
Que vous eussiez vendu, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they 
might 



Tendre, 



Vendant, 



Infinitite Mode. 

to sell I Avoir vendu, 
Participle. 



PAST. 



io have sold 



coMPomnj. 



selling \ Ayant vendu, 

Past or Passive. 
Yendu, sold 

§ 54. — Conjugation of a Passive Yeeb. 
tTRE aim:^, to be loved. 

Indicative Mode. 



havir^ sold 



present. 

Je suis aime, m. aimee, /. J am loved 

Tu es aime or aimee, thou art loved 

II est aime, he is loved 

Elle est aimee, sh^ is hved 

On est aime, ^one is loved 

Nous sommes aimes or aimees, we are loved 

Vous etes aimes or aimees, you are loved 

lis sont aimes, m. they are loved 

Elles sont aimees, /. they are laved 



J'etais aime, m. aimee, / 
Tu etais aime or aimee, 
II etait aime, 
Elle etait aimee. 
On etait aime, 

Nous etions aimes or aimees, 
Vous etiez aimes or aimees, 
lis etaient aimes, m. 
Elles etaient aimees, /. 



imperfect. 

I was loved, was being loved 
thou wast loved, wast being loved 
he was loved, was being loved 
she was loved, was being loved 
one was loved, was being loved 
we were loved, were being loved 
you were loved, were being loved 
they were loved, were being hved 
ihey were loved, were being loved ^ 



PASSIVE YBBBS^— 54, 3,51 



PAST DEFINITE. 

Je ftis aime, m. aimee, / / was loved 

Tu fus aime or aimec, iliou wast loved 

II fut aime, Tie was loved 

Elle fut aimee, she was loved 

On fut aime, ' one was loved 

Nous fames aimes or aimees, we were loved 

Vous fates aimes or aimees, you were loved 

lis furent aimes, m. they were loved 

Elles furent aimees, / they were loved 

PAST INDEFINITB. 

J'ai ete aime or aimee, I have been loved 

Tu as ete aime or aimee, thou hast been loved 

II a ete aime, he has been hved 

Elle a ete aimee, she has been loved 

On a ete aime, one has been loved 

Nous avons ete aimes or aimees, we have been loved 

Vous avez ete aimes or aimees, you have been loved 

lis ont ete aimes, m. they have been loved 

Elles ont ete aimees, / they have been loved 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

J'eus ete aime, m. aimee, /. I had been loved 

Tu eus ete aime or aimee, thou hadst been loved 

II eut ete aime, he had been loved 

Elle eut ete aimee, she had been loved 

On eut ete aime, one had been loved 

Nous eumes ete aimes or aimees, we had been loved 

Vous eutes ete aimes or aimees, you had been loved 

lis eurent ete aimes, m. they had been hved 

Elles eurent ete aimees, /. they had been loved 

■ PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais ete aime or aimee, / had, been loved 

Tu avais ete aime or aimee thou hadst been loved 

II avait ete aime, he had been hved 

Elle avait ete aimee, she had been hved 

On avait ete aime, one had been loved 

Nous avions ete aimes or aimees, we had been loved 

Vous aviez ete aimes or aimees, you had been loved 

lis avaient ete aimes, m. they had been loved 

Elles avaient ete aimees, /. they had been hved 

FUTURE. 

Je serai aime, m. aimee, / 1 shall or will be loved 

Tu seras aime or aimee, thou shall or wilt be loved 

II sera aime, he shall or will be loved 

Elle sera aimee, she shall or will be loved 

On sera aime, one shall or tuill be loved 

Nous serons aimes or aimees, we shall or will be loved 

Vous serez aimes or aimees, you shall or will be loved 

lis seront aimes, m. they shall or will be hved 

Elles seront gimees, /. they shall or vf,^l bejfived 



352 



PASSIVE VEEBS. — S 64 



FTITURE 
J'aurai ete aime, m. aimee, /. 
Tu auras ete aime or aimee, 
II aura ete aime, 
Elle aura ete aimee, 
On aura ete aime, 
Nous aurons ete aimes or aimees, 
Yous aurez ete aimes or aimees, 
lis auront ete aimes, m. 
Ellea auront ete aimees, /. 



ANTERIOR. 

J shall, will have heen loved 
ihou slialt, wilt have been loved 
he shall, will have been loved 
she shall, will have been loved 
one shall, will have been loved 
we shall, will have been loved 
you shall, will have been loved 
they shall, will have been loved 
they shall, will have been loved 



Conditional Mode. 



Je serais aime, m. aimee, /. 
Tu serais aime or aimee, 
II serait aime, 
Elle serait aimee. 
On serait aime, 
Nous serious aimes or aimees, 
Yous seriez aimes or aimees, 
lis seraient aimes, m. 
Elles seraient aimees, /. 



PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, might he loved 

ihou shouldst, couldst, mightest be loved 

he would or might be loved 

she might be loved 

one could be loved 

we should or would be loved 

you would or might be loved 

they might or should be loved 

they might, could, should be loved 



J'aurais ete aime, m. aimee, / 
Tu aurais ete aime or aimee, 
n aurait ete aime, 
Elle aurait ete aimee. 
On aurait ete aime, 
Nous aurions ete aimes or aimees, 
Yous auriez ete aimes or aimees, 
Bs auraient ete aimes, m. 
EUes auraient ete aimees, /. 



Sois aime, m. aimee, /. 
Qu'il soit aime, 
Qu'elle soit aimee, 
Qu'on soit aime, 
Soyons aimes or aimees, 
Soyez aimes or aimees, 
Qu'ils soient aimes, m. 
Qu'elles soient aimees, /. 



PAST. 

I should, would have been hved 

thou wouldsi have been loved 

he would have been loved 

she would have been loved 

one would have been loved 

we m.ight have been loved 

you would have been loved 

they might have been loved 

they should or might have been loved 

Imperative Mode. 

be thou loved 
let him be loved 
let her be loved 
let one be loved . 
lei us be loved 
be ye or you loved , 
let them be loved 
lei them be loved 

Subjunctive Mode. 



present. 



Que je sois aime, m. aimee, /. 

Que tu sois aime or aimee, 

Qu'il soit aime, 

Qu'elle soit aimee, 

Qu'on soit aime, 

Que nous soyons aimes or aimees, 

Que vous soyez aimes or aimees, 

Qu'ils soient aimes, 

Qu'olles soient aimees, 



that I may be loved 
that ihou mayest be hved 
that he may be loved 
that she may be loved 
that one may be loved 
that we may be loved 
that you may be loved 
that they may be loved 
ihat they may be hved 



PASSIVE VBEBS. — § 64, 



353 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je fusse aime, m. aimee, /. 
Que tu fusses aime or aimee, 
Qu'il fut aime, 
Qu'elle fdt aimee, 
Qu'on fut aime, 

Que nous fussions aimes or aimees, 
Que vous fussiez aimes or aimees, 
Qu'ils fussent aimes, m. 
Qu'elles fussent aimees, /. 



thai I might le loved 
thai thou mighiesi le loved 
that he might be Icved 
that she might be loved 
that one might be loved 
that we might be loved 
that you might be loved 
that they might be loved 
that they might be loved 



PAST. 

Que j'aie ete aime, m. aimee, /. that 

Que tu aies ete aime or aimee, that 

Qu'il ait ete aime, that 

Qu'elle ait ete aimee, that 

Qu'on ait ete aim«, that 

Que nous ayons ete aimes or aimees, that 

Que vous ayez ete aimes or aimees, that 

Qu'ils aient ete aimes, m. that 

Qu'elles aient ete aimees, /. that 



I may have teen loved 
thou mayest have been loved 
he may have be^n loved 
she m,ay have been loved 
one .may have been loved 
we may have been loved 
you may have been loved 
they may have been loved 
they may have been loved ^ 



PLUPERFECT. 



Que j'eusse ete aime, m. aimee, /. 

Que tu eusses ete aime or aimee, 

Qu'il eiit ete aime, 

Qu'elle eut ete aimee, 

Qu'on eut ete aime, 

Que nous eussions ^te aimes 

aimees. 
Que vous eussiez ete aimes or that you might have been loved 

aimees, 
Qu'ils eussent ete aimes, 
Qu'elles eussent ete aimees^ 



that 1 might have been loved 
that thou mightest have been hved 
that he might have been loved 
that she might have been loved 
that one might have been loved 
that we might have been loved 



that they might have been loved 
that they might have been loved 



Infinitive Mode. 

PRESENT. 

jfitre aime, m. aimee, /. to be hved 

PAST. 

Avoir ete aime, m. aimee, /. to have been loved 

Participle. 

PRESENT. 

£tant aime, m. aimee, /. being hved 

COMPOUND. 

Ayant ete aime, m. aimee, /. h>a/ving been hved 



£t^ aim6, m. aimee, /. 



PAST. 



hten hved 



354 



EEP^EeTIVB VEEB§.^-§ 55, 66. 



§ 55. — Rui.E. 

There is only one conjugation for passive verbs. It is formed of 
the auxiliary tire in all its tenses, simple and compound, and the par- 
ticiple past of the active verb which we wish to conjugate in the 
passive voice. See § 43, (4). 

§ 56. — CoN^JUGATioN OF Reflective Yekbs [§ 43, (6.)]. 

Model Verb. 

SE FLATTER, TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF. 

Indicative Mode. 



Je me flatte, 
Tu te flattes, 
II se flatte, 
On se flatte, 
Nous nous flattons, 
Vous vous flattez, 
lis se flattent, 



Je me flattais, 

Tu te flattais, 
II se flattait, 
On se flattait, 
Nous nous flattions, 
Vous vous flattiez, 
Us se flattaient, 



I flatter myself 

thou flaiierest thyself 

he flatters himself 

one flatters himself or one's self 

we flatter ourselves 

you flatter yourselves 

they flatter themselves 



IMPERFECT. 



I was flattering or used to flatter my' 

self 
thou wast flattering thyself 
he wa^ flattering himself 
one was flattering one's self, himself 
we were flattering ourselves 
you were flattering yourselves 
they were flattering themselves 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Je me flattai, 

Tu te flattas, 

II se flatta, 

On se flatta, 

Nous nous flattames, 

Vous vous flattates, 

lis se flatterent, 



I flattered or did flatter myself 

thou didst flatter thyself 

fie flattered himself 

one flattered one's self himself 

we flattered ourselves 

you flattered yourselves 

they flattered themselves 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je me suis flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu t'es flatte or flattee, 

II s'est flatte, 

Elle s'est flattee, 

On s'est flatte, 

Nous nous sommes flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous etes fliattes or flattees, 

lis se sont flattes, m. 

Elles se sont flattees, / 



I have flattered myself 

thou hast flattered thyself 

he has flattered himself 

she has flattered herself 

one has flattered himself or one's self 

we have flattered ourselves 

you have flattered yourselves 

they have flattered themselves 

they have flattered themselves 



REFLECTIVE VEB^g.r-^g 5Q . 



355 



Je me fus flatte, m. flattee, 
Tu te fus flatte or flattee, 
II se fut flatte, ^ 
E]le se fut flattee, 
On se fut flatte, 
Nous nous fumes flattes or 
Vous vous futes flattes or 
lis se furent flattes, m. 
EUes se furent flattees, / 



PAST ANTERIOR. 

f. I had fiaitered myself 

thou hadst flattered thyself 
he had flattered himself 
she had flattered herself 
one had flattered himself one\ 

flattees, we had flattered ourselves 

you had flattered yourselves 
they had flattered themselves 
they had flattered themselves 



PLUPERFECT. 



Je m'etais flatte, m. flattee, / 

Tu t'etais flatte or flattee, 

II s'etait flatte, 

EUe s'etait flattee, 

On s'etait flatte, 

Kous nous etions flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous etiez flattes or flattees, 

lis s'etaient flattes, m. 

Elles s'etaient flattees, /. 



I had flattered myself 
thou hadst flattered thyself 
he had flattered himself 
she had flattered herself 
one had flattered himself, one^s se 
we had flattered ourselves 
you had flattered yourselves 
they had flattered themselves 
they had flattered themselves 



FUTURE. 



Je me flatterai, 
Tu te flatteras, 
II se flattera. 
On se flattera., 
Nous nous flatterons, 
Yous vous flatterez, 
lis se flatteront, 



I shall or will flatter myself 
thou shall or wilt flatter thyself 
he shall or will flatter himself 
one will flatter himself, one^s self 
we will flatter ourselves 
you will flatter yourselves 
they will flatter themselves. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je me serai flatte, m. flattee, f. 

Tu te seras flatte or flattee, 

II se sera flatte, 

Elle se sera flattee, 

On se sera flatte, 

Nous nous serons flattes or .flattees, 

Vous vous serez flattes or flattees, 

lis se seront flattes, m. 

Elles se seront flattees, /. 



I shall have flattered myself 
Thou wilt have flattered thyself 
He will have flattered himself 
She will have flattered herself 
One will have flattered himself 
We will have flattered ourselves 
You will have flattered yourselves 
They will have flattered themselves 
They will have flattered themselves 



Conditional ]W[ode. 

PRESENT. 



Je me flatterais, 

Tu te flatterais, 
11 se flatterait. 
On se flatterait. 
Nous nous flatterions, 
Vous vous flatteriez, 
lis se flatteraient, 



I should, would, could, might flatte/r 

myself 
thou wouldst flatter thyself 
he would flatter himself 
one would flatter himself, one^s self 
we would flatter ourselves 
you would flatter yourselves 
they would fiatkr ihemsdves 



€56 



KEPLBCTIVB VERBS. — § 5Q. 



PAST. 



Je me serais flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu te serais flatte or flattee, 

II SB serait flatte, 

Elle se serait flattee, 

On se serait flatte, 

Nous nous serions flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous seriez flattes or flattees, 

lis se seraient flattes, m. 

Elles se seraient flattees, /. 



/ should, would, could, might have 

flattered myself 
thou wouldst have flattered thyself 
he would have flattered himself 
she would have flattered herself 
one loould have flattered one's self 
we might have flattered ourselves 
you would have flattered yourselves 
they would have flattered themselves 
they would have flattered themselves 



Imperative Mode. 



riatte-toi, 
Qu'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte, 
Plattons-nous, 
Plattez-vous, 
Qu'ils se flattent, 



flatter thyself 

let him flatter himself 

let one flatter one's self, himself 

let us flatter ourselves 

flatter yourselves 

let them flatter themselves 



Subjunctive Mode. 



PRESENT. 



Que je me flatte, 
Que tu te flattes, 
Qu'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte. 
Que nous nous flattions, 
Que vous vous flattiez, 
Qu'ils se flattent, 



that I may flatter myself 
that thou may est flatter thyself 
that he may flatter himself 
that one may flatter himself 
that we may flatter ourselves 
that you may flatter yourselves 
that they may flatter themselves 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je me flattasse, 

Que tu te flattasses, 

Qu'il se flattat, 

Qu'on se flattat, 

Que nous nous flattassions, 

Que vous vous flattassiez, 

Qu'ils se flattassent, 



that I might flatter myself 
that thou mi ghtest flatter thyself 
that lie might flatter himself 
that one might flatter himself 
that we might flatter ourselves 
that you might flatter yourselves 
that they might flatter themselves 



PAST. 



Que je me sois flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Que tu te sois flatte or flattee, 

Qu'il se soit flatte, 

Qu'elle se soit flattee, 

Qu'on se soit flatte. 

Que nous nous soyons flattes or 

flattees. 
Que vous vous soyez flattes or 

flattees, 
Qa'ils se soient flattes, m. 
Qu'elles se soient flattees, /. 



that I may have flattered myself 
that thou may est have flattered thyself 
that he may have flattered himself 
that she may have flattered herself 
that one may have flattered himself 
that we may have flattered ourselves 

thai you may have flattered yourselves 

thai fJiey may have flattered themselves 
that they may haveflatiered themsdvea 



REFLECTIVE VEEBS. — § 57. 



35*7 



PLUPERrECT. 



Que je me fusse flatte, m. flattee, /. 
Que tu te fusses flatte or flattee, 

Qu'il se mt flatte, 

Qu'elle se fut flattee, 

Qu'on se fat flatte, 

Que nous nous fussions flattes or 

flattees, 
Que vous vous fussiez flattes or 

flattees, 
Qu'ils se fussent flattes, m. 

Qu'elles se fussent flattees, / 



that I might have flattered myself 
that thou mightest have flattered thy- 
self 
that he might have flattered himself 
that she might have flattered herself 
that one might have flattered himself 
that we might have flattered ourselves 

that you might have flattered your- 
selves 

that they might have flattered them- 
selves 

that they might have flattered them- 
selves 



Infinitive Mode. 
present. past. 

Se flatter, to flatter one's self | S'etre flatte, to have flattered one^s self 



Participle. 

compound. 

Se flattant, flattering one's self j B''etant &a;tt,e,having flattered one's se^ 



PAST. 

Platte, m. flattee, /. flattes, m. p. flattees, /. p. flattered 

§ 5Y. — jtrEGATiYE Form or the Reflectiye Verbs. 

NE PAS SE ELATTER, KOT TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF, 

Indicative Mode. 



Je ne me flatte pas, 
Tu ne te flattes pas, 
II ne se flatte pas, 
On ne se flatte pas, 
Kous ne nous flattens pas, 
Vous ne vous flattez pas, 
Ds ne se flattent pas, 
&c. &c. 



I do not flatter myself 
thou dost not flatter thyself 
he does not flatter himself 
one does not flatter himself 
we do not flatter ourselves 
you do not flatter yourselves 
they do not flatter themselves 
&c. &c. 



We vsrill add a compound tense and the imperative conjugated in 
tiiis form. 



358 



EEPLEC^if E f EllBS. — § 58. 



PAST INDEFINiTE. 



Je ne me suis pas flatte, m. iQattee, /. 

Tu ne t'es pas flatte or flattee, 

II ne s'est pas flatte, 

Elle ne s'est pas flattee, 

On ne s'est pas flatte, 

Nous ne nous sommes pas flattes 

or flattees, 
Vous ne vous etes pas flattes or 

flattees, 
lis ne se sont pas flattes, m. 
Elles ne se sont pas flattees, /. 
&c. &c. 



I have not flaitered myself 
thou hast not flattered thyself 
he has not flattered himself 
she has not flaitered herself 
one has not flattered himself 
we have not flattered ourselves 

you have not flattered yourselves 

they have not flattered themselves 
they have not flattered themselves 



Imperative Mode. 



Ne to flatte pas, 
Qu'il ne se flatte pas, 
Qu'on ne se flatte pas, 
Ne nous flattons pas, 
Ne vous flattez pas, 
Qu'ils ne se flattent pas, 
&c &c. 



do not flatter thyself 
let him not flatter himself 
let one not flatter himself 
let us not flatter ourselves 
do not flatter yourselves 
lei them not flatter themselves 
&c. <fcc. 



§ 68. — Intebeogatite Foem of the Reflective Verb. 
Indicative Mode. • 



Me flatte-je ? or^ est-ce que je me 

flatte ? 
Te flattes-tu ? 
Se flatte-t-il ?' 
Se flatte-t-on ? 
Nous flattons-nous ? 
Vous flattez-vous ? 
Se flattent-ils? 
&c. &c. 



do I flatter myself f 

dost thou flatter thyself t 
does he flatter himself? 
does one flatter himself f 
do we flatter ourselves ? 
do you flatter yourselves? 
do ihey flatter themselves t 
&c. &c. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Me suis-je flatte, m. flattee ?/. 
T'es-tu flatte or flattee ? 
S'est-il flatte ? 
S'est-elle flattee ? 
S'est-on flatte ? 

Nous sommes-nous flattes or flat- 
tees? 
Yous etes- vous flates or flattees ? 
Se sont-ils flattes ? m. 
Se sont-elles flattees?/. 
&e. &c. 



have I flattered myself f 
hast thou flattered thyself f_ 
has he flattered himself? 
has she flattered herself f 
has one flattered himself f 
have we flattered ourselves? 

have you flattered yourselves? 
have they flattered themselves? 
have they flattered themselves ? 
&c. &c. 



See § 98, and L. 25. 



« SeeL. 4,B. 6. 



KEPLECTIVE VERBS. — E 69. 



869 



§ 69. — -The Reflective Verb Conjugated Negatively 
AND Interrogatively. 

Indicative Mode. 

PRESENT. 

Nemeflatte-je pas? Est-ee que je do Inotflaitermyselff 

ne me flatte pas ? 
Ne te flattes-tu pas ? 
Ne SB flatte-t-il pas ? 
Ne se flatte-t-on pas ? 
Ne nous flattons-nous pas ? 
Ne vous flattez-vous pas? 
Ne se flattent-ils pas ? 
&c. (fee. 



dost thou not flatter thy self f 
does he not flatter himself? 
does one not flatter himself? 
do we not flatter ourselves ? 
do you not flatter yourselves f 
do ihey not flatter themselves f 
&c. 6cc. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Ne me suis-je pas flatte, m. fiat- 
tee ? /. 

Ne t'es-tu pas flatts or flatte e ? 

Ne s'est-il pas flatte ? 

Ne s'est-elle pas flattee ? 

Ne s'est-on pas flatte ? 

Ne nous sommes-nous pas fiattes 
or flattees ? 

Ne vous etes-vous pas flattes or 
flattees ? 

Ne se sont-ils pas flattes ? m. 

N© se sont-elles pas flattees?/. 



have I not flattered myself? 

hast thou not flattered thyself? 
has he not flattered himself? 
has she not flattered herself? 
has one not flattered himself? 
have we not flattered ourselves ? 

have you not flattered yourselves? 

have they not flattered themselves ? 
have th6y not flattered themselves t 



§ 60. TABLE 
EEaULAR TEKMINATIONS 



Con- 
juga- 
tion. 


Infikitivb. 


Present 
Paeticiple. 


Past 
Paeticipl e. 


Ah 


Inmcative. 


IMPEBFECT. 


1st 
ER. 


er. 


ant. 
1 

W 


Sing. 
e, mas. 
a ee, /em. 

es, was. 
eesjem. 


1 

3 

1 

1 2 

3 


o ons, 
ez, 
ent. 


ais, 
.ais, 
^ait, 
S ions, 

iez, 

aient. 


2d 
IE. 


ir. 


issant. 


Sing. 

i, mas. 
^ ie, /em. 
^ PZwr. 

is, ma5. 

ies, fern. 


1 
3 

3 


is, 
is, 

^ issons 
issez, 
issent. 


issai^ 

^- issais, 

^ issail^ 

^ issions, 

issiez, 

issaient. 


3d 
OIR. 


evoir. 


eyant. 


Sing. 

u, mas. 

, ue, fern. 

us, mas. 
uesjem. 


1 

t2 
3 

1 

3 


ois, 
ois, 

M evons, 
evez, 
oivent. 


evais, 
evais, 

M evions, 
eviez, 
evaient 


4th 
EE. 


re. 

g 

> 

f i 


ant. 

i 


Sing. 

u, mas. 
Q ue, /em. 
^ PZwr. 

us, mas. 

ues/em. 


1 

|2 

3 

3 


s, 

^ ons, 
ez, ^ 
ent. 


ais, 

ais, 
ft ait, 
^ ions, 

iez, 

aieut. 



OF THE 

OF THE FOUK CONJUGATIONS. 



PAST 

DKFIKITB. 


FUTUBK 


CONDITIONAI.. 


IMPEEATIVE. 


Sttb- 

JtrN-CTITB. 


Impebfect. ,t 


ai, 


erai. 


erais. 




e, 


asse, 


as, 


eras, 


erais, 


. ®' 


^ es. 


asses, 


8 dmes, 


CHANT" 


5 ^rait, 




1 e, 


g^t, 


o erions. 


o ons, 


o ions, 


o assions, 


dtes, 


erez. 


eriez. 


ez, 


iez, 


assiez, 


erent. 


eront. 


eraient. 


ent. 


ent. 


assent. 


is, 


irai. 


irais, 




isse, 


isse, 


is. 


iras. 


irais. 


is, 


isses, 


isses, 


5J,it, 


. ira. 


^ irait. 


^ isse, 
^ issons. 


^ isse, 
^ issions, 


^it. 


^ imes, 


^ irons. 


^ irions, 


■^ issions, 


ites, 


irez. 


iriez, 


issez. 


issiez. 


issiez, 


irent 


iront. 


iraient. 


issent. 


issent. 


issent. 


us, 


evrai, 


evrais, 




oive, 


usse, 


us, 


evras, 


evrais. 


ois, 


oives, 


usses, 


« umes, 


^evra, 
« evrons, 


, evrait, 
rt evnons, 


, oive, 
M evons, 


i, oive, 
« evions. 


« ussione^ 


utes, 


evrez, 


evriez. 


evez, 


eviez, 


ussiez. 


urent. 


evront. 


evraient. 


civento 


oivent. 


ussent. 


is, 


rai, 


rais, 




«, 


isse, 


is, 


ras. 


rais, 


s, 


es. 


isses!, 


P tmes, 


a ra, 
^ rons. 


q rait, 
^ rions. 


^ ons, 


^ ions. 


ptt, 

^ issions, 


ites, 


rez. 


riez, 


ez, 


iez, 


issiez, 


iient. 


ront. 


raient. 


ent. 


ent 


issent 



IS 



S62 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. — § 61. 

§ 61. — Formation op the Tenses. 

(1.) The tenses are simple or compound. 

1. We call those, simple tenses, which do not borrow one of the 
tenses of the auxiliaries avoir and ttre. 

2. We call those compound tenses, which are composed of the 
tenses of avoir and etre, and the participle past of a verb. 

(2.) Among the simple tenses, five are called primitive, because 
fhej serve to form the other tenses. They are : 

1. The present of the indicative ; 

2. The past definite ; 

3. The present of the infinitive ; 

4. The participle present; 

5. The participle past. 

(3.) The other simple tenses, called derived tenses, are formed 
from the primitive. 

(4.) 1. The present of the indicative forms the imperative, by sup- 
pressing the pronouns : as, je chante, chante ; nous chantons, vous 
chantez, chantons, chaniez. It will be seen that the third person of 
the singular and plural of the imperative, is properly the third per- 
son of the singular and plural of the subjunctive, used imperatively. 

(5.) The past definite forms the imperfect of the subjunctive, by 
changing i into sse for the first conjugation ; as, je chantai, que je 
chantasse, and by adding se for the other conjugations : as, je finis, 
que je finisse ; je recus, queje 7'egusse ; je vendis, queje vendisse. 

(6.) The present of the infinitive forms : 

1. The future, by adding ai for the first and second conjugations : 
as, chanter, je chanterai ; finir, je finirai / and by changing oir and 
re into rai for the other two conjugations ; as, rece voir, je recevrai ; 
rendre, je rendrai. 

2, The conditional present is by French grammarians formed from 
the future by the addition of s : as, je chanterai, je chanterais ; je 
fimvQh., je finir ais ; je recevrai, je recevrais ; je vendrai,ye vendrais, 

(7.) The participle present forms : 

1. The imperfect of the indicative, by changing ant into ais : as, 
chantant, je chantais ; finissant, je finissais ; recevant, je recevais ; 
vendant, je vendais. 

2. The present of the subjunctive, by changing ant into e: as, 
chantant, que je chante ; finissant, que je finisse ; vendant, que je vende. 

Exception : In verbs of the third conjugation the termination evani 
is changed into oive: as, recevant, queje regoive. 



T AVOIR. — §61-2. S63 

(8.) This formation must not prevent the change of y into «', ac- 
cording to Rule (2.) § 49. 

(9.) The participle past forms all the compound tenses of verb^ 
with the aid of the auxiliaries avoir and ttre : as, fai chante, je suis 
aime, f avals chante, fetais aime. 

§ 61-2 —Paradigm: of the Unipeesonal Yeeb Y Avoie, 

To BE THERE. 

Indicative Mode. 

present. past indefinite. 

n y a^ there is; there are \ II y a eu, there has been; iJiere have 

been 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

H y avait, there was ; there were \ H j avait eu, there had been 

PAST DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR. 

H y eut, there was ; there were \ II y eut eu, there had been 

FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

H y aura, there wiU be \ Hy aura eu, there will have been 

Conditional Mode. 

present. past. 

H y aurait, there would 6e | H y aurait eu, iJiere would have been 

Imperative Mode. 

Qu'il y ait, Let there be. 

Subjunctive Mode. 

present. past. 

Qu'il y ait, that there may be J Qu'il y ait eu, that there may have 

been 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

Qu'il y eM, that there might be | Qu'il y eut eu, that there might have 

been 

Infinitive Mode. 

present. past. 

Y avoir, to be there \ T avoir eu, to have been there 

Participle. 

PRESENT. compound. 

T ayant^ there being \ Y ayant eu, t?iere having been 

Past or Passive. 
Eu. 



§ 62. ALPHABET 
OF THE IKREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, 

SEE § 44, RULE (2.) 

The figures placed after the infinitive of the verbs 
The tenses not given in 



Infinitive. 


Pabticiples. 


Indicative. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definite. 


Abattke, 4. io 


abattant 


j'abats 


j'abattais 


j'abattia 


pull down 


abattu, /. e. 


see Battre 






Absoudrb, 4. 


absolvant 


j'absous 


j'absolvais 




to absolve 


absous 


tu absous 


tu absolvais 




aux. avoir 


absout 


il absout 


il absolvait 




defective. 




n. absolvons 
V. absolvez 
ils absolvent 


n. absolvions 
V. absolviez 
i. absolvaient 




Absten^ir (s') 


s'abstenant 


je m'abstiens 


je m'abstenais 


je m'abstina 


2. to abstain 


abstenu,/. e. 


ref. see Tenir 






Abstraire, 4. 


abstrayant 


j'abstrais 


j'abstrayais 




to abstract 


abstrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRB 






ACCOURIR, 2. 


accourant 


j'accours 


j'accourais 


j'accoui'ua 


to run to 


accouru, /. e. 


see COURIR 






ACCROITRE, 4. 


accroissant 


j'accrois 


j'accroissais 


j'accrua 


to increase 


accru, / e. 


see CROiTRE 


also reflective 




ACCUEILLIR, 2. 


acoueillant 


j'accueille 


j'accueillais 


j'accueilhs 


to welcome 


accueilli, /. e. 


see CUEILLIR 






AgHETER, 1. 


achetant 


j 'achete 


j'achetais 


j'achetai 


•to buy 


achete, /. e. 


tu achetea 


like CHA'N'TER 




aux. avoir 




il achete 






§ 49, (5) 




n. achetoDS 






peculiar. 




V. achetez 
i. achetent 






ACHEVER, 1. 


achevant 


j'acheve . 


j'achevais 


j'achevai 


to complete 


acheve, /. e. 


tu acheves 


like CHANTER 




aux. avoir 




il acheve 






§ 49, (6) 




n. achevons 






peculiar. 




V. achevez 
i. achevent 






ACQUIERIH, 2. 


ac(Juerant 


j'acquiers 


j'acquerais 


j'acquis 


to acquire 


acquis,/, e. 


tu acquiers 


tu acquerais 


tu acquis 


aux. avoir 




il acquiert 


n acquerait 


U acquit 


irregular 




n. acquerons 


n. acquerions 


n. acquimes 






V. acquerez 


V. acqueriez 


V, acquites 






i. acquierent 


ils acqueraient 


ils acquirent 


Adjoindre, 4. adjoio^nant 


j'adjoins 


j'adjoignais 


j'adjoignis 


io associate, &c. adjoint, /. e. 


see JOINDRE 






Admettre, 4. ; admettant 


j'admets 


j'admettais 


j'admis 


io admit 


admis, /. ©. 


see METTRB 







ICAL TABLE 

PECULIAR AND ITNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

§ 43, RULE (T.) and § 49. 

indicate the conjugations to wMcli they belong. 

this Table are not used. 



FUTtJEB. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impekfect. 


j'abattrai 


j'abattrais 


abats 


j'abatte 


j'abattisse 


J'absoudrai 


j'absoudrais 




j 'absolve 




tu absoudras 


tu absoudrais 


absous 


tu absolves 




il absoudra 


il absoudrait 


q. absolve 


il absolve 




n. absoudrons 


n. absoudrions 


absolvons 


n. absolvions 




V. absoudrez 


V. absoudriez 


absolvez 


V. absolviez 




i. absoudront 


i. absoudraient 


q. absolvent 


i. absolvent 




je m'abstien- 


je m'abstlen- 




je m'abstienne 


je m'abstinsso 


[drai 


[drais 


abstiens-toi 






j'abstrairai 


j'abstrairais 


abstrais 


j'abstraie 




j'accourrai 


j'accourrais 


accours 


j'accoure 


j'accourasse 


j'accroitral 


j'accroitrais 


accrois 


j'accroisse 


j'accrusse 


j'accueillerai 


j'accueillerais 


accueillo 


j'accueille 


j'accueillisso 


j'acheterai 


j'acheterais 




j'achete 


j'achetass© 


tu achateras 


tu acheterais 


achete 


tu achetes 


like 


il achetera 


il acbeterait 


q. achete 


il achete 


CHANTER 


n. acheterons 


n. acheterious 


achetons 


n. achetions 




V. acheterez 


V. acheteriez 


achetez 


V. achetiez 




ils acheteront 


i. acheteraient 


q. achetent 


ils achetent 




j'acheverai 


j'acheverais 




j' acheve 


j'achevass© 


tu acheveras 


tu acheverais 


acheve 


tu acheves 


like 


il achevera 


il acbeverait 


q. acheve 


il aciieve 


CHANTER 


n. acheverons 


n. acheverions 


achevons 


n. achevions 




V. acheverez 


V. acheveriez 


achevez 


V. acheviez 




ils acheveront 


i. acheveraient 


q. achevent 


i. achevent 




j'acquerrai 


j'acquerrais 




j'acqniere 


j'acquisse 


tu acquerras 


tu acquerrais 


acquiers 


tu acquieres 


tu acquisses 


il acquerra 


il acquerrait 


q. acqui^re 


il acquiere 


il acquit 


n. acquerrons 


n, acquerrions 


acquerons 


n. acquerions 


n. acquissiona 


n. acquerrez 


V. acquerriez 


acquerez 


V. acqueriez 


V. acquissiez 


ils acquerront 


i. acquerraient 


q. acquierent 


i. acquierent 


i. acquissent 


j'adjoindrai 


j'adjoindrais 


adjoins 


j'adjoigne 


j'adjoignisa© 


j'admettrai 


j'admettrais 


admets 


j'admette 


j'admissQ 



866 lEREGULAE, I>EFECTiyE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Pabticiples. 


Indicative. 


IMPEBFECT. 


Pabt Definite. 


Aller, 1. to 


allant 


je vais 


j'allais 


j'allai 


go 


alle, /: e. 


tu vas 


tu allais - 


tu alias 


aux. etre 




il va 


il allait 


n alia 


irregular 




n. aliens 


n. alliens 


n. allamea 






V. allez 


V. alliez 


V. allates 






ils vont 


ils allaient 


i. allerent 


Amener, 1. to 


amenant 


j'amene 


j'amenais 


j'amenai 


Iring 


amene,/. e. 


§ 49, (6) 


see ACHEVEK 




Amonceler, 1. 


amoncelant 


j'amoucelle 


j'amoncelais 


j'amoncelai 


to heap 


amoncele,/. e. 


§ 49, (4) 


see APPELER 




APPARAirRE,4. 


apparaissant 


j'apparais 


j'apparaissais 


j'apparus 


to appear 


apparu, /. e. 


see PARAITRE 






Appartenir,2. 


appartenant 


j'appartiens 


j'appartenais 


j'appartina 


to belong 


appartenu,/.e. 


see TENTR 






Appeler, 1. to 


appelant 


j'appelle 


j'appelais 


j'appelai 


call 


appele,/. e. 


tu appelles 


like 


like 


aux. avoir 




il appelle 


CHANTER 


CHANTKit 


§ 49, (4) 




n. appelons 






2)ecuhar 




V. appelez 
ils appellent 






Apprendre, 4. 


apprenant 


j'apprends 


j'apprenais 


j 'appris 


to learn 


appris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 






Appuyer, 1. to 


appuyant 


j'appuie 


j'appuyais 


j'appuyai 


support 


appuje, /. e. 


tu appuies 


t. appuyais 


like 


aux. avoir 




il appuie 


il appuyait 


CHANTER 


§ 49, (2) 




n. appuyons 


n. appuyions 




peculiar. 




V. appuyez 
ils appuient 


V. appuyiez 
i. appuyaient 




ASSAILLIR, 2. 


assaillant 


j'assaille 


j'assaillais 


j'assaillig 


to assault 


assailli, / e. 


tu assailleg 


t. assaillais 


t. assaillia 


aux. avoir 




il assaille 


i. assaillait 


i. assaillit 


irregular 




n. assaillons 


n. assaillions 


n. assaillimes 






V. assaillez 


V. assailliez 


V. assaillites 






Lis assaillent 


i. assaillaient 


i. assaiHirent 


ASSEOIR, 3, to 


asseyant 


j'assieds 


j'asseyais 


j 'assis 


set soraething 


assis, / e. 


see s'asseoir 






down; to seat 










AsSEOiR, (s') 3. 


s'asseyant 


j. m'assieds 


je m'asseyais 


j. m'assis 


to sit down 


assis, /. e. 


t. t'assiede 


t. t'asseyais 


t. t'assis 


aux. etre 




i. s'assied 


i. s'assej^ait 


t. s'assit 


irregular and 




n. n. asseyons 


n. n. asseyions 


n. n. assimea 


reflective 




V. V. asseyez 


V. V. asseyiez 


V. V. assites 






i. s'asseient 


i. s'asseyaient 


i. s'assirent 


AsTRErNDRE,4. ! astreignaut 


j'astreins 


j'astreignais 


j'astreignis 


to compel 


astreint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Atteindre, 4. 


atteignant 


j'atteins 


j'atteignais 


j'atteignis 


to attain 


atteirit, /. e. 


see CEIXDRE 






Atteler, 1. to 


attelant 


j'attelle 


j'attelais 


j'attelai 


put to ^harness 


attele,/. e. 


§ 49, (4) 


see APPELEB 




Attraire,4. to 


at tray ant 


j'attrais 


j'attrayais 




attract 


attrait, /. e. 


see trairb 






Avenir, 2. to 


avenant 


il avient 


il avenait 


il avint 


happen 


avenu 


it happens 


it was happen- 


it happened 


Ayoie, to have 


see models § ^t 




[ing 





AND UNIPBRSONAL VERBS 



§ 62. 



867 



FUTUKE. 


Conditional. 


Impekative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impebfect. 


j'irai 


j'irais 




j'aiUe 


j'allasse 


tu iras 


tu irais 


va 


fcu ailles 


tu allasses 


il ira 


il irait 


q. aille 


il aille 


ilallat 


n. irons 


n. irions 


aliens 


n. alliens 


n. allassions 


V. irez 


V. iriez 


allez 


V. alliez 


V. allassiez 


ils iront 


L iraient 


q. aillent 


i. aillent 


i. allassent 


j'amenerai 


j'amenerais 


ameno 


j'amene 


j'amenasse 


j'amoncellerai 


j'amoncelle- 
[rais 


amonceUe 


j'amoncelle 


j'amoncelasse 


j'apparaitrai 


j'apparaitrais 


apparais 


j'apparaisse 


j'apparusse 


j'appartien- 


j'appartien- 




j'appartienne 


j'appartinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


appartiens 






j'appellerai 


j'appellerais 




j'appelle 


j'appelasse 


tu appelleras 


t, appellerais 


appelle 


tu appelles 


like 


il appellera 


i. £^pellerait 


q. appelle 


i. appelle 


CHANTER 


n. appellerons 


a. appellerions 


appelons 


n. appelions 




V. appellerez 


V. appelleriez 


appelez 


V. appeliez 




i. appelleront 


i. appelleraient 


q. appellent 


i. appellent 




j'apprendrai 


j'apprendrais 


apprends 


j'apprenne 


j'apprisse 


j'appuierai 


j'appuierais 




j'appuie 


j'appuyasse 


t. appaieras 


t. appuierais 


appuie 


tu appuies 


like 


i. appuiera 


i. appuierait 


q. appuie 


il appuie 


CHANTEB 


n. appuierons 


n. appuierions 


appuyons 


n, app ay ions 




V. appuierez 


V. appuieriez 


appuyez 


V. appuyiez 




i. appuieroat 


i. appuieraient 


q. appuient 


ils appuient 




j'asiaillirai 


j'assaillirais 




j 'assaille 


j'assaillisse 


t. assailliras 


t. assaillirais 


assaille 


t. assailles 


t. assaillisse 


i. assaillira 


i. assaillirait 


q. assaille 


i. assaille 


i. assaillit 


n. assullirons 


n. assaillirions 


assaillons 


n. assaillions 


n.assaillissions 


V. assaillirez 


V. assailliriez 


assaillez 


V. assailliez 


V, assaillissiez 


i. assailliroat 


i. assailliraient 


q. assaillent 


i. assaillent 


i. assaillissent 


j'asslerai 


j'assierais 


assieda 


j'asseie 


j'assisse 


je m'assierai 


j. m'assierais 




je m'asseie 


je m'assisse 


t. t'assieras 


t. t'assieraia 


assieds-toi 


t. t'asseies 


t. t'assisses 


i. s'assiera 


i. s'assierait 


q. s'asseie 


i. s'asseie 


i. s'assit 


n. n. assierons 


n. n. assierions 


asseyons-n. 


n. n. asseyions 


n. n. assissions 


V. V. assierez 


V. V. assieriez 


asseyez-v. 


V. V. asseyiez 


V. V. assissiez 


i. s'assieront 


i. s'assieraient 


q. s'asseient 


i. s'asseient 


i. s'assissent 


j'astreindrai 


j'astreindrais 


astreins 


j'astreigne 


j'astreignisse 


j'atteiudrai 


j'atteindrais 


atteins 


j'atteigne 


j'atteignisso 


j'attellerai 


j'attellerais 


attelle 


j'atteUe 


j'attelassQ 


j'attrairai 


j'attrairais 


attrais 


j'attraie 


, 


il aviendra 


il aviendrait 




il avienne 


il avtnt 


it will happen 


it wld. happen 




it may happen 


it mgt. happen 



868 lEEEGXTLAB, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAE 



Infinitive, 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definite. 


Ayoir (y), to ie 


y ayant 


ily a 


il y avait 


il y eut 


there 


eu (uuip.) 


tliere is, are 


there was, were 


there ivas, were 


Battre, 4. io 


battant 


je bats 


je battais 


je battis 


beat 


battu,/. e. 


tu bats . 


tu battais 


tu battis 


a us. avoir 




il bat 


il battait 


U battit 


irregular 




n. battons 


n. battions 


n. battimes 






V. battez 


V. battiez 


V. battites 






ils battent 


i. battaient 


ils battirent 


BoiRE, 4 io 


buvant 


je bois 


je buvais 


je bus 


drink 


bu,/.e. 


tu bois 


tu buvais 


tubus 


aux. avoir 




il boit 


il buvait 


nbut 


irregular 




n. buvona 


n. buvions 


n. b^imes 






V. buvez . 


V. buviez 


V. butes 






ils boivent 


i. buvaient 


ils burent 


BOUILLIR, 2. to 


bouillant 


je bous 


je bouillais 


je bouillis 


hoil 


bouilli, /. e. 


tu bous 


tu bouillais 


tu bouillis 


aux. avoir 




ilbout 


ilbouillait 


il bouillit 


irregular 




n. bouillons 


n. bouillions 


n. bouillimes 






V. bcuillez 


V. bouilhez 


V. bouillites 






i. bouillent 


ils bouillaient 


ils bouillirent 


BOURRELER, 1. 


bourrelant 


je bourrele 


je bourrelais 


je bourrelai 


to torment 


bourrele, /. e. 


§ 49, (5) 






Braire, 4. to 




il brait 






bray 




ils braient 






defective. 










Bruiner, 1. to 


bniinant 


il bruine 


il bruinait 


U bruina 


drizzle 


bruine 


it drizzles 


it was driz- 


it drizzled 


unipersonal 






[zling 




Bruire, 4. tobniissant 


U bruit 


il bruyait, or 




roar, rustle 






il bruissait 




defective. 






ils bruyaient 
ils bruissaient 




Cacheter, 1. 


cachetant 


je cachette 


je cachetais 


je cachetai 


to seat 


cachete, / e. 


§ 49, (4) 






Ceindre, 4. to 


ceignant 


je ceins 


je ceignais 


je ceignis 


gird 


ceint, /. e. 


tu ceins 


tu ceignais 


tu ceignis 


aux. avoir 




il ceint 


il ceignait 


il ceignit 


irregular 




n. ceignons 


n, ceignions 


n. ceignimes 






V. ceignez 


V. ceigniez 


V. ceignites 






ils ceignent 


ils ceignaient 


ils ceignirent 


CSanceler, 1.. 


chancelant 


je chancelle 


je chancelais 


je chancelai 


to stagger 


chancele, /. e. 


§ 49, (4) 


see appeler 




Changer, 1. io 


changeant 


je change 


je changeais 


je changeai 


change 


change, /. e. 


tu changes 


tu changeais 


tu changeas 


aux. avoir 




il change 


il changeait 


il changea 


§ 49, (1) 




n. changeons 


n. changions 


n. changearoeg 


peculiar. 




V. changez 


V. changiez 


V. changeates 






ils changent 


ilschaugeaient 


ils changerent 


CiRCONSCRIRE, 


circonscrivant 


je circonscris 


je circonscri- 


j. circonscrivia 


4. io circum- 


circonscrit, 


see ECRIRE 


[vais 




{scrihe 


[/e. 








CmCONVENIR, 


circonvenant 


j. circonviens 


je circonve- 


je circonvins 


2. io circum- 


circonvenu, 


see VENIB 


[nais 




[v&ni 


[/.e. 









AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS. § 62 



369 



F-UTUBB. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


SuBJtrvoiivE 


IMPEEFECT. 


il y aura 


il J aurait 




il y ait 


ii y eU 


there will he 


there would be 




there may 6* 


there might be 


je battrai 


je battrais 




je batte 


jo battisse 


tu battras 


tu battrais 


bats 


tu battes 


tu battisses 


il battra 


il battrait 


q. batte 


il batte 


il battit 


n. battrons 


n. battrions 


battens 


n. battions 


n. battissiona 


V. battrez 


V. battriez 


battez 


V. battiez 


V. batissiez 


i. battront 


i. battraient 


q. battent 


i. battent 


i. battissent 


je boirai 


j. boirais 




je boive 


je busse 


tu boiras 


tu boirais 


bois 


tu boives 


tu busses 


il boira 


il boirait 


q. boive 


il boive 


ilblit 


n. boirons 


n. boirions 


buvons 


n. buvions 


n. bussions 


V. boiriez 


V. boiriez 


buvez 


V. buviez 


V. bussiez 


i. boiront 


i. boiraient 


q. boivent 


i. boivent 


ils bussent 


je bouillirai 


je bouillirais 




je bouille 


je bouillisse 


tu bouilliras 


tu bouillirais 


bous 


tu bouilles 


tu bouillisses 


il bouillira 


il bouiUirait 


q. bouille 


il bouille 


il bouillit 


n. bouillirons 


n. bouillirions 


bouillons 


n. bouiliions 


n bouillissiorj 


V. bouillirez 


V. bouilliriez 


bouillez 


V. bouilliez 


V. bouillissiez 


i. bouilliront 


i. bouilliraient 


q. bouillent 


il bouillent 


i. bouillissent 


je bourrelerai 


je bourrelerais 


bourrele 


je bourrele 


je bourrelasst» 


il braira 


il brairait 








lis brairont 


ils brairaient 








il bruinera 


il bruinerait 


q. bruine 


q. bruine 


q. bruin^t 


ii wiU drizzle 


it wld. drizzle 


let it drizzle 


ii may drizzle 


it mgt. drizzU 


je cachetterai 


je cachetterais 


cachette 


je cachette 


je cachetasso 


je ceindrai 


je eeindrais 




je ceigne 


je ceignisse 


tu ceindras 


tu eeindrais 


ceins 


tu ceignes 


tu ceignisses 


il ceindra 


il ceindrait 


q. ceigne 


il ceigne 


il ceignit 


n. ceindrons 


n. ceindrions 


ceignons 


n. ceignions 


n. ceignissions 


V. ceindrez 


V. ceindriez 


ceignez 


V. ceigniez 


V. ceignissiez 


ils ceindront 


ils ceindraient 


q. ceignent 


ils ceignent 


i. ceignissent 


je charicellerai 


je chancelle- 
[rais 


chancelle 


je chancelle 


je chancelasse 


je changerai 


je changerais 




je change 


je changeasse 


like 




change 


tu changes 


tu changeasses 


CHANTER 




q. change 


like 


il changeat 






changeons 


CHANTER 


changeassions 






changez 




V. changeassiez 






q. changent 




i. changeassent 


je circonscri- 


je circonscri- 




je circonscrlve 


je circonscri- 


[rai 


[rais 


circonscris 




[vissa 


je circonvien- 


jo circonvien- 




je circonvi- 


je circonvinssa 


[drai 


[drais 


oirconviens 
16* 


[enne 





8V0 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Paeticiples. 


iNDICAXiVE. 


Impeefect. Past Dbfixite. 


Clore, 4. to 




je clos 






close 


clos 


tu clos 






defective 




il clot 






COLLETER, 1. 


coUetant 


je collete 


je colletais 'je colletai 


to collar 


collete, /. e. 


§ 49, (5) 


see ACHETER 1 


COMBATTRE, 4. 


combattant 


je combats 


je combattais je combattis 


to combat 


eombattu, /. e. 


see BATTRE 


1 


COMMETTRB, 4 


commettant 


je commets 


je commettais je commis 


to commit 


commis, /. e. 


see METTRE 




COMPARAITRE, 


comparaissant 


je comparais 


je comparais- je comparus 


4. to appear 


comparu 


see PARAITRE 


[sais 


COMPLAIRE, 4. 


complaisant 


je complais 


je complaisais je complus 


to humor 


complu 


see PLAiRE 


1 


COMPRENDRE, 


comprenant 


je comprends 


je comprenais 'je compris 


4. to under- 


compris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 






stand 










COJIPROMET- 


compromet- 


je comprometsje compromet- 


je compromia 


TRE,4.to com- 


[tant 


See METTRE 


[tais 




promit 


compromis/.e. 








COXCLURE, 4. 


concluant 


je conclus 


je concluais 


je conclus 


to conclude 


conclu, /. e. 


tu conclus 


tu concluais 


tu conclus 


aux. avoir 




il conclut 


il concluait 


il conclut 


irregular. 




n. concluons 


n. concluions 


n. conclumes 






V. concluez 


V. concluiez 


V. conclfltes 






i. concluent 


i. concluaient 


ils conclurent 


CONCOURTR, 2. 


concourant 


je concours 


je concourais 


je concourus 


to concur 


concouru, /. e. 


see COURIR 






CONDUIRE, 4. 


conduisant 


je conduis 


je conduisais 


je conduisis 


to conduct 


conduit, /. e. 


tu conduis 


tu conduisais 


tu conduisis 


aux. avoir 




il conduit 


il conduisait 


il conduisit 


irregular. 




n. conduisons 


n. conduisions 


n. conduisimes 






V. conduisez 


V. conduisiez 


V. conduisites 






ils conduisent 


i, conduisaient 


i. conduisirent 


COJJi'iRE, 4. to 


confisant 


je confis 


je confisais 


je confis 


preserve 


confit, /. e. 


tu confis 


tu confisais 


tu confis 


aux. avoir 




il confit 


il confisait 


il confit 


irregular. 




n. confisons 


n, confisions 


n. confimes 






V. confisez 


V. confisiez 


V. confites 






i. confisent 


i. confisaient 


ils confirent 


COXGELER, 1. 


congelant 


je congele 


je congelais 


je congelai 


io congeal 


congele, /. e. 


§ 49, (5) 






CONJOI]SrDRE, 4. 


coDJoignant 


je conjoins 


je conjoignais 


je conjoignis 


to conjoin 


conjoint, / e. 


see CEINDRE 






CONNAITRE, 4. 


connaissant 


je connais 


je connaissais 


je connus 


to know 


connu, /. e. 


tu connais 


tu connaissais 


tu connus 


aux, avoir 




il connait 


il connaissait 


il connut 


irregular. 




n. connaissons 


n. connaissions 


n. connumes 






V. connaissez 


V. connaissiez 


V. connutes 






i. connaissent 


i .connaissaient 


i. connurent 


CONQUERIR, 2. 


conquerant 


je conquiers 


je conquerais 


je conquia 


to conquer 


conquis, / e. 


see ACQUERIR 






CONSENTIR, 2. 


consentant 


je consens 


je consentais 


je consentis 


io consent 


consenti, /. e, 


see SENTIR 







AITD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. §62. 3Vl 



FUTITEE. 


Conditional. 


Impeeatite. 


S015JTJNOTIVE. 


Impekfect. 


je clorai 


je clorais 








tu cloras 


tu clorais 








il clora, etc. 


il clorait, etc. 








je colleterai 


je coUeterais 


collete 


je collete 


je colletasse 


je combattrai 


je combattrais 




je combatte 


je combattisse 






combats 


» 




je commettrai 


je commet- 

[trais 


commets 


je commette 


je commisse 


je comparai- 


je comparai- 




je compa- 


je compamsse 


[trai 


[trais 


comparais 


[raisse 




je complairai 


je complairais 


complais 


je complaise 


je complusse 


je compren- 


je compren- 




je comprenne 


je comprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


comprenda 






je compromet- 


je compromet- 




je compro- 


je compro- 


[trai 


[trais 


compromet3 


[mette 


[missa 


je conclurai 


je conclurais 




je conclue 


je conclusse 


tu concluras 


ru conclurais 


conclus 


tu conclues 


tu conclusses 


il conclura 


il conclurait 


q. conclue 


il conclue 


il concliit 


n. conclurons 


n. conclurions 


concluous 


n. concluions 


n. conclussiona 


V. conclurez 


y. concluriez 


coiicluez 


V. concluiez 


V. conelussiez 


ils conclurqnt 


il concluraient 


q. concluent 


ils concluent 


ils conclussent 


je concourrai 


je coucourrais 


concours 


je concoure 


je concourusso 


je conduirai 


je conduirais 




je conduise 


je conduisisse 


tu conduiras 


tu conduirais 


conduis 


tu conduises 


tu conduisissea 


il couduira 


il conduirait 


q. conduise 


il conduise 


il conduisit 


n. conduirons 


n. couduirions 


conduisons 


n. conduisions 


conduisissions 


V. condurez 


V. conduiriez 


conduisez 


V. conduisiez 


V. conduisissiez 


ils conduiront 


i conduiraient 


q. conduisent 


ils conduisent 


i. conduisissent 


je confirai 


je confirais 




je confise 


je confisse 


tu confiras 


tu confirais 


confis 


tu confises 


tu confisses 


il conflra 


il confirait 


q. confise 


il confise 


il conf it 


n. confiron3 


n. confirions 


confisons 


n. confisions 


n. confissions 


V. confirez 


V. confiriez 


confisez 


V. confisiez 


V. confissiez 


i. confiront 


ils confiraient 


q. confisent 


i. confisent 


ils confissent 


je congelerai 


je congelerais 


congele 


je congele 


je congelasso 


je conjoindrai 


je conjoin- 

[drais 


conjoins 


je conjoigne 


je conjoignisse 


je connaitrai 


je connaitrais 




je connaisse 


je connusse 


tu connaitraa 


tu connaitrais 


connais 


tu connaisses 


tu connusses 


il connaltra 


il connaitrait 


q. connaisse 


il connaisse 


il connClt 


n. connaitrons 


n. connaitrions 


connaissons 


n. connaissions 


n. connussions 


V. connittrez 


V. connaitriez 


connaissez 


V. connaissiez 


V. connussiez 


ils connaitront 


i.connaitraient 


q. connaissent 


ils connaissent 


ils connusi=ent 


je conquerrai 


jo conquerrais 


conquiers 


je conquiere 


jeconquisse 


je consentirai 


je consenti- 

[rais 


consena 


je consente 


je consentissQ 



S72 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Paetioiples. 


Indicativk. 


Imperfect. 


Pabt Definite. 


CONSTEUIRE, 4. 


construisant 


je construis 


je constraisais 


je construisia 


to construct 


construit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






CONTENIR, 2. 


contenant 


je contiens 


je contenais 


je contins 


to contain 


contenu, /. e. 


see TExiR 






CONTRAIXDRE, 


contraigiiant 


je contrains 


je contraignais 


je contraigni3 


4. to constrain 


contraint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






t!0NTREDIRE,4 


contredisant 


je coutredis 


je contredisais 


je contredis 


to cordradict 


contredit,/. e. 


tu contredis 


like DIRE 


like DIRE 


aux avoir 




il contredit 






irregular. 




n.contredisons 
V. coDtredisez 
i. contredisent 






CONTBEFAIRE, 


contrefaisant 


je contrefais 


je contrefai- 


je contrefi3 


4. to counter- 


contrefait, /. e. 


see FAIRE 


[sais 




feit 










CONTBEVENIR, 


contrevenant 


je contra viens 


je centre ve- 


je contrevins 


2. to contra- 


contrevenu/.e. 


see TENiB 


[nais 




vene 










CONTAIXCRE, 


convainquant 


je convaincs 


je convain- 


je convamqula 


4. to convince 


convaincu,/.e. 


see VAINCRE 


[quais 




CONVENIR, 2. 


couvenant 


je con viens 


je convenais 


je convina 


to suit, fit, etc. 


convenu, /. e. 


see TEOTR 






COQUETER, 1. 


coquetant 


je coquete 


je coquetais 


je coquetai 


to coquet 


coquete 


see ACHETER 


peculiar 




CORROMPRE, 4. 


corrompant 


je corromps 


je corrompais 


je corrompis 


to corrupt 


corrompu, /, e. 


see ROMPRE 






COUDRE, 4. to 


cousant 


je couds 


je cousais 


je cousis 


sew 


cousu,/. e. 


tu couds 


tu cousais 


tu cousis 


aux. avoir 




il coud 


il cousait 


il cousit 


irregular. 




n. cousons 


n. cousions 


n. cousimes 






V. cousez 


V. cousiez 


V. cousites 






ils consent 


ils cousaient 


ils cousirent 


COURIE, ft. to 


courant 


je cours 


je courais 


je courus 


run 


couru 


tu cours 


tu courais 


tu courus 


aux. avoir 




il court 


il courait 


il courut 


irregular. 




n. courons 


n. courions 


n. couriames 






V. courez 


V. couiiez 


.V. courvltes 






ils courent 


ils couraient 


ils coururent 


COUVRIE, 2. to 


couvrant 


je couvre 


je couvrais 


je couvris 


cover 


couvert, /. e. 


see OUVRIR 






Craindre, 4. 


craignant 


je crains 


je craignais 


je craignis 


to fear 


craint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Croire, 4. to 


croyant 


je crois 


je croyais 


je crus 


believe 


era, /. e. 


tu crois 


tu croyais 


tu crus 


aux. avoir 




il croit 


il croyait 


il crat 


irregular. 




n. croyona 


n. croyions 


D. crumes 






V. croyez 


V. croyiez 


V. crutes 






ils croient 


ils croyaient 


il crurent 


Cboitre, 4. to 


croissant 


je crois 


je croissais 


je crtis , 


grow 


cr\i, /. e. 


tu crois 


tu croissais 


tu crus 


aux. avoir & 




il croit 


il croissait 


il cr^t 


#tre 




n. croissons 


n. croissions 


n. cr(imes 


trre^Zor. 




V. croissez 


V. croissiez 


V. criites 






ils croissent 


ils crQissaient 


lis crti-ent 



AND UNIPBRSONAL VERBS. — S 62 



873 



FUTUBE, 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impekeect. 


je construirai 


je construlrais 


construis 


je contruise 


je construisis- 
[se 


je coatieudrai 


je contien- 

[drais 


contiens 


je contienne 


je continsse 


je contrain- 


je contrain- 




je contraigne 


je contraignis- 


[drai 


[drais 


contrains 




[se 


je contredirai 


je coatredirais 




je contredise 


je contredissQ 


like DIRE 


like DIRE 


contredis 
q. contredise 
centred isons 
contredisez 
q, contrediseat 


like DIRE 


like DIRE 


je contrefeiai 


je contreferais 


contrefais 


je contrefasse 


je contrefisse 


je contrevien- 


je centre vien- 




ie contrevien- 


je contrevinsse 


fdrai 


[drais 


contrevieng 


[ne 




je convaincrai 


je convaincrais 


convaincs 


je convainque 


je convain- 

[quisse 


je conviendrai 


je convien- 

[drais 


conviens 


je cenvienne 


je convinsse 


je coqueterai 


je coqueterais 


coquete 


je coquete 


je coquetasse 


je corromprai 


je corromprais 


corromps 


je corrompe 


je corrompisse 


je coudrai 


je coudrais 




je couse 


je cousisse 


tu coudras 


tu coudrais 


couds 


tu couses 


tu cousisses 


il coudra 


il coudrait 


q. couse 


il couse 


il cousit 


n. coudrons 


n. coudrions 


cousons 


n. cousions 


n, cousissions 


V. coudrez 


V. coudriez 


cousez 


V. cousiez 


V. cousissiez 


ils eoudront 


i. coudraient 


q. cousent 


i. cousent 


ils cousissent 


je eourrai 


je courrais 




je coure 


je courusse 


tu courras 


tu courrais 


cours 


tu coures 


tu courusses 


il eourra 


il courrait 


q. coure 


il coure 


il courut 


n. courrons 


n. courrions 


courona 


n. courions 


n. courussions 


V. courrez 


y. courriez 


courez 


V. couriez 


V. courussiez . 


ils courront 


ils courraient 


q. courent 


ils courent 


ils courussent 


je couvrlrai 


je couvrirais 


couvre 


je couvre 


je couvrisse 


je craindrai 


je eraindrais 


crains 


je craigne 


je craigniss© 


je croirai 


je croirais 




je creie 


je crusse 


tu croira3 


tu croirais 


crois 


tu croies 


tu crussea 


il eroira 


il croirait 


q. creie 


il creie 


il crut 


n. croirong 


n. croirions 


croyons 


n. crojions 


n. crussiona 


V. croirez 


V. croiriez 


croyez 


V. croyiez 


V. crussiez 


ils croiront 


ils croiraient 


q. croient 


ils croient 


ils crussent 


je croitrai 


je croitrais 




je croisse 


je crusse 


tu croitrag 


tu croitrais 


crois 


tu croisses 


tu crusses 


il croitra 


il croitrait 


q. croisse 


il croisse 


il crut 


n. croitrons 


n. croitrions 


croissona 


n. croissions 


n. crussiona 


V. croitrez 


V. croitriez 


croissez 


V. croissiez 


V. crussiez 


ila eroitrout 


ila orottraient 


q. croissent 


ils croissent 


ils crussent 



374 IRRBGULAE, DEFECTIVE, PECTJLIAB 



Infinitive. 


Paeticiples. 


Indicative. 


Impekfect. 


Past Definite. 


CUEILLIR, 2. to 


cueillant 


ie cueille 


e cueillais 


\Q cueillis 


gather 


cueilli, /. e. 


tu cueilles 


:u cueillais 


tu cueillis 


aux avoir 




il cueille 


il cueillait 


il cueillit 


irregular. 




n. cueillons 


n. cueillions 


n. cueillimes 






V. cueillez 


V. cueilliez 


V. cueillltes 






ils cueillent 


ils cueillaient 


ils cueillirent 


CuiRE, 4. to 


cuisant 


ie cuis 


ie cuisais 


je cuisis 


lake, cook, etc. 


cult, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Debattre, 4. 


debattant 


je debats 


je debattais 


je debattis 


to debate 


debattu, /. e. 


see BATTRE 






Decacheter, 


decachetant 


je decachette 


je decacbetais 


je decacbetai 


1. to unseal 


decachete, /, e. 


§ 49, (4.) 






Bechoir, 3. to 




\Q decbois 


ie decboyais 


je decbus 


decay 


dechu, /. e. 


tu decbois 


tu decboyais 


tu decbus 


aux. avoir & 




il dechoit 


il dechoyait 


il dechut 


^tre 




n. dechoyons 


n. decboyions 


n. dechumes 


defective. 


(Bescherelle) 


V. deeboyez 


V. decboyiez 


V. (iecbutes 






ils decboient 


ilsdecboyaient 


ils decburent 


Decoudre, 4. 


decousant 


je decouds 


je decousais 


je decousis 


to rip 


decousu, /, e. 


see couDRB 






Decouvrir, 2. 


decouvrant 


je decouvre 


je decouvrais 


je decouvris 


to discover 


decouvert,/. e. 


see ouvRiR 






Decrire, 4. to 


decrivant 


je decris 


je decrivais 


je decrivis 


describe 


decrit, /. e. 


see ECRIRE 






Dedire, 4. to 


dedisant 


je dedis 


je dedisais 


je dedis 


unsay 


dedit, / e. 


seeCONTREDIRE 






Deduirb, 4. to 


deduisant 


je deduis 


je deduisais 


je deduisis 


deduct 


deduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Defailltr, 2. 


defaillant 


il defaille 


je defaillais 


je defailb's 


to fail, faint 


defailli 


n. defaillons 


etc. 


etc. 


defective. 


{Bescherelle) 


V. defaillez 
ils defaillent 






Defaire, 4. to 


defaisant 


je defais 


je defaisais 


je defia 


undo 


defait, /. e. 


see FAIRE 






Degeler, 1. to 


degelant 


il degele 


il degelait 


il degela 


thaw 


degele,/. e. 








Dejoindre, 4. 


dejoignant, 


je dejoins 


je dejoignais 


je dejoignis 


disjoin 


dejoiut, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Dementir, 2. 


dementant 


je demens 


je dementais 


je dementis 


to belie 


dementi, /. e. 


see SENTiR 






Demettre, 4. 


demettant 


je demets 


je demettais 


je demis 


to disjoint 


demis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Depeindre, 4. 


depeignant 


je depeins 


je depeignais 


je depeiguis 


to depict 


depeiut, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Deplairb, 4. 


deplaisant 


je deplais 


je deplaisais 


je deplua 


to displease 


deplu, /. e. 


see PLAiRE 






Desappren- 


desapprenant 


je desap- 


je desappre- 


je desappris 


DRE, 4. to un- 


desappris, /. e. 


[prends 


[nais 




learn 




see PRENDRE 






Desservtr, 2. 


desservant 


je dessers 


je desservais 


je desservis 


to clear the ta- 
ble 
Deteindre, 4. 


desservi, /. e. 


see SERVIR 






deteignant 


je deteins 


je deteignais 


je deteignia 


to discolor 


deteint, /. e. 


see TEINDRB 







AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62, 



375^ 



Conditional. 



FUTTJEE. 



je cueillerai 
tu cueilleras 
il cueillera 
n. cueillerons 
V. cueillerez 
ils cueilleront 
je cuirai 



je cueillerais 
tu cueillerais 
il cueillerait 



cueille 

il cueillerait q. cueille 
n. cueillerions cueillons 



V. cueilleriez 



V. cueilleriez cueillez 
L cueilleraient q. cueillent 
je cuirais 



je debattrai je debattrais 



je decachet- 
[terai 
je deeherrai 
tu decherras 
il decherra 
n. de'cherrons 
V. decherrez 



je decrirai 

je de'dirai 

je deduirai 

see Bescherelle, 
Dictionnaire 
National. 

je deferai 

il degelera 

je dejoindrai 

je dementirai 

je demettrai 

je depeindrai 

je deplairai 

1^ 



cueillez 



je decachet- 
[terais 
je decherrais 
tu decherrais 
il decherrait 
n. decherrions 



n. aecnerrona n. aecnerrions aecnoyor 

V. decherrez v. decherriez dechoyez 

ils decherront i. decherraient q. dechoi 

je decoudrai je decoudrais 



decouds 
je decouvrirai je decouvrirais 

dpcouvri 



je decrirais 
je dedirais 
je deduirais 



Je detedndrai 



Impekative. 



cuis 

debats 

decachette 

dechois 
q, dechoie 
dechoyons 
^ "ichoyez 
dechoient 



decouvre 
decris 
dedia 
deduis 



je deferais 
il degelerait 
je dgoindrais 
je dementirais 
je demettrais 
je depeiudrais 
je deplairais 



deplais 
desappren- je desappren- 

[drai [drais desapp 

je desservirai je desservirais 



je deteindrais 



defaig 
q. degele 

dejoins 
demens 
demet3 
depeins 



SUI3JUNCTIVE. 



je cueille 
tu cueilles 
il cueille 
n. cueillions 
V. cueilliez 
cueillent 
je cuise 

je debatte 

je decachette 

je dechoie 
tu dechoies 
il dechoie 
n. dechoyions 
V. dechoyiez 
ils dechoient 
je decouse 

je decouvre 

je decrive 

je dedise 

je deduise 



je defasse 
il degele 
je dejoigne 
je demente 
je demette 
je depeigne 
je deplaiso 



Impeefect. 



ren- 
[ne 



jo desserve 



je cueillisse 
tu cueilhsses 
il cueillit 
n. cueillissiona 
V. cueillissiez 
ils cueillissent 
je cuisisse 

je debattisse 

je de'cache- 
[tasse 
je dechusse 
tu dechusse3 
il dechut 
n. dechussions 
V. dechussiez 
ils dechussent 
je decousisse 

je decouvrisso 

je decrivisse 

je dedisse 

je deduisisse 



je defisse 
il degelat 
je dejoignisso 
je dementisso 
je demisse 
je depeignisse 
je deplusse 
je 

je 



je deteigne je deteignii 



376 IRKKGULAR, 


DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 


Infinitive. 


Pabticiples. 1 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite. 


Detenir, 2. to'detenant 


ie detiens 


ie detenais 


ie detins 


detain detenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Detruire, 4. detruisant 


le detruis 


ie detruisais 


je detruisis 


destroy dstruit, /. e. 


see conduire 






Devenir, 2. to deveuant 


ie deviens 


je deveuais 


je devins 


to become deveuu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Devetie, 2. to devetant 


ie devets 


je devetais 


je devetis 


divest devetu, /. e. 


see VETIR 






Dire, 4. to say disant 


je dis 


je disais 


je dis 


aux. avoir 


dit,/. e. 


tu dis 


tu disais 


tu dis 


irregular. 




Udit 


il disait 


il dit 






n. disons 


n. disions 


n. dimes 






V. dites 


V, disiez 


V. dites 






ils disent 


ils disaient 


ils dirent 


DiSCOIJRIR, 2. 


discourant 


je discours 


je discourais 


je discourus 


to discourse 


discouru 


see couRiR 






DiSPARAlTRB, 


disparaissant 


je disparais 


je disparais- 


je disparus 


4. to disappear 


disparu, /. e. 


see CONNAlTRE 


[sais 




DiSSOUDRE, 4. 


dissolvant 


je dissous 


je dissolvais 




to dissolve 


dissous, /. te. 


see ABSOUDRE 






DiSTRAIRB, 4. 


distrayant 


je distrais 


je distrayais 




to divert 


distrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






DORMIR, 2. to 


dormant 


je dor3 


je dormais 


je dormis 


sleep 


dormi 


tu dors 


tu dormais 


tu dormis 


aux. avoir 




il dort 


il dormait 


il dormit 


irregular. 




n. dormons 


n. dormions 


n. dormimes 






V. dormez 


v. dormiez 


V. dormites 






ils dorment 


ils dormaient 


ils dormirent 


ficHOiR, 3. to 


echeant 


il echoit 




il echut 


fall due 


echu, /. e. 


or il echet 






Colore, 4. to 




Q eclot 






hatch 


eclos 








ificONDUIRE, 4. 


econduisant 


j'econduis 


j'econduisais 


j'econduisis 


to refuse 


econduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIEE 






£crire, 4. to 


ecrivant 


j'ecris 


j'ecrivais 


j'ecrivis 


write 


ecrit, /. e. 


tu ecris 


tu ecrivais 


tu ecrivis 


aux. avoir 




il ecrit 


il ecrivait 


11 ecrivit 


irregular. 




n. ecrivons 


n. ecrivions 


n. ecrivimes 






V. ecrivez 


V. ecriviez 


V. ecrivites 






ils ecrivent 


ils ecrivaient 


ils ecrivirent 


£libe, 4. to 


elisant 


j'elis 


j'elisais 


j'elus 


eZec« 


elu, /. e. 


see LIRE 






i^METTRE, 4. to 


emettant 


j'emets 


j'emettais 


j'emis 


emi« 


emis, /. e. 


see METTRB 






Emmener, 1. to 


emmena.nt 


j 'emmene 


j'emmenais 


j'emmenal 


take away 


emmene, /. e. 


§ 49, (6) 


see MENER 




l&MOUDRE, 4. to 


emoulant 


j'emouds 


j'emoulais 


j'emoulua 


sharpen 


emoulu, /, e. 


see MOUDRE 






j&MOUVOIR, 3. 


emouvant 


j'emeus 


j'emouvais 


j'emus 


to excise, etc. 


emu, /. e. 


see MOUVOIR 






Employer, 1. 


employant 


j'emploie 


j'employais 


j'employai 


to employ 


employe, /. e. 


§ 49, (2) 


see APPUYER 




Empreindre, 


empreignant 


j'empreins 


j'empreignais 


j'empre^nia 


4. to imprint 


empreint, /. e. 


Se& CKINDRB 







AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS. § 62. STY 



FUTUEE. 


Conditional. 


Impkbative, 


SUBJTWCTIVE. 


Impekfect. 


je detiendrai 


e detiendrais 


detiens 


e detienne 


e detinsse 


je detruirai 


je detruirais 


detruis 


e detruise 


e detruisisse 


je deviendrai 


je deviendrais 


deviens 


\q devienne 


e devinsse 


je devetirai 


je devetirais 


devets 


je devete 


ie devetisse 


je dirai 


je dirais 




je dise 


ie disse 


tu diras 


tu dirais 


dis 


tu dises 


tu disses 


ildira 


il dirait 


q. dise 


U dise 


Udit 


n. dirons 


n. dirions 


disons 


n. disions 


n. dissions 


V. direz 


V. diriez 


dites 


V. disiez 


V. dissiez 


ils diront 


ils diraient 


q. disent 


ils disent 


ils dissent 


je discoiirrai 


je discourrais 


discours 


je discoure 


je discourusse 


je disparaitrai 


je disparai- 
trai s 


disparais 


je disparaisse 


je disparusse 


je dissoudrai 


je dissoudrais 


dissous 


je dissolve 




je distrairai 


je distrairais 


distrais 


je distraie 




je dormirai 


je dormirais 




je dorme 


je dormisse 


tu dormiras 


tu dormirais 


dors 


tu dormes 


tu dormisses 


il dormira 


il dormirait 


qu'il dorme 


il dorme 


il dormit . 


n. dormirons 


n. dormirions 


dormons 


n. dormions 


n. dormissions 


V. dormirez 


V. dormiriez 


dorraez 


V. dormiez 


V. dormissiez 


ils dormiront 


ils dormiraient 


q. dorment 


ils dorment 


Us dormissent 


il 4cherra 


il echerrait 






qu'il echut 


il eclora 


il eclorait 




q. dolose 




j'econduirai 


5'econduirais 


econduis 


j'econduise 


j'econduisisse 


j'ecrirai 


j'ecrirais 




j'ecrive 


j'ecrivisse 


tu ecriras 


tu ecrirais 


ecris 


tu ecrives 


tu ecrivisses 


il ecrira 


il ecrirait 


q. ecrive 


il ecrive 


n ecrivit 


n. ecrirons 


n. ecririons 


ecrivons 


n. ecrivions 


n. ecrivissiona 


V. ecrirez 


V. ecririez 


ecrivez 


V. ecriviez 


V. ecrivissiez 


ils ecriront 


ils ecriraient 


q. ecrivent 


ils ecrivent 


ils ecrivissent 


j'elirai 


j'elirais 


eUs 


j'elise 


j'elusse 


j'emettrai 


j'emettrais , 


emeta 


j'emette 


j'emisse 


j'emmenerai 


j'emmenerais 


emmene 


j'emmene 


j'emmenasse 


j'emoudrai 


j'emoudrais 


emouds 


j'emoule 


j'emoulusse 


j'emouvrai 


j'emouvrais 


emeus 


j'emeuve 


j'emusse 


j'emploierai 

1 


j'emploierais 


emploie 


j'emploie 


j'employasse 


jiempreindral 


j'empreindrais 




j'empreiguo 


j'empreigmss® 






empreina 







378 lEREGITLAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAB 



Infinitive. Paeticiples. 


Indicative. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definite. 


EXCLORE, 4. to 


j 'enclos 






enclose enclos, /. e. 








Encourir, 2. encourant 


j'encours 


j'encourais 


j'encourus 


to incur encouru, /. e. 


see COUKIR 






ExDORMJR, 2. endormant 


j'endors 


i'endormais 


j'endormia 


to lull asleep endormi, /. e. 


see DORMIR 






ExDUiRE, 4. io enduisant 


j'enduis 


j'enduisais 


j'enduisis 


plaster 


enduit, /. e. 


see COXDUIRE 






EXFREIXDRE, 


enfreignant 


j'enfreins 


j'enfreignais 


j'enfreignis 


4. to infringe 


enfreint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Enfuir, (s') 2. 


s'enfuj^ant 


je m'eiifuis 
see FUiR 


je m'enfuyais 


je m'enfuis 


to run away 


enfui, /. e. 






Enjoixdre, 4. enjoignant 


j'enjoins 


j'enjoignais 


j'enjoignis 


to enjoin enjoint, /. e. 


see CEiXDRE 






Enndyer, (s') s'ennuyant 


je m'ennuie 


je m'ennuyais 


je m'ennuyai 


1, to he weary eanuje, f. e. 


see APPUYER 


§ 49, (2) 




Exquerir, (s') 


s'enquerant 


je m'enquiers 


je m'enquerais 


je m'euquis 


2, to inquire 


enquis, /. e. 


see ACQUERIR 






Entremettre, 


s'entremettant 


je m'entremets 


je m'entre- 


je m'entremis 


(s') 4. to in- 


entremis, / e. 


see METTRE 


[mettais 




terpose 










Extreprex- 


entreprenant 


j'entreprends 


j'entreprenais 


j 'entrepris 


DRE, 4. to un- 


entrepris, /. e. 


see PREKDRE 






dertake 










Entretexir, 


entretenant 


j'entretiens 


j'entretenais 


j'entretins 


2. to entertain 


entretenu, /. e. 


see TEXiR 






Extrevoir, 3. 


entrevojant 


j'entrevois 


j'entrevoyais 


j'entrevis 


to glimpse at 


entrevu, /. e. 


see VOIR 






Ex voter, 1. to envoyant 


j'envoie 


j'envoyais 


j'envoyai • 


send 


envoye, /. e. 


tu envoies 


tu envoyais 


tu envoyas 


aux. avoir 




il envoie 


il envoyait 


a envoya 


irregular. 




n. envoyons 


n. envoyions 


n. envoyames 






V. envoyez 


V. envoyiez 


V. envoyates 






ils envoient 


ils envoyaient 


ils envoyerent 


£prexdre, ,^s') s'eprenant 


je m'eprends 


je m'eprenais 


je m' epris 


4. to be smit- 
ten 
ESSAYER, 1. to 


epris, /. e. 


see PREXDRE 






essayant 


j'essaie 


j'essayais 


j'essayai 


try 


essaye, /. e. 


see APPUYER 


§ 49, (2) 




Eteixdre, 4. to 


eteignant 


j'eteins 


j'eteignais 


j'eteignis 


extinguish 


eteint, /. e. 


see CEIXDRE 






]&tinceler, 1. 


etiDcelant 


j'etincelle 


j'etincelle 


j'etincelai 


to sparkle 


etincele, /. e. 


see APPELER 


§ 49, (4) 




!Etiqueter, 1. 


itiquetant 


j'etiquete 


j'etiqnetais 


j'etiquetaL 


to label 


etiquete, /. e. 


see ACHETER 


§ 49, (5) 




!£tre, 4. to he 


see model 


§ 47, (5) 
j'etreins 






Etreixdre, 4. 


etreignant 


j'etreignaia 


j'etreignis 


to press 


etreint, /. e. 


see CEIXDRE 






EXCLURE, 4. to 


excluaat 


j'exclus 


j'excluais 


j'exclus 


exclude 


exclu, exclus 


see COXCLURE 






EXTRAIRE, 4 


extrayant 


j'extrais 


j'extrayais 




to extract 


extrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 







AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS. § 62. 



379 



FlTTURE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


j'enclorai 


j'enclorais 








j'encourrai 


j'encourrais 


encoura 


j'encoure 


j'encourusse 


j'endormirai 


j'endormirais 


endors 


j'endorme 


j'endormisse 


j'enduirai 


j'enduirais 


enduis 


j'enduise 


j'enduisisse 


j'enfreindrai 


j'enfreindrais 


enfreins 


j'enfreigne 


j'enfreignisse 


je m'enfuirai 


je m'enfuirais 


enfuis-toi 


je m'enfuie 


je m'enfuisso 


j'enjoindrai 


j'enjoindrais 


enjoins 


j'enjoigno 


j'enjoignisse 


je m'ennuierai 


|e m'ennuie- 




je m'ennuie 


je m'ennuyas- 




[rais 


ennuie-toi 




[se 


je m'enquerrai 


je m'enquer- 
[rais 


enquiers-toi 


je m'enquiere 


je m'enquisse 


je m'entre- 


je m'entre- 




je m'entre- 


je m'entre- 


[mettrai 


[mettrais 


entremets-toi 


[mette 


[miss© 


j'entrepren- 


j'entrepren- 




j'entreprenne 


j'entreprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


entreprends 






j'entretiendfai 


j'entretien- 

[drais 


entretiens 


j'entretienne 


j'entreti-nsse 


j'entreverrai 


j'entreverrais 


entrevois 


j'entrevoie 


j'entrevisso 


j'enVerrai 


j'enverrais 




j'envoie 


j'envoyasse 


til enverras 


tu enverrais 


envoie 


tu envoies 


tu envoyasses 


il enverra 


il enverrait 


q. envoie 


il envoie 


il envoyat 


n. enverrons 


n. enverrions 


envoyons 


n. envoyions 


n.envoyassiong 


V. eaverrez 


V. enverriez 


envoyez 


V. envoyiez 


V. envoyassiez 


ils enverront 


ils enverraient 


q. envoient 


ils envoient 


ils envoyassent 


je m'epren- 


ie m'epren- 




je m'eprenne 


je m'eprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


eprends-toi 






j'essaierai 


i'essaierais 


essaio 


j'essaie 


j'essayasse 


j'eteindrai 


j'eteindrais 


e'teins 


j'eteigne 


j'eteignissQ 


j'etincellerai 


j'etincellerais 


e'tincelle 


j'etincelle 


j'etincelasse 


j'etiqueterai 


i'etiqueterais 


etiqueto 


i'etiquete 


j'etiquetasse 


j'etreindrai 


i'e'treindrais 


etreins 


i'etreigne 


i'etreignisso 


j'exclurai 


'exclarais 


exclus 


i'exclue 


■'exclussQ 


j'extrairai 


'extrairais 


Bxtrais 


i'extraie 





380 lEREGULAE, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAE 



IlCFINITIVE. 1 PaETICIPLES. 


Indicative. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definitb. 


Faitjjr, 2. to faillissant 


je faillis 


je faillissais 


je faillis 


faU 


failli 


now regular 


see FiNiE, § 50 




(New form) 


(JBescherelle) 








(Old form, 


faillant 


je faux 


je faillais 


je faillis 


still used) 


failli ^^ 


tu faux 


tu faillais 


tu faillis 


irregular. 


(Academie) 


il faut 


il faillait 


il faillit 






n. faillons 


n. faillions 


n. fail limes 






V. faillez 


V. faiiliez 


V. faillites 






il faillent 


ils faillaient 


ils faillirent 


I'aire, 4. to do, 


faisa^nt^ 


je fais 


je faisais' 


jefis 


to make 


fait, /. e. 


tu fais 


tu faisais 


tufis 


aux. avoir 




Ufait 


il faisait 


ilfit 


irregular. 




n, faisons* 


n. faisions 


n. f imes 






V. faites 


V. faisiez 


V. f ites 






ils font 


ils faisaient 


ils firent 


Falloir, 3. to 


fallant 


il faut 


U fallait 


il fallut 


he necessary 


fallu 


unipersonal. 






FEmDRE, 4. to 


feignant 


je feins 


je feignais 


je feignis 


feign 


feint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






FiCELER, 1. to 


ficelant 


je ficelle 


je ficelais 


je ficelai 


cord 


ficele, /. e. 


see appeler 


§ 49, (4) 




Frire, 4. to 




je fris 






fry 


frit, /. e. 


tu fris 






defective. 




il frit 






FuiR, 2. to 


fuyant 


je fuis 


je fuyais 


je fuis 


flee 


M 


tu fuis 


tu fuyais 


tufiii^' 


aux. avoir 




ilfuit 


il fuyait 


il fuit 


irregular. 




n, fuyons 


n. fuyions 


n. fuimes 






V. fuyez 


/. fuyiez 


V. fuites 






ils fuient 


ils fuyaient 


ils fuirent 


Geler, 1. to 


gelant 


il gelo 


il gelait 


il gela 


freeze, unip. 


gela/. e. 








Gksir, 2. to lie 


gisant 




je gisais 




defective. 




Ugit 
n. gisons 
V. gisez 
ils gisent 


tu gisais 
il gisait 
n. gisions 
V. gisiez 
ils gisaient 




Grasseter, 1. 


grasseyant 


je grasseie 


je grasseyais 


je grasseyai* 


to lisp 


grasseye 


see appuyer 


§ 49, (2) 




Greler, 1. to 


grelant 


il grele 


il grelait 


il grela 


hail. unip. 


grele 








Gresiller, 1. 


gresillant 


il gresille 


il gresillait 


il gresiUa 


to sleet, unip. 


gresille 








Hair, 2. to 


hai'ssant 


je hais 


je haissais 


je hais 


hate 


hai, /. e. 


tu hais 


tu haissais 


tu hais 


aux. avoir 




il hait 


il haissait 


il hait 


irregular. 




n. haissons 


n. haissions 


n. haimea 






V. haissez 


V. haissiez 


V. haites 






i. haissent 


ils haissaient 


ils hairent 


Harceler, 1. 


harcelant 


je harcele 


je harcelais 


je harcelai 


U) torment 


liarcele, /. e. 


§ 49, (5) 







* See note, page 119. 



AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS. — §62 



881 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Impebative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impeefect. 


je faillirai 


je faillirais 


faillifl 


je faillisse 


je faillisse 


je faudrai 


je faudrais 




je faiUe 


je faillisse 


tu faudras 


tu faudrais 




etc. 


etc. 


il faudra 


il faudrait 








n. faudrons 


n. faudrions 








V. faudrez 


V. faudriez 








ils faudront 


ils faudraient 








je ferai 


je ferais 




je fasse 


je fisse 


tu feras 


tu ferais 


fais 


tu fasses 


tu fisses 


il fera 


il ferait 


q. fasse 


il fasse 


il fit 


n. ferons 


n. ferions 


faisons 


n, fassions 


n. fissions 


V. ferez 


V. feriez 


faites 


V. fassiez 


V. fissiez 


ils feront 


ils feraient 


q. fassent 


ils fassent 


ils Assent- 


il faudra 


il faudrait 


q. fame 


q. faille 


q. faUut 


je feindrai 


je feindrais 


feins 


je feigne 


je feignisse 


je ficellerai 


je ficellerais 


ficeEe 


je ficelle 


je ficelasse 


je frirai 


je frirais 








tu friras 


tu frirais 


fris 






il frira, etc. 


il frirait, etc. 








je fuirai 


je fuirais 




je fuie 


je fuisse 


tu fuiras 


tu fuirais 


fuis 


tu fuies 


tu fuisses 


il fuira 


il fuirait 


q. fuie 


il fuie 


it fuit 


n. fuirons 


n. fuirions 


fuyons 


n. fuyions 


n. fuissions 


V. fuirez 


V. fuiriez 


fuyez 


V. fuyiez 


V, fuissiez 


ils fuiront 


ils fuirai ent 


q. fuient 


ils fuient 


ils fuissent 


il gelera 


il gelerait 


qu^il gele 


qu'il gele 


q. geldt 


je grasseierai 


je grasseierais 


grasseie 


je grasseie 


je grasseyasso 


il grelera 


il grelerait 


q. grelo 


qu'il grele 


qu'il greldt 


il gresillera 


il gresillerait 


q. gresille 


q. gresillo 


q. gresilUt 


je hairai 


je hai'rais 




je haisse 


je haisse 


tu hairas 


tu hairais 


hais 


tu haisses 


tu haisses 


il haira 


il hairait 


q. haisse 


il haisse 


il hait 


n. hairons 


n. hairions 


haissons 


n. haissions 


n. haiseiona 


V. liairez 


V. hairiez 


haissez 


V. haissiez 


V. haissiez 


ils bairont 


ils hairaient 


q. haissent 


ils haissent 


ils haissent 


je harcelerai 


je harcelerais 


harc^le 


je harcele 


je harcelasse 



382 Il^HEGULAE, DEFECTIVE, PECITLIAE, 



Infinitive. 


Pabticiples. 


Indicative. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definite. 


Imposter, 1. 


important 


il importe 


il importait 


il importa 


to matter 


imports 


it matters 






unipersonal 










iNDtriRE, 4. to 


induisant 


j'induis 


j'induisais 


j'induisis 


induce 


induit, /. e. 


see conduire 






Inscrire, 4. to 


inscrivant 


j'inscris 


j'inscrivais 


j'inscrivis 


inscribe 


inscrit, /. e. 


see ecrtre 






Instruire, 4, 


iostruisant 


j'instrais 


j'instruisais 


j'instruisia 


to instruct 


iastruit, /. e. 


see conduire 






Interdire, 4. 


inter disant 


j'interdis 

see coxtreeIre 


j'interdisais 


j'interdis 


to interdict 


interdit, /. e. 






Interrompre, 


interrompant 


j'interromps 
see rompre 


j'interrompais 


j'interrompis 


4. to interrupt 


interrompu/.e. 






Interven-ir, 2. 


intervenant 


j'interviens 


j'intervenais 


j'intervins 


to intervene 


intervenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Introduire, 4. 


introduisant 


j'introduis 


j'introduisais 


j'introduisia 


to introduce 


iutroduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Jeter, 1. to 


jetant 


je jette 


je jetais 


je jetai 


throw 


jete, /. e. 


tu jettes 


tu jetais 


tu jetas 


aux. avoir 




il jette 


il jetait 


il jeta 


peculiar. 




n. jetons 


n. jetions 


n. jetames 


% 49, (4.) 




V. jetez 


V. jetiez 


V. jetates 






ils jettent 


ils jetaient 


Us jeterent 


JOIXDRE, 4 to 


joignant 


je joins 


je joignais 


je joignis 


join 


joint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






Lire, 4. to 


lisant 


je lis 


je lisais 


je lug 


read, 


lu, /. e. 


tu lis 


tu lisais 


tu lus 


aux, avoir 




illit 


il lisaifc 


illut 


irregular. 




nous lison3 


n. lisions 


n. Ihmea 






vous lisez 


V. lisiez 


V. lutes 






ils lisent 


ils lisaient 


ils lurent 


Lthre, 4. to 


luisant 


je luis 


je luisais 




shine 


lui 


see CONDUIRE 






MAmTENIR, 2. 


maintenant 


je maintiens 


je maintenais 


je maintins 


to maintain 


mainteuu, /. e. 


see TENiR 






Malpaire, 4. 


malfaisant 


seldom 


lised except 


in the 


to do wrong 


malfait, /. e. 








Maudire, 4. to 


maudissant 


je maudis 


je maudissais 


je maudig 


curse 


maudit, /. e. 


tu maudis 


tu maudissais 


like DIRE 


aux. avoir 




il maudit 


U maudissait 




irregular. 




n. maudissons 
V. maudissez 
ils maudissent 


n. maudissions 
V. maudissiez 
i. maudissaient 




Mecon^aitre, 


meconnaissant 


je meconnals 


je meconnais- 


je meconnus 


4. to disown 


meconnu, /. e. 


see CONNAITRE 


[sais 




Med ire, 4. to 


medisant 


je medis 


je medisais 


je media 


slander 


medit 


SeeCONTREDIRE 






MifiFAIRB, 4. to 


mefaisant 


je mefais 


je mefaisais 


je mefis 


do wrong 


mefait 


see FAiRE 






Men-er, 1. to 


menant 


je mene 


je menais 


je menai 


lead, take 


mene, /. e. 








Mentul 2. to 


mentant 


je mens 


je mentals 


je mentis 


lie 


menti 


see SBNTIR 







AND TJNIPEKSONAL VEEBS. § 62. 



383 



FUTUKB. 


Conditional. 


iMPEKATrVE. 


Subjunctive. 


Impekfect. 


il importera 


il importerait 


q. importe 


q. importe 


q. importat 


j'induirai 


j'induirais 


induis 


j'induise 


j'induisisse 


j'inscrirai 


j'inacrirais 


inscris 


j'inscrive 


j'inscrivisse 


j'instruirai 


j'instruirais 


instruis 


j'instruise 


j'instruisisse 


j'interdirai 


j'interdirais 


interdis 


j'interdise 


j'interdisse 


j'interromprai 


j'interrom- 




j'interrompe 


j'interromp- 




[prais 


interromps 




[isse 


j'interviendrai 


j'intervien- 

[drais 


interviena 


j'intervienne 


j 'inter vinsse 


j'introduirai 


j'introduirais 


introduis 


j'introduise 


j'introduisisse 


je jetterai 


je jetterais 




je jette 


je jetasse 


tu jetteras 


tu jetterais 


jette 


tu jettes 


tu jetasse3 


il jettera 


il jetterait 


q. jette 


il jette 


il jetat 


n. jetterona 


n. jetterions 


jetons 


n. jetions 


n. jetassions 


V. jetterez 


V. jetteriez 


jetez 


V. jetiez 


V. jetassiez 


ils jetteront 


ils jetteraient 


q. jettent 


ils jettent 


ils jetassent 


je joindrai 


je joindrais 


joins 


je joigne 


je joignisso 


jo lirai 


je lirais 




je lise 


je lusse 


tu liras 


tu lirais 


lis 


tu lises 


tu lusses 


il lira 


il lirait 


q. lise 


il lise 


U IClt 


n. lirons 


n. lirions 


lisons 


n. lisions 


n. lussions 


V. lirez 


V. liriez 


lisez 


V. lisiez 


V. lussiez 


ils liront 


ils liraient 


q. lisent 


ils lisent 


ils lussent 


je luirai 


je luirais 




je luise 




Je maintien- 


je maintien- 




je maintienne 


je maintinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


maintiens 






tenses 


given 


here 






je maudirai 


je maudirais 




je maudisse 


je maudisse 


like DIRE 


like DiEE 


maudis 

q. maudisse 

maudissons 

maudissez 

q. maudissent 


tu maudisses 
il maudisse 
n. maudissions 
V. maudissiez 
ils maudissent 


like DIRE 


je meconnai- 


je meconnat- 




je meconnaisse 


je meconnusse 


[trai 


[trais 


meconnais 






je medirai 


je medirais 


medis 


je medise 


je medisse 


je meferai 


je meferais 


mefaia 


je mefasse 


je mefisse 


je menerai 


je menerais 


mene 


je mene 


je menasso 


je mentirai 


je menttrais 


mens 


je mente 


je mentisso 



384 lEREGULAE, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAE, 



iNFixrriVE. 


Pabticiples. 


Indicativk. 


Impeefect. 


Past DEFrNiTE. 


Meprendre,4. 


se meprenant 


j. m. meprends 


j. me mepre- 


je me mepris 


(se) to mis- 


mepris, /. e. 


see prendre 


[nais 




take, ref. 










Mettre, 4. to 


mettant 


je mets 


ie mettais 


je mis 


put 


mis, y. e. 


tu mets 


tu mettais 


tu mis 


aux. avoir 




il met 


il mettait 


il mit 


irregular. 




n. mettons 


n. mettions 


n. mimes 






V. mettez 


V. mettiez 


V. mites 






ils mettent 


ils mettaient 


ils mirent 


MOUDRE, 4. to 


moulant 


je mouds 


je moulais 


je moulua 


grind 


moulu, /. e. 


tu mouds 


tu moulais 


tu moulus 


aux. avoir 




il moud 


il moulait 


il moulut 


i?regular. 




n. moulons 


n. moulions 


n. moulumes 






V. moulez 


V. mouliez 


V. moulutes 






ils moulent 


Ds moulaient 


ils moulurent 


MoiraiR, 2. to 


mourant 


je meurs 


je mourais 


je mourus 


die 


mort, /. e. 


tu meurs 


tu mourais 


tu mourus 


aux. etre 




il meurt 


il mourait 


il mourut 


irregular. 




n. mourons 


n. mourions 


n. mour^mes 






V. mourez 


V. mouriez 


V. mourules 






ils meurent 


ils mouraient 


ils moururent 


MouvoiR, 3. to 


mouvant 


je mens 


je mouvais 


je mus 


move 


mu, /. e. 


tu meus 


tu mouvais 


tu mus 


aux. avoir 




il meut 


il mouvait 


il mut 


irregular. 




n. mouvons 


n. mouvions 


n. mumea 






V. mouvez 


V. mouviez 


V. m^tes 






ils meuvent 


Us mouvaient 


lis murent 


MoFVOiR, (se) 


se mouvant 


je me meus 


j. me mouvais 


je me mus 


3. to move 


mu,/. e. 


see MOUVOIR 






reflective. 










NAiTRE, 4. to 


naissant 


je nais 


je naissais 


je naquis 


be born 


ne, /. e. 


tu nais 


tu naissais 


tu naquis 


aux. etre 




U nait 


il naissait 


il naquit 


irregular. 




n. naissons 


n. naissions 


n. naquimes 






V, naissez 


V. naissiez 


V. naquites 






ils naissent 


ils naissaient 


ils naquirent 


Nl^GLIGER, 1. 


negligeant 


je neglige 


je negligeais 


je ne'gligeai 


to neglect 


neglige, /. e. 


§ 49, (1.) 






Neiger, 1. to 


neigeant 


il neige 


il neigeait 


Q neigea 


snow. unip. 


neige 








Niveler, 1. to 


nivelant 


je nivelle 


je nivelais 


je nivelai 


level 


nivele, /. e. 


see appeleb 


§ 49, (4) 




Nuire, 4. to in- 


nuisant 


je nuis 


je nuisais 


je nuisis 


jure 


nui 


see CONDUIRE 






Obtenir, 2. to 


obtenant 


j'obtiens 


j'obtenais 


j'obtins 


obtain 


obtenu, /. e. 


see TENIR 






Offrir, 2. to 


oflfrant 


j'ofifre 


j'offrais 


j'ofi&is 


offer 


offert, / e. 


see OUVRIR 






OiNDRE, 4. to 


oignant 


j'oins 


j'oignais 


j'oignis 


anoint 


oint 


see CEINDRE 






Omettre, 4. to 


omettant 


j'omets 


j'omettais 


j'omis 


omit 


Qiais, /. e. 


see METTRE 






OuiR, 2. to 




j'ouis 






hear. def. 


ioui, /. e. 


111 ouit 







AND UNIPBESONAL VERBS 



§ 62. 



385 



FUTUEE. 



je me mepren- 
[drai 

je mettrai 
tu mettras 
il mettra 
n. mettrons 
V. mettrez 
ils mettront 
je moudrai 
tu moudras 
il moadra 
n. moudrons 
V. moudrez 
ils moudroat 
je mourrai 
tu mourras 
il mourra 
n. moarrons 
V. mourrez 
ils mourront 
je mouvrai 
tu mouvras 
il mouvra 
n. mouvrons 
V. mouvrez 
ils mouvront 
je me mouvrai 



je naitrai 
tu naitras 
il naitra 
n. naitrons 
V. naitrez 
ila naitront 
je negligerai 



Conditional. 



je me mepren- 
[drais 

je mettrais 
tu mettrais 
il mettrait 
n. mettrions 
V. mettriez 
ils mettraient 
je moudrais 
tu moudrais 
il moudrait 
n. moudrions 

moudriez 
ils moudraient 
je mourrais 
tu mourrais 
il mourrait 
n. mourrions 

mourriez 
ils mourraient 
je mouvrais 
tu mouvrais 
il mouvrait 

mpuvrions 
V. mouvriez 
ils mouvraient 
je me mouv- 
[rais 

je naitrais 
tu naitrais 
il naicrait 
n. naitrions 
V. naitriez 
ils naitraient 
je negligeraia 



Impesative. 



il neigera 

je nivellerai 

je nuirai 

j'obtiendrai 

j'ofl6irai 

j'oindrai 

j'omettrai 



il neigerait 

je niveUerais 

je nuirais 

j'obtiendrais 

j'oflfrirais 

j'oindrais 

j'omettrais 



meprends-toi 



mets 
q. mette 
mettons 
mettez 
q. mettent 

mouds 
qu'il moule 
moulons 
moulez 
q. moulent 

meurs 
q. meure 
mourons 
mourez 
q. meurent 

meus 
q. meuvo 
mouvons 
mouvez 
q. meuvent 

meus-toi 



nais 

q. naisse 
naissons 
naissez 
q. naissent 



neglige 
q. neige 



niveUe 
nuis 
obtiens 
offl-e 
oins 
omets 
It 



Sttbjiinctive. 



J. me mepren- 
[ne 

je mette 
tu mettes 
il mette 
n. mettions 
V. mettiez 
ils mettent 
je moule 
tu monies 
il moule 
n, moulions 
V. mouliez 
ils moulent 
je meure 
tu meures 
il meure 
n. mourions 
V. mouriez 
ils meurent 
je meuve 
tu meuves 
il meuve 
n. mouvions 
V. mouviez 
ils meuvent 
je me meuve 



je naisse 
tu naisses 
il naisse 
n. naissions 
V. naissiez 
iLs naissent 
je neglige 



qu'il neige 

je nivelle 

je nuise 

j'obtienne 

j'ofifre 

j'oigne 

j'omette 



je me mepns- 

[S9 

je misse 
tu misses 
il mit 

n. missions 
V. missiez 
ils missent 
je moulusse 
tu moulussea 
il moulCit 
n. moulussiona 
V moulussiez 
Us moulussent 
je mourusse 
tu mourusses 
il mouriit 
n. mourussiona 
V. mourussiez 
ils mourussent 
je musse 
tu musses 
il mflt 
n. mussions 
V. mussiez 
ils mussent 
je me musse 



je naqmsse 
tu naquisses 
il naquit 
n. naquissions 
V. naquissiez 
ils naquissent 
je negiigeassa 

q. neigeAt 

je nivelassQ 

je nuisisse 

j'obtinsse 

j'ofifrissa 

j'oignisse 

j'omiss9 

j'ouisse 
ilouit 



386 IRREGULAE, DETECTIVE, PECULIAR 



IlTFIIflTIVE. 


Pabticiples. 


IXDICATIVE. 


Impeefect. 


JPast Defhtitk. 


OUVRIR, 2. to 


ouvrant 


j'ouvre 


j'ouvrais 


ij'ouvris 


ojpen 


OTivert, /. e. 


tu ouvres 


tu ouvrais 


ru ouvris 


aux. avoir 




il ouvre 


il ouvrait 


il ouvrit 


irregtUar. 




n. ouvrons 


n, ouvrions 


n. ouvrimes 






V. ouvrez 


V. ouvriez 


V. ouvrites 






ils ouvrent 


ils ouvraient 


ils ouvrirent 


PAITRE, 4. to 


paissant 


je pais 


je paissais 




graze 


pu 


tu pais 


tu paissais 




a.nx, avoir 




il pait 


il paissait 




defective. 




n. paissons 
V. paissez 
ils paissent 


n. paissions 
V. paissiez 
ils paissaient 




Parfaire, 4. to 


parfaisant 


je parfais 


je parfaisais 


je parfis 


complete 


parfait, /. e. 


see FAIRE 


seldom used 




PARAITRE, 4. 


paraissant 


je parais 


je paraissais 


je parus 


to appear 


paru 


see COXNAITRE 






Parcourir, 2 . ! parcourant 


je parcours 


je parcourais 


je parcourus 


to go through 


parcouru, /. e. 


see couRiR 






Partir, 2. to 


partant 


jepars 


je partais 


je partis 


depart 


parti, /. e. 


see SENTIR 






Parve>tr, 2, 


parvenant 


je parviens 


je parvenais 


jeparvins 


to succeed, &c. 


parvenu, /. e. 


see TENm 






PAiJEK, 1. to 


payant 


je paie 


je payais 


je payai 


pay 


paye, / e. 


see APPUTER 


§ 49, (2) 




Peindre, 4. to 


peignant 


je peins 


je peignais 


je peignia 


paint 


peint, /. e. 


see CEIKDRE 






Peler, 1. to 


pelant 


je pele 


je pelais 


je pelai 


peel 


pele, /. e. 


§ 49, (4) 






Permettre, 4 


permettant 


je permets 


je permettais 


je permis 


to permit 


permis, /, e. 


see METTRE 






Plaixdre, 4. Iplaignant 


je plains 


je plaignais 


je plaignis 


1x) pity [plaint, / e. 


see CEINDRE 






Plaindre, (se):se plaignant 


je me plains 


je me plai- 


je me plaignis 


4. to co7n_pZamJplaint, /. e. 




[gnais 




reflective. 










Plaire, 4. to 


plaisant 


je plaig 


je plaisais 


je plus 


please 


plu 


tu plais 


tu plaisais 


tu plus 


aux. avoir 




a plait 


il plaisait 


il plut 


irregular. 




n. plaisons 


n. plaisions 


n. plumes 






V. plaisez 


V. plaisiez 


V. plutes 






ils plaisent 


Os plaisaient 


ils plurent 


Pleuyoir, 3. 


pleuvant 


il pleut 


il pleuvait 


ilplut 


to rain. unip. 


plu 








POINDRE, 4. to 




il point 






dawn. def. 










P0URSUIVRE,4. 


poursuivant 


je poursuis 


je poursuivais 


je poursuivis 


to pursue 


poiu-suivi, /. e. 


see suiVRB 






POURVOIR, 3. 


pourvoyant 


je pourvois 


je pourvoyais 


je pourvua 


to provide 


pourvu,/. e. 


tu pourvois 


tu pourvoyais 


tu pourvus 


aux, avoir 




il pourvoit 


il pourvoyait 


il pour^nit 


irregular. 




n. pourvoyons 


n, pourvoyions 


n. pourvumes 






V. pourvoyez 


V. pourvoyiez 


V. pourvutes 






ils pourvoient 


L pourvoyaient 


ils pourvurent 



AlTD UNIPERSONAL VEEBS 



62 



387 



FUTTJEE. 


Conditional. 


lilPKEATrVE. 


Subjunctive. 


Impeefect. 


j'ouvrirai 


j'ouvrirais 




j 'ouvre 


j'ouvrisse 


tu ouvriraa 


tu ouvrirais 


ouvre 


tu ouvres 


tu ouvrisses 


il ouvrira 


il ouvrirait 


q. ouvre 


il ouvre 


il ouvrit 


n. ouvriroDS 


n.-ouvririons 


ouvrons 


n. ouvrions 


n. ouvrissiona 


V. ouvrirez 


V. ouvrii'iez 


ouvrez 


V. ouvriez 


V. ouvrissiez 


ils ouvriront 


Ds ouvriraient 


q. ouvrent 


ils ouvrent 


ils ouvrissent 


je paitrai 


je paitrais 




je paisse 




tu paitraa 


tu paitrais 


pais 


tu paisses 




il paitra 


il paitrait 


q. paisse 


il paisse 




lu paitrons 


n. pattrions 


paissons 


n. paissions 




V. paitrez 


V. paitriez 


paissez 


V. paissiez 




ila paitront 


ils paitraient 


q. paissent 


ils paissent 




je parferai 


je parferais 


parfais 


je parfasse 
obsolete 


je parfisse 


je paraitrai 


je paraitrais 


parais 


je paraisse 


je parusse 


je parcourrai 


je parcourrais 


parcours 


je parcoure 


je parcourusse 


je partirai 


je partirais 


pars 


je parte 


je partisse 


je parviendrai 


je parviendrais 


parviens 


je parvienne 


je parvinsse 


je paierai 


je paierais 


paie 


je paie 


je payasse 


je peindrai 


je peindrais 


peins 


je peigne 


je peignisse 


je pelerai 


je pelerais 


pele 


je pele 


je pelasse 


je permettrai 


je permettrais 


permets 


je permette 


je permisse 


je plaindrai 


je plaindrais 


plains 


je plaigne 


je plaignisse 


je me plain- 


je me plain- 




je me plaigne 


je me plai- 


[drai 


[drais 


plain R-toi 




[gnissQ 


je plairai 


je plairais 




je plaise 


je plusse 


tu plairas 


tu plairais 


plais 


tu plaises 


tu plusses 


il plaira 


il plairait 


q. plaise 


il plaise 


il plM 


n. plairons 


n. plairions 


plaisons 


n. plaisions 


n, plussions 


v.. plairez 


V. plairiez 


plaisez 


V. plaisiez 


V. plussiez 


ils plairont 


ils plairaient 


q. plaisent 


ils plaisent 


ils plussent 


il pleuvra 


il pleuvrait 


q. pleuve 


q. pleuve 


q. pliit 


il poindra 


il poindrait 








je poursuivrai 


je poursuivrais 


poursuis 


je poursuive 


je poursuivisso 


je pourvoirai 


je pourvoirais 




je pourvoie 


je pourvusse 


tu pourvoiras 


tu pourvoirais 


pourvois 


tu pourvoies 


tu pourvusses 


il pourvoira 


il pourvoirait 


q. pourvoie 


il pourvoie 


il pourvut 


n. poui-voirons 


n. pourvoirions 


pourvoyons 


n. pourvoyions 


n. pourvusslons 


V. pourvoirez 


V. pourvoiriez 


pourvoyez 


V. pourvoyiez 


V. pourvussiez 


ils pourvoiront 


L pourvoiraient 


q. pourvoient 


ils pourvoient 


ils pbunoissMit 



388 lEEEGULAE, DEFECTIVE, PECtTLIAE, 



Intinitive. 


Pabticiples. 


IlTDICATITE. 


Lmpeefect. 


Past DEFrNiTB. 


POURVOIR, (se) 


se pourvojant 


je me pour- 


■ 

je me pour- 


je me pourvua 


3. to provide 


pourvu, / e. 


[vois 


[voyais 




Pouvom, 3. to 


pouvant 


je puis 


je pouvais 


je pus 


be able 


pu 


tu peux 


tu pouvais 


tu pus 


aux. avoir 




il peut 


il pouvait 


il put 


irregular. 




n. pouvons 


n. pouvions 


n, ptimea 






V. pouvez 


V. pouviez 


V. putes 






ils peuveut 


ils pouvaient 


ils purent 


PR^DIRE, 4. to 


predisant 


je predis 


je predisais 


je predis 


predict 


predit, /. e. 


SeeCONTREDIEE 






Prendre, 4. io'prenant 


je prends 


je prenais 


jepris 


take 


pris, /. e. 


tu prends 


tu prenais 


tu pris 


aux. avoir 




il prend 


il prenait 


il prit 


irregular. 




n. prenons 


n. prenions 


n. primes 






V. prenez 


V. preniez 


V. prites 






ils prennent 


ils prenaient 


ils prirent 


Prescrire, 4.'prescrivant 


je prescris 


je prescrivais 


je prescrivia 


to prescribe Iprescrit, /. e. 


see ecrire 






PRESSENTIR, 2.|pressentant 


je pressens 


je pressentais 


je pressentis 


to foresee ;presseDti,/. e. 


see sentir 






Prevaloir, 3.prevalant 


je prevaux 


je prevalais 


je prevalus 


to prevail prevalu 


see VALOiR 






PREVENIR, 2Jprevenant 


je previens 


je prevenais 


je previaa 


to prevent 


prevenu,/. e. 


see TENiR 






Prevoir, 3. to 


prevoyant 


je pre vols 


je prevoyais 


je previs 


foresee 


prevu, /. e. 


like VOIR 


like VOIR 


like VOIR 


Produire, 4. 


produisant 


je produis 


je produisais 


je produisis 


' to produce 


produit, /. e. 


see COXDUIRE 






Projeter, 1. 


projetant 


je projette 


je projetais 


je projetai 


to project 


projete, /. e. 


see JETER 


§ 49, (4.) 




Promettre, 4. 


promettant 


je promets 


je promettais 


je promia 


to promise 


promis, /. e. 


see ilETTRE 






Promo u VOIR, 


promouvant 


je promeus 


je promouvais 


je promus 


3. to promote 


promu, /. e. 


see MOUVOIR 






Prosorire, 4.'proscrivant 


je proscris 


je proscrivais 


je proscrivis 


to proscribe iproscrit, /. e. 


see ECRIRE 






Provenir, 2. 


provenant 


je proviens 


je provenais 


je provina 


to proceed 


provenu, /, e. 








Q\]EmB.,to fetch 


only used 


in the infinitive 


except in the 


composition of 


Kabattrb, 4. 


rabattant 


je rabats 


je rabattais 


je rabattis 


to abate 


rabattu, /. e. 


see BATTRE 






Eaohetbr, 1. 


rachetaut 


je rachete 


je rachetais 


je rachetai 


to buy again 


rachete, /. e. 


see ACHETER 


§ 49, (5.) 




Rappeler, 1. 


rappelant 


je rappelle 


je rappelais 


je rappelai 


to recall 


rappele, /. e. 


see APPELER 


§ 49, (4.) 




Rapprendrb, 


rapprenant 


je rapprends 


je rapprenais 


je rappris 


4c.to learn again 


rappris, /. e. 








E,attein-dre,4. 


ratteignant 


je ratteins 


je ratteignais 


je ratteigma 


to reach a^am !ratteint, /. e. 








Rebattre, 4. 


rebattant 


je rebats 


je rebattais 


je rebattis 


to beat again 


rebattu, /. e. 


see BATTRE 






Reconduire, 


reconduisant 


je reconduis 


je recondui- 


je reconduisia 


4. to conduct 


reconduit, /. e. 


se^ CONDUIRE 


[sais 




again 











AND TJNIPERSOI^'AL VERBS. § 62. 



389 



Ftjtuke. 


Conditional. 


Impeeative. 


Subjunctive, 


Impeefect. 


je me pour- 


je me pour- 




je me pour- 


je me pour- 


[voirai 


[voirais 


pourvois-toi 


[voie 


[vusso 


je pourrai 


je pourrais 




je puisse 


je pusse 


tu pourras 


tu pourrais 




tu puisses 


tu pusses 


il pourra 


il pourrait 




11 puisse 


il put 


n. pourrons 


n. pourrions 


- 


n. puissions 


n. pussiona 


V. pourrez 


V. pourriez 




V. puissiez 


V. pussiez 


ils pourront 


ils pourraient 




ils puissent 


ils pussent 


je predirai 


je predirais 


predis 


je predise 


je predissQ 


je prendrai 


je prendrais 




je prenne 


je prisses 


tu prendras 


tu prendrais 


prends 


tu prennes 


tu prisses 


il prendra 


il prendrait 


q. prenne 


il prenne 


ilprit 


n. prendrons 


n. prendrions 


prenons 


n. prenions 


n. prissiona 


V. prendrez 


V. prendriez 


prenez 


V. preniez 


V. prissiez 


ils prendront 


ils prendraient 


q. prennent 


ils prennent 


ils prissent 


je prescrirai 


je prescrirais 


prescris 


je prescrive 


je prescrivissQ 


je pressentirai 


je pressenti- 

[rais 




je pressente 


je pressentisse 


je prevaudrai 


je prevaudrais 


prevaux 


je prevale 


je prevalusse 


je previendrai 


je previen- 

[drais 


previens 


je previenne 


je previnsse 


je prevoirai 


je prevoirais 




je prevoie 


je previsse 


like POURVOIR 


like POURVOIR 


prevois 


like YOiR 


like VOIR 


je produirai 


je produirais 


produia 


je produise 


je produisisse 


je projetterai 


je projetterais 


projette 


je projette 


je projetasse 


je promettrai 


je promettrais 


promets 


je promette 


je promisse 


je promouvrai 


je promou- 

[vrais 


promeus 


je promeuve 


je promusse 


je proscrirai 


je proscrirais 


proscris 


je proscrive 


je proscrivisso 


je proviendrai 


je provien- 

[drais 


proviens 


je provienne 


je provinsse 


other verbs 










je rabattrai 


je rabattrais 


rabats 


je rabatte 


je rabattisse 


je racheterai 


je racheterais 


rachete 


je rachete 


je rachetassQ 


je rappellerai 


je rappellerais 


rappelle 


je rappelle 


je rappelasse 


je rapprendrai 


je rappren- 

[drais 


rapprends 


je rapprenne 


je rapprisse 


je ratteindrai 


je ratteindrais 


ratteins 


je ratteigne 


je ratteignisse 


j© rebattrai 


je rebattrais 


rebats 


je rebatte 


je rebattisse 


je reconduirai 


je recondui- 




je reconduise 


je recondui- 




[rais 


recoaduia 




[sias. 



S90 lEREGULAE, DEFECTIVE^ PECtJLIAB, 



IXFIXITIVE. 

Eecoxn^aitre, 

4, to recognize 
Recoxquerir, 

2. to conquer 

again 
Eecoxsteuiee 

4, to recon- 
struct 
Recoudre, 4 

to sew again 
Recourir, 2. 

to have re- 
course 
Eecouyeir, 2. 

to cover again 
Recueillir, 2. 

to reap 
Eedire, 4. to 

say again 
Eeduire, 4. to 

reduce 
Eefaire, 4. to 

make again 
EEJOrST)RE, 4. 

to rejoin 
Eelire, 4. to 

read again 
Eeluire, 4. to 

shine 
Eemettre, 4. 

to remit 
Eemoudre, 4, 

to grind again 
Eeitaitre, 4. 

to revive 
Een-dormir, 2. 

to lull to sleep 
Eentraire, 4. 

to darn 
Eexvoyer, 1. 

to send hack 
Eepaitre, 4. 

to feed 
Eepartir, 2. 

to set off again 
Eepeixdre, 4 

to paint again 
Eepextir, (se) 
2. to repent, ref. 
Eeprendre, 4. 
to take again 
Eeproduire,4. 

to reproduce 



Paeticiples. 



Indicative. 



Impekfect. Past Definite. 



reconuaissant 
reconnu, /. e. 
reconquerant 
reconquis, /. e. 

reconstruisant 
reconstruitj/.e. 

recousant 
recousu, / e. 
recourant 
recouru 

recouvrant 
recouvert, /. e. 
recueiUant 
recueilli, /. e. 
redisant 
redit, /. e. 
reduisant 
reduit, /. e. 
refaisant 
refait, /. e. 
rejoignant 
rejoint, /. e. 
relisant 
relu, /. e. 
reluisant 
relui 

remettant 
remis, / e. 
remoulant 
remoulu, /. e. 
renaissant 
rene, /. e. 
rendormant 
rendormi, / e. 
rentrajant 
rentrait, /. e. 
renvoyant 
renvoye,/. e. 
repaissant 
repu 

repartant 
jreparti, /. e. 
I repeignant 
'repeint, /. e. 
se repentant 
jrepenti, /. e. 
reprenant 
repris, /. e. 
jreproduisant 
reproduit, /. e. 



ije reconnais ije reconnais- 
\see coxNAiTREJ [sais 

je reconquiers je reconque- 
see acqueeir f [rais 



je reconstruis 
see coivDUiRE 

je recouds 

je recours 
see couRiR 



je recouvre 
see orvRiR 
je recueille 
see CUEILLIR 
je redis 
see DIRE 
je reduis 
see cONDurRE 
je refais 

FAIRE 

je rejoins 
see CEmDRB 
je relis 
see LIRE 
je reluis 
see LuiRE 
je remets 

see METTRE 

je remouds 

I see MOUDRE 

ije Tenais 

\see NAITRE 

ije renders 
\see DORMIR 
ije rentrais 

\see TRAIRE 

!je renvoie 
see EirvoYER 
je repais 
see PAiTRE 
je repars 
see SENTiR 
je repeins 

see CEIAT)RE 

je me repens 

SEXTIR 

je reprends 

see PRENDRE 

je reproduis 
see CONDUIRE 



je reconstnii- 
[sais 

je recousais 

je recoTirais 



recouvrais 

recueillais 

redisaia 

reduisais 

refaisais 

rejoignais 

relisais 

reluisais 

remettais 

remoulais 

renaissais 

rendormais 

rentrayais 

renvoyais 
^ 49, (2.) 
repaissais 

repartais 

repeignais 

me repen- 

[tais 
reprenais 

reprodui- 

[sais 



J 6 reconnus 
je reconqilia 

je reconstrui- 
[sia 

je recousia 

je recourua 



reeouvna 

recueillia 

redis 

reduisis 

refis 

rejoignia 

relus 

reluisia 

remis 

remoulus 



renaqma 
rendormis 

renvoyais 

repus 

&c, 

repartia 

repeignis 

me repentia 

repris 

reproduisia 



AND UNIPBESONAL VERBS. § 62. 



391 



FUTUKE. 


Conditional. 


Impeea-tive. 


Subjunctive. 


Impebfect. 


je reconnai- 


je reconnai- 




je reconnaisse 


je reconnusse 


[trai 


[trais 


recomiais 






je reconquer- 


je reconquer- 




je reconquiere 


je reconquisse 


[rai 


[rais 


reconquiers 






je reconstrui- 


je reconstrai- 




je reconstrui- 


je reconstmi- 


[rai 


[rais 


reeonstruis 


[se 


[sissa 


je recoudrai 


je recoudrais 


recouda 


je recouse 


je recousisse 


je recourrai 


je recourrais 


recours 


je recoure 


je recourusso 


je recouvrirai 


je recouvrirais 


recouvre 


je recouvre 


je recouvrisse 


je recueillerai 


je recueille- 

[rais 


recueille 


je recueille 


je recueillisse 


je redirai 


je redirais 


redis 


je redise 


je redisse 


je reduirai 


je reduirais 


reduia 


je reduise 


je reduisisso 


je referai 


je referais 


refais 


je refe;sse 


je refisse 


je rejoindrai 


je rejoindrais 


rejoins 


je rejoigne 


je rejoignisse 


je relirai 


je relirais 


relis 


je relise 


je relusee 


je reluirai 


je reluirais 


reluis 


je reluise 


je reluisisso 


je remettrai 


je remettrais 


remets 


je remette 


je remisse 


je remoudrai 


je remoudrais 


remouds 


je remoule 


je remoulusse 


je renaitrai 


je renaitrais 


renais 


je renaisse 


je renaquisse 


je rendormirai 


je rendormi- 

[rais 


renders 


je rendorme 


je rendormissQ 


[e rentrairai 


je rentrairais 


rentrais 


je rentraie 




je renverrai 


je renverrais 


renvoie 


je renvoie 


je renvoyasse 


ie repaitrai 


je repaitrais 


repais 


je repaisse 


je repusse 
&c. 


e repartirai 


je repartirais 


repars 


je reparte 


je repartisse 


e repeindrai 


je repeindrais 


repeins 


ie repeigne 


ie repeignisse 


ie me repenti- 


e me repenti- 




ie me repente 


ie me repen- 


[rai 


[rais 


repens-toi 




[tisse 


e reprendrai 


ie reprendrais 


reprends 


e reprenne 


e reprisse 


reproduirai 


ie reprodui- 


reproduis • 


e reproduise 


e reprodui- 




[raia 




[siaso 



392 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


PAETICIPLES. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definitk. 


Eequerir, 2. 


requerant 


je requiers 


je requerais 


je requis 


to require 


requis, /. e. 


see ACQUERIR 






El^SOUDRE, 4. 


resolvant 


je resous 


je resolvais 


je resolus 


to resolve 


resolu, resous 


see ABSOIJDRE 






Ressentir, 2. 


ressentant 


je ressens 


je ressentais 


je ressentis 


to resent 


ressenti, /. e. 


see SENTIR 






Ressortir, 2. 


ressortant 


je ressors 


je ressortais 


je ressortis 


to go out again 


ressorti, /. e. 


see SORTIR 






Eessouvenir, 


se ressouve- 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


(se) to remem- 


[nanl; 


[viens 


[venais 


[vina 


ler. reflective. 


souvenu, /. e. 


see TENIR 






Eestreindrb 


restreignant 


je restreins 


je restrei- 


je restreigniy 


4. to restrain 


restreint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 


[gnais 




Eetenir, 2. to 


retenant 


je retiens 


je retenais 


je retins 


retain 


retenu, /. e. 


see TENIR 






Eetraire, 4. 


retrayant 


je retrais 


je retrayais 




to redeem 


retrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






Eeyenir, 2. to 


revenant 


je reviens 


je revenais 


je revina 


return 


revenu, /. e. 


see VENiR 






Eevetir, 2. to 


revetant 


je revets 


je rev^tais 


je revetis 


clothe 


revetu, /. e. 


see VETIR 






Eeviyre, 4. to 


revivant 


je revis 


je revivals 


je revecus 


live again 


revecu 








Eevoir, 3. to 


revpyant 


je revois 


je revoyais 


je revis 


see again 


revu, /. e. 


see VOIR 






Eire, 4. to 


riant 


je ris 


je rials 


je ris 


laugh 


ri 


tu ris 


tu rials . 


tu ris 


aux. avoir 




U rit 


U rlait 


ilrit 


irregular. 




n. rions 


n. riions 


n. rimes 






V. riez 


V. riiez 


n. rites ■ 






lis rient 


ils riaient 


ils rirenfc 


EOMPRE, 4. to 


rompant 


je romps ^ 


je rompais 


je rompis 


break 


rompu, /. e. 


tu romps 


tu rompais 


tu rompis 


aux. avoir 




il rompt 


il rompait 


il rompit 


irregular. 




n. rompons 


n. rompions 


n, rompimes 






V. rompez 


V. rompiez 


V. rompites 






ils rompent 


ils rompaient 


ils rompirent 


EOUVRIR, 2. to 


rouvrant 


je rouvre 


je rouvrais 


je rouvris 


re-open 


rouvert, /. e. 


see ouvRiR 






Saillir, 2. to 


saillant 


il saille 


11 sain ait 




project 


sailli 








Satisfaire, 4. 


satisfaisant 


je satisfais 


je satisfaisais 


je satisfia 


to satisfy 


satisfait,/. e. 


see FAiRB 






Savoir, 3. to 


sachant 


je sais 


je savais 


je sus 


know 


su, /. e. 


tu sais 


tu savais 


tu sus 


aux. avoir 




il sait 


il savait 


ilsut 


irregular 




n. Savons 


n. savions 


n. sumes 






V. savez 


V. saviez 


V. sutes 






ils savent 


ils savaient 


ils surent 


SECOimiR, 2. to 


secourant 


je secours 


je secourais 


je secourus 


succor 


secouru, /. e. 


see COURIR 






S]6duire, 4 to 


seduisant 


je seduia 


je seduisais 


je seduisia 


seduce 


seduit, /. e. 









AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. — §62. 393 



FUTUKK 


Conditional. 


IMPEBATIVE. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je requerrai 


ie requerrais 


requiera 


je requiere 


je requisse 


je resoudrai 


\e resoudrais 


resous 


je resolve 


je resolusse 
&c. 


je ressentirai 


je ressentirais 


ressens 


je ressente 


je ressentisse 


je ressortirai 


je ressortirais 


ressors 


je ressorte 


je ressortisse 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 




je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


[viendrai 


[viendrais 


ressouviens-toi 


[vienne 


[vinsso 


je restreindrai 


je restrein- 




je restreigne 


je restrei- 




[drais 


restrains 




[gnisso 


je retiendrai 


je retiendrais 


retiens 


je retienne 


je retinsse 


je retrairai 


je retrairais 


retrais 


je retraie 




je reviendrai 


je reviendrais 


reviens 


je revienne 


je revinsse 


je revetirai 


je revetirais 


revets 


je revete 


je revetisse 


je revivrai 


je revivrais 


revis 


je revive 


je revecusse 


je reverrai 


je reverrais 


reyoia 


je revoie 


je revisse 


je rirai 


je rirais 




je rie 


je risse 


tu riras 


tu rirais 


ris 


tu ries 


tu risses 


ilrira 


il rirait 


q. rie 


ilrie 


ilrit 


n. rirons 


n. ririons 


rions 


n. riions 


n. rissions 


V. rirez 


V. ririez 


riez 


V. riiez 


V. rissiez 


ils riront 


ils riraient 


q. rient 


ils rient 


ils rissent 


je romprai 


je romprais 




je rompe 


je rompisse 


tu rompras 


tu romprais 


romps 


tu rompes 


tu rompissea 


il rompra 


il romprait 


q. rompe 


il rompe 


il rompit 


n. romprons 


n. romprions 


rompons 


n. rompionfi 


n. rompissiong 


V. romprez 


V. rompriez 


rompez 


V. rompiez 


V. rompissieaj 


ils rompront 


Qs rompraient 


q. rompent 


ils rompent 


ils rompissent 


je rouvrirai 


je rouvrirais 


rouvre 


je rouvre 


je rouvrisse 


ilsaillera 


il saillerait 




q. saille 


q. saillit 


je satisferai 


je satisfefais 


satisfais 


je satisfasse> 


je satisfisso' 


je saurai 


je saurais 




je sache 


je susse 


tu sauras 


tu saurais 


sache 


tu saches 


tu susses 


il saura 


il saurait 


q. sache 


il sache 


ilsM 


n. saurons 


n. saurions 


sachons 


n. sachiona 


n. sussiona 


V. saurez 


r. sauriez 


sachez 


V. sachiez 


V. sussiez 


ils sauront 


ils sauraient 


q. sachent 


ils sachent 


ils sussent 


je secourrai 


je secourrais 


seeoura 


je secoure 


je Becouruss© 


je s^duirai 


je s^duirals 




je s6duise> 


je «4duisiaso 






siduia 





S94 IREEGULAR, DEFECTITE, PECULIAR, 



Infinitive. 


Paeticiples. 


Indicative. 


Impekfect. 


Past Definite. 


Semer, 1. to 


semant 


je seme 


ie semais 


je semal 


SOW. peculiar. 


seme,/ e. 








Sentir, 2. to 


sentant 


je sens 


je sentais 


je sentis 


fed 


senti, /. e. 


tu sens 


tu sentais 


tu sentis 


aux. avoir 




il sent 


il sentaifc 


il sentit 


irregular. 




n. sentons 


n. sentions 


n. sentimea 






V. sentez 


V. sentiez 


V. sentites 






ils sentent 


ils sentaient 


ils sentirent 


Seoir, 3. to fit, 


sejant 


il sied 


il seyait 




become, unip. 


sis ^ 








Servir, 2. to 


servant 


je sers 


je servais 


je servis 


serve 


servi, /. e. 


tu sers 


tu servais 


tu servis 


aux. avoir 




il sert 


il servait 


il servit 


irregular^ 




n. servons 


n. servions 


n. servimea 






V. servez 


V. serviez 


V. servites 






ils servent 


ils servaient 


ils servirent 


Sortir, 2. to 


sortant 


je sors 


je sortais 


je sortia 


go out 


sorti, /. e. 


see SENTIR 






SOUPFRIR, 2. to 


souffrant 


je soufifre 


je Bouffrais 


je souffria 


suffer 


souffert, /. e. 


see OUVRIR 






S0UiIETTRE,^4. 


soumettant 


je soumets 


je soumettais 


je soumia 


to submit 


soumis, /. e. 


see METtRE 






SOURIRE, 4. to 


souriant 


je souris 


je souriais 


je souria 


smile 


souri 


see RiRE 






SotJSCRTRE, 4. 


souscrivant 


je souscris 


je souscrivais 


je souscria 


to subscribe 


souscrit 


see ECRiRB 






SOUSTRAIRE, 4. 


soustrayant - 


je soustrais 


je soustrayais 




to subtract 


soustrait, /. e. 


se^ TRAIRE 






SoUTEJfIR, 2, 


soutenant 


je soutiens 


je soutenais 


je soutina 


to sustain 


soutenu, /. e. 


see TENIR 






SouvEisriR, (se) 


se souvenant 


je me souviens 


je me souve- 


je me souvins 


2. to remember 


souvenu, /. e. 


see TENIR 


[nais 




SUBVENIR, 2. 


subvenant 


je sabviens 


je subvenais 


je subvina 


to relieve 


subvenu, /. e. 


see TENIR 






SUFPIRE, 4, to 


suffisant 


je suffis 


je suffisais 


je suffis 


suffice 


suffi 


tu suffis 


tu suffisais 


tu suffis 


aux. avoir 




il suffit 


il suffisait 


il suffit 


irregular 




n. suffisons 


n. suffisions 


n. sufifimea 






V. suffisez 


V. suffisiez 


V. suffites 






ils suffisent 


ils suffisaient 


ils suffirent 


SUIVRE, 4. to 


suivant 


je suis 


je suivais 


je suivis 


follow 


suivi, /. e. 


tu suis 


tu suivais 


tu suivia 


aux. avoir 




il suit 


il suivait 


il suivit 


irregular 




n. suivons 


n. suivions 


n. suivimea 






V. suivez 


V. suiviez 


V. suivites 






ils suivent 


Us suivaient 


ils suivirent 


Surf AIRE, 4. to 


surfaisant 


je surfais 


je surfaisais 


je surfia 


ea;aci 


surfait,/. e. 


see FAIRE 






SURPRENDRB, 


surprenant 


je surprends 


je surprenais 


je surprig 


4. to surprise 


surpris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 







AKD tTNIPERSONAL VERBS 



§ 62. 



895 



FuTtrsE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impekfect. 


je semerai 


je semerais 


seme 


je seme 


je semasse 


je sentirai 


je sentirais 




je sente 


je sentisse 


tu sentiras 


tu sentirais 


sens 


tu sentes 


tu sentissea 


il sentira 


il sentirait 


q. sente 


il sente 


il sentit 


n. sentirons 


n. sentirions 


sentons 


n. sentions 


n. sentissiona 


V. sentirez 


V. sentiriez 


sentez 


V. sentiez 


V. sentissiez 


ils sentiront 


ils sentiraient 


q. sentent 


ils sentent 


ils sentissent 


il siera 


il sierait 




q. siee 




je servirai 


je servirais 




je serve 


je servisse 


tu serviras 


tu servirais 


sers 


tu serves 


tu servissea 


il servira 


il servirait 


q. serve 


il serve 


il servit 


n. servirons 


n. servirions 


servons 


n. serviona 


n. servissiona 


V. servirez 


V. serviriez 


servez 


V. serviez 


V. servissiez 


ils serviront 


ils serviraient 


q. servent 


ils servent 


Us servissent 


je sortirai 


je sortirais 




je sorte 


je sortisse 


je souflfrirai 


je souflfrirais 


sora 
souffre 


je souffre 


je souffiisso 


je soumettrai 


je soumettrais 


soumets 


je soumette 


je soumisse 


je saurirai 


je sourirais 


souris 


je sourie 


je sourisse 


je souscrirai 


je souscrirais 


souscris 


je souscrive 


je souscrivisse 


je soustrairai 


je soustrairais 


soustrais 


je soustraie 




je soutiendrai 


je soutiendrais 


soutiens 


je soutienne 


je soutinsse 


je me souvien- 


je me souvien- 




je me souvien- 


je me sou- 


[drai 


[drais 


souviens-toi 


[ne 


[vinsse 


je subviendrai 


je subvien- 

[drais 


subviena 


je subvienne 


je subvinsse 


je suffirai 


je suffirais 




je suffise 


je suffisse 


tu suffiras 


tu suflBrais 


suffis 


tu suffisea 


tu suffisses 


il suffira 


il suffirait 


q. suffise 


il suffise 


il suff it 


n. suffirons 


n. suffirions 


sufflsons 


n. suffisiona 


n. suffissiona 


V. suffirez 


V. suffiriez 


suffisez 


V. suffisiez 


V. suffissiez 


ils suffiront 


ils suffiraient 


q. suffisent 


ils suffisent 


ils suffissent 


je suivrai 


je suivrais 




je suive 


je suivisse 


tu suivraa 


tu suivrais 


suis 


tu suivea 


tu suivissea 


il suivra 


il suivrait 


q. suive 


il suive 


il suivit 


n. suivrons 


n. suivrions 


suivons 


n. suivions 


n. suivissiona 


V. suivrez 


V. suivriez 


suivez 


V. suiviez 


V. suivissiez 


ils suivront 


ils suivraient 


q. suivent 


ils suivent 


ils suivissent 


je surferai 


je surferais 


surfaia 


je surfasse 


je surfisse 


Je surprendrai 


je surpren- 

[drais 


surprenda 


je surprenne 


je surpriss© 



S96 lUEEGULAR, DEPECTIYE, PECULIAR, 



iNFrNlTlVE. 


Pajsticiples. 


IlfDICATIVE. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definite 


SURSEOIR, 3. 


sursoyant 


je sursois 


je sursoyais 


je sursis 


to supersede 


sursis,/. e. 


tu sursois 


tu sursoyais 


tu sursis 


aux. avoir 




il sursoit 


il sursoyait 


il sursit 


irregular. 




n. sursoyons 


n. sursoyions 


n. sursimes 






V. sursoyez 


V. sursoyiez 


V. Bursites 






ils sursoient 


ils sursoyaient 


ils sursirent 


SURTElsTR, 2. 


survenant 


je surviens 


je survenais 


je survins 


io happen, etc. 


survenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






SURVIYRB, 4. 


survivant 


je survis 
see viYRB 


je survivals 


je survecua 


to survive 


survecu 






tTAiRE, (se) 4. 


se taisant 


je me tais 


je me taisais 


je me tus 


to be silent 


tu, /. e. 


see PLAIRE 






Teindre, 4. to 


teignant 


je teins 


je teignaia 


je teignis 


dye 


teint, /. e. 


see CEiXDRE 






Tenir, 2. to 


tenant 


je tiens 


je tenais 


je tins 


hold 


tenu, /. e. 


tu tiens 


tu tenais 


tu tins 


aux, a\oir 




il tient 


il tenait 


il tint 


irregular. 




n. tenons 


n. tenions 


n. tinmes 






V. tenez 


V. teniez 


V. tintes 






ils tiennent 


ils tenaient 


ils tinrent 


TONNTIR, 1. to 


tonnant 


il tonne 


il tonnait 


il tonna 


thunder, unip. 


tonne 








Traduire, 4. 


traduisant, 


je traduis 


je traduisais 


je traduisia 


to translate 


traduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Traire, 4. to 


trayant 


je trais 


je trayais 




milh 


trait 


tu trais 


tu trayais 




aux. avoir . 




U trait 


il trayait 




defective. 




n. trayons 
V. trayez 
ils traient 


n. tra}ions 
V. trayiez 
ils trayaient 




Transcrire, 4. 


transcrivant 


je transcris 


je transcrivais 


je transcilTis 


to transcribe 


transcrit 


see ECRiRE 






Transmettre, 


transmettant 


je transmets 


je transmettais 


je transmis 


4. to transmit 


transmis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Tressaillir, 


tressaillant 


je tressaille 


je tressaillais 


je tressaillia 


2. to storf 


tressailli 


see ASSAILLIR 






Vaincre, 4. to 


vainquant 


je vaincs 


je vainquais 


je vainquia 


vanquish 


vaincu, /. e. 


tu vaincs 


tu vainquais 


tu vainquia 


aux. avoir 




il vainc 


il vainquait 


il vain quit 


irregular. 




n. vainquons 


n. vainquions 


n. vainquimes 






V. vainquez 


V. vainquiez 


V. vainquites 






ils vainquant 


ils vainquaient 


ils vainquirent 


Yaloir, 3. to 


valant 


je vaux 


je valais 


je valus 


Je worth 


valu 


tu vaux 


tu valais 


tu valua 


aux. avoir 




il vaut 


il valait 


il valut 


irregular. 




n. valons 


n. valions 


n. valumes 






V. valez 


V. valiez 


V. valutes 






ils valent 


ils valaient 


ils valurent 


Yenir, 2. to 


venant 


je viens 


je venais 


je vina 


come 


venu, /. e. 


see TENIR 






aux. 4tr6 











AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS. § 62. 



SQT 



Fftukk. 


Conditional. 


Impeeative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impebfect. 


je surseoirai 


je surseoirais 




je sursoie 


je sursisse 


tu surseoiras 


tu surseoirais 


sursois 


tu sursoies 


tu sursisses 


il surseoira 


il surseoirait 


q. sursoie 


il sursoie 


il sursit 


n. surseoirons 


n. surseoirions 


sursoyons 


n. sursoyions 


n. sursissions 


V. surseoirez 


V. surseoiriez 


sursoyez 


V. sursoyiez 


V. sursissiez 


ils surseoiront 


1. surseoiraient 


q. sursoient 


ils sursoient 


ils sursissent 


je surviendrai 


je surviendrais 


surviens 


je survienne 


je survinsse 


J9 survivrai 


je survivrais 


survis 


je survive 


je survecusso 


je me tairai 


je me tairais 


tais-toi 


je me taise 


je me tusss 


je teindrai 


je teindrais 


teins 


je teigne 


je teigniss© 


je tiendrai 


je tiendrais 




je tienne 


je tinsse 


tu tiendras 


tu tiendrais 


tiens 


tu tiennes 


tu tinssea 


il tiendra 


il tiendrait 


q. tienne 


il tienne 


il tint 


n. tiendrons 


n. tiendrions 


tenons 


n. tenions 


n. tinssions 


V. tiendrez 


V. tiendriez 


tenez 


V. teniez 


V. tinssiez 


ils tiendront 


ils tiendraient 


q. tiennent 


ils tiennent 


ils tinssent 


il tonnera 


LL tonnerait 


q. tonne 


q. tonne 


q. tonnat 


je traduirai 


je traduirais 


traduis 


je traduise 


je traduisisse 


je trairai [ 


je trairais 




je traie 




tu trairaa 


tu trairais 


trais 


tu traies 




il traira 


il trairait 


q. traie 


il traie 




n. trairons 


n. trairions 


trayons 


n. trayona 




V. trairez 


V. trairiez 


trayez 


V. trayiez 




ils trairont 


ils trairaient 


q. traient 


ils traient 




je transcrirai 


je transcrirais 


transcria 


je transcrive 


je transcri- 

[visse 


je transmet- 


je transmet- 




je transmette 


je transmisse 


[trai 


[trais 


transmets 






je tressaillirai 


je tressaillirais 


tressaille 


je tressaille 


je tressaillisse 


je vaincrai 


je vaincrais 




je vainque 


je vainquisse 


tu vaincras 


tu vaincrais 


vaincs 


tu vainques 


tu vainquisses 


il vaincra 


il vaincrait 


q. vainque 


il vainque 


il vainquit 


n. vaincrons 


n. vaincrions 


vainquons 


n. vainquions 


n.vainquissiong 


V. vaincrez 


V. vaincriez 


vainquez 


V. vainquiez 


V. vainquissiez 


ils vaiucront 


ils vaincraient 


q. vainquent 


ils vainquent 


i. vainquissent 


je vaudrai 


je vaudrais 




je vaille 


je valusse 


tu vaudras 


tu vaudrais 


vaux 


tu vaiUes 


tu valussea 


il vaudra 


il vaudrait 


q. vaiUe 


il vaille 


il valut 


n. vaudrons 


n. vaudrions 


valons 


n. valions 


n. valussiona 


V. vaudrez 


V, vaudriez 


valez 


V. valiez 


V. valussiez 


ils vaudront 


ils vaudraient 


q. vaUlent 


ils vaillent 


ils valussent 


}Q viendrai 


je viendrais 


viens 


je vienne 


je vinss© 



898 IREKQULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAB 



IsrFINITlVE. 


Pabticiples. 


I^fDICATIVB. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite. 


Vetir, 2. to 


vetant 


je vets 


je vetais 


je vetis 


clothe 


vetu, /. e. 


tu vets 


tu vetais 


tu vetis 


aux. avoir 




U vet 


il vetait 


il vetit 


irregular. 




n. vetons 


n. vetions 


n. vetimes 






V. vetez 


V, vetiez 


V. vetites 






Us vetent 


ils vetaient 


ils vetirent 


Vetir, (se) 2. 


se vetant 


je me vets 


je me vetais 


je me vetia 


to clothe one's 


vetu,/. e. 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


self. ref. 










YlYRE, 4. to 


vivant 


je vis 


je vivais 


je vecus 


live 


vecu 


tu vis 


tu vivais 


tu vecus 


aux. avoir 




ilvit 


n vivait 


il vecut 


irregular. 




n. vivons 


n. vivions 


n. vecumea 




. 


V. vivez 


V. viviez 


V. vecutes 






Us vivent 


ils vivaient 


Us vecurent 


Voir, 3. to 


voyant 


je vois 


je voyais 


je vis 


see 


vu,/. e. 


tu vois 


tu voyais 


tu vis 


aux. avoir 




ilvoit 


il voyait 


Uvit 


irregular. 




n. voyons 


n. voyions 


n. vimea 






V. voyez 


V. voyiez 


V. vites 






ils voient 


ils voyaient 


Us virent 


VOULOIR, 3. to 


voulant 


je veux 


je voulais 


je voulus 


he willing 


voulu 


tu veux 


tu voulais 


tu voulus 


aux. avoir 


. 


ilveut 


il voulait 


U voulut 


irregular. 




n. voulons 


D. voulions 


n. voulumes 






V. voulez 


V. vouliez 


V. voulutes 






ils veulent 


ils voulaient 


ils voulurent 



Eemarks. 

Absoudee. The Academy gives in the past participle of this verb, absous 
and dbsoutyOXi^ seems to prefer the latter form. The best 
writers, however, prefer the former. 

Aller. The form, je vas, I go, is obsolete. 

Benir has two participles, the regular one, heni, blessed; and tho 

irregular form, ienit, consecrated. 

Fleueir. This verb retains the old form in the present participle and 
imperfect, florissant, je Jiorissais, etc., when it is used figura- 
tively. 

POTTVOnt has two forms in the present of the indicative, je puis and je 
peux. The former is preferable, except when the second nega- 
tive is put after the verb. 



ANDUNIPERSONAL VERBS. — 5 62 



899 



FUTTJEE. 


Conditional. 


IMPEKATIVB. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je vetirai 


je vetirais 




je vete 


je vetisse 


tu vetiras 


tu vetirais 


vets 


tu vetes 


tu vetisses 


il vetira 


il vetirait 


q. vete 


il vete 


il vetit 


n. vetirons 


n. vetirions , 


vetons 


n. vetions 


n. vetissiona 


V. vetirez 


V. vetiriez 


vetez 


V. vetiez 


V. vetissiez 


ils vetiront 


ils vetiraient 


q. vetent 


ils vetent 


Us vetissent 


je me vetirai 


je me vetirais 




je me vete 


je me vetisse 


&c. 


&c. 


vets-toi 


&c. 


&c. 


je vivrai 


je vivrais 




je vive 


je vecusse 


ta vivras 


tu vivrais 


vis 


tu vives 


tu vecusses 


il vivra 


il vivrait 


q. viva 


il vive 


il veciit 


n. vivrons 


n. vivrions 


vivons 


n. vivions 


n. vecussiona 


V. vivrez 


V. vivriez 


vivez 


V. viviez 


V. vecussiez 


ils vivront 


ils vivraient 


q. vivent 


ils vivent 


ils vecussent 


je verrai 


je verrais 




je voie 


je visse 


tu verras 


tu verrais 


vois 


tu voies 


tu visses 


il verra 


il verrait 


q. voie 


il voie 


ilvit 


n. verrons 


n. verrions 


voyons 


n. voyions 


n, vissions 


V. verrez 


V. verriez 


voyez 


V. voyiez 


V. vissiez 


ils verront 


ils verraieut 


q. voient 


ils voient 


ils vissent 


je voudrai 


je voudrais 




je veuille 


je voulusse 


tu voudras 


tu voudrais 




tu veuilles 


tu voulussea 


il voudra 


U voudrait 




il veuille 


il voulut 


n. voudrons 


n. voudrions 




n. voulions 


n. voulussiona 


V. voudrez 


V. voudriez 


veuillez 


V. vouliez 


V. voulussiez 


ils voudront 


ils voudraieut 




ils veuillent 


ils voulussent 



Remarks. 

RiPAETiR (with an accent), is regular and means to divide. It should not 
be confounded with repartir, to set off again. 

EisouDRE has two past participles, resolu, resolved upon, and resous, re* 
solved into. 

Eessortir, to depend upon, to be within the jurisdiction, is regular. It must 
not be confounded with ressortir, to go out again, which is con- 
jugated like sortir. ^ 

TiSTEB, to weave, is only used in the past participle, iissu, woven. 



400 . THE PABTICIPLE. — § 63, 64, 65, 66. 

§ 63. — The Participle. 

(1.) The participle is so called, because it participates of the na- 
ture both of the verb and of the adjective. It partakes of the nature 
of the verb, in having its signification and regimen, and of the na- 
ture of the adjective in relating, like the latter, to nouns and pro- 
nouns. 

(2.) There are two sorts of participles ; the present and the past. 

§ 64. — The Paeticiple Present. 

(1.) The participle present, which denotes continuance of action 
answers to the Enghsh participle in ing. 

(2.) This participle is invariable; always terminating in ant; aS, 
chantant, singing ; finissant, finishing ; recevant, receiving ; vendant, 



une dame mar chant, a lady walking ; 

des hommes marchani, men walking. 

J'ai vu les vents grondani sur ces I have seen the winds roaring over 

moissons superbes, those superb harvests, root up the 

Deraciner les bles, se disputer les grain, and contend for the sheaves. 
gerbes. Delille. 

§ 65. — Verbal Adjectives ending in ant. 

(1.) The verbal adjective in ant expresses merely the condition, 
the manner of being, the quality of the noun. It never denotes ac- 
tion. 

(2.) This adjective varies in gender and number. We give below 
examples of the same words, used as participles and as adjectives :— • 

Adjectives. Participles. 

Une femme ohligeante est aimee Une femme ohligeani tout le 

de tout le monde. monde est generalement aimee. 

An obliging woman is loved by A woman obliging every body ia 

every person. generally loved. 

Les tribus err antes del'Afrique. Les tribus errant dans I'Afrique. 

The wandering tribes of Africa. TJie tribes wandering in Africa. 

II n'y a que les natures aimantes Les natures aimant la solitude^ 

qui soient propres a 1' etude de la aiment generalement I'etude, 
nature. Bernardi^ de St. Pierre. 

Affectionate natures (dispositions) Natures (dispositions) loving soli- 

only, are Jit for the study of nature. tude, are in general fond of study. 

§ 66.— The Participle Past. 
(1.) The participle past denotes the completion of the action. 
(2.) It is susceptible of variations for gender and number. 
(3.) The participle past, used without an auxiliary, agrees in gen- 
der and number with the noun which it quahfies, whether the noun 



ADVERBS.— § 67, 68. 401 

precedes or follows. In short, all that we have said of the agree- 
ment of the adjective with the noun, may be apphed to this par-» 
ticiple. 

des enfants cheris^ beloved children ; 

des femmes esimees, esteemed women; 

Comme una lampe d'or, dans I'azur Like a golden lamp, suspended in 

suspendue, the azure vault, the moon balances 

La lune se balance aux bords de herself in the confines of the horizon; 

rhorizon ; her weakened rays sleep on the turf. 

Bes rayons affaiblis dorment surle 
gazon. LAMARTiisrE. 

(4.) For further rules on the past participle, eee Syntax, § 134, and 
following. 

§ 67. — The Adverb. 

(1.) The adverb is an invariable word joined to verbs, adjectives, 
or to other adverbs, to modify their signification. 

(2.) Adverbs are divided into seven classes : 

1. Of manner ; doucement, softly ; sagement, wisely ; etc. 

2. Of order; premierement, first; d'abord, at first ; ensuite, af- 

terwards; etc. 

3. Of place ; ici, Jiere ; ou, where ; la, there ; ailleurs, else- 

where; etc. 

4. Of time ; hier, yesterday ; aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, tO' 

morrow ; etc. 

5. Of quantity; peu, little; trop, too much; tant, so much; etc. 

6. Of comparison; plus, more; moins, less; tres, very. 

7. Of affirmation, ne- oui, yes ; certes, certainly; non, no; nuUement, by 
gation and doubt. no means; peut-etre, perhaps; ne, pas, point, 

not; etc. 

(3.) A few adjectives are sometimes used adverbially. They are 
then invariable : 

chanter y^s^e, to sing in tune; 

couter cher, to cost dear ; 

parler haut, to speak loud. 

(4.) Several words united together, and having the force of an ad- 
verb, are called an adverbial phrase : 

tout a coup, suddenly ; 

peu a peu, by degrees ; 

tout a I'heure, immediately ; 

de temps en temps, now and then, etc. 

§ 68. — Formation of Adverbs from Adjectives. 

(1.) — Adverbs ending in ment, may be formed from adjectives in 
'the following manner : 

(2.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel, ment 
is added to form the adverb : 



402 



ADVERBS. — § 69, 10. 





Adjective. 


Adverb. 


utne, 
poll, 
aise, 


useful; 
polite ; 
easy; 


utilement, usefully ; 
poliment, politely ; 
aisement, easily. 




(3.) Exceptions. 


beau, 

fou, 

mou, 

nouveau 

traitre, 


beautiful ; 
foolish ; 
soft; 
new ; 
treacherous ; 


bellement, beautifully; 
follement, foolishly ; 
mollement, softly ; 
nouvellement, newly ; 
traitreusemenfc, treacherously. 



(4.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a consonant, 
the syllable ment is added to its feminine termination, as, 
masc. fern. 

bon, bonne, good; bonnement, in a good manner; 

doux, douce, soft ; doucement, softly ; 

heureux, heureuse, happy; heureusement, happily. 
(5.) Adjectives ending in nt, change that termination into mment: 
prudent, prudent; prudemment, prudently; 

Elegant, elegant; elegamment, elegantly. 

Exceptions. 
lent, slow; lentement, slowly; 

present, present; presentement, presently. 

(6.) The following adverbs require an acute accent over the e pre- 
ceding ment, which e is mute in the adjective : 



aveuglement, 

commodement, 

communement, 

conformement, 

confusement, 

diffusement, 

enormement, 



blindly ; 
commodiously ; 
commonly ; 
conformably ; 
confusedly ; 
diffusely ; 
enormously ; 



§69. 



expressement, 

importunement, importunately ; 

incommodement, incommodiously ; 

obscurement, obscurely ; 

opiniitrement, obstinately ; 

precisement, precisely ; 

profondement, profoundly. 

-Degrees of Signification in Adverbs ending in 

MENT. 

(1.) Adverbs ending in ment, are, like all the adjectives from which 
they are formed, susceptible of three degrees of signification; the 
positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 

(2.) The first expresses the manner simply. 

(3.) The second expresses it in a degree of equality, superiority, 
or inferiority, by adding to the adverb the words, si, so ; aussi, as ; 
plus, more ; moins, less. 

(4.) The third, by the addition of the words, bien, tres, fort, very, 
carries the signification to the highest degree. 
8 70. — Adverbs making of themselves a Comparison. 



comme, 
de meme, 
pareillement, 



in the same manner; 



amsi, 
plus, 
davantage, 



thus; 
imare; 



PREPOSITIONS. — § Tl, 72. 



403 



De plus, 

Moins, 

Mieus, 

Pis, 

Tres, 

Ni plus ni moins, 

Presque, ) 
Quasi, y 



besides ; 
less-, 
better ; 
worse • 
very ; 

neither more nor 
less ; 

almost ; 



A peu pres, nearly; 

Pour le plus, for the most; 
Tout au plus, at most ; 
A qui mieux 

mieux, 
A I'envi, 
De mieux en better and better. 



vying with one 
another ; 



71. — The Preposition. 



(1.) The preposition is an invariable word, used to express the re- 



lations of things. 



(2.) The preposition conveys by itself no distinct meaning. The 
preposition and the vp-ord which it governs, form what is called an in- 
direct regimen. 

8 72. — ^Table of the Pkinoipai. Prepositions. 



A, 

A cause de, 


to, ai, in ; 
on account of; 


Excepts, ) 
Hormis, j" 


except, but; 


Apres, 


after; 


Hors, 


save ; 


Attendu, vu, 
Aupres de, 


on account of; 
near ; 


Jusqu'a, ) 
Jusques a, ) 


until, as far as; 


Autour de. 


about, around; 


Loin de. 


far from; 


Avant, 


before, (earlier) ; 


Le long de. 


along ; 


Avec, 


with ; 


Malgre, 


in spite of; 


Chez, 


at the house of 


Moyennant, 


by means of; 


Contre, 


against ; 


Nonobstant, 


notwitlistanding ; 


Dans, 


in, within; 


Outre, 


besides ; 


D'apres, 


from, after; 


Par, 


by, through; 


D'avec, 


from ; 


Pardevant, 


before, {law term) ; 


De, 


of from, with ; 


Parmi, 


among, amongst^ 


Dela, au dela de 


) beyond, on that 
\ side of; 


Pendant, 


during ; 


Dedela, pardela 


Pour, 


for; 


Depuis, 


since, for ; 


Pres de. 


near, close by; 


Derriere, 


behind; 


Proche,proche 


de, near by ; 


Des, 


from ; 


Quant a, 


as far, with respect; 


Devant, 


before, opposite; 


Sans, 


without ; 


Durant, 


during ; 


Sauf, 


saving, except; 


En, 


in, at, to ; 


Selou, 


according to; 


En dega de, ) 


this side ; 


Sous, 


under ; 


De dega, par [■ 


on this side ; 


Suivant, 


according to; 


dega, ) 




Sur, 


upon, on; 


Entre 


between; 


Touchant, 


touching ; 


Envers, ) 
A regard de,i" 


towards ; 


Concernant, 


concerning ; 


Vers, 


towards, to; 


Environ, 


about; 


Vis-a-vis de. 


opposite. 



(2.) The prepositions are divided into several classes. 
(3.) Among those denoting place are — 

fCe n'est qn'autour de lui que vole la victoire. 
Around him ak^ne havers victory. 



404 



PREPOSITIONS. — 5 72. 



Chez, with ; at the 
house of; among ; 
(apudo/2!Ae Latin.) 

Dans, in; 

Parmi, among; 
Yers, towards: 



Sous, under ; 



Enfin, chez les Chretiens les moeurs sont innocen- 

tes. CORNEILLE. 

Among Garistians, finally, the manners are innocent. 

Chez mon p?re, at my father'' s house. 

Rome n'est plus dam Rome, Coexeille. 

Borne is no longer in Rome. 
( Parmi les rochers, vers le milieu de ces montagnea 
J escarpees. Fenelo^'. 

j Among the rocks, towards the middle of those steep 
[^ mountains. 

TL'autel couvert de feux, tombe et fuit, som la 
J terre. Voltaire, 

I The altar covered with fire, falls and disappears urtr 
[^ der the earth. 

Les riches ne sont swr la terre que pour faire du 
bien. Fenelon. 

TJie rich are placed on the earth merely to do good. 

(4.) Some, denoting time, are — 
Durant, / ^„„,-„^ . J Durant la nuit, elle n'a point dormi. 
Pendant, j 1 During the night she has had no 

(5.) Some mark place and time, as — 



Sur, upon^ 



CORNEILLB. 



Pes, from ; 
" \place;) 



S Des Orleans. Des sa source. 
{ From Orleans; from its source; 



L'Agat>t?. mtr . 



{time ;) 



Depms, frojn ; since 
" {place ;) 



fL'homme, des sa naissance, a le sentiment du plaisir 
J et de la douleur. Massillon. 

1 Man from his birth has the sensation of pleasure and 

[ of pa 171. 

{La France s'etend depuis le Rhin jusqu'a I'Ocean, 
L'ACADEMIE. 
France extends from the Rhine to the Ocean. 
( En Orient, en Occident, depuis deux mille ans, on 
I ne parle que d' Alexandre. Massillon. 

I /?z the East, in the West, since two thousand years, 
[ they speak continually of Alexander. 

Dans, en, sous, vers, etc., may also be placed under this head. 

(6.) Some prepositions mark order, as — 

fLa conscience nous avertit, en ami, avant de noua 
< punir. Stanislas. 

[ Conscience warns us, as a friend, before punishing us. 
( Je crains Dieu, et apres Dieu, je crains principale- 
J ment celui qui ne le craint pas. Sadl 

j I fear God, and, after God, I fear principally the man 
{ vjho does not fear him. 

('L'homme est place hbre entre le vice et la vertu. 
-{ Marmontel. 

Man is placed free beiiveen vice and virtue. 

II se met toujours derriere celui qui parle. 

La Beuyerb. 

Re places himself always behind the speaker. 

Fais marcher devant toi I'ange exterminateur. 

YOLTAIRE. 

Send before thee the exterminating angel 



{time ;) 



Avant, before; 
{at an earlier time ; 



Apres, after ; 



Entre, between, 



Derriere, behind; 

Devant, before; 
{in- front of-, 



PEEPOSITIOIS'S. — S 75. 



405 



(7.) The prepositions marking union, are: 
Avec, with; 



Outre^ besides; 



Excepte, ejccepi ; 
Hormis, except; 
Hers, except; 

Sans, without ; 
Sauf, save; except; 



Contra, against ; 



Idialgre, in spite of; 



Nonobstant, not 
withstanding. 



Je veux vivre avec elle, avec elle expirer. 

CORNEILLE. 



^ I will live with her, die with her. 
Outre I'estime de soi-meme, Thonnete homme possede 
encore I'estime et la confiance universelles. 

Marmontel. 
Besides self-esteem, the honest man possesses universal 
esteem and confidence. 
(8.) Those of separation, exception, are: 

II travaille toute la semaine, excepte le dimanche. 

L'ACADEMIE. 

He works the whole week, except Sunday. 
Hormis toi, tout le monde est content. 
All are pleased, except you. 
Xul n'aura de I'esprit, hors nous et nos amis. 

MOLI^RE. 

No one shall have wit, tut ourselves and our friends. 
Point de vertu sans religion, point de bonheur sans 

vertu. Diderot. 

No virtue without religion, no happiness without 

virtue. « 

On pent tout sacrifier a I'amitie, sauf I'honnetete et 

la justice. Marmontel. 

We may sacrifice all to friendship, except honesty and 

justice. 
(9.) The prepositions of opposition are : 

. f Le travail est une meilleure ressource contre I'ennui 

que le plaisir. Trublet. 

Labor is a better resource against ennui than pleas- 
ure. 
Nous suivrons malgre nous le vainqueur de Lesbos. 

Racine. 
We shall follow against our will the conqueror of 

Lesbos. 
La verite, nonobstant le prejuge, I'erreur et le mensongo, 

se fait jour a la fin, Marmontel. 

Truth, prejudice error and falsehood notwithstanding^ 

comes at last to light. 

(10.) The prepositions of conformity are : 

La terre, cette bonne mere, multiplie ses dons sehn 

le nombre do ses enfants. Fenelon. 

The earth, that good, mother, multiplies her gifts accord" 

ing to the number of Jier children, 
Les talents produisent suivant la culture. 

Marmontel. 
^ Talents produce according to their cultivation. 
(11.) Several words placed together and performing the part of a 
preposition, are called a prepositional phrase : 

A regard de, with regard to ; 

En faveur de, in favor of; 

A la reserve de, reserving ; &to. 



Selon, 
Suivant, 



accord- 
ing to ; 



40S 



CONJUKCTIONS* — § 73. 



§ 73. — ^The Conjunctiok. 

(1.) Conjunctions are invariable words which serve to connect 
words and sentences. 

(2.) French grammarians divide the conjunctions into nine 
classes : 

1 Copulative, "] fat, and; ni, nor; que, that; desorte que, so 

that; etc. 

2 Adversative, mais, but; quoique, though; cependant^ 

yet; etc. 

3 Disjunctive, ou, or ; ou bien, else ; ni, neither ; etc. 

4 Explanatory, savoir, namely; comme, as; c'est a dire, 

that is to say ; etc. 

5 Circumstantial, >- as -< quand, lorsque, when ; pendant que, while ; 

6 Conditional, si, if; sans quoi, without which; suppose 

que, supposing that, etc. 

7 Causal, car, for ; puisque, since ; pourquoi, why ; 

wherefore; etc. 

8 Transitive, or, done, therefore; ainsi, thus; d'ailleur^ 

besides, etc. 

9 Determinative, J L^^®) ^^^^^ 

(3.) "We here present a list of the conjunctions and conjunctiva, 
phrases most commonly used in Frsnch. We will divide them into 
two classes. 

1. Conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which may be placed in 
the first or in the second part of a period : 



A cause que, 
A moins que, 
Aussitot que, 
Au cas que, 
Apres que, 
Ainsi que, 
Attendu que, 
Afin que, 
Au reste, 
Avant que, 

Cependant que, 
De crainte que, 
De meme que, 
De peur que, 
Depuis que, 
De sorte que, 
Durant que, 
En cas que, 
Encore que, 



because ; 

unless ; 

as soon as; 

in case that, if; 

after that; 

as, as well as ; 

whereas ; 

in order that ; 

besides ; 

before that, sooner 

than ; 
although ; 
for fear that, lest; 
in the same way as; 
for fear that, lest ; 
since that; 
so that; 
while ; 
in case that ; 
although ; 



Jusqu'a ce que, 

Lorsque, 

Ou bien, 

Outre que, 

Pendant que, 

Parce que, 

Pourvu que, 

Puisque, 

Quand, 

Quoique, 

Si, 

Sans que, 

Sitot que, 

Soit que, 

Si ce n'est que, 

Suppose que, 

Tant que, 

Tandis que, 

Vu que, 



until that; 
if, when; 
or, else; 
besides that ; 
while thai ; 
because ; 
provided; 
since ; 
if, when ; 
although, though 

if; 

unless ; 

provided that ; 
be it that ; 
unless ; 

s?upposing that ; 
provided that; 
while that; 
provided thai. 



2. The conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which usually comei 



IKTERJECTIONS. — § ^4 



407 



between two parts of a sentence, or at the commencement of a dis- 



course momentarily interrupted, are : 



Aussi bien que, 

Apres tout, 

A condition que, 

Au surplus, 

C'est pourquoi, 

Cependant, 

C'est a dire, 

C'est a savoir, 

Car, 

Done, 



as well as ; 
nevertheless ; 
on condition that; 
besides ; 
therefore ; 
however ; 
that is to say ; 
that is ; 
for, became; 
therefore ; 



See Lesson 100 — ^Examples on 



En effet, 

Et puis, 

Mais, 

Partant, 

Par consequent, 

Pourtant, 

Sans quoi, 

Savoir, 

Sinon, 

Toutefois, 



in fact ; 
and then ; 
but] 

therefore ; 
consequently ; 
however ; 
unless that; 
to wit; 
unless ; 
nevertheless. 



the different uses of conjunctions. 



§ 74. — Intekjections. 

(1.) The interjections indicate some sudden affection or emotion 
of the mind. They are exclamations which seem to take the place of 
entire propositions. 

(2.) Some imply astonishment : 

r Beaux arts, eh/ dans quels lieux n'avez-vous droit 
.,.,., J de plaire ? Delille. 

e ! c. < p^^^ ^^^ ^j^i ^^ what place have you not a right 

[ to please F 
(3.) Some express derision, irony, distrust, etc. : 

maitre d'armes vous tient bien au cceur. 

MOLIERE. 

this fencing master displeases you much, 
(4.) Others express contempt, aversion and disapprobation : 

■ci^-v, t ^»,.^». -,„VT. ^4-^ ( Foin du loup et de sa race ! La Fontaine. 
Fom 1 away with, etc. ^ ^^^^ ^ .^^ f^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^ .^ ^^^ ^ 

Tout beau! softly ! \ ^^^^ '^,^; ""wfT ' ^""^ ^''''* ^ MoLiiiRE.. 

(5.) We shall carry no further this classification, but content our- 
selves with giving a list of the most usual interjections : 



Ouais, ah! indeed! 
Qui da, truly, etc 



i Ouais ! ce mi 
( Ah! indeed! \ 



Ah! 


ah! 


Oh! 


oh! 


Ahi! 


eigh ! 


Ouais! 


ah, indeed ! so, 5d / 


Bah! 


bah ! 


Ouf! 


eigh ! 


Chutl 


silence! hist! 


Paf! 


crack ! 


Eh! 


eh! 


St! 


hist! 


Eil 


fy! 


Sus! 


quickly ! 


Garel 


take care ! 


Zest! 


quickly 1 


Ha! 


ha! 


Pi done! 


fy then! 


Helas ! 


alas! 


Ho 9a I 


holla! 


Heul 


alas ! 


He bien ! 


now then!. 


Hoiai 


holla 1 


Eh bien ! 


well then ! 


Ho! 


ho! 


Ouid^! 


truly ! 


Hem! 


hem! 


Or 9a! 


quickly 1 


HeinI 


eh! 


Tout beau ! 


softly / 


Hum! 


him I 


Silence! Paix! 


silence t. 




&c. 




&0. 



.409 SYNTAX. — § 75, 76. 

§ Y5.— SYNTAX. 

(1.) Syntax treats of the agreement, government, and arrangement 
of words in sentences. 

(2.) One word is said to agree with another, when it takes the 
same modification of ~^ender, number, and person. 

(3.) One word governs another, when by the influence of the 
former the latter is made to assume a particular form or place. 

(4.) The proper arrangement of words consists in placing them in 
the order sanctioned by grammatical rules, deduced from the best 
reputable custom. 

(5.) For the cases adopted by the modern French grammarians, 
the student is referred to § 2, and § 42, (2,) (3,) (4,) (5.) 

§ 16. — The Noun. — Place of Nouns. 

(1.) In French, as well as in English, a noun used as the subject 
or nominative of an affirmative or negative sentence, generally pre- 
cedes the verb : 

L'homme le plus obscur aime la Tin most hunible man loves liberty. 
liberte. Chateaubriand. 

L^esperance tient lieu des biens Hope takes the place of the benefits 

qu'elle promet. La Chaussee. which it promises. 

(2.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject is sometimes 
placed after the verb : 

II n'est point de noblesse, oh. Nothing noble can exist, where 

manque la vertu. Crebillon. virtue is wanting. 

La fortune est a craindre, oh. Where wisdom is wanting, fortune 

manque la sagesse. Boursault. is to be feared. 

(3.) In interjected sentences, that is, in sentences which we, 
while repeating the words of a person, throw among other sentences, 
to indicate that person as the speaker, the subject, in French, must 
always follow the verb : 

Heureux, disait Mentor, le peuple Happy, said Mentor, the people 
qui est conduit par un sage roi 1 who are governed by a wise king. 

Fenelon. 

(4.) In interrogative sentences, the noun generally precedes the 
verb, which must be immediately followed by a pronoun correspond- 
ing in gender and number with the noun : 

La mort est-eZZe un mal ? La vie Is death an evil? Is life a bene- 
e^t-elle un bien ? Crebillon. fit ? Literally, Death, is it an evil f 

etc. 

(5.) When the sentence commences with one of the following 
words, ou, where; que, what; combien, how much ; quand, when; 



SYNTAX OP NOUNS. — § 16, 409 

the noun may be placed immediately after the verb, or in accord- 
ance with the last rule : 

0^ estYoi^epere? or ) ^^^^^ is your father ? 

Ou votre^ere est-il? ) " •' 

Mais que sert un long regne, d Of what use is a long reign, wn,' 
moins qu'il ne soit beau ? less it be glorious ? 

BOUESAULT. 

(6.) The noun, used as a direct regimen, has the same place in the 

sentence in French as in English : 

La force fonde, etend, et main- Power founds, extends, and main* 
tient un empire. Saurin. iains an empire. 

(7.) When there are, in the same sentence, two nouns, one used 
as direct, the other as indirect regimen, and those nouns with the 
words qualifying or modifying them, are of equal length, the direct 
regimen should precede the indirect :^ 

Le malheur ajoute un nouveau Misfortune adds a new lustre to iha 

lustre a la gloire des grands horn- glory of great men. 
'mes. Fenelon". 

Avez-vous donne les livres a mon Have you given the books to my 

frere? Girault-Duviyier. brother. 

(8.) When, however, the qualifying or explanatory words render 
the direct regimen longer than the indirect, the regime indirect ia 
placed first : 

Avez-vous donne d mon frere les Have you given my brother the 

livres que vous lui aviez promis ? booTcs^ which you had promised him f 

Les , hypocrites parent des dehors Hypocrites adorn with the appear- 

de la vertu, les vices les plus honteux. ance of virtue, the most shameful 

Noel. vices. 

(9.) The indirect regimen precedes the direct regimen, when the 
meaning would otherwise be doubtful : 

T4chez de ramener par la douceur Try to bring back by mildness^ 
ces esprits egares. these erring spirits. 

Bescherelle. 

Any other construction would render the sentence equivocal. 

(10.) In English, the name of the possessor frequently precedes 
the name of the object possessed, and the two are connected by 
means of 's (the old Saxon genitive termination). In French the 
order is always different. The name of the object precedes that of 
the possessor, and the connecting link is a preposition : 

Les livres de mon ami. My friend^ s books. 

Vous avez vu la montre de ma Tou have seen my sister^s watch. 



* This must also be the case, when the regime direct is shorter than the 
rigime indirect. 

18 



410 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. — § 71, 

(11.) The name of an object always precedes the name of the 
substance of which it is formed, or which it contains. The preposi- 
tion de comes between them : 

Une table de marbre. A marble table. 

La France a beaucoup de carrieres France has many marble quarries. 
de marbre. 

Un bouteille de vin. A bottle of wine. 

(12.) The word representing an individual always precedes that 

describing his particular occupation, or the merchandise of which he 

disposes : 

Un maitre de danse. A dancing master. 

Un maitre de laogues. A teacher of languages. 

Un marchand de drap. A draper, or dealer in cloth. 

(13.) The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, etc. always precedes the 
noun representing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose 
to which it is adapted. The connecting preposition is generally d ; 

Un moulin a vent. A wind-mill 

Un moulin a farine. A grist-mill. 

Des moulins a eau. . Water-mills. 

Une voiture a vapeur. A steam carriage. 

Un bateau a vapeur. A steamloat 

Une voiture a deux chevaux. A two horse carriage. 

(14.) The name of an object precedes the noun representi'ug- its 
particular produce, use, or appendages, etc. j a generally connects 
these nouns : 

Le gout du fruit de Varbre d pain The taste of the fruit of the bread- 

ressemble celui de I'artichaut. tree resembles that of the artichoke. 
Bernardij^ de St. Pierre. 

Le nom de vertu, dans la bouche The name of virtue, in the mouth 

de certaines personnes, fait tressail- of certain persons, makes one shud- 

lir, comme le grelot du serpent d der, like the noise of a rattlesnake, 
sonnettes. Mmb. Necker. 

Les betes d comes ne sont pas si Horned animals {neat cattle) are 

nombreuses que les betes d laine. not so numerous as sheep (wool ani- 
mals). 

La, salle a manger. The dining room. 

Du bois a briller. Fire wood. 

Un verre a eau. A water glass, i. e., glass for water. 
See § 81, (2.) 

§ 77. — The Article. — ^Use of the Aeticle. 
(1.) The article^ must be used in French before every noun em-« 
ployed in a general sense, oi* denoting a whole species of objects, 
although in similar cases the article is not used in English. Ex : 

* The student will recollect that the French have only one article, le. 
The word un being, by modern French grammarians, very properly classed 
with the numeral adjectives. 



TNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. — 8 77. 



411 



Les bienfaits peuvent tout sur 
une ame bien nee. Voltaire. 

X'honneur, aux grands coeurs, est 
plus cher que la vie. Corneille. 

La honte suit toujours un lacbe 
desespoir. Crebillon. 

(2.) The article is used in French, as in English, before a noun 
denoting a particular object, or taken in a particular sense : 

Le bonheur des mechants comme The happiness of the wicked rum 
un torrent s'ecoule, Racine. away like a torrent. 



Benefits are all powerful with a 
well disposed mind. 

Honor is,with magnanimous hearts, 
more precious than life. 

Shame always follows a cowardly 
despair. 



Z'arbrisseau le plus sain a be- 
soin de culture. 

Fabre d']iIglantine. 

Le moment du peril est celui du 
courage. La Harpe. 



I'he healthiest shrub needs cultiva- 
tion. 



The time of peril is the time for 
courage. 

(3.) The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, 
rivers, winds and mountains : 

La France est bornee au midi France is hounded on the south 

par les Pyrenees et la Mediterranee; hy the Pyrenees and the Mediterra- 

dj Z'est par la Suisse et la Savoie ; nean ; on the east hy Switzerland 

au nord par la Belgique, et a Z'ouest and Savoy ; on the north hy Bel- 

par Z'Ocean. Ses principales rivieres gium, and on the west hy the Ocean, 

Sont la Meuse, le Rhin, la Seine, la Its principal rivers are the Meuse^ 

Loire, la Garonne et le Rhone. the Bhine, the Seine, the Loire, the 

Garonne and the Rhone. 

(4.) Those countries which take their name from their capital, or 
BOme other city within their boundaries, take no article : 

Naples est un pays delicieux. Naples is a delightful country. 

Venise etait un etat puissant. Venice was a powerful state. 

New -York est \m etat sain. New York is a healthy state. 

(5.) The French use the article before titles prefixed to names : 

Le general Cavaignac. General Cavaignac ; 

Le president Bonaparte. President Bonaparte. 

(6.) The article is also used before the names of dignities, of cer- 
tain bodies, systems of doctrine, and with other words mentioned 
below : 

La monarchie, 
Le parlement, 
Le gouvernement, 
Le cliristianisme, 
L'episcopat, 
A I'eglise, 

(7.) Before the names of the seasons, and the following expres- 
sions : 



monarchy ; 


A I'ecole, 


at school ; 


parliament ; 


Au college, 


at college ; 


government ; 


Au marche, 


at, to market ; 


Christianity ; 


Au lit, 


in hed ; 


episcopacy ; 


&c. 


&c. 


at church ; 







L'annee prochaine, next year ; L'automne dernier, 

L'annee derniere, last year ; La semaine derniere, 

Le printemps prochaiu, next spring ; &c. 



last fall ; 
last week ; 



412 SYNTAX OF THE AETICLE. — § YS. 

(8.) The names of several cities take the article. Those nouns 
hare generally a meaning, and indicate often natural objects : 

Le Havre, Havre ; La EocheUe, RocheUe ; 

La Haie, The Hague; Le Detroit, Detroit; 

(9.) In speaking of the parts of the body, or of the qualities of tho 
mind, the French use the article in cases where the English use a 
possessive adjective, or the indefinite article : 

Votre frere a les chevaux noirs. Your brother has black hair. 

H s'est blesse a la main. He has hurt his hand. 

Charles a la memoire excellente. Charles has an excellent memory. 

§ 78. — Use of the Aeticle before Wokds tae:en in a 
Partitive Sense. 

(1.) A word, when used to denote an entire object or class of ob- 
jects, is said to have a general sense ; when, however, it is employed 
to indicate a part of any thing or class of things, considered in refer- 
ence to the whole, it is said to have a partitive sense. Before a word 
taken partitively, the word some or any, is, or may, in English, often 
be employed. If, for example, I use the words courage and wood^ 
abstractedly, I take them in the general sense ; but if I say, give me 
wood ; your hrother has courage, I use them in the partitive sense, that 
is, I ask for a 'part of that substance called wood, and attribute to 
your brother something of that quahty called courage. 

(2.) The article accompanied by, or in combination with the prepo- 
sition de, called by some grammarians the partitive article [§ 13, (10.)] 
is used before nouns taken in a partitive sense 

Du pain et de I'eau lui suffisent. Bread and water are sufficient for 

him ; that is, some bread. 

Apportez-nous du sel et du vi- Bring us salt and vinegar; that 
naigre. is, some salt. 

Toujours la patrie a des charmes My native land has always (some) 
pour moL La Harpe. charms for me. 

(3.) The preposition de only, is used when the noun taken in a 
partitive sense, is preceded by an adjective : 

n possede de belles maisons. He possesses fine houses. 

Proposons-nous a nous-memes de Let v.s propose to ourselves rather to 

grands exemples a imiter, plutot imitate great examples, than to 

que de vains systemes a suivre. follow vain systems. 
J. J. EOUSSEAU. 

(14.) "When, however, the noun preceaed by the adjective, is con- 
nected with it, and the two form a compound noun, that noun takea 
the article according to rule (2.), as, 

Des jeunes gens ; des grands Young people ; great men (some^ 
hommes. 



SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. — § 79, 80. 413 

Eeureux, si de son temps, pour de Fortunate would it have teen, if, in 

bonnes raisons, his time, (Alexander'' s) Macedon had 

La Macedoine e\li eu des petites- had lunatic asylums. 
maisons ! Boileatj. 

(5.) The preposition alone is used before a noun, wben it is pre- 
ceded by a collective word or by an adverb of quantity : 

tJne multitude de peuples. A multitude of nations. 

Beaucoup de personnes. Many persons. 

A quol bon tant cZ'amis? Of lohat use are so many friendsf 

Un seul nous suffit s'il nous aime. A single one suffices if he loves us. 

Florian. 

(6.) The article, how^ever, is used, when the noun preceded by a 
collective word, is limited by what follows. The words, la plupart, 
the most; bien, many ; and infiniment, infinitely ^ form also excep- 
tions to the preceding rule : 

Tin grand nombre des personnes Many of the persons whom I have 

que j'ai vues. Noel. seen. 

II me reste peu, des livres qui I have few left, of the books which 

m'ont ete donnes. Noel. have been given me. 

Les mechants ont bien de la peine Tlie wicked have much trouble to 

a demeurer unis. Eenelon, remain united. 

(7.) The preposition is used alone before a noun placed after a 
verb conjugated negatively, but not interrogatively at the same 
time : 

Je ne vous feral pas de reproches. I shall cast upon you no reproaches. 

L'on ne dit jamais que I'on n'a We never say, that we have no wit. 
point d'esprit. Boursault. 

On ne fait jamais de bien a Dieu, We never can do good in respect to 
en faisant du mal aux horames. God, by doing evil to men. 

YOLTAiRE. 

(8.) The commencement of rule (6.) will also apply to tliis sen- 
tence : 

Ne donnez jamais des conseils Kever give advice which is danger- 
qu'il soit dangereux de suivre. ous to follow. 

GrlRAULT-DirV^IVIER. 

§ 19. — English Indefinite Article A or An. 

The French numeral adjective, un, masc. une, fern, answers to the 
English article a or an [§ 13, (4.) (11.)]. 

The restrictions to its use are snecified in the remarks on the 
article. 

§ 80. — Repetition of the Article. 

(1.) G-ENERAL EuLE. The article^ is repeated before every noun 
and every word used as a noun, having a separate meaning : 

1 This rule applies to the determinative adjectives, mon, ion, son, ce, 
cet, etc. 



414 SYNTAX or THE AETICLE. — § 81. 

Le coeur, Z'esprit, les moeurSj tout Tlie heart, the mind, the manners, 

gagne a la culture. ■ every thing improves ly cultivation. 

Le pere et la mere semblaient ex- The father and mother seemed to 

citer leur petite compagne a s'en excite their little companion to feed 

repaitre la premiere. JBtjffon. upon it first. 

(2.) The article will, therefore, be repeated, when one of two ad- 
jectives, united by the conjunction e^, qualifies a noun expressed, and 
the other a noun understood : 

i'histoire ancienne et la modeme. Ancient and modern history. 

that is, I'histoire ancienne et I'histoire moderne. 

Les philosophes anciens et les mo- Ancient and modern philosophers. 

dernes. 
Le premier et le second etages. The first and second stories. 

(3.) Should, however, the two adjectives quahfy the same ex- 
pressed word, the article must not be repeated. 

Le sage et pieus renelon a des The wise and pious Fenelon has well 

droits bien acquis a I'estime gene- established rights to general es- 

rale. GtIRAULT-Duviyier. teem. 

A ces mots il lui tend le doux et At these words he presents to him the 

tendre ouvrage. Boileau. sweet and tender look. 

(4.) "When two nouns are joined by the conjunction ow, and the 
second is merely a repetition or explanation of the first, the article 
should not be repeated. 

Les joues ou cotes de la tete du Tlie cheeks or sides of the head of the 

condor, sont couvertes d'un duvet condor, are covered with black down. 

noir. BuFFOX. 

On distinguait parmi les nobles les They distinguished among the nobles 

palatins ou gouvemeurs des pro- the palatines or governors of pro- 

vlnces. J. J. Rousseau. vinces. 

§ 81. — Miscellaneous Remarks on tpeUse of theAeticle. 

(1.) The article is not used before numbers placed after the names 
of sovereigns, to designate their order of succession [§ 26, (3.)]. 
Louis dix-huit, Charles dix. Louis the eighteenth, Charles the tenth. 

(2.) The French put no article before nouns placed in apposition 
with, or explanatory of, other preceding nouns : 

Louis treize, fJs de Henri quatre, fut Louis the thirteenth, the son of Henry 
bien dlfterent de son pere. the fourth, was very different from 

his foiher. 
Le Tartufe, comedie de Moliere. The Tariufe, a comedy of Moliere. 

Lamartine, celebre poete et prosa- Lamartine, a celebrated French poet 

teur francais. and prose ivriter. 

Je suis francais, vous etes americain. I am a Frenchman, you are an 

American. 

(3.) If the explanatory word be itself qualified or restricted by 
other words, the un is then placed before it : 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 81. 416 

Get homme est un Fran^ais, That man is a Frenchman, of an 

d'une famille illustre, mais malheu- illustrious, but unfortunate family. 
reuse. 

Ces messieurs sont des marchands Those gentlemen are merchants from 

de Ljon. Lyons. 

(4.) Under the second rule of this Section may also be placed the 
words mentioned in § 76, Kules (11.) (12.) (13.) and (14.) : 

une montre d'or, a gold watch ; 

un maitre de dessin, a drawing-master; 

un moulin a vapeur, a steam mill ; 

une chambre a coucher, a lid-room. 

(5.) Some exceptions to rule (2.) will be better explained by ex- 
amples than by precepts : 

un magasin d foin, a hay loft ; 

une bouteille d vin, a wine bottle. 

are a loft intended for hay^ a hotile intended for wine, but not actu- 
ally containing hay or wine. 

un magasin au foin, a hay-loft ; 

la bouteille au vin, the wine-bottle. 

That iSj the loft actually used for hay, the hottle now used for 

wine. 

un magasin de foin, a loft } f jj f S l^O'V / 

une bouteille de vin, a bottle [•' -^ | wine; 

(6.) Proper names of persons do not receive the article, unless it 

forms a part of the name ; as, Lehrun, Lamartine, La Harpe, La 

Fontaine ; as also in some gaUicised Italian names; as Le Tasse, 

Tasso, Le Dante, Dante, etc. An adjective, however, coming before 

proper names, is generally preceded by the article. 

Le bon et naif La Fontaine. TJie good and candid La Fontaine. 

Le pieux Fenelon. The pious Fenelon. 

(7.) It has been seen [§ 12, (1.) Examples] that the plural article 
is often placed in elevated style before the names of renowned indi- 
viduals : 

Nous avons vu a la fois, a la tete We have seen at once, at the head 

des escadrons imperiaux, les Murat, of the imperial squadrons, Murat, 

les Kellermann, les Lassalle, les Men- Kellerman, Lassalk, Montorun. 
torun. Le General Foy. 

(8.) Names of kingdoms and provinces, when preceded by the 
preposition en, take no article : 

En France, en Amerique. In France, in America. 

(9.) No article is placed after en preceding a noun used indeter- 
minately, or after the word ni standing before a noun, which is the 
direct regimen of a verb, preceding the negative : 



416 



SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE 



§ 82. 



Plus une action est utile, plus 
elle est louable. 



Nous irons en voiture. We shall go in a carriage. 

Vous etes en peine. You are in trouble. 

Nous n'avons ni or ni argent. We have neither gold nor silver, 
(10.) The article is omitted before plus and moins in comparative 
Bentences, where, in Enghsh, it would, in the corresponding place, be 
inserted : 

TJie more useful an action is, the 
more praiseworthy it is. 
(11.) The article precedes plus and mains to express comparison 
in the highest degree, and agrees in gender with the noun : 

Votre soeur ne pleurait pas, quoi- Your sister did not weep, although 
qu'elle fiit la plus affligee de toutes she was the most grieved of all ihoso 
ces dames. ladies. 

(12.) The article remains invariable when it stands before a super- 
lative, in which, however, no direct comparison is intended : 

Votre soeur ne pleure pas, lors Your sister does not iveep, even 
meme qu'eUe est le plus affligee. when she is most grieved. 

KOEL. 

(19.) To give more force to the diction, the article is often omitted 
in a rapid enumeration of individuals : 

Citoyens, etrangers, amis, enne- Citizens, strangers, friends, ene- 
mis, tons le reverent. mies, all reverence him. 

8 82. — Idioms in which the Article is omitted. 



Ajouter foi, 
Avoir besoin, 
Avoir chaud, 
Avoir coutume, 
Avoir dessein, 
Avoir dispute, 
Avoir envie, 
Avoir appetit. 
Avoir faim, 
Avoir froid, 
Avoir honte, 
Avoir mal, 
Avoir patience, 
Avoir peur, 
Avoir pitie, 
Avoir raison, 
Avoir sommeil, 
Avoir soL^ 
Avoir soin, 
Avoir sujet, 
Avoir tort, 
Chercher fortune, 

Courir risque, 
Demander justice, 



to give faith ; 
to have need; 
to be warm ; 
to be accustomed ; 
to intend ; 
to have difficulties; 
to wish, to desire; 
to have an appetite; 
to be hungry ; 
to be cold; 
to be ashamed; 
to have pain ; 
to have patience ; 
to be afraid; 
to take pity ; 
to be right ; 
to be sleepy; 
to be thirsty ; 
to take care ; 
to have reason; 
to be wrong ; 
to seek one^s for- 
tune ; 
to run the risk ; 
,to demand justice; 



Demander pardon, to beg pardon; 

Conner avis, ) j • ^ 

■p . , ' }• to inform ; 

Fau-e part, f •' ' 

Entendre raillerie,^ to bear 



Faire attention, to pay attention ; 
Faire bonne chere,to live well; 



Faire credit, 
Faire envie, 
Faire honneur, 
Faire horreur, 
Faire peur, 
Faire mention, 
Faire naufrage, 
Faire place, 
Faire plaisir, 
Faire present, 
Faire reflexion, 
Faire tort, 
Mettre fin, 
ilettre ordre, 
Perdre courage. 
Porter envie, 
Porter malheur, 

Prendre conge, 



to give credit ; 
to excite envy / 
to honor ; 
to inspirehorror ; 
to frighten ; 
to mention ; 
to suffer shipwreck; 
to make room ; 
to oblige ; 
to present ; 
to reflect; 
to injure; 
to put an end; 
to arrange; 
to lose courage ; 
to envy ; 

to cause misfor- 
tune ; 
to take leave ; 



Entendre la raillerie, is also said, but it means to understand joking. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — §83,84. 4l7 



Prendre feu, 
Prendre garde, 
Prendre haleine, 
Prendre medecine, 
Prendre racine, 
Rendre compte, 
Rendre justice, 
Eendre service, 
Rendre visite, 
Tenir compagnie, 



to catch Jire ; 

to take care ; 

to take breath; 

to take medicine , 

to take root ; 

to account; 

to render justice ; 

to oblige ; 

to visit; 

to accompany ; 



Tenir lieu, 
Tenir parole, 
Trouver moyen, 
Avec ardeur, etc., 
Par depit, etc., 
Pour recompense, 

etc., 
Sans peine, 
Sans souci, 



to take place ; 
to keep one^s word; 
to find means ; . 
with ardor ; 
through spite ; 
as a reward; 

without difficulty ; 
without sorrow, 
without care. 



§ 83. — The Adjective. 

(4.) We have seen [§ 18, Eule (3.)] that an adjective, relating to 
two substantives of the same gender, must agree with them in gen- 
der, and be put in the plural ; 

(2.) And Rule (4.) that an adjective, relating to two or more nouna 
of different genders, must be put in the masculine plural. 

(3.) When, however, nouns, united or not by the conjunction et, 
are somewhat synonymous; when the writer wishes actually to 
qualify only the last ; or when the mind, more particularly occupied 
with the last noun, seems to forget the others, the adjective will as- 
sume the gender and number of the last noun only. 

Toute sa vie n'a ete qu'un travail, 
qu'une occupation continuelle. 

Massillon. 



His whole life has been nothing but 
continual labor and occupation. 



Je ne connais point de roman, 
point de comedie espagnole^ sans 
combats. Florian. 

Le fer, le bandeau, la flamme est 
toute prete. Racine. 

(4.) Sometimes the adjective, preceded by two or more substan- 
tives joined by the conjunction et, qualifies the last only. It must 
then, of course, agree with that noun only. 



/ know no romance, no Spanish 
comedy, without combats. 

The sword, the band, the flame is 
all ready. 



Tlie good taste of the Egyptians 
made them like solidity and un- 
adorned regularity. 

TJie smile is a mark of good-will, 
of applause, and of inward satisfac- 
tion. 



Le bon govlt des figyptiens leur 
fit aimer la solidite et la regularite 
toute nue. Bossuet. 

Le sourire est une marque de 
bienveillance, d'applaudissement, et 
de satisfaction interieure. 

BUFFON. 

§ 84. — ^Remarks on the Peculiarities of several Ad- 
jectives. 
(1.) The adjective feu (Jate^ deceased), is invariable, when placed 
before the article or adjective determining a noun, but varies when 
placed after the determining word : 

J'ai oui dire a feu ma soeur, que I have heard my late sister say, 
ea fiUe et moi naquimes la meme that her daughter and I were lorn 
Montesquieu. tha sama year. 



415 



gTNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE. 



§ 84 



Le due de . . . doit a la bien veil- 
lance dont rhonorait la ftue reiae, 
les bonnes graces de Tempereur. 

De SALVAiS'DY. 



TTie duke of . . . owes to the good- 
will of the late queen towards Mm, 
the good graces of the em;peror. 



(2.) The adjectives nu, hare^ and demi, half^ are invariable when 
placed before the noun, and are connected with it by a hyphen : 



n etait wM-tete ; les pieds chausses 
de petites sandflies. Yoltaire. 

Une cZeme'-heure apres avoir quitte 
le vaisseau, je foulai le sol ameri- 
cain. Chateaubriand. 



He vjas bare-headed ; he wore on 
his feet small sandals. 

Half an hour after having left thA 
ship, I trod the Americcm soil. 



(3.) The adjectives nu and demi, when coming after the noun 
asree with it : 



Accoutumez vos enfants a demeu- 
rer ete et hiver, jour et nuit toujours 
tete nue. J. J. Rousseau. 

Opimius paya la tete de Caius 
Gracchus, dix-sept Hvres et demie 
d'or. Vertot. 



Accustom your children to remain 
summer and vnnter, day and night, 
always bare-headed. 

Opimius paid for the head of Caius 
Gracchus, seventeen pounds and a 
half of gold. 



(4.) The adjectives excepte, except; passe, past; y-compris, in/- 
eluding ; ci-joint, ci-inclus, annexed, inclosed ; franc de port, postage 
free ; come under the two last rules : 



Yous trouverez ci-joint la copie 
de la lettre que M. . . m'a ecrite. 
J. J. Rousseau. 

Le dessin de cet oiseau m'a ete 
envoye d'Angleterre, avec la de- 
scription ci-jointe. Buffon. 

Yous trouverez ci-inclus^ copie de 
ma lettre. Domergues. 

Je vous recommande les cinq 
lettres ci-incluses. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

J'ai recu, franc de port, une lettre 
anonyme. J, J. Rousseau. 

Le Contrat social est imprime, 
et vous en recevrez douze exem- 
plaires, francs de port. 

The Saiie. 

(5.) An adjective used adverbially, that is, modifying a verb, is of 
course invariable [§ 67, (3.)] : 



You will find annexed the copy of 
the letter which M. . . has written to 
me. 

The drawing of that bird came to 
me from England, with the descrip- 
tion here annexed. 

You will find inclosed a copy of 
my letter. 

I recommend to you the five letters 
inclosed. 

I received, postage free, an anony- 
mous letter. 

The Social Contract is printed, and 
you will receive twelve copies free of 
postage. 



En Laponie, une peau d'hermine 
coute quatre ou cinq sous; la 
chair de cet animal sent tres mavr 
vais. Reg-nard. 

De ma vie je n'ai entendu des voix 
de femme monter si haui. 

Jj£m6. DE SiViaNi. 



In Lapland the sMn of the ermine 
costs four or five sous ; the fiesh of 
this animal smells very bad. 



Never in my life have I 
women's voices sound so loud. 



heard 



syntax of the adjective. — § 85. 419 

§ 85. — Place op the Qualifying Adjective. 

(1.) No invariable rule can be given for the place of the adjective 
in French, although it follows the noun much more frequently than 
it precedes it. 

(2.) The adjectives which are generally placed after the noun are: 

1. All participles present and past, used adjectively : 

una personne reconnaissante, a grateful person ; 

una histoire amusanie, an amusing history ; 

un enfant cheri, a beloved child ; 

de la viande rotie, roast meat ; 

2. All adjectives expressing the form, the shape : 
una table ronde, a round table ; 
une cbambre carree, a square room; 

(3.) Adjectives explaining the matter of which an object 13 com- 
posed : 

acide sulfurique, sulphuric acid; 

corps ■aerien, aerial body ; 

(4.) Those expressing color, taste, or relating to hearing and 
touching: 

un habit noir, a black coat; 

du fruit amer, hitter fruit ; 

das sons harmonieux, harmonious sounds ; 

de la eira molle, soft wax ; 

(5.) Adjectives which may be used substantively: 

un homme riche, a rich man ; 

une femme aveugle, a blind woman ; 

(6.) Adjectives representing nation '} 

un grammaire fraugaise, a French grammar ; 

un dictionuaire allamand, a German dictionary; 

(7.) Adjectives expressing the defects of the body and mind: 

un homma boiteux, a lame man ; 

un esprit aliene, an unsound mind; 

(8.) Almost all adjectives ending in aZ, alle^ ihle, ique, and if, 

un homme liberal, a liberal man ; 

une nation paisible, a peaceful nation ; 

un esprit fanatique, a fanatical spirit; 

un soldat fugitif, a fugitive soldier. 

(9.) It must not be inferred from the rules above that the adjective 
always comes after the noun. The deviations are quite frequent ; 

J The French often use the name of the country instead of the adjective 
of nation ; particularly when speaking of the produce of the country : 
De la laine d'Espagne, Spanish wool. 

Du fromage d^Angleterre^ English cheese. 



420 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — §86. 



and often no other reason than taste can be assigned for them. We 
give a fevr examples, in which the same adjective is, by diflferent 
authors, placed before and after the noun : 



Before the Noun. 
Jamais nous ne goutons de par- 
faiie allegresse. CoRJfEiLLE. 

We never enjoy perfect {unalloyed) 
pleasure. 

n fallut reveiller d'un profond 
Bommeil cet autre Alexandre. 

BOSSUET. 

It was necessary to rouse from a 
profound sleep that second Alexan- 
der. 

Craignez, d'un vain plaisir les 
trompeuses amorces. Boileau. 

Fear the deceitful allurements of a 
vain pleasure. 



After the Xoun. 
Qu'a-t-il dit, qu'a-t-il fait? 
Qui ne promette a Rome un empe- 

reur parfait. E ACiifE. 

What has he said, what has he 
done which dots not promise to Bom& 
a perfect emperor f 

Dans un sommeil profond ils ont 
passe lour vie. Boileau. 

Tliey spent their life in a profound 
sleep. 

Le monde est une figure trompevse 
qui passe, Buffon. 

The world is a deceitful picture^ 
which passes before us. 



(10.) We find, however, in our best writers, few examples of a 
long adjective placed before a short noun, although they often place 
the adjective before the noun to give variety or force to the diction ; 
they never, for instance, would say (in prose) d'imaginaires lois, for 
des lois imaginaires, imaginary laws. 

(11.) The following adjectives when used in a hteral sense, gene- 
rally precede the noun. See § 144, ISTote : 



Beau, 


fine, handsome; 


*Mauvais, 


had; 


*Bon, 


good; 




*Mechant, 


wicked; 


*Brave, 


irave ; 




Meilleur, 


better; 


*Cher, 


dear (loved); 


Moindre, 


less ; 


Cheti^ 


mean ; 




*Petit, 


small; 


*Grand, 


tall; 




Saint, 


holy; 


Gros, 


large; 




Yieux, 


old; 


$Jeune, 


young ; 




*Yrai, 


true, real. 


Joli, 


pretty ; 









Those marked with an asterisk are included in the following table. 

86. — List of Adjectives having a Different Meaning, 
according as they precede or follow the isfoun. 



Un bon homme, a simple, artless 

man ; 
Un brave homme, a worthy man ; 
Une certaine histoire, a certain 

story ; 
Un cher enfant, a dear child ; 
Une commune voix, a unammcms 

voice; 



Un homme bon, a good, benevolent 
man (un homme de bien) ; 

Un homme brave, a brave man ; 

Une histoire certaine, a reliable 
story ; 

Une robe chere, an expensive dress ; 

Une voix commune, an ordinary 
voice: 



SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE. — § 87. 421 



Un cruel homme, a tiresome man ; 

La derniere annee, the last year {of 
a series) ; 

Une fausse clef, a false key; an imi- 
tation key ; 

Un furieus menteur, an excessive 
liar ; 

Un galant homme, a gentleman ; 

Un grand homme, a great man ; 

Le grand air, the air of good society ; 

Le haut ton, a haughty tone; 

Un honnete homme, an honest man; 

Le jeune Phne, young Pliny ; 

Un malhonnete homme, a dishonest 

man; 
Mauvais air, awkward appearance ; 

Un mechant Hvre, a poor hook; 

Morte eau, lowest tides ; 

Un nouveau hvre, a new hook (ano- 
ther book) ; 

Un pauvre historien, a wretched his- 
torian ; 

Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous 
man ; 

Un petit homme, a man of smallsize; 

Mes propres mains, my own hands; 

Un seul enfant, a single child; 

Un simple soldat, a private soldier ; 

Un triste homme, a pitiful man ; 

Un unique tableau, a single pic- 
ture ; 

Un vilain homme, an ugly, unpleas- 
ant man; 

Une vraie histoire, a mere story ; 



Un homme cruel, a cruel man ; 
L'annee derniere, last year ; 

Une clef fausse, a key belonging to 

another lock, (the wrong key) ; 
Un lion furieux, a furious lion ; 

Un homme galant, a man attentive 
to the ladies; 

Un homme grand, a tall man ; 

L'air grand, a nolle appearance ; 

Le ton haut, a loud tone ; 

Un homme honnete, a polite man ; 

Pline le jeune, Pliny the younger ; 

Un homme malhonnete, an unpolits 
man; 

L'air mauvais, malicious appear- 
ance ; 

Un livre mechant, a biting, caustio 
hook; 

Eau morte, stagnant water ; 

Un livre nouveau, a hook recently 
published; 

Un historien pauvre, a historian 
without pecuniary means ; 

Un homme plaisant, an agreeable 
man; 

Un homme petit, a mean man ; 

Mes mains propres, my clean hands; 

Un enfant seul, a child alone ; 

Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier ; 

Un homme triste, a sorrowful man ; 

Un tableau unique, a matchless pic- 
ture ; 

Un homme vilain, a sordid, miserly 
man: 



Une histoire vraie, a true history. 
§ 87. — Regimen of Adjectives. 
(1.) The regimen or complement of adjectives is a noun or a verb 
completing or defining their sense. Betvsreen the noun and the ad- 
jective comes one of the prepositions, a, de, dans, en, sur, etc: 

Get homme est digne de louange. TJiis man is worthy of praise. 

Ce general est digne de commander. TJiat general is worthy to command. 

In 'the first phrase, louange ; in the second, commander^ is the regi-» 
men of the adjective digne. 

(2.) The regimen is not always necessary to the adjective. It is 
added to it only to give it a particular hmitation : 

Without a regimen. With a regimen. 

Get homme n'est pas content. Get homme n'est pas content da 

son fils. 
That man is not pleased. That man is not pleased with his son. 



422 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — § 88. 



(3.) As may be seen in the last sentence, an adjective is not al- 
ways, in French, followed by the same preposition as the correspond- 
ing adjective in English. Thus, after the adjective content^ the 
French use the preposition de (of), while after its English represen- 
tative (pleased), the preposition with must be employed, M. Bes- 
cherelle and several other French grammarians, while acknowledging 
the difficulty, give us the consohng assurance, that " L'usage et les 
dictionnaires les feront connaitre" (use and dictionaries will make us 
acquainted with them) ; that is, with the prepositions required after 
the adjectives. As the student will scarcely be satisfait de cela, we 
give a rule or two on this difficult subject, and add hsts of adjectives 
with their proper accompanying prepositions. 

(4.) When an adjective follows the verb etre, used unipersonally, 
the preposition de is placed after that adjective, and before the verb 
following : 

II est doux de mourir pour son pays. 

II est plus aise d'etre sage pour les 
autres que pour soi-meme. 

La Rochefoucauld. 

II est plus glorieux de se vaincre 
soi-menie, que de vaincre les autres. 

SCUDERY. 

(5.) It should be recollected, that it is only when the verb etre is 
unipersonal, that it thus seems to influence the choice of the prepo^- 
sition. In other cases, the adjective must be followed by the prepo- 
sition proper to it. See § 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, below. 

Cela est doux au toucher. Thai is soft to the touch. 

Cela n'est pas aise a faire. That is not easy to be done (easily 

done.) 

§ 88. — List OF Adjectives requiring the Preposition DE. 



It is sweet to die for one's country. 
It is easier to he wise for another 
than for one''s self. 

It is more glorious to conquer one's 
self than to conquer others. 



Absent de, 
Ambitieux de, 
Amoureux de, 
Avide de, 
Approchaut de, 
Capable de, 
Cheri de, 
Complice de, 
Content de, 
Curieux de, 
Desireux de, 
Dedaigneux de, 
Desole de, 
Different de, 
Digne de, 
Envieux de, 
l^loigne de, 
Eaclave de, 



absent (from) 
ambitious of 
in love with 
eager for 

approaching, near 
capable of 
beloved by 
accomplice in 
pleased with 
curious to 
desirous to, of 
disdaining to 
grieved with 
different from 
worthy of, to 
envious of 
remote, far from 
a slave to 



Exempt de, 
Facile de, 
Fatigue de, 
Fier de, 
Fort de, 
Fou de, 
Glorieux de, 
Honteux de, 
Impatient de, 
Incapable de, 
Inconsolable de, 
Indigne de, 
Indigne de, 
Inquiet de, 
Ivre de, 
Las de, 
Mecontent de, 
Parent de, 



exemptfrom 
sorry for 
tired with, of 
proud of 
confident in 
excessively fond of 
proud of 
ashamed of 
impatient of 
incapable of 
inconsolable for 
unworthy of 
indignant with 
uneasy about 
intoxicated with 
weary of 
displeased with 
related to 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — §89,90. 423 



Plein de, full of 

Eavi de, glad to, of 

Rassasie de, satiated with 

Recoanaissant de, grateful for 
Reinpli de, filled with 

Eedevable de, indebted for 

Qui vit content de rien, 
toute chose. Boileau. 

II n'est pas de Romain, 
Qui ne soit desireux de vous donner 

la main. Corneille. 



Soigneux de, 
Sur de, 
Surpris de, 
Tributalre de, 
Victim e de. 
Vide de. 



careful of to 
sure of 
surprised of 
tributary to 
victim to, of 
void of 



He who lives content with a littUt 
^possesses all. 

There is no Roman that is not de- 
sirous to reach you his hand. 



§ 89. — List op Adjectives Requieing the Peeposition A. 

Accessible a, accessible to Formidable a, formidable to 

Accoutume ^, accustomed to Fatal a, fatal to 

Adhereut a, adhering to Importun £i, importunate to 

Agreable a, agreeable to Impenetrable a, impenetrable to 

Ajuste a, fitted to Indispensable a, indispensable to 

Anterieur d, prior to Interesse a, interested in 

Aise a, easy to Invisible a, invisible to 

Ardent a, - zealous for Insensible a, insensible to 

Assidu a, assiduous to Naturel a, natural to 

Attentif a, attentive to Necessaire a, necessary to 

Bon a, good for, fit for Nuisible a, hurtful to 

Cher a, dear to Odieux a, odious to 

Conforme d, similar to Posterieur a, posterior to 

Contraire a, contrary to Preferable a, preferable to 

Cruel a, cruel towards Propice a, propitious to 

Difficile a, difficult to Propre a, fit for 

Enclin a, prone to Rebelle a, rebellious towards 

Etranger a, a stranger to Redoutable ^, formidable to 

Exact a, exact in Semblable a, similar to 

Facile a, easy to Sujet a, subject to 
Favorable d, favorable to 

L'ignorance toujours est prete d 
s'admirer. Boileau. 

Insensible d la vie, insensible a la 

mort, 
II ne sait quand 11 veille, il ne salt 

quand il dort. Racine. 

§ 90. — Adjectives eequieing a Diffeeent Preposition 

IN Feench and in English, not included in the above 

List, with the following Signification. 

Bon pour, kind towards^ de- Ignorant en, not versed in 

voted to Indulgent pour, indulgent towards 



Ignorance is always ready to ad* 
mire itself 

Insensible to life, insensible to death, 
he does not know when he is awake, 
or when he sleeps. 



Celebre pour, par. 
Civil envers. 



celebrated for 
polite to 

Quand on est bon pour tout lo 
monde, on ne I'est pour personne. 
C. Delavigne. 
II fut celebre par sa doctrine, au- 
tant que jjar sa naissauce. 

BOSSUET. 



Insolent avec, 
Poll envers. 



insolent to 
polite to 

When one is devoted to every body 
one is so towards nobody. 



He was celebrated for his doctrinSf 
as well as for his birth. 



424 SYNl-AX OP THE ADJECTIVE. — §91,92,93, 



§ 91 i — Remark. 

It must not be forgotten, that when the verb tire is used uniper- 
Bonally before the adjectives contained in the two preceding sections, 
these adjectives become subject to rule (4.) § 87. 

II est indispensable c^'etudier It is indispensable to study much, 
beaucoup, pour devenir savant. to become learned. 

§ 92. — Important Rules. 

(1.) A noun may be followed by two or more adjectives, having 
one and the same regimen, provided these adjectives require the 
same prepositions after them ; thus we may say : 

Ce pere est utile et cher d sa fa- Tliat father is useful and dear to 

mille, GiRAULT-DuviviER. his family. 

La religion est necessaire et na- Religion is necessary and natural 

turelle a rhomme. Anonymous. to man. 

These two sentences are correct, because the adjectives, utUe, and 
cher^ in the first, and necessaire and naturel, in the second, require 
the same preposition, a. 

(2.) We could not in the first of these two sentences, substitute 
the adjective cheri (beloved) for the word cher, and say as in English, 
That father is useful to, and beloved by his family. Such a construc- 
tion in French, is never admissible. We must say, Tliat father is use- 
ful to his family, and is beloved hy them; because the adjective cheri, 
requires the preposition de, or its substitute, the relative pronoun en 
[§ 39, (17.)].^ Ce pere est utile a sa famille et en est cheri, i. e., est 
cheri d'elle. 

§ 93. — ^Determining Adjectives. — Demonstrative Ad- 
jectives. 
The demonstrative adjective, which must not be confounded with 
the demonstrative pronoun [§ 36.], always precedes the noun, and 
must be repeated before every substantive. It assumes the gender 
and number of the word which it determines [§ 20, (1.)] : 



Cet air pur, ces gazons, cette voiite Tliatpure air, that turf that ci 

mobile ; • ing arch ; here every thing pleases 

Ici tout plait au ccEur,tout enchante the heart, and charms the eyes. 
les yeux. Castel. 

^ The rule, with regard to the regimen of verbs is equally imperative. 
"We could not say in French, as in English, Every week I write letters to, 
and receive letters from my brother. "We must say, Every week, I write^ let- 
ters to my brother, and receive some from him. Toutea les semaines, j'ecria 
des lettres a mon fr^re, et j'en re9ois de lui. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — 8 94,95. 425 



§ 94. — Agreement, Repetition, and Place of the Pos- 
sessive Adjective. 
We have said [§ 21, (2.)] that the possessive adjective assumes the 
gender and number of the object possessed, and (4.) that it must be 
repeated before every noun. The place of the possessive adjective 
is the same in French, as in English, that is, before the noun. These 
adjectives must not be confounded with the possessive pronouns 
[§34,(2.)]: 

Mon pere, ma mere, et mes soeurs My father, mother, and sisters have 
sont arrives. arrived. 

§ 95. — Remaeks. ■ 
(1.) It has been said [§ 77, (9.)] that the French use the article in- 
stead of the possessive adjective, when alluding to the parts of the 
body. This, however, must only take place where the possession is 
otherwise sufficiently explained. We must say, for instance : 

J'ai mal a la tete. My head aches {I have a pain in 

the head). 
Charles s'est casse le bras. Charles has broken his arm. 

because the possession is sufficiently explained by the pronouns jCf 
in the first sentence, and se in the second. But, we must say, , 

Je vols que mon bras s'enfie, J see that my arm swells. 

because without the mon, the possession of the arm would not be 
indicated. 

(2.) The English expressions, a hooh of mine, a cousin of his, can- 
not be translated literally into French. We must say, un de mes 
amis, one of my friends ; un de ses cousins, one of his cousins. 

Cinna et Carbon, un de ses lieute- Cinna and Carbo, a lieutenant of ' 
nants, se camperent sur les bords du his, encamped on the banks of ths 
Tibre. Vertot. Tiber. 

(3.) In familiar or jocose style, we sometimes use the possessive 
pronoun, mien, tien, sien, without the article, to express the same 
relation : 

A travers d'un mien pre, certain Tlirough a meadow of mine, a 

passa. Racine. young ass passed. 

Un mien cousin est juge-maire. A cousin of mine is judge and 

La Fontaine. mayor. 

(4.) When the possessor is an inanimate object, the adjectives son, 
sa, ses, leur^should be placed before the object possessed only when 
the possessor is the subject of the same proposition : 

La carapagne a 565 agrements. The country has its pleasures. 

Ces langaea ont leurs beautes. Those languages have their beauties. 



426 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE.— §96, 9T. 

(5.) Wlien the (inanimate) possessor is not the subject of the 
proposition, in which the possession is expressed, but of a preceding 
one, the article and the relative pronoun en are used [§ 39, (IT.) 
§110.]: 

Ce livre est bien imprime, le pa- Thai look is well-printed^ its paper 
pier en est excellent, {the paper of it) is excellent. 

J'habite la campagne, les agre- / inhabit the country, its pleasures 
ments en sont sans nombre. {the pleasures of it) are without num- 

ber. 

Ces langues sont riches, j'en ad- Tliose languages are rich ; I admire 
mire les beautes. ISToel. their beauties {the beauties of them). 

(6.) Exception. The possession may be expressed by son, sa, ses, 
leurs, although the possessor be not the nominative of the same 
proposition, when the object possessed is the regimen of a prepo- 
sition : 

Paris est une ville remarquable ; Paris is a remarkable city ; for- 
les etrangers admirent la beaute de eigners admire the beauty of its edi' 
ees edifices. Xoel. fices. 

§ 96. NUMEEAL AdJECTITES. 

(1.) The cardinal number used simply to indicate number, not 
order, precedes the noun. 

(2.) When used to 'indicate order [§ 26, (3.)], the cardinal number 
generally follows the noun (except when indicating the day of the 
month) [§26, (1.)]: 

Leon dix. Chapitre dix. Leo the tenth. Chapter ten. 

(3.) The ordinal number is placed before the noun: 

La dixieme annee. Tlie tenth year. 

(4.) It foUows the words chapitre, livre, article, page, etc., in the 
division of a book. 

Livre sixieme, chapitre dixieme. Sixth book, tenth chapter. 

§ 97. — Indefinite Adjectives. 

(1.) Quelque is written in three ways : 

1. Followed by a verb, it is written in two words, quel que ; the 
first, quel, which is an adjective, agrees in gender and number with 
the subject of the verb, and the second, que, which is a conjunction, 
is invariable. 

Mais quels que soient ton culte et ta Bui, whatever may be thy religion 

patrie, or thy country, sleep in security under 

Dors sous ma tente avec securite. my tent. 
Campexon. 
Get homme, quelle que fut sa for- Thai man, ivhatever his fortune or 

tune ou son merite, ne put renssir his merits might be, could not succeed 

dans ses entreprisea. Boniface. in his undertakings. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — § 97. 427 

2. Followed by a noun, it is then an adjective [§ 30, (12. ;j, and 

agrees in number with that noun : 

Princes, quelques raisons que youa Princes, luhatever reasons you may 
puissiez me dire. Racine. give me. 

3. Quelque followed bj an adjective, or an adverb, is invariable. 
Les jeux de hasard, quelque me- Games of chance, however trifling 

diocres qu'Qs paraisseut, sent tou- they may seem, are always expensive 
jours chers et dangereux, and dangerous, 

Mme. de Genlis. 

(2.) Mtme is an adjective or an adverb : 

It is an adjective [§ 30, (5.)] : 

1. When it precedes the noun, and means same : 

Yous retombez toujours dans les You always fall into iJie same ap- 
mimes alarmes. Racin'e. prehensions. 

2. When it follows a noun or pronoun, and has the sense of him- 
self, herself, themselves, even, very, and cannot be turned into de la 
meme maniere, in the same manner : 

Les dieux eux.-memes devinrent The gods themselves became jealous 

jaloux des bergers. Feist^lon. of the shepherds. 

Ces murs memes, seigneur, peu- These very walls, my lord, may 

vent avoir des yeux. RACrN'E. have eyes. 

(3.) It is an adverb and is invariable, when it modifies a verb, an ad- 
jective, or a participle. It has then the sense of aussi, also ; quoique, 
although, or, de la meme maniere, in the same manner : 

Frappez, Tyriens et meme Israel- Strike Tyrians and Israelites also. 
ites. Eacixe. 

Leurs vertus et meme leurs noms Their virtues, as well as their 
dtaient ignores. names, were unknown. 

Berxaedin DE St. Pierre. 

Exempts de maux reels, les bom- When exempt from real misfor- 
mes s'en ferment ineme de chimeri- tunes, men create to themselves imagi- 
ques. nary ones. 

(4.) We have seen that tout, when an adjective, that is, when sig- 
nifying every, all, is variable [§ 30, (15,) (16)]. 

(5.) Tout, when it means entirely, quite, nothing hut, is an adverb, 
and, as such, invariable : 

Le lion est tout nerfs et muscles. TJie lion is nothing but nerves qnd 

BuFFOX, muscles. 

n montra, pour rimer, des cbemins He showed v^, in poetry, paths en- 
tout nouveaux. Boileau. tirely neiv. 

Le cbien est tout zele, tout ardeur, Tfie dog is nothing but zeal, ardor 
tout obeissance. Buffon". and obedience. 

(6.) But, here, is the same invariable word, variable by euphony 
before a feminine word, commencing with a consonant or an h as- 
pirate : 

Les plaisanteries ne sont bonnes Jokes are only good when they are 
que quand elles sont servies toutes served up quite warm. 
chaudes. Voltaire. 



428 SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUN. — §98, 

The following extract (for the historical accuracy of which we do 
not vouch), offers an example on the last rule, and on the excep- 
tion: 

La vanite est sortie touie paree de Vanity issued quite adorned from 

la tet3 des femmes, comme Minerva woman^s head, as Minerva issued 

est sortie tout armee de la tete de quite armed from the head of Ju- 

Jupiter. Saint -Lambert. j^iter. 

% 98. — The Peonotxn^. — Place of the Personal Pro- 
noun, USED AS Subject of the Yeeb. 
(1.) Personal pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, are in French 
as well as in English, placed before them, in affirmative and negative 
sentences : 

J'inventai des couleurs, j'armai la I invented colors, I armed calumny, 

calomnie, I touched his glory ; he trembled for 

J'interessai sa gloire ; il trembla pour his life. 
sa vie. Racine. 

(2.) In affirmative or negative sentences commencing with au 
moins, a peine, encore, peut-etre, en vain, du mains, comhien, etc., the 
pronoun may elegantly be placed after the verb, although this con- 
struction is not imperative : 

Peut-etre sivez-vous raison. Noel. Perhaps you are right. 

Peut-etre vous entretiendrai-^e Perhaps I loill converse with you 

aussi de rastronomie. on astronomy. 
Aime-Martin. 

Combien (I'homme) perd-i7 de Hoio many wishes he loses, how 

voeus, combien fait-'i7 de pas 1 many steps he takes ! 
La Fontaine. 

(3.) In exclamations, the nominative pronoun is often placed after 

the verb in French, as well as in English 

Puisse-je de mes yeux y voir torn- May I with my own eyes see the 
berlafoudrel Corneille. thunder crush it! 

(4.) In interrogative sentences, the nominative pronoun is placed 
immediately after the verb, in the simple tenses, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle, in the compound : 

Oi^ suis-ye f qu'ai-^e fait ? que dois- Where am I? what have I done f 
je faire encore? what have J yet to do ? 

(5.) In interrogative sentences with verbs having only one^ sylla- 
ble, in the first person singular of the indicative present, and with 
some verbs having more than one syllable, but in which that person 
ends with an s preceded by a consonant, and in a number of other 

* We may say, however, suis-je? am I? ai-je? have I? que fais-je? 
what am I doing? dois-je? should If ought I? vois-je? do I see f vais-je? 
do I got entends-je? do I hear? puis-je? can J? may If 



SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN. — §99. 429 

verbs, the pronoun je is not placed after the verb. In such case 
another construction must be given to the sentence : 

Esirce que je cours ? Do 1 run ? literally, Is it that I 

run ? 
Esf-ce que je dors ? Do I sleep f 

Est-ce queje comprends? Do I understand? 

(6.) The same construction is admissible, in conversation, with all 
the persons and tenses v^hich may be used interrogatively. 

§ 99. — Repetition and Omission of the Nominative 
Peonoun. 

(1.) It is proper to repeat the personal pronouns /e, tu, il, nous, vous, 
tZs, before every verb : 

Je lis, y'ecris, je me promene. I read, write, and walk. 

(2.) The omission of the pronouns je, tu, il, nous, vous, ils, before 
the second or third verb of a sentence, is a matter of choice and sub- 
ject, to the following restrictions : 

Those pronouns must be repeated : 

1. When the verbs are not in the same tense : 

Je pretends et je pretendrai tou- I maintain and will always main- 
jours. tain. 

2. When the first verb is in the negative, and the second in the 
affirmative : 

Je ne plie pas, et je romps. J do not lend, and I break. 

3. When the propositions are connected by conjunctions other 
than et, and; ou, or; ni, nor; mais, but: 

Nous detestons les mechants, par- We detest the wicked because we 
ce que nov^ les craignons. fear them. 

(3.) Although we would advise the student to follow the 1st rule 
of this §, particularly with regard to the pronouns je, tu, nou^, vous, 
and thereby avoid all uncertainty, we give a few examples, where 
the pronouns after the first are 

Repeated. Omitted. 

Je veux qu'on dise un jour aux II s'arrache les cheveux, se roule 

peuples effrayes, sur le sable, reproche aux Dieux 

H fut des Juifs, il fut ubb insolente leur rigueur, appelle en vain a son 

race. Racine. secours la cruelle mort. 

1 wish that they may one day say Fj^nelon. 

to the frightened nations, there were He (Telemachus) tears his hair, 

Jews, there was an insolent race. rolls on the sand, reproaches the Gods 

with their rigor, and calls in vain 
cruel Death to his aid. 



430 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. — §100, 



II s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, 
il s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. 

He listens to himself, he pleases 
himself, he adorns himself he loves 
himself 

Noxis avons dit, et noris aUons 
prouver, qu'il n'y a pas de bonheur 
sans vertu. Beauzee. 

We have said, and we are going to 
'prove, that there is no 
without virtue. 



L']&temel est son nom, le monde est 

son ouvrage, 
D enteud les soupirs de I'humble 

qu'on outrage, 
Juge tous les mortels avec d'egales 

lois, 



Et du haut de son trone interroge 
les rois. Racine, 

The Eternal is his name, the world 
is his work ; he listens to the sighs 
of the humble oppressed, judges all 
mankind with equal laws, and iU' 
terrogates the mighty from his lofty 
throne. 

§ 100. — Place of Peesonal Peonouns used as Regi- 
mens OF Yeebs. 
(1.) The personal pronoun used as regime direct, (direct object or 
accusative) [§ 42, (4.)], and the pronoun used as regime indirect^ (in- 
direct object) with the preposition to, expressed or understood, ia 
English, (dative of the Latin), [§ 42, (3.)] are in French placed .toe- 
fore the verb : 



Direct Regimen. 
Je vous vols, I see you; 
Vous les voyez, you see them. 

Madame, enfin le del pres de 
vous me rappelle. Ragine. 

Jfadam, at last heaven recalls me 
near you. 

Pauvre science humaine ! 
Un fil f arrete helas ! comme le 

moucheron 
Du bon Jean La Fontaine, 

AlME I^rARTTN-, 

Alas ! poor human science ! a web 
stops thee, like the gnat of the good 
Jean La Fontaine. 

(2.) 1st Exception : When the verb is in the second person singu- 
lar, or in the first or second person plural of the imperative, used af- 
firmatively, these pronouns must be placed after it : 

Yoyez-Zes, see them. Parlez-Zewr, speak to them. 

Rends-moz chretienne et libre, a Make me a Christian and free, 
tout je me soumets. Voltaire. submit to every thing. 



Indirect Regimen. 
Je vous parle, / speak to you ; 
Yous lew parlez, you speak to them. 

A ce prix je leur pennets de 
vivre, Racine. 

On that condition I allow them to 
live. 

II faut compter sur I'ingratitude 
des hommes, et ne laisser pas de 
leur faire du bien, Fenelon. 

We should expect ingratitude from 
men, but not cease, on that account, to 
do them good. 



Let us divest ourselves also from a 
vain pride. 

Go, conduct her into the next room. 



Depouillons-noMS aussi d'une vaine 
fierte. Boileau, 

Allez, conduisez-Za dans la cham- 
bre prochaine. Racine, 

(3.) Remark: But if the verb, in those persons of the imperative, 

be used negatively, the pronouns will be placed according to 

Rule(l.): 

Ne les voyez pas, do not sse ihun, ^e leitr parlez ^^as,donoispeaJc to them, 



SfNTAX OP THE PRONOUN". — § 100. 



431 



Si Ton vous propose de faire une If they propose to you to commit a 

mauvaise action, ne la faites pas. had action, do it not. 

Dissipe tes douleurs, Dissipate thy grief, and trouble me 

Et ne me trouble pas par ces in- not by these unworthy tears. 

dignes pleurs. "Boileau. 

(4.) 2d Exception : With reflective verbs, when the regime indi- 
rect* is a person, the pronoun representing it must follow the verb. 
This must also be the case with the following verbs : 



to run to, towards 



Aller ^, to go to, towards. 
Accourir a, ) 
Courir a, ) ' 

Je m'adresse a lui, a eux. 
Je vais a vous ou a eux. 
Vous courez a lui ou a elle. 
Elle vient a moi ou a vous. 
Vous pensez a nous ou a lui. 
lis songent a tux et a vous. 



Venir a, to come to. 
Boire a, to drink to. 
Penser a, songer a, to think of. 

I apply to him, to them. 
I go to you or to them. 
You run to him or to her. 
She comes to me or to you. 
You think of us or of him. 
TJiey think of them and of you. 



(5.) The pronoun, used as the indirect regimen of the French, 
which answers to the indirect object of the Enghsh, preceded by a 
preposition other than to, and to the genitive and ablative cases of 
the Latin, is always, in French, placed after the verb, and preceded 
by one of the prepositions, de, of; pour, for ; avec, with, etc. 



Je parle de lui et de vous. 

J'ecris pour lui et pour elle. 
Qui rit d'autrui, 
Doit craindre qu'en revanche on rie 

aussi de lui. Moliere. 



J speak of him and of you. 
1 write for him and for her. 

He who laughs at others must fear 
that in their turn, they may also laugh 
at him. 



(6.) When two imperatives, used affirmatively, are joined together 
by the conjunction et, the pronoun regimen of the second may be 
placed before it, or after it, as in English : 

After the Verb. 

Sortez et laissez-moi dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Marche, et suis-nous, du moins, oh 
I'honneur nous appelle, Boileau. 

March and follow us, at least, where 
honor calls us. 

Cessez, vous dis-je et laissez-moi, 
Madame, executer les volontes du 

roi. Racine. 

Cease, I tell you, and suffer me. 
Madam, to extcute the commands of 
the king. 



Before the Vert. 

Sortez et me laissez dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

lisdssez-moi cette chaine, ou w'ar- 
rachez le jour. La Harpe. 

Leave me this chain, or deprive me 
of life. 
Vous attendez le roi ; parlez et lui 

montrez, 
Centre le fils d'Hector tons les Grecs 

conjures. Racine. 

You expect the king ; speak and de- 
pict to him all the Greeks conspiring 
against the son of Hector. 



* Object of the verb preceded in English by to, expressed or under- 
ftood, dative of the Latin. 



432 stktax op the pronoun. — § 101. 

§ 101. — Respective Place of the Pronouns, when two 
OCCUR with one Yerb. 
(1.) "When two pronouns occur, one regime direct (accusative) and 
the other regime indirect (dative), the pronoun regime indirect^ if not 
in the third person singular or plural, must precede the pronoun re- 
gime direct : 

II me le donnera. He will give it to me. 

II te le pretera. He will lend it to thee. 

lis nous les montreront. They will show them to us. 

Yous noTMs le direz. You will say it to us. 

Quand je puis obliger, ma joie est When I can oblige, my joy is great 

assez grande, enough, without my wishing to wait 

Pour n'attendre jamais que I'on until they command me (i. e., they 

me le commande. Boursault. command it to me). 

Je vous le dis encore, vous n'aurez / repeat it to you : you can obtain 

I'estime des hommes que par una the esteem of men only by real virtue. 
solide vertu. Mme. De Maintenon. 

(2.) "When the pronoun regime indirect is in the third person singu- 
lar or plural, it must then be placed after the regime direct : 

On le lui donnera. They will give it to him. 

Vous le lui preterez. You will lend it to him. 

Nous ne le leur preterons pas. We loill not lend it to them. 

Vous le leur ecrirez. You will write it to them. 

Le plus zxix appui do I'homme est The surest support of man is God, 

Dieu, et vous voulez le lui ravir. and you wish to deprive him of iU 

BOISTE. 

(3.) Remarlt: The reflective pronoun se, used as an indirect regi- 
men, makes an exception to the above rule, as it takes precedence of 
the direct regimen : 

Si les hommes pensent mal les If men think ill of each other, ai 
uns des autres, du moins ils ne se le least they do not say it to each other. 
disent pas. Anonymous. 

(4.) The Eules (1.) and (2.), also the Exception (3,), apply to the 
imperative used negatively ; but Rule (1.) cannot apply to the im- 
perative used affirmatively. 

Examples of the Imperative used Negatively. 

Ne nous le donnez pas [Rule (1.)]. Do not give it to us. 

Ne le leur pretez pas [Rule (2.)]. Do not lend it to them. 

Qu'ils ne.se le disent pas [Remark Let them not say it to themselves. 
(3.)]. 

Du sang de tant de rois c'est I'u- Of the blood of so many kings, it is 

uique heritage ; my only inheritance ; do not envy it 

Ne me I'enviez pas, laissez-moi mon {to me), leave me my portion. 

partage. Voltaire. 

(5.) When the imperative used aflOrmatively has two regimens, 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. — § 102, 103. 433 

the pronoun regime direct precedes the regime indirect in all the 
persons : 

Envoyez-?e-'mot. Send it to me. 

Donnez-fe-noz^. Give it to tne. 

Qu'ils le lui donnent. Let them give it to Mm. 

Montrez-Ze-moi, ce mortel privi- Show him to me, that privileged 

legie. Ballanche. mortal. 

Mets-Ze-toi dans I'esprit : qui fait Put this into thy mind : h& who 

mal, trouve mal. Anonymous. does evil, finds evil. 

§ 102.— Rule. 
When two pronouns in different cases, representing rational be- 
ings, occur, and the pronoun in the regime direct is in the first, or in 
the second person, this pronoun must be placed according to the 
general rules ; and the pronoun in the regime indirect must follow 
the verb, and be preceded by the proper preposition : 

II nous a recommandes a eux. He has recommended us to them, 

II vous a presente d elle. He has presented you to her. 

Nul ne peut se comparer a lui, pour No one can compare himself to him, 

faire en peu de temps, un travail for doing in a short time, a very 

fort inutile. La Bruyere. useless piece of work. 

*" § 103.— Rule. 

(1.) Thei personal pronouns lui, elle, eux, elles, used as indirect re- 
gimens of verbs and preceded by a preposition, can only relate 
to persons, and not to things. The expressions of or from it ; of or 
from them, when relating to things, should be rendered by en [§ 89, 
(17.)]: 

J'en parle ; j'ew donne. I speak of it, of them; I give of it 

{some). 
J'aime trop la valeur, pour en etre I prize valor too highly to le jealous 

jaloux. La Harpe. of it. 

Celui qui est dans la prosperite He who is in prosperity should fear 

doit craindre d^en abuser. to abuse it. 
Fenelon. 

(2.) The relative pronoun y [§ 39, (18.) § 111], is used in French 
in relation to things, for the indirect regimen, expressed in English 
by at or to (dative). It means at or to it ; or to them ; thereto, etc. : 
J'y songerai, I will think of it. Faites-i/ attention, Pay attention to it. 

C'est lorsque nous sommes eloignes It is when we are far from our 
de notre pays, que nous sentons country that we feel, above all, the in- 
Burtout I'instinct qui nous y at- stinct which attaches us to it. 
tache. Chateaubriand. 

Tous nos jours vont a la mort, le All our days travel towards death, 
dernier y arrive. Montaigne. the last one arrives at it (reaches 

it). 

Les ohoses de la terre ne valent The things of the earth are not' 
pas qu'on s'y attache. Nicole. worth our attachment to them, 

19 



434 SYNTAX OF THE PEON O TIN. — §104,105,106. 

(3.) T is sometimes used adverbially, with the sense of la, there. 

Allez-vous a NewTork ? Do you go to New York 7 

J^y vais, J go {there). 

(4.) In order to avoid its meeting with the vowel i^ j is not used 
in connection with the future and conditional of aller, to go ; we say : 
J'irais, nous irions, instead of j'y irais, nous y irions, etc., I should 
go there, we should go there, etc. 

§ 104. — Place of En and Y. 

(1.) The place of en and y is the same as that prescribed by Rule 
jfl.) § 100, for the personal pronouns. They are also subject to Ex- 
ception (2.) and Remark (3.) of the same §. See examples above. 

(2.) En and y are always placed after the other pronouns re- 
gimes : 

II noxis en a parle. He has spoken to us of it. 

H lui en a dit quelque chose. Be has told him soynething of ii. 

Tarlez-lui-en. JSjjeak to him of it. 

Ne nous en parlez pas. Do not speak to ics of it. 

Je ly ai renvoye. / have referred him to it. 

'RenYojez-nous-y. Befer, or send us back to it. 

Ne nous y renvoyez pas. Do not refer us to it. 

§ 105. — Repetitions of the Pkonouns b^gimes. 
These pronouns must, in French, be repeated before every verb : 

Ah ! mon enfant, que je voudrais Ah! my child, hoiu I would like to 

bien vous voir un peu, vous enten- see you for a short time, to hear you, 

dre, vous embrasser, voz^s voir pas- to embraceyou, see you pass. 
ser. Mme. De SiviaNE. 

Je veux le voir, le prior, le presser, / will see him, entreat him, press 

Zlmportuner, le flechir. him, importune him, bend him. 
Bescherelle. 

§ 106. — The Possessive Pbonoun. 

(1.) The possessive pronoun, in Prench, is always preceded by 

the article [§ 34, (2.) (3.)] which, as well as the pronoun itself, agrees 

in gender and number with the noun represented [§ 35, (1.)]: 

L'ambition ni la fumee ne tou- Neither ambition nor smoke have 
chent point un coeur comme le mien, power on such a heart as mine. 
J. J. Rousseau. 
Au lieu de deplorer la mort des Instead of bewailing the death of 
autres, je veux apprendre de vous a others, I wish to learn from you how 
rendre la mienne sainte. to render my own holy. 

Bossuet. 
(2.) The pronouns le notre, le voire [§ 34, (3.)], etc., unlike the 
adjectives notre, votre, etc., always take the circumflex accent : 

La musique des anciens Grecs The music of the ancient Greeks 
^ait ties differente de la notre. was very different from ours. 

YoLTAUffi. 



SYNTAX OF THE P E O N O U N . — §107. 435 

(3.) When the English possessive pronouns, mine, thine, etc., 
come after the verb to 6e, they are often rendered into French by 
the indirect pronouns, a moi, a toi : 

Ce livre est a moi. Thai hook is 'mine. 

Ces plumes sont-eUes a vous ? Are these pens yours ? 

§ 107. — The Demonsteative Peonoun. 
(1.) The demonstrative pronouns [§ 36], can never be placed be- 
fore nouns. They ^erely represent them : 

La meilleure le^on est celle des The best lesson is thai of examples. 
exemples. La Haepe. 

N'oublie jamais les bienfaits que Never forget the benefits which thou 

tu as recus ; oublie promptement hast received ; forget quickly those 

ceux que tu as accordes. Boiste. which thou hast conferred. 

(2.) The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, ceUes, as has been said [§ 37, 
(2.)], are often used absolutely, not only in the nominative, but also 
in the regimes, direct and indirect. They have then the sense of he 
who, him whom, of whom / that which, of which. They apply, in this 
sense, as well to things as to persons : 

Celui qui compte dix amis, n'en He who reckons ten friends, has not 

a pas un, Malesherbes. one. 

On ne saurait forcer celui qui ne We cannot compel him, who will not. 
veut pas. 

L'harmonie la plus douce est la The sweetest harmony is the voice 

voix de celle jw'on aime. of her whom we love. 
La BRUT:feRE. 

(3.) The French use celui, celle, ceux, ceUes, indifferently for this, 
that. When they institute a contrast or a comparison, they sufl&x 
the adverbs^ ci (ici) and la to the pronouns [§ 37, (3.)] : 

Comeille nous assujettit a ses Corneille subjects us to his charac- 
caracteres et a ses ideas; Eacine ters and to his ideas; Racme con- 
Be conforme aux notres. Celui-ld forms himself to ours. That one (the 
paint les hommes, comme ils de- former) paints men as they should be, 
vraient etre, celui-ci les paint tels this one {the latter) paints them as 
qu'ils sont. La Bruyere. they are. 

(4.) Celui-ci, ceUe-ci, ceux-ci, ceUes-ci, may be used absolutely in 
French in the sense of this one, that one, etc. 

On la vit, toutes les semaines, es- Every week, she was seen wiping 

snjer les larmes de celui-ci, pour- the tears of this one, providing for 

voir aux besoins de celui-ld. the wants of that one. 
Flechier. 

' The same adverbs produce the same difiference in meaning with the' 
demonstrative adjectives ce, cet, etc. Thay are not placed immediately 
after those adjectives, but after the nouns vhich they determine : cet 
homme-ci, this man, cet homme-la, that man. The commencement of 
Eemark (3.) appUes also to the adjectives ce, cet, cetie, ces, etc. 



436 



SYNTAX OF THE PEONOTTN. — 5 108. 



(5.) Ceci and cela are always used absolutely. They serve to 
point out things only. They can, of course, never be prefixed to a 
noun [§37, (5.)]: 



Tant que le jour est long, il gronde 

entre ses dents, 
Pais ceci^ fais cela, va^ viens, monte, 
descends. Eegnard. 

Je suis un peu surpris de tout ceci. 

Massillgis^ 

Yous n'avez pu desavouer cela. 

Pascal. 



Tlie. livelong day he mutters le- 
iween his teeth, do this, do that, go, 
come, go up, come down. 

I am a little surprised at all this. 

You have rtt been able to disavow 
that. 



§ 108. — ^Remarks on the Demonstrative Peonoun CE. 

(1.) (7e, when used as a demonstrative pronoun, is almost always 

construed with the verb etre, or followed by a relative pronoun : 

C'est un poids bien pesant qu'un A great name is a very heavy weight 
grand nom a soutenir, to sustain. 

MOVTESQUIEU. 

Ce qui me plait c'est sa modestie. That which pleases me is her mod- 

Levizac. esty. 

(2.) Ce is used for he, she, they, preceding any part of the verb to 
le, when that verb is followed by a noun, or an adjective used sub- 
stantively and preceded by the, a or an, or a possessive or demon- 
strative adjective. 

(3.) Observe, that the verb etre following the pronoun ce, is put in 
the plural, when the noun following that verb is plural. The pro- 
noun ce, however, remains unchanged. ^ 

ffe is a deceitful man. 

She is the woman whom I seek. 

They were my friends. 



CPest un trompeur. 

C'est la femme que je cherche. 

C'etaient mes amis. 

Ce seraient paroles exquises, 

Si c'etait un grand qui parlat. 

MOLIEEE. 

N'etaient-ce pas les memes hom- 
mes ? Chateaubriand. 



Tliey would be exquisite words. 

If a great man were to speak them. 

Were they not the same men ? 



AU those sentences are elliptical ; a noun being xmderstood after 
the ce : 



Cet homme est un trompeur. 
Cette femme est la femme que je 
cherche. 

(4.) This is, that is, these are. 
dest ici, ce sont Id : 

' (Test ici la place. 
Ce sont la mes enfants. 



That man is a deceitful one. 
That woman is the woman whom I 
seek. 

are, may also be rendered by 



This is the place. 
Those are my children. 



Yoici, voild, are, however, to be preferred to c'est ici, etc. : 



Void la place. 
Voild mes enfants. 



This is the place. 
Those a/re my children. 



SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUN. — §109. 437 

(5.) Ce answers to the English pronoun it^ when this latter word 
stands as the nominative of the verb to he, without definite reference 
to an antecedent : 

Ce n'est que par les sens que It is only through the senses that the 

I'ame peut s'instruire. Foxtaxes. mind can receive instruction. 

€e fat d'une retraite de patres et It was from a refuge for shepherds 

d'aventuriers, que sortkent les con- and adventurers, that emerged the 

querants de I'uaivers. Rollix. conquerors of the world. 

(7'est un de fa ut capital qu'il faut This is a capital defect which should 

6viter dans quelque sujet que ce soit. he avoided in whatever subject it may 

YOLTAIRE. he. 

(6.) When the verb tire, however, is used unipersonally, and fol- 
lowed by an adjective [§ 87, (3.)], the pronoun it is not rendered by 
ce, but by the pronoun used with all unipersonal verbs (il) : 

II est necessaire d'etudier. It is necessary to study. 

21 est plus difficile pour les na- It is more difficult for nations than 

tions que pour les individus, de re- for individuals to recover the esteem 

couvrer Festime de leurs voisins, of their neighbors, when they have 

quand elles Font perdue. Boiste. hst it. 

§ 109. — The Relative Peonoun. 

(1.) The relative pronoun que, whom, which, can in French never 

be suppressed Hke the corresponding Enghsh pronouns :^ 

Les louanges que nous donnons, 77ie praises (which) we give, have 

se rapportent toujours par quelque always in some way a relation to our' 

chose a nous-memes. selves. 
Massillox. 

(2.) The pronouns quel, que, quoi, lequel, represent the English 
pronouns which or what used interrogatively. 

1. Quel is used before a noun in a determinative sense : 



Quel livre lirons-nous ? Wliai or which hook shall we read? 

Quel est done votre mal ? What then is your ailment ? 

MOLIERE. 

2. Que is used before a verb : 

Que dites-vous ? What do you say ? 

3. Quoi is used as an exclamation : 

Quoi ! est-ce vous ? What ! is it you ? 

4. Lequel, used interrogatively, means which one : 

Yoici deux plumes ; laquelle vou- Here are two pens ; which {which 
lez-vous ? one) vjill you have ? 

(3.) Qui is also used interrogatively for the regime direct, and 

^ The conjunction that, is often omitted in English ; its equivalent que, 
must always be expressed in French. 

Je crois qu! il est id / lelieve {that) he is here. 



438 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. §110-112'. 

preceded by a preposition, for the regime indirect. It then means 
whom^ of whom, to whom, whose, etc. : 

Qui avez-TOus vu ? WTiom have yoic seen f 

De qui tenez-vous cette nouvelle? From wham have you this news ? 

A qui est ce livre ? Whose look is this ? 

§ 110.— The Peonoun En. 

(1.) We have already [§ 39, (17.) § 95, (5.) § 103, Eule (1.)] made 
several remarks on this pronoun. 

(2.) Un signifies of it, from it, with it, about it, of them, from them, 
etc., expressed or understood. Though en is by some French writers 
often used in relation to persons, their example should be imitated 
in such cases only as that presented by the example in § 92, (2.) 

(3.) En, used as an equivalent for the English some or any, ex- 
pressed or understood, preserves its nature of an indirect regimen, 
and has, in the same manner as the French article placed before a 
noun used partitively, the sense of of it, of them ; the word partie 
being understood : 

Avez-vous des pommes ? Have you apples f 

That is, some, or rather, of the, a part of the apples. 

J' en ai. / have, I have some ; I have of 

tliem or / have (a part) of them. 

(4.) En sometimes recalls the whole or part of a proposition : 

L'on ne saurait voir, sans en etre We cannot see, without being 



pique, piqued, another person in 

Posseder par un autre un bien qu'on of goods which we have failed in ob- 

a manque. Moliere. iaining. 

X'e/i disputons plus, chacun a sa Let its no longer argue about this, 

pensee. Moliere. every one has his own opinion. 

§ 111.— The Peonoun Y. 

Some remarks have already been made on this pronoun [§ 39, 
(18.) § 103, (2.)]. y means to it, at it, to them, at them. It is seldom 
used in relation to persons or animals, but frequently in relation to 
things: 

Je recois voire lettre, ma chere I receive your letter, my dear child, 

enfant, et i'y fais reponse avec and answer it (make answer thereto) 

precipitation. Mme. de Sevigxe. in haste. 

Tirer vanite de quelque chose, To feel vanity on account of any 

c'est prouver qu'on n'y est pas thing, is proving thai we are not ac' 

accoutume. Boiste. customed to it. 

Cbargez-vous de cette affaire; Take this affair upon yourself; 

dounez-2/ tous vous soins. give all your care to it. 

BOXIFACE, 

§ 112. — Place of the Peonouns En and Y. 
See § 104, (1.) (2.) 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. §113. 439 



§ 113. — The Indefinite Pronoun On [§ 41, (4.)]. 

(1.) On^ Tvhich is very extensirely used in the French language, is 
said only of persons. The verb, of which it is always the nomina- 
tive, must be in the singular. This pronoun is of the masculine 
gender. [See (2.)] On is used in French for people, one, some one^ 
we, they, whenever these words have a general and indefinite mean- 
ing, and do not refer to any particular word : 

On pardonne aisement le mal We (people, ihey, etc) easily for- 

involontaire. De la. Boutrate. give involuntary injuries. 

On cherche les rieurs, et moi je People {they, we) seek laughing or 

les evite. La Fontaine. merry people, and I avoid them. 

Another translation of the above sentences, will show us that the 
pronoun on often enables the French to make use of the active voice, 
which they always prefer to the passive.^ Thus, the two examples 
last given may be rendered as follows : 

Active Voice in French. Passive Voice in English. 

On pardonne aisement le mal Involuntary injuries are easily for- 
involontaire. given. 

On cherche les rieurs, mais moi Merry ox joyful people are generally 
je les evite. sought; for my part I avoid them. 

A few more examples, from some of the best French authors, 
elucidating the use of this pronoun, wiU be useful to the student : 

Quand on est Chretien, de quelque A Christian, of whichever sex he 

sexe que Von soit, il n'est pas permis may le, is not allowed to he cowardly. 
d'etre lache. Fenelon. 

On pent etre honnete homrae, et One may he a worthy man, and 

faire mal des vers. Moliere. make had verses. 

On aime peu celuiqui n'ose aimer We feel hut little love for him who 

personne. Delille. dares love nohody. 

K-\-on jamais pleure d'avoir fait Have we ever grieved on account 

son devoir? Chamfort. of having done our duty ? 

Qaand on a meme but, rarement those who have the same aim, 

on s'accorde. Lebrun. rarely agree. 

Artistes, ecrivains, poetes, si vous Artists, writers, poets, if you at- 

vous copiez toujours, on ne vous ways copy each other, no person mU 

copiera jamais. copy you. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

(2.) If the word on denotes definitely a female, the adjective re- 
lating to it, takes the feminine termination : 

Quand on est helle., on ne rip^nore When one (a lady) is handsome, 
pas, L'Academie. she is not ignorant of it. 

* On dit, it is said; on rapporte, it is related; on craiat, it is feared; 
etc. Cela se fjait ainsi, literally, that makes itself thus, that is Tnade in ibis 
manner, eta 



440 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — §114. 

(3.) The pronoun on^ must be repeated before every verb : 

On leva I'ancre, on part, on fuit loin They raise the anchor, they depart, 

de la terre, they jiee far from the land, already 

On decouvrait deja les bords de they discovered the sJwres of Ewjlartd. 
I'Angleterre. Yoltaiee. 

§ 114. — The Yekb. — Ageee^ient of the ,Yerb with its 
Subject. 
(1.) The verb agrees with its nominative or subject, whether that 
Djminative precedes or follows : 

Vhomme est ne pour regner sur Man is lorn to reign (rver all t%6 

tous les animaux. Yoltaiee. animals. 

Les hommes soni encore enfants 4 Men are still children at sixty. 
soixante ans. Aubert. 

Par ces portes sortaient les fieres ThroiLgh those gates issued the 

legions. Saint- YiciOR. proud legions. 

(2.) When a verb has two or more singular nominatives connected 
by the conjunction e^ the verb is put in the plural : 

La colere et la precipitation soni Anger and precipitation are two 

deux choses fort opposees a la pru- things very much opposed to prur 

dence. Fen"elox. dence. 

La violence et la vertu ne peuvent Violence and virtue have no power 

rien Tune sur Tautre. Pascal. over each other. 

(3.) When a verb has several singular nominatives not connected 
by etj it is put in the singular or in the plural, according to circum- 
stances : 

1. It is put in the singular, if the nominatives are in some way 
synonymous : 

La douceur, la bontS du grand The mildness, the goodness of the 

Henri, a ete celebree de mille great Henry, ho.s been celebrated by a 

louanges. Pelisson. thousand praises. 

D'oii pent venir cet ennui, ce Wliejice can proceed that ennui, 

degout ? that disgust ? • 
Colin- d'Harlevelle. 

(2.) When, in a series of nominatives, the last has more force 
or interest attached to it, and therefore, makes us, as it were, over- 
look the others : 

Ce sacrifice, votre interet, votre This sacrifice, your interest, your 
honneur, DiEU vous le commande ! honor, God commands it ! 

3. The verb is put in the plural, when the afiirmation is intended 

to be made of all the nominatives taken collectively, and not of each 

in particular : 

La douceur, les soupirs de cette The sweetness, the sighs of that un- 
femme infortunee ne purent le fortunate woman could not move 
flechir. Wailly. him. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. §115,116. 441 

Savez vous, si demain, Do you know, if to-morrow, his 

Sa liberie, ses jours, seront en votre liberty, his life, will he in your 
main? Racine. power ? 

(4:) On the form of the verb when preceded by several subjects 
connected by ou, See Lesson 84, 2, 3, 

§ 115.— NuiMBER OF THE VeRB AFTER A COLLECTIVE NoTJN. 
(1.) Every verb, having, as its subject, a general collective noun 
[§ 3, (6.)], preceded by the article, such as la totalite, T infinite^ etc., 
takes the number of that noun : 

Varmee des infideles fui entiere- The army of the infidels was en- 

ment detruite. L'Agademie. iirely destroyed. 

La multitude des bonnes Glioses The multitude of the good things 

que Ton trouve dans un ouvrage, wJiich we find in a work, makes us 

fait perdre de vue la multiplicite lose sight of the multiplicity of the 

des mauvaises. Camixade. bad ones. 

(2.) When a partitive collective noun [§ 3, (6.)] occurs as the sub- 
ject of a proposition, the verb agrees with that noun, if it occupies 
the first rank in the thought of the speaker or writer. 

The verb agrees, on the contrary, with the plural noun following 
the collective word, if the collective acts only a s'econdaiy part, or 
if it is employed only to add an accessory idea of number : 

Agreement with the Collective. Agreement luith the following Noun. 

Une troupe d'assassins ent7'a dans Una troupe de nymphes couron- 

la chambre de Coiigny. nees de fleurs, nageaient autour de 

YoLTAiRE. son char. Fenelon. 

A gang of assassins entered Co- A troop of nymphs, croivned with 

ligny^s chamber. flowers, were swimming around her 

chariot. 

Une nuee de traits obscurcit I'air. Une nuee de barbares desolereni 

le pays. L'Agademie. 

A cloud of arrows darkened the A cloud of barbarians desolated tht 

air. country. 

Cette espece de paons parait avoir Cette espece de chiens qu'on ap- 

eprouve les memes effets par la pelle chiens de Laconie, ne viveni 

meme cause. Buffon. que dix ans. Boileau. 

That species of peacocks seems to That species of dogs which they 

have experienced the same effects call Laconian dogs, live only ten 

through the same cause. years. 

. § 116. — Number of the Verb Etre after the Pro- 
noun Ce. 
(1.) The verb etre, preceded or followed by ce, as the grammatical 
subject, takes the number of the noun placed in apposition with that 
pronoun [§ 108, (3.)] : 

Ce sont les moeurs qui font la It is morals which form good eom- 
bonne compagnie. La Chauss^e. pa/ny. 



442 SYNTAX OP THE VERB. — § 117, US'. 

Sont-ce des religieux et des pre- Are they monks and priests who 
ties qui parlent; ainsi ? sont-ce des speak so f are they Christians f 
Chretiens ? Pascal. 

(2.) The verb etre may also be put in the plural, when the pro- 
nouns eux and elles are put in apposition with the pronoun ce. This 
rule, however, is optional, as the examples will show. Before nous 
and voits similarly placed, the verb is always in the singular ; c'es^ 
nous ; c'est vous. 

Singular. Plural. 

C^est eux qui out ball ce superbe Ce sont eux qui viennent. 
labyrinthe. Bossuet. Bescherelle. 

It is they who have iuilt that su- It is they who come, 
perb labyrinth. 

§ 117. — The Yekb eelating to several Subjects in Dif- 
ferent Persons. 
A verb having several subjects in different persons, is put in the 
plural, and assumes the termination of the first person in preference 
to that of the second, and that of the second in preference to that of 
the third. It may then be preceded by the plural pronoun of the 
person preferred, recapitulating, as it were, all the other subjects : 

Yotre pere et moi, nous avons ete Your father and I, have long been 

longtemps ennemis Tun de I'autre. enemies to each other. 
Fenelon". 

AUez ; voics et vos semblables Go ; you and such as you are not 

vHetes point faits pour etre trans- fit to be transplanted. 
plantes. Montesquieu. 

§ 118. — Use of the Tenses. — The Present of the 
Indicative. 

(1.) This tense denotes what exists, or is taking place at the time 
we speak : 

Je lis ; vous parlez. / read ; you speak. 

(2.) The French have only one form of the indicative present : 

Je lis means, therefore, I read, do read, or am reading. 

(3.) The indicative present is used in French, as well as in Eng- 
lish, for expressing things which are and will always be true : 

Dieu est etemel, sa puissance est God is eternal, his power is bound- 
sans bornes, et sa clemence est less, and his clemency is great. 
grande. Girault-Duviviee, 

(4.) It is often used to express a proximate future : 

Je suis de retour dans un mo- I shall be back in a m^mtnt. 
ment. Moliere. 

Si Titus a parle, s'il Yepouse, je If Titus has spoken^ if he Ttiarrie* 

pars. ErACiNB. her, I go {wiU go). 



SYNTAX OP THE VEEB. — §119,120. 443 

(5.) The present is frequently used for the past, to awaken atten- 
tion, and place the event, as it were, before the reader : 

J'ai vu, seigneur, j'ai vu votre / saw^ my lord, I saw your UU' 

malheureux fils, fortunate son dragged by the Twrsea 

"Traine par les chevaux que sa main which his own hand has fed ; he 

a nourris; wishes to recall them, hut his voice 

H veut les rappeler, mais sa voix frightens them. 
les effrai&. Racine. 

§ 119. — The Impeefect. 

(1.) The imperfect, or simultaneous past, is used to express some- 
thing which was in progress, while another thing was taking place. 
It leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action imdeter- 
mined : 

J^ecrivais, quand je regus votre I was loriting, when I received 
lettre. your letter. 

(2.) The French imperfect, as may be seen in the above example, 
represents the Enghsh past tense formed of the auxiliary to be, and 
the participle present of a principal verb. 

(3.) The imperfect is also used to express repeated or customary 
action. It may then often be rendered in EngUsh by the infinitive 
of the verb preceded by " used to" : 

Lorsque i'etais a Londres, }^allais When I was in London, I walked 
me promener le matin, ensuite je {used to walk) in the morning, after- 
dinais, et je passais le reste de la wards dined {usually dined), and 
journee a lire et a ecrire spent (usually) the remainder of the 

day in reading and writing. 

(4.) The use of this tense will be further explained in the next 
Section. 

§ 120. — The Past Definite. 
(1.) The past definite indicates an action performed at a time en- 
tirely past : (^ 

Tallai a Londres, o^ je vis votre / went to London, where I saw 
pere; je finis mes affaires dans your father ; I finished my lusinees 
fiette ville, et revins aussitot ici. in that city, and retv/rTied hither im- 

mediately. 

M. un tel ecrivit hier au soir \m Mr. such-a-one wrote last evening 
sixain a Mademoiselle une telle. six verses to Miss such-a-one. 

MOLI^RE. 

(2.) The past definite can only be used, as we have seen above, 
when the time at which an action took place is entirely elapsed. 
We cannot, therefore, use it in connection with the words to-day^ 
this morning, this week, this month, this year, etc., [See § 121, Past 



444 SYNTAX OP THE VERB. § 120. 

Indefinite.] We may use it in speaking of yesterday^ last week, last 
year, etc. : 

Je vous envoie, mon cher frere, / send you, my dear brother, a let- 
une lettre que i'tcrivis liier pour ter which I icrote yesterday for Mo* 
Madame de Laval Pexelox. dame de Laval. 

(3.) The imperfect may almost always be rendered in English by 
the participle present of the verb and the auxihary to he ; or by pre- 
fixing " used to" to the infinitive mood. The past definite can never 
be so rendered. 

(4.) The imperfect might be called the descrij)tive tense of the 
French. 

(5.) The past definite might be called the narrative tense. It ex- 
presses that which took place at some time fully past. We will 
endeavor to illustrate this difference between these two tenses:— A 
traveller has entered a wood and discovered a retired cottage; he 
wishes to describe what he saw there, and makes use of the imper- 
fect or descriptive tense ; he says : 

Un vieillard se promenait sous les An old man was walking under the 

arbres ; il tenait un livre a la main ; trees ; he held (was holding) a hook in 

de temps en temps, il elevait les his hand; from time to time he raised 

yeux vers le ciel, ou les couvrait de his eyes towards heaven, or concealed 

la main, et semblait s'abimer dans them with his hand, and seemed to 

une profonde reverie. Devant la sink into a profound reverie. Before 

porte de la cabane etait assise une the door of the. hut, sat {was sitting) 

femme qui berpait un enfant sur ses a female, rocking {who was rocking) a 

genoux ; elle etait pale ; ses cheveux child on her knees ; she was pale ; her 

flottaient an gre du vent ; des larmes hair waved {was waving) at the mercy 

coulaientle long de ses joues, etc. of the wind; tears floiued {were flow- 
ing) down her cheeks, etc. 

The traveller has here drawn a picture of what presented itself to 
his eyes, as he approached the cottage. 'Not content with represent- 
ing merely the then present situation of things, he wishes also to 
narrate what took place. He has described the theatre on which the 
occurrence took place, which he is going to relate ; he now proceeds 
to the narrative, and uses the past definite or narrative tense : 

Je m^approchai du vieillard ; lors- I approached the old man ; when he 

qu'il m'apergut, il savanna vers moi, perceived me he came towards me, 

me salua, et me pria de ne pas trou- greeted me, and besought me not to 

bier cette paisible retraite du mal- disturb this peaceful retreat of the 

heur. II retourna a la cabane, prit unfortunate. Re returned to the cot- 

I'enfant des bras de la femme, et tage, took the child from the woman^s 

rentra; oUq Iq suiv it, QtQ. arms and went in ; she followed him^ 



YNTAX OF THE VERB. 



§121. 



445 



Another example might be taken from La Fontaine's well-known 
fable : 



THE RAVEN AND THE FOX. 



Master raven perched upon a tree, 
held {was holding) in his beak a 
cheese; master fox, attracted by the 
smell, addressed him nearly in the fol- 
lowing tvords. 



LE CORBEAU ET LE RENARD. 

Maitre corbeau sur un arbre per- 

che, 
Tenait en son bee un fromage ; 
Maitre renard, par Todeur alleche, 
Lui tint a pen pres ce langage. 

Here the poet uses the imperfect of tenir in describing the situa- 
tion in which the fox found the raven, but in relating the action of 
the fox, La Fontaine uses the narrative tense of the same verb. 

The commencement of the first book of Telemaque, offers an ex- 
cellent illustration of what we have here advanced, on the use of the 
imperfect, and the past definite. 

§ 121. — ^The Past Ii^definite. 
(1.) The past indefinite expresses an action entirely completed, 
but performed at a time of which some part is not yet elapsed, as to- 
day ^ this month, this year, etc. 

Le roi m'a nomme aujourd'hui ar- 
cheveque do Cambray. Penelox. 

Ce matin j'az irouve le pave si glis- 
sant, que j'ai pense que si je venais 
a tomber sur le bras droit, je serais 
tout a fait desempare. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Je Vai defendu{see (2.) below) cent 
fois de racier ton mechant violon; 
cependant, jeVaientendu ce matin — 
Ce matin ? Ne vous souvient-il pas 
que vous me le mites [§ 120 (2.)] 
hier en pieces? Palaprat. 



The king appointed me io-day 
archbishop of Camb7-ay. 

This morning I found the street so 
slippery, that I thought, in case I 
happened to fall on my right arm, I 
should then be completely helpless. 



I have forbidden thee a hundred 
times to scrape thy wretched violin ; ne- 
vertheless I heard thee this morning. 
— This morning ! Bo you not re- 
colled that you broke it to pieces yes- 
terday ? 

(2.) The past indefinite is also used with regard to a time en- 
tirely past, but not specified : 



Les fruits de la terre ont ete la 
premiere nourriture des hommes. 

GIRAULT-DUVIVIER. 

Les Frangais ont gagne la bataille 
de Marengo. 



The fruits of the earth were tha 
first aliments of mankind. 

The French gained the battle of 
Marengo. 



(3.) When the time is specified and entirely elapsed, the past in- 
definite is by many of the best French writers, used indifferently 
with the past definite : 

Past Indefinite. 
Je vous ai ecrit, il y a quinz© 
jours. The Same. 

I wrote to you a fortnight ago. 



Past Definite : 
Huit jours apres son depart, il 
m^ecrivit une lettre. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 
A week after his departure, he wrote 
me a letter. 



446 SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. §122,123,124. 

Je fus bien fdche hier, ma chere Hier en travaillant a mon qua- 

cousine, de vous avoir quittee avec trieme dialogue, j'ai eprouve un vrai 

tant de precipitation. Fexelon. plaisir. Mirabeau. 

/ was very sorry yesterday, my Yesterday, while working at my 

dear cousin, for having left you in so fourth dialogue, I experienced real 

much haste. pleasure. 

(4.) When the first verb of a sentence is put in the past indefinite, 
every other verb of that sentence, and of the sentences referring to 
it, should be in the same tense : 

Oh. avez-xoxxs, eie ? Where have you been ? 

J'ai d'abord ete a I'eglise, ensuite I first went to church, and then 
je suis venu diner. came home to dinner. 

§ 122. — The Past Anterior. 

The past anterior expresses what took place immediately before 
another event which is also past, the latter event being usually the 
result of, or dependent upon the former : 

Quand feus reconnu mon erreur, When I had perceived my error, 1 

je fus bonteux des mauvais procedes was ashamed of my lad conduct Uh 
que j 'avals eus pour lui. wards him. 

GIRAULT-DUVIVIER. 

See (3.) of the § below. 

§ 123. — The Pluperfect. 

(1.) The pluperfect marks an event not only past in itself, but as 
past with regard to another past event : 

J'avaz^ dejeune, quand vous vintes I had breakfasted, when you came 
me demander. Girault-Ddviviee. to inquire for me. 

(2.) The pluperfect having as its auxiliary the imperfect of the 
verbs avoir, or etre, partakes of the signification of that tense. It 
may, therefore, often be used to denote customary action : 

Des que ^avais lu quelques pages, ^5 soon as I had read a few pages, 
je me promenais. I used to take a walk. 

In such cases it generally precedes or follows another verb in the 
imperfect. 

(3.) When the action is not a customary one, and the sentence 
commences with one of the adverbs, quand, lorsque, aussHot que, des 
que, etc., the past anterior is generally used : 

Des que j'fitts lu quelques pages, As soon as. I had read a few pages, 
je sortis. I went out. 

§ 124.— The Two Futures. 
(1.) The future simple is used to signify what will be, or will take 
place, at a time not yet come : 
Votre firere pariira demaiiL ^^ brother loiU go la-morrow. 



SYNTAX OP THE VERB. § 125,126. 447 

(2.) The fature is used, in French, after an adverb of time, in cases 
where the Enghsh use the present of the indicative : 

Quand vous viendrez, vous appor- When you come, you will bring my 
terez men livre. book. 

(3.) It has sometimes the sense of the imperative in sentences like 
the following : 

Oroira qui voudra I'historien Ca- Believe who will the historian Ca- 

pitolin et quelques autres ecrivains, pitolinus and several other writers, 

qm font danser las elephants sur la who make elephants dance on a rope. 
corde. Feeaud. 

(4.) The future anterior is used to signify what will have been at 
a future period ; it is also used after an adverb of time in cases where 
the past indefinite is used in English : 

Qaond faurai fini mes affaires, je WTien I have finished my of airs, 2 
vous irai voir. G-ieault-Duvivier. will go and see you. 

§ 125. — The Two Conditionals. 
(1.) The conditional present denotes what would take place under 
a certain condition : 

Nous goMerions bien des jouis- We should have many enjoyments, 
sances, si nous savions faire un bon if we knew how to make a good use 
usage du temps. of time. 

GlRAIJLT DUVIVIER. 

(2.) The conditional past denotes what would have taken place, 
at a time past, if the condition on which it depended, had been ful- 
filled : 

II serait alle a la campagne, si le Se would have gone into the couri' 
temps le lui avait permis. try, if the weather had allowed him. 

(3.) The two futures, and the two conditionals, cannot, in French, 
follow the conjunction st, meaning in case that. The indicative pres- 
ent is then used instead of the future, and the imperfect instead of 
the conditional. This rule is often violated by the French, but sel- 
dom by the Americans or Enghsh, who have acquired a good knowl- 
edge of the French language. 

§ 126. — The Imperative. 

(1.) The imperative is used to express a command, exhortation, 
permission or entreaty : 

Connais-moi tout entiere. Know me entirely. 

CORNEILLE. 

Ah ! dem/eurez, seigneur, et daignez Ah ! remain, my lord, and deign 
m'dcDute?. Racine. to listen to me. 



448 SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. § 121. 

N"e iardons plus, marchons, et s'il Lei ws tarry no longer, lei us pro» 

faut que je meure, ceed, and, if I micst die, let us die. 

Mourons. Racine, 

§ 127. — The StrBJuxcTiTE. 

(1.) The subjunctive is the mode of doubt or indecision : 

Obeis, si tu veux qu'on fobeisse Obey, if tliou wishesi that one day 
un joui\ Voltaire. others may obey thee. 

(2.) A verb, which is governed bj the conjunction que, must be 
put in the subjunctive mode in French, though it may be in the in- 
dicative or conditional in Enghsh :^ 

1. When the part of the sentence, which precedes que, being in- 
terrogative or negative, expresses a doubt : 

Pensez-vous que vous rev^sissiez Do you think that you may succeed 

dans cette affaire? in this affair? 

Je ne voudrais pas assurer, qu'on / would not affirm, that ii should he 

le doive ecrire. Boileaf. written. 

Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ? Do you believe he will come ? 

2. When the verb preceding que expresses consent, command, doultj 
desire, sur^prise, want, duty, necessity, fear, apprehension : 

Jepermets, je souhaite,je doute, je I permit, I wish, I doubt, I desire, 

veux, fordonne, ']& suis surpris que I order, I am stirprised, that you may 

vous veniez. or should come. 

Des ce meme iDoment, ordonnez Order, that I may depart this very 

que je parte. Raci^'e. moment. 

Tu veux qu'en ta faveur nous TIiou wishest that for thy sake we 

croyions rimpossible. Corxeille. may believe in impossibilities. 

Je suis ravi que nous logions en- / am delighted that we happen io 

semble. Destouches. live together. 

3. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb 
preceded by qv^, must also be preceded by ne : 

Je Grains, je tremble, j'appre- / fear, I tremble, I apprehend, 1 
hende, j'ai peur, qu'il ne vienne. am afraid he may come. 

G-IRAULT-DtJVIVIER, 

(3.) The pronouns qui, que, Jequel, dont, and the word ou, meaning 
in which, should be followed by the subjunctive, when that part of 
the sentence which precedes them, expresses an interrogation, or im- 
plies a wish, a doubt, or a condition. They must also be followed 
by the verb in the subjunctive, when they are preceded by a super- 
lative relative [§ 14, (9.)] . 

T a-t-il quelqu'un qui ne respecte Is there any one who does not re- 
le malheur. sped misfortune. 



^ When two verbs are united by the conjunction que, the second is put 
in the indicative, if the first expresses something certain, positive : 

On m'assure que voua avez regu They assure me that you have re- 
une lettr© de votne pore. cetued a letter from your father. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — § 128. 449 

La meilleure chose que vous puis- The best thing that you can do. 
siezMve. 

Choisissez une retraite ott, vous Choose a retreat in which you may 

soyez tranquille. enjoy repose. 

(4.) A verb preceded by que and one of the unipersonal verbs 
faUoiVj importer^ coiivenir, suffire^ valoir mieux, or by tlie verb etre, 
used unipersonally in connection with the adjectives fdcheux, justej 
injuste, suprenant, possible, or with d propos, temps, a desirer, d 
souhaiter, etc., must be put in the subjunctive [see L. 73, R. 1.] : 

Ufaut que vous veniez. Tou must come, or it is necessary 

that you should come. 

n esi temps que vous ^artiiez pour It is time that you should go to 
Eome. Rome. 

II ne me pkdt pas que vous alliez It does not please me that you 
Ik. ' La Academie. should go there. 

H n'est pas certain que vous ayez It is not certain that you are right. 
raison. 

(5.) After the expressions quelque . . . que, quel que, si . . . 
que, quoique, the verb is always put in the subjunctive : 

Quelqu^ef^OYl que/ai^ve7/^es bom- Whatever effort men may make, 

mes, leur neant parait partont. their nothingness appears everywhere. 

BOSSL^ET. 

Qui que ce soit, parlez, et ne le Wlwever he may be, speak, and do 
craignez pas. Racine. not fear him. 

Si mince qu'il puisse etre, un che- Hovjever thin it may be, a hair has 
veu felt de 1' ombre. Villefre. a shadoio. 

(6.) For tlie other conjunctions which must be followed by the 
subjunctive, see § 143. 

§ 128. — The Infi:nitiye. 

(1.) The infinitive represents the being, action or passion, in an in- 
definite manner, and without number or person : 

Vouloir tromper le ciel, c'est folie To wish to deceive Heaven, is folly 
i la terre. La Fontaine. in men. 

L'ardeur de vaincre cede a la Tlie ardor of conquest (to conquer) 
peur de mourir. Corneille. yields to the fear of death {to die). 

Hair est un tourmeut. Segur. To hate is a torment. 

(2.) The infinitive' is often used substantively 
Ou plutot, que ne puis-je au doux Or rather, why can I not ai iho 
iomber du jour ? Lamartine. sweet close of the day ? 

(3.) The infinitive present is used, in French, after certain verbs, 
which are, in English, joined to other verbs by the conjunction and : 

Allez chercher mon pere. Go and fetch my father. 

(4.) We might give as a general rule, that a verb immediately pre- 
ceded and governed by another verb (avoir and etre excepted) or by 
a preposition (en excepted) is put in the present of the infinitive : 

Tout ce qu'elle s'imaginait tenir, AU that she fancied that she Tieldf 
lui echappait tout a coup. Fenelon. escaped her suddenly. 



450 



SYNTAX OP THE VERB. — § 129, 130. 



Yos raisons sont trop bonnes Your reasons are too good in iherrb- 

d'elles-memes, sans etre appuyees de selves, to need thai foreign assistance. 

ces secours etrangers. Kacine. Tou think that you know every- 

Yous pensez tout savoir. Pieyre, thing. 

Croit-il le pouvoir rompre ? Does he 'believe he can break iif 
Th. Corneille. 

(5.) The French language, preferring the active to the passive 
voice, requires the use of the active verb in the following and similar 
cases wherein the Enghsh use the passive voice : 

Cette dame est bien a plaindre. TJiat lady is much to be pitied. 

Cette maison est d vendre. Ttiis house is to be sold. 

La chose est de trop peu de con- The matter is of too little conse- 

sequence pour la traiter serieuse- quence to be treated seriotisly. 
ment. Yoltaiee. 

§ 129. GOVEENMENT OF YeEBS. 

Some verbs are, in Enghsh, governed by prepositions different 
jfrom those which connect or govern the same verbs in French. 
Some, again, which are, in Enghsh, joined by prepositions, require 
none between them in French. We give below, lists of verbs with 
the appropriate prepositions, according to the best French authorities : 

§ 130. — ^Verbs eequiri:n"g no Preposition before another 
Verb in the Infinitive. 



Accourir, 


to run 


Observer, 


to notice, to observe 


Aimer mieus, 


to prefer 


Oser, 


to dare 


AUer, 


to go 


Paraitre, 


to seem 


Apercevoir, 


to perceive 


Penser, 


to think, to fancy 


Assurer, 


to assure 


Pouvoir, 


to be able 


Avouer, 


to confess 


Pretendre, 


to pretend 


Compter, 


to intend 


Preferer, 


to prefer 


Confesser, 


to confess 


Protester, 


to protest 


Courir, 


to run 


Eappeler (se), 


to remember 


Croire, 


to believe 


Rapporter, 


to report 


Daigner, 


to deign 


Reconnaitre, 


to acknowledge 


Declarer, 


to dedare 


Regarder, 


to look at 


Desirer, 


to desire 


Retourner, 


to return 


Devoir, 


to be obliged 


Revenir, 


to come back 


;6couter, 


to hear, to listen 


Savoir, 


to know 


Entendre, 


to hear 


Sembler, 


to seem 


Envoyer, 


to send 


Sentir, 


to feel 


Esperer, 


to hope 


Souhaiter, 


to wish 


Faire, 


to make 


Soutenir, 


to maintain 


Falloir, 


to be necessary 


Temoigner, 


to testify 


Imaginer, (s') 


to imagine 


Yaloir mieux, 


to be better 


Laisser, 


to let, to suffer 


Yenir, 


to come 


Mener, 


to take, to lead 


Yoir, 


to see 


Niei; 


to deny 


Youloir, 


to be willing 



Je pretends voua traiter comma 
mon propre fils. Racine. 



I intend to treat you as my own 
son. 



SYNTAX OP THE VERB 



§ 131. 



451 



Et le Rhin de ses flots ira grossir And the Rhine will go and swell 

la Loire, the Loire with its waves, before the 

Avant que tes faveurs sortent de remembrance of thy goodness leaves 

ma memoire. Boileatj. my meonory. 

§ 131. — Verbs eequieing the Pkeposition A before an 

Infinitive. 

The (se) placed after the verb shows it to be reflective. 



Abaisser (s'), 
About! r, 
Accorder (s'), 
Accoutumer, 
Acharner (s'), 
Admettre, 
Aguerrir (s'), 
Aider, 
Aimer, 

Appliquer (s'), 
Apprendre, 
Appreter (s'), 
Aspirer, 
Assigner, 
Assujettir (s'), 
Attaeher (s'), 
Atrendre (s'), 
Attendre, 
Augmenter (s'), 
Autoriser, 
Avilir (s'), 
Avoir, 
Avoir peine, 
Balancer, 
Borner (se), 
Chercher, 
Complaire, 
Concouru', 
Condamner (se), 

Condescendre, 

Consentir, 

Consister, 

Conspirer, 

Consumer, 

Coutribuer, 

Convier, 

Couter, 

Determiner, 

Determiner (se), 

Disposer (se), 

Divertir (se). 

Employer, 

Encourager, 

Engager, 

Enhardir, 

Enseigner, 



self 



self 



to stoop 

to end in 

to agree 

to accustom 

to strive 

to admit, to permit 

to become inured 

to help in 

to like 

to endeavor, to apply 

to learn 

to prepare 

to aspire 

to summon 

to subject one^ 

to apply 

to expect 

to put off 

to increase 

to authorize 

to debase one\ 

to have 

to have difficulty in 

to hesitate 

to confine one^s self 

to endeavor 

to delight in 

to co-operate 

to condemn one's 

self 
to condescend 
to consent 
to consist 
to cotispire 
to destroy 
to contribute 
to invite 
to cost 
to induce 
to resolve 

to prepare one^s self 
to amuse one^s self 
to employ, to devote 
to encourage 
to induce 
to encourage 
to teach 



Etre, etre a lire, 

a ecrire, etc. 
Entendre (s'), 
fivertuer (s'), 
Exceller, 
Exciter, 
Exborter, 
Exposer (s'), 
Fatiguer (se), 
Habituer (s'), 
Hasarder (se), 
Hesiter, 
Instruire, 
Interesser, 
Inviter, 
Mettre, 
Mettre (se), 
^lontrer, 
Obstiner (s'), 
Offrir (s'), 
Peucher, 
Penser, 
Perseverer, 
Persister, 
Plaire (se). 
Prendre plaisir, 
Preparer (se), 
Porter, 
Provoquer, 
Pousser, 
Reduire, 
Reduire (se), 
Renoncer, 
Repugner, 
Resigner (se), 
Rester, 
Reussir, 
Risquer, 
Servir, 
Songer, 

Suffiire (not UBip.), to suffice 
Tarder, to tarry 

Tend re, to tend 

Tenir, to intend^ 

Travailler, to labor 

Viser, to aim 

Youer, to devote 



to be reading, writ- 
ing, etc. 
to be expert in 
to strive 
to exceJ 
to excite 
to exhort 

to expose one^s self 
to weary one's self 
to become used to 
to venture 
to hesitate 
to instruct 
to interest 
to invite 
to set, to put 
to commence 
to show, to teach 
to persist in 
to offer 
to incline 

to think, to intend 

to persevere 

to persist 

to delight in 

to take pleasure 

to prepare 

to induce, to excite^ 
to urge 

to urge 

to constrain 

to tend, to end 

to renounce 

to be repugnant 

to be reconciled 

to tarry too long 

to succeed 

to risk 

to serve 

to think, to intend 



to aim 



452 



SYNTAX OF THE VEEB 



§ 132. 



■ L' homme n^aime point d, s'occu- 
per de son neant, et de sa bassesse. 
Massillon. 
Avez-vous jamais peiise a offrir a 
Dieu toutes ces souffrauces ? 

The same. 
§ 132. — Yerbs requiring the Preposition De before 
AN Infinitive. 



Man does not like to contemplate 
his nothingness, and his viieness. 

Have you ever thought of offering 
all these sufferings to God ? 



Abstenir (s'), 
Accuser (s'), 
Achever, 
Affecter, 
Affliger (s'), 
Agir (s'), unip., 
Applaud ir (s'), 
Apprehender, 
Avertir, 
Aviser (s'), 
Avoir besoin, 
Avoir CO utume, 
Avoir desseiu, 
Avoir eavie, 
Avoir garde, 
Avoir lioute, 
Avoir intention, 
Avoir le temps, 
Avoir le courage, 
Avoir peur. 
Avoir raison. 
Avoir regret, 
Avoir tort. 
Avoir sujet, 
Avoir soin, 
Blamer, 
BrCiler, 
Censurer, 
Cesser, 

Cliagriner (se), 
Ciiarger, 
Charger (se), 
Ctioisir, 
Commander, 
Conjurer, 
Conseiller, 
Contenter (se), 
Convaincre, 
Convenir, 
Corriger, 
Craindre, * 
Decourager, 
Dedaigner, 
Defendre, 
Defendre (se), 
Defier, 
Depecher (se), 



to abstain 

to accuse one's self 

to finish 

to affect 

to grieve 

to he the question 

to rejoice 

to apprehend 

to warn 

to bethink one's self 

to want 

to be accustomed 

to intend ■ 

to wish 

to take care 

to be ashamed 

to intend 

to have time 

to have courage 

to be afraid 

to be right 

to regret 

to be ivrong 

to have reason 

to take care 

to blame 

to wish ardently 

to censure 

to cease 

to grieve one's self 

to desire^ to intrust 

to take on one's self 

to choose 

to command 
to beseech 

to advise 

to be satisfied 

to convince 

to become, suit 

to correct 

to fear 

to discourage 

to disdain 

to forbid 

to decline 

to challenge, to dare 

to hasten 



Desaccoutumer' 

(se), 
Deshabituer 

(se), , 
Desesperer, 
Desoler, (se), 
Detourner, 
Differer, 
Dire, 

Disconvenir, 
Discontinuer, 
Dispenser, 
Dispenser (se), 
Disculper (se), 
Dissuader, 
Douter, 
Efforcer (s'), 
Effrayer (s'), 
Empeclier, 
Empresser (s'), 
Epouvanter (s'), 
lilntreprendre, 
Enrager, 
£tonner (s'), 
Eviter, 
Excuser (s'), 
Feliciter, 
Feindre, 
Flatter (se), 
Fremir, 
Grarder (se), 
Gemir, 
Glorifier (se), 
Hasarder (se), 
Hater (se), 
Imputer, 
Indigner (s'), 
Ingerer (s'), 

Inspirer, 
Jurer, 
Manquer, 
Mediter, 
Meier, (se), 
Menacer, 
Meriter, 
Moquer (se), 



■ to leave off 

to despair 

to grieve 

to dissuade 

to put off 

to say, tell 

to deny 

to discontinue 

to dispense 

to forbear 

to apologize 

to dissuade 

to doubt 

to endeavor 

to be frightened 

to prevent 

to hasten 

to be frightened 

to undertake 

to be vexed 

to wonder 

to avoid 

to excuse one's self 

to congratulate 

to feign 

to flatter one's self 

to shudder 

to take care 

to lament 

to pride one's self 

to venture 

to hasten 

to impute 

to be indignant 

to take into one\ 

head 
to inspire 
to swear 
to fail 

to think, to intend 
to meddle 
to threaten 
to deserve 
to laugh at 



SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. 



§ 133. 



453 



Mourir (used 

figuratively), 
Negliger, 
Nier, 

Pardonner, 
Parler, 
Passer (se), 
Permettre, 
Persuader, 
Piquer (se), 
Plain d re, 
Plaindre (se), 
Prendre garde, 
Prendre soin, 
Prescrire, 
Presser, 
Presser (se), 
Presumer, 
Prier, 
Promettre, 
Proposer, 
Proposer (se), 
Protester, 
Punir, 
Eebuter (se), 



to long 

to neglect 

to deny 

to excuse 

to speak 

to do without 

to permit 

to persuade 

to take pride in 

to pity 

to complain 

to take care, heed 

to take care 

to prescribe 

to urge 

to hasten 

to presume 

to desire 

to promise 

to propose 

to intend 

to protest 

to punish 

to he weary 



Recommander, to recommend 
Refuser, to refuse 

Regretter, to regret 

Rejouir (se), to rejoice 

Remercier, to thank 

Repentir (se), to repent 
Reprendre, to censure 

Reprimander, to reprimand 
Reprocher (se), to reproach 

self 
Resoudre, to resolve 

Ressouvenir (se), to remember 



Rire, 
Rougir, 

Scandaliser (se), 
Seoir (unip.), 
Sommer, 
Soupconner, 
Souvenir (se), 
Suffire (unip.), 
Suggerer, 
Supplier, 
Tenter, 
Trembler, 
Yanter (se). 



to laugh 
to blush 
to take offence 
to become, suit 
to summon 
to suspect 
to remember 
to suffice 
to suggest 
to beseech 
to attempt 
to tremble 
to boast 



II vaut mieux hasarder de saicver 
un coupable, que de condamner uu 
innocent. Voltaire. 

Le monde se vante de faire des 
heureux. Massillon. 



It is better to run the risk of spar- 
ing a guilty person, than to condemn 
an innocent one. 

TJie vjorld boasts that it can render 
men happy. 



§ 133. — Rule. 

(1.) Two or more verbs may govern the same object, provided 

they require the same regimen : 

Nous aimons, nous instruisons, et We love, we instruct, and we praise 
nous louons nos enfants. our children. 

This sentence is correct, because aimer, instruire, and louer, being 
active verbs, govern one and the same case, the direct regimen. 

(2.) But when the verbs require different regimens, they cannot 
govern one and the same noun ; and therefore another form must be 
given to the sentence. We could not say in French — Un grand 
nombre de vaisseaux entrent et sortent de ce port tout les mois — A, 
great number of vessels enter and go out of this port every month, be- 
cause the verb entrer reaches its regimen by means of the preposition 
dans, and sortir by means of the preposition de. We should say : 

Un grand nombre de vaisseaux A large number of vessels enter this 
entrent dans ce port, et en sortent port, and leave it every month, 
tons les mois. 

See § 92, (1.) (2.), also note, and § 140. 



454 



STIS-TAX OF THE PAETICIPLE 



■§ 134. 



§ 134. — The Paeticiple Past. 
(1.) We have seen [§ 66, (3.)J that the participle past, not accom- 
panied by an auxiliary, assumes the gender and number of the noun 
which it qualifies : 

Les inimities gourdes et cachees Quiet and concealed enmity is 
sent plus a craindre que les haines more to be feared than open and de- 
ouveries et declarees. Noel. dared haired. 

(2.) The participle past accompanied by the auxiliary etre, agrees 
in gender and number with the subject of the verb, whether the sub- 
■ject be placed before or after it. [See § 135, (1.)]. 



Le fer est emorisse; les buchers 
sent eieints. Yoltaire. 

La vertu obscure est souvent 
meprisee. Massillon. 

Les Grecs etaient persuades que 
Tame est immortelle. 

Barthelet^it. 

Quand 11 vit I'urne ou etaient 
renfermees les cendres d'Hippias, il 
versa un torrent de larmes. 

Fenelon. 



The sword is Hunted; the piles are 
extinguished. 

Bumble virtue is often despised. 

Tfie Greeks were persuaded that 
the soul is immortal. 

When he perceived the urn in 
which were enclosed the ashes of Hip- 
pias, he sited a torrent of tears. 



(3.) The participle past, having avoir as its auxiliary, never agrees 
with the nominative : 



You laugh f Put down that she 
laughed. 

My friends have spoken; their 
hearts are moved. 

My cousins have read. 



Vous riez ? Ecrivez qu'elle a ri. 

Eacen'e. 
Mes amis ont parte; leurs coeurs 
sent attendris. Voltaieb, 

Mes cousines ont lu. 

Bescherelle. 

(4.) The participle past, having avoir for an auxiliary, agrees with 
its direct regimen, when that regimen precedes the participle : 

The letter which you have written. 

Pedro, vjhat hast thou done with 
our horses? My lord, I have tied 
them to the railing. 

The best addresses are those which 
the heart has dictated. 



La lettre que vous avez ecrite. 

Pedro, qu'as tu fait de nos mon- 
tures ? Seigneur, je les ai attachees 
a la grille. Le Sage. 

Les meilleures harangues sont 
celles que le coeur a dictees. 

Marmontel. 

Je les ai cherches dans tous les 
coins, et je ne les ai pas trouves. 

Mme. De Genlis. 



/ hxive sought them in every corn&Ty 
hut have not found them. 



(5.) But, if the direct regimen is placed after the participle, thia 
participle remains invariable : 

J'ai repw votre lettre. I have received your letter. 

C'est la verite elle-meme qui lui It is truth itself which has dictated 

a dicie ces belles paroles. to him those fine words. 

EOSSUET. 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. — §135. 455 

Les dieux ont attache presque The gods have attached almost as 
autaut de malheurs a la liberte, qu'a many misfdrtunes to liberty, as to ser- 
la servitude. Montesquieu. viiude. 

§ 135. — Remarks on the Foregoing Rules. 

(1.) Although the compound tenses of the reflective or pronominal 
verbs [§ 43, (6.), § 46, (2.), § 56] take etre as an auxiliary, the past 
participle of those verbs does not follow the rule (2.) of the preceding 
section, but comes under the same rules with those conjugated with 
avoir. It agrees with the direct regimen, when that regimen comes 
before it, and is invariable when that regimen succeeds : 

Yotre soeur 5'est achete de belles Your sister has bought (herself) 

robes. handsome dresses, i. e., for herself. - 

Cette femme s'est rendue mal- That woman has rendered herself 

heureuse. unhappy. 

Achete, in the first example, does not vary, because se, placed before 
it, is an indirect regimen or dative, while the direct regimen or accu- 
sative, 7'ohes, is placed after the participle. Rendue, in the second ex- 
ample, varies, because the word se, representing femme, is a direct 
regimen, and precedes the participle. 

We will add a few extracts as examples : 

REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

Used as indirect Objects. Used as direct Objects. 

Us ne se sent propose, pour exem- Elles se sent proposees comme des 

pie, que la constitutioa la plus sim- modeles de douceur, 

pie des anciens. Voltaire. Quoted by Bescher. 

T/iey have proposed to themselves, They have proposed themselves as 

as an example, only the most simple patterns of gentleness, 
constitution of the ancients. 

11 est vrai, qu'elle et moi nous La langue latine et la langu^ 

rwTMS sommes parte des yeux. grecque se sont longtemps^arZeas. 

* MOLIERE. LeMARE. 

It is true, that she and I have The Latin and Greek languages 
spoken to each other with our eyes. were long spoken. 

Neanmoins, il s'etait conserve La vie pastorale qui s'est conser- 
Tautorite priucipale. Bossuet. vee dans I'Asie, n'est pas sans opu- 
lence. Voltaire. 
Nevertheless, he had preserved to The pastoral life which has been 
himself the principal authority. preserved in Asia, is not without opu- 
lence. 

(2.) When pronominal or reflective verbs, of which the second 
pronoun is an indirect regimen, are accompanied by another pronoun, 
or by a noun, used as a direct regimen, the participle agrees with this 
latter pronoun or noun, when it is preceded by it, and remains inva- 
riable, when the regime direct follows. See Rules (4.) (5.) of the 
preceding; section : 



456 SYNTAX OF THE PAKTICIPLE. — § 135. 

Variable. Imaridble. 

L'indiscretion que nous nous Nous nous sommes reproche I'in- 
sommes reprochee. discretion. 

The indiscretion with which we We have reproached ourselves with 
have reproached ourselves. the indiscretion. 

Or to render in English the relations the same as in French : 

The indiscretion which we have re- We have reproached to ourselves 
proached to ourselves. the indiscretion. 

(3.) The participle past conjugated with avoir, and preceded by a 
direct regimen, is sometimes followed by an infinitive. In such 
cases, when the direct regimen is under the government of the in- 
finitive rather than of the participle, the latter of course remains 
unchanged : 

La regie que j'ai commence a ex- The rule which I commenced to ex- 
pliquer. plain. 

(4.) The verb in the infinitive is sometimes understood ; yet the 
participle must follow the same rule, as if it were expressed. The 
participles fait, followed by an infinitive, and laisse, followed by the 
infinitive of an active verb, are always invariable : 

Elle a obtenu toutes les faveurs She obtained all the favors which 
gtt'elle a voulu (obtenir). sh^ wished {to obtain). 

La maison que yaifait batir. "The house which I have had built. 

Ces hommes se sent laisse bat These men have suffered themselves 

to be beaten. 

(5.) In some cases, it may be difl&cult to ascertain whether the 
regime direct is under the government of the participle, or of the 
infinitive. 

If the regime direct is to be represented as performing the action 
expressed by the infinitive, the participle is made to agree with that 
regime in gender and number : 

Je les ai vus secourir leurs enne- I saw them relieving their enemies. 
mis. 

In this example it will be seen that les (the regime direct) is repre- 
sented as actually doing what is expressed by the infinitive, and that 
the infinitive itself is translated by the present participle. 

If, however, the regime direct is to be represented as suffering the 
action expressed by the infinitive, then the participle will remain un- 
changed, and the infinitive will be translated as a passive. Thus : 

Je les ai vu secourir par leurs I saw them relieved by their ene- 

ennemis. mies. 

Further examples : 

Variable. Invariable. 

Je les ai vus repousser les enne- Je les ai vu repousser par lea 

mis. ennemis. 

I saw them repel (repelling) 'the I saw them repelled by the ene- 

memdes. mm. 



SYNTAX OF THE PAETICIPLB. — §135. 457 

Je les ai vus prendre la fuite. Je les ai vu prendre sur le fait. 

I saw them taking flight I saw them taken in the deed. 

Je les ai vus frapper. Je les ai vu frapper. 

I saw them striking. I saw them struck. 

Les personnes que j'ai entendues Les chansons que j'ai entendu 

chanter. chanter. 

I%e persons whom J heard sing- The songs which I heard sung, 
ing. 

(6.) The participles past of neuter verbs, conjugated with avoiTj 
and those of unipersonal verbs, are always invariable : 

Que de bien n'a-t-elle pas fait, How much good has she not done, 

pendant le peu de' jours qu'elle a during the few days thai she reigned I 
regne! Flechiee. 

Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a The excessive heat which we have 

fait, ont cause beaucoup de mala- had, has caused much sickness. 

dies. CONDILLAC. 

(7.) The past participle never agrees with en, because en can have 
no other relation to the participle than that of an indirect regimen.* 
The presence of en does not, of course, prevent the agreement of the 
participle with a direct regimen preceding the verb : 

Avez-vous mange des fruits ? Eave you eaten of the fruits 7 I 
tPen ai mange. have eaten of them. 

Tout le monde m'a oflfert des Every body tendered me services^ 
services, et personne ne m'en a and no person rendered me any. 
rendu. Mme- de Maintenon. 

En, preceded hy the direct Regimen of the Participle. 

Cassius naturellement tier et im- Cassius, naturally proud and im- 
perieux, ne cherchait dans la perte perious, sought in the death of Cesar 
de Cesar que la vengeance de quel- only revenge for some injuries which 
ques injures quHl en avait regues. he had received from him. 

Yertot. 

Rendez graces au ciel qui nous en Render thanks to Heaven which has 
avenges. Corneillb. revenged us for it. 

(8.) Le peu has in French two meanings ; it signifies a srrwU 
quantity, or the want of. 

When it signifies a small quantity, the participle agrees with the 
noun which follows le peu : 

Le peu d'aflfection que vous lui The little affection which you have 
avez temoignee, lui a rendu le cou- ■ shown him, has restored his courage. 



1 Noel and Chapsal, page 165. Several grammarians call en at times a 
regime direct. "We think with Bescherelle (Biciionnaire national, page 
1114), that en does not represent the entire direct regimen, but only a 
part of it, or rather merely refers to it, the direct regimen being itself 
understood. Ex. Avez-vous des livres ? J'en ai. Have you books ? 1 
have some. In the latter sentence, the word quelques uns, the direct object 
is understood after the verb, J^en ai quelques uns, and en is rather a re- 
ference to it, than a substitute for it. The literal translation of the sen- 
tence will show this : / have of them a few. 

20 



458 SYNTAX OP THE ADVERB. — §136,137. 

When h peu is used in the sense of the want of, the participle re- 
mains unaltered. 

Le peu d'affection que vous lui The want of affection which you 
avez temoigne, I'a decourage. have shown him, has discouraged him. 

§ 136. — The Advekb. — Rules. — Place of the Adverb. 

(1.) In French, the adverb used to modify a verb in a simple tense, 
is generally placed after the verb : 

Que de gens prennent hardiment How many people assume holdily 
le masque de la vertu 1 Scm)ERi. the mask of virtue ! 

(3.) Adverbs of place, and those used in interrogation, have the 
same place in French as in English : 

OH est votre frere ? II est ici. Where is your brother f He is here. 

(3.) In compound tenses, the adverb is placed between the auxil- 
iary and the participle : 

Vous avez mal fait. You have done wrong. 

II nous a hien re9us. He received us well. 

(4.) Adverbs of manner ending in ment, may, in compound tenses, 
be placed before the participle or after it, when they are not very 
long, or followed by other modifying words. When, however, they 
are followed by such words, they must be placed after the par- 
ticiple : 

Cela est heureusemeni expnme. ) /m. ^ • t .t 

Cela est exprime heureusemeni. \ ^^^ ^ ^""PP'^V ^Pressed. 

n est venu heureusemeni a temps. He came fortunately in time. 

(5.) The adverbs aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, to-morrow; hier, 
yesterday, may be placed before or after the verb, but never between 
the auxiliary and the participle. The adverb davantage, more, must 
always foUow the participle : 

Nous sommes arrives aujourd^hui. We came to day. 
Yotre frere s'est blesse hier. Tour brother hurt himself yester- 

day. 
Aujourd'hui H fait beau-temps; To-day, it is fine weather-, to- 
demain il pleuvra. morrow it will rain. 

GlE AULT-D U V 1 V iER. 

§ 137. — Observations. 

(1.) The adverbs of comparison, plus, moins, must be repeated be- 
fore every adjective which they modify : 

II est moins paresseux et moins He is less idle and obstinate than 
obstine que son frere. his brother. 



SYNTAX OP THE ADVEEB.— § 138. 459 

(2.) These adverbs, and the adverbs of quantity, need not be re- 
peated before every noun ; but the preposition c?e, which must always 
come between j>ew, trop, beaucoup, tant, jplus, moins, and a noun or 
an adjective used substantively, must be repeated in every case: 

II n'y aurait pas tant de peine et I%ere would not be so much iron- 

de misere dans ce monde ... bk and misery in the world. . . . 

Ce libraire a beaucoup de bons This bookseller has many good and 

et de mauvais ouvrages, dans sou bad works, in his establishment 
magasin. 

(3.) The adverbs mieux, better ; pis, worse, must not be confounded 
with the adjectives meilleur and pire. See note § 14, (7). 

§ 138. — Adverbs of Negation. 

(1.) The negation is composed of ne, placed before the verb, and 
pas or point, after it in the simple tenses. The second negative comes 
between the auxihary and the verb, in the compound tenses : 

Le ciel sur nos souhaits ne regie Heaven does not regulate things ac' 

pas les choses. Corneille. cording to our wishes. 

Rome ^'attache poiiit le grade a Eome does not by any means con- 
la, noblesse. Corneille, fine offices to the nobility. 

L'estime est le vrai principe de Esteem is the true principle of con- 

la consideration, qui w'est pas tou- sideration, which is not always at- 

jours attache aux dignites. tached to office. 
Fontenelle. 

Les rois ne sent point proteges Kings are by no means protected by 

par les lois. Chenier. laws. 

It will be seen in the above examples, that the negative point, is 
stronger than ^as. The meaning of these two words, which are in 
fact substantives used adverbially to strengthen the negative ne, will 
sufficiently explain this : 

N'allez pas, means n'aUez un pas, do not go or move one pace or 
step. N'allez point, means riallez un point, do not go or move a 
point or dot. 

(2.) The second negative may be suppressed after the verbs pou- 
voir^ oser, savoir and cesser : 

Non, deesse ; je ne puis souffrir, No, goddess ; I cannot suffer thai 

qu'un de leurs vaisseaux fasse nau- a single one of their vessels perish. 
frage. Fenelon. 

Dans son appartement elle n'osait She dared not re-enter her apari- 

rentrer. Yoltaire. ment. 

Qui vit hai de tons, ne saurait He who lives hated by all, cannot 

longtemps vivre. Corneille. exist long. 

La liberte ne cesse d'etre aima- Liberty cannot cease to be worthy 

ble. Corneille. of love. 

(3.) Pas or point is suppressed, when the verb is modified by an- 
other negative word, such as jamais, guere, nul, nullement, azicun, 



460 SYNTAX OF THE ADVEEB. — §138. 

personne, ni, etc., or followed by que, meaning only, and plus used 

negatively : 

L'ambition, seigneur, n'a guere de Ambition, my lord, has scarcely 

limites. Boursault. any limits. 

Nul n'est heureux, s'il ne jouit No one is happy, unless he can es- 

de sa propre estime. teem himself. 
J. J. EoussEAr. 

Personne n'aime a recevoir de Ko one likes to receive advice. 
conseils. De Segur. 

Un mechant ne salt iamais par- A wicked man never knows how to 

donner. Noel. forgive. 

(4.) Ne used IdiomaticaUy, [§ 127, (2,) 3.] 

The negative ne, is used witliout any negative sense, after the 
conjunctions, a moins que, unless ; de peur que, de crainte que, for 
fear thai: 

A moins que vous ne lui parliez. Unless you speak to him. 

De peur qu'on ne vous trompe. For fear, or lest you might he de- 

L'Academie. ceived. 

(5.) Ne is used in the same manner after autre, different ; autre- 
ment, otherwise ; plus, moins, mieux, forming a comparison, and after 
the verbs craindre, avoir peur, trembler, apprehender, empecher : 

II est tout autre qu'il n'etait. Me is very different from what he 

was. 

H parle autrement qu'il w'agit. Se speaks and acts very differently. 

II est plus modeste qu'il ne le He is more modest than he appears. 
parait. 

Je Grains presque, je crains, qu'un I am almost afraid that (lest) a 

songe ne m'abuse. Racine. dream is deceiving me. 

Yous avez bien peur que je ne You fear much lest I may change 

change d'avis. Marivaux. my mind. 

La pluie empecha qu'on ne se The rain prevented their taking a 

promenat dans les jardins. walk in the gardens. 
Racine. 

(6.) Remark. — Ne is not used when the verb of the preceding pro- 
position is accompanied by a negative : 

H ne parle pas autrement qu'il He does not speak otherwise them 

agit. he acts. 

II n'est pas plus modeste qu'il le He is not more modest than he ap- 

parait. pears. 

(7,) After craindre, apprehender, avoir peur, tremhler, we put pas 
after the ne when we wish for the accomplishment of the action ex- 
pressed by the second verb : 

Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. I fear that he may not come. 

J'ai peur que mon frere n'arrive / am afraid that my brother may 
pas. not come. 



SYNTAX OP THE PREPOSITION. — 8139. 461 



§ 139. — The Preposition. — Regimen of Prepositions 
AND Prepositional Phrases. 

(1.) Prepositions may be divided, according to their regimen, into 
three classes : 

1st. Prepositions governing nouns v7"ithout the aid of another pre- 
position. They are :^ 



A, 


at or to, 


Hors, 


except, {see hors 
below) 


De, 


of^ from 


Hormis, 


Des, 


from, 


Malgre, 


in spite of 


Apres, 


after 


Moyennant, 


by means of 


Attendu, 


on account of 


Joignant, 


joining 


Avant, 


before 


Nonobstant, 


noiivithsianding 


Avec, 


with 


Outre, 


besides 


Chez, 


with, at the house 


Par, ' 


by 




of 


Pour, 


for 


Concernant, 


touching 


Parmi, 


among, amongst 


Centre, 


against 


Pendant, 


during 


Dans, 


in 


Saus, 


without 


Depuis, 


since 


Sauf, 


safe, save 


Derriere, 


behind 


Selon, 


according to 


Pessus, 


above 


Sous, 


under 


Dessous, 


under 


Suivant, 


according to 


Devers, 


towards 


Sur, 


upon 


Devant, 


before 


Touchant, 


touching 


Durant, 


during 


A travers, 


' through 


En, 


in 


Vers, 


towards 


Entre, 


between 


Yoici, 


here is 


En vers, 


towards 


Vena, 


there is 


Excepte, 


except. 


Yu, 


considering 


2d. Prepositions requu-ing the j 


)reposition de after them :^ 


Aupres, 


near 


A la reserve. 


reserving 


Autour, 


a/round 


A I'exception, 


excepting 


Ensuite, 


after 


A I'exclusion, 


excluding 


Eaute, 


for want 


A regard, 


with regard 


Hors, 


out of 


A I'insu, - 


unknown 


Loin, 


far 


A I'opposite, 


contrary 


Pres, 


near 


A moins, 


unless, for less 


Proche, 


near 


. A raison, 


by reason, at the 


A cause, 


on account 




rate 


A cote, 


by the side 


Au rez. 


on a level 


A convert, 


under cover 


Au deca. 


this way 


A fleur, 


even with 


Au dek, 


that tvay, beyond 


A force, 


by dint 


Au dessous, 


under 


A la faveur. 


by means 


Au dessus, 


above 


A I'abri, 


under shelter 


Au dedans, 


within 


A la mode, 


according to the 


Au dehors. 


without 




fashion 


Au devant, 


before, to meet 



* Governing the accusative. 

' Governing the genitive or ablative. 



462 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. — §140,141. 



through 

at the expense 

in the neighborhood 

in spite 

along 

opposite 



with regard 
as to 



Au milieu, in the middle Au travers, 

Au lieu, instead Aux depens, 

Au moyen, by means Aux environs 

Au niveau, on a level En depit, 

Au peril, at the peril Le long, 

Au prix, at the price Yis-a-vis, 

Au risque, at the risk 

3d. The prepositions foEov?-ed by d are : 

Attenant, joining I Par rapport, 

Jusque, as far as \ Quant, 

(2.) Many of the prepositions which govern the regime direct, are 
formed from active verbs. Almost all the prepositions requiring de 
before the regimen, are formed of a preposition and a noun. Those 
requiring the preposition a, have a relation of tendency, of aim, etc. 

§ 140. — ^Remark. 

The rules which we have given, [§ 92, (1.) (2.) note, and § 133], 
with regard to the regimen or government of verbs and adjectives, 
apply also to prepositions. When two prepositions require the 
same regimen, it is useless to repeat this regimen after each one, 
but, if they require a different regimen, it is necessary to give to 
each its proper object. It would, therefore, be incorrect to say — Un 
magistrat doit toujours juger suivant et conformement aux lois : — A 
magistrate should always judge in accordance with, and conformably 
to, the laws ; because the preposition suivant governs the noun in the 
regime direct, that is without the aid of another preposition, and 
conformement governs the noun in the regime indirect by means of d. 
We should say : 

Tin magistrat doit toujours juger A magistrate should always judge 

suivant les lois, et conformement a in accordance with the laws, and con- 

ce qu'elles prescrivent. formaUy to what they prescribe. 
Marmontel. 

§ 141. — Repetition of Prepositions. 

1. The prepositions d, de, en and sans, must bo repeated before 
every regimen, be it a noun, a pronoun or a verb : 

This world is but a lottery of 
of ranks, of dignities, of 
rights. 



Ce monde ci n'est qu'une loterie 
de biens, de rangs, de dignites, de 
droits. Voltaire. 

L'eloquence est un art tres 
serieux, destine a instruire, a re- 
primer les passions, a corriger les 
moeurs, d soutenir les lois, etc. 

Fexeloil 

Telle est la multitude, et sans 
frein et sans lois. La Harpe. 



Eloquence is a very important art, 
destined to instruct, to repress pas- 
sions, to correct manners, to support 
the laws, etc. 

Such is the multitude, without re* 
straint and without laws. 



SYNTAX OP THE CONJUNCTION. — §142,143.463 

2. The other prepositions must also be repeated before every 
noun, pronoun, or verb, unless the words used as regimens, have 
a similarity of meaning, in which case the prepositions may be 
placed before the first regimen only, or before all, at the option of 

the speaker : 

Je vous donne ceci pour vous et / give you this for you and for 

pour votre fiere. your brother. 

II perd sa jeunesse dans la _mol- He wastes his youth in effeminacy 

lesse et (dans) la volupte. and voluptuousness, 

§ 142. — Observations on several Prepositions. 

(1.) Avant marks a priority of time and place ; — Devant means 
simply opposite J in front of: 

[ I walk before you, i. e., / walk 
Je marche avant yous. •< earlier than you, or / have the prece- 

( dence of you in walking. 
Je marche devant vous. I walk in front of you. 

(2.) JEn, d, dans. — The sense of en is more indefinite, more exten- 
sive than that of dans. En is generally used before the name of a 
division of the earth, a kingdom, etc. ; d before the name of a town, 
and dans before a word restricted by an article or a determinative 
adjective : 

En J^urope, en France, d Paris, In Europe, in France, in Paris, 

dans ma chambre. in my room. 

En Amerique, ce sent les bisons In America, the bisons have a 

qui ont une bosse sur le dos. bunch on their hack. 

BUFFON. 

Dans 1' Amerique meridionale, le In South America, the ox was en- 
boeuf etait absolument inconnu. tirely unknown. 

BUFFON. 

(3.) Chez, might be rendered in EngHsh by at the house of, withy 
among, etc. : 

Chez votre pere ; chez vous. At your father^s ; at your house. 

La condition des comediens etait The condition of comedians was 

infame chez les Romains, et bono- infamous among the Romans, and 

rable chez les Grecs. honorable with the Greeks. 
La Bruy^re. 

§ 143. — The Conjunction.— Government of Conjunc- 
tions. {See § 127.] 
(1.) Conjunctions govern the verbs following them, in the infini- 
tive, the indicative, and the subjunctive modes. 

1. The infinitive must be put after every conjunction which is fol- 
lowed by the preposition de, and after all those which differ from 



464 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. — 8 143. 



prepositions only because they are followed by a verb, instead of a 
noun : 

Etudiez diligemmept afin de sur- Study diligently that you may {in 
passer vos compagnons. order to) surpass your companions. 

We think with M. BeschereUe that the words described in the 
preceding rule, belong more properly to the prepositions than to the 
conjunctions. 

(2.) The following conjunctions always require the subjunctive 
after them in Trench, whatever mode they may take in English. 
Those marked with an asterisk require ne before the verb [§ 138, 
(4.)]: 
Afia que, 
*A moins que, 
Au cas que, 
Avant que, 
Bien que, 
*De crainte que, 
*De peur que, 
En cas que, 
Encore que, 
Jusqu'a ce que. 
Loin que, 
Quoiqu^d peine 

puisse resister, 
J'aime mieux les 

meriter. Eacine. 

En cas que vous persisiiez, il fau- 
dra que j'allegue au prince et au 
roi meme votre mauvaise sante. 
Eenelon. 

(3.) The following conjunctions : De maniere que, de sorte que, 
en sorte que, so that ; teUement que, in such a manner that ; si ce 
n'est que, sinon que, unless that, hut that ; govern the following verb 
in the indicative or conditional modes, when the preceding verb ex- 
presses a positive assertion ; but they govern the subjunctive, when 
the preceding verb expresses a desire or a command : 

n se conduisit tres mal, de sorte He behaved very ill, so that he vfas 
qu'il fut contraint de se retirer. oUiged to withdraw. 

Faites en sorte qu' on soit content Behave in such a manner ihatpeo- 
de vous. pie may te pleased with you. 

(4.) When there are in a sentence two of • more verbs governed 
by a conjunction, que must be placed before the second and the fol- 
lowing verbs, or the conjunction itself may be repeated : 

Fuisqu'on plaide, g^'on meurt, et Since we plead, we die and we he- 

qu'on devient malade, come sicJc, we must have physicians^ 

II faut des medecins, 11 faut des we must have lawyers. 
avocats. La Fontaine. 



in order that 




Malgre que, 


although 


unless 




Nonobstant que. 


notwithstanding 


if 




ISTon que. 


not that 


hefore that 




Non pas que, 


not that 


although 




Pose que, 


supposing that 


for fear 




Pour que. 


that, in order thai 


lest 




Pourvu que. 


provided that 


in case 




Quoique que. 


although, though 


although 




Sans que, 


without that 


till, until that 




Soit que. 


whether 


far from, not that 


Suppose que. 


suppose thai 


a mes maux 


je 


Although I can scarcely bear my 
misfortunes, I would rather suffer 


soufl&ir, que de les 


under them, than deserve them. 



In case you persist, I must men- 
tion your bad health to the prince and 
even to the king. 



COLLOCATION OF WORDS. — §144. 465 

Si vous partez, et que vous vou- Jf you go, and wish to take me 
liez me prendre avec vous. with you. 

Bescherelle. 

(5.) The otbier conjunctions generally govern the same tense in. 
Trench as in English : 

Fais du bien aujourd'hui puisque Do good to-day, since thou yet 

tu vis encore. Villepre. livesi 

Rien n'eblouit les grandes ames, Nothing dazzles great minds, be- 

parce que rien n'est plus haut cause nothing is higher tha/n they. 
qu'elles. Massillon. 

(6.) With regard to the conjunction si, see § 125, (3.) 

§ 144. — Collocation of Words. 
(1.) The place of the different parts of speech has been mentioned 
in the Syntax, under their several heads, and in various other parts 
of the work. A resume of the principal rules of construction may, 
however, not be unacceptable here. 

(2.) The collocation of words, is the order according to which the 
several words which form a sentence should follow one another. 
This order is fixed for the several forms of sentences, affirmative, 
negative, and interrogative, by the genius of the language, and the 
practice of the best writers. 

(3.) The construction of the affirmative sentence is as simple in 
French as it is in English. The following is the arrangement of the 
words : 

1. The Subject. 2. The Verl. 3. The Adverb 

Le marchand est ici. 

The merchant is here. 

(4.) When the subject is accompanied by an adjective, or another 
attribute, the order is as follows : 



1. The Subject. 


2. Its Attribute.^ 


3. The Verb. 


4. The Adverb. 


Le marchand 
The merchant 


anglais 
English 


est 
is 


icl 
here. 


Lefils 
The son 


de votre ami 
of your friend 


est 
is 


ici. 
here. 


Le marteau 
The hammer 


de fer 
of iron 


est 
is 


ici. 
here. 


Le bateau 
The boat 


a vapeur 
steam 


est 
is 


Ik 
there. 



^ Some adjectives [§ 85, (11.)] are generally placed before the noun, 
when used alone with a noun ; but when another adjective comes with 
them, they follow the noun: — un petit homme, a little man; un homme 
petit et gros, a short, stout man ; others have a different meaning before 
the uoun or after it [§ 86.] 



466 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. — § 144. 

(5.) When the attribute is placed in apposition with the subject, 
the construction is the same in the two languages : 

1. The Subject 2. The Verb. 3. The Attribute. 

Jje marchand est anglais. 

The merchant is English. 

(6.) When the verb is in a compound tense, many adverbs are 
placed between the auxiliary and the participle : 
1. The Subject 2. The Auxiliary. 3. Tlie Adverb. 4. The Participle, 
Nous avons sou vent lu. 

We have ofltn read. 

(7.) Long adverbs of manner, ending in ment^ other long adverbs, 
and the adverbs of time and place, aujourcChui^ demain^ hier, ici, Icif 
are not placed between the auxihary and the participle [§ 136, 
Xiesson 41, 5.] : 

Nous avons ecrit aujourd'hui, We have written to-day. 

(8.) When there is a direct regimen in the sentence, it is placed 
after the verb : 
1. Subject 2. Attribute. 3. Verb. 4. Adverb. 5. Regime Direct. 

L'ecolier attentif apprend toujours sa le^on. 

The scholar attentive learns always his lesson. 

(9.) When there are two regimens of equal length, or nearly so, 
the direct precedes the indirect : 

1. Subject 2. Verb. 3. Direct Regimen. 5. Indirect Regimen* 
Jean a donne le livre a men pere. 

John has given the look to my father. 

(10.) Should the direct regimen be followed by a relative pronoun, 
or by attributes rendering it longer than the indirect regimen, the 
latter is placed first : 
1. Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Regimen. 4. Direct Regimen. 

Jean a donne a mon pere le livre qu'il lui avait promis. 

John has given to my father the hook which he had promised him. 
(11.) The pronouns representing the direct regimen, and those 
representing the indirect regimen, preceded by to^ expressed or un- 
derstood in English, are placed before the verb in French : 
1. Subject 2. Direct Reg. 3. Verb. 1. Subject 2. Ind. Reg. 3. Verb. 

Nous les voyons. I Nous leur parlous. 

We them see. \ We to them speak 

(12.) In the imperative used aflarma'tively, those pronouns follow 
the verb : 

1. Verb. 2. Direct Reg. 1. Verb. 2. Ind. Reg. 

Voyez- les. I Parlez- leur. 

See them. Speak to them. 



COLLOCATION OP WORDS. — §144. 467 

(13.) When two personal pronouns are used as regimens in a sen- 
tence, the indirect, if in the first or second person, precedes the 
direct : 



1. Suhject 


2. Ind. Reg. 


3. Direct Reg. 


4. Verh. 


Paul 


nous 


le 


donne. 


Paul 


to us 


it 


gives. 


Paul 


vous 


le 


donne. 


Faul 


to you 


it 


gives. 



(14.) Should however, the indirect regimen be in the third person, 
it is placed after the direct : 

1. Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Ind. Reg, 4. Verb. 
Paul le lui donne. 

Paul it to him gives. 

(15.) In the imperative used aflSrmatively, the direct regimen pre- 
cedes always the indirect : 



1. Subj. 2. Dir. Reg. Z. Ind. Reg. 
Donnez- les- nous. 

Give them to us. 



1. Verh. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Donnez- les- lui. 

Give them to him. 



(16.) The pronoun representing a noun in the oblique cases, gen- 
erally preceded in Enghsh by a preposition other than to, is, in French, 
placed after the verb : 



1. Suhj. 


2. Verb. 


3. Ind. Reg. 


1. Subj. 


2. Verb. 


3. Ind. Reg. 


Je 


parle 


de lui. 


Je 


parle 


avec luL 


/ 


speak 


of him. 


/ 


speak 


with him. 



(17.) To render a sentence negative, ne is placed immediately be* 
fore the verb, and pas, jamais, rien, etc., after it : 

1. Subject. 2. Negative. 3. Verb. 4. Negative. 
Je ne vois pas. 

/ not . see not. 

Je ne lis jamais. 

/ not read never. 

(18.) When the verb is in a compound tense, the first negative is 
placed before the auxiliary, and the second between that auxihary 
and the participle : 

1. Subject. 2. Negat. 3. Reg. 4. Aux. 
V ai 

him have 

leur ai 

to them have 
leur ai 

to them have 

(19.) The pronouns used as direct regimens, and as indirect regi- 
mens, are placed before the imperative used negatively. They are 
subject to tiie rules of precedence, (13.) and (14.) 



Subject. 1 


!. Nega 


Je 


ne 


I 


not 


Je 


ne 


/ 


not 


Je 


ne 


/ 


not 



5. Negat. 


6. Participle. 


pas 
not 


vu 
seen. 


jamais 
never 


parle. 
spoken^ 


rien 


donne. 


nothing 


given. 



468 COLLOCATION" OP WOEDS . — § 144. 

1. Negat. 2. Reg. 3. Reg. 4. Verl. 5. Negat 
[Rule (13,)] Ne nou3 le donaez pas. 

Not to us it give not. 

[Rule (14.)] Ne le lui donnez pas. 

Not it to Mm give not. 

(20.) The construction of an interrogative sentence, which has a 
noun for its subject, differs in the two languages. The following ex- 
amples will show the order of the words in French: 

1. The Suhj. 2. Verh. 3. Duplicate Subj. 4. Regimen. 

Le marchand regoit- 11 son argent. 

The merchant receives he his money. 

Mon frere ecrit- 11 des lettres? 

My brother writes he. letters ? 

(21.) When the sentence commences with ou, where; que, what; 
quel, what, which; combien, how much, how many ; the noun may 
"be placed after the verb : 

Oh. est votre ami ? Where is your friend f 

Que dit votre pere ? What says your father 7 

(22.) The construction of interrogative sentences, in which the 

Bubject of the verb is a pronoun, is very simple. The pronoun is 

placed after the verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in 
compound tenses : 

1. Ind. Regimen. 2. Verh. 3. Subject. 4. Direct Reg. 

Nous envoyez- vous notre argent? 

To us send you our money ? 

1. Ind. Reg. 2. Aux. 3. Subj. 4. Part. 5. Direct Reg. 
Leur avez- vous donne cet argent ? 

To them have you given that money ? 

(23.) The order of the words in a sentence, at once negative and 
interrogative, is as follows : 
1. 1st. Neg. 2. Beg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 5. 2d Neg. 6. Direct Beg. 

Ne nous envoyez- vous pas de 1' argent ? 

Not to us send you not money f 

(24.) In a compound tense : 

1. 1st Neg. 2. Beg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 5. 2d Neg. 6. Part. 1. Dir. Reg. 

Ne nous avez- vous pas envoye de I'argent ? 

Not to us have you not sent money f 

(25.) The first person singular of the present of the indicative of 
most verbs which have in that person only one syllable, and of a few 
others having more than one syllable, cannot admit of the construc- 
tion mentioned in the 22d rule of this Section. To render the sen- 



USE OF CAPITAL L ETT E E S . — § 145. 469 

tence interrogative, est-ce que is prefixed to the aflS.rmative form of 

the verb : 

Est-ce que vous parlez ? 
Is it that you speak ? 
Bo you speak f 

Est-ce que je pretends lui parler? 

Is it that I pretend to speak to Mm ? 

Do I pretend to speak to him ? 

(26.) Every person of a tense susceptible of being conjugated in- 
terrogatively, may be rendered so by prefixing est-ce que to the 
affirmative form : 

Est-ce que vous lisez ? Do you readf 

Est-ce que votre frere est arrive? Is your brother arrived! 

(27.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject of an affirmative 

sentence is sometimes placed after the verb : 

Tout-a-coup au jour vif et bril- Suddenly to the vivid and irilliant 
lant de la zone torride, succede day of the torrid zone, succeeds a 
une nuit universelle et profonde ; a universal and profound night ; to the 
la parure d'un printemps eternel, attire of an eternal spring, the naked- 
la nudite des plus tristes liivers. ness of the saddest winters. 
Raynal. 

(28.) The article, the demonstrative and the possessive adjective 
are repeated before every v^ord which they determine [Lesson 86]. 

(29.) Pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, may be repeated before 
every verb [§ 99, Lesson 87]. 

(30.) Pronouns, used as regimens of verbs, must be repeated be- 

e every verb [§ 105, Lesson 87]. 

(31.) Prepositions are generally repeated before every word which 
they govern [§ 141]. 

§ 145. — Use of Capital Letters. 

The only important difference existing in the two languages, in the 
use of capital letters, is that the French do not use a capital for an 
adjective, unless it be used substantively, and applied to a person or 
persons, or unless it form an integral part of a name : 

Ce monsieur est-il franpais f Is that gentleman French f 

Cast un FranQais 7 He is a Frenchman ? 

Est-il frangais ? Is he French f 

Cette dame est-elle anglaise ? Is that lady English ? 

C'est une Anglaise. She is an English lady t 

Elle est -anglaise. She is English? 

Apprenez-vous le fran9ais ? Bo you learn French ? 

Je n'apprends pas I'anglais. I do not learn English ? 

J'attends le Frangais qui demeuro / am waiting for the Frenchmcm 

ici. who lives here. 

Le departement des Basses- Alpes, The department of the Lower A^^ 

Le royaume des Pays-Bas. 2%e kingdom of the Netherlarhd&. 



470 analogy of english and feench. — §147 

§ 146. — Elision. 
(1.) Elision is the suppression of the final vo-wel of a word, and 
the substitution of an apostrophe ( ' ), before words commencing with 
a vowel or an h mute : 

A is only ehded in la, article or pronoun : — ^L'ame, ihe soul, in- 
stead of la dme ; I'humilite, humility, instead of la humilite — 
je I'admire, je I'honore, / admire her, I honor her, instead of 
je la admire, je la honore. 
E is elided in le, article or pronoun, in je, te, me, se, ce, (meaning, 
it, dem. prn.), de, ne, que, parce que, quoique, puisque, jusqui, 
quelque : — ^I'ami, the friend ; I'homme, the man, 
1 is only elided in si coming before il, he ; ils, they. 
o and u are never elided. 

(2.) Although the words onze and onzieme commence with a 
vowel, the article is not ehded before them ; le onze, le onzieme. 

§ 147. — Analogy between many English and French 
Words. 

(1.) Most words ending in al, ce, de, ge, le, me, ant, ent, ion, are the 
same in both languages : 
AL Mineral, general, animal, principal, fatal. 
CE Eace, prudence, notice, sacrifice, edifice. 
DE Parade, grade, ambuscade, parricide, prelude. 
GE Courage, page, vestige, orange, deluge. 
LE Docile, capable, table, possible, fertile, ridicule. 
NE Doctrine, mine, scene, famine, machine, heroine. 
ANT Dormant, vigilant, constant, instant, arrogant. 
ENT. Present, content, accident, president, resident. 
ION Question, fi-action, legion, pension, religion. 

(2.) Most words ending in ary, ory, gy, ncy, ty, ous, or, ine, iye, 
become French by changing : 
ART into AIRE Necessaire, militaire. 

Memoire, gloire, victoire. 
Energie, geologic, effigie. 
Clemence, decence, excellence. 
Charite, alacrite, divinite. 
Industrieux, curieux, fameux. 
Candeur, ardeur, acteur, 
Masculin, feminin, clandestin. 
IF Actif, passif, massif. 



ORY 


ii 


OIRE 


GY 


u 


GIE 


NCY 


ii 


NCE 


TY 


« 


TE 


OUS 


ti 


EUX 


OR 


11 


EUR 


INE 


u 


IN 


IVE 


« 


IF 



IDIOMATIC PHEASES . — § 148. 



4Vl 



§ 148. — Gallicisms oe Idiomatic Pheases. 

G-allicisms, or idioms peculiar to the language, are very numerous 
in French. We have already in the first part of this -work, presented 
a considerable number of such expressions, and will here give a 
somewhat extended list of those not placed in the examples and ex- 
ercises. In proverbial sayings, we have endeavored to give the equi- 
valent English phrase. We would advise the student to analyze 
carefully the following idiomatic sentences, and particularly those 
which do not admit of a literal or near translation. Idioms and pro- 
verbial phrases give a great insight into the character and customs of 
a nation, and their analysis is often of great assistance in the acqui- 
sition of a language : 



Ce piano n'est pas d'accord. 
Arrangez cette affaire a I'amiable. 
Nous sommes d'accord sur ce point. 
Quel age doimeriez-vous a cat 

homme ? 
Cela fera bien mon affaire. 
Aliens au fait. 

Yous mettez ma patience a bout. 
Ce sent deux tetes dans un bonnet. 
Yous avez toujours ces propos a la 

bouche. 
Entre nous soit dit, ce n'est pas la 

mer a boire. 
Yous ne savez plus de quel bois 

faire fleclie, 
J'avais ce mot sur le bout des 

levres. 
C'est son bras droit. 
II nous a ferme la porte au nez. 
Yous allez toujours droit au but. 
En tout cas, je leur remettrai votre 

lettre. 
Ne voyez-vous pas qu'il rit eous 

cape? 
Nous avons pique des deux. 
Nous en sommes sur ce chapitre. 
Oh ! pour le coup, vous avez raison. 
Get orateur bat la campagnp 

Parlez-moi a coeur ouvert. 
Nous avons couche a la belle etoile. 
Je n'ai que faire de son argent. 
• J'ai fait si bien mon compte, que 

j'ai obtenu cet argent. 
Cela ne me fait rien du tout. 
Faites-raoi grace de tous ces details. 
C'en est fait. 
Comme vous voila fait I 



This piano is out of tune. 

Settle that tusiness amicaMy. 

We agree upon that point. 

How old would you take thai man to 

be? 
That will suit me exactly. 
Let us come to the point. 
You exhaust my patience. 
They are both of the same mind. 
You always use those expressions. 

Between ourselves, the thing is not so 

very difficult. 
You are put to your last shift. You 

are at your wifs end. 
I had that word at my tongue's end. 

He is his right hand. 

He shut the door in our face. 

You come always to the main point. 

At all events, I will give them yow 

letter. 
Do you not see that he laughs in his 

sleeve ? 
We put spurs to our horses. 
We are speaking about this matter. 
Oh ! for this time, you are right. 
That speaker wanders from his sub- 

ject. 
Speak to me without reserve, openly. 
We slept in the open air. 
I do not want his money. 
I managed matters so well, thai Iob» 

iained that money. 
That is nothing at all to me. 
Spare me all those particulars. 
It is all over. All is gone. 
What a condition you are in ! 



472 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. — § 148. 



H m'a prie de vous faire ses amities. 

En attendant, faites-lui mes com- 
pliments. 

Chemin faisant, nous le rencon- 
trames. 

Le plus fort est fait. 

Ce soldat n'a jamais vu le feu. 

11 s'est bien tire d'affaire. 

Nous sommes au fort de I'hiver. 

Qu'allait-il faire dans cette galere ? 

C'est un homme comme il faut, 

Ce drap est hors de prix. 

II se fit jour a travers les ennemis. 

Je vois cela dans un autre jour, 

Dites-moi au juste ce qu'il en est. 

II ne laisse pas de depenser beaucoup. 

C'est une autre paire de manches. 

C'est un tour de son metier. 

Vous I'avez mis au pied du mur. 

Yoila qui va le mieux du monde. 

Revenons a nos moutous. 

Cela est d'un bon natureL 

Ces arbustes grandissent a vue d'oeil. 

Je regarde cela d'un autre ceil. 

II a vendu sa montre pour un mor- 

ceau de pain. 
Yous lui avez donne la monnaie de 

sa piece. 
n a trouve a qui parler. 
Vous etes un homme de parole. 
Je lui ai coupe la parole. 
Vous avez cela sur le coeur. 
II se creuse la cervelle, 
Le jeu n'en vaut pas la chandelle. 
Vous avez pris le change. 
Chansons que tout cela. 
Les bons comptes font les bons amis. 
H met la charrue devant les bceufs. 
Vous batissez des chateaux en Es- 

pagne. 
Je suis au comble de la joie. 
Ce n'est pas a vous de lui reprocher 

sa faute. 
n est tombe de Scylla en Charjbde. 

Cet homme cherche a vous en center. 
Nous sommes en pays de connais- 

sance. 
La sentinelle nous concha en joue. 
Ce malade n'en reviendra pas. 
Nous sommes au courant de tout 

cela. 
Cela fait dresser les cheyeux. 
lis chantent sur une autre note. 
C© vers est frappe au bon coin. 



He wished me to give his love to you. 
In the mean while, present my com- 

pliments to him. 
Going along, we met him. 

The most difficult part is done. 
That soldier has never smelt gun- 
powder. 
Me came off very well. 
We are in the depth of winter 
What business had he there t 
He is a gentleman. 
TJiat cloth is extravagantly dear. 
He forced his way through the enemy, 
I see that in a different light. 
Tell me exactly how the matter stands. 
He spends a great deal, iicveriheless. 
That is quite another thing. 
Tiiat is one of his tricks. 
You left him no excuse. 
That is going on finely. 
Let us resume our subject. 
That bespeaks a good disposition. 
T/wse shrubs groio perceptibly. 
I look upon that in a different light. 
He sold his watch for a mere song. 

You paid him in his own coin. 

He met with his match. 

You are a man of your word. 

I cut him short. 

You cannot digest that. 

He racks his brain. 

The toll is more than the grist. 

You started upon the wrong scent. 

TJiat is all nonsense. 

Short reckonings make long friends. 

He puts the cart before the horse. 

You build castles in the air. 

I am overjoyed. 

It does not become you to reproach 

him with his fault. 
He fell from the frying pan into the 

fire. 
That man is trying to deceive you. 
We are here among acquaintances. 

The sentinel levelled his gun at us. 

That sick man will not recover. 

We are perfectly acquainted with oXi 

that. 
That makes one's hair stand on end. 
They have changed their tone. 
Thai verse lears the right stamp. 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. — 8 148. 



473 



Je lui ai donne le clef des champs. 

II ne sait ou donner de la tete, 

Vous vous donnez toujours raison. 

II a doune dans le piege. 

Cela lui donne de I'humeur. 

Je n'eatre point la dedans. 

II entre dans vos interets. 

Je m'embarrasse fort pen de cela. 

Son amitie est a toute epreuve. 

Vos propos m'echauffent les oreilles. 

Finissez ce badinage, 

Repos3z-vous-en sur moi. 

Cette marchandise n'a point de debit. 

II est toujours sur le qui-vive. 

Cette maison est a vendre au plus 

oflrant et dernier encherisseur. 
De quelle part ce domestique vient- 

il? 
Doublons le pas ; 11 se fait tard. 

J'y vais de ce pas. 

Passe pour ceci. • 

II fout en passer par la. 

Vous m'avez peint avec de beaux 

traits. 
Pour moi, je m'y perds. 
Peu s'en faliut qu'il ne me frappat. 
Dites-moi un peu ce que vous en 

pensez. 
n nous jette de la poudre aux yeux. 
Vous seriez bien embarrasse, si on 

vous prenait au mot. 
Ne vous en prenez pas a moi. 
Le malade n'en pouvait plus. 
Je I'ai envoye promener. 
Le bon bomme que c'est I 
Brisons-la dessus. 
II en fut quitte pour la peur. 
Vous en etes quitte a bon marche. 
Cela n'esfc pas de refus. 
Je I'ai entrevu ce matin. 
Je ne m'en soucie guere. 
II a des afifaires par dessus la tete. 
Qu'a cela ne tienne. 
A la bonne heure. 
Tout fin qu'il est, 11 s'est trompe. 
Ce n'est pas la un trait d'ami. 
Treve de compliments. 
Je vous vois venir, monsieur. 
Voila comme vous etes. 
Tout cela va le mieux du monde. 
Vous n'y etes pas. 
Vous voila bien avance. 



I sent Mm about Ms lusiness. 
He does not know wMch way to turn. 
You pretend to he always in the right. 
He fell into the snare. 
Tliat puts Mm out of temper. 
That is no business of mine. 
He interests himself for you. 
I care very little about that. 
His friendship will stand any test 
Your expressions provoke my anger^ 
Put an end to this trifling. 
Trust to me about this matter. 
Tliis article has no sale. 
He is always on the watch. 
That house is to be sold to the highest 

bidder. 
WJio sent that servant ? 

Let us mend our pace ; it is growing 

late. 
J am going thither this moment. 
Let this pass. 

We must submit to those terms. 
You have given a fine account of me. 

As for me, I cannot see into it. 
He came very near striking me. 
Just tell me what you think of it. 

He casts a mist before our eyes. 

You would be at a great loss, if you 

were taken at your word. 
Ho not blame me about this. 
The patient was quite exhausted. 
J told him to mind his business. 
Wliat a simple man he is ! 
No more of this. 
He escaped, though frightened. 
You came off cheaply. 
That is not to be refused. 
I had a glimpse of him this morning. 
I care but little about it. 
He is over head and ears in business. 
Tfiat shall not make us disagree. 
Well and good. 

Cunning as he is. he made a mistake. 
That is not acting like a friend. 
No more compliments. 
I see what you are about, sir. 
TJiat is the way with you. 
AU goes on as well as possible. 
That is not it. 
You are much the better for it * 



For a very copious collection of Gallicisms, the student is referred to 
the second part of the Author's Manual of French Conveksation. 



READING LESSONS 



[The manner of dividing words into syllables is not the same in French and in 
English. A practical illustration of the French mode will not be unacceptable to the 
student. In the following fables the hyphen is placed to separate the syllablesj 

I.— FABLES. 

1. LE ch£:-ne et le st-co-mo-rk 

Un che-ne e-tait plan-te pres cI'tiii sy-co-mo-re. Le der-nier 
pous-sa des^ feuil-les des le com-men-ce-ment du prin-temps, et m^- 
pri-sa r in-sen-si-bi-li-te du^ pre-mier. Voi-sin, dit^ le che-ne, ne 
comp-te pas trop sur les ca-res-ses de cha-que ze-phyr. in-cons-tant. 
Le froid peut^ re-ve-nir. Pour moi, je ne suis pas pres-se de pous-ser 
des feuil-les ; j'at-tends que la cha-leur soit cons-tan-te. H a-vait 
rai-son ;^ une ge-lee de-trui-sit* les beau-tes nais-san-tes du sy-co- 
mo-re. Eh bien! dit I'au-tre, n'a-vais-je pas rai-son de ne me pas 
pres-ser ? 

Ne comp-tez ni sur les ca-res-ses ni sur les pro-tes-ta-tions ex-ces- 
si-ves'' ,' elles sont or-di-nai-re-ment de cour-te du-ree. Perrin. 

» Lesson 12, Rule 3. ' L. 5, R. 1. s From dire, page 376. * From pou- 
voir^ page 388. ^ L. 8, R. 1. « Erom detruire, page 376. ^ L. 13, R. 5. 

2. LE LOUP D^.-GUI-S]6. 

Un loup, la ter-reur d'un trou-peau, ne sa-vait^ com-ment fai-re 
pour at-tra-per des^ mou-tons ; le ber-ger e-tait con-ti-nuel-le-ment 
sur ses gar-des. L'a-ni-mal vo-ra-ce s'a-vi-sa de se de-gui-ser de la 
peau d'u-ne bre-bis qu'il a-vait en-le-vee^ quel-ques jojirs au-pa-ra- 
\rant. Le stra-ta-gd-me lui* reus-sit pen-dant quel-que temps ; mais 
en-fin le ber-ger de-cou-vrit I'ar-ti-fi-ce, a-ga-ca les chiens con-tre lui ; 
ils lui* ar-ra-che-rent la toi-son de des-sus les e-pau-les, et le^ mi-rent* 
en pie-ces. 

Ne vous fiez pas tou-jours a I'ex-te-rieur. Un hom-me de ju-ge- 
ment et de pe-ne-tra-tion ne ju-ge pas se-lon les ap-pa-ren-ces. 
• Perrin. 

* From savoir, page 392. » L. 12, R. 3. ^ i,. 42, R, Y. 
L. 27, R. 2. » L. 27, R. 1. • Prom me«re, p. 384. 



EEADIN-G LESSONS. ^ 475 

3. L'A-NE ET SOI^ MAi-TRE. 

TJn a-ne trou-^a par ha-sard une peau cle lion,^ et s'en^ re-ve-tit, 
(revttir^ 2. ir.) Ainsi de-gui-se il al-la dans les fb-rets, et re-pan-dit 
par-tout la^ ter-reur et la cons-ter-na-tion. Tous les a-ni-maux fuy- 
aient* de-vant lui. Enfin il ren-con-tra son mai-tre qu'il vou-lut 
e-pou-van-ter aus-si ; mais le bon hom-me a-per-ce-vant quel-que 
cho-se de^ long, aux deux c6-tes de la te-te de ra-ni-mal, lui dit : 
mai-tre bau-det, quoi-que vous so-yez^ ve-tu com-me un lion, vos 
o-reil-les vous tra-his-sent et mon-trent que vous n'e-tes re-el-le-ment 
qu'un a-ne. 

Un sot a tou-jours un en-droit qui le de-cou-vre et le rend ri-di- 
cu-le. L'af-fec-ta-tion est un jus-te su-jet de me-pris. Perrin. 

1 L. 5, R 3. 2 § 39, (1^.) ' L. 8, R. 2. * From/mr, page 380. 
6L. 18. R. 3. «L. t3, R. 4. 

4. L'AI-GLE ET LE HI-BOU. 

L'ai-gle et le hi-bou, a-pres a-voir^ fait long-temps la guer-re con- 
vin-rent d'u-ne paix; les ar-ti-cles pre-li-mi-nai-res a-vaient e-te 
pre-a-la-ble-ment si-gnes par des^ am-bas-sa-deurs : I'ar-ti-cle le plus 
'es-sen-tiel e-tait que le pre-mier ne man-ge-rait pas les pe-tits de 
I'au-tre. — Les con-nais-sez^-vous ? de-man-da le hi-bou. — Non, re- 
pon-dit l'ai-gle. — Tant pis. — Pei-gnez^-les-moi^ ou me les mon-trez ; 
foi d'hon-ne-te ai-gle je n'y^ tou-che-rai ja-mais. Mes pe-tits, re- 
pon-dit I'oi-seau noc-tur-ne, sont mi-gnons, beaux, bien faits ; ils ont 
la voix dou-ce et me-lo-dieu-se ;'' vous les re-con-nai-trez ai-se-ment 
a ces mar-ques. — Tres bien, je ne I'ou-bKe-rai pas. II ar-ri-va un 
jour que l'ai-gle a-per-cut dans le coin d'un ro-cher de® pe-tits mons- 
tres tres laids, re-chi-gnes, avec un air tris-te et lu-gu-bre. Ces en- 
fants, 'dit-il, n'ap-par-tien-nent pas ^ no-tre a-mi; man-geons-les J 
aus-si-tot il se mit a en^ fai-re un bon re-pas. L'ai-gle n'a-vait pas 
tort.i" Le hi-bou lui a-vait fait une faus-se pein-ture de ses pe-tits ; 
ils n'en a-vaient pas le moin-dre trait. 

Les pa-rents de-vraient e-vi-ter avec soin ce fai-ble en-vers leurs 
en-fants, il les rend sou-vent a-veu-gles sur leurs de-fauts. 

Perrin. 

1 L. 21, R. 2. 2 L. 12, R. 3. » Erom connattre, page 370. * From 
peindre, page 386. ^ L. 28, R. 4. « § 39, (18.) ' L. 13, R. 5. 

« L. 8, R. 4. » L. 15, R. 7. i" L. 8, R. 1. 

5. LE PAT-SAN ET LA COU-LEU-YRB. 
Un pay-san, al-lant au bois a-vec un sac pour yi met-tre des noi- 
Bet-tes, c'e-taif'' la sai-son, trou-va u-ne cou-leu-vre. Ah 1 ah I dit 1© 



476 BEADING LESSONS. 

man-ant, je te tiens^ a pre-sent ; tu ne m'e-chap-pe-ras pas ; tu vien- 
dras (yenir, 2. ir.) dans ce sac et tu mour-ras.^ L'a-ni-mal per-vers ; 
je veux dire^ la cou-leu-vre, et non pas Thom-me ; lui dit : qu'ai-je fait 
pour me-ri-ter un pa-reil trai-te-ment ? — Ce que tu as fait ? Tu es le 
sym-bole de I'in-gra-ti-tu-de, le plus o-dieux de tous les vi-ces. — S'il 
fauts que les in-grats meu-rent, re-pli-qua har-di-ment le rep-ti-le, 
vous vous con-dam-nez vous-meme ; de tous les a-ni-maux Thom-me 
est le plus in-grat. — L'hom-me I dit le paj-san, sur-pris de la har- 
dies-se de la cou-leu-vre / je pour-rais^ t'e-cra-ser dans I'ins-tant, mats 
je veuxs m'en rap-por-ter a quel-que ju-ge. — J'y con-sens.' U-ne 
va-che e-tait ^ quel-que dis-tan-ce; on^° I'ap-pel-le, el-le vientji^ on 
lui pro-po-se le cas. — C'e-tait bien la pei-ne de m'ap-pe-ler, dit-el-le ; 
la cho-se est clai-re ; la cou-leu-vre a rai-son . Je nour-ris l'hom-me 
de mon lait ; il en fait du beur-re et du fi'o-ma-ge ; et pour ce bien- 
fait, il man-ge mes en-fants. A pei-ne sont-ils nes^^ qu'ils sont e-gor- 
ges^^ et cou-pes en mil-le mor-ceaux. Ce n'est pas tout : quand je 
suis vieil-le, et que je ne lui don-ne plus de lait, I'in-grat m'as-som-me 
sans pi-tie ; ma peau me-me n'est pas a I'a-bri de son in-gra-ti-tu-de ; 
il la tan-ne et en fait des bot-tes et des sou-liers. De la, je con-clus 
que l'hom-me est le vrai sym-bo le de I'in-gra-ti-tu-de. A-dieu ; j'ai 
dit ce que je pen-se. 

L'hom-me, tout e-ton-ne, dit au rep-ti-le : je ne crois pas ce que 
cet-te ra-do-teu-se a dit ; elle a per-du I'es-prit : rap-por-tons-nous-eu 
a la. de-ci-sion de cet ar-bre. — De tout mon coeur. — L'ar-bre e-tant 
pris pour ju-ge, ce fut bien pis en-co-re. Je mets l'hom-me a I'a-bri^* 
des o-ra-ges, de la cha-leur, et de la pluie. En e-te, il trou-ve 
sous mes bran-ches u-ne om-bre a-gre-a-ble ; je pro-duis des fleurs et 
du fruit ; ce-pen-dant, a-pres mil-le ser-vi-ces, un ma-nant me fait 
tom-ber a coups de ha-che : il cou-pe tou-tes mes bran-ches, en fait 
du feu, et re-serve mon corps, pour e-tre sci-e en plan-ches. L'hom- 
me se voy-ant ain-si con-vain-cu : je suis bien sot, dit-il, d'e-cout-eri* 
u-ne ra-do-teu-se et un ja-seur. Aus-si-tot il fou-la la cou-leu-vre 
aux pieds et I'e-cra-sa. 

Le plus fort a tou-jours rai-son, il op-pri-me le plus fai-ble. La 
for-ce et la pas-sion sont sour-des a la voix de la jus-ti-ce et de la 
ve-ri-te. Perrin. 



1 § 39, (18.) 2 L. 82, R 1. 3 From ienir, page 396. 

* From mourir, page 384 » L. 32, R 5. ^ From /aZZo/r, page 380. 
' From pouvoir, page 388. e Yvovd. vouloir, page 398. » § 39, "(18.) 
1° L. 35, R. 1, 2. 11 From venir, page 396. 12 From naiire.^agQ 384. 
'' L. 42, R 6. 14 L. 69, R L 15 L. 21, R 2. 



BEADING LESSONS 4*77 



6. LE SIN-GE. 



Un vieux sin-ge ma-lin e-tant mort, son om-bre des-cen-dit dang 
la som-bre de-meu-re de Plu-ton, ou el-le de-man-da a re-tour-ner 
par-mi les vi-vants. Plu-ton vou-lait la ren-voy-er dans le corps 
d'un a-ne pe-sant et stu-pi-de, pour lui 6-ter sa sou-ples-se, sa vi-va- 
ci-te, et sa ma-li-ce. Mais el-le fit tant de tours plai-sants et ba-dins, 
que I'in-fle-xi-ble roi des en-fers ne put^ s'em-pe-cher de ri-re, et lui 
lais-sa le clioix d'une con-di-tion. El-le de-man-da a en-trer dans 
le corps d'un per-ro-quet. — Au moins, di-sait-el-le, je con-ser-ve-rai 
par-la quel-que res-sem-blan-ce a-vec les hom-mes que j'ai long-temps 
i-mi-tes. £-tant sin-ge je fai-sais des ges-tes com-me eux ; et e-tant 
per-ro-quet, je par-le-rai a-vec eux dans les plus a-gre-a-bles con- 
ver-sa-tions. 

A pei-ne 1' om-bre du sin-ge fut in-tro-dui-te dans ce nou-veau me- 
tier, qu'u-ne vieil-le fem-me cau-seu-se Ta-che-ta. II fit^ ses de-li-ces ; 
el-le le mit dans une bel-lea ca-ge. II fai-sait bon-ne che-re, et dis- 
cou-rait tou-te la jour-nee a-vec la vieil-le ra-do-teu-se, quine par-lait 
pas plus sen-se-ment que lui. II joi-gnit* a son nou-veau ta-lent 
d'e-tour-dir tout le mon-de, je ne sais^ quoi de son an-cien-ne pro-fes- 
sion. H re-mu-ait sa te-te ri-di-cu-le-ment, il fai-sait cra-quer son 
bee, il a-gi-tait ses ai-les de cent fa-cons, et fai-sait de ses pat-tes plu- 
sieurs tours qui sen-taient en-co-re les gri-ma-ces de Fa-go-tin. La 
vieil-le pre-nait a tou-te heu-re ses lu-net-tes pour I'ad-mi-rer ; el-le 
e-tait bien fa-chee d'etre un pen sour-de, et de per-dre quel-que-fois 
des pa-ro-les de son per-ro-quet, au-quel el-le trou-vait plus d' esprit 
qu'a per-son-ne. Ce per-ro-quet ga-te de-vint ba-vard, im-por-tun, 
et fou. II se tour-men-ta si fort dans sa ca-ge, et but^ tant de vin 
a-vec la vieil-le, qu'il en mou-rut 

Le voi-la re-ve-nu de-vant Plu-ton, qui vou-luf^ cet-te fois le faire 
pas-ser dans le corps d'un pois-son. Mais il fit en-co-re une far-ce 
de-vant le roi des om-bres, et les prin-ces ne re-sis-tent gue-re^ aux 
de-man-des des mau-vais plai-sants qui les flat-tent. Plu-ton ac- 
cor-da done a ce-lui-ci, qu'il i-rait^ dans le corps d'un hom-me ; mais 
com-me le dieu eut hon-te de^° I'en-voj-er dans le corps d'un hom-me 
sa-ge et vert-u-eux, il le des-ti-na au corps d'un ha-ran-gueur en-nuy- 
eux et im-por-tun, qui men-tait, qui se van-tait sans cesse, qui 
fai-sait des ges-tes ri-di-cu-les, qui se mo-quait de tout le mon-de, 
qui in-ter-rom-pait tou-tes les con-ver-sa-tions les plus po-lies et les 
plus so-li-des, pour di-re rien, ou les sot-ti-ses les plus gros-sie-res. 
Mer-cu-re qui le re-con-nut" dans ce nou-vel e-tat, lui dit en riant : — 
Ho I ho I je te re-con-nais ; tu n'es qu'un com-pose du sin-ge et du 



^^^ READING LESSON'S. 

per-ro-quet que j'ai vus " au-tre-fois. Que" t'6-te-rait tes ges-tes et 
tes pa-roles ap-prises par coeur sans ju-ge-ment, ne lais-se-rait rien de 
toi. D'un jo-li sin-ge et d'un bon per-ro-quet on n'en fait qu'un sot 
hom-me. Fenelon. 

^ Fwm pouvoir, page 388 ; see also § 138, (2.) 2 From /aire, p. 380. 

^ L. 13, R. 6. 4 Fromjoindre, page 382. ^ From savoir, page 392. 
From boire, page 368. ^ ^j^q^ vouloir, page 398. s j^^ ^7^ ^ ^ 

9 From aller, page 366. " L. 21, R. 4. " From reconnattre, page 390. 

" L. 42, E, 7, " § 39, (5.) ^ 



n.— APOLOGUES ET ALLEGORIES. 

1. LE BERGER ET LB TROUPEAU. 

Qtjand vous voyez quelquefois un nombreux troupeau, qui, repandu 
sur une colline, vers le declin d'un beau jour, pait^ tranquillement le 
thym et le serpolet, ou qui broute dans une prairie une herbe menue 
et tendre, qui a echappe a la faux du moissonneur ; le berger, soigneux 
et attentif, est debout aupres de ses brebis ; il ne les perd pas de 
vue ; il les suitj^* il les^ conduit, il les change de paturage ; si elles se 
dispersent, il les rassemble ; si un loup avide parait, il lache son chien 
qui le met en fuite ; il les nourrit, il les defend ; I'aurore le trouve 
deja en pleine campagne, d'ou il ne se retire qu'avec le soleil. Quels* 
soins 1 quelle vigilance ! quelle servitude ! QueEe condition vous 
parait la plus deKcieuse et la plus libre, ou du berger, ou des brebis ? 
Le troupeau est-il fait pour le berger, ou le berger pour le troupeau ? 
Image nai've^ des peuples, et du prince qui les gouverne, s'il est bon 
prince. La Brutere. 

1 From paiire, page 386. ^ From suivre, page 394. 3 L. 27, R. 7. 
4 § 30, (10.) ^ L. 13, R. 5. 

2. LES PARYEmJS. 
Ki les troubles, Zenobie, qui agitent votre empire, ni la guerre que 
vous soutenez virilement contre une nation puissante, depuis la mort 
du roi votre epoux, ne diminuent rien de votre magnificence. Yous 
avez prefere sL toute autre contree les rives de I'Euphrate, pour y 
elever un superbe edifice ; I'air y est sain et tempere, la situation en 
est riante, un bois sacre I'ombrage du cote du couchaut ; les dieux de 
Syrie, qui habitent quelquefois la terre, n'y auraient pu choisir une 
plus belle demeure. La campagne autour, est converted d'hommes 
qui taillent et qui coupent, qui vont^ et qui viennent,^ qui roulent ou 
qui charrient le bois du Liban, I'airain et le porphyre; les grues et les 



READING LESSONS 479 

macliines gemissent dans I'air, et font esperer a ceux qui voyagent 

vers I'Arabie, de revoir, a leur retour en leurs foyers, ce palais acheve, 

et dans cette splendeur ou vous desirez le porter, avant de I'habiter, 

vous et les princes vos enfants. N'y^ epargnez rien, grande reine, 

employez-y I'or et tout I'art des plus excellents ouvriers ; que les 

Phidias et les Zeuxis de votre siecle deploient« toute leur science sur 

vos plafonds, et sur vos lambris. Tracez-y de vastes et delicieux 

jardins, dont I'enchantement soit tel, qu'ils ne paraissent pas faits de 

la main des hommes. Epuisez vos tresors et votre Industrie sur cet 

ouvrage incomparable ; et, apres que vous y aurez'' mis, Zenobie, la 

derniere main, quelqu'un de ces patres qui habitent les sables voisins 

de Palmyre, devenu riche par les peages de vos rivieres, acheteras un 

jour a deniers comptants cette royale maison, pour I'embellir et la 

rendre plus digne de lui et de sa fortune. La Bruyere. 

1 § 39, (17.) 2 § 134, (2.) 3 From aller, page 366. * Prom venir, page 396 
6 § 39, (18.) " § 49, (2.) -' L. 61, R. 5. ^ g 49^ (5,) 

3. LE PALAIS DE LA RENOMMi^E. 

Aux extremites du monde, sous le pole, dont^ I'intrepide Cook 
mesura la circonference, a travers les vents et les tempetes ; au 
milieu des terres australes qu'une barriere de glace derobe a la curio- 
site des hommes, s'eleve^ une montagne, qui surpasse en hauteur leS 
sommets les plus eleves des Andes, dans le JSTouveau-Monde, ou du 
Thibet, dans I'antique Asie. 

Sur cette montagne, est bati un palais, ouvrage des puissances in- 
fernales. Ce palais a mille portiques d'airain ; les moindres bruits 
viennent^ frapper les domes de cet edifice, dont le silence n'a jamais 
franchi le seuil. 

Au centre du monument, est une voute tournee en spirale, comme 
une conque, et faite de sorte que tons les sons qui penetrent dans 
le palais, y aboutissent ; mais, par un effet du genie de I'architecte 
des mensonges, la plupart de ces sons se trouvent* faussement repro- 
duits; souvent une legere rumeur s'enfle et gronde en entrant par la 
voie preparee aux eclats du tonnerre ; tandis que les roulements de 
la foudre expirent en passant par les routes sinueuses® destinees aux 
faibles bruits. 

C'est la que, I'oreille placee a I'ouverture de cet immense echo, 
est assis sur un trone retentissant, un demon, la renommee. Cette 
puissante fille de Satan et de I'orgueil, naquit* autrefois pour annoncer 
le mal. Avant le jour ou Lucifer leva I'etendard centre le Tout- 
Puissant, la renommee etait inconnue. Si un monde venait a 
s'animer ou k, s'eteindre ; si TEternel avait tire un univers du neant, 



480 READING LESSONS. 

ou replon^e un de ses ouvrages dans le chaos ; s'il avait jete un soleil 
dans I'espace, cree un nouvel ordre de serapbins, essaye^ la bonte 
d'une lumiere, toutes ces cboses etaient aussitot connues^ dans le ciel, 
par un sentiment intime d'admiration et d'amour, par le chant mys- 
terieux de la celeste Jerusalem. Mais, apres la rebellion des mauvais 
anges, la renommee usurpa la place de cette intention divine. Bientot, 
precipitees aux enfers, ce^° fut elle qui publia dans I'abyme la nais- 
sance de notre globe, et qui porta I'ennemi de Dieu a tenter la chute 
de I'homme. Elle vint sur la terre avec la mort_, et des ce moment 
elle etablit sa demeure sur la montagne, ou elle entend et repete con- 
fusement ce qui se passe sur la terre, aux enfers, et dans les cieux. 

Chateaubriand. . 

I L. 31, R. 8. 2 g 49^ (6.) ^ pro^ ^g^^y^ page 396. 4 L. 36, R 2. 
6 L. 13, R. 5. « From nattre, page 384. ^ § 49, (2.) ^ ^^ 42^ R. 6. 
9 § 66, (3.) 1° L. 81, R. 1. 

4.— L'ACAD^MIE SILENCIEUSE OU LES EMBLlfiMES. 

II y avait^ a Amadan une celebre academic, dont le premier statut 
etait concu en ces termes : Les academiciens penseront heaucoup, 
ecriy^ont peu, et ne^ parleront que le moins possible. On^ Tappelait 
TAcademie silencieitse, et il n' etait point en Perse de vrai savant qui 
n'eut I'ambition d'y etre admis. Le docteur Zeb, auteur d'un petit 
livre excellent, intitule le Bdillon, apprit* au fond de sa province, 
qu'il^ vaquait une place dans I'Academie silencieuse. II part aussitot ; 
il arrive a Amadan, et, se presentant a la porte de la salle ou les 
academiciens sent assembles, il prie I'huissier de remettre au president 
ce billet : Le docteur Zeb demande humblement la place vacante. 
L'huissier s'acquitta sur-le-champ de la commission; mais le docteur 
et son billet arrivaient trop tard, la place etait deja remplie. 

L'academie fut desolee de ce contre-temps ; elle avait recu un peu 
malgre elle un bel^ -esprit dont^ 1' eloquence vive et legere faisait 
I'admiration de la cour, et elle se voyait^ reduite a refuser le docteur 
Zeb, le fleau des bavards, une tete si bien faite, si bien meublee I Le 
president charge d'annoncer au docteur cette nouveUe desagreable ne 
pouvait presque s'y resoudre, et ne savait comment s'y prendre. 
Apres avoir un peu reve, il fit* remplir d'eau une grande coupe, mais 
si bien remplir, qu'une goutte de plus eut fait deborder la hqueur ; 
puis il fit signe qu'on introduisit le candidat. II parutio avec cet air 
simple et modeste qui annonce presque toujours le vrai merite. Le 
president se leva, et, sans proferer une seule parole, il lui montra 
d'un air afflige la coupe emblematique, cette coupe si exactement 
pleine. Le docteur comprit" de reste, qu'il n'y avait plus de place a 



READING LESSONS. 481 

racad^mie ; mais, sans perdre courage, il songeait h faire comprendre 
qu'un academicien surnumeraire n'y derangerait rien. II voit si ses 
pieds une feuille de rose, il la ramasse, il la pose delicatement sur la 
surface de I'eau, et fait si bien, qu'il n'en echappe pas una seule 
goutte. 

A cette reponse ingenieuse, tout le monde battit des mains, on. 
iaissa dormir les regies pour ce jour-la, et le docteur Zeb fut re§u 
par acclamation. On lui presenta sur-le-champ, le registre ou lea 
recipiendaires devaient s'inscrire eux-memes. II s'y inscrivit done, 
et il ne lui restait plus qu'a prononcer selon I'usage une phrase de 
remerciment. Mais, en academicien vraiment silencieux, le docteur 
Zeb remercia sans dire mot. II ecrivit^^ en marge le nombre cent; 
c'etait celui de ses nouveaux confreres ; puis, en mettant un zero 
devant le chiffre, il ecrivit au dessous : lis ri'en vaudront^^ ni moins ni 
plus (0100). Le president repondit au modeste docteur avec autant 
de politesse que de presence d' esprit. II mit le chiflfre un devant le 
nombre cent, et il ecrivit: lis en vaudront dix fois davantage (1100). 

L'abbe Blanchet. 

1 § 61, 2. 3 L. 19, E. 2. 3 g 41^ (4.) 4 From apprendre, page 366. 
* Unipersonal, that there was a place vacant. « L. 13, 6. ^ L. 31, 8. 
« From weV, page 398. » L. 32, R. 3, 4. ^o From ^jarai^re, page 386. 
" From comprendre, page 3 TO. " From ecrire, page 316. " ^lom valoir^ 
page 396. 



m. ANECDOTES. 

1. LE BON MINISTRB. 

Le puissant Aaron-al-Raschid commencait ^ soup^onner que son 
visir Giafar ne meritait pas la confiance qu'il lui avait donnee :* les 
femmes d' Aaron, les habitants de Bagdad, les courtisans, les derviches, 
censuraient le visir avec amertume. Le caiife aimait Griafar ; il ne 
voulut point le condamner sur les clameurs de la ville et de la cour. 
II visita son empire ; il vit partout la terre bien cultivee, la campagne 
riante, les hameaux opulents, les arts utiles en honneur, et la jeunesse 
dans la joie. II visita ses places de guerre et ses ports de mer ; il vit 
de nombreux vaisseaux qui menacaienf^ les cotes de TAfrique et de 
TAsie ; il vit^ des guerriers disciplines et contents. Ces guerriers, les 
matelots, et les peuples des campagnes s'ecriaient : O Dieu ! benissez 
les fideles en prolongeant les jours d' Aaron-al-Raschid et de son visir 

21 



480- * READING LESSONS. 

Giafar ; ils maintiennent dans I'empire la pais, la justice, et Tabon- 
dance ; tu manifestes, grand Dieu, ton amour pour les fideles, en leur 
donnant un calife comme Aaron, et un visir comme Giafar! Le 
calife, louche de ces acclamations, entre dans une mosquee, s'y preci- 
pite k genoux, et s'ecrie : Grand Dieu I je te rends graces : tu m'as 
donne un ministre dont mes courtisans me disent du mal, et dont 
mes peuples me disent du bien. Saint-Lambert, 

I § 134, (4.) 2 § 119. s From voir, page 398. 

2. BONAPARTE ET LA SENTINELLE.* 
ApRfes avoir gagne la bataille d' Arcole, qui avait dure^ trois jours, 
Bonaparte, toujours infatigable, parcourait son camp, sous un vete- 
ment fort simple, qui ne decelait point en lui le general en chef, si 
I'effet d' examiner par lui-meme si les fatigues de trois journees aussi 
penibles que cette bataille, n'avaient rien fait perdre a ses soldats de 
leur discipline et de leur surveillance habituelles.^ Le general trouve^ 
ime sentinelle endormie, lui enle ve doucement son fusil sans I'eveiller, 
et fait faction a sa place. Quelques* moments apres, le soldat se 
reveille ; se voyant ainsi desarme et reconnaissant son general, il 
s'ecrie : Je suis perdu 1 — Rassure-toi, lui dit Bonaparte avec douceur, 
apres tant de fatigues, il pent etre permis a un brave tel que toi de 
succomber au sommeil ; mais une autre fois choisis mieux ton temps. 
i§135, (6.) =^§18,(3.) 3 §118, (5.) . 4^.88. 

3. BIENFAISANCB. 

Le due de Montmorenci, qui fut decapite a Toulouse, aimait a r^- 
pandre des bienfaits. Ce seigneur, voyageant^ en Languedoc, apercut 
dans un champ, quatre laboureurs qui dinaient a I'ombre d'un 
buisson. Approchons-aous de ces bonnes gens, dit-il a ceux qui le 
suivaient, et demandons-leur s'ils se croient heureux. Trois re- 
pondirent que bornant leur felicite a certaines commodites de leur 
condition, que Dieu leur avait donneeSj' ils ne souhaitaient rien 
dans le monde. Le quatrieme avoua franchement qu'une chose 
manquait a son bonheur : c'etait de pouvoir acquerir certain heritage 
^que ses peres possedaient. — Et si tu I'avais,^ cet heritage, dit M. de 
Montmorenci, serais-tu content ? — Autant que je le* puis etre, re- 
pondit le paysan. — Combien vaut^-il ? demanda le due. — Deux mille 
francs, repondit le paysan. — Qu'onMeslui donne, repritleduc, et qu'il 
soit dit que j'ai rendu un homme heureux en ma vie. Le Yassor. 

» § 49; (1.) = L. 42, R. 7. 3 L. 62, R. (6.) * L. 46, R. 4, 5. 

* From valoir, page 896. ® L. 28. 

* The word sentineUe is always femininew 



BEADING LESSONS. * 4$^ 

lY.— MAXIMES ET REFLEXIONS. 

1.* La religion donne a la vertu les plus douces esp^rances, an 
vice impenitent de justes alarmes, et au vrai repentir les plus puis- 
santes consolations ; mais elle tache surtout d'inspirer aux hommes de 
I'amour, de la douceur, et de la pitie pour les hommes. 

Montesquieu. 

2. Aimez et observez la religion, le reste meurt, elle ne meurt ja* 
mais. Fenelgn. 

3. Les vertus nees de la religion, se cachent dans la religion meme. 

Lacretelle. 

4. La religion est encore plus necessaire a ceux qui commandent, 
qu'a ceux qui obeissent. Bossuet. 

5. Prier ensemble, dans quelque langue, dans quelque rite que ce 
soit, c'est la plus touchante fraternite d'esperance et de sympathie 
que les hommes puissent contracter sur cette terre. 

Mine- DE Stael. 

6. La conscience est un juge place dans I'interieur de notre etre. 

Seguk. 

7. La conscience est la voix de I'ame, les passions sont la voix du 
corps. J. J. EoussEAu. 

8. La vertu obscure est souvent meprisee, parce que rien ne la re- 
leve a nos yeux. Massillon. 

9. La vertu est un effort fait sur nous-memes, pour le bien d'au- 
trui, dans I'intention de plaire a Dieu seul. 

Bernardin DE St. Pierre. 

10. II y a une amitie chr^tienne que la philosopliie humaine ne 
comprend guere ; c'est I'association de deux, ames qui mettent en 
commun leur foi et leurs prieres, et s'elevent ensemble vers Dieu. 

Laurentie. 

11. La modestie est au merite, ce que les ombres sont dans un 
tableau ; elle lui donne de la force et du relief. La Bruyere. 

12. La verite n'a jamais besoin de I'erreur, et les ombres n'ajoutent 
rien a la lumiere. Lamartine. 

13. On n'est pas digne d'aimer la verite, quand on peut aimer 
quelque chose plus qu'elle. Massillon. 

14. La flatterie est une fausse monnaie qui n'a de cours que par 
notre vanit(l. La Rochefoucauld. 



^ * This extract and several of the following, furnish excellent illustra- 
tions of the Rules on the use of the article. 



484 READING LESSONS. 

15. On ne triomphe de la calomnie qu'en la dedaignant. 

Mme. DE MaiNTENON. 

16. Ce n'est que pour I'mnocence, que la solitude peut avoir des 
charmes. Leczinsb^a. 

17. Les conseils agreables sont rarement des conseils utiles. 

Massillon. 

18. Ceux qui donnent des conseils sans les accompagner d'exem- 
ples, ressemblent a ces poteaux de la campagne, qui indiquent les 
chemins sans les parcourir. Rivarol. 



Y._POESIE. 

HTMNE DE L'ENFANT A SON R^YEIL. 

O PI;re qu'adore mon pere ! 
Toi qu'on ne nomme qu'a genoux, 
Toi dont le nom terrible et doux, 
Tait courber le front de ma mere ; 

On dit que ce brillant soleil 
N'est qu'un jouet de ta puissance ; 
Que sous tes pieds il se balance 
Comme une lampe de vermeil. 

On dit que c'est toi qui fais naitre 
Les petits oiseaux dans les champs, 
Et qui donnes aux petits enfants, 
Une dme aussi pour te connaitre. 

On dit que c'est toi qui produis 
Les fleurs dont le jardin se pare ; 
Et que sans toi, toujours avare, 
Le verger n'aurait point de fruits. 

Aux dons que ta bonte mesure, 
Tout I'univers est convie ; 
Nul insecte n'est oublie, 
A ce festin de la nature. 

L'agneau broute le serpolet ; 
La chevre s' attache au cytise ; 
La mouche, au bord du vase, puise 
Les blanches gouttes de mon lait. 



EBADING LESSONS 4t6 

L'alouette a la graine amere 
Que laisse envoler le glaneur, 
Le passereau suit le vanneur, 
Et I'enfant s'attache a sa mere. 

Et, pour obtenir chaque don 
Que chaque jour tu fais eclore, 
A midi, le soir, h I'aurore, 
Que faut-il ? — ^prononcer ton nom. 

O Dieu I ma bouche balbutie, 
Ce nom, des anges redoute, 
Un enfant meme est ecoute, 
Dans le choeur qui te glorifie ! 

Ah ! puisqu'il entend de si loin 
Les voeux que notre bouche adresse^ 
Je veux lui demander sans cesse 
Ce dent les autres ont besoin. 

Mon Dieu ! donne I'onde aux fontaines^ 

Donne la plume aux passereaux, 

Et la laine aux petits agneaux, 

Et I'ombre et la rosee aux plaines^ * 

Donne aux malades la sante, 
Au mendiant le pain qu'il pleure, 
A I'orpheKn une demeure, 
Au prisonnier la liberte. 

Donne une famille nombreuse 

Au pere qui craint le Seigneur, 

Donne a^ moi sagesse et bonheur 

Pour que ma mere soit heureuse. Lamartine. 

2. LA FEUILLE. 
De ta tige detachee, 
Pauvre feuille dessechee, 
Ou vas tu ? — Je n'en sais rien : 
L'orage a brise le chene 
Qui seul etait mon soutien. 
De son inconstante haleine 
Le zephyr ou I'aquilon, 

* The d in this line is a poetical license. 



4:B& READING LESSONS. 

> Depuis ce jour me prom^ne, 

De la foret a la plaine, 
De la montagne au vallon ; 
Je vais ou le vent me mene, 
Sans me plaindre ou m'effrayer ; 
Je vais ou va toute chose, 
Ou va la feuille de rose, 
Et la feuille de laurier. Arnault. 

3. LE MONTAGNARD ^MiaR^. 
CoMBiEN j'ai douce souvenance 
Du joli lieu de ma naissance 1 
Ma soeur, qu'ils etaient beaux ces jours 

De France ! 
mon pays, sois mes amours I > 

Toujours. 

Te souvient-il que notre mere, 
Au foyer de notre chaumiere, 
Nous pressait sur son sein joyeux. 

Ma chere ? 
Et nous baisions ses blonds cheveux, 

Tons deux. 

Ma soeur, te souvient-il encore, 
Du chateau que baignait la Dore, 
Et de cette tant vieille tour, 

Du More, 
Ou I'airain sonnait le retour 

Du jour ? 

Te souvient-il du lac tranquille 
Qu'effleurait I'hirondelle agile, 
Du vent qui courbait le roseau 

Mobile, 
Et du soleil couchant, sur I'eau, 

Si beau ? 

Te souvient-il de cette amie, 
Douce compagne de ma vie ? 
Dans les bois en cueillant la fleur 

Jolie, 
Hel^ne appuyait sur mon eoeur 

Son co6ur. 



BEADING LESSONS. 487 

Oh ! qui me rendra mon Helene, 
Et la montagne et le grand chene ? 
Leur souvenir fait tous les jours 

Ma peine. 
Mon pays sera mes amours 

Toujours. Chateaubriand, 

4. STANCES. 
Et j'ai dit dans mon coeur, que faire de la vie? 
Irai-je encor, suivant ceux qui m'ont devance, 
Comme I'agneau qui passe ou sa mere a passe, 
Imiter des mortels I'immortelle folie ? 

L'un cherche sur les mers les tresors de Memnon, 
Et la vague engloutit ses voeux et son navire ; 
Dans le sein de la gloire ou son genie aspire, 
L'autre meurt, enivre par recho d'un vain nom. 

Avec nos passions formant sa vaste trame, 
Celui-la fonde un trone, et monte pour tomber ; 
Dans des pieges plus doux aimant a succomber, 
Celui-ci lit son sort dans les yeux d'une femme. 

Le paresseux s'endort dans les bras de la faim ; 
Le laboureur conduit sa fertile charrue ; 
Le savant pense et lit ; le guerrier frappe et tue ; 
Le mendiant s'assied sur le bord du chemin. 

Ou vont-ils cependant ? — lis vont ou va la femUe 
Que chasse devant lui le souffle des hivers. 
Ainsi vont se fletrir dans leurs travaux divers 
Ces generations que le temps seme et cueille. 

Us luttaient centre lui, mais le temps a vaincu. 
Comme un fleuve engloutit le sable de ses rives, 
Je I'ai vu devorer leurs ombres fugitives, 
lis sont nes, ils sont morts. Seigneur, ont-ils v^cu ? 

Pour moi, je chanterai le maitre que j 'adore, 
Dans le bruit des cites, dans la paix des deserts^ 
Couche sur le rivage, ou flottant sur les mers, 
Au declin du soleil, au lever de I'aurore. 

La terre m'a crie : Qui done est le Seigneur ? 
^ — Celui dont I'ame immense est partout repandue, 
Celui dont un seul pas mesure I'etendue, 
Celui dont le soleil emprunte sa splendeur; 



488 READING LESSONS. • 

Celui qui du n^ant a tire la matiere, 
Celui qui sur le vide a fonde Tunivers, 
Celui qui sans rivage a renferme les mers, 
Celui qui d'un regard a lance la lumiere ; 

Celui qui ne connait ni jour, ni lendemain, 
Celui qui de tout temps de soi-meme s'enfante, 
Qui vit dans I'avenir comme a I'heure presente, 
Et rappelle les temps echappes de sa main. 

C'est lui, c'est le Seigneur I Que ma langue redise 
Les cent noms de sa gloire aux enfants des mortels I 
Comme la harpe d'or pendue a ses autels, 
Je chanterai pour lui, jusqu'^ ce qu'il me brise I 

Lamaehnb, 

5. LAFAYETTE EN AM:&RIQUE. 

Eepublicains, quel cortege s'avance ? 

— Tin vieux guerrier debarque parmi nous. 

— ^Yient-il d'un roi vous jurer I'alliance ? 

— ^H a des rois allume le courroux. 

— Est-il puissant ? — Seul il franchit les ondes. 

— Qu'a-t-il done fait ? — II a brise des fers. 

Gloire immortelle a I'homme des deux mondes I 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez I'univers 1 

Europeen, partout sur ce rivage • 

Qui retentit de joyeuses clameurs, 

Tu vols regner, sans trouble et sans servage, 

La paix, les lois, le travail, et les moeurs. 

Des opprimes ces bords sont le refuge : 

La tyrannic a peuple nos deserts, 

L'homme et ses droits ont ici Dieu pour juge. 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez I'univers ! 

Mais que de sang nous couta ce bien-etre I 

Nous succombions ; Lafayette accourut, 

Montra la France, eut Washington pour maitre, 

Lutta, vainquit, et 1' Anglais disparut. 

Pour son pays, pour la liberte sainte, 

II a depuis grandi dans les revers. • 

Des fers d'Olmutz, nous eflfacons I'empreinte. 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez I'univers I 



BEADING LESSONS. 489 

Ce vieil ami que tant d'ivresse accueille, 
Par un heros, ce heros adopte, 
Benit jadis, ^ sa premiere feuille, 
L'arbre naissant de notre liberte. 
Mais aujourd'hui, que l'arbre et son feuillage 
Bravent en paix la foudre et les hivers, 
II vient s'asseoir sous son fertile ombrage. 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez I'univers 1 . 

Autour de lui, vois nos chefs, vois nos sages, 
Nos vieux soldats se rappelant ses traits ; 
Vois tout un peuple, et ces tribus sauvages, 
A son seul nom sortant de leurs forets. 
L'arbre sacre, sur ce concours immense, 
Forme un abri de rameaux toujours verts. 
Les vents au loin porteront sa semence. 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez I'univers I 

L'Europeen que frappent ces paroles, 

Servit des rois, suivit des conquerants; 

Un peuple esclave encensait ces idoles; 

Tin peuple libre a des honneurs plus grands, 

Helas I dit-il, et son oeil sur les ondes 

Semble chercher des bords lointains et chers I 

Que la vertu rapproche les deux mondes 1 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez I'univers I Berangee, 

6. LA MARSEILLAISE. 

Allons, enfants de la patrie : 

Le jour de gloire est arrive : 

Centre nous de la tyrannie 

L'etendard sanglant est leve. 

Entendez-vous dans les campagnes 

Mugir ces feroces soldats? 

lis viennent j usque dans vos bras 

Egorger vos fils, vos compagnes. 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formez vos bataillons ; 
Marchez ; — qu'un sang impur abreuve vos siUons I 

Chceur. 
Aux armes I citoyens ; formons nos bataillons ; 
Marchons; — qu'un sang impur abreuve nos sillonal 



490 EEADl5fG LESSONS. 

Que veut cette horde d'esclaves, 
De traitres, de rois conjures ? 
Pour qui ces ignobles entraves, 
Ces fers des longtemps prepares ? 
— ^Francais, pour nous, ah ! quel outrage, 
Quels transports il doit exciter ! 
C'est nous qu'on ose menacer 
De rendre a I'antique esclavage I 
Aux armes, etc. 

Quoi ! des cohortes etrangeres 
Feraient la loi dans nos foyers I 
Quoi ! ces phalanges mercenaires 
Terrasseraient nos fiers guerriers f 
Grand Dieu ! par des mains enchatn^es* 
Nos fronts sous le joug se plieraient 1 
De xHs despotes deviendraient 
Les maitres de nos destinees I 
Aux armeSj etc. 

Tremblez, tyrans ! et vous, perfides, 
L'opprobre de tons les partis ; 
Tremblez ! . . . vos projets parricides 
Vont enfin recevoir leur prix. 
Tout est soldat pour vous combattre, 
S'ils tombent, nos jeunes heros, 
La France en produit de nouveaux, 
Centre vous tout prets a se battre. 
Aux armes, etc. 

Francais ! en guerriers magnanimes, 
Portez ou retenez vos coups : 
Epargnez les tristes victimes, 
A regret s'armant centre vous ; — 
Mais ces despotes sanguinaires, 
Mais les complices de BouiHe . : . 
Tous ces tigres qui, sans pitie, 
Dechirent le sein de leur mere . . , 
Aux armes, etc. 

* Literally, by chained-hands, i. e,, by the hands of slaves, of mercenary 
soldiers. The meaning of this word has often been misunderstood. The 
style of the MarseilMse Hymn, is perhaps, in one or two places, not 
etrictly correct 



READING LESSONS. 491 

Amour sacre de la patrie, 
Conduis, soutiens nos bras vengeurs, 
Liberte, liberte cherie 
Combats avec tes defenseurs. 
Sous nos drapeaux, que la victoire 
Accoure a tes males accents ; 
Que nos ennemis expirants, 
Voient ton triomphe et notre gloire ! 

Aux armes, etc. Eouget de L'isle. 



•?. LB RETOUR DANS LA PATRIE. 

Qu'iL va lentement le navire, 
A qui' j'ai confie mon sort ! 
Au rivage ou mon coeur aspire, 
Qu'il est lent a trouver un port I 

France adoree 1 

Douce contree ! 
Mes yeux cent fois ont cru te decouvrir, 

Qu'un vent rapide 

Soudain nous guide 
Aux bords sayes ou je reviens mourir 
Mais enfin le matelot crie ; 
Terre, terre, la-bas, voyez I 
Ah ! tous mes maux sont oublies. 

Salut a ma patrie I 

Oui, voil^ les rives de France ; 
Oui, voila le port vaste et sur, 
Voisin des champs ou mon enfance 
S'ecoula sous un chaume obscur I 

France adoree! 

Douce contree 1 
Aprds vingt ans, enfin je te revois ; 

De mon village 

Je vols la plage, 
Je vols fumer la cime de mes toits. 
Combien mon ame est attendrie ! 
La furent mes premieres amours; 
La ma mere m'attend toujours, 

Salut a ma patrie ! 

» A poetical license ; this should be auquel § 39, (2.) 



492 READING LESSONS. 

Au bruit des transports d'allegresse, 
Enfin le navire entre au port. 
Dans cette barque ou Ton se presse 
Hatons-nous d'atteindre le bord. 

France adoree 1 

Douce contree ! 
Puissent tes fils te revoir ainsi tousi ^ 

Enfin j'arrive, 

Et sur la rive, 
Je rends au ciel, je rends grace ^ genoux, 
Je t'embrasse, 6 terre cherie I 
Dieu ! qu'un exile doit souflfrir I 
Moi, desormais, je puis mourir. 

Salut a ma patrie I Bf rangee. 



VOCABULARY FOR THE READING LESSONS. 





ABBREYIATIONS. 




adj. 


adjective. 


p. 


participle. 


adj. V. 


verbal adjective. 


pi. 


plural. 


adv. 


adverb. 


pre. 


preposition. 


art. 


article. 


prn. 


pronoun. 


conj. 


conjunction. 


V. a. 


active verb. 


f. 


feminine gender. 


V. a. & n. 


active and neuter verb. 


ind. p. 


present of indicative. " 


V. a.uT, 


auxiliary verb. 


int. 


interjection. 


V. unip. 


unipersonal verb. , 


m. 


masculine gender. 


V. ir. or ir. 


irregular verb. 


n. 


noun. 


V. n. 


neuter verb. 


p.d. 


past definite. 


V. r. 


reflective verb. 




The numbers after the verbs indicate the conjugation. 



A-AD. 

A, a {with a grave accent), pre. at or 
to. 

Abondance, n. f. abundance, plenty. 

Aboutir, v. n. 2. to end in, to come 
to. 

Abreuver, v. a. 1. to water, to fill 

Abyme or abime, n. m. abyss, depth. 

Abri, n. m. shelter. 

Academicien, n. m. Academician. 

Academie, n. f. academy. 

Accent, n. m. accent, pi. voice. 

Acclamation, n. f. acclamation. 

Accompagner, v. a. 1. to accompany. 

Accorder, v. a. 1. to grant (s') v. r. 
to agree. 

Accourir, v. n. ir. 2. to run, to has- 
ten to. 

Accueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to welcome. 

Acheter, v. a. 1. to buy. 

Achever, y. a. 1. to achieve, com- 
plete. 

Acquerir, v. a. ir. 2. to acquire. 

Acquitter (s'), v. r. 1. to acquit one's 
self of, to discharge. 

Adieu, int. & n. m. adieu, farewell, 
leave. 

Admettre, v. a. ir. 4. to admit. 

Admiration, n. f. admiration. 

Admirer, v. a. 1. to admire. 

Adopter, v. a. 1. to adopt. 

Adorer, v. a. 1. to adors. 



AD-AM. 

Adresser, v. a. 1. to address; (s'), ref. 

to apply. 
Affectation, n. f. affectation. 
AfQige, p. & adj. v. grieved, of' 

flicted. 
Afrique, Africa. 

Agacer, v. a. 1. to entice, to tease. 
Agile, adj. nimble, light. 
Agiter, v. a, to agitate, to shake. 
Agneau, n. m. lamb. 
Ah 1 int. Ah. 
Aigle, n. m. eagle. 
Aile, n. f. wing. 
Aimer, v. a. 1. to love, to like. 
Ainsi, adv. tJms, so. 
Air, n. m. air. 
Airain, n. m. brass. 
Aisement, adv. easily. 
Ajouter, v. a. 1.4o add. 
Alarm, n. f. alarm. 
Allegoric, n. f. allegory. 
Allegresse, n. tjoy. 
Aller, V. n. ir. 1. (ind. p., je vais,) 

to go. 
Alliance, n, £ alliance. 
AUumer, v. a. 1. to light, kindle. 
Alouette, n. f. lark. 
Ambassadeur, n. m. ambassador. 
Ambition, n. f. ambition. 
Ame, n. f. soul. 
Amer, e, adj. bitter. 



494 



AM-AT. 



AT-BE. 



Amerique, America. 
Amitie, n. f. friendsMp. 
Amertume, n. f, bitterness, sorrow. 
Ami, e, n. m. & f. friend. 
Amour, n. m. love. 
Ane, n. m. ass^ dorikey. 
An, n. m. annee, f. year. 
Ancien, m. adj. ancient, old. 
Ange, n. m. angel. 
Anglais, e, adj. English. 
Animal, (pi. aux.) n. m. animal. 
Aniraer, v. a. 1. to animate, to excite. 
Annoncer, v. a. 1. to announce. 
Antique, adj. ancient, antique. 
A peine, adv. scarcely, hardly. 
Apercevoir, v. a. 3. to perceive. 
Apologue, n. m. apologue. 
Appareace, n. f. appearance. 
Appartenir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ap- 

partiens), to belong. 
Appeler, v. a. 1. to call. 
Apprendre, v. a. 4. (p. appris), to 

learn. 
Approcher, v. a. 1. to bring near, (s'), 

V. r. to approach. 
Appuyer, v. a. 1. to lean. 
Apres, pre. after. 
Aquiloa, n. m. north wind. 
Arabie, Arabia. 
Arbre, n. m. tree. 
Architecte, n. m. architect. 
Armer, v. a. 1. to arm (s'), v. r. to arm 

one's self 
Arracher, v. a. 1. to tear. 
Arriver, v. n. 1. to arrive. 
Art, n. m. art. 
Article, n. m. article. 
Artifice, n. m. artifice, cunning, 

trick. 
Asie, Asia. 

Aspirer, v. n. 1. to aspire. 
Assembler, v. a. 1. to assemble. 
Asseoir (s'), v. r. ir. 3. (ind. p, je 

m'assieds, p. assis), to sit down. 
Association, n. f. association, com- 
pany. 
Assommer, v. a. 1. to strike down, 

to kill. 
Attacher, v. a. 1. to attach. 
Attache, adj. attached. 
Atteindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'at- 

teignis), to reach, to hit. 
Attendre, 4, to await, to expect. 
Attendri, e, a. v. p. moved, grieved. 
Atteati^ ve, adj. attentive. 



Attraper, v. a. 1. to catch. 

Au, art. at or to the. 

Aujourd'hui, adv. to-day. 

Auparavant, adv. before. 

Aupres, pre. & adv. near. 

Auquel, prn. to which. 

Aurore, n. £ dawn, aurora. 

Aussi, conj. & adv. as, so, also. 

Aussitot, adv. immediately. 

Austral, e, adj. austral. 

Autant, adv. as much, as many, 

Autel, n. m. altar. 

Auteur, n. m, author. 

Autour, pre. & adv. round, around. 

Autre, adj. other. 

Autrefois, adv. formerly. 

Autrui, prn. other, others. 

Aux, art. at or to the. 

Avancer (s'), v. r. 1. io advance^ 

approach. 
Avant, pre. before. 
Avare, n, & adj. miser, avaricious. 
Avec, pre. with. 
Avenir, n. m. future. 
Aveugle, adj. blind. 
Avide, adj. anxious, eager. 
Aviser (s'), v. r. 1. to think, to take 

into one's head. 
Avoir, V. aux. & a. ir. (p. d. j'eus), 

to have. 
Avouer, v. a. 1. to confess. 



B. 



Badin, e, adj. playful. 

Baigner, v. a. 1. to bathe. 

Baillon, s. m. gag. 

Baiser, v. a, 1. to kiss. 

Balancer, v. n. 1. io haXance, hesU 
tote. 

Balbutier, v. a, & n. 1. to stammer. 

Barque, n. f. bark, boat. 

Barriere, n. f. gate. 

Bataille, n. £ battle. 

Bataillon, n. m. battalion. 

Batir, v. a. 2. to build. 

Battre, v. a. ir. 4, (p. battu,) to beat. 

Baudet, n. m. donkey. 

Bavard, e, n. & adj. talkative, prat- 
tler. 

Beau, bel, £ belle, adj. fine, hand- 
some. 

Beaucoup, adv. mvxJi, many. 

Beaute, n. £ beauty. 



BE-CE. 



CB-CO. 



4^5 



Bee, n. m. heaJc. 

Bel-esprit, n. m. wU. 

Beuir, v. a. 2. to bless. 

Berger, n. m. shepJierd. 

Besoin, n. m. need, want. 

Beurre, n. m. butter. 

Bien, n. m, property, adv. well. 

Bien-etre, n. m. welfare, comfort. 

Bienfaisance, n. f. beneficence, be- 
nevolence. 

Bienfait, n. m. benefit. 

Bientot, adv. soon. 

Billet, n. m. note. 

Blanc, blanche, adj. white. 

Boire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je bus, p. 
bu) to drink. 

Bois, n. m. wood, forest. 

Bon, ne, adj. good, kind, simple 

Bonheur, n. m. happiness. 

Bonne-chere, n. f. good living. 

Bonte, n. f. goodness, kindness. 

Bord, n. m. border, shore. 

Bomer, v. a, 1. to confine, to bound. 

Botte, n. f. boot, bundle. 

Bouche, n, f. mouth. 

Bouillir, v. n. ir. 2. to boil, to bubble. 

B ranch e, n. f. branch. 

Bras, D. m. arm. 

Brave, adj. brave, worthy. 

Braver, v. a. 1. to brave, affront. 

Brebis, n. f. sheep. 

Brillant, e. adj. shining, brilliant. 

Briser, v. a. 1. to break. 

Brouter, v. a. & n. 1. to browse, to 
graze. 

Bruit, n. m. noise. 

Buisson, n. m. bush. 



C, pm. it. 

Cacher, v. a. 1. to hide, coru^eal ; (se), 

V. r. to hide one''s self. 
Cage, n. f. cage. 
Calife, n. m. calif. 
Calomnie, n. f. calumny. 
Camp, n. m. camp 
Campagne, n. f. country, campaign. 
Candidat, n. m. candidate. 
CareBse, n. f. caress. 
Cas, n. m. case. 

Causeur, se, adj. talker, tdUcaiive. 
Ce, prn. & adj. this, that. 
Celebre, ad], cekbraied. 



Celeste, adj. celestial. 

Celui, prn. this, that. 

Censurer, v. a. 1. to censure. 

Cent, adj. num. hundred. 

Centre, n. m. centre. 

Cependant, conj. however. 

Certain, adj. certain. 

Ces, adj. these, those. 

Cesse (sans), without ceasing, 

Cette, adj. this, that. 

Ceux, prn. these, those. 

Clialeur, n. f. heat. 

Champ, n. m. field. 

Changer, v. a. & n. 1. to change. 

Chant, n. m. song, singing. 

Chanter, v. a. & n. 1. to sing. 

Chaos, n. m. chaos. 

Chaque, adj. each. 

Charger, v. a. 1. to charge, load. 

Char me, n. m. charm.^ 

Charrier, v. a. 1. to transport, carry. 

Chasser, v. a. & n. 1. to hunt, to chase^ 

to drive away. 
Chateau, n. m. castle, villa. 
Chaume, n. m. thatch. 
Chaumiere, n. f. cottage. 
Chef, n. m. chief. 
Chemin, n. m. way, road. 
Chene, n. m. oak. 
Cher, e, adj. dear. 
Chercher, v. a. 1. to seek. 
Chere, f. fare ; faire bonne-chdre, fo 

live ivell. 
Cheri, adj. cherished, beloved. 
Cheveux, n. m. pL hair. 
Chevre, n. f. goat. 
Chien, n. m. dog. 
Chiffre, n. m. figure. 
Choeur, n. m. choir, chorus. 
Choisu', V. a. 2. to choose. 
Choix, n. m. choice. 
Chose, n. f. thing. 
Chretien, n. & adj. Christian. 
Chute, n. f. fall. 
Ciel, n. m. (pi. cieux,) heaven. 
Cime, n. f. peak, top. 
Circonference, n. f. circumference. 
Cite, n. f. city. 
Citoyen, n. m. citizen. 
Clair, e, adj. clear, n. m. lighi. 
Clameur, n. f. cry, clamor. 
Coeur, n. m. heart. 
Cohorte, n. f. cohort. 
Coin, n. m. corner. 
Colline, u. £ hiU, 



496 



CO-CO. 



CO-DE. 



Combattre, v. a. & n. 4. to combat, 
to fight 

Commander, v. a, 1, to command, to 
order. 

Combien, adv. hoio much, how many. 

Comme, adv. & conj. as, like, when. 

Commencement, n. m. beginning. 

Commencer, v. a. 1. to begin. 

Comment, adv. how. 

Commission, n. f. commission. 

Commodite, n. f, convenience. 

CommXin, e, adj. common, usual. 

Compagne, n. f. companion. 

Complice, n. m. accomplice. 

Composer, v. a. 1. to compose. 

Comprendre, v. a. ir. 4. to under- 
stand, to comprise. 

Comptant, adj. & adv. ready, for cash. 

Compter, v. a. 1. to count, to intend. 

Concevoir, v. a. 3. to conceive. 

Conclure, r. a. ir. 1. to conclude. 

Concours, n. m. concourse, assembly. 

Condamner, v. a. 1. to condemn. 

Condition, n. £ condition. 

Conduire, v. a. ir. 4. to conduct. 

Conflance, n. £ confidence, depen- 
dence. 

Confier, v. a. 1. to trust, to confide. 

Confrere, n. m. brother, fellow. 

Confusement, adv. confusedly. 

Conjure, a. v. sworn together. 

Connaitre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je con- 
nus, p. connu), to know, to be ac- 
quainted with. 

Conque, n. f shell. 

Conquerant, n. m. conqueror. 

Conscience, n. f. conscience. 

Conseil, n. m. advice, counsel. 

Consentir, v. n. 2. to consent, agree. 

Conserver, v. a. L to preserve. 

Consolation, n. f. consolation. 

Constant, e, adj. constant. 

Consternation, n. f. consternation. 

Content, e, adj. pleased, content. 

Continuellement, adv. continually 

Contracter, v. a. 1. to contract. 

Contre, pre. against. 

Contree, n. f. country, district. 

Contre-temps, n. m. disappointment. 

Convaincre, v. a. ir. 4, to convince. 

Convenir, v. n. 2. to agree, to suit, 
to confess. 

Conversation, n. f. conversation. 

Convier, v. a. 1. to invite. 

Corps, Eu m. iody, corps. 



Cortege, n. m. retinue. 

Cote, n. f. coast. 

Cote, n. m. side. 

Gouchant, n. m. West. 

Coucher, (se), v. ref. 1. to lie down. 

Couleuvre, n. f. snake, adder. 

Coup, n. m. blow. 

Coupe, n. f. cup, vessel. 

Couper, V. a. 1. to cut. 

Gout, n. f. court. 

Courage, n. m. courage. 

Courber, v. a. 1. to bend, to bow. 

Courroux, n. m. anger. 

Court, e, adj. short. 

Cours, n. m. course. 

Courtisan, n. m. courtier. 

Couter, V. n. 1. to cost. 

Couvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to cover. 

Craindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je craignis, 

p. craint), to fear. 
Craquer, v. a. & n. 1. to crack, to snap. 
Creer, v. a. 1. to create. 
Crier, n. a. 1. to cry. 
Croire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je cms, p. 

cru), to believe. 
Croquer, v. a. 1. to eat greedily. 
CueiUir, v. a. ir. 2. to gather, to 

pick. 
Cultiver, v. a. 1. io cultivate. 
Curiosite, n. f. curiosity. 
Cytise, n. m. cytisus. 



D. 

Dans, pre. in, into. 
Davantage, adv. more. 
De, pre. of or from. 
Debarquer, v. a. &n. 1. to land. 
Deborder, v. n. 1. to run over. 
Debout, adv. standing. 
Decapiter, v. a. 1. to behead. 
Deceler, v. a. 1. to discover. _ 
Decbirer, v. a. 1. to tear. 
Decision, n. f. decision 
Declin, n. m. decline, fall. 
Decouvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to discover, vftb- 

cover. 
Dedaigner, v. a. 1. to disdain. 
Defaut, n. m. defect. 
Defendre, v. a. 4. to defend, to forbid. 
Defenseur, n. m. defender, protector. 
Deguiser, v. a. 1. to disguise. 
Deji, adv. already. 
Delioat, e, adj. delicate. 



DE-DI. 



DI-EM. 



497 



Delicatement, adv. delicately. 

Delice, n. m. delight. 

Belices, n. f. pi. delight. 

Delicieux, se, adj. delightful, deli- 
cious. 

Demande, n. f. request, question. 

Demander, v. a. 1. to ask, to request 

Demeure, n. f. abode, dwelling. 

Demon, n. m. demon. 

Dealers, n. m. p. money, means. 

Deployer, v. a. ]. to display. 

Depuis, pre. since. 

Deranger, v. a. 1. to disturb, to put 
out of order. 

Dernier, e, adj. last, latter. 

Derober, v. a. 1. to steal, to conceal. 

Derviche, n. m. dervise. 

Des, pre. from. 

Desagreable, adj. disagreeable. 

Desartne, adj. v. disarmed. 

Descendre, v. n. 4. to descend, to 
come down. 

Desert, n. m. desert. 

Desirer, v. a. 1. to wish, to desire. 

Desoler, v. a. 1. to distress, to grieve, 
to desolate. 

Desormais, adv. henceforth. 

Dessecher, v. a. 1. to dry up, to 
drain. 

Dessous, adv. under. 

Dessus, adv. above. 

Destinee, n. f. fate. 

Destiner, v. a. 1. to destine. 

Detacher, v. a. 1. to detach, to sepa- 
rate. 

Detruire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je de- 
truisis), to destroy. 

Deux, adj. two. 

Devancer, v. a. 1. to outstrip, to come 
before. 

Devant, pre. before, opposite. 

Devenir, v. n. 2. to become. 

Devoir, v. a. 3. to owe. 

Devorer, v. a. 1. to devour. 

Dieu, n. m. God. 

Digne, adj. worthy. 

Diminuer, v. a. 1. to diminish. 

Diner, n. m. dinner. 

Diner, v. n. to dine. 

Dire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. dit.) to say, tell. 

Discourir, v. n. ir. 2. to discourse. 

Discipline, n. f. discipline. 

Disparaitre, v. n. ir. 4. to 

Disperser, v. a. 1. to disperse. 

Distance, n. £ distance. 



Divers, adj. diverse, different. 

Divin, e, adj. divine. 

Dix, adj. ten. 

Docteur, n. m. doctor. 

Dome, n. m. dome. 

Don, n. m. gift. 

Done, conj. therefore, then. 

Donner, v. a. 1. to give. 

Dont, prn. of which, of whom. 

Dorer, v. a. 1. to gild. 

Dormir, v. n. ir. 2. to sleep. 

DoQceraent, adv. softly, sweetly. 

Douceur, n. f. softness, sweetness. 

Doux, ce, adj. soft, sweet. 

Drapeaux, n. m. p. colors, standards. 

Droit, n. m. right. 

Droit, adj. & adv. straight. 

Du, art. of or from the. 

Due, n. m. duke. 

Duree, n. f. duration. 

Durer, v. n. 1. to last, to endure. 



E. 



Eau, n. f. water. 
Ecliapper, v. n. 1. to escape. 
;ficlio, n. m. echo. 
Eclairer, v. a. 1. to light. 
£c]at, n. m. brightness, splendor. 
Eclore, v. n. ir. 4. to hatch. 
;d]couler (s'), v. r. 1. to elapse, to 



Ecouter, v. a. 1. fo listen, to hea/r. 

]|craser, v. a. 1. to crush. 

Eerier (s'), v. r. 1. to exclaim. 

Ecrire, v. a. ir. 4. to write. 

Edifice, n. m. edifice. 

Effacer, v. a. 1. to efface. 

Effet, n. m. effect. 

Effleurer, v. a. 1. to graze, to touch 

slightly. 
Effort, n. m. effort, endeavor. 
Effrajer, v. a. 1. to frighten, (s') ref. 

to be frightened. 
]&gorger, v. a. 1. to slaughter, to mur* 

der, to cut the throat. 
Eh bien 1 int. well ! 
Clever, v. a. 1. to raise. 
Elle, prn. she, it, her. 
J^Ioquence, n. f. eloquence. 
Embelhr, v. a. 2. to embellish. 
Emblematique, adj. emblematical. 
Embleme, n. m. emblem. 
Embrasser, v. a. 1. to embrace, to kiss. 



498 



EM— ET. 



ET— PE. 



fimigre, n. & adj. emigrant 

Empecher, v. a. 1. to prevent 

Empire, n. m. empire. 

Employer, v. a. 1. to employ, to 
use. 

Empreinte, n. t mark, print. 

Emprunter, v. a. 1. to borrow. 

En, pre. in, into, at, to. 

En, rel. prn. of it, of them, etc. 

Encenser, v. a. 1. to flatter, to worship. 

Enchainer, v. a. 1. to chain. 

EnchaDtement, n. m. enchantment, 
charm. 

Encore, adv. yet, still, again. 

Endormir, v. a. ir. 2. to put or lull to 
sleep, (s') ref. to go to sleep. 

Endroit, n. m. spot, place. 

Enfant, n. m. child. 

Enfanter, v. a. 1. to produce. 

Enfer, n. m. hell. 

Enfers, n. m. pi, infernal regions. 

Enfin, adv. at last, finally. 

Enfler, (s') v. r. 1. to swell, to increase. 

Engloutir, v. a. 2. to swallow up. 

Enivrer, v. a. 1. to intoxicate. 

Enlever, v. a. 1. to take or carry 
away. 

Ennemi, n. m. & adj. enemy, in- 
imical. 

Ennuyeux, se, adj. tiresome, weari- 
some. 

Ensemble, adv. together. 

Entendre, v. a. 4. to hear, to under- 
stand. 

Entraves, n. f. pL bonds, obstacles, 



Entrer, v. n. 1. to enter, to go in. 
En vers, pre. towards, to. 
Envoler, (s'), v. r. 1. to fly away. 
]&pargner, v. a. 1. to spare. 
£paule, n. f. shoulder. 
iSpouvanter, v. a. 1. to frighten. 
Epoux, se, n. m. & f! husband, wife. 
;^puiser, v. a. 1. to exhaust 
Erreur, n. £ error. 
Esclave, n, m. slave. 
Espace, n. m. space. 
Esperance, n. f. hope. 
Esperer, v. a. 1, to hope. 
Esprit, n. m. wit, mind. 
Essayer, v. a. 1. to try, attempt 
Et, conj. and. 
]^tablir, v. a. 2. to establish. 
;^tat, n. m. state, condition, trade. 
£te, n. m. summer. 



l^teindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'eteignis), 

to extinguish, put out 
fltendard, n. m. standard. ^ 

£tendue, n. f, extent 
Eternel, le, adj. & n. eternal. 
fitonner, v. a. 1. to astonish. 
iStourdir, v. a. 2. to stun, to disturb. 
£tre, V. aux. & n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je 

suis, p. d. je fus), to be. 
£tre, n. m. being. 
Euphrate, Euphrates. 
Europeen, ne, n. & adj. European. 
Eux, prn. m. pi. them. 
Eveiller, v. a. 1. to awake. 
^viter, V. a. 1. to avoid. 
Exactement, adv. exactly. 
Examiner, v. a. 1. to examine. 
Excellent, e, adj. excellent 
Excessif, ve, adj. excessive. 
Exciter, v. a. 1. to excite. 
Exemple, n. m. example. 
Exile, n. m. & adj. exile, exiled. 
Expirant, adj. v. expiring, dying, 
Expirer, v. n. 1. to expire. 
Exterieur, n. m. outside, exterior. 
Exterieur, e, adj. exterior. 
Extremite, n. £ extremity. 



¥. 



Fache, e, adj. v. angry, sorry. 
Facon, n. £ fashion, way. 
Faction, n. i faction, watch. 
Fagotin, m. a name often given in 

France to monkeys. 
Faible, adj. weak, feeble. 
Faim, n. £ hunger. 
Faire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je fis), to 

make, to do, to cause. 
Falloir, v. unip. ir. 3. (ind. p. il &ut), 

to be necessary. 
Famille, n. £ family. 
Farce, n. £ farce, trick.. 
Farouclie, adj. wild, stern. 
Fatigue, n. £ fatigue, weariness. 
Faussement, adv. falsely. 
Faux, n. £ scythe. 
Faux, se, adj. false. 
Felicite, n. £ happiness, felicity. 
Femme, n. £ woman, wife. 
Fers, n. m. pi. chains, irons. 
Fertile, adj. fruitful, fertile. 
Feu, n. la. fire. 
Feuillage, n. m. foliage. 



PE-GE. 



GE-HO. 



499 



Feuille, n. f. leaf. 

Festin, n. m, sumptuous meal, repast. 

iFidele, n. ra. & adj. faithful. 

Fier, e, adj. proud, formidable. 

Fier, (se), v. r. 1. to trust, to confide. 

Fille, u. f daughter, girl. 

Fils, n. m. son. 

Flatterie, n. f. flattery. 

Fleau, n. m. scourge. 

Fletrir, v. a, & n. 2. to fade, wither. 

Fleur, n, f. flowed'. 

Fleuve, n. m. river, stream. 

Flotter, V. n. 1. to float, to wave. 

Foi, n. f. faith. 

Fois, n. f. time. 

Folie, n. f. folly. 

Fond, n. m. bottom. 

Fonder, v. a. 1. to found. 

Fontaine, n. f. fountain, spring. 

Force, n. f. strength, force, 

Foret, n. f. forest, wood. 

Former, v. a. 1. to form. 

Fort, e, adj. strong. 

Fortune, n. f. fortune. 

Foudre, n. f. thunderbolt. 

Fou, foUe, adj. & n. m. & f. fool, 
foolish. 

Fouler, v. a. ] . io tread under foot. 

Foyer, n. m. hearth. 

Foyers, n. m. pi. hearth, home, na- 
tive country. 

Franc, n. m. franc. 

Frangais, e, adj. French. 

Franchement, adv. frankly. 

Franchir, v. a. 2. to step over, to pass 
over. 

Frapper, v. a. 1 . to strike. 

Fraternite, n. f. brotherhood, 

Froid, n. m. cold. 

Fromage, n. m. cheese. 

Front, n. m. forehead, brow. 

Fruit, n. m. fruit. 

Fugitif, ve, adj. fugitive. 

Fuite, n. f. flight. 

Fumer, v. n. & .a. 1. to smoke. 

Fusil, n. m. gun. 



a. 

Gagner, v. a. 1. to win, gain. 

Garde, n. f. guard, watch, care. 

Gate, adj. v. spoiled. 

Gelee, n. f. frost. 

Gemir, v. n. 2. to moan, groan. 



General, n, m. & adj. general. 

Generation, n. f. generation. 

Genie, n. m. genius. 

Genou, n. m. knee. 

Gens, n. pi. pecple. 

Gestes, n. m. pi. gestures. 

Glace, n. f. ice, looking-glass. 

Glaneur, n. m. gleaner. 

Globe, n. m. globe. 

Gloire, n. f. glory. 

Glorifier, v. a. 1. to glorify, praise. 

Goutte, n. f. drop. 

Gouverner, v. a. 1. to govern. 

Graces, n. f. pi. graces, thanks. 

Graine, n. f. grain. 

Grand, e, adj. great, large. 

Grandir, v. n. 2. to grow. 

Grimaces, n. f. pi. grimaces, faces. 

Gronder, v. a. & n. 1. to scold, to roar. 

Gros, se, adj. large. 

Grossier, e. adj. coarse. 

Grue, n, f. crane. 

Guere, adv. but little, hit few. 

Guerre, n. f. war. 

Guerrier, n. m. warrior. 

Guide, n. m. guide. 



H. 

Habitant, n. m. inhabitant. 

Habiter, v. a. 1. to inhabit. 

Habituel, le, adj. usual, habitual. 

Hache, n. f. axe. 

Haleine, n. £ breath. 

Hameau, n. m. hamlet. 

Harangueur, n. m. orator. 

Hardiesse, n. f. boldness. 

Hardiment, adv. boldly. 

Harpe, n. f. harp. 

Hasard, n. m. chance. 

Hater, v. a. 1. to hasten. 

Hauteur, n. f height, haughtiness, 

Herbe, n. f. hey^b, grass. 

Heros, n. m. hero. 

Heure, n. f. hour. 

Heritage, n. m. inheritance, property. 

Heureux, se, adj. happy, fortunate. 

Hibou, n. m. owl. 

Hirondelle, n. f. swallow. 

Hiver, n. m. winter. 

Homme, n. m. man. 

Honnete, adj. honest, polite. 

Honneur, n. m. honor. 

Hoate, n. f. shame. 



500 



HO-JA. 



JA-LI. 



Horde, n. f. horde, troop. 
Huissier, n. m. doorkeeper, attendant 
Humain, e, adj. human, humane. 
Humblement, -adv. humbly. 
Hjmne, n. f. hymn. 



I. 

Idole, n. £ idol 

Ignoble, adj. mean, low, debasing. 

II, ils, prn. he, it, they. 

Image, n. f. image, resemblance. 

loaiter, v. a. 1. to imitate. 

Immense, adj. immense, vast. 

Immortel, le, adj. immortal. 

Impenitent, adj. impenitent, unrepent- 
ing. 

Importun, e, adj. importunate, trou- 
blesome. 

Impur, e, adj. impure. 

Incomparable, adj. incomparable, 
matchless. 

Inconnu, e, adj. unknown. 

Inconstant, e, adj. inconstant, change' 
able. 

Indiquer, v. a. 1. to indicate, to point 
out. 

Industrie, n, f. industry. 

Infatigable, adj. indefatigable, untir- 
ing. 

Infernal, e, adj. infernal. 

Inflexible, adj. inflexible, unbending. 

Ingenieux, se, adj. ingenious. 

Ingrat, e, adj. & n. ungrateful. 

Ingratitude, n. f. ingratitude. 

Innocence, n. f. innocence. 

Inscrire, v. a. ir. 4. to inscribe. 

Insecte, n. m. insect. 

Insensibilite, n. f. insensibility. 

Inspirer, v. a. 1. to inspire. 

Instant, n. m. instant, moment. 

Intention, n. f. intention, meaning. 

Interieur, e, adj. & n. interior, inside. 

Interrompre, v. a. ir. 4. to interrupt. 

Intime, adj. intimate, close. 

Intitule, adj. v. entitled, called. 

Intrepide, adj. intrepid. 

Introduire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'intro- 
duisis), to introduce. 

Ivresse, n. f. intoxication, excessive 
joy. 

J. 

Jadis, adv. formerly. 
Jamais, adv. never. 



Jardin, n. m. garden. 
Jaseur, se, n. m. & f. talker, prattler. 
Je, j', prn. I. 

Jeter, v. a. 1. to throw, cast. 
Jeunesse, n. f. youth. 
Joie, n. f. joy. 

Joindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je joignis, 
p. joint), to join, to connect, to add. 
Joli, e, adj. pretty. 
Jouet, n, m. plaything, sport. 
Joug, n. m. yoke, subjection. 
Jour, n. m. day, light. 
Journee, n. f. day, day^s work. 
Joyeux, se, adj. joyful, glad. 
Juge, n. TO., judge. 
Jugement, n. va.. judgment, decision 
Juger, V. a. 1. to judge, to decide. 
Jurer, v. a. & n.l.to swear, to promise, 
Jusque, pre. as far, as far as. 
Juste, adj. & n. just. 
Justice, n. f. justice. 



La, 1', art. the. 

La, r, prn. her, it. 

La, adv. there ; la-bas, yonder. 

Laboureur, n. m. husbandman. 

Lac, n. m. lake. 

Lacher, v. a. 1. to lose hold of, to lei 

go. 
Laid, e, adj. ugly. 
Laine, n. f. wool. 
Laisser, v. a. 1. to leave, to let. 
Lait, n. m. milk. # 

Lambris, n. m. wainscot. 
Lampe, n. f. lamp. 
Lancer, v. a. 1. to dart, to send forth 

with violence, to launch. 
Langue, n. f. tongue, language. 
Laurier, n. m. laurel. 
Le, r, les, art. the. 
Le, r, les, prn. it, them. 
Leger, e, adj. light. 
Lendemain, n. m. next day, morrow. 
Les, art. pi. the; les, prn. them. 
Leur, adj. pi. their. 
Leur, prn. to them. 
Lever, v. a. 1. to raise, (se), y. r. to 

rise, to arise. 
Lever, n. m. rising. 
Liban, Lebanon. 
Liberte, n. f. liberty, freedom. 
Libre, adj. free. 



LI-ME. 



ME— MO. 



501 



Lieu, n. m. place, spot 
Lion, n. m. lion. 
Liqueur, n. f. liquor, liquid. 
Livre, n. m. look. 
Loi, n. f. law. 
Loin, adv. far. 

Lointain, e, adj. remote, distant. 
Long, ue, adj. long. 
Long-temps, adv. long, long time. 
Loup, n. m. wolf. 
Lugubre, adj. mournful, sad. 
Lui, prn. to him, to her 
Lumiere, n. f. light. 
Lunettes, n. f. pi. spectacles. 
Lutte, n. f. struggle, contest. 
Lutter, V. n. 1. to contend with, to 
wrestle. 



M. 



Ma, adj. pos. f. my. 

Machine, n. f. machine. 

Magnanime, adj. magnanimous. 

Magnificence, n. f. magnificence. 

Main, n. f. hand. 

Maintenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je 
maintiens, p. d. je maintins), to 
maintain. 

Mais, conj, but. 

Maison, n. f. house. 

Maitre, n. m. master. 

Mai, n. m. evil, adv. badly. 

Malade, n. & adj. patient, sick. 

Male, adj. manly, dignified. 

Malgre, pre. in spite of. 

Malice, n. f. cunning, malice. 

Malin, inaligne, adj. sarcastic, sly. 

Manant, n. m. peasant, clown. 

Manger, v. a. 1. to eat. 

Manifester, v. a. 1. to manifest, to tes- 
tify, to show. 

Manquer, v. a. & n. 1. to miss, to fail. 

Marcher, v. n. 1, to walk, to march. 

Marge, n. f. margin. 

Marque, n. f, mark. 

Marseillaise, n. f. Marseillaise hymn. 

Matelot, n. m. sailor. 

Matiere, n, f. matter. 

Mauvais, e, adj. bad. 

Maxime, n, f. maxim.,. 

Me. prn. me, to me. 

Melodieux, se, adj. melodious. 

Meme, adj. & adv. same, self, even. 

Menacer, v. a. 1. to threaten. 



Mendiant, n. m. beggar. 
Mener, v. a. 1. to lead, to take 
Mensonge, n. ra. falsehood. 
Mentir, v. n. ir. 2. to lie, to tell a 

falsehood. 
Menu, e, adj. small, short. 
Mepris, n. m. contempt. 
Mepriser, v. a. 1. to despise. 
Mer, n. f. sea. 

Mercenaire, adj. mercenary. 
Mercure, Mercury. 
Mere, n. f. mother. 
Merite, n. m. merit 
Meriter, v. a. 1. to merit, to deserve. 
Mes, adj. pos. pi. my. 
^Mesurer, v. a. 1. to measure. 
Metier, n. m. trade, occupation. 
Mettre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je mats, 

p. d. je mis, p. mis), to put, to 

set. 
Meubler, v. a. 1. to furnish. 
Midi, n. m. south, noon. 
Mignon, ne, adj. delicate, pretty. 
Milieu, n. m. middle. 
Mille, adj. num. thousand. 
Ministre, n. m. minister. 
Mobile, adj. movable, light 
Modeste, adj. modest 
Moeurs, n. f. pi. morals, manners. 
Moi, prn. me. 
Moindre, adj. lesser, less. 
Moins, adv. less, (au) least 
Mois, n. m. month. 
Moissonneur, n. m. harvest-man, 

reaper. 
Moment, n. m. moment. 
Monde, n. m. world, people, (tout le) 

every body. 
Monnaie, n. f. money, change. 
Monstre, n. m, monster. 
Montagnard, n. m. mountaineer. 
Montague, n. f. mountain. 
Monter, v. a. & n. 1. to ascend, to 

mount. 
Montrer, v. a. 1. to show, to point 

out. 
Monument, n. m. monument 
Moquer, (se), v. r. 1. to laugh, at, to 

mock. 
Morceau, n. m. piece, morsel 
Mort, n. f. death, n. m. dead. 
Mosquee, n. f mosque. 
Mot, n. m. word. 
Mouche, n. f.fly. 
Mourir, v. n. ir. 2. to die. 



502 



MO-OB. 



OP-PA. 



Mouton, n. m. sheep. 
Mugir, V. n. 2. to roar. 
Kysterieux, adj. mysterious. 

^• 

Naif; ve, adj. artless, unaffected, 

simple, innocent. 
Naissance, n. f. tirth. 
Naissant, e, adj. v. rising, growing. 
Naitre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je nais, 

p. d. je naquis, p. ne), to he horn. 
Nation, n. f. nation. 
Nature, n. f. nature. 
Navire, n. m. ship, vessel. 
Ne, adv. not. 
Ne, p. horn. 
Ne — pas, adv. not. 
Ne — que, adv. only, hut. 
Neant, n. m. nothingness, nothing. 
Neeessaire, adv. necessary. 
Necessaire, n. m. necessaries of life. 
Ni, conj. nor, neither. 
Nocturne, adj, nocturnal, nightly. 
Noisette, n. f. hazel-nut. 
Nombre, n. m. number. 
Nommer, v. a. l.to name, to call. 
Non, adv. no. 
Nos, adj. our. 

Nourrir, v. a. 2. to feed, to nourish. 
Nous, pm. we, xls. 
Nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, adj. 

new. 
Nouvelle, n. f. news. 



Obeir, v. n. 2. to ohey. 
Obscur, e, adj. dark, obscure. 
Observer, v. a. 1. to observe, to take 

notice of. 
Obtenir, v. a. ir. 2, (ind. p. d. j'ob- 

tiens, p. d. j'obtins), to obtain. 
Odieux, se, adj. odiotcs, hateful. 
Oeil, n. m. (pi. yeux), eyes. 
Oiseau, n. m. bird. 
Ombrage, n. m. shade. 
Ombrager, v. a. 1. to shade, to shelter. 
Ombre, n. f. shade, shadow. 
On, prn. indefinite, one, they, we, 

people ; on dit, it is said {one says). 
Onde, n. f. wave, water. 
Opprime, adj. v. oppressed. 



Opprobre, n. m. opprobrium, shame. 
Opulent, e, adj. rich, wealthy. 
Or, n. m. gold. 
Orage, n. m. storm. 
Ordiuairement, adv. commonly. 
Ordre, n. m. order. 
Oreille, n. f. ear. 
Orgueil, n. m. pride. 
Orplielin, e, n. m. & f orphan. 
Oter.'v. a. 1. to take away, to de- 

prive of. 
Ou, conj. or. 

Ou, adv. where, in which, wherein. 
Oublier, v. a. 1. to forget, to neglect. 
Outrage, n. m. outrage, offence, shame. 
Ouverture, n. f. opening. 
Ouvrage, n. m. work. 
Ouvrier, n. m. workman. 



P. 



Paltre, v. a. & n. 4. to graze. 

Paix, n. f. peace. 

Palais, n. m. palace. 

Palmyre, Palmyra. 

Par, pre. by. 

Paraitre, v. n. ir. 4. (p. paru), to ap- 

pear. 
Parce que, conj. because. 
Parcourir, v. a. ir. 2. to travel over, 

to cross, to look over. 
Pareil, le, adj. equal, similar, such. 
Parer (se), v. r. 1. to adorn one's 

self. 
Paresseux, se, adj. idle, lazy, indO' 

lent. 
Parler, v. n. 1. to speak. 
Parmi, pre. among, amongst. 
Parole, n. f. word. 
Parricide, adj. parricidal. 
Parti, n. m. part, party, resolution. 
Partir, v. n. ir. 2. to set out, to leave, 

to depart. 
Partout, adv. everywhere. 
Parvenu, adj. v. (used as a noun), 

upstart. 
Pas, adv. not, n. m. step, pace. 
Passer, v. n. 1. to pass. 
Passereau, n. m. sparrow. 
Passion, n. f. passion. 
Patre, n. m. herdsman, shepherd. 
Patrie, n. f. country, native country. 
Patte, n. f. paw. 
P4turage, ij. m. pastvxe, pasturage. 



PA-PL. 



P1>-PR. 



503 



Pauvre, adj. poor. 

Pays, n. tn. country. 

Paysau, n. m, peasant^ countryman. 

Peage, n. m. toll. 

Peau, n. f. skin. 

Peindre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je peins, 

p. d. je peigais), to paint, describe. 
Peine, n. f. trouble, pain. 
Peine, (a), adv. hardly, scarcely. 
Penible, adj. lahorioiis, painful. 
Pendant, pre. during. 
Pen d re, v. a. & n. 4. to hang. 
Penetration, n. f. penetration. 
Penetrer, v. a. 1. to penetrate. 
Penser, v. n. 1. to think. 
Pere, n. m. father. 
Perfide, adj. perfidious, treacherous. 
Perdre, v. a. 4. to lose. 
Permettre, v. a. ir. 4. to permit, al- 
low. 
Perroquet, n. m. parrot. 
Perse, Persia. 
Personne, prn. ind. nobody. 
Pervers, adj. perverse. 
Petit, e, adj. small, little. 
Pesant, adj. v. heavy^. 
Peu, adv. Utile. 
Peuple, n. m. people. 
Peupler, v. a. 1. to people. 
Phalange, n. m. phalanx. 
Pliilosophie, n. f. philosophy. 
Phrase, n. f. phrase, sentence. 
Piece, n. f. piece. 
Pied, n. m. foot. 
Piege, n. m. trap, snare. 
Pis, adv. worse, tant pis, so much 

the worse. 
Pitie, D. f. pity. 
Place, n. £ place, spot. 
Placer, v. a. 1. to place. 
Plafond, n. m. ceiling. 
Plage, n. f. shore, beach. 
Plaindre (se), v. r. ir. 4. (ind. p. je me 

plauas, p. d. je me plaignis), to 

complain. 
Plaiae, n. f. plain. 
Plaire, v. n. ir. 4. (p. d. je plus, p. 

plu), to please. 
Plaisant, n. m, wag, joker. 
Planter, v. a. 1. to plant. 
Plein, e, adj. full, open. 
Pleurer, v. a. & n. 1. to weep, to 

m,ourn. 
Plier, V. a. 1. to boWj to bend. 
Pluie, n. t rain. 



Plume, n. f. feather, pen. 

Plupart (la), n. col. the most, most. 

Plus, adv. more. 

Plusieurs, adj. several. 

Pluton, Fluto. 

Point, n. m. point, adv. not. 

Poisson, n. m.fish. 

Pole, n. m. pole. 

Poli, e, adj. polite, polished. 

Politesse, n. f. politeness. 

Porphyre, n. m. porphyry. 

Port, n. m. port. 

Porter, v. a. 1. to carry, to bear. 

Portique, n. m. portico. 

Poser, V. a. 1. to lay, to set, to place. 

Posseder, v. a, 1. to p>ossess. 

Possible, adj. p)Ossible. 

Poteau, n. m. stake, post. 

Pour, pre. for. 

Pousser, v. a. 3. to push, to hasten. 

Pouvoir, V. n, ir. 3. (ind. p. je puis, p. 
d. je pus, p. pu), to be able. 

Prairie, n f. meadow. 

Prealabletnent, adv. previously. 

Precipiter, v. a. 1. to hasten, precipi- 
tate. 

Preferer, v. a. 1. to prefer. 

Preliminaire, n. & adj. preliminary. 

Premier, e, adj. first. 

Prendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je pris. p. 
prls), to take; (s'y) ref. to com- 
mence, to open the matter. 

Preparer, v. a. 1. to prepare. 

Pres de, pre. near, nearly. 

President, n. ra. president. 

Presence, n. f. presence. 

Present, n. m. present. 

Presenter (se), v. r. 1. to preseni 
one'' S-- self 

Presque, adv. almost. 

Presser, v. a. & r. 1. (se), to hasten, to 
press. 

Pret, e, adj. ready, prepared. 

Prier, v. a; & n. 1. to pray, to entreat. 

Priere, n. f. prayer. 

Prince, n. m. prince. 

Printeraps, n. m. spring. 

Prisonnier, n. m. prisoner. 

Prix, n. m. price, prize. 

Produire, v. a. ir. 4. to produce. 

Proferer, v. a. 1. to utter, to speak. 

Profession, n, 1 2'>rofession. 

Projet, n. m. project. 

Prolonger, v. a. 1. to extend, to cm- 
tinu^, to lengthen. 



604 



PE-KE. 



RE— EB. 



Promener, v. a. 1. to carry about. 
Prononcer, v. a. 1. to pronounce. 
Protestation, n, f. protest, protesta- 
tion. 
Province, n. ^province, district. 
Publier, v. a. 1. to publish. 
Puis, adv. then. 
Puiser, v. a. 1. to dip, to find. 
Puisque, conj. since. 
Puissance, n. £ power. 
Puissant, e, adj. powerful. 



Quand, ady. when. 

Quatre, adj. num. /our, 

Qu', que, conj. that, pm. which, 

whom. 
Quel, adj. what, which. 
Quelque, adj. some, adv. however. 
Quelque chose, n. m. something. 
Quelquefois, adv. sometimes. 
Qui, pm. who, ivhich. 
Quoi, pm. which, what. 
Quoi ! int. what ! 
Quoique, conj. although, though. 



E. 



Radoteur, se, n. m. &f. dotard. 

Eaison, n. f. reason, right. 

Ramasser, v. a. 1. to pick up, to col- 
led. 

Rameau, n. m. branch. 

Rappeler, v. a. 1. to recall, to re- 
mind, (se) V. r. to remember, to re- 
collect. 

Rapporter, v. a. 1. to bring back, to 
relate. 

Rapprocher, v- a. 1. to bring near or 
together. 

Rarement, adv. rarely, seldom. 

Rassembler, v. a. 1. to collect, to 
bring together. 

Rassurer (se), v. r. 1. to take cour- 
age, to cheer up, to settle. 

Recevoir, v. a. 3. to receive. 

Rechigne, adj. gruff, awkward, re- 
pulsive. 

Recipiendaire, n. m. candidate, one 
chosen to a post. 

Reconnaitre, v. a. ir. 4 to recognize, 
know again. 



Red ire, v. a. ir. 4 to say again, rfi- 

peat. 
Redoute, adj. v. dreaded, feared. 
Reduire, v. a. ir. 4 (p. d. je redui- 

sis, {to reduce, to compel. 
Reellement, adv. really. 
Reflexion, n. f. reflection. 
Refuge, n. m. refuge, asylum. 
Eefuser, v. a. 1. to refuse. 
Regard, n. m. look. 
Registre, n, m. register, book. 
Regie, n. f. rule, regulation. 
Regner, v. n. 1. to reign, to prevail. 
Regret, n. m. regret. 
Reine, n. f. queen. 
Religion, n. f. religion. 
Relever, v. a. 1. to raise again. 
Relief, n. m. en relief, raised, em- 



Remerciment, n. m. thank. 

Eemettre, v. a. ir. 4 (p. d. je re- 
mis, p. remis), to replace, to give, 
to hand, to deliver. 

Remplir, v. a. 2. tofiU, to fulfill 

Remuer, v. a. 1. to move, to stir. 

Rencontrer, v. a. 1. to meet. 

Rendre, v. a. 4. to render, to return, 
to give back. 

Renfermer, v. a. 1. to inclose, to con- 
tain. 

Renommee, n. f. fame, report. 

Renvoyer, v. a. ir. 1, to send back, 
to send again. 

Repandre, v. a. 4 ^ spread, spiU, 
shed. 

Repas, n. m. repast, meal. 

Repentir, (se), v. r. 2. to repent 

Repeter, r. a. I. to repeat. 

Repliquer, v. a. 1. to reply. 

Replonger, v. a. 1. to plunge, or cast 
again. 

Repondre, v. a. 4. to answer, reply. 

Reponse, n. f. reply. 

Reproduire, v. a. ir. 4. to reproduce. 

Reptile, n. m. reptile. 

Republicain, n. & adj. republican. 

Reserver, v. a. 1. to reserve, to keep. 

Resister, v. n. 1. to resist. 

Resoudre, v. a^ & n. ir. 4. (p. d. je 
resolus, p. resolu), to resolve, to 
decide. 

Ressemblance, n. f. resemblance, 
likeness. 

Reste, n. m. rest, remainder, rem- 
nant 



KH-SA. 



SA-SO. 



605 



Beste, (de), adv. sufficiently, fully, 
besides. 

Rester, v. n. 1. to remain, to dwell. 

Retentir, v. n. 2. to resound. 

Retentissant, adj. v. resounding. 

Retirer (se), v. r. 1. to retire, with- 
draw. 

Retour, n. m. return. 

Retoiirner, v. n. 1. to return, to go 
back. 

Reussir, v. n. 1. to succeed. 

Reveil, n. m. act of aioaking. 

Reveiller (se), v. r. 1. to awake. 

Revenir, v. n. ir. 2. to return, come 
hack. 

Rever, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 

Revers, n. m. reverse, wrong side. 

Revetir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je re- 
vets), to clothe, invest. 

Revoir, v. a. ir. 3. (p. revu), to see 
again. 

Riant, adj. v. laughing, smiling, 
pleasant, cheerful. 

Riche, adj. rich, wealthy. 

Ridicule, n. m. ridicule, adj. ridicu- 
lous. 

Ridiculement, adv. ridiculously. 

Rien, adv. nothing. 

Rite, n. m. rite. 

Rivage, n. m. hank, shore. 

Rive, n. f. hank, shore. 

Rire, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je ris, 
ri), to laugh. 

Roclier, n. m. rock. 

Roi, n. m. king. 

Rose, n. f. rose. 

Roseau, n. m. reed. 

Rosee, n. f. dew. 

Route, n. f. road, way, path. 

Roulement, n. m. rolling. 

Rouler, v. a. & n. 1. to roll. 

Royal, e, adj. royal, kingly. 

Rumeur, n. f. rumor ^ report, noise. 



S. 

Sa, adj. poss. f. his, her, its. 
Sable, n. m. sand. 
Sac, n. m. sack, hag. 
Sacre, e, adj. sacred, holy. 
Sage, adj. wise, good. 
Sagesse, n. f. wisdom. 
Sain, e, adj. healthy, wholesome. 
Saint, e, adj. holy. 



Saison, n. f. season. 

Salle, n. f. hall, parlor, room. 

Salut I int. Hail ! good luck ! 

Sang, n. m. hlood. 

Sanguinaire, adj. bloodthirsty, saw* 

guinary. 
Sanglant, e adj. bleeding, hloody. 
Sans, pre. without. 
Sante, n. f. health. 
Sauvage, adj. wild, savage. 
Savant, adj. & n. m. learned, lea/rned 

man. 
Savoir, v. a. ir. 3. (ind. p. je sais, p. 

d. je sus, p. su), to know. 
Science, n, f. knowledge, science. 
Scier, v. a. 1. to saw. 
Se, prn. him, her, himself, herself. 
Seigneur, n. m. Lord. 
Sein, n. m. bosom. 
Selon, pre. according to. 
Sembler. v. n. & unip. 1. to seem, to 

appear. 
Semence, n. f. seed. 
Semer, v. a. 1. to sow, to scatter. 
Sensement, adv. sensibly. 
Sentiment, n. m. sentiment, thought. 
Sentinelle, n. f. sentinel. 
Sentir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je sens), to 

feel, smell. 
Seraphin, n. m. seraphim. 
Serpolet, u. m. wild thyme. 
Servage, n. m. bondage. 
Servir, v. a. & n. 2. (ind. p. je sers), to 

serve, to be used. 
Servitude, n. f. servitude, slavery. 
Ses, adj. pos. pi. his, her, its. 
Seul, e, adj. alone, only. 
Seuil, n. m. threshold, door-step, silL 
Si, conj. if, adv. so. 
Siecle, n. m. age, time, century. 
Signe, n. m. sign. 
Signer, v. a. 1. to sign. 
Silence, n. m. silence. 
Silencieux, se, adj. silent, not loquo 

cious. 
Sillon, n. m. furrow. 
Simple, adj. simple. 
Singe, n. m. ape, monkey. 
Sinueux, se, adj. sinuous, winding. 
Situation, n. f. situation. 
Soigneux, se, adj. careful. 
Soi-meme, prn. himself, one's self. 
Soin, n. m. care. 
Soir, n. m. evening. 
Soldat, n, m. soldier. 



22 



BOB 



soHStr. 



SU-TO. 



Boleil, n. m. sun. 

Solide, adj. strong, solid. 

Solitude, n. f. solitude. 

Sombre, adj. dark, gloomy, sad. 

Sommeil, n. m. sleep. 

Sommet, n. m. summit, top, pinnacle. 

Son, n. m. sound. 

Son, adj. pos. m. s. his, her, its. 

Songer, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 

Sonner, v. n. 1. to ring. 

Sort, n. m. lot, fate. 

Sorre, n. i kind; de sorte, adv. so 
that. 

Sortir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. je sors), to 
go out. 

Sot, sotte, n. & adj. fool, foolish. 

Sottise, n. f. nonsense. 

Soudain, e, adj. sudden, unexpected, 
adv. suddenly. 

Souffle, n. m. breath, wind. 

Souffrir, v. a. ir. 1. to suffer, to bear. 

Souhaiter, v. a. 1. to wish, to desire. 

Soulier, n. m. shoe. 

Soup^onner, v. a. 1. to suspect. 

Souplesse, n. f. suppleness, docility. 

Sourd, e, adj. deaf. 

Sous, pre. under. 

Soutenir, v. a. ir. 3. (ind. je soutiens), 
to sustain, to support, to bear, to 
maintain. 

Soutien, n. m. support 

Souvenance, n. £ remembrance, re- 
collection. 

Souvenir, n. m. remembrance, re- 
collection. 

Souvenir (se), v. r. ir. 2. (ind. p. jeme 
souviens), to remember, recollect 

Souvent, adv. often. 

Spirale (en), winding. 

Splendeur, n. f. brilliancy, splendor. 

Stance, n. f. stanza. 

Statut, n. m. statute. 

Stratageme, n. m. stratagem, trick. 

Stupide, adj. stupid, silly. 

Succomber, v. n. 1. to fall 

Suivre, v. a. ir. 4 (ind. p. je suis), to 
follow. 

Sujet, adj. & n. subject 

Superbe, adj. proud, superb, magnifi- 
cent 

Sur, e, adj. sure, certain, safe. 

Sur, pre. on, upon. 

Sur-le-champ, adv. immediately. 

Surface, n. £ surface. 

Sumumeraire, adj. supernumerary. 



Surpasser, v. a. 1. to surpass. 
Surprendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je sur- 

pris, p. surpris), to surprise. 
Surpris, e, adj. v. surprised. 
Surtout, adv. above all. 
Surveillance, n. £ watch, care. 
Symbol, n. m. symbol. 
Sycomore, n. m. sycamore. 
Sympathie, n. £ sympathy. 
Syrie, Syria. 



T. 



Tableau, n. m. table, picture. 

Taclier, V. n. 1. to endeavor, to try. 

Tailler, v. a. 1. to cut, to shape. 

Talent, n. m. talent. 

Tandis, adv. while. 

Tanner, v. a. 1. to tan. 

Tant, adv. so much. 

Tant mieux, adv. so much the better, 

Tant pis. adv. so much the worse. 

Tard, adv. late. 

Te. prn. thee. 

Tell, telle, adj. such. 

Tempere, e, adj. temperate. 

Tempete, n. £ tempest 

Temps, n. m. time, weather. 

Tendre, adj. tender, kind. 

Tenir, v. a. ir. 2- (ind. p. je tiens, p. 
d. je tins, p. tenu), to hold. 

Tenter, v. a. 1. to tempt, to attempt^ 
to try. 

Terme, n. m. term, end, expression. 

Terrasser, v. a. 1. to throw down. 

Terre, n. £ land, earth. 

Terreur, n. £ fear, terror. 

Terrible, adj. terrible. 

Tete, n. £ head. 

Thym, n. m. thyme. 

Tige, n. £ stalk, stem. 

Tigre, n. m. tiger. 

Tirer, v. a. 1. to draw^ to extract^ to 
fire, to shoot 

Toi, prn, thee, thou. 

Toison, n, £ fleece. 

Toit, n. m. roof 

Tomber, v. n. 1. to fall. 

Ton, adj. thy. 

Tonnerre, n. m. thunder. 

Tort, n. m. wrong. 
j Toucher, v. a. 1. to touch. 
I Toujours, adv. always. 
1 Tour, n. £ tower. 



TO-VA 



VA-YO 



SOY 



Tour, n. m. irich, turn. 

Tourmenter, v. a. 1. to torment, to 
tease. 

Tourner, v. a. 1. to turn. 

Tout, e, adj. all, every. 

Tout, adv. entirely, quite. 

Tracer, v. a. 1. to trace, to mark. 

Trahir, v. a. 2. to heir ay. 

Trait, n. m. feature, trait, arrow. 

Traitement, n. m. treatment, 

Traitre, n. m. & adj. traitor, treacher- 
ous. 

Trame, n. f. woof, plot. 

Tranquille, adj. quiet, tranquil. 

Tranquillement, adv. quietly, tran- 
quilly. 

Transport, n. m. transport, carriage. 

Travail, n. m. work, labor. 

Travers (a), pre. through, across. 

Trembler, v. n. 1. to tremble, to shud- 
der. 

Tres, adv. very. 

Tresor, n, m. treasure. 

Tribu, n. f. tribe. 

Triomphe, n. m. triumph. 

Triste, adj. sad, sorrowful. 

Trois, adj. num. three. 

Trone, n. m. throne. 

Trop, -adv. too much, too many. 

Trouble, n. m. trouble, vexation, dis- 
turbance. 

Troupeau, n. m. flocJc, herd. 

Trouver, v. a. 1. to find; (se), v. r. to 
happen to be, to be present, to 
appear. 

Tu, prn. thou. 

Tuer, V. a. 1, to Mil, slay. 

Tyrannie, n. f. tyranny. 



U. 

Un, une, adj. num. one, a, an. 
Unir, V. a. 2. to unite. 
Univers, n, m. universe. 
Usage, n. m. custom, use. 
Usurper, v. a.. 1. to usurp. 
Utile, adj. useful. 



Vacant, e, adj. vacant, unoccupied. 
Vache, n. f. cow. 
Yague, n. f. wave, billow. 



Tain, e, adj. vain. 

Yaincre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vaincs, 
p. d. je vainquis, p. vaincu), to 
vanquish, to conquer, to overcome. 

Vaisseau, n. m. vessel, ship. 

Yallon, n. m. valley, vale. 

Valoir, v. n. ir. 3. (ind. je yaus, p. 
d. je valus), to be worth. 

Vanite, n. f. vanity. 

Vanneur, n. m. winnower. 

Yanter (se), v. r. 1. to boast. 

Yaquer, v. unip. & n. 1. to be vacant. 

Yase, n. m. vase, vessel. 

Yaste, adj. vast. 

Yengeur, n. m. avenger. 

Yenir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind, p. je viens, p. 
d. je vins), to come. 

Yent, n. m. wind. 

Yerger, n. m. orchard. 

Yerite, n. f. truth. 

Yermeil, n. m. silver gilded. 

Yers, pre. towards. 

Yert, adj. green. 

Yertu, n. f. virtue. 

Yertueux, se, adj. virtuous. 

Yetement, n. m. garment. 

Yetir, v. a. ir. 2. to clothe. 

Yice, n. m. vice. 

Yictime, n. f. victim. 

Yide, adj. empty, n. m. empty space. 

Yie, n. f. life. 

Yieux, vieil, vieille, adj. old, anti- 
quated. 

Yif, ve, adj. lively, quick. 

Yigilance, n. t vigilance. 

Yil, e, adj. vile, mean, low, 

Yillage, n. m. village. 

Yille, n. f. town, city. 

Yirilement, adv. manfully, coura- 
geously. 

Yisir, n. m. vizier. 

Yisiter, v. a. 1. to visit. 

Yivacite, n. f. vivacity. 

Yivant, e, adj. v. living. 

Yivre,* v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vis, p. 
d. je vecus, p. vecu), to live. 

Yoeu, n. m. voiu, wish. 

Yoici, pre. here is, this is. 

Yoila, pre. there is, that is. 

Yoler, V. n. 1. to fly, v. a. to steal. 

Yoie, n. f. way, path, road. 

Yoir, V. a. ir. 3. (p. d. je vis, p. vu), 
to see, to perceive. 

Yoisin, n. m. neighbor. 

Yoix, n. f. voice. 



SOS 



YO-Tir. 



T— ZB. 



Vorace, adj. greedy^ voracious. 

Vos, adj. pos. pi. your. 

Votre, adj. p. your. 

Vouloir, V. a. & n. ir. 3. (ind. p. je 

veux, p. d. je voulus, p. voulu), 

to wish, to be willing. 
Yous, prn. you. 
Voiite, n, f. vault, arch. 
Voyager, v. n. 1. to travel. 
"Vrai, 8, adj. true. 
Vraiment, adv. truly. 
Vue, n. f. view, sight. 



Y. 

T, adv. there. 

T, prn. to it, to them, at it, at them, 

in it, in them. 
Y avoir, v. unip. 3. il 7 a, there is, 

there are ; il y a un an, a year ago. 
Teux, n. m. p. (plural of ceil), eyes. 



Zenobia, Zenobia. 

Zephyr, a. m. light wind, zephyr. 

Zero, n. m. zero, naught. 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON, PHIKN"ET Si CO., NEW TORK. 

FASQUELLE'S 
FRENCH SERIES. 

By LOUIS FASQUELLE, LL.D., 

Pro/essor 0/ Modern Languages in the University of MiohigaiK 



CHAEACTEEISTIC FEATURES. 

1. The plan of this popular Series embraces a combinatioi 
of the two rival systems ; the Oral^ adopted by Ollendorff, 
Robertson, Manesca, and others, with the old Classical, or 
Grammatical Si/stem. One of its principal features is a con," 
Btant comparison of the construction of the French and English 
Languages. 

2. Another important feature consists in the facility with 
which the instructor or student can elect in the course of studj 
the practice and theory comMned^ or as much or as little of 
either as he deems proper. 

3. The " Course" commences with a complete though short 
treatise on pronunciation, presenting the power of each letter 
as initial, medial, or final, and also its sound when final and 
carried to the next word, in reading or speaking. 

4. The changes in the words are presented in the most simple 
manner, and copiously exemplified by conversational phrases. 

^ 5. The rules of composition, grammatical and idiomatical, 
are introduced gradually, so as not to ofler too. many difiicultie8 
at one time. 

6. The verbs are grouped by tenses, and comparisons insti- 
tuted, showing their resemblance or difference of termination 
in the different conjugations. 

Y. The second, or theoretical part, offers, in a condenseo 
form, a solution of the principal difficulties of the language. 

8. The Rules are deduced from the best authorities, and ill as* 
traded by short extracts from the best French writers. 

9. A treatise on gender is given, containing rules for determin- 
ing gender by the meaning of words, and also by the termination, 

10. The Irregular, Defective, and Peculiar verbs are pre- 
sented in an Alphabetical Table^ producing a Complete Dio 
iiionary of these vbrbs. 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON, PHINNET &' CO., NEW TOBK. 
FASQUELLE'S FRENCH SERIES. 



L FASQUELLE'S FEENCH COURSE : 

OE, NEW METHOD OF LEAENINQ THE FBEXCH LAKeUAGE. 

Revised and enlarged. 

Embracing botli the Analytic and Synthetic modes of In- 
struction. By Louis Fasquelle, LL.D,, Professor of Modern 
Languages in the University of Michigan. 

This work is on the plan of " Woodbury's Method with Ge^ 
man." It pursues the same- gradual course, and couiprehendfi 
the same wide scope of instruction. It is the leading book in 
the best literary institutions in the United States, and has als< 
been reprinted in England, where it has an extended sale. 



n. A KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN FASQUELLE'S 

FRENCH COURSE. 



m. FASQUELLE'S COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 

260 Pages. Duodecimo. 

Containing Interesting Narratives from the best French 
writers, for translation into English, accompanied by Conver- 
Bational Exercises. With Grammatical References to Fasquelle's 
New French Method ; explanation of the most difficult passages, 
and a copious Vocabulary. 



IV. FASQUELLE'S T^L^MAQUE. 

Les Aventures de Telemaque. Par M. Fenelon. A New 
Edition, with notes. The Text carefully prepared from the 
most approved French Editions. 

Tlie splendid production of Fenelon is here presented in a beautiful mechaalca. 
4re8S, with copious references to Fasquelle's Grammar, full notes explanatory of diil< 
wlties in tlie text, and a full vocabulary. 



V. NAPOLEON. BY ALEXANDER DUMAS. 

Arranged for the use of Colleges and Schools ; with Conver' 
Bational Exercises on the plan of Fasquelle's Colloquial French 
Reader, Explanatory Notes, and Idiomatical and Grammatical 
References to the " New French Method." Bj Louis Fasqublle, 

HuDr 

2 



PUBLISHED BY IVISOIT, PHINNEY & CO., NEW YORK. 



FASQUELLE'S FRENCH SERIES. 



VI. FASQUELLE'S CHEFS D'CEUYRE DE RACINE. 

882 Pages, 12-mo. 

For Colleges and Schools. With Explanatory Notes and 
Grammatical References to the " New French Method." 

This Edition contains five of Racine's best plays : Les Plai- 
BURS, Andromaque, Iphigexie, Esther, and Athalie. Th6 
Kotes will be found, in all the plays, sufficiently full, without 
being diffuse ; in Les Plaideurs,. the only comedy written by 
Racine, the explanations, however, are much fuller than the 
others. 



Vn. FASQUELLE'S INTRODUCTORY FRENCH COURSE. 

ISmo. 

A new work, on the plan of the larger " Course," adapted 
to Beginners. 

VHL FASQUELLE'S MANUAL OF FRENCH CONVER- 
SATION. 



A Complete Manual of Conversation, Idioms, etc., with refer* 
ences to Fasguelle's Course. 



Testimonials of Teachers and Professors. 

Fasquelle's French Series has been recommended by Stats 
Superintendents and Boards of Education, by hundreds of 
distinguished Professors and Teachers, whose testimonial* 
ould fill a volume. The following are specimens : 

Joseph Wm. Jenks, Professor of Languages in the Universi^ 

•f Urbana, O., says: — "I have taught many classes in the French language, and a 
»ot hesitate to say, that 'Fasquelle's French Course' is superior to any other Freno 
Grammar I havo rnet with, for teaching French to those whose mother-tongue 
English. It combines, in an admirable rnanner, the excellences of the old, or classic 
imd the new, or OUendorffian methods, avoiding the faults of both." 

Messrs. Guillaume H. Talbot, T. A. Pelletier, E. H. Yian, 

H. Best, and N. B. De MoNTRARcnT, well known to the community as among th« 
most eminent teachers in BOSTON, unite Ln a testimonial in which they "heartily 
and unanimously testify, that the work is held in high esteem and approbation among 
as, and that we consider it the very best heretofore published on the subject of whioS 
It trcsts. For the true interest of all engaged in the study of the spoken Frenoh, w* 
would advise its universal adoption." 



FITBLISHED BY IVISON, PHINNEY & CO., ITEW YORK. 
FASQUELLE'S FBEXCH SERIES. 



Messieurs M asset and Yilleplait, Professors of tlie French 

Language in New York, write ; — " We consider ' Fascfaelle's French Course' a valu- 
able and Eppropriate addition to the different grammars of the French Language. 
The arrangement adopted is systematic, and so simplified as greatly to facilitate tii« 
progress of the student." 

Prof. Alphonse Brunner, of Cincinnati, says : — " Having 

been a teacher of my vernacular tongue — the French — for ten years, in my opinion, it 
Is the best book yet prepared. I recommend it as superior to the old theoretic*! 
grammars." 

/ Prof. J. B. ToRRicELLi, of Dartmouth College, writes : — " I 

tele pleasure in recommending to the teacher as well as to the private student, 
•Fasquelle's New Method,' as the best yet published. Its adoption in our Colleg>i 
•nd Seminaries has given entire satisfaction. Mr. Fasquelle deserves the thanks of 
all lovers of the French language." 

Rev. Charles Collins, D.D., President of Dickinson College, 

Pa. : — "We have introduced Fasquelle's French Series with very decided approbation." 

Prof. Everett, of Bowdoin College, Me.: — "Fasquelle^s 

French Course is decidedly the best grammar ever published." 

Edward North, A.M., Professor of Languages, Hamilton 

College, N. Y. : — " Fasquelle's French Course I continue to use, and to like. It is 
worthy of its immense popularity." 

Rev. George B. Jewett, late Professor of Modern Lan- 
guages, Amherst College : — " I have examined Fasquelle's French Series with mneh 
pleasure and satisfaction. They form an admirable series." 

Prof. Charles Gobelle, Professor of Modern Languages, 

Newbury Female Collegiate Institute, Vt. : — " I have been using Fasqnelle's French 
Course during the past two years in one of the best schools in New England. It la 
the very ieaf'oook I know of for instruction in the French language." 

Prof. T. Peyre-Ferry, Teacher of French in the New Jersey 

Normal School, Trenton : — " Fasquelle's Course is the best work ever published of the 
kind. It enables the pupil to acquire a practical knowledge of the French language.'' 

Rev. G. W. Quereau, A.M., Principal of Conference Semi- 
nary, Greenwich, R. I. : — " Fasqnelle's Course is our standard text-book in French. 
We use it because we think it best. I speak with some confidence, and am satisfied 
that it is decidedly superior to any other book of the kind." 

James B. Angell, A.M., Professor of Modern Languages in 

Brown University, writes : — " I gladly testifv to the excellence of Fasquelle's French 
i/ourse, which I have used in my classes for three years." 

P. N. Legendre, Professor of French, New Haven, Ct., 

§ays: — "Never has a work come under my notice, that blends so happily and har- 
moniously the great rival elements of the language. My pupils study it with pleasure." 

E. J. P. WoHRANGE, Professor of Modern Languages in the 

N. Y. Central College, writes : — " ' Fasquelle's Course' is at the same time original 
tnd complete in itself, superseding all systems now in use." 

The iV^. Y. Daily Times says : — " Prof. F. is somewhat of 

%D. enthusiast as to his method of teaching, and being blessed with as much sense as 
experience, makes a better arranged text-book, and grades the difliculties more hap 
pUy than any other modern teacher." 

The Philadelphia Daily News speaks of the "Napoleon," as 

*• a very concise and interesting French history which, edited &t it is by Prof. Fas- 
quelle, can not fail to prove a very popular school-book. The narrative is in Dumas 
most brilliant and attractive style." 

The N. Y. Independent says of the " Napoleon" : — " It com- 
bines the advantages of a stirring biography to Invite the student, a good Frenek 
«tyle and (irrammatical a£d critical ez«rciees and annotations." 



PUBLISHED BT IVISON, PHINNET & CO., NEW YORK. 

WOODBURY'S ''■ 

GERMAN SERIES. 

By W. H. WOODBURY, A.M. / 



L Nbw Mkthod with German, . . 

II. Key to thr New Method,. ... 

ill. SnoKTEB Course, 

IV. Key to Shorter Course, 

V. Elementary Gbbman Keadeb, 



VI. EoLECTic German Keadeb,.. 

VII. German English Eeader,.. . 

VIII. New Method for GekmanSj.. 

IX. Glaubensklee's Grammar,.. 

X. Glaubensk lee's Reader, .... 



This system is founded on similar principles with Fasqnelle i 
French Series, and is highly popular. Our Catalogue and 
Circulars present cordial testimonials from a large number of 
eminent educators and scholars, among whom are : 

Prof. Schmidt of Columbia College, who says : — " The 

•Method' is truly admirable, and with willing learners, can not fail to accomplish the 
most satisfactory results." 

Prof. Arthur L. Perry, Professor of Modern Languages, 

Williams College, Mass., writes, Sept. 19, 1857 : — "I have introduced ' Woodbi;ry'a 
New Method,' in my German classes with the best results. It is very nearly a per- 
fect book for beginners. I am also entirely satisfied with his entire ' Series.' " 

W. H. Allen, LL.D., President of Girard College, pro- 

nonnces it " all that is necessary to make the acquisition of German easy and delight- 
ful to the student. Its style is perspicuous, its arrangement natural, and its method, 
combining, as it does, the practical with the theoretic, is well adapted to all classes 
of learners." 

Rev. George B. Miller, D.D., Professor of Theology in the 

Hartwick, N. Y., Lnthd'ran Seminary, an accomplished and experienced Germaa 
teacher, writes, June 18, 1857: — " Having used 'Woodbury's New Method' for several 
years, I consider it to be far in advance of the old Ollendorf Method, and so far as I 
know, the best system of teaching German that is extant." 

Prof. ToRRiCELLi, of Dartmouth College : — " Having for 

the past two years used it in the College, and in the Female Seminary in this place, 
I find that nothing better can be desired. No German teacher will hesitate to adopt 
It in preference to any others." 

Prof. Peissner, Professor of German in Union College, 

writes: — "With great delight I see the publication of a German Grammar somewha 
different from the systems hitherto followed. I admire in Mr. "Woodbury's work tha 
logical arrangement, and the use of j9rat!^icaZ phrases and exercises. It is, in short, 
just the work which wo have been in need of, and I do not hesitate to recommend It 
to every one who studies with me, or asks my advice. Professor Foster, a Germaa 
•cholar of great perfection, confirms my opinion." 

Rev. Dr. Nast, Editor of ChristUche Apolor/efe ; Hon. R. 

Allyn, Commissioner of Rhode Island ; President Allen, Girard" College; and niHny 
other well-known German teachers, with many notices from the press, among whicn 
we cite the following : 

The Bibliolhcca Sacra, edited by Rev. Professors Park 

and Taylor, Andover, Mass., says : — " We can confidently commend this Grammar 
as one of the best we have seen on any modern language. It bears the mark of intel- 
ligent and conscientious labor on every page. We observe that it is highly spoken ol 
by educated Germans among us." 

Recommendations from the followino: are excluded for want 

of space: Pres. HosHouR, N. W. C. College ; Prof. B^kaiann, Troy Female Semi-, 
nary ; Prof. Pioard, Illinois College ; Prof. Fasqubllb, University Michigan ; Prdl 
Jabman, Union University, Tenn., and others. 

& 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON, PHINNEY & CO., NEW YORK. 

* « 

GBAY'S 
BOTANICAL SERIES. 

The most full, scholarly, and attractive apparatus for the study of Botany to be 
fouiid in the language. The hooks have receatlj' been warmly endorsed by Profg, 
Agassiz, Silliman. Toekev. Hitchcock, Hexuy, and nearly every scientist of emi- 
nence iu this country, and by Drs. Lixdlet, Mocker, and other distinguished Botau- 
fflts in Europe. They are used in hundreds of Colleges, Acadeniies, and Ijistitutes in 
this country, and in the Uxiveksity of Cambridge, England; University of E»w 
BtiEG, Scotland ; Trinity College, Dublin, i;c. 

GRAY'S " HOW PLANTS GROW." For Young People. 500 cuts i 

GRAY'S LESSONS IN BOTANY. 362 drawinss 

GRAY'S MAN U"AL OF BOTANY. (School Edition.) 

GRAY'S MANUAL AND LESSONS, in 1 vol 

GBAY'S MANUAL WITH MOSSES. ETC. Illustrated 

©EAY'S STRUCTURAL AND SYSTEMATIC BOTANY. {Revised and 
improved Sdition of " Botanical Text-Boole" ) 



WELLS' 
SCIENTIFIC SERIES, 

By DAVID A. WELLS, A.M., Editor of "Annual of Scientific Discovery,' 

"Knowledge is Power," &c. Embodying the latest researches in physical scienci, 
and excelling in their lucid style, numerous facts, copious illustrations (over 700), 
and practical applications of science to the arts of every-day life, and endorsed by 
hundreds of eminent and successful practical Educators in all parts of the country 
and the Press. 

Mr. Wells' scientific qualifications have been approved by the most eminent 
Bcholars in the country — among them Profs. Baoue, Agassiz, Heney, Hobsfobd 
Wyman, Lieutenant Mauey, and others. 

WELLS' SCIENCE OF COMMON THING-S. With cuts 

WELLS' NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. -372 cuts. Revised. (25,000 sold) ... . 

WELLS' PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY. 242 cuts 

WELLS' FIRST PRINCIPLES OF GEOLOGY. 250 cuts 



COLTON AND FITCH'S 

GEOGRAPHIES. 

This series is the most full, practical, accurate, and satisfactory, ever published. 
They are all beautifully illustrated, and the maps drawn on a uniform system of scales, 
so as to present the relative sizes of the difterent countries at a glance." They are the 
leading geographical series in the country, and have been officially recommended by 
several State Superintendents, Boards of Education, &c. 

THE PRIMER OF GEOGRAPHY 

INTRODUCTORY GEOGRAPHY. 24 Maps 

MODERN SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY. 4S Maps 

AMERICAN SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY AND ATLAS 

PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 



V/ILLSON'S 
SCHOOL HISTORIES. 

Discriminating and cordial testimonials have been siven by several State Suj>er« 
Intendents, bv upwards of seventy Presidents and Professors of Coll.-^g -s in different 
parts of the United States, by over five hundred Principals of Academies, Insti- 
tutes, (fcc. 

WILLSON'S PRIMARY AMERICAN HISTORY 

WILLSON'S HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES, (ifew, enlarged, and 

ilhintrated edition) 

WILLSON'S AMERICAN HISTORY. {Sckool Edition) 

WILLSON'S AMERICAN HISTORY. {Lihrary Edition) 

W ILLS 3N'S OUTLINES OF HISTORY. {School Edition-) 

W ILLSON'S OUTLINES OF HISTORY. ( University Edition) 

WILLSON'S CHART OF AMERICAN HISTORY. (Rollers) •- 

6 



ROBINSOrS SERIES Of^MATHEMATlCS. 

Kie most Complete, most Practical, and most Scientific Series of Mathematicsu 

Text-Books ever issued in this Country, the whole consisting of 

TWENTY-TWO VOLUMES. 



Progressive Table Book, tms m a beautifully illu* 

TKATED little book, on the plan of Object Teaching. 

Progressive Primary Arithmetic, mustrated. Designed 

as an introduction to the *' Intellectual Arithmetic." 

Progressive Intellectual Arithmetic^ oxx the lnduc. 

TiVB PLAN, and one of the most complete, comprehensive^ and disciplin- 
ary works of the kind ever given to the public. 

Eudiments of Written Arithmetic, for ^^^^e.^ school 

and the Public Schools of large cities. 

Progressive Practical Arithmetic ; a complete work 

for Common Schools and Academies. 

Progressive Higher Arithmetic: designed for mgh 

Schools, Academies, and Commercial Colleges. 

New Elementary Algebra l a dear and practical treatise 
adapted to the comprehension of beginners in the Science. 

New University Algebra combining the best practical 

with the HIGHEST THEORETICAL character, and designed for the high- 
est grade of classes in Colleges and High Schools. 

New Geometry and Trigonometry : embracing piane 

and Solid Geometry, and Plane and Spherical Trigonometry, 

New Surveying and Navigation. By an eminent Math- 

ematician, who has had much experience in Land and Road Surveying 
Will be ready Aug. 20. 

Conic Sections and Analytical Geometry: recently 

prepared for High Schools and Colleges. 

University Astronomy: a m and complete treatise fof 

Academies and Colleges. 
Keys to the Aritlimetics, Algebras, and G-eometries, are published for 

•^ tho use of Teachers. ' ft ' » 

Teachers are Invited to send for our " Educational" and " Mathematical Cii-culars," 
which contain full notices, descriptions, testimonials, prices, etc., of all our publi- 
cations, and which we will send to those who will give us their address. 

Liberal terms given on tooks furnished for first introduction, or in exchange for 
9th&r'8 not in satisfactory use. 

IVISON, PHirU^EY & CO., 

48 & 50 Walker St. N.7 



'PUBLISHED BY IVISON, PHINNET b CO., NEW YORK. 

HITCHCOCK'S • 

ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 

FOR COLLEGES, ACADEMIES, AND SCHOOLS. 

By Edward Hitchcock, DJ)., LL.D., President of 

Amherst College, author of " Geology," &c., and 

E. Hitchcock, Jr., M.D. 

nimtrated ly nearly 400 engrwvings. 441 pages. Retail price $1 00. 

The authors give the leading principles and facts in such 
works as Carpenter's Human Physiology, his Comparative 
Physiology and Anatomy, Hassall's Microscopic Anatomy, 
Griffith and Henfrey's Micrographic Dictionary, Peaslee's His- 
tology, Todd and Bowman's Physiological Anatomy, Wilson's 
Anatomy, Draper's, Dunglison's, and Dalton's Physiologies, 
the works of Cuvier, Owen, and Wagner, on Comparative Anat- 
omy, also those of Agassiz, Van Der Hoeven, Siebold, &c. 

Of several important new features of this book, one is Micro- 
scopic Anato?ny, and an unusually full treatment of Comparative 
Anatomy and Physiology, Hygiene., Gymnastics, (fee, (fee. 

Among the commendations from eminent Educators, we 
have only room for the following : 

From Pres. Collins, D.D.^ Dickinson College, Penn., March, 

I860 : — " I have carefully examined ' Hitchcock's Anatomy ami Physiology,' and am 
fr^e to say that it pleases me better as a text-book on those sciences than any work 
now before the public. In the departments of Microscopic and Comparative Ana 
tomy, and the religious applications of these sciences, it is specially worthy of th» 
attention of all teachers who would keep up with the times." 

From the Illinois Teacher, the State Educational Journal^ 

February, 1860 : — ■' Speaking with the advantage of a professional knowledge of the 
subject, "we say that we recommend the book very strongly. This branch of study 
is important, more important than a large share of what is actually studied in our 
Grammar and High Schools ; the book is excellent, and its price is low." 

From the Springfield Republican: — "The m-ost fnll and 

accurate elementary work on these subjects that has come to our knowledge. It can 
hardly fail to be widely appreciated, and to become the general text-book in our 
Colleges and Schools." 

From Prof. W. D. Wilsox, D.D. of Hobart Free College, 

OeTieva, N. T. : — " I consider it much superior to anything that has before appeared 
Bs a text-book for Schools and Colleges, and as a manual for gen-eral reference, except 
perhaps, for the professional man," &c. 

From the iV. Y. Evening Post: — "There has been no 

work so well adapted as this to the wants of advanced students who need more than 
ts found in the ordinary text-books, &c. * * * To all readers, it is a valuable— 
we might say, indispensable work of reference." 

The Publishers have also strong testimonials from many able 

practical Teachers, and the following Journals : The K Y. Observer, Evangelist^ 
Con7iecticut School Jou)-7ial, ^. W. "Christian Advocate, Chicago Christian Tt7ni% 
and many others. The book is already the text-book of the State Korvfuil SchfXA 
West/ield, Mass., and in many other first class institutions. 

g^" Catalogues aiid Circulars of all Ivison, Phinney & Co.'s Boo&e s&Kt ftS^ 
end prepadd. Liberal terms for specimen copiea and first supplied Jor OtOaB^M 

JUN 31934 






LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 116 767 A 






■:■ y-'X^ 



, V • 



' 'A 



<•: . V 






tf^V'tl 



